update tcl/tk

177 files changed, 0 insertions, 33725 deletions

diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/3DBorder.3 b/tk8.6/doc/3DBorder.3
deleted file mode 100644
index f2f0eb8..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/3DBorder.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,294 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Get3DBorder, Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Draw3DRectangle, Tk_Fill3DRectangle, Tk_Draw3DPolygon, Tk_Fill3DPolygon, Tk_3DVerticalBevel, Tk_3DHorizontalBevel, Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, Tk_NameOf3DBorder, Tk_3DBorderColor, Tk_3DBorderGC, Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Free3DBorder \- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_3DBorder
-\fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_3DBorder
-\fBTk_Get3DBorder(\fIinterp, tkwin, colorName\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_3DBorder
-\fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_Draw3DRectangle(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_Fill3DRectangle(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_Draw3DPolygon(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_Fill3DPolygon(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftBevel, relief\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(\fItkwin, border\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOf3DBorder(\fIborder\fB)\fR
-.sp
-XColor *
-\fBTk_3DBorderColor(\fIborder\fB)\fR
-.sp
-GC *
-\fBTk_3DBorderGC(\fItkwin, border, which\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_Free3DBorder(\fIborder\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tk_3DBorder" borderWidth
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window (for all procedures except \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR,
-must be the window for which the border was allocated).
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
-Pointer to value whose value describes color corresponding to
-background (flat areas).  Illuminated edges will be brighter than
-this and shadowed edges will be darker than this.
-.AP char *colorName in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except value is supplied as a string rather
-than a value.
-.AP Drawable drawable in
-X token for window or pixmap;  indicates where graphics are to be drawn.
-Must either be the X window for \fItkwin\fR or a pixmap with the
-same screen and depth as \fItkwin\fR.
-.AP Tk_3DBorder border in
-Token for border previously allocated in call to \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.
-.AP int x in
-X-coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle describing border
-or bevel, in pixels.
-.AP int y in
-Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle describing border or
-bevel, in pixels.
-.AP int width in
-Width of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels.
-.AP int height in
-Height of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels.
-.AP int borderWidth in
-Width of border in pixels. Positive means border is inside rectangle
-given by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, negative means
-border is outside rectangle.
-.AP int relief in
-Indicates 3-D position of interior of value relative to exterior;
-should be \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR,
-\fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR (may also be \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR
-for \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR).
-.AP XPoint *pointPtr in
-Pointer to array of points describing the set of vertices in a polygon.
-The polygon need not be closed (it will be closed automatically if it
-is not).
-.AP int numPoints in
-Number of points at \fI*pointPtr\fR.
-.AP int polyBorderWidth in
-Width of border in pixels.  If positive, border is drawn to left of
-trajectory given by \fIpointPtr\fR;  if negative, border is drawn to
-right of trajectory.  If \fIleftRelief\fR is \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR or
-\fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR then the border is centered on the trajectory.
-.AP int leftRelief in
-Height of left side of polygon's path relative to right.  \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR
-means left side should appear higher and \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means right side
-should appear higher;
-\fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR and \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR mean the obvious things.
-For \fBTk_Fill3DPolygon\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR may also be specified to
-indicate no difference in height.
-.AP int leftBevel in
-Non-zero means this bevel forms the left side of the value;  zero means
-it forms the right side.
-.AP int leftIn in
-Non-zero means that the left edge of the horizontal bevel angles in,
-so that the bottom of the edge is farther to the right than
-the top.
-Zero means the edge angles out, so that the bottom is farther to the
-left than the top.
-.AP int rightIn in
-Non-zero means that the right edge of the horizontal bevel angles in,
-so that the bottom of the edge is farther to the left than the top.
-Zero means the edge angles out, so that the bottom is farther to the
-right than the top.
-.AP int topBevel in
-Non-zero means this bevel forms the top side of the value;  zero means
-it forms the bottom side.
-.AP int which in
-Specifies which of the border's graphics contexts is desired.
-Must be \fBTK_3D_FLAT_GC\fR, \fBTK_3D_LIGHT_GC\fR, or \fBTK_3D_DARK_GC\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures provide facilities for drawing window borders in a
-way that produces a three-dimensional appearance.
-\fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR
-allocates colors and Pixmaps needed to draw a border in the window
-given by the \fItkwin\fR argument.  The value of \fIobjPtr\fR
-is a standard Tk color name that determines the border colors.
-The color indicated by \fIobjPtr\fR will not actually be used in
-the border;  it indicates the background color for the window
-(i.e. a color for flat surfaces).
-The illuminated portions of the border will appear brighter than indicated
-by \fIobjPtr\fR, and the shadowed portions of the border will appear
-darker than \fIobjPtr\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR returns a token that may be used in later calls
-to \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR.  If an error occurs in allocating information
-for the border (e.g. a bogus color name was given)
-then NULL is returned and an error message is left as the result of
-interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
-If it returns successfully, \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR caches
-information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
-future calls to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
-and \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR is identical to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR except
-that the color is specified with a string instead of a value.  This
-prevents \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR from caching the return value, so
-\fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing border, given
-the window and color name used to create the border.
-\fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR does not actually create the border; it must
-already have been created with a previous call to
-\fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.  The return
-value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
-future calls to \fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
-and \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-Once a border structure has been created, \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR may be
-invoked to draw the border.
-The \fItkwin\fR argument specifies the
-window for which the border was allocated, and \fIdrawable\fR
-specifies a window or pixmap in which the border is to be drawn.
-\fIDrawable\fR need not refer to the same window as \fItkwin\fR, but it
-must refer to a compatible
-pixmap or window:  one associated with the same screen and with the
-same depth as \fItkwin\fR.
-The \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and
-\fIheight\fR arguments define the bounding box of the border region
-within \fIdrawable\fR (usually \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are zero and
-\fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the dimensions of the window), and
-\fIborderWidth\fR specifies the number of pixels actually
-occupied by the border.  The \fIrelief\fR argument indicates
-which of several three-dimensional effects is desired:
-\fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR means that the interior of the rectangle should
-appear raised relative to the exterior of the rectangle, and
-\fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means that the interior should appear depressed.
-\fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR and \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR mean that there should appear to be
-a groove or ridge around the exterior of the rectangle.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR is somewhat like \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR except
-that it first fills the rectangular area with the background color
-(one corresponding
-to the color used to create \fIborder\fR).  Then it calls
-\fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR to draw a border just inside the outer edge of
-the rectangular area.  The argument \fIrelief\fR indicates the desired
-effect (\fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR means no border should be drawn; all that
-happens is to fill the rectangle with the background color).
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR may be used to draw more complex
-shapes with a three-dimensional appearance.  The \fIpointPtr\fR and
-\fInumPoints\fR arguments define a trajectory, \fIpolyBorderWidth\fR
-indicates how wide the border should be (and on which side of the
-trajectory to draw it), and \fIleftRelief\fR indicates which side
-of the trajectory should appear raised.  \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR
-draws a border around the given trajectory using the colors from
-\fIborder\fR to produce a three-dimensional appearance.  If the trajectory is
-non-self-intersecting, the appearance will be a raised or sunken
-polygon shape.  The trajectory may be self-intersecting, although
-it's not clear how useful this is.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Fill3DPolygon\fR is to \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR what
-\fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR is to \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR:  it fills
-the polygonal area with the background color from \fIborder\fR,
-then calls \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR to draw a border around the
-area (unless \fIleftRelief\fR is \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR; in this case no
-border is drawn).
-.PP
-The procedures \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR and \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR
-provide lower-level drawing primitives that are used by
-procedures such as \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR.
-These procedures are also useful in their own right for drawing
-rectilinear border shapes.
-\fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR draws a vertical beveled edge, such as the
-left or right side of a rectangle, and \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR
-draws a horizontal beveled edge, such as the top or bottom of a
-rectangle.
-Each procedure takes \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR
-arguments that describe the rectangular area of the beveled edge
-(e.g., \fIwidth\fR is the border width for \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR).
-The \fIleftBorder\fR and \fItopBorder\fR arguments indicate the
-position of the border relative to the
-.QW inside
-of the value, and
-\fIrelief\fR indicates the relief of the inside of the value relative
-to the outside.
-\fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR just draws a rectangular region.
-\fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR draws a trapezoidal region to generate
-mitered corners;  it should be called after \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR
-(otherwise \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR will overwrite the mitering in
-the corner).
-The \fIleftIn\fR and \fIrightIn\fR arguments to \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR
-describe the mitering at the corners;  a value of 1 means that the bottom
-edge of the trapezoid will be shorter than the top, 0 means it will
-be longer.
-For example, to draw a rectangular border the top bevel should be
-drawn with 1 for both \fIleftIn\fR and \fIrightIn\fR, and the
-bottom bevel should be drawn with 0 for both arguments.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_SetBackgroundFromBorder\fR will modify the background
-pixel and/or pixmap of \fItkwin\fR to produce a result compatible
-with \fIborder\fR.  For color displays, the resulting background will
-just be the color specified when \fIborder\fR was created;  for monochrome
-displays, the resulting background
-will be a light stipple pattern, in order to distinguish the background from
-the illuminated portion of the border.
-.PP
-Given a token for a border, the procedure \fBTk_NameOf3DBorder\fR
-will return the color name that was used to create the border.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_3DBorderColor\fR returns the XColor structure
-that will be used for flat surfaces drawn for its \fIborder\fR
-argument by procedures like \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR.
-The return value corresponds to the color name that was used to
-create the border.
-The XColor, and its associated pixel value, will remain allocated
-as long as \fIborder\fR exists.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_3DBorderGC\fR returns one of the X graphics contexts
-that are used to draw the border.
-The argument \fIwhich\fR selects which one of the three possible GC's:
-\fBTK_3D_FLAT_GC\fR returns the context used for flat surfaces,
-\fBTK_3D_LIGHT_GC\fR returns the context for light shadows,
-and \fBTK_3D_DARK_GC\fR returns the context for dark shadows.
-.PP
-When a border is no longer needed, \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR
-or \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR should
-be called to release the resources associated with it.
-For \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR the border to release is specified
-with the window and color name used to create the
-border; for \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR the border to release is specified
-with the Tk_3DBorder token for the border.
-There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR for each call to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR
-or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-3D, background, border, color, depressed, illumination, value, polygon, raised, shadow, three-dimensional effect
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/AddOption.3 b/tk8.6/doc/AddOption.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 2368f09..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/AddOption.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_AddOption 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_AddOption \- Add an option to the option database
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_AddOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, value, priority\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Multi-element name of option.
-.AP "const char" *value in
-Value of option.
-.AP int priority in
-Overall priority level to use for option.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure is invoked to add an option to the database
-associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window.  \fIName\fR
-contains the option being specified and consists of names and/or
-classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format.
-\fIValue\fR contains the text string to associate with \fIname\fR;
-this value will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR.
-\fIPriority\fR specifies the priority of the value; when options are
-queried using \fBTk_GetOption\fR, the value with the highest priority
-is returned.  \fIPriority\fR must be between 0 and \fBTK_MAX_PRIO\fR.  Some
-common priority values are:
-.IP 20
-Used for default values hard-coded into widgets.
-.IP 40
-Used for options specified in application-specific startup files.
-.IP 60
-Used for options specified in user-specific defaults files, such as
-\fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into the X server, or
-user-specific startup files.
-.IP 80
-Used for options specified interactively after the application starts
-running.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-class, name, option, add
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/BindTable.3 b/tk8.6/doc/BindTable.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 5130bfc..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/BindTable.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CreateBindingTable 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateBindingTable, Tk_DeleteBindingTable, Tk_CreateBinding, Tk_DeleteBinding, Tk_GetBinding, Tk_GetAllBindings, Tk_DeleteAllBindings, Tk_BindEvent \- invoke scripts in response to X events
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_BindingTable
-\fBTk_CreateBindingTable(\fIinterp\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteBindingTable(\fIbindingTable\fB)\fR
-.sp
-unsigned long
-\fBTk_CreateBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString, script, append\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_DeleteBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_GetBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_GetAllBindings(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteAllBindings(\fIbindingTable, object\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_BindEvent(\fIbindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_BindingTable bindingTable
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use when invoking bindings in binding table.  Also
-used for returning results and errors from binding procedures.
-.AP Tk_BindingTable bindingTable in
-Token for binding table;  must have been returned by some previous
-call to \fBTk_CreateBindingTable\fR.
-.AP ClientData object in
-Identifies object with which binding is associated.
-.AP "const char" *eventString in
-String describing event sequence.
-.AP "const char" *script in
-Tcl script to invoke when binding triggers.
-.AP int append in
-Non-zero means append \fIscript\fR to existing script for binding,
-if any; zero means replace existing script with new one.
-.AP XEvent *eventPtr in
-X event to match against bindings in \fIbindingTable\fR.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Identifier for any window on the display where the event occurred.
-Used to find display-related information such as key maps.
-.AP int numObjects in
-Number of object identifiers pointed to by \fIobjectPtr\fR.
-.AP ClientData *objectPtr in
-Points to an array of object identifiers:  bindings will be considered
-for each of these objects in order from first to last.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures provide a general-purpose mechanism for creating
-and invoking bindings.
-Bindings are organized in terms of \fIbinding tables\fR.
-A binding table consists of a collection of bindings plus a history
-of recent events.
-Within a binding table, bindings are associated with \fIobjects\fR.
-The meaning of an object is defined by clients of the binding package.
-For example, Tk keeps uses one binding table to hold all of the bindings
-created by the \fBbind\fR command.
-For this table, objects are pointers to strings such as window names, class
-names, or other binding tags such as \fBall\fR.
-Tk also keeps a separate binding table for each canvas widget, which manages
-bindings created by the canvas's \fBbind\fR widget command;  within
-this table, an object is either a pointer to the internal structure for a
-canvas item or a Tk_Uid identifying a tag.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_CreateBindingTable\fR creates a new binding
-table and associates \fIinterp\fR with it (when bindings in the
-table are invoked, the scripts will be evaluated in \fIinterp\fR).
-\fBTk_CreateBindingTable\fR returns a token for the table, which
-must be used in calls to other procedures such as \fBTk_CreateBinding\fR
-or \fBTk_BindEvent\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteBindingTable\fR frees all of the state associated
-with a binding table.
-Once it returns the caller should not use the \fIbindingTable\fR
-token again.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateBinding\fR adds a new binding to an existing table.
-The \fIobject\fR argument identifies the object with which the
-binding is to be associated, and it may be any one-word value.
-Typically it is a pointer to a string or data structure.
-The \fIeventString\fR argument identifies the event or sequence
-of events for the binding;  see the documentation for the
-\fBbind\fR command for a description of its format.
-\fIscript\fR is the Tcl script to be evaluated when the binding
-triggers.
-\fIappend\fR indicates what to do if there already
-exists a binding for \fIobject\fR and \fIeventString\fR:  if \fIappend\fR
-is zero then \fIscript\fR replaces the old script;  if \fIappend\fR
-is non-zero then the new script is appended to the old one.
-\fBTk_CreateBinding\fR returns an X event mask for all the events
-associated with the bindings.
-This information may be useful to invoke \fBXSelectInput\fR to
-select relevant events, or to disallow the use of certain events
-in bindings.
-If an error occurred while creating the binding (e.g., \fIeventString\fR
-refers to a non-existent event), then 0 is returned and an error
-message is left as the result of interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteBinding\fR removes from \fIbindingTable\fR the
-binding given by \fIobject\fR and \fIeventString\fR, if
-such a binding exists.
-\fBTk_DeleteBinding\fR always returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
-In some cases it may reset the interpreter result to the default
-empty value.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetBinding\fR returns a pointer to the script associated
-with \fIeventString\fR and \fIobject\fR in \fIbindingTable\fR.
-If no such binding exists then NULL is returned and an error
-message is left as the result of interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetAllBindings\fR returns in \fIinterp\fR's result a list
-of all the event strings for which there are bindings in
-\fIbindingTable\fR associated with \fIobject\fR.
-If there are no bindings for \fIobject\fR, the result will be an empty
-string.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteAllBindings\fR deletes all of the bindings in
-\fIbindingTable\fR that are associated with \fIobject\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_BindEvent\fR is called to process an event.
-It makes a copy of the event in an internal history list associated
-with the binding table, then it checks for bindings that match
-the event.
-\fBTk_BindEvent\fR processes each of the objects pointed to
-by \fIobjectPtr\fR in turn.
-For each object, it finds all the bindings that match the current
-event history, selects the most specific binding using the priority
-mechanism described in the documentation for \fBbind\fR,
-and invokes the script for that binding.
-If there are no matching bindings for a particular object, then
-the object is skipped.
-\fBTk_BindEvent\fR continues through all of the objects, handling
-exceptions such as errors, \fBbreak\fR, and \fBcontinue\fR as
-described in the documentation for \fBbind\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-binding, event, object, script
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CanvPsY.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CanvPsY.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e104ce..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CanvPsY.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CanvasPs 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CanvasPsY, Tk_CanvasPsBitmap, Tk_CanvasPsColor, Tk_CanvasPsFont, Tk_CanvasPsPath, Tk_CanvasPsStipple \- utility procedures for generating Postscript for canvases
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-double
-\fBTk_CanvasPsY\fR(\fIcanvas, canvasY\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_CanvasPsBitmap\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap, x, y, width, height\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, colorPtr\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, tkFont\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, coordPtr, numPoints\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "unsigned int" "numPoints"
-.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
-A token that identifies a canvas widget for which Postscript is
-being generated.
-.AP double canvasY in
-Y-coordinate in the space of the canvas.
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
-A Tcl interpreter;  Postscript is appended to its result, or the
-result may be replaced with an error message.
-.AP Pixmap bitmap in
-Bitmap to use for generating Postscript.
-.AP int x in
-X-coordinate within \fIbitmap\fR of left edge of region to output.
-.AP int y in
-Y-coordinate within \fIbitmap\fR of top edge of region to output.
-.AP "int" width in
-Width of region of bitmap to output, in pixels.
-.AP "int" height in
-Height of region of bitmap to output, in pixels.
-.AP XColor *colorPtr in
-Information about color value to set in Postscript.
-.AP Tk_Font tkFont in
-Font for which Postscript is to be generated.
-.AP double *coordPtr in
-Pointer to an array of coordinates for one or more
-points specified in canvas coordinates.
-The order of values in \fIcoordPtr\fR is x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3,
-and so on.
-.AP int numPoints in
-Number of points at \fIcoordPtr\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures are called by canvas type managers to carry out
-common functions related to generating Postscript.
-Most of the procedures take a \fIcanvas\fR argument, which
-refers to a canvas widget for which Postscript is being
-generated.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasPsY\fR takes as argument a y-coordinate in the space of
-a canvas and returns the value that should be used for that point
-in the Postscript currently being generated for \fIcanvas\fR.
-Y coordinates require transformation because Postscript uses an
-origin at the lower-left corner whereas X uses an origin at the
-upper-left corner.
-Canvas x coordinates can be used directly in Postscript without
-transformation.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasPsBitmap\fR generates Postscript to describe a region
-of a bitmap.
-The Postscript is generated in proper image data format for Postscript,
-i.e., as data between angle brackets, one bit per pixel.
-The Postscript is appended to the result of interpreter \fIinterp\fR
-and \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned unless an error occurs, in which case
-\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and the interpreter result is overwritten
-with an error message.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR generates Postscript to set the current color
-to correspond to its \fIcolorPtr\fR argument, taking into account any
-color map specified in the \fBpostscript\fR command.
-It appends the Postscript to the interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result and returns
-\fBTCL_OK\fR unless an error occurs, in which case \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is
-returned and the interpreter's result is overwritten with an error message.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR generates Postscript that sets the current font
-to match \fItkFont\fR as closely as possible.
-\fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR takes into account any font map specified
-in the \fBpostscript\fR command, and it does
-the best it can at mapping X fonts to Postscript fonts.
-It appends the Postscript to interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result and
-returns \fBTCL_OK\fR unless an error occurs, in which case
-\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and the interpreter's result is
-overwritten with an error message.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR generates Postscript to set the current path
-to the set of points given by \fIcoordPtr\fR and \fInumPoints\fR.
-It appends the resulting Postscript to the result of interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR generates Postscript that will fill the
-current path in stippled fashion.
-It uses \fIbitmap\fR as the stipple pattern and the current Postscript
-color;  ones in the stipple bitmap are drawn in the current color, and
-zeroes are not drawn at all.
-The Postscript is appended to interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result and
-\fBTCL_OK\fR is returned, unless an error occurs, in which case
-\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and the interpreter's result is
-overwritten with an error message.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bitmap, canvas, color, font, path, Postscript, stipple
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CanvTkwin.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CanvTkwin.3
deleted file mode 100644
index d53c5b1..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CanvTkwin.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,158 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CanvasTkwin 3 4.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CanvasTkwin, Tk_CanvasGetCoord, Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords, Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin, Tk_CanvasWindowCoords, Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw, Tk_CanvasTagsOption \- utility procedures for canvas type managers
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_CanvasTkwin\fR(\fIcanvas\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_CanvasGetCoord\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, string, doublePtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, drawableXPtr, drawableYPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR(\fIcanvas, gc\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR(\fIcanvas, x1, y1, x2, y2\fR)
-.sp
-Tk_OptionParseProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR;
-.sp
-Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR;
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ItemType *drawableXPtr
-.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
-A token that identifies a canvas widget.
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Textual description of a canvas coordinate.
-.AP double *doublePtr out
-Points to place to store a converted coordinate.
-.AP double x in
-An x coordinate in the space of the canvas.
-.AP double y in
-A y coordinate in the space of the canvas.
-.AP short *drawableXPtr out
-Pointer to a location in which to store an x coordinate in the space
-of the drawable currently being used to redisplay the canvas.
-.AP short *drawableYPtr out
-Pointer to a location in which to store a y coordinate in the space
-of the drawable currently being used to redisplay the canvas.
-.AP GC gc out
-Graphics context to modify.
-.AP short *screenXPtr out
-Points to a location in which to store the screen coordinate in the
-canvas window that corresponds to \fIx\fR.
-.AP short *screenYPtr out
-Points to a location in which to store the screen coordinate in the
-canvas window that corresponds to \fIy\fR.
-.AP int x1 in
-Left edge of the region that needs redisplay.  Only pixels at or to
-the right of this coordinate need to be redisplayed.
-.AP int y1 in
-Top edge of the region that needs redisplay.  Only pixels at or below
-this coordinate need to be redisplayed.
-.AP int x2 in
-Right edge of the region that needs redisplay.  Only pixels to
-the left of this coordinate need to be redisplayed.
-.AP int y2 in
-Bottom edge of the region that needs redisplay.  Only pixels above
-this coordinate need to be redisplayed.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures are called by canvas type managers to perform various
-utility functions.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasTkwin\fR returns the Tk_Window associated with a particular
-canvas.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasGetCoord\fR translates a string specification of a
-coordinate (such as \fB2p\fR or \fB1.6c\fR) into a double-precision
-canvas coordinate.
-If \fIstring\fR is a valid coordinate description then \fBTk_CanvasGetCoord\fR
-stores the corresponding canvas coordinate at *\fIdoublePtr\fR
-and returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
-Otherwise it stores an error message in the interpreter result and
-returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR is called by type managers during
-redisplay to compute where to draw things.
-Given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates in the space of the
-canvas, \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR computes the corresponding
-pixel in the drawable that is currently being used for redisplay;
-it returns those coordinates in *\fIdrawableXPtr\fR and *\fIdrawableYPtr\fR.
-This procedure should not be invoked except during redisplay.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR is also used during redisplay.
-It sets the stipple origin in \fIgc\fR so that stipples drawn
-with \fIgc\fR in the current offscreen pixmap will line up
-with stipples drawn with origin (0,0) in the canvas's actual
-window.
-\fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR is needed in order to guarantee
-that stipple patterns line up properly when the canvas is
-redisplayed in small pieces.
-Redisplays are carried out in double-buffered fashion where a
-piece of the canvas is redrawn in an offscreen pixmap and then
-copied back onto the screen.
-In this approach the stipple origins in graphics contexts need to
-be adjusted during each redisplay to compensate for the position
-of the off-screen pixmap relative to the window.
-If an item is being drawn with stipples, its type manager typically
-calls \fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR just before using \fIgc\fR
-to draw something;  after it is finished drawing, the type manager
-calls \fBXSetTSOrigin\fR to restore the origin in \fIgc\fR back to (0,0)
-(the restore is needed because graphics contexts are shared, so
-they cannot be modified permanently).
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR is similar to \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR
-except that it returns coordinates in the canvas's window on the
-screen, instead of coordinates in an off-screen pixmap.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR may be invoked by a type manager
-to inform Tk that a portion of a canvas needs to be redrawn.
-The \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR arguments
-specify the region that needs to be redrawn, in canvas coordinates.
-Type managers rarely need to invoke \fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR,
-since Tk can normally figure out when an item has changed and make
-the redisplay request on its behalf (this happens, for example
-whenever Tk calls a \fIconfigureProc\fR or \fIscaleProc\fR).
-The only time that a type manager needs to call
-\fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR is if an item has changed on its own
-without being invoked through one of the procedures in its Tk_ItemType;
-this could happen, for example, in an image item if the image is
-modified using image commands.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR and \fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR are
-procedures that handle the \fB\-tags\fR option for canvas items.
-The code of a canvas type manager will not call these procedures
-directly, but will use their addresses to create a \fBTk_CustomOption\fR
-structure for the \fB\-tags\fR option.   The code typically looks
-like this:
-.PP
-.CS
-static const Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc,
-    Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, (ClientData) NULL
-};
-
-static const Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
-    ...
-    {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "\-tags", NULL, NULL,
-        NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
-    ...
-};
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-canvas, focus, item type, redisplay, selection, type manager
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CanvTxtInfo.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CanvTxtInfo.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 92a2bc3..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CanvTxtInfo.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CanvasTextInfo 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CanvasTextInfo \- additional information for managing text items in canvases
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_CanvasTextInfo *
-\fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR(\fIcanvas\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Canvas canvas
-.AP Tk_Canvas canvas in
-A token that identifies a particular canvas widget.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Textual canvas items are somewhat more complicated to manage than
-other items, due to things like the selection and the input focus.
-\fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR may be invoked by a type manager
-to obtain additional information needed for items that display text.
-The return value from \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR is a pointer to
-a structure that is shared between Tk and all the items that display
-text.
-The structure has the following form:
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_CanvasTextInfo {
-    Tk_3DBorder \fIselBorder\fR;
-    int \fIselBorderWidth\fR;
-    XColor *\fIselFgColorPtr\fR;
-    Tk_Item *\fIselItemPtr\fR;
-    int \fIselectFirst\fR;
-    int \fIselectLast\fR;
-    Tk_Item *\fIanchorItemPtr\fR;
-    int \fIselectAnchor\fR;
-    Tk_3DBorder \fIinsertBorder\fR;
-    int \fIinsertWidth\fR;
-    int \fIinsertBorderWidth\fR;
-    Tk_Item *\fIfocusItemPtr\fR;
-    int \fIgotFocus\fR;
-    int \fIcursorOn\fR;
-} \fBTk_CanvasTextInfo\fR;
-.CE
-The \fBselBorder\fR field identifies a Tk_3DBorder that should be
-used for drawing the background under selected text.
-\fIselBorderWidth\fR gives the width of the raised border around
-selected text, in pixels.
-\fIselFgColorPtr\fR points to an XColor that describes the foreground
-color to be used when drawing selected text.
-\fIselItemPtr\fR points to the item that is currently selected, or
-NULL if there is no item selected or if the canvas does not have the
-selection.
-\fIselectFirst\fR and \fIselectLast\fR give the indices of the first
-and last selected characters in \fIselItemPtr\fR, as returned by the
-\fIindexProc\fR for that item.
-\fIanchorItemPtr\fR points to the item that currently has the selection
-anchor;  this is not necessarily the same as \fIselItemPtr\fR.
-\fIselectAnchor\fR is an index that identifies the anchor position
-within \fIanchorItemPtr\fR.
-\fIinsertBorder\fR contains a Tk_3DBorder to use when drawing the
-insertion cursor;  \fIinsertWidth\fR gives the total width of the
-insertion cursor in pixels, and \fIinsertBorderWidth\fR gives the
-width of the raised  border around the insertion cursor.
-\fIfocusItemPtr\fR identifies the item that currently has the input
-focus, or NULL if there is no such item.
-\fIgotFocus\fR is 1 if the canvas widget has the input focus and
-0 otherwise.
-\fIcursorOn\fR is 1 if the insertion cursor should be drawn in
-\fIfocusItemPtr\fR and 0 if it should not be drawn;  this field
-is toggled on and off by Tk to make the cursor blink.
-.PP
-The structure returned by \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR
-is shared between Tk and the type managers;  typically the type manager
-calls \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR once when an item is created and
-then saves the pointer in the item's record.
-Tk will update information in the Tk_CanvasTextInfo;  for example,
-a \fBconfigure\fR widget command might change the \fIselBorder\fR
-field, or a \fBselect\fR widget command might change the \fIselectFirst\fR
-field, or Tk might change \fIcursorOn\fR in order to make the insertion
-cursor flash on and off during successive redisplays.
-.PP
-Type managers should treat all of the fields of the Tk_CanvasTextInfo
-structure as read-only, except for \fIselItemPtr\fR, \fIselectFirst\fR,
-\fIselectLast\fR, and \fIselectAnchor\fR.
-Type managers may change \fIselectFirst\fR, \fIselectLast\fR, and
-\fIselectAnchor\fR to adjust for insertions and deletions in the
-item (but only if the item is the current owner of the selection or
-anchor, as determined by \fIselItemPtr\fR or \fIanchorItemPtr\fR).
-If all of the selected text in the item is deleted, the item should
-set \fIselItemPtr\fR to NULL to indicate that there is no longer a
-selection.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-canvas, focus, insertion cursor, selection, selection anchor, text
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/Clipboard.3 b/tk8.6/doc/Clipboard.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3087777..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/Clipboard.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_ClipboardClear 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ClipboardClear, Tk_ClipboardAppend \- Manage the clipboard
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, target, format, buffer\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ClipboardClear tkwin
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for reporting errors.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window that determines which display's clipboard to manipulate.
-.AP Atom target in
-Conversion type for this clipboard item;  has same meaning as
-\fItarget\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR.
-.AP Atom format in
-Representation to use when data is retrieved;  has same meaning as
-\fIformat\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR.
-.AP "const char" *buffer in
-Null terminated string containing the data to be appended to the clipboard.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These two procedures manage the clipboard for Tk.
-The clipboard is typically managed by calling \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR
-once, then calling \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR to add data for any
-number of targets.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR claims the CLIPBOARD selection and frees any
-data items previously stored on the clipboard in this application.
-It normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, but if an error occurs it returns
-\fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error message in interpreter
-\fIinterp\fR's result.
-\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR must be called before a sequence of
-\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR calls can be issued.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR appends a buffer of data to the clipboard.
-The first buffer for a given \fItarget\fR determines the \fIformat\fR
-for that \fItarget\fR.
-Any successive appends for that \fItarget\fR must have
-the same format or an error will be returned.
-\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR if the buffer is
-successfully copied onto the clipboard.  If the clipboard is not
-currently owned by the application, either
-because \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR has not been called or because
-ownership of the clipboard has changed since the last call to
-\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR,
-\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error
-message in the result of interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
-.PP
-In order to guarantee atomicity, no event handling should occur
-between \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR and the following
-\fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR calls (otherwise someone could retrieve
-a partially completed clipboard or claim ownership away from
-this application).
-.PP
-\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR may invoke callbacks, including arbitrary
-Tcl scripts, as a result of losing the CLIPBOARD selection, so
-any calling function should take care to be re-entrant at the point
-\fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR is invoked.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-append, clipboard, clear, format, type
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ClrSelect.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ClrSelect.3
deleted file mode 100644
index c56f63c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ClrSelect.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_ClearSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ClearSelection \- Deselect a selection
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_ClearSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window tkwin
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-The selection will be cleared from the display containing this
-window.
-.AP Atom selection in
-The name of selection to be cleared.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_ClearSelection\fR cancels the selection specified by the atom
-\fIselection\fR for the display containing \fItkwin\fR.
-The selection need not be in \fItkwin\fR itself or even in
-\fItkwin\fR's application.
-If there is a window anywhere on \fItkwin\fR's display that
-owns \fIselection\fR, the window will be notified and the
-selection will be cleared.
-If there is no owner for \fIselection\fR on the display, then the
-procedure has no effect.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-clear, selection
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ConfigWidg.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ConfigWidg.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 92be073..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ConfigWidg.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,631 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_ConfigureWidget 3 4.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ConfigureInfo(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ConfigureValue(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeOptions(\fIspecs, widgRec, display, flags\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS char *widgRec in/out
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for returning error messages.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window used to represent widget (needed to set up X resources).
-.AP "const Tk_ConfigSpec" *specs in
-Pointer to table specifying legal configuration options for this
-widget.
-.AP int argc in
-Number of arguments in \fIargv\fR.
-.AP "const char" **argv in
-Command-line options for configuring widget.
-.AP char *widgRec in/out
-Points to widget record structure.  Fields in this structure get
-modified by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR to hold configuration information.
-.AP int flags in
-If non-zero, then it specifies an OR-ed combination of flags that
-control the processing of configuration information.
-\fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR causes the option database and defaults to be
-ignored, and flag bits \fBTK_CONFIG_USER_BIT\fR and higher are used to
-selectively disable entries in \fIspecs\fR.
-.AP "type name" type in
-The name of the type of a widget record.
-.AP "field name" field in
-The name of a field in records of type \fItype\fR.
-.AP "const char" *argvName in
-The name used on Tcl command lines to refer to a particular option
-(e.g. when creating a widget or invoking the \fBconfigure\fR widget
-command).  If non-NULL, then information is returned only for this
-option.  If NULL, then information is returned for all available
-options.
-.AP Display *display in
-Display containing widget whose record is being freed;  needed in
-order to free up resources.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Note: \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR should be replaced with the new
-\fBTcl_Obj\fR based API \fBTk_SetOptions\fR.  The old interface is
-retained for backward compatibility.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is called to configure various aspects of a
-widget, such as colors, fonts, border width, etc.
-It is intended as a convenience procedure to reduce the amount
-of code that must be written in individual widget managers to
-handle configuration information.
-It is typically
-invoked when widgets are created, and again when the \fBconfigure\fR
-command is invoked for a widget.
-Although intended primarily for widgets, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR
-can be used in other situations where \fIargc-argv\fR information
-is to be used to fill in a record structure, such as configuring
-graphical elements for a canvas widget or entries of a menu.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR processes
-a table specifying the configuration options that are supported
-(\fIspecs\fR) and a collection of command-line arguments (\fIargc\fR and
-\fIargv\fR) to fill in fields of a record (\fIwidgRec\fR).
-It uses the option database and defaults specified in \fIspecs\fR
-to fill in fields of \fIwidgRec\fR that are not specified in \fIargv\fR.
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR normally returns the value \fBTCL_OK\fR; in this
-case it does not modify \fIinterp\fR.
-If an error
-occurs then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR will
-leave an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result in the standard Tcl
-fashion.
-In the event of an error return, some of the fields of \fIwidgRec\fR
-could already have been set, if configuration information for them
-was successfully processed before the error occurred.
-The other fields will be set to reasonable initial values so that
-\fBTk_FreeOptions\fR can be called for cleanup.
-.PP
-The \fIspecs\fR array specifies the kinds of configuration options
-expected by the widget.  Each of its entries specifies one configuration
-option and has the following structure:
-.CS
-typedef struct {
-    int \fItype\fR;
-    const char *\fIargvName\fR;
-    const char *\fIdbName\fR;
-    const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
-    const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
-    int \fIoffset\fR;
-    int \fIspecFlags\fR;
-    const Tk_CustomOption *\fIcustomPtr\fR;
-} \fBTk_ConfigSpec\fR;
-.CE
-The \fItype\fR field indicates what type of configuration option this is
-(e.g. \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR for
-an integer value).  The \fItype\fR field indicates how to use the
-value of the option (more on this below).
-The \fIargvName\fR field is a string such as
-.QW \-font
-or
-.QW \-bg ,
-which is compared with the values in \fIargv\fR (if \fIargvName\fR is
-NULL it means this is a grouped entry;  see \fBGROUPED ENTRIES\fR below).  The
-\fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR fields are used to look up a value
-for this option in the option database.  The \fIdefValue\fR field
-specifies a default value for this configuration option if no
-value is specified in either \fIargv\fR or the option database.
-\fIOffset\fR indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store information
-about this option, and \fIspecFlags\fR contains additional information
-to control the processing of this configuration option (see FLAGS
-below).
-The last field, \fIcustomPtr\fR, is only used if \fItype\fR is
-\fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR;  see CUSTOM OPTION TYPES below.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR first processes \fIargv\fR to see which
-(if any) configuration options are specified there.  \fIArgv\fR
-must contain an even number of fields;  the first of each pair
-of fields must match the \fIargvName\fR of some entry in \fIspecs\fR
-(unique abbreviations are acceptable),
-and the second field of the pair contains the value for that
-configuration option.  If there are entries in \fIspec\fR for which
-there were no matching entries in \fIargv\fR,
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR uses the \fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR
-fields of the \fIspecs\fR entry to probe the option database;  if
-a value is found, then it is used as the value for the option.
-Finally, if no entry is found in the option database, the
-\fIdefValue\fR field of the \fIspecs\fR entry is used as the
-value for the configuration option.  If the \fIdefValue\fR is
-NULL, or if the \fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR bit is set in
-\fIflags\fR, then there is no default value and this \fIspecs\fR entry
-will be ignored if no value is specified in \fIargv\fR or the
-option database.
-.PP
-Once a string value has been determined for a configuration option,
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR translates the string value into a more useful
-form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer
-if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR.  This value is then stored in the
-record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR.  This record is assumed to
-contain information relevant to the manager of the widget;  its exact
-type is unknown to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.  The \fIoffset\fR field
-of each \fIspecs\fR entry indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store
-the information about this configuration option.  You should use the
-\fBTk_Offset\fR macro to generate \fIoffset\fR values (see below for
-a description of \fBTk_Offset\fR).  The location indicated by
-\fIwidgRec\fR and \fIoffset\fR will be referred to as the
-.QW target
-in the descriptions below.
-.PP
-The \fItype\fR field of each entry in \fIspecs\fR determines what
-to do with the string value of that configuration option.  The
-legal values for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are:
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR
-The value
-must be an ASCII string identifying a cursor in a form
-suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.
-The value is converted to a \fBTk_Cursor\fR by calling
-\fBTk_GetCursor\fR and the result is stored in the target.
-In addition, the resulting cursor is made the active cursor
-for \fItkwin\fR by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR.
-If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
-may be an empty string, in which case the target and \fItkwin\fR's
-active cursor will be set to \fBNone\fR.
-If the previous value of the target
-was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_ANCHOR\fR
-The value must be an ASCII string identifying an anchor point in one of the ways
-accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR.
-The string is converted to a \fBTk_Anchor\fR by calling
-\fBTk_GetAnchor\fR and the result is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_BITMAP\fR
-The value must be an ASCII string identifying a bitmap in a form
-suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.  The value is converted
-to a \fBPixmap\fR by calling \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR and the result
-is stored in the target.
-If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
-may be an empty string, in which case the target is set to \fBNone\fR.
-If the previous value of the target
-was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN\fR
-The value must be an ASCII string specifying a boolean value.  Any
-of the values
-.QW true ,
-.QW yes ,
-.QW on ,
-or
-.QW 1 ,
-or an abbreviation of one of these values, means true;
-any of the values
-.QW false ,
-.QW no ,
-.QW off ,
-or
-.QW 0 ,
-or an abbreviation of one of these values, means false.
-The target is expected to be an integer;  for true values it will
-be set to 1 and for false values it will be set to 0.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_BORDER\fR
-The value must be an ASCII string identifying a border color in a form
-suitable for passing to \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR.  The value is converted
-to a (\fBTk_3DBorder *\fR) by calling \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR and the result
-is stored in the target.
-If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
-may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
-If the previous value of the target
-was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE\fR
-The value must be
-an ASCII string identifying a cap style in one of the ways
-accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR.
-The string is converted to an integer value corresponding
-to the cap style by calling
-\fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR
-The value must be an ASCII string identifying a color in a form
-suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  The value is converted
-to an (\fBXColor *\fR) by calling \fBTk_GetColor\fR and the result
-is stored in the target.
-If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
-may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to \fBNone\fR.
-If the previous value of the target
-was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeColor\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_CURSOR\fR
-This option is identical to \fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR except
-that the new cursor is not made the active one for \fItkwin\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR
-This option allows applications to define new option types.
-The \fIcustomPtr\fR field of the entry points to a structure
-defining the new option type.
-See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_DOUBLE\fR
-The value must be an ASCII floating-point number in
-the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.  The string is converted
-to a \fBdouble\fR value, and the value is stored in the
-target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_END\fR
-Marks the end of the table.  The last entry in \fIspecs\fR
-must have this type;  all of its other fields are ignored and it
-will never match any arguments.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_FONT\fR
-The value must be an ASCII string identifying a font in a form
-suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.  The value is converted
-to a \fBTk_Font\fR by calling \fBTk_GetFont\fR and the result
-is stored in the target.
-If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
-may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
-If the previous value of the target
-was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeFont\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR
-The value must be an ASCII integer string
-in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g.
-.QW 0
-and
-.QW 0x
-prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal
-numbers, respectively).  The string is converted to an integer
-value and the integer is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE\fR
-The value must be
-an ASCII string identifying a join style in one of the ways
-accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR.
-The string is converted to an integer value corresponding
-to the join style by calling
-\fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY\fR
-The value must be
-an ASCII string identifying a justification method in one of the
-ways accepted by \fBTk_GetJustify\fR.
-The string is converted to a \fBTk_Justify\fR by calling
-\fBTk_GetJustify\fR and the result is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_MM\fR
-The value must specify a screen distance in one of the forms acceptable
-to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR.
-The string is converted to double-precision floating-point distance
-in millimeters and the value is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_PIXELS\fR
-The value must specify screen units in one of the forms acceptable
-to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-The string is converted to an integer distance in pixels and the
-value is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_RELIEF\fR
-The value must be an ASCII string identifying a relief in a form
-suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetRelief\fR.  The value is converted
-to an integer relief value by calling \fBTk_GetRelief\fR and the result
-is stored in the target.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_STRING\fR
-A copy
-of the value is made by allocating memory space with
-\fBTcl_Alloc\fR and copying the value into the dynamically-allocated
-space.  A pointer to the new string is stored in the target.
-If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value
-may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL.
-If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is
-freed by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR
-This \fItype\fR value identifies special entries in \fIspecs\fR that
-are synonyms for other entries.  If an \fIargv\fR value matches the
-\fIargvName\fR of a \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry, the entry is not used
-directly. Instead, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR searches \fIspecs\fR
-for another entry whose \fIargvName\fR is the same as the \fIdbName\fR
-field in the \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry;  this new entry is used just
-as if its \fIargvName\fR had matched the \fIargv\fR value.  The
-synonym mechanism allows multiple \fIargv\fR values to be used for
-a single configuration option, such as
-.QW \-background
-and
-.QW \-bg .
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_UID\fR
-The value is translated to a \fBTk_Uid\fR
-(by passing it to \fBTk_GetUid\fR).  The resulting value
-is stored in the target.
-If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR and the value
-is an empty string then the target will be set to NULL.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_WINDOW\fR
-The value must be a window path name.  It is translated to a
-\fBTk_Window\fR token and the token is stored in the target.
-.SH "GROUPED ENTRIES"
-.PP
-In some cases it is useful to generate multiple resources from
-a single configuration value.  For example, a color name might
-be used both to generate the background color for a widget (using
-\fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR) and to generate a 3-D border to draw around the
-widget (using \fBTK_CONFIG_BORDER\fR).  In cases like this it is possible
-to specify that several consecutive entries in \fIspecs\fR are to
-be treated as a group.  The first entry is used to determine a value
-(using its \fIargvName\fR, \fIdbName\fR,
-\fIdbClass\fR, and \fIdefValue\fR fields).  The value will be processed
-several times (one for each entry in the group), generating multiple
-different resources and modifying multiple targets within \fIwidgRec\fR.
-Each of the entries after the first must have a NULL value in its
-\fIargvName\fR field;  this indicates that the entry is to be grouped
-with the entry that precedes it.  Only the \fItype\fR and \fIoffset\fR
-fields are used from these follow-on entries.
-.SH "FLAGS"
-.PP
-The \fIflags\fR argument passed to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is used
-in conjunction with the \fIspecFlags\fR fields in the entries of \fIspecs\fR
-to provide additional control over the processing of configuration
-options.  These values are used in three different ways as
-described below.
-.PP
-First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has
-the \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR bit set (i.e., \fIflags\fR | \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR != 0),
-then the option database and
-\fIdefValue\fR fields are not used.  In this case, if an entry in
-\fIspecs\fR does not match a field in \fIargv\fR then nothing happens:
-the corresponding target is not modified.  This feature is useful
-when the goal is to modify certain configuration options while
-leaving others in their current state, such as when a \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command is being processed.
-.PP
-Second, the \fIspecFlags\fR field of an entry in \fIspecs\fR may be used
-to control the processing of that entry.  Each \fIspecFlags\fR
-field may consists of an OR-ed combination of the following values:
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR
-If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the
-display for \fItkwin\fR has more than one bit plane.  If the display
-is monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR
-If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the
-display for \fItkwin\fR has exactly one bit plane.  If the display
-is not monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR
-This bit is only relevant for some types of entries (see the
-descriptions of the various entry types above).
-If this bit is set, it indicates that an empty string value
-for the field is acceptable and if it occurs then the
-target should be set to NULL or \fBNone\fR, depending
-on the type of the target.
-This flag is typically used to allow a
-feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to
-\fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor.
-If this bit is not set then empty strings are processed as strings,
-which generally results in an error.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR
-If this bit is one, it means that the \fIdefValue\fR field of the
-entry should only be used for returning the default value in
-\fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR.
-In calls to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR no default will be supplied
-for entries with this flag set;  it is assumed that the
-caller has already supplied a default value in the target location.
-This flag provides a performance optimization where it is expensive
-to process the default string:  the client can compute the default
-once, save the value, and provide it before calling
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED\fR
-This bit is
-deprecated. It used to be set and cleared by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR
-so that callers could detect what entries were specified in
-\fIargv\fR, but it was removed because it was inherently
-thread-unsafe. Code that wishes to detect what options were specified
-should use \fBTk_SetOptions\fR instead.
-.PP
-The \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR and \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR flags are typically
-used to specify different default values for
-monochrome and color displays.  This is done by creating two
-entries in \fIspecs\fR that are identical except for their
-\fIdefValue\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR fields.  One entry should have
-the value \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR in its \fIspecFlags\fR and the
-default value for monochrome displays in its \fIdefValue\fR;  the
-other entry should have the value \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR in
-its \fIspecFlags\fR and the appropriate \fIdefValue\fR for
-color displays.
-.PP
-Third, it is possible to use \fIflags\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR
-together to selectively disable some entries.  This feature is
-not needed very often.  It is useful in cases where several
-similar kinds of widgets are implemented in one place.  It allows
-a single \fIspecs\fR table to be created with all the configuration
-options for all the widget types.  When processing a particular
-widget type, only entries relevant to that type will be used.  This
-effect is achieved by setting the high-order bits (those in positions
-equal to or greater than \fBTK_CONFIG_USER_BIT\fR) in \fIspecFlags\fR
-values or in \fIflags\fR.  In order for a particular entry in
-\fIspecs\fR to be used, its high-order bits must match exactly
-the high-order bits of the \fIflags\fR value passed to
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.  If a \fIspecs\fR table is being used
-for N different widget types, then N of the high-order bits will
-be used.  Each \fIspecs\fR entry will have one of more of those
-bits set in its \fIspecFlags\fR field to indicate the widget types
-for which this entry is valid.  When calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR,
-\fIflags\fR will have a single one of these bits set to select the
-entries for the desired widget type.  For a working example of
-this feature, see the code in tkButton.c.
-.SH TK_OFFSET
-.PP
-The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating
-the \fIoffset\fR values for entries in Tk_ConfigSpec structures.
-It takes two arguments:  the name of a type of record, and the
-name of a field in that record.  It returns the byte offset of
-the named field in records of the given type.
-.SH TK_CONFIGUREINFO
-.PP
-The \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR procedure may be used to obtain
-information about one or all of the options for a given widget.
-Given a token for a window (\fItkwin\fR), a table describing the
-configuration options for a class of widgets (\fIspecs\fR), a
-pointer to a widget record containing the current information for
-a widget (\fIwidgRec\fR), and a NULL \fIargvName\fR argument,
-\fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR generates a string describing all of the
-configuration options for the window.  The string is placed
-in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.  Under normal circumstances
-it returns \fBTCL_OK\fR;  if an error occurs then it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
-and the interpreter's result will contain an error message.
-.PP
-If \fIargvName\fR is NULL, then the value left in
-the interpreter's result by \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR
-consists of a list of one or more entries, each of which describes
-one configuration option (i.e. one entry in \fIspecs\fR).  Each
-entry in the list will contain either two or five values.  If the
-corresponding entry in \fIspecs\fR has type \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR, then
-the list will contain two values:  the \fIargvName\fR for the entry
-and the \fIdbName\fR (synonym name).  Otherwise the list will contain
-five values:  \fIargvName\fR, \fIdbName\fR, \fIdbClass\fR, \fIdefValue\fR,
-and current value.  The current value is computed from the appropriate
-field of \fIwidgRec\fR by calling procedures like \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR.
-.PP
-If the \fIargvName\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR is non-NULL,
-then it indicates a single option, and information is returned only
-for that option.  The string placed in the interpreter's result will be
-a list containing two or five values as described above;  this will
-be identical to the corresponding sublist that would have been returned
-if \fIargvName\fR had been NULL.
-.PP
-The \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR is used to restrict
-the \fIspecs\fR entries to consider, just as for \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.
-.SH TK_CONFIGUREVALUE
-.PP
-\fBTk_ConfigureValue\fR takes arguments similar to \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR;
-instead of returning a list of values, it just returns the current value
-of the option given by \fIargvName\fR (\fIargvName\fR must not be NULL).
-The value is returned in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result and \fBTCL_OK\fR is
-normally returned as the procedure's result.
-If an error occurs in \fBTk_ConfigureValue\fR (e.g., \fIargvName\fR is
-not a valid option name), \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message
-is left in the interpreter's result.
-This procedure is typically called to implement \fBcget\fR widget
-commands.
-.SH TK_FREEOPTIONS
-.PP
-The \fBTk_FreeOptions\fR procedure may be invoked during widget cleanup
-to release all of the resources associated with configuration options.
-It scans through \fIspecs\fR and for each entry corresponding to a
-resource that must be explicitly freed (e.g. those with
-type \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR), it frees the resource in the widget record.
-If the field in the widget record does not refer to a resource (e.g.
-it contains a null pointer) then no resource is freed for that
-entry.
-After freeing a resource, \fBTk_FreeOptions\fR sets the
-corresponding field of the widget record to null.
-.SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES"
-.PP
-Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional
-configuration types by writing procedures to parse and print options
-of the a type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures:
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_CustomOption {
-    Tk_OptionParseProc *\fIparseProc\fR;
-    Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fIprintProc\fR;
-    ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
-} \fBTk_CustomOption\fR;
-
-typedef int \fBTk_OptionParseProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-        char *\fIvalue\fR,
-        char *\fIwidgRec\fR,
-        int \fIoffset\fR);
-
-typedef const char *\fBTk_OptionPrintProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-        char *\fIwidgRec\fR,
-        int \fIoffset\fR,
-        Tcl_FreeProc **\fIfreeProcPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The Tk_CustomOption structure contains three fields, which are pointers
-to the two procedures and a \fIclientData\fR value to be passed to those
-procedures when they are invoked.  The \fIclientData\fR value typically
-points to a structure containing information that is needed by the
-procedures when they are parsing and printing options.
-.PP
-The \fIparseProc\fR procedure is invoked by
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR to parse a string and store the resulting
-value in the widget record.
-The \fIclientData\fR argument is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR
-field in the Tk_CustomOption structure.
-The \fIinterp\fR argument points to a Tcl interpreter used for
-error reporting.  \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument
-to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.  The \fIvalue\fR argument is a string
-describing the value for the option;  it could have been specified
-explicitly in the call to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR or it could
-come from the option database or a default.
-\fIValue\fR will never be a null pointer but it may point to
-an empty string.
-\fIRecordPtr\fR is the same as the \fIwidgRec\fR argument to
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR;  it points to the start of the widget
-record to modify.
-The last argument, \fIoffset\fR, gives the offset in bytes from the start
-of the widget record to the location where the option value is to
-be placed.  The procedure should translate the string to whatever
-form is appropriate for the option and store the value in the widget
-record.  It should normally return \fBTCL_OK\fR, but if an error occurs
-in translating the string to a value then it should return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
-and store an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
-.PP
-The \fIprintProc\fR procedure is called
-by \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR to produce a string value describing an
-existing option.
-Its \fIclientData\fR, \fItkwin\fR, \fIwidgRec\fR, and \fIoffset\fR
-arguments all have the same meaning as for Tk_OptionParseProc
-procedures.
-The \fIprintProc\fR procedure should examine the option whose value
-is stored at \fIoffset\fR in \fIwidgRec\fR, produce a string describing
-that option, and return a pointer to the string.
-If the string is stored in dynamically-allocated memory, then
-the procedure must set \fI*freeProcPtr\fR to the address of
-a procedure to call to free the string's memory;  \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR
-will call this procedure when it is finished with the string.
-If the result string is stored in static memory then \fIprintProc\fR
-need not do anything with the \fIfreeProcPtr\fR argument.
-.PP
-Once \fIparseProc\fR and \fIprintProc\fR have been defined and a
-Tk_CustomOption structure has been created for them, options of this
-new type may be manipulated with Tk_ConfigSpec entries whose \fItype\fR
-fields are \fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR and whose \fIcustomPtr\fR fields point
-to the Tk_CustomOption structure.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-Although the explanation of \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is fairly
-complicated, its actual use is pretty straightforward.
-The easiest way to get started is to copy the code
-from an existing widget.
-The library implementation of frames
-(tkFrame.c) has a simple configuration table, and the library
-implementation of buttons (tkButton.c) has a much more complex
-table that uses many of the fancy \fIspecFlags\fR mechanisms.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_SetOptions(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-anchor, bitmap, boolean, border, cap style, color, configuration options,
-cursor, custom, double, font, integer, join style, justify, millimeters,
-pixels, relief, synonym, uid
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ConfigWind.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ConfigWind.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c7adab..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ConfigWind.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_ConfigureWindow 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ConfigureWindow, Tk_MoveWindow, Tk_ResizeWindow, Tk_MoveResizeWindow, Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth, Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes, Tk_SetWindowBackground, Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap, Tk_SetWindowBorder, Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap, Tk_SetWindowColormap, Tk_DefineCursor, Tk_UndefineCursor \- change window configuration or attributes
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_ConfigureWindow\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_MoveWindow\fR(\fItkwin, x, y\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR(\fItkwin, width, height\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_MoveResizeWindow\fR(\fItkwin, x,  y, width, height\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetWindowBorderWidth\fR(\fItkwin, borderWidth\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_ChangeWindowAttributes\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, attsPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetWindowBackground\fR(\fItkwin, pixel\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetWindowBorder\fR(\fItkwin, pixel\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR(\fItkwin, colormap\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_DefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin, cursor\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_UndefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP "unsigned int" valueMask in
-OR-ed mask of values like \fBCWX\fR or \fBCWBorderPixel\fR,
-indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR or \fI*attsPtr\fR to use.
-.AP XWindowChanges *valuePtr in
-Points to a structure containing new values for the configuration
-parameters selected by \fIvalueMask\fR.  Fields not selected
-by \fIvalueMask\fR are ignored.
-.AP int x in
-New x-coordinate for \fItkwin\fR's top left pixel (including
-border, if any) within tkwin's parent.
-.AP int y in
-New y-coordinate for \fItkwin\fR's top left pixel (including
-border, if any) within tkwin's parent.
-.AP "int" width in
-New width for \fItkwin\fR (interior, not including border).
-.AP "int" height in
-New height for \fItkwin\fR (interior, not including border).
-.AP "int" borderWidth in
-New width for \fItkwin\fR's border.
-.AP XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr in
-Points to a structure containing new values for the attributes
-given by the \fIvalueMask\fR argument.  Attributes not selected
-by \fIvalueMask\fR are ignored.
-.AP "unsigned long" pixel in
-New background or border color for window.
-.AP Pixmap pixmap in
-New pixmap to use for background or border of \fItkwin\fR.  WARNING:
-cannot necessarily be deleted immediately, as for Xlib calls.  See
-note below.
-.AP Colormap colormap in
-New colormap to use for \fItkwin\fR.
-.AP Tk_Cursor cursor in
-New cursor to use for \fItkwin\fR.  If \fBNone\fR is specified, then
-\fItkwin\fR will not have its own cursor;  it will use the cursor
-of its parent.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures are analogous to the X library procedures
-with similar names, such as \fBXConfigureWindow\fR.  Each
-one of the above procedures calls the corresponding X procedure
-and also saves the configuration information in Tk's local
-structure for the window.  This allows the information to
-be retrieved quickly by the application (using macros such
-as \fBTk_X\fR and \fBTk_Height\fR) without having to contact
-the X server.  In addition, if no X window has actually been
-created for \fItkwin\fR yet, these procedures do not issue
-X operations or cause event handlers to be invoked;  they save
-the information in Tk's local
-structure for the window;  when the window is created later,
-the saved information will be used to configure the window.
-.PP
-See the X library documentation for details on what these
-procedures do and how they use their arguments.
-.PP
-In the procedures \fBTk_ConfigureWindow\fR, \fBTk_MoveWindow\fR,
-\fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR, \fBTk_MoveResizeWindow\fR, and
-\fBTk_SetWindowBorderWidth\fR,
-if \fItkwin\fR is an internal window then event handlers interested
-in configure events are invoked immediately, before the procedure
-returns.  If \fItkwin\fR is a top-level window
-then the event handlers will be invoked later, after X has seen
-the request and returned an event for it.
-.PP
-Applications using Tk should never call procedures like
-\fBXConfigureWindow\fR directly;  they should always use the
-corresponding Tk procedures.
-.PP
-The size and location of a window should only be modified by the
-appropriate geometry manager for that window and never by a window
-itself (but see \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR for moving a top-level
-window).
-.PP
-You may not use \fBTk_ConfigureWindow\fR to change the
-stacking order of a window (\fIvalueMask\fR may not contain the
-\fBCWSibling\fR or \fBCWStackMode\fR bits).
-To change the stacking order, use the procedure \fBTk_RestackWindow\fR.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR will automatically add
-\fItkwin\fR to the \fBTK_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property of its
-nearest top-level ancestor if the new colormap is different from
-that of \fItkwin\fR's parent and \fItkwin\fR is not already in
-the \fBTK_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property.
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap\fR and \fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR
-differ slightly from their Xlib counterparts in that the \fIpixmap\fR
-argument may not necessarily be deleted immediately after calling
-one of these procedures.  This is because \fItkwin\fR's window
-may not exist yet at the time of the call, in which case \fIpixmap\fR
-is merely saved and used later when \fItkwin\fR's window is actually
-created.  If you wish to delete \fIpixmap\fR, then call
-\fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR first to be sure that \fItkwin\fR's window exists
-and \fIpixmap\fR has been passed to the X server.
-.PP
-A similar problem occurs for the \fIcursor\fR argument passed to
-\fBTk_DefineCursor\fR.  The solution is the same as for pixmaps above:
-call \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR before freeing the cursor.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_MoveToplevelWindow, Tk_RestackWindow
-.SH KEYWORDS
-attributes, border, color, configure, height, pixel, pixmap, width, window, x, y
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CoordToWin.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CoordToWin.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 5fe96a6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CoordToWin.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CoordsToWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CoordsToWindow \- Find window containing a point
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR(\fIrootX, rootY, tkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window tkwin
-.AP int rootX in
-X-coordinate (in root window coordinates).
-.AP int rootY in
-Y-coordinate (in root window coordinates).
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window that identifies application.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR locates the window that contains a given point.
-The point is specified in root coordinates with \fIrootX\fR and
-\fIrootY\fR (if a virtual-root window manager is in use then
-\fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR are in the coordinate system of the
-virtual root window).
-The return value from the procedure is a token for the window that
-contains the given point.
-If the point is not in any window, or if the containing window
-is not in the same application as \fItkwin\fR, then NULL is
-returned.
-.PP
-The containing window is decided using the same rules that determine
-which window contains the mouse cursor:  if a parent and a child both
-contain the point then the child gets preference, and if two siblings
-both contain the point then the highest one in the stacking order
-(i.e. the one that's visible on the screen) gets preference.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-containing, coordinates, root window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtCmHdlr.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtCmHdlr.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 98b93f7..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtCmHdlr.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler, Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler \- associate procedure callback with ClientMessage type X events
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke whenever a ClientMessage X event occurs on any display.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked
-in the future whenever a ClientMessage X event occurs that is not handled by
-\fBWM_PROTOCOL\fR.  \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR is intended for use
-by applications which need to watch X ClientMessage events, such as drag and
-drop applications.
-.PP
-The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR;
-this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events
-through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that
-call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or
-\fBTk_MainLoop\fR).
-.PP
-\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
-type \fBTk_ClientMessageProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ClientMessageProc\fR(
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-        XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fItkwin\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is the Tk window which is
-associated with this event.  \fIEventPtr\fR is a pointer to the X event.
-.PP
-Whenever an X ClientMessage event is processed by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR,
-the \fIproc\fR is called if it was not handled as a \fBWM_PROTOCOL\fR.
-The return value from \fIproc\fR is normally 0.
-A non-zero return value indicates that the event is not to be handled
-further; that is, \fIproc\fR has done all processing that is to be
-allowed for the event.
-.PP
-If there are multiple ClientMessage event handlers, each one is called
-for each event, in the order in which they were established.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR may be called to delete a
-previously-created ClientMessage event handler: it deletes each handler it
-finds that matches the \fIproc\fR argument.  If no such handler exists,
-then \fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR returns without doing anything.
-Although Tk supports it, it's probably a bad idea to have more than one
-callback with the same \fIproc\fR argument.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bind, callback, event, handler
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtConsoleChan.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtConsoleChan.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fd8a6a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtConsoleChan.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2007 ActiveState Software Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_InitConsoleChannels 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_InitConsoleChannels \- Install the console channels as standard channels
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp in
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter in which the console channels are created.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR is invoked to create a set of console
-channels and install them as the standard channels. All I/O on these
-channels will be discarded until \fBTk_CreateConsoleWindow\fR is
-called to attach the console to a text widget.
-.PP
-This function is for use by shell applications based on Tk, like
-\fBwish\fR, on platforms which have no standard channels in graphical
-mode, like Win32.
-.PP
-The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which to create and
-install the console channels.
-.PP
-\fBNOTE:\fR If this function is used it has to be called before the
-first call to \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR, directly, or indirectly
-through other channel functions. Because otherwise the standard
-channels will be already initialized to the system defaults, which will
-be nonsensical for the case \fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR is for.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-console(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-standard channels, console
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtErrHdlr.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtErrHdlr.3
deleted file mode 100644
index e506220..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtErrHdlr.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CreateErrorHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateErrorHandler, Tk_DeleteErrorHandler \- handle X protocol errors
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_ErrorHandler
-\fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR(\fIdisplay, error, request, minor, proc, clientData\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR(\fIhandler\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tk_ErrorHandler" clientData
-.AP Display *display in
-Display whose errors are to be handled.
-.AP int error in
-Match only error events with this value in the \fIerror_code\fR
-field.  If \-1, then match any \fIerror_code\fR value.
-.AP int request in
-Match only error events with this value in the \fIrequest_code\fR
-field.  If \-1, then match any \fIrequest_code\fR value.
-.AP int minor in
-Match only error events with this value in the \fIminor_code\fR
-field.  If \-1, then match any \fIminor_code\fR value.
-.AP Tk_ErrorProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke whenever an error event is received for
-\fIdisplay\fR and matches \fIerror\fR, \fIrequest\fR, and \fIminor\fR.
-NULL means ignore any matching errors.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.AP Tk_ErrorHandler handler in
-Token for error handler to delete (return value from a previous
-call to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR).
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR arranges for a particular procedure
-(\fIproc\fR) to be called whenever certain protocol errors occur on a
-particular display (\fIdisplay\fR).  Protocol errors occur when
-the X protocol is used incorrectly, such as attempting to map a window
-that does not exist.  See the Xlib documentation for \fBXSetErrorHandler\fR
-for more information on the kinds of errors that can occur.
-For \fIproc\fR to be invoked
-to handle a particular error, five things must occur:
-.IP [1]
-The error must pertain to \fIdisplay\fR.
-.IP [2]
-Either the \fIerror\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR
-must have been \-1, or the \fIerror\fR argument must match
-the \fIerror_code\fR field from the error event.
-.IP [3]
-Either the \fIrequest\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR
-must have been \-1, or the \fIrequest\fR argument must match
-the \fIrequest_code\fR field from the error event.
-.IP [4]
-Either the \fIminor\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR
-must have been \-1, or the \fIminor\fR argument must match
-the \fIminor_code\fR field from the error event.
-.IP [5]
-The protocol request to which the error pertains must have been
-made when the handler was active (see below for more information).
-.PP
-\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
-following type:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ErrorProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        XErrorEvent *\fIerrEventPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR
-argument given to \fBTcl_CreateErrorHandler\fR when the callback
-was created.  Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data
-structure containing application-specific information that is
-needed to deal with the error.  \fIErrEventPtr\fR is
-a pointer to the X error event.
-The procedure \fIproc\fR should return an integer value.  If it
-returns 0 it means that \fIproc\fR handled the error completely and there
-is no need to take any other action for the error.  If it returns
-non-zero it means \fIproc\fR was unable to handle the error.
-.PP
-If a value of NULL is specified for \fIproc\fR, all matching errors
-will be ignored:  this will produce the same result as if a procedure
-had been specified that always returns 0.
-.PP
-If more than more than one handler matches a particular error, then
-they are invoked in turn.  The handlers will be invoked in reverse
-order of creation:  most recently declared handler first.
-If any handler returns 0, then subsequent (older) handlers will
-not be invoked.  If no handler returns 0, then Tk invokes X's
-default error handler, which prints an error message and aborts the
-program.  If you wish to have a default handler that deals with errors
-that no other handler can deal with, then declare it first.
-.PP
-The X documentation states that
-.QW "the error handler should not call any functions (directly or indirectly) on the display that will generate protocol requests or that will look for input events."
-This restriction applies to handlers declared by \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR;
-disobey it at your own risk.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR may be called to delete a
-previously-created error handler.  The \fIhandler\fR argument
-identifies the error handler, and should be a value returned by
-a previous call to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR.
-.PP
-A particular error handler applies to errors resulting
-from protocol requests generated between
-the call to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR and the call to
-\fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR.  However, the actual callback
-to \fIproc\fR may not occur until after the \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR
-call, due to buffering in the client and server.
-If an error event pertains to
-a protocol request made just before calling \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR,
-then the error event may not have been processed
-before the \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR
-call.  When this situation arises, Tk will save information about
-the handler and
-invoke the handler's \fIproc\fR later when the error event
-finally arrives.
-If an application wishes to delete an error handler and know
-for certain that all relevant errors have been processed,
-it should first call \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR and then
-call \fBXSync\fR;  this will flush out any buffered requests and errors,
-but will result in a performance penalty because
-it requires communication to and from the X server.  After the
-\fBXSync\fR call Tk is guaranteed not to call any error
-handlers deleted before the \fBXSync\fR call.
-.PP
-For the Tk error handling mechanism to work properly, it is essential
-that application code never calls \fBXSetErrorHandler\fR directly;
-applications should use only \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-callback, error, event, handler
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtGenHdlr.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtGenHdlr.3
deleted file mode 100644
index c2161d1..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtGenHdlr.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CreateGenericHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateGenericHandler, Tk_DeleteGenericHandler \- associate procedure callback with all X events
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tk_GenericProc" clientData
-.AP Tk_GenericProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke whenever any X event occurs on any display.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be
-invoked in the future whenever any X event occurs.  This mechanism is
-\fInot\fR intended for dispatching X events on windows managed by Tk
-(you should use \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR for this purpose).
-\fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR is intended for other purposes, such
-as tracing X events, monitoring events on windows not owned by Tk,
-accessing X-related libraries that were not originally designed for
-use with Tk, and so on.
-.PP
-The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR;
-this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events
-through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that
-call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or
-\fBTk_MainLoop\fR).
-.PP
-\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
-type \fBTk_GenericProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_GenericProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR
-argument given to \fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR when the callback
-was created.  Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data
-structure containing application-specific information about
-how to handle events.
-\fIEventPtr\fR is a pointer to the X event.
-.PP
-Whenever an X event is processed by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, \fIproc\fR
-is called.  The return value from \fIproc\fR is normally 0.
-A non-zero return value indicates that the event is not to be handled
-further; that is, \fIproc\fR has done all processing that is to be
-allowed for the event.
-.PP
-If there are multiple generic event handlers, each one is called
-for each event, in the order in which they were established.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR may be called to delete a
-previously-created generic event handler:  it deletes each handler
-it finds that matches the \fIproc\fR and \fIclientData\fR arguments.  If
-no such handler exists, then \fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR returns
-without doing anything.  Although Tk supports it, it's probably
-a bad idea to have more than one callback with the same
-\fIproc\fR and \fIclientData\fR arguments.
-.PP
-Establishing a generic event handler does nothing to ensure that the
-process will actually receive the X events that the handler wants to
-process.
-For example, it is the caller's responsibility to invoke
-\fBXSelectInput\fR to select the desired events, if that is necessary.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bind, callback, event, handler
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtImgType.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtImgType.3
deleted file mode 100644
index cbbc11e..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtImgType.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,283 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageMasterData, Tk_InitImageArgs \- define new kind of image
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_CreateImageType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
-.sp
-ClientData
-\fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR(\fIinterp, argc, argvPtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtrPtr
-.AP "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtr in
-Structure that defines the new type of image.
-For Tk 8.4 and earlier this must be static: a
-pointer to this structure is retained by the image code.
-In Tk 8.5, this limitation was relaxed.
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter in which image was created.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Name of existing image.
-.AP Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr out
-Points to word in which to store a pointer to type information for
-the given image, if it exists.
-.AP int argc in
-Number of arguments
-.AP char ***argvPtr in/out
-Pointer to argument list
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateImageType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of image.
-An image type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR
-argument for the \fBimage create\fR command.  There may exist
-any number of different image types, and new types may be defined
-dynamically by calling \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR.
-For example, there might be one type for 2-color bitmaps,
-another for multi-color images, another for dithered images,
-another for video, and so on.
-.PP
-The code that implements a new image type is called an
-\fIimage manager\fR.
-It consists of a collection of procedures plus three different
-kinds of data structures.
-The first data structure is a Tk_ImageType structure, which contains
-the name of the image type and pointers to five procedures provided
-by the image manager to deal with images of this type:
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_ImageType {
-    const char *\fIname\fR;
-    Tk_ImageCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
-} \fBTk_ImageType\fR;
-.CE
-The fields of this structure will be described in later subsections
-of this entry.
-.PP
-The second major data structure manipulated by an image manager
-is called an \fIimage master\fR;  it contains overall information
-about a particular image, such as the values of the configuration
-options specified in an \fBimage create\fR command.
-There will usually be one of these structures for each
-invocation of the \fBimage create\fR command.
-.PP
-The third data structure related to images is an \fIimage instance\fR.
-There will usually be one of these structures for each usage of an
-image in a particular widget.
-It is possible for a single image to appear simultaneously
-in multiple widgets, or even multiple times in the same widget.
-Furthermore, different instances may be on different screens
-or displays.
-The image instance data structure describes things that may
-vary from instance to instance, such as colors and graphics
-contexts for redisplay.
-There is usually one instance structure for each \fB\-image\fR
-option specified for a widget or canvas item.
-.PP
-The following subsections describe the fields of a Tk_ImageType
-in more detail.
-.SS NAME
-.PP
-\fItypePtr->name\fR provides a name for the image type.
-Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used
-in \fBimage create\fR commands to create images of the new
-type.
-If there already existed an image type by this name then
-the new image type replaces the old one.
-.SS CREATEPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr->createProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
-Tk to call whenever \fBimage create\fR is invoked to create
-an image of the new type.
-\fItypePtr->createProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        const char *\fIname\fR,
-        int \fIobjc\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[],
-        const Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
-        Tk_ImageMaster \fImaster\fR,
-        ClientData *\fImasterDataPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the \fBimage\fR
-command was invoked, and \fIname\fR is the name for the new image,
-which was either specified explicitly in the \fBimage\fR command
-or generated automatically by the \fBimage\fR command.
-The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all the configuration
-options for the new image (everything after the name argument to
-\fBimage\fR).
-The \fImaster\fR argument is a token that refers to Tk's information
-about this image;  the image manager must return this token to
-Tk when invoking the \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR procedure.
-Typically \fIcreateProc\fR will parse \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR
-and create an image master data structure for the new image.
-\fIcreateProc\fR may store an arbitrary one-word value at
-*\fImasterDataPtr\fR, which will be passed back to the
-image manager when other callbacks are invoked.
-Typically the value is a pointer to the master data
-structure for the image.
-.PP
-If \fIcreateProc\fR encounters an error, it should leave an error
-message in the interpreter result and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR;  otherwise
-it should return \fBTCL_OK\fR.
-.PP
-\fIcreateProc\fR should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR in order to set the
-size of the image and request an initial redisplay.
-.SS GETPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr->getProc\fR is invoked by Tk whenever a widget
-calls \fBTk_GetImage\fR to use a particular image.
-This procedure must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef ClientData \fBTk_ImageGetProc\fR(
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-        ClientData \fImasterData\fR);
-.CE
-The \fItkwin\fR argument identifies the window in which the
-image will be used and \fImasterData\fR is the value
-returned by \fIcreateProc\fR when the image master was created.
-\fIgetProc\fR will usually create a data structure for the new
-instance, including such things as the resources needed to
-display the image in the given window.
-\fIgetProc\fR returns a one-word token for the instance, which
-is typically the address of the instance data structure.
-Tk will pass this value back to the image manager when invoking
-its \fIdisplayProc\fR and \fIfreeProc\fR procedures.
-.SS DISPLAYPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr->displayProc\fR is invoked by Tk whenever an image needs
-to be displayed (i.e., whenever a widget calls \fBTk_RedrawImage\fR).
-\fIdisplayProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ImageDisplayProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-        Display *\fIdisplay\fR,
-        Drawable \fIdrawable\fR,
-        int \fIimageX\fR,
-        int \fIimageY\fR,
-        int \fIwidth\fR,
-        int \fIheight\fR,
-        int \fIdrawableX\fR,
-        int \fIdrawableY\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinstanceData\fR will be the same as the value returned by
-\fIgetProc\fR when the instance was created.
-\fIdisplay\fR and \fIdrawable\fR indicate where to display the
-image;  \fIdrawable\fR may be a pixmap rather than
-the window specified to \fIgetProc\fR (this is usually the case,
-since most widgets double-buffer their redisplay to get smoother
-visual effects).
-\fIimageX\fR, \fIimageY\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR
-identify the region of the image that must be redisplayed.
-This region will always be within the size of the image
-as specified in the most recent call to \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR.
-\fIdrawableX\fR and \fIdrawableY\fR indicate where in \fIdrawable\fR
-the image should be displayed;  \fIdisplayProc\fR should display
-the given region of the image so that point (\fIimageX\fR, \fIimageY\fR)
-in the image appears at (\fIdrawableX\fR, \fIdrawableY\fR) in \fIdrawable\fR.
-.SS FREEPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr->freeProc\fR contains the address of a procedure that
-Tk will invoke when an image instance is released (i.e., when
-\fBTk_FreeImage\fR is invoked).
-This can happen, for example, when a widget is deleted or a image item
-in a canvas is deleted, or when the image displayed in a widget or
-canvas item is changed.
-\fIfreeProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ImageFreeProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-        Display *\fIdisplay\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinstanceData\fR will be the same as the value returned by
-\fIgetProc\fR when the instance was created, and \fIdisplay\fR
-is the display containing the window for the instance.
-\fIfreeProc\fR should release any resources associated with the
-image instance, since the instance will never be used again.
-.SS DELETEPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr->deleteProc\fR is a procedure that Tk invokes when an
-image is being deleted (i.e. when the \fBimage delete\fR command
-is invoked).
-Before invoking \fIdeleteProc\fR Tk will invoke \fIfreeProc\fR for
-each of the image's instances.
-\fIdeleteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ImageDeleteProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fImasterData\fR);
-.CE
-The \fImasterData\fR argument will be the same as the value
-stored in \fI*masterDataPtr\fR by \fIcreateProc\fR when the
-image was created.
-\fIdeleteProc\fR should release any resources associated with
-the image.
-.SH TK_GETIMAGEMASTERDATA
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR may be invoked to retrieve
-information about an image.  For example, an image manager can use this
-procedure to locate its image master data for an image.
-If there exists an image named \fIname\fR
-in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is
-filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value
-passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered)
-and the return value is the ClientData value returned by the
-\fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a
-pointer to the image master data structure).  If no such image exists
-then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR.
-.SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT"
-.PP
-In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR
-was incompatibly different, with the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        char *\fIname\fR,
-        int \fIargc\fR,
-        char **\fIargv\fR,
-        Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
-        Tk_ImageMaster \fImaster\fR,
-        ClientData *\fImasterDataPtr\fR);
-.CE
-Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still
-contain code that defines extended Tk image types using the old
-interface.  The Tk header file will still support this legacy
-interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR
-defined.
-.PP
-When the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR legacy support is enabled, you may
-see the routine \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR in use.  This was a migration
-tool used to create stub-enabled extensions that could be loaded
-into interps containing all versions of Tk 8.1 and later.  Tk 8.5 no longer
-provides this routine, but uses a macro to convert any attempted
-calls of this routine into an empty comment.  Any stub-enabled
-extension providing an extended image type via the legacy interface
-that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the
-Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only
-into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility
-rules.  If a developer needs to generate from such code a file
-that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must
-use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so.
-.PP
-Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy
-interfaces.  Expect their support to go away in Tk 9.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_ImageChanged, Tk_GetImage, Tk_FreeImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage
-.SH KEYWORDS
-image manager, image type, instance, master
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtItemType.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtItemType.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 005d2e2..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtItemType.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,695 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CreateItemType 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateItemType, Tk_GetItemTypes \- define new kind of canvas item
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_CreateItemType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
-.sp
-Tk_ItemType *
-\fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR()
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ItemType *typePtr
-.AP Tk_ItemType *typePtr in
-Structure that defines the new type of canvas item.
-.BE
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of canvas item
-described by the \fItypePtr\fR argument.
-An item type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR
-argument to the \fBcreate\fR widget command for canvases, and
-the code that implements a canvas item type is called a \fItype manager\fR.
-Tk defines several built-in item types, such as \fBrectangle\fR
-and \fBtext\fR and \fBimage\fR, but \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR
-allows additional item types to be defined.
-Once \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR returns, the new item type may be used
-in new or existing canvas widgets just like the built-in item
-types.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR returns a pointer to the first in the list
-of all item types currently defined for canvases.
-The entries in the list are linked together through their
-\fInextPtr\fR fields, with the end of the list marked by a
-NULL \fInextPtr\fR.
-.PP
-You may find it easier to understand the rest of this manual entry
-by looking at the code for an existing canvas item type such as
-bitmap (in the file tkCanvBmap.c) or text (tkCanvText.c).
-The easiest way to create a new type manager is to copy the code
-for an existing type and modify it for the new type.
-.PP
-Tk provides a number of utility procedures for the use of canvas
-type managers, such as \fBTk_CanvasCoords\fR and \fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR;
-these are described in separate manual entries.
-.SH "DATA STRUCTURES"
-.PP
-A type manager consists of a collection of procedures that provide a
-standard set of operations on items of that type.
-The type manager deals with three kinds of data
-structures.
-The first data structure is a Tk_ItemType; it contains
-information such as the name of the type and pointers to
-the standard procedures implemented by the type manager:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
-    const char *\fIname\fR;
-    int \fIitemSize\fR;
-    Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
-    const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR;
-    Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
-    int \fIalwaysRedraw\fR;
-    Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR;
-    Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR;
-} \fBTk_ItemType\fR;
-.CE
-.PP
-The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail
-later in this manual entry.
-When \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is called, its \fItypePtr\fR
-argument must point to a structure with all of the fields initialized
-except \fInextPtr\fR, which Tk sets to link all the types together
-into a list.
-The structure must be in permanent memory (either statically
-allocated or dynamically allocated but never freed); Tk retains
-a pointer to this structure.
-.PP
-The second data structure manipulated by a type manager is an
-\fIitem record\fR.
-For each item in a canvas there exists one item record.
-All of the items of a given type generally have item records with
-the same structure, but different types usually have different
-formats for their item records.
-The first part of each item record is a header with a standard structure
-defined by Tk via the type Tk_Item; the rest of the item
-record is defined by the type manager.
-A type manager must define its item records with a Tk_Item as
-the first field.
-For example, the item record for bitmap items is defined as follows:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef struct BitmapItem {
-    Tk_Item \fIheader\fR;
-    double \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR;
-    Tk_Anchor \fIanchor\fR;
-    Pixmap \fIbitmap\fR;
-    XColor *\fIfgColor\fR;
-    XColor *\fIbgColor\fR;
-    GC \fIgc\fR;
-} \fBBitmapItem\fR;
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIheader\fR substructure contains information used by Tk
-to manage the item, such as its identifier, its tags, its type,
-and its bounding box.
-The fields starting with \fIx\fR belong to the type manager:
-Tk will never read or write them.
-The type manager should not need to read or write any of the
-fields in the header except for four fields
-whose names are \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR.
-These fields give a bounding box for the items using integer
-canvas coordinates: the item should not cover any pixels
-with x-coordinate lower than \fIx1\fR or y-coordinate
-lower than \fIy1\fR, nor should it cover any pixels with
-x-coordinate greater than or equal to \fIx2\fR or y-coordinate
-greater than or equal to \fIy2\fR.
-It is up to the type manager to keep the bounding box up to
-date as the item is moved and reconfigured.
-.PP
-Whenever Tk calls a procedure in a type manager it passes in a pointer
-to an item record.
-The argument is always passed as a pointer to a Tk_Item; the type
-manager will typically cast this into a pointer to its own specific
-type, such as BitmapItem.
-.PP
-The third data structure used by type managers has type
-Tk_Canvas; it serves as an opaque handle for the canvas widget
-as a whole.
-Type managers need not know anything about the contents of this
-structure.
-A Tk_Canvas handle is typically passed in to the
-procedures of a type manager, and the type manager can pass the
-handle back to library procedures such as Tk_CanvasTkwin
-to fetch information about the canvas.
-.SH "TK_ITEMTYPE FIELDS"
-.SS NAME
-.PP
-This section and the ones that follow describe each of the fields
-in a Tk_ItemType structure in detail.
-The \fIname\fR field provides a string name for the item type.
-Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used
-in \fBcreate\fR widget commands to create items of the new
-type.
-If there already existed an item type by this name then
-the new item type replaces the old one.
-.SS "FLAGS (IN ALWAYSREDRAW)"
-.PP
-The \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field (so named for historic reasons)
-contains a collection of flag bits that modify how the canvas core interacts
-with the item. The following bits are defined:
-.TP
-\fB1\fR
-.
-Indicates that the item should always be redrawn when any part of the canvas
-is redrawn, rather than only when the bounding box of the item overlaps the
-area being redrawn. This is used by window items, for example, which need to
-unmap subwindows that are not on the screen.
-.TP
-\fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR
-.
-Indicates that operations which would otherwise take a string (or array of
-strings) actually take a Tcl_Obj reference (or an array of such references).
-The operations to which this applies are the \fIconfigProc\fR, the
-\fIcoordProc\fR, the \fIcreateProc\fR, the \fIindexProc\fR and the
-\fIinsertProc\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_MOVABLE_POINTS\fR
-.VS 8.6
-Indicates that the item supports the \fIdCharsProc\fR, \fIindexProc\fR and
-\fIinsertProc\fR with the same semantics as Tk's built-in line and polygon
-types, and that hence individual coordinate points can be moved. Must not be
-set if any of the above methods is NULL.
-.VE 8.6
-.SS ITEMSIZE
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->itemSize\fR gives the size in bytes of item records
-of this type, including the Tk_Item header.
-Tk uses this size to allocate memory space for items of the type.
-All of the item records for a given type must have the same size.
-If variable length fields are needed for an item (such as a list
-of points for a polygon), the type manager can allocate a separate
-object of variable length and keep a pointer to it in the item record.
-.SS CREATEPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->createProc\fR points to a procedure for
-Tk to call whenever a new item of this type is created.
-\fItypePtr\->createProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ItemCreateProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIobjc\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[]);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the canvas's
-\fBcreate\fR widget command was invoked, and \fIcanvas\fR is a
-handle for the canvas widget.
-\fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to a newly-allocated item of
-size \fItypePtr\->itemSize\fR.
-Tk has already initialized the item's header (the first
-\fBsizeof(Tk_ItemType)\fR bytes).
-The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all of the
-arguments to the \fBcreate\fR command after the \fItype\fR
-argument.
-Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
-\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually
-contain a pointer to an array of constant strings.
-For example, in the widget command:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fB\&.c create rectangle 10 20 50 50 \-fill black\fR
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIobjc\fR will be \fB6\fR and \fIobjv\fR[0] will contain the
-integer object \fB10\fR.
-.PP
-\fIcreateProc\fR should use \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR to initialize
-the type-specific parts of the item record and set an initial value
-for the bounding box in the item's header.
-It should return a standard Tcl completion code and leave an
-error message in the interpreter result if an error occurs.
-If an error occurs Tk will free the item record, so \fIcreateProc\fR
-must be sure to leave the item record in a clean state if it returns an error
-(e.g., it must free any additional memory that it allocated for
-the item).
-.SS CONFIGSPECS
-.PP
-Each type manager must provide a standard table describing its
-configuration options, in a form suitable for use with
-\fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR.
-This table will normally be used by \fItypePtr\->createProc\fR
-and \fItypePtr\->configProc\fR, but Tk also uses it directly
-to retrieve option information in the \fBitemcget\fR and
-\fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands.
-\fItypePtr\->configSpecs\fR must point to the configuration table
-for this type.
-Note: Tk provides a custom option type \fBtk_CanvasTagsOption\fR
-for implementing the \fB\-tags\fR option; see an existing type
-manager for an example of how to use it in \fIconfigSpecs\fR.
-.SS CONFIGPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->configProc\fR is called by Tk whenever the
-\fBitemconfigure\fR widget command is invoked to change the
-configuration options for a canvas item.
-This procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ItemConfigureProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIobjc\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[],
-        int \fIflags\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIinterp\fR argument identifies the interpreter in which the
-widget command was invoked, \fIcanvas\fR is a handle for the canvas
-widget, and \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to the item being configured.
-\fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR contain the configuration options.
-Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
-\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually
-contain a pointer to an array of constant strings.
-For example, if the following command is invoked:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fB\&.c itemconfigure 2 \-fill red \-outline black\fR
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIobjc\fR is \fB4\fR and \fIobjv\fR contains the string objects \fB\-fill\fR
-through \fBblack\fR.
-\fIobjc\fR will always be an even value.
-The \fIflags\fR argument contains flags to pass to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR;
-currently this value is always \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR when Tk
-invokes \fItypePtr\->configProc\fR, but the type manager's \fIcreateProc\fR
-procedure will usually invoke \fIconfigProc\fR with different flag values.
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->configProc\fR returns a standard Tcl completion code and
-leaves an error message in the interpreter result if an error occurs.
-It must update the item's bounding box to reflect the new configuration
-options.
-.SS COORDPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->coordProc\fR is invoked by Tk to implement the \fBcoords\fR
-widget command for an item.
-It must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ItemCoordProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIobjc\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[]);
-.CE
-.PP
-The arguments \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR
-all have the standard meanings, and \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR
-describe the coordinate arguments.
-Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
-\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobjv\fR parameter will actually
-contain a pointer to an array of constant strings.
-For example, if the following widget command is invoked:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fB\&.c coords 2 30 90\fR
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIobjc\fR will be \fB2\fR and \fBobjv\fR will contain the integer objects
-\fB30\fR and \fB90\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIcoordProc\fR procedure should process the new coordinates,
-update the item appropriately (e.g., it must reset the bounding
-box in the item's header), and return a standard Tcl completion
-code.
-If an error occurs, \fIcoordProc\fR must leave an error message in
-the interpreter result.
-.SS DELETEPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->deleteProc\fR is invoked by Tk to delete an item
-and free any resources allocated to it.
-It must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ItemDeleteProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        Display *\fIdisplay\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual
-interpretations, and \fIdisplay\fR identifies the X display containing
-the canvas.
-\fIdeleteProc\fR must free up any resources allocated for the item,
-so that Tk can free the item record.
-\fIdeleteProc\fR should not actually free the item record; this will
-be done by Tk when \fIdeleteProc\fR returns.
-.SS "DISPLAYPROC"
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->displayProc\fR is invoked by Tk to redraw an item
-on the screen.
-It must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ItemDisplayProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        Display *\fIdisplay\fR,
-        Drawable \fIdst\fR,
-        int \fIx\fR,
-        int \fIy\fR,
-        int \fIwidth\fR,
-        int \fIheight\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning.
-\fIdisplay\fR identifies the display containing the canvas, and
-\fIdst\fR specifies a drawable in which the item should be rendered;
-typically this is an off-screen pixmap, which Tk will copy into
-the canvas's window once all relevant items have been drawn.
-\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR specify a rectangular
-region in canvas coordinates, which is the area to be redrawn;
-only information that overlaps this area needs to be redrawn.
-Tk will not call \fIdisplayProc\fR unless the item's bounding box
-overlaps the redraw area, but the type manager may wish to use
-the redraw area to optimize the redisplay of the item.
-.PP
-Because of scrolling and the use of off-screen pixmaps for
-double-buffered redisplay, the item's coordinates in \fIdst\fR
-will not necessarily be the same as those in the canvas.
-\fIdisplayProc\fR should call \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR
-to transform coordinates from those of the canvas to those
-of \fIdst\fR.
-.PP
-Normally an item's \fIdisplayProc\fR is only invoked if the item
-overlaps the area being displayed.
-However, if bit zero of \fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR is 1,
-(i.e.\|
-.QW "\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw & 1 == 1\fR" )
-then \fIdisplayProc\fR is invoked during every redisplay operation,
-even if the item does not overlap the area of redisplay; this is useful for
-cases such as window items, where the subwindow needs to be unmapped when it
-is off the screen.
-.SS POINTPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->pointProc\fR is invoked by Tk to find out how close
-a given point is to a canvas item.
-Tk uses this procedure for purposes such as locating the item
-under the mouse or finding the closest item to a given point.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef double \fBTk_ItemPointProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        double *\fIpointPtr\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meaning.
-\fIpointPtr\fR points to an array of two numbers giving
-the x and y coordinates of a point.
-\fIpointProc\fR must return a real value giving the distance
-from the point to the item, or 0 if the point lies inside
-the item.
-.SS AREAPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->areaProc\fR is invoked by Tk to find out the relationship
-between an item and a rectangular area.
-It must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ItemAreaProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        double *\fIrectPtr\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meaning.
-\fIrectPtr\fR points to an array of four real numbers;
-the first two give the x and y coordinates of the upper left
-corner of a rectangle, and the second two give the x and y
-coordinates of the lower right corner.
-\fIareaProc\fR must return \-1 if the item lies entirely outside
-the given area, 0 if it lies partially inside and partially
-outside the area, and 1 if it lies entirely inside the area.
-.SS POSTSCRIPTPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->postscriptProc\fR is invoked by Tk to generate
-Postscript for an item during the \fBpostscript\fR widget command.
-If the type manager is not capable of generating Postscript then
-\fItypePtr\->postscriptProc\fR should be NULL.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ItemPostscriptProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIprepass\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all have
-standard meanings; \fIprepass\fR will be described below.
-If \fIpostscriptProc\fR completes successfully, it should append
-Postscript for the item to the information in the interpreter result
-(e.g. by calling \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR, not \fBTcl_SetResult\fR)
-and return \fBTCL_OK\fR.
-If an error occurs, \fIpostscriptProc\fR should clear the result
-and replace its contents with an error message; then it should
-return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
-.PP
-Tk provides a collection of utility procedures to simplify
-\fIpostscriptProc\fR.
-For example, \fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR will generate Postscript to set
-the current color to a given Tk color and \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR will
-set up font information.
-When generating Postscript, the type manager is free to change the
-graphics state of the Postscript interpreter, since Tk places
-\fBgsave\fR and \fBgrestore\fR commands around the Postscript for
-the item.
-The type manager can use canvas x coordinates directly in its Postscript,
-but it must call \fBTk_CanvasPsY\fR to convert y coordinates from
-the space of the canvas (where the origin is at the
-upper left) to the space of Postscript (where the origin is at the
-lower left).
-.PP
-In order to generate Postscript that complies with the Adobe Document
-Structuring Conventions, Tk actually generates Postscript in two passes.
-It calls each item's \fIpostscriptProc\fR in each pass.
-The only purpose of the first pass is to collect font information
-(which is done by \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR); the actual Postscript is
-discarded.
-Tk sets the \fIprepass\fR argument to \fIpostscriptProc\fR to 1
-during the first pass; the type manager can use \fIprepass\fR to skip
-all Postscript generation except for calls to \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR.
-During the second pass \fIprepass\fR will be 0, so the type manager
-must generate complete Postscript.
-.SS SCALEPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->scaleProc\fR is invoked by Tk to rescale a canvas item
-during the \fBscale\fR widget command.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ItemScaleProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        double \fIoriginX\fR,
-        double \fIoriginY\fR,
-        double \fIscaleX\fR,
-        double \fIscaleY\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning.
-\fIoriginX\fR and \fIoriginY\fR specify an origin relative to which
-the item is to be scaled, and \fIscaleX\fR and \fIscaleY\fR give the
-x and y scale factors.
-The item should adjust its coordinates so that a point in the item
-that used to have coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR will have new
-coordinates \fIx\(fm\fR and \fIy\(fm\fR, where
-.PP
-.CS
-\fIx\(fm\fR = \fIoriginX\fR + \fIscaleX\fR \(mu (\fIx\fR \(mi \fIoriginX\fR)
-\fIy\(fm\fR = \fIoriginY\fR + \fIscaleY\fR \(mu (\fIy\fR \(mi \fIoriginY\fR)
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIscaleProc\fR must also update the bounding box in the item's
-header.
-.SS TRANSLATEPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->translateProc\fR is invoked by Tk to translate a canvas item
-during the \fBmove\fR widget command.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ItemTranslateProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        double \fIdeltaX\fR,
-        double \fIdeltaY\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning,
-and \fIdeltaX\fR and \fIdeltaY\fR give the amounts that should be
-added to each x and y coordinate within the item.
-The type manager should adjust the item's coordinates and
-update the bounding box in the item's header.
-.SS INDEXPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR is invoked by Tk to translate a string
-index specification into a numerical index, for example during the
-\fBindex\fR widget command.
-It is only relevant for item types that support indexable text or coordinates;
-\fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual
-item types if they do not support detailed coordinate addressing.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ItemIndexProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIindexObj\fR,
-        int *\fIindexPtr\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all
-have the usual meaning.
-\fIindexObj\fR contains a textual description of an index,
-and \fIindexPtr\fR points to an integer value that should be
-filled in with a numerical index.
-Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
-\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIindexObj\fR parameter will
-actually contain a pointer to a constant string.
-It is up to the type manager to decide what forms of index
-are supported (e.g., numbers, \fBinsert\fR, \fBsel.first\fR,
-\fBend\fR, etc.).
-\fIindexProc\fR should return a Tcl completion code and set
-the interpreter result in the event of an error.
-.SS ICURSORPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->icursorProc\fR is invoked by Tk during
-the \fBicursor\fR widget command to set the position of the
-insertion cursor in a textual item.
-It is only relevant for item types that support an insertion cursor;
-\fItypePtr\->icursorProc\fR may be specified as NULL for item types
-that do not support an insertion cursor.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ItemCursorProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIindex\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings, and
-\fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a
-previous call to \fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR.
-The type manager should position the insertion cursor in the
-item just before the character given by \fIindex\fR.
-Whether or not to actually display the insertion cursor is
-determined by other information provided by \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR.
-.SS SELECTIONPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->selectionProc\fR is invoked by Tk during selection
-retrievals; it must return part or all of the selected text in
-the item (if any).
-It is only relevant for item types that support text;
-\fItypePtr\->selectionProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual
-item types.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ItemSelectionProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIoffset\fR,
-        char *\fIbuffer\fR,
-        int \fImaxBytes\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings.
-\fIoffset\fR is an offset in bytes into the selection where 0 refers
-to the first byte of the selection; it identifies
-the first character that is to be returned in this call.
-\fIbuffer\fR points to an area of memory in which to store the
-requested bytes, and \fImaxBytes\fR specifies the maximum number
-of bytes to return.
-\fIselectionProc\fR should extract up to \fImaxBytes\fR characters
-from the selection and copy them to \fImaxBytes\fR; it should
-return a count of the number of bytes actually copied, which may
-be less than \fImaxBytes\fR if there are not \fIoffset+maxBytes\fR bytes
-in the selection.
-.SS INSERTPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR is invoked by Tk during
-the \fBinsert\fR widget command to insert new text or coordinates into a
-canvas item.
-It is only relevant for item types that support the \fBinsert\fR method;
-\fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR may be specified as NULL for other
-item types.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ItemInsertProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIindex\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIobj\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings.
-\fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a
-previous call to \fItypePtr\->insertProc\fR, and \fIobj\fR
-contains new text to insert just before the character given
-by \fIindex\fR.
-Note that if \fBTK_CONFIG_OBJS\fR is not set in the
-\fItypePtr\->alwaysRedraw\fR field, the \fIobj\fR parameter will
-actually contain a pointer to a constant string to be inserted.
-If the item supports modification of the coordinates list by this
-.PP
-The type manager should insert the text and recompute the bounding
-box in the item's header.
-.SS DCHARSPROC
-.PP
-\fItypePtr\->dCharsProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBdchars\fR
-widget command to delete a range of text from a canvas item or a range of
-coordinates from a pathed item.
-It is only relevant for item types that support text;
-\fItypePtr\->dCharsProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual
-item types that do not want to support coordinate deletion.
-The procedure must match the following prototype:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ItemDCharsProc\fR(
-        Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR,
-        Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR,
-        int \fIfirst\fR,
-        int \fIlast\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-\fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings.
-\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR give the indices of the first and last bytes
-to be deleted, as returned by previous calls to \fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR.
-The type manager should delete the specified characters and update
-the bounding box in the item's header.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_CanvasPsY, Tk_CanvasTextInfo, Tk_CanvasTkwin
-.SH KEYWORDS
-canvas, focus, item type, selection, type manager
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtPhImgFmt.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtPhImgFmt.3
deleted file mode 100644
index c7e792a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtPhImgFmt.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,270 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-'\" Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
-'\"	    Department of Computer Science,
-'\"	    Australian National University.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat \- define new file format for photo images
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR(\fIformatPtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "const Tk_PhotoImageFormat" *formatPtr
-.AP "const Tk_PhotoImageFormat" *formatPtr in
-Structure that defines the new file format.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR is invoked to define a new file format
-for image data for use with photo images.  The code that implements an
-image file format is called an image file format handler, or
-handler for short.  The photo image code
-maintains a list of handlers that can be used to read and
-write data to or from a file.  Some handlers may also
-support reading image data from a string or converting image data to a
-string format.
-The user can specify which handler to use with the \fB\-format\fR
-image configuration option or the \fB\-format\fR option to the
-\fBread\fR and \fBwrite\fR photo image subcommands.
-.PP
-An image file format handler consists of a collection of procedures
-plus a Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure, which contains the name of the
-image file format and pointers to six procedures provided by the
-handler to deal with files and strings in this format.  The
-Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure contains the following fields:
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat {
-    const char *\fIname\fR;
-    Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *\fIfileMatchProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *\fIstringMatchProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageFileReadProc *\fIfileReadProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageStringReadProc *\fIstringReadProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageFileWriteProc *\fIfileWriteProc\fR;
-    Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *\fIstringWriteProc\fR;
-} \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR;
-.CE
-.PP
-The handler need not provide implementations of all six procedures.
-For example, the procedures that handle string data would not be
-provided for a format in which the image data are stored in binary,
-and could therefore contain null characters.  If any procedure is not
-implemented, the corresponding pointer in the Tk_PhotoImageFormat
-structure should be set to NULL.  The handler must provide the
-\fIfileMatchProc\fR procedure if it provides the \fIfileReadProc\fR
-procedure, and the \fIstringMatchProc\fR procedure if it provides the
-\fIstringReadProc\fR procedure.
-.SS NAME
-.PP
-\fIformatPtr->name\fR provides a name for the image type.
-Once \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR returns, this name may be used
-in the \fB\-format\fR photo image configuration and subcommand option.
-The manual page for the photo image (photo(n)) describes how image
-file formats are chosen based on their names and the value given to
-the \fB\-format\fR option. The first character of \fIformatPtr->name\fR
-must not be an uppercase character from the ASCII character set
-(that is, one of the characters \fBA\fR-\fBZ\fR).  Such names are used
-only for legacy interface support (see below).
-.SS FILEMATCHPROC
-.PP
-\fIformatPtr->fileMatchProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
-Tk to call when it is searching for an image file format handler
-suitable for reading data in a given file.
-\fIformatPtr->fileMatchProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileMatchProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Channel \fIchan\fR,
-        const char *\fIfileName\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
-        int *\fIwidthPtr\fR,
-        int *\fIheightPtr\fR,
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIfileName\fR argument is the name of the file containing the
-image data, which is open for reading as \fIchan\fR.  The
-\fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for the
-\fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified.
-If the data in the file appears to be in the format supported by this
-handler, the \fIformatPtr->fileMatchProc\fR procedure should store the
-width and height of the image in *\fIwidthPtr\fR and *\fIheightPtr\fR
-respectively, and return 1.  Otherwise it should return 0.
-.SS STRINGMATCHPROC
-.PP
-\fIformatPtr->stringMatchProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
-Tk to call when it is searching for an image file format handler for
-suitable for reading data from a given string.
-\fIformatPtr->stringMatchProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringMatchProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIdata\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
-        int *\fIwidthPtr\fR,
-        int *\fIheightPtr\fR,
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIdata\fR argument points to the object containing the image
-data.  The \fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for
-the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified.
-If the data in the string appears to be in the format supported by
-this handler, the \fIformatPtr->stringMatchProc\fR procedure should
-store the width and height of the image in *\fIwidthPtr\fR and
-*\fIheightPtr\fR respectively, and return 1.  Otherwise it should
-return 0.
-.SS FILEREADPROC
-.PP
-\fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
-Tk to call to read data from an image file into a photo image.
-\fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileReadProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tcl_Channel \fIchan\fR,
-        const char *\fIfileName\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
-        PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR,
-        int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR,
-        int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR,
-        int \fIsrcX\fR, int \fIsrcY\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was
-invoked to read the image; it should be used for reporting errors.
-The image data is in the file named \fIfileName\fR, which is open for
-reading as \fIchan\fR.  The \fIformat\fR argument contains the
-value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was
-not specified.  The image data in the file, or a subimage of it, is to
-be read into the photo image identified by the handle
-\fIimageHandle\fR.  The subimage of the data in the file is of
-dimensions \fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR and has its top-left corner at
-coordinates (\fIsrcX\fR,\fIsrcY\fR).  It is to be stored in the photo
-image with its top-left corner at coordinates
-(\fIdestX\fR,\fIdestY\fR) using the \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR procedure.
-The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
-.SS STRINGREADPROC
-.PP
-\fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
-Tk to call to read data from a string into a photo image.
-\fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringReadProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIdata\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
-        PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR,
-        int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR,
-        int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR,
-        int \fIsrcX\fR, int \fIsrcY\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was
-invoked to read the image; it should be used for reporting errors.
-The \fIdata\fR argument points to the image data in object form.
-The \fIformat\fR argument contains the
-value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was
-not specified.  The image data in the string, or a subimage of it, is to
-be read into the photo image identified by the handle
-\fIimageHandle\fR.  The subimage of the data in the string is of
-dimensions \fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR and has its top-left corner at
-coordinates (\fIsrcX\fR,\fIsrcY\fR).  It is to be stored in the photo
-image with its top-left corner at coordinates
-(\fIdestX\fR,\fIdestY\fR) using the \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR procedure.
-The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
-.SS FILEWRITEPROC
-.PP
-\fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
-Tk to call to write data from a photo image to a file.
-\fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageFileWriteProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        const char *\fIfileName\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
-        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was
-invoked to write the image; it should be used for reporting errors.
-The image data to be written are in memory and are described by the
-Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by \fIblockPtr\fR; see the
-manual page FindPhoto(3) for details.  The \fIfileName\fR argument
-points to the string giving the name of the file in which to write the
-image data.  The \fIformat\fR argument contains the
-value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was
-not specified.  The format string can contain extra characters
-after the name of the format.  If appropriate, the
-\fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR procedure may interpret these
-characters to specify further details about the image file.
-The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
-.SS STRINGWRITEPROC
-.PP
-\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for
-Tk to call to translate image data from a photo image into a string.
-\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_ImageStringWriteProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR,
-        Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was
-invoked to convert the image; it should be used for reporting errors.
-The image data to be converted are in memory and are described by the
-Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by \fIblockPtr\fR; see the
-manual page FindPhoto(3) for details.  The data for the string
-should be put in the interpreter \fIinterp\fR result.
-The \fIformat\fR argument contains the
-value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was
-not specified.  The format string can contain extra characters
-after the name of the format.  If appropriate, the
-\fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR procedure may interpret these
-characters to specify further details about the image file.
-The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
-.SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT"
-.PP
-In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of all the function pointer
-types stored in fields of a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR struct were
-incompatibly different.  Legacy programs and libraries dating from
-those days may still contain code that defines extended Tk photo image
-formats using the old interface.  The Tk header file will still support
-this legacy interface if the code is compiled with the
-macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR defined.  Alternatively, the legacy interfaces
-are used if the first character of \fIformatPtr->name\fR is an
-uppercase ASCII character (\fBA\fR-\fBZ\fR), and explicit casts
-are used to forgive the type mismatch.  For example,
-.CS
-static Tk_PhotoImageFormat myFormat = {
-    "MyFormat",
-    (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *) FileMatch,
-    NULL,
-    (Tk_ImageFileReadProc *) FileRead,
-    NULL,
-    NULL,
-    NULL
-};
-.CE
-would define a minimal \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR that operates provide
-only file reading capability, where \fBFileMatch\fR and \fBFileRead\fR
-are written according to the legacy interfaces of Tk 8.2 or earlier.
-.PP
-Any stub-enabled extension providing an extended photo image format
-via the legacy interface enabled by the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR macro
-that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the
-Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only
-into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility
-rules.  If a developer needs to generate from such code a file
-that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must
-use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so.
-.PP
-Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy
-interfaces.  Expect their support to go away in Tk 9.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock
-.SH KEYWORDS
-photo image, image file
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtSelHdlr.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtSelHdlr.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 2292ccc..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtSelHdlr.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_CreateSelHandler 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateSelHandler, Tk_DeleteSelHandler \- arrange to handle requests for a selection
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_SelectionProc clientData
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window for which \fIproc\fR will provide selection information.
-.AP Atom selection in
-The name of the selection for which \fIproc\fR will provide
-selection information.
-.AP Atom target in
-Form in which \fIproc\fR can provide the selection (e.g. STRING
-or FILE_NAME).  Corresponds to \fItype\fR arguments in \fBselection\fR
-commands.
-.AP Tk_SelectionProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke whenever the selection is owned by \fItkwin\fR
-and the selection contents are requested in the format given by
-\fItarget\fR.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.AP Atom format in
-If the selection requestor is not in this process, \fIformat\fR determines
-the representation used to transmit the selection to its
-requestor.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR arranges for a particular procedure
-(\fIproc\fR) to be called whenever \fIselection\fR is owned by
-\fItkwin\fR and the selection contents are requested in the
-form given by \fItarget\fR.
-\fITarget\fR should be one of
-the entries defined in the left column of Table 2 of the
-X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM) or
-any other form in which an application is willing to present
-the selection.  The most common form is STRING.
-.PP
-\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
-type \fBTk_SelectionProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_SelectionProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        int \fIoffset\fR,
-        char *\fIbuffer\fR,
-        int \fImaxBytes\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the
-\fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR.
-Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data
-structure containing application-specific information that is
-needed to retrieve the selection.  \fIOffset\fR specifies an
-offset position into the selection, \fIbuffer\fR specifies a
-location at which to copy information about the selection, and
-\fImaxBytes\fR specifies the amount of space available at
-\fIbuffer\fR.  \fIProc\fR should place a NULL-terminated string
-at \fIbuffer\fR containing \fImaxBytes\fR or fewer characters
-(not including the terminating NULL), and it should return a
-count of the number of non-NULL characters stored at
-\fIbuffer\fR.  If the selection no longer exists (e.g. it once
-existed but the user deleted the range of characters containing
-it), then \fIproc\fR should return \-1.
-.PP
-When transferring large selections, Tk will break them up into
-smaller pieces (typically a few thousand bytes each) for more
-efficient transmission.  It will do this by calling \fIproc\fR
-one or more times, using successively higher values of \fIoffset\fR
-to retrieve successive portions of the selection.  If \fIproc\fR
-returns a count less than \fImaxBytes\fR it means that the entire
-remainder of the selection has been returned.  If \fIproc\fR's return
-value is \fImaxBytes\fR it means there may be additional information
-in the selection, so Tk must make another call to \fIproc\fR to
-retrieve the next portion.
-.PP
-\fIProc\fR always returns selection information in the form of a
-character string.  However, the ICCCM allows for information to
-be transmitted from the selection owner to the selection requestor
-in any of several formats, such as a string, an array of atoms, an
-array of integers, etc.  The \fIformat\fR argument to
-\fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR indicates what format should be used to
-transmit the selection to its requestor (see the middle column of
-Table 2 of the ICCCM for examples).  If \fIformat\fR is not
-STRING, then Tk will take the value returned by \fIproc\fR and divided
-it into fields separated by white space.  If \fIformat\fR is ATOM,
-then Tk will return the selection as an array of atoms, with each
-field in \fIproc\fR's result treated as the name of one atom.  For
-any other value of \fIformat\fR, Tk will return the selection as an
-array of 32-bit values where each field of \fIproc\fR's result is
-treated as a number and translated to a 32-bit value.  In any event,
-the \fIformat\fR atom is returned to the selection requestor along
-with the contents of the selection.
-.PP
-If \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR is called when there already exists a
-handler for \fIselection\fR and \fItarget\fR on \fItkwin\fR, then the
-existing handler is replaced with a new one.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR removes the handler given by \fItkwin\fR,
-\fIselection\fR, and \fItarget\fR, if such a handler exists.
-If there is no such handler then it has no effect.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-format, handler, selection, target
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/CrtWindow.3 b/tk8.6/doc/CrtWindow.3
deleted file mode 100644
index b254460..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/CrtWindow.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_CreateWindow 3 4.2 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateWindow, Tk_CreateWindowFromPath, Tk_DestroyWindow, Tk_MakeWindowExist \- create or delete window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_CreateWindow\fR(\fIinterp, parent, name, topLevScreen\fR)
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR(\fIinterp, parent, topLevScreen\fR)
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, pathName, topLevScreen\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *topLevScreen
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
-Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting.  If no error occurs,
-then \fI*interp\fR is not modified.
-.AP Tk_Window parent in
-Token for the window that is to serve as the logical parent of
-the new window.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Name to use for this window.  Must be unique among all children of
-the same \fIparent\fR.
-.AP "const char" *topLevScreen in
-Has same format as \fIscreenName\fR.  If NULL, then new window is
-created as an internal window.  If non-NULL, new window is created as
-a top-level window on screen \fItopLevScreen\fR.  If \fItopLevScreen\fR
-is an empty string
-.PQ ""
-then new window is created as top-level window of \fIparent\fR's screen.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP "const char" *pathName in
-Name of new window, specified as path name within application
-(e.g. \fB.a.b.c\fR).
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The procedures \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR,
-\fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR, and \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR
-are used to create new windows for
-use in Tk-based applications.  Each of the procedures returns a token
-that can be used to manipulate the window in other calls to the Tk
-library.  If the window could not be created successfully, then NULL
-is returned and the result of interpreter \fIinterp\fR is modified to
-hold an error message.
-.PP
-Tk supports two different kinds of windows:  internal
-windows and top-level windows.
-An internal window is an interior window of a Tk application, such as a
-scrollbar or menu bar or button.  A top-level window is one that is
-created as a child of a screen's root window, rather than as an
-interior window, but which is logically part of some existing main
-window.  Examples of top-level windows are pop-up menus and dialog boxes.
-.PP
-New windows may be created by calling
-\fBTk_CreateWindow\fR.  If the \fItopLevScreen\fR argument is
-NULL, then the new window will be an internal window.  If
-\fItopLevScreen\fR is non-NULL, then the new window will be a
-top-level window: \fItopLevScreen\fR indicates the name of
-a screen and the new window will be created as a child of the
-root window of \fItopLevScreen\fR.  In either case Tk will
-consider the new window to be the logical child of \fIparent\fR:
-the new window's path name will reflect this fact, options may
-be specified for the new window under this assumption, and so on.
-The only difference is that new X window for a top-level window
-will not be a child of \fIparent\fR's X window.  For example, a pull-down
-menu's \fIparent\fR would be the button-like window used to invoke it,
-which would in turn be a child of the menu bar window.  A dialog box might
-have the application's main window as its parent.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR differs from \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR in
-that it creates an unnamed window.  This window will be manipulatable
-only using C interfaces, and will not be visible to Tcl scripts.  Both
-interior windows and top-level windows may be created with
-\fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR offers an alternate way of specifying
-new windows.  In \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR the new
-window is specified with a token for any window in the target
-application (\fItkwin\fR), plus a path name for the new window.
-It produces the same effect as \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR and allows
-both top-level and internal windows to be created, depending on
-the value of \fItopLevScreen\fR.  In calls to \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR,
-as in calls to \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR, the parent of the new window
-must exist at the time of the call, but the new window must not
-already exist.
-.PP
-The window creation procedures do not
-actually issue the command to X to create a window.
-Instead, they create a local data structure associated with
-the window and defer the creation of the X window.
-The window will actually be created by the first call to
-\fBTk_MapWindow\fR.  Deferred window creation allows various
-aspects of the window (such as its size, background color,
-etc.) to be modified after its creation without incurring
-any overhead in the X server.  When the window is finally
-mapped all of the window attributes can be set while creating
-the window.
-.PP
-The value returned by a window-creation procedure is not the
-X token for the window (it cannot be, since X has not been
-asked to create the window yet).  Instead, it is a token
-for Tk's local data structure for the window.  Most
-of the Tk library procedures take Tk_Window tokens, rather
-than X identifiers.  The actual
-X window identifier can be retrieved from the local
-data structure using the \fBTk_WindowId\fR macro;  see
-the manual entry for \fBTk_WindowId\fR for details.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR deletes a window and all the data
-structures associated with it, including any event handlers
-created with \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR.  In addition,
-\fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR will delete any children of \fItkwin\fR
-recursively (where children are defined in the Tk sense, consisting
-of all windows that were created with the given window as \fIparent\fR).
-If \fItkwin\fR is an internal window, then event
-handlers interested in destroy events
-are invoked immediately.  If \fItkwin\fR is a top-level or main window,
-then the event handlers will be invoked later, after X has seen
-the request and returned an event for it.
-.PP
-If a window has been created
-but has not been mapped, so no X window exists, it is
-possible to force the creation of the X window by
-calling \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR.  This procedure issues
-the X commands to instantiate the window given by \fItkwin\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-create, deferred creation, destroy, display, internal window,
-screen, top-level window, window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/DeleteImg.3 b/tk8.6/doc/DeleteImg.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 507be72..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/DeleteImg.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_DeleteImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_DeleteImage \- Destroy an image.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteImage\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter for which the image was created.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Name of the image.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteImage\fR deletes the image given by \fIinterp\fR
-and \fIname\fR, if there is one.  All instances of that image
-will redisplay as empty regions.  If the given image does not
-exist then the procedure has no effect.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-delete image, image manager
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/DrawFocHlt.3 b/tk8.6/doc/DrawFocHlt.3
deleted file mode 100644
index e2d1578..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/DrawFocHlt.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_DrawFocusHighlight 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_DrawFocusHighlight(\fItkwin, gc, width, drawable\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window for which the highlight is being drawn.  Used to retrieve
-the window's dimensions, among other things.
-.AP GC gc in
-Graphics context to use for drawing the highlight.
-.AP int width in
-Width of the highlight ring, in pixels.
-.AP Drawable drawable in
-Drawable in which to draw the highlight;  usually an offscreen
-pixmap for double buffering.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_DrawFocusHighlight\fR is a utility procedure that draws the
-traversal highlight ring for a widget.
-It is typically invoked by widgets during redisplay.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-focus, traversal highlight
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/EventHndlr.3 b/tk8.6/doc/EventHndlr.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 97857fb..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/EventHndlr.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_CreateEventHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateEventHandler, Tk_DeleteEventHandler \- associate procedure callback with an X event
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "unsigned long" clientData
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which events may occur.
-.AP "unsigned long" mask in
-Bit-mask of events (such as \fBButtonPressMask\fR)
-for which \fIproc\fR should be called.
-.AP Tk_EventProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke whenever an event in \fImask\fR occurs
-in the window given by \fItkwin\fR.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be
-invoked in the future whenever one of the event types specified
-by \fImask\fR occurs in the window specified by \fItkwin\fR.
-The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR;
-this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events
-through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that
-call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or
-\fBTk_MainLoop\fR).
-.PP
-\fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
-type \fBTk_EventProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_EventProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR
-argument given to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR when the callback
-was created.  Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data
-structure containing application-specific information about
-the window in which the event occurred.  \fIEventPtr\fR is
-a pointer to the X event, which will be one of the ones
-specified in the \fImask\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR may be called to delete a
-previously-created event handler:  it deletes the first handler
-it finds that is associated with \fItkwin\fR and matches the
-\fImask\fR, \fIproc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR arguments.  If
-no such handler exists, then \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR returns
-without doing anything.  Although Tk supports it, it's probably
-a bad idea to have more than one callback with the same \fImask\fR,
-\fIproc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR arguments.
-When a window is deleted all of its handlers will be deleted
-automatically;  in this case there is no need to call
-\fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR.
-.PP
-If multiple handlers are declared for the same type of X event
-on the same window, then the handlers will be invoked in the
-order they were created.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bind, callback, event, handler
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/FindPhoto.3 b/tk8.6/doc/FindPhoto.3
deleted file mode 100644
index dc218bf..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/FindPhoto.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,283 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
-'\"	    Department of Computer Science,
-'\"	    Australian National University.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_FindPhoto 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock, Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock, Tk_PhotoGetImage, Tk_PhotoBlank, Tk_PhotoExpand, Tk_PhotoGetSize, Tk_PhotoSetSize \- manipulate the image data stored in a photo image.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_PhotoHandle
-\fBTk_FindPhoto\fR(\fIinterp, imageName\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\
-compRule\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\
-zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR(\fIhandle, blockPtr\fR)
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR(\fIhandle\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR(\fIinterp, handle, width, height\fR)
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR(\fIhandle, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR(\fIinterp. handle, width, height\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_PhotoImageBlock window_path
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter in which image was created and in which error reporting is
-to be done.
-.AP "const char" *imageName in
-Name of the photo image.
-.AP Tk_PhotoHandle handle in
-Opaque handle identifying the photo image to be affected.
-.AP Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr in
-Specifies the address and storage layout of image data.
-.AP int x in
-Specifies the X coordinate where the top-left corner of the block is
-to be placed within the image.
-.AP int y in
-Specifies the Y coordinate where the top-left corner of the block is
-to be placed within the image.
-.AP int width in
-Specifies the width of the image area to be affected (for
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR) or the desired image width (for
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR and \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR).
-.AP int compRule in
-Specifies the compositing rule used when combining transparent pixels
-in a block of data with a photo image.  Must be one of
-\fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY\fR (which puts the block of data over the top
-of the existing photo image, with the previous contents showing
-through in the transparent bits) or \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET\fR (which
-discards the existing photo image contents in the rectangle covered by
-the data block.)
-.AP int height in
-Specifies the height of the image area to be affected (for
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR) or the desired image height (for
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR and \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR).
-.AP int *widthPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store the image width.
-.AP int *heightPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store the image height.
-.AP int subsampleX in
-Specifies the subsampling factor in the X direction for input
-image data.
-.AP int subsampleY in
-Specifies the subsampling factor in the Y direction for input
-image data.
-.AP int zoomX in
-Specifies the zoom factor to be applied in the X direction to pixels
-being written to the photo image.
-.AP int zoomY in
-Specifies the zoom factor to be applied in the Y direction to pixels
-being written to the photo image.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_FindPhoto\fR returns an opaque handle that is used to identify a
-particular photo image to the other procedures.  The parameter is the
-name of the image, that is, the name specified to the \fBimage create
-photo\fR command, or assigned by that command if no name was specified.
-If \fIimageName\fR does not exist or is not a photo image,
-\fBTk_FindPhoto\fR returns NULL.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR is used to supply blocks of image data to be
-displayed.  The call affects an area of the image of size
-\fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR pixels, with its top-left corner at
-coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR).  All of \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR,
-\fIx\fR, and \fIy\fR must be non-negative.
-If part of this area lies outside the
-current bounds of the image, the image will be expanded to include the
-area, unless the user has specified an explicit image size with the
-\fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR widget configuration options
-(see photo(n)); in that
-case the area is silently clipped to the image boundaries.
-.PP
-The \fIblock\fR parameter is a pointer to a
-\fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR structure, defined as follows:
-.CS
-typedef struct {
-    unsigned char *\fIpixelPtr\fR;
-    int \fIwidth\fR;
-    int \fIheight\fR;
-    int \fIpitch\fR;
-    int \fIpixelSize\fR;
-    int \fIoffset\fR[4];
-} \fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR;
-.CE
-The \fIpixelPtr\fR field points to the first pixel, that is, the
-top-left pixel in the block.
-The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR fields specify the dimensions of the
-block of pixels.  The \fIpixelSize\fR field specifies the address
-difference between two horizontally adjacent pixels.  It should be 4 for
-RGB and 2 for grayscale image data.  Other values are possible, if the
-offsets in the \fIoffset\fR array are adjusted accordingly (e.g. for
-red, green and blue data stored in different planes).  Using such a
-layout is strongly discouraged, though. Due to a bug, it might not work
-correctly if an alpha channel is provided. (see the \fBBUGS\fR section
-below). The \fIpitch\fR field specifies the
-address difference between two vertically adjacent pixels.  The
-\fIoffset\fR array contains the offsets from the address of a pixel
-to the addresses of the bytes containing the red, green, blue and alpha
-(transparency) components.  If the offsets for red, green and blue are
-equal, the image is interpreted as grayscale. If they differ, RGB data
-is assumed. Normally the offsets will be 0, 1, 2, 3 for RGB data
-and 0, 0, 0, 1 for grayscale.  It is possible to provide image data
-without an alpha channel by setting the offset for alpha to a negative
-value and adjusting the \fIpixelSize\fR field accordingly. This use is
-discouraged, though (see the \fBBUGS\fR section below).
-.PP
-The \fIcompRule\fR parameter to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR specifies a
-compositing rule that says what to do with transparent pixels.  The
-value \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY\fR says that the previous contents of
-the photo image should show through, and the value
-\fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET\fR says that the previous contents of the photo
-image should be completely ignored, and the values from the block be
-copied directly across.  The behavior in Tk8.3 and earlier was
-equivalent to having \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY\fR as a compositing rule.
-.PP
-The value given for the \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR parameters to
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR do not have to correspond to the values specified
-in \fIblock\fR.  If they are smaller, \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR extracts a
-sub-block from the image data supplied.  If they are larger, the data
-given are replicated (in a tiled fashion) to fill the specified area.
-These rules operate independently in the horizontal and vertical
-directions.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, though if it cannot
-allocate sufficient memory to hold the resulting image, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is
-returned instead and, if the \fIinterp\fR argument is non-NULL, an
-error message is placed in the interpreter's result.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR works like \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR except that
-the image can be reduced or enlarged for display.  The
-\fIsubsampleX\fR and \fIsubsampleY\fR parameters allow the size of the
-image to be reduced by subsampling.
-\fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR will use only pixels from the input image
-whose X coordinates are multiples of \fIsubsampleX\fR, and whose Y
-coordinates are multiples of \fIsubsampleY\fR.  For example, an image
-of 512x512 pixels can be reduced to 256x256 by setting
-\fIsubsampleX\fR and \fIsubsampleY\fR to 2.
-.PP
-The \fIzoomX\fR and \fIzoomY\fR parameters allow the image to be
-enlarged by pixel replication.  Each pixel of the (possibly subsampled)
-input image will be written to a block \fIzoomX\fR pixels wide and
-\fIzoomY\fR pixels high of the displayed image.  Subsampling and
-zooming can be used together for special effects.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR can be used to retrieve image data from a photo
-image.  \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR fills
-in the structure pointed to by the \fIblockPtr\fR parameter with values
-that describe the address and layout of the image data that the
-photo image has stored internally.  The values are valid
-until the image is destroyed or its size is changed.
-.PP
-It is possible to modify an image by writing directly to the data
-the \fIpixelPtr\fR field points to. The size of the image cannot be
-changed this way, though.
-Also, changes made by writing directly to \fIpixelPtr\fR will not be
-immediately visible, but only after a call to
-\fBTk_ImageChanged\fR or after an event that causes the interested
-widgets to redraw themselves.
-For these reasons usually it is preferable to make changes to
-a copy of the image data and write it back with
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR or \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR returns 1 for compatibility with the
-corresponding procedure in the old photo widget.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR blanks the entire area of the
-photo image.  Blank areas of a photo image are transparent.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR requests that the widget's image be expanded to be
-at least \fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR pixels in size.  The width and/or
-height are unchanged if the user has specified an explicit image width
-or height with the \fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR configuration
-options, respectively.
-If the image data
-are being supplied in many small blocks, it is more efficient to use
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR or \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR at the beginning rather than
-allowing the image to expand in many small increments as image blocks
-are supplied.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, though if it cannot
-allocate sufficient memory to hold the resulting image, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is
-returned instead and, if the \fIinterp\fR argument is non-NULL, an
-error message is placed in the interpreter's result.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR specifies the size of the image, as if the user
-had specified the given \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR values to the
-\fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR configuration options.  A value of
-zero for \fIwidth\fR or \fIheight\fR does not change the image's width
-or height, but allows the width or height to be changed by subsequent
-calls to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR, \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR or
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, though if it cannot
-allocate sufficient memory to hold the resulting image, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is
-returned instead and, if the \fIinterp\fR argument is non-NULL, an
-error message is placed in the interpreter's result.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR returns the dimensions of the image in
-*\fIwidthPtr\fR and *\fIheightPtr\fR.
-.SH PORTABILITY
-.PP
-In Tk 8.3 and earlier, \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR and
-\fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR had different signatures. If you want to
-compile code that uses the old interface against 8.4 without updating
-your code, compile it with the flag
--DUSE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK.  Code linked using Stubs against
-older versions of Tk will continue to work.
-.PP
-In Tk 8.4, \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR, \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR,
-\fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR and \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR did not take an
-\fIinterp\fR argument or return any result code.  If insufficient
-memory was available for an image, Tk would panic.  This behaviour is
-still supported if you compile your extension with the additional flag
--DUSE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE.  Code linked using Stubs against
-older versions of Tk will continue to work.
-.SH BUGS
-The \fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR structure used to provide image data to
-\fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR promises great flexibility in the layout of the
-data (e.g. separate planes for the red, green, blue and alpha
-channels).  Unfortunately, the implementation fails to hold this
-promise.  The problem is that the \fIpixelSize\fR field is
-(incorrectly) used to determine whether the image has an alpha channel.
-Currently, if the offset for the alpha channel is greater or equal than
-\fIpixelSize\fR, \fBtk_PhotoPutblock\fR assumes no alpha data is
-present and makes the image fully opaque.  This means that for layouts
-where the channels are separate (or any other exotic layout where
-\fIpixelSize\fR has to be smaller than the alpha offset), the alpha
-channel will not be read correctly.  In order to be on the safe side
-if this issue will be corrected in a future release, it is strongly
-recommended you always provide alpha data - even if the image has no
-transparency - and only use the "standard" layout with a
-\fIpixelSize\fR of 2 for grayscale and 4 for RGB data with
-\fIoffset\fRs of 0, 0, 0, 1 or 0, 1, 2, 3 respectively.
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-The code for the photo image type was developed by Paul Mackerras,
-based on his earlier photo widget code.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-photo, image
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/FontId.3 b/tk8.6/doc/FontId.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 9d35ae6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/FontId.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_FontId 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_FontId, Tk_GetFontMetrics, Tk_PostscriptFontName \- accessor functions for
-fonts
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Font
-\fBTk_FontId(\fItkfont\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_GetFontMetrics(\fItkfont, fmPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_PostscriptFontName(\fItkfont, dsPtr\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_FontMetrics *dsPtr
-.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
-Opaque font token being queried.  Must have been returned by a previous
-call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
-.AP Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr out
-Pointer to structure in which the font metrics for \fItkfont\fR will
-be stored. See \fBDATA STRUCTURES\fR below for details.
-.AP Tcl_DString *dsPtr out
-Pointer to an initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR to which the name of the
-Postscript font that corresponds to \fItkfont\fR will be appended.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Given a \fItkfont\fR, \fBTk_FontId\fR returns the token that should be
-selected into an XGCValues structure in order to construct a graphics
-context that can be used to draw text in the specified font.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR computes the ascent, descent, and linespace of the
-\fItkfont\fR in pixels and stores those values in the structure pointer to by
-\fIfmPtr\fR.  These values can be used in computations such as to space
-multiple lines of text, to align the baselines of text in different
-fonts, and to vertically align text in a given region.  See the
-documentation for the \fBfont\fR command for definitions of the terms
-ascent, descent, and linespace, used in font metrics.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PostscriptFontName\fR maps a \fItkfont\fR to the corresponding
-Postscript font name that should be used when printing.  The return value
-is the size in points of the \fItkfont\fR and the Postscript font name is
-appended to \fIdsPtr\fR.  \fIDsPtr\fR must refer to an initialized
-\fBTcl_DString\fR.  Given a
-.QW reasonable
-Postscript printer, the
-following screen font families should print correctly:
-.IP
-\fBAvant Garde\fR, \fBArial\fR, \fBBookman\fR, \fBCourier\fR,
-\fBCourier New\fR, \fBGeneva\fR, \fBHelvetica\fR, \fBMonaco\fR,
-\fBNew Century Schoolbook\fR, \fBNew York\fR, \fBPalatino\fR, \fBSymbol\fR,
-\fBTimes\fR, \fBTimes New Roman\fR, \fBZapf Chancery\fR, and
-\fBZapf Dingbats\fR.
-.PP
-Any other font families may not print correctly because the computed
-Postscript font name may be incorrect or not exist on the printer.
-.SH "DATA STRUCTURES"
-.PP
-The \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR data structure is used by \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR to
-return information about a font and is defined as follows:
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_FontMetrics {
-    int \fIascent\fR;
-    int \fIdescent\fR;
-    int \fIlinespace\fR;
-} \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR;
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIascent\fR field is the amount in pixels that the tallest
-letter sticks up above the baseline, plus any extra blank space added
-by the designer of the font.
-.PP
-The \fIdescent\fR is the largest amount in pixels that any letter
-sticks below the baseline, plus any extra blank space added by the
-designer of the font.
-.PP
-The \fIlinespace\fR is the sum of the ascent and descent.  How far
-apart two lines of text in the same font should be placed so that none
-of the characters in one line overlap any of the characters in the
-other line.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-font(n), MeasureChar(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-font, measurement, Postscript
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/FreeXId.3 b/tk8.6/doc/FreeXId.3
deleted file mode 100644
index dd1d141..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/FreeXId.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_FreeXId 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_FreeXId \- make X resource identifier available for reuse
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeXId(\fIdisplay, id\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Display *display out
-.AP Display *display in
-Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated.
-.AP XID id in
-Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics
-context, or colormap) that is no longer in use.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The default allocator for resource identifiers provided by Xlib is very
-simple-minded and does not allow resource identifiers to be re-used.
-If a long-running application reaches the end of the resource id
-space, it will generate an X protocol error and crash.
-Tk replaces the default id allocator with its own allocator, which
-allows identifiers to be reused.
-In order for this to work, \fBTk_FreeXId\fR must be called to
-tell the allocator about resources that have been freed.
-Tk automatically calls \fBTk_FreeXId\fR whenever it frees a
-resource, so if you use procedures like \fBTk_GetFont\fR,
-\fBTk_GetGC\fR, and \fBTk_GetPixmap\fR then you need not call
-\fBTk_FreeXId\fR.
-However, if you allocate resources directly from Xlib, for example
-by calling \fBXCreatePixmap\fR, then you should call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR
-when you call the corresponding Xlib free procedure, such as
-\fBXFreePixmap\fR.
-If you do not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR then the resource identifier will
-be lost, which could cause problems if the application runs long enough
-to lose all of the available identifiers.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-resource identifier
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GeomReq.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GeomReq.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 895f683..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GeomReq.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GeometryRequest 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GeometryRequest, Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize, Tk_SetInternalBorder, Tk_SetInternalBorderEx \- specify desired geometry or internal border for a window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR(\fItkwin, minWidth, minHeight\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR(\fItkwin, width\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR(\fItkwin, left, right, top, bottom\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS baseHeight clientData
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window for which geometry is being requested.
-.AP int reqWidth in
-Desired width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int reqHeight in
-Desired height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int minWidth in
-Desired minimum requested width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int minHeight in
-Desired minimum requested height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int width in
-Space to leave for internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int left in
-Space to leave for left side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int right in
-Space to leave for right side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int top in
-Space to leave for top side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.AP int bottom in
-Space to leave for bottom side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR is called by widget code to indicate its
-preference for the dimensions of a particular window.  The arguments
-to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR are made available to the geometry
-manager for the window, which then decides on the actual geometry
-for the window.  Although geometry managers generally try to satisfy
-requests made to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR, there is no guarantee that
-this will always be possible.  Widget code should not assume that
-a geometry request will be satisfied until it receives a
-\fBConfigureNotify\fR event indicating that the geometry change has
-occurred.  Widget code should never call procedures like
-\fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR directly.  Instead, it should invoke
-\fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR and leave the final geometry decisions to
-the geometry manager.
-.PP
-If \fItkwin\fR is a top-level window, then the geometry information
-will be passed to the window manager using the standard ICCCM protocol.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR is called by widget code to indicate that
-the widget has an internal border.  This means that the widget draws
-a decorative border inside the window instead of using the standard
-X borders, which are external to the window's area.  For example,
-internal borders are used to draw 3-D effects.  \fIWidth\fR
-specifies the width of the border in pixels.  Geometry managers will
-use this information to avoid placing any children of \fItkwin\fR
-overlapping the outermost \fIwidth\fR pixels of \fItkwin\fR's area.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR works like \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR
-but lets you specify different widths for different sides of the window.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR is called by widget code to indicate
-that a geometry manager should request at least this size for the
-widget.  This allows a widget to have some control over its size when
-a propagating geometry manager is used inside it.
-.PP
-The information specified in calls to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR,
-\fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR, \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR and
-\fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR can be retrieved using the macros
-\fBTk_ReqWidth\fR, \fBTk_ReqHeight\fR, \fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR,
-\fBTk_MinReqHeight\fR, \fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderLeft\fR,
-\fBTk_InternalBorderRight\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderTop\fR and
-\fBTk_InternalBorderBottom\fR.
-See the \fBTk_WindowId\fR manual entry for details.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-geometry, request
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetAnchor.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetAnchor.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 6526772..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetAnchor.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetAnchorFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetAnchorFromObj, Tk_GetAnchor, Tk_NameOfAnchor \- translate between strings and anchor positions
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, anchorPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetAnchor(\fIinterp, string, anchorPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfAnchor(\fIanchor\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tk_Anchor" *anchorPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-String value contains name of anchor point:
-.QW \fBn\fR  ,
-.QW \fBne\fR ,
-.QW \fBe\fR  ,
-.QW \fBse\fR ,
-.QW \fBs\fR  ,
-.QW \fBsw\fR ,
-.QW \fBw\fR  ,
-.QW \fBnw\fR ,
-or
-.QW \fBcenter\fR ;
-internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding Tk_Anchor. In the
-case of
-.QW \fBcenter\fR
-on input, a non-empty abbreviation of it may also be used on input.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of anchor point is passed as
-a string.
-.AP int *anchorPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store anchor position corresponding to
-\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR.
-.AP Tk_Anchor anchor in
-Anchor position, e.g. \fBTCL_ANCHOR_CENTER\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR places in \fI*anchorPtr\fR an anchor position
-(enumerated type \fBTk_Anchor\fR)
-corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value.  The result will be one of
-\fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_NE\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_E\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_SE\fR,
-\fBTK_ANCHOR_S\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_SW\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_W\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_NW\fR,
-or \fBTK_ANCHOR_CENTER\fR.
-Anchor positions are typically used for indicating a point on an object
-that will be used to position the object, e.g. \fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR means
-position the top center point of the object at a particular place.
-.PP
-Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and
-\fIinterp\fR is unused.
-If \fIstring\fR does not contain a valid anchor position
-or an abbreviation of one of these names, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned,
-\fI*anchorPtr\fR is unmodified, and an error message is
-stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.
-\fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR caches information about the return
-value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to
-\fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetAnchor\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR except
-that the description of the anchor is specified with a string instead
-of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR from caching the
-return value, so \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_NameOfAnchor\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR.
-Given an anchor position such as \fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR it returns a
-statically-allocated string corresponding to \fIanchor\fR.
-If \fIanchor\fR is not a legal anchor value, then
-.QW "unknown anchor position"
-is returned.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-anchor position
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetBitmap.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetBitmap.3
deleted file mode 100644
index c4ac44e..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetBitmap.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,296 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj, Tk_GetBitmap, Tk_GetBitmapFromObj, Tk_DefineBitmap, Tk_NameOfBitmap, Tk_SizeOfBitmap, Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, Tk_FreeBitmap \- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Pixmap
-\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Pixmap
-\fBTk_GetBitmap(\fIinterp, tkwin, info\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Pixmap
-\fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_DefineBitmap(\fIinterp, name, source, width, height\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_SizeOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting; if NULL then no error message
-is left after errors.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which the bitmap will be used.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-String value describes desired bitmap; internal rep will be
-modified to cache pointer to corresponding Pixmap.
-.AP "const char" *info in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of bitmap is passed as a string and
-resulting Pixmap is not cached.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Name for new bitmap to be defined.
-.AP "const void" *source in
-Data for bitmap, in standard bitmap format.
-Must be stored in static memory whose value will never change.
-.AP "int" width in
-Width of bitmap.
-.AP "int" height in
-Height of bitmap.
-.AP "int" *widthPtr out
-Pointer to word to fill in with \fIbitmap\fR's width.
-.AP "int" *heightPtr out
-Pointer to word to fill in with \fIbitmap\fR's height.
-.AP Display *display in
-Display for which \fIbitmap\fR was allocated.
-.AP Pixmap bitmap in
-Identifier for a bitmap allocated by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures manage a collection of bitmaps (one-plane pixmaps)
-being used by an application.  The procedures allow bitmaps to be
-re-used efficiently, thereby avoiding server overhead, and also
-allow bitmaps to be named with character strings.
-.PP
-\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns a Pixmap identifier for a bitmap
-that matches the description in \fIobjPtr\fR and is suitable for use
-in \fItkwin\fR.  It re-uses an existing bitmap, if possible, and
-creates a new one otherwise.  \fIObjPtr\fR's value must have one
-of the following forms:
-.TP 20
-\fB@\fIfileName\fR
-\fIFileName\fR must be the name of a file containing a bitmap
-description in the standard X11 format.
-.TP 20
-\fIname\fR
-\fIName\fR must be the name of a bitmap defined previously with
-a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR.  The following names are pre-defined
-by Tk:
-.RS
-.TP 12
-\fBerror\fR
-The international
-.QW don't
-symbol:  a circle with a diagonal line across it.
-.TP 12
-\fBgray75\fR
-75% gray: a checkerboard pattern where three out of four bits are on.
-.TP 12
-\fBgray50\fR
-50% gray: a checkerboard pattern where every other bit is on.
-.TP 12
-\fBgray25\fR
-25% gray: a checkerboard pattern where one out of every four bits is on.
-.TP 12
-\fBgray12\fR
-12.5% gray: a pattern where one-eighth of the bits are on, consisting of
-every fourth pixel in every other row.
-.TP 12
-\fBhourglass\fR
-An hourglass symbol.
-.TP 12
-\fBinfo\fR
-A large letter
-.QW i .
-.TP 12
-\fBquesthead\fR
-The silhouette of a human head, with a question mark in it.
-.TP 12
-\fBquestion\fR
-A large question-mark.
-.TP 12
-\fBwarning\fR
-A large exclamation point.
-.PP
-In addition, the following pre-defined names are available only on the
-\fBMacintosh\fR platform:
-.TP 12
-\fBdocument\fR
-A generic document.
-.TP 12
-\fBstationery\fR
-Document stationery.
-.TP 12
-\fBedition\fR
-The \fIedition\fR symbol.
-.TP 12
-\fBapplication\fR
-Generic application icon.
-.TP 12
-\fBaccessory\fR
-A desk accessory.
-.TP 12
-\fBfolder\fR
-Generic folder icon.
-.TP 12
-\fBpfolder\fR
-A locked folder.
-.TP 12
-\fBtrash\fR
-A trash can.
-.TP 12
-\fBfloppy\fR
-A floppy disk.
-.TP 12
-\fBramdisk\fR
-A floppy disk with chip.
-.TP 12
-\fBcdrom\fR
-A cd disk icon.
-.TP 12
-\fBpreferences\fR
-A folder with prefs symbol.
-.TP 12
-\fBquerydoc\fR
-A database document icon.
-.TP 12
-\fBstop\fR
-A stop sign.
-.TP 12
-\fBnote\fR
-A face with balloon words.
-.TP 12
-\fBcaution\fR
-A triangle with an exclamation point.
-.RE
-.LP
-Under normal conditions, \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR
-returns an identifier for the requested bitmap.  If an error
-occurs in creating the bitmap, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers
-to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error
-message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not
-NULL. \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR caches information about the return
-value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to procedures
-such as \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR except
-that the description of the bitmap is specified with a string instead
-of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR from caching the
-return value, so \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing bitmap, given
-the window and description used to create the bitmap.
-\fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR does not actually create the bitmap; the bitmap
-must already have been created with a previous call to
-\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.  The return
-value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
-future calls to \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
-and \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR associates a name with
-in-memory bitmap data so that the name can be used in later
-calls to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.  The \fInameId\fR
-argument gives a name for the bitmap;  it must not previously
-have been used in a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR.
-The arguments \fIsource\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR
-describe the bitmap.
-\fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs
-(e.g. a bitmap named \fInameId\fR has already been defined) then
-\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in
-interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
-Note:  \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR expects the memory pointed to by
-\fIsource\fR to be static:  \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR does not make
-a private copy of this memory, but uses the bytes pointed to
-by \fIsource\fR later in calls to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-.PP
-Typically \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR is used by \fB#include\fR-ing a
-bitmap file directly into a C program and then referencing
-the variables defined by the file.
-For example, suppose there exists a file \fBstip.bitmap\fR,
-which was created by the \fBbitmap\fR program and contains
-a stipple pattern.
-The following code uses \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR to define a
-new bitmap named \fBfoo\fR:
-.CS
-Pixmap bitmap;
-#include "stip.bitmap"
-Tk_DefineBitmap(interp, "foo", stip_bits,
-    stip_width, stip_height);
-\&...
-bitmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, "foo");
-.CE
-This code causes the bitmap file to be read
-at compile-time and incorporates the bitmap information into
-the program's executable image.  The same bitmap file could be
-read at run-time using \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR:
-.CS
-Pixmap bitmap;
-bitmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, "@stip.bitmap");
-.CE
-The second form is a bit more flexible (the file could be modified
-after the program has been compiled, or a different string could be
-provided to read a different file), but it is a little slower and
-requires the bitmap file to exist separately from the program.
-.PP
-Tk maintains a database of all the bitmaps that are currently in use.
-Whenever possible, it will return an existing bitmap rather
-than creating a new one.
-When a bitmap is no longer used, Tk will release it automatically.
-This approach can substantially reduce server overhead, so
-\fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR should generally
-be used in preference to Xlib procedures like \fBXReadBitmapFile\fR.
-.PP
-The bitmaps returned by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR
-are shared, so callers should never modify them.
-If a bitmap must be modified dynamically, then it should be
-created by calling Xlib procedures such as \fBXReadBitmapFile\fR
-or \fBXCreatePixmap\fR directly.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_NameOfBitmap\fR is roughly the inverse of
-\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-Given an X Pixmap argument, it returns the textual description that was
-passed to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR when the bitmap was created.
-\fIBitmap\fR must have been the return value from a previous
-call to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SizeOfBitmap\fR returns the dimensions of its \fIbitmap\fR
-argument in the words pointed to by the \fIwidthPtr\fR and
-\fIheightPtr\fR arguments.  As with \fBTk_NameOfBitmap\fR,
-\fIbitmap\fR must have been created by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-.PP
-When a bitmap is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR should be called to release it.
-For \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj\fR the bitmap to release is specified
-with the same information used to create it; for
-\fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR the bitmap to release is specified
-with its Pixmap token.
-There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj\fR
-or \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR for each call to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-In determining whether an existing bitmap can be used to satisfy
-a new request, \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR
-consider only the immediate value of the string description.  For
-example, when a file name is passed to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR,
-\fBTk_GetBitmap\fR will assume it is safe to re-use an existing
-bitmap created from the same file name:  it will not check to
-see whether the file itself has changed, or whether the current
-directory has changed, thereby causing the name to refer to
-a different file.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bitmap, pixmap
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetCapStyl.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetCapStyl.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 28f1a1c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetCapStyl.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetCapStyle 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetCapStyle, Tk_NameOfCapStyle \- translate between strings and cap styles
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetCapStyle(\fIinterp, string, capPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfCapStyle(\fIcap\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *capPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-String containing name of cap style \- one of
-.QW \fBbutt\fR ,
-.QW \fBprojecting\fR ,
-or
-.QW \fBround\fR
-\- or a unique abbreviation of one.
-.AP int *capPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store X cap style corresponding to
-\fIstring\fR.
-.AP int cap in
-Cap style: one of \fBCapButt\fR, \fBCapProjecting\fR, or \fBCapRound\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR places in \fI*capPtr\fR the X cap style
-corresponding to \fIstring\fR.
-This will be one of the values
-\fBCapButt\fR, \fBCapProjecting\fR, or \fBCapRound\fR.
-Cap styles are typically used in X graphics contexts to indicate
-how the end-points of lines should be capped.
-See the X documentation for information on what each style
-implies.
-.PP
-Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and
-\fIinterp\fR is unused.
-If \fIstring\fR does not contain a valid cap style
-or an abbreviation of one of these names, then an error message is
-stored in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and
-\fI*capPtr\fR is unmodified.
-.PP
-\fBTk_NameOfCapStyle\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR.
-Given a cap style such as \fBCapButt\fR it returns a
-statically-allocated string corresponding to \fIcap\fR.
-If \fIcap\fR is not a legal cap style, then
-.QW "unknown cap style"
-is returned.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-butt, cap style, projecting, round
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetClrmap.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetClrmap.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e6da12..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetClrmap.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetColormap 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetColormap, Tk_PreserveColormap, Tk_FreeColormap \- allocate and free colormaps
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Colormap
-\fBTk_GetColormap(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_PreserveColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Colormap" colormap
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which colormap will be used.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Selects a colormap:  either \fBnew\fR or the name of a window
-with the same screen and visual as \fItkwin\fR.
-.AP Display *display in
-Display for which \fIcolormap\fR was allocated.
-.AP Colormap colormap in
-Colormap to free or preserve;  must have been returned by a previous
-call to \fBTk_GetColormap\fR or \fBTk_GetVisual\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures are used to manage colormaps.
-\fBTk_GetColormap\fR returns a colormap suitable for use in \fItkwin\fR.
-If its \fIstring\fR argument is \fBnew\fR then a new colormap is
-created;  otherwise \fIstring\fR must be the name of another window
-with the same screen and visual as \fItkwin\fR, and the colormap from that
-window is returned.
-If \fIstring\fR does not make sense, or if it refers to a window on
-a different screen from \fItkwin\fR or with
-a different visual than \fItkwin\fR, then \fBTk_GetColormap\fR returns
-\fBNone\fR and leaves an error message in \fIinterp\fR's result.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PreserveColormap\fR increases the internal reference count for a
-colormap previously returned by \fBTk_GetColormap\fR, which allows the
-colormap to be stored in several locations without knowing which order
-they will be released.
-.PP
-\fBTk_FreeColormap\fR should be called when a colormap returned by
-\fBTk_GetColormap\fR is no longer needed.
-Tk maintains a reference count for each colormap returned by
-\fBTk_GetColormap\fR, so there should eventually be one call to
-\fBTk_FreeColormap\fR for each call to \fBTk_GetColormap\fR and each
-call to \fBTk_PreserveColormap\fR.
-When a colormap's reference count becomes zero, Tk releases the
-X colormap.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetVisual\fR and \fBTk_GetColormap\fR work together, in that
-a new colormap created by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR may later be returned
-by \fBTk_GetColormap\fR.
-The reference counting mechanism for colormaps includes both procedures,
-so callers of \fBTk_GetVisual\fR must also call \fBTk_FreeColormap\fR
-to release the colormap.
-If \fBTk_GetColormap\fR is called with a \fIstring\fR value of
-\fBnew\fR then the resulting colormap will never
-be returned by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR;  however, it can be used in other
-windows by calling \fBTk_GetColormap\fR with the original window's
-name as \fIstring\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-colormap, visual
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetColor.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetColor.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 15254aa..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetColor.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,176 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_AllocColorFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_AllocColorFromObj, Tk_GetColor, Tk_GetColorFromObj, Tk_GetColorByValue, Tk_NameOfColor, Tk_FreeColorFromObj, Tk_FreeColor \- maintain database of colors
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-XColor *
-\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-XColor *
-\fBTk_GetColor(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fB)\fR
-.sp
-XColor *
-\fBTk_GetColorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-XColor *
-\fBTk_GetColorByValue(\fItkwin, prefPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfColor(\fIcolorPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-GC
-\fBTk_GCForColor(\fIcolorPtr, drawable\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeColorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeColor(\fIcolorPtr\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *colorPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which color will be used.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-String value describes desired color; internal rep will be
-modified to cache pointer to corresponding (XColor *).
-.AP char *name in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of color is passed as a string and
-resulting (XColor *) is not cached.
-.AP XColor *prefPtr in
-Indicates red, green, and blue intensities of desired
-color.
-.AP XColor *colorPtr in
-Pointer to X color information.  Must have been allocated by previous
-call to \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetColor\fR or
-\fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR, except when passed to \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR.
-.AP Drawable drawable in
-Drawable in which the result graphics context will be used.  Must have
-same screen and depth as the window for which the color was allocated.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures manage the colors being used by a Tk application.
-They allow colors to be shared whenever possible, so that colormap
-space is preserved, and they pick closest available colors when
-colormap space is exhausted.
-.PP
-Given a textual description of a color, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR
-locates a pixel value that may be used to render the color
-in a particular window.  The desired color is specified with a
-value whose string value must have one of the following forms:
-.TP 20
-\fIcolorname\fR
-Any of the valid textual names for a color defined in the
-server's color database file, such as \fBred\fR or \fBPeachPuff\fR.
-.TP 20
-\fB#\fIRGB\fR
-.TP 20
-\fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR
-.TP 20
-\fB#\fIRRRGGGBBB\fR
-.TP 20
-\fB#\fIRRRRGGGGBBBB\fR
-A numeric specification of the red, green, and blue intensities
-to use to display the color.  Each \fIR\fR, \fIG\fR, or \fIB\fR
-represents a single hexadecimal digit.  The four forms permit
-colors to be specified with 4-bit, 8-bit, 12-bit or 16-bit values.
-When fewer than 16 bits are provided for each color, they represent
-the most significant bits of the color, while the lower unfilled
-bits will be repeatedly replicated from the available higher bits.
-For example, #3a7 is the same as #3333aaaa7777.
-.PP
-\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR returns a pointer to
-an XColor structure;  the structure indicates the exact intensities of
-the allocated color (which may differ slightly from those requested,
-depending on the limitations of the screen) and a pixel value
-that may be used to draw with the color in \fItkwin\fR.
-If an error occurs in \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR (such as an unknown
-color name) then NULL is returned and an error message is stored in
-\fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.
-If the colormap for \fItkwin\fR is full, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR
-will use the closest existing color in the colormap.
-\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR caches information about
-the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to procedures
-such as \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR except
-that the description of the color is specified with a string instead
-of a value.  This prevents \fBTk_GetColor\fR from caching the
-return value, so \fBTk_GetColor\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing color, given
-the window and description used to create the color.
-\fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR does not actually create the color; the color
-must already have been created with a previous call to
-\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  The return
-value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
-future calls to \fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
-and \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR is similar to \fBTk_GetColor\fR except that
-the desired color is indicated with the \fIred\fR, \fIgreen\fR, and
-\fIblue\fR fields of the structure pointed to by \fIcolorPtr\fR.
-.PP
-This package maintains a database
-of all the colors currently in use.
-If the same color is requested multiple times from
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR or \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR (e.g. by different
-windows), or if the
-same intensities are requested multiple times from
-\fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR, then existing pixel values will
-be re-used.  Re-using an existing pixel avoids any interaction
-with the window server, which makes the allocation much more
-efficient.  These procedures also provide a portable interface that
-works across all platforms.  For this reason, you should generally use
-\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetColor\fR, or \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR
-instead of lower level procedures like \fBXAllocColor\fR.
-.PP
-Since different calls to this package
-may return the same shared
-pixel value, callers should never change the color of a pixel
-returned by the procedures.
-If you need to change a color value dynamically, you should use
-\fBXAllocColorCells\fR to allocate the pixel value for the color.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR is roughly the inverse of
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR.  If its \fIcolorPtr\fR argument was created
-by \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetColor\fR then the return value
-is the string that was used to create the
-color.  If \fIcolorPtr\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR,
-or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a string
-that could be passed to \fBTk_GetColor\fR to return the same
-color.  Note:  the string returned by \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR is
-only guaranteed to persist until the next call to
-\fBTk_NameOfColor\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GCForColor\fR returns a graphics context whose \fBforeground\fR
-field is the pixel allocated for \fIcolorPtr\fR and whose other fields
-all have default values.
-This provides an easy way to do basic drawing with a color.
-The graphics context is cached with the color and will exist only as
-long as \fIcolorPtr\fR exists;  it is freed when the last reference
-to \fIcolorPtr\fR is freed by calling \fBTk_FreeColor\fR.
-.PP
-When a color is no longer needed \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_FreeColor\fR should be called to release it.
-For \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR the color to release is specified
-with the same information used to create it; for
-\fBTk_FreeColor\fR the color to release is specified
-with a pointer to its XColor structure.
-There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR
-or \fBTk_FreeColor\fR for each call to \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR,
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR, or \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-color, intensity, value, pixel value
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetCursor.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetCursor.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 403c05e..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetCursor.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,231 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_AllocCursorFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_AllocCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursor, Tk_GetCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursorFromData, Tk_NameOfCursor, Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, Tk_FreeCursor \- maintain database of cursors
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Cursor
-\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Cursor
-\fBTk_GetCursor(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Cursor
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Cursor
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromData(\fIinterp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot, fg, bg\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfCursor(\fIdisplay, cursor\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeCursor(\fIdisplay, cursor\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which the cursor will be used.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-Description of cursor;  see below for possible values.  Internal rep will be
-modified to cache pointer to corresponding Tk_Cursor.
-.AP char *name in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of cursor is passed as a string and
-resulting Tk_Cursor is not cached.
-.AP "const char" *source in
-Data for cursor cursor, in standard cursor format.
-.AP "const char" *mask in
-Data for mask cursor, in standard cursor format.
-.AP "int" width in
-Width of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR.
-.AP "int" height in
-Height of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR.
-.AP "int" xHot in
-X-location of cursor hot-spot.
-.AP "int" yHot in
-Y-location of cursor hot-spot.
-.AP Tk_Uid fg in
-Textual description of foreground color for cursor.
-.AP Tk_Uid bg in
-Textual description of background color for cursor.
-.AP Display *display in
-Display for which \fIcursor\fR was allocated.
-.AP Tk_Cursor cursor in
-Opaque Tk identifier for cursor.  If passed to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR, must
-have been returned by some previous call to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR or
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures manage a collection of cursors
-being used by an application.  The procedures allow cursors to be
-re-used efficiently, thereby avoiding server overhead, and also
-allow cursors to be named with character strings.
-.PP
-\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR takes as argument an object describing a
-cursor, and returns an opaque Tk identifier for a cursor corresponding
-to the description.  It re-uses an existing cursor if possible and
-creates a new one otherwise.  \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR caches
-information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
-future calls to procedures such as \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR and
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR. If an error occurs in creating the cursor,
-such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR
-is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result
-if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.  \fIObjPtr\fR must contain a standard Tcl
-list with one of the following forms:
-.TP
-\fIname\fR\0[\fIfgColor\fR\0[\fIbgColor\fR]]
-\fIName\fR is the name of a cursor in the standard X cursor cursor,
-i.e., any of the names defined in \fBcursorcursor.h\fR, without
-the \fBXC_\fR.  Some example values are \fBX_cursor\fR, \fBhand2\fR,
-or \fBleft_ptr\fR.  Appendix B of
-.QW "The X Window System"
-by Scheifler & Gettys has illustrations showing what each of these
-cursors looks like.  If \fIfgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR are both
-specified, they give the foreground and background colors to use
-for the cursor (any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR
-may be used).  If only \fIfgColor\fR is specified, then there
-will be no background color:  the background will be transparent.
-If no colors are specified, then the cursor
-will use black for its foreground color and white for its background
-color.
-.RS
-.PP
-The Macintosh version of Tk supports all of the X cursors and
-will also accept any of the standard Mac cursors
-including \fBibeam\fR, \fBcrosshair\fR, \fBwatch\fR, \fBplus\fR, and
-\fBarrow\fR.  In addition, Tk will load Macintosh cursor resources of
-the types \fBcrsr\fR (color) and \fBCURS\fR (black and white) by the
-name of the resource.  The application and all its open
-dynamic library's resource files will be searched for the named
-cursor.  If there are conflicts color cursors will always be loaded
-in preference to black and white cursors.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB@\fIsourceName\0maskName\0fgColor\0bgColor\fR
-In this form, \fIsourceName\fR and \fImaskName\fR are the names of
-files describing cursors for the cursor's source bits and mask.
-Each file must be in standard X11 cursor format.
-\fIFgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR
-indicate the colors to use for the
-cursor, in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  This
-form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers.
-.TP
-\fB@\fIsourceName\0fgColor\fR
-This form is similar to the one above, except that the source is
-used as mask also.  This means that the cursor's background is
-transparent.  This form of the command will not work on Macintosh
-or Windows computers.
-.TP
-\fB@\fIsourceName\fR
-This form only works on Windows, and will load a Windows system
-cursor (\fB.ani\fR or \fB.cur\fR) from the file specified in
-\fIsourceName\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetCursor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR except
-that the description of the cursor is specified with a string instead
-of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetCursor\fR from caching the
-return value, so \fBTk_GetCursor\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing cursor, given
-the window and description used to create the cursor.
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR does not actually create the cursor; the cursor
-must already have been created with a previous call to
-\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.  The return
-value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
-future calls to \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
-and \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR allows cursors to be created from
-in-memory descriptions of their source and mask cursors.  \fISource\fR
-points to standard cursor data for the cursor's source bits, and
-\fImask\fR points to standard cursor data describing
-which pixels of \fIsource\fR are to be drawn and which are to be
-considered transparent.  \fIWidth\fR and \fIheight\fR give the
-dimensions of the cursor, \fIxHot\fR and \fIyHot\fR indicate the
-location of the cursor's hot-spot (the point that is reported when
-an event occurs), and \fIfg\fR and \fIbg\fR describe the cursor's
-foreground and background colors textually (any of the forms
-suitable for \fBTk_GetColor\fR may be used).  Typically, the
-arguments to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR are created by including
-a cursor file directly into the source code for a program, as in
-the following example:
-.CS
-Tk_Cursor cursor;
-#include "source.cursor"
-#include "mask.cursor"
-cursor = Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source_bits,
-    mask_bits, source_width, source_height, source_x_hot,
-    source_y_hot, Tk_GetUid("red"), Tk_GetUid("blue"));
-.CE
-.PP
-Under normal conditions \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR
-will return an identifier for the requested cursor.  If an error
-occurs in creating the cursor then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error
-message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result.
-.PP
-\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, and
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR maintain a
-database of all the cursors they have created.  Whenever possible,
-a call to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, or
-\fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR will
-return an existing cursor rather than creating a new one.  This
-approach can substantially reduce server overhead, so the Tk
-procedures should generally be used in preference to Xlib procedures
-like \fBXCreateFontCursor\fR or \fBXCreatePixmapCursor\fR, which
-create a new cursor on each call.  The Tk procedures are also more
-portable than the lower-level X procedures.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is roughly the inverse of
-\fBTk_GetCursor\fR.  If its \fIcursor\fR argument was created
-by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, then the return value is the \fIname\fR
-argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR to create the
-cursor.  If \fIcursor\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR,
-or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a hexadecimal string
-giving the X identifier for the cursor.
-Note:  the string returned by \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is
-only guaranteed to persist until the next call to
-\fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR.  Also, this call is not portable except for
-cursors returned by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.
-.PP
-When a cursor returned by \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR,
-or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR
-is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR or
-\fBTk_FreeCursor\fR should be called to release it.
-For \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR the cursor to release is specified
-with the same information used to create it; for
-\fBTk_FreeCursor\fR the cursor to release is specified
-with its Tk_Cursor token.
-There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR for
-each call to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR,
-or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR.
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-In determining whether an existing cursor can be used to satisfy
-a new request, \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR,
-and \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR
-consider only the immediate values of their arguments.  For
-example, when a file name is passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR,
-\fBTk_GetCursor\fR will assume it is safe to re-use an existing
-cursor created from the same file name:  it will not check to
-see whether the file itself has changed, or whether the current
-directory has changed, thereby causing the name to refer to
-a different file.  Similarly, \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR assumes
-that if the same \fIsource\fR pointer is used in two different calls,
-then the pointers refer to the same data;  it does not check to
-see if the actual data values have changed.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-cursor
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetDash.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetDash.3
deleted file mode 100644
index d1eeb70..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetDash.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1989-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetDash 3 8.3 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetDash \- convert from string to valid dash structure.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-
-int
-\fBTk_GetDash\fR(\fIinterp, string, dashPtr\fR)
-.fi
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Dash *dashPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Textual value to be converted.
-.AP Tk_Dash *dashPtr out
-Points to place to store the dash pattern
-value converted from \fIstring\fR. Must not be NULL.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedure parses the string and fills in the result in the
-Tk_Dash structure. The string can be a list of integers or a
-character string containing only
-.QW \fB.,-_\fR
-and spaces. If all
-goes well, \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned and a dash descriptor is stored
-in the variable pointed to by \fIdashPtr\fR.
-If \fIstring\fR does not have the
-proper syntax then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, an error message is left
-in the interpreter's result, and nothing is stored at *\fIdashPtr\fR.
-.PP
-The first possible syntax is a list of integers. Each element
-represents the number of pixels of a line segment. Only the odd
-segments are drawn using the
-.QW outline
-color. The other segments are drawn transparent.
-.PP
-The second possible syntax is a character list containing only
-5 possible characters
-.QW "\fB.,-_ \fR" .
-The space can be used
-to enlarge the space between other line elements, and can not
-occur in the first position of the string. Some examples:
-.PP
-.CS
-    \-dash .     = \-dash {2 4}
-    \-dash -     = \-dash {6 4}
-    \-dash -.    = \-dash {6 4 2 4}
-    \-dash -..   = \-dash {6 4 2 4 2 4}
-    \-dash {. }  = \-dash {2 8}
-    \-dash ,     = \-dash {4 4}
-.CE
-.PP
-The main difference between this syntax and the numeric is that it
-is shape-conserving. This means that all values in the dash
-list will be multiplied by the line width before display. This
-ensures that
-.QW .
-will always be displayed as a dot and
-.QW -
-always as a dash regardless of the line width.
-.PP
-On systems where only a limited set of dash patterns, the dash
-pattern will be displayed as the most close dash pattern that
-is available. For example, on Windows only the first 4 of the
-above examples are available; the last 2 examples will be
-displayed identically to the first one.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-canvas(n), Tk_CreateItemType(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-dash, conversion
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetFont.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetFont.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 0504916..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetFont.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_AllocFontFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Font
-\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Font
-\fBTk_GetFont(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Font
-\fBTk_GetFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Font
-\fBTk_FreeFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_FreeFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "const char" *tkfont
-.AP "Tcl_Interp" *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.  If \fBNULL\fR, then no error
-messages are left after errors.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which font will be used.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-Gives name or description of font.  See documentation
-for the \fBfont\fR command for details on acceptable formats.
-Internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding Tk_Font.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of font is passed as a string and
-resulting Tk_Font is not cached.
-.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
-Opaque font token.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR finds the font indicated by \fIobjPtr\fR and
-returns a token that represents the font.  The return value can be used
-in subsequent calls to procedures such as \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR,
-\fBTk_MeasureChars\fR, and \fBTk_FreeFont\fR.  The Tk_Font token
-will remain valid until
-\fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeFont\fR is called to release it.
-\fIObjPtr\fR can contain either a symbolic name or a font description; see
-the documentation for the \fBfont\fR command for a description of the
-valid formats.  If \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR is unsuccessful (because,
-for example, \fIobjPtr\fR did not contain a valid font specification) then it
-returns \fBNULL\fR and leaves an error message in \fIinterp\fR's result
-if \fIinterp\fR is not \fBNULL\fR.  \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR caches
-information about the return
-value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to procedures
-such as \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetFont\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR except
-that the description of the font is specified with a string instead
-of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetFont\fR from caching the
-matching Tk_Font, so \fBTk_GetFont\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing font, given
-the window and description used to create the font.
-\fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR does not actually create the font; the font
-must already have been created with a previous call to
-\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetFont\fR.  The return
-value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up
-future calls to \fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR
-and \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFont\fR maintain
-a database of all fonts they have allocated.  If
-the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different
-windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be
-shared for all uses.  The underlying resources will be freed automatically
-when no-one is using the font anymore.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is roughly the inverse of
-\fBTk_GetFont\fR.  Given a \fItkfont\fR that was created by
-\fBTk_GetFont\fR (or \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR), the return value is
-the \fIstring\fR argument that was
-passed to \fBTk_GetFont\fR to create the font.  The string returned by
-\fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the \fItkfont\fR
-is deleted.  The caller must not modify this string.
-.PP
-When a font is no longer needed,
-\fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeFont\fR should be called to
-release it.  For \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR the font to release is specified
-with the same information used to create it; for
-\fBTk_FreeFont\fR the font to release is specified
-with its Tk_Font token.  There should be
-exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeFont\fR
-for each call to \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_FontId(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-font
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetGC.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetGC.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 44e06fb..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetGC.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetGC 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetGC, Tk_FreeGC \- maintain database of read-only graphics contexts
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-GC
-\fBTk_GetGC\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeGC(\fIdisplay, gc\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "unsigned long" valueMask
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which the graphics context will be used.
-.AP "unsigned long" valueMask in
-Mask of bits (such as \fBGCForeground\fR or \fBGCStipple\fR)
-indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR are valid.
-.AP XGCValues *valuePtr in
-Pointer to structure describing the desired values for the
-graphics context.
-.AP Display *display in
-Display for which \fIgc\fR was allocated.
-.AP GC gc in
-X identifier for graphics context that is no longer needed.
-Must have been allocated by \fBTk_GetGC\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetGC\fR and \fBTk_FreeGC\fR manage a collection of graphics contexts
-being used by an application.  The procedures allow graphics contexts to be
-shared, thereby avoiding the server overhead that would be incurred
-if a separate GC were created for each use.  \fBTk_GetGC\fR takes arguments
-describing the desired graphics context and returns an X identifier
-for a GC that fits the description.  The graphics context that is returned
-will have default values in all of the fields not specified explicitly
-by \fIvalueMask\fR and \fIvaluePtr\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetGC\fR maintains a
-database of all the graphics contexts it has created.  Whenever possible,
-a call to \fBTk_GetGC\fR will
-return an existing graphics context rather than creating a new one.  This
-approach can substantially reduce server overhead, so \fBTk_GetGC\fR
-should generally be used in preference to the Xlib procedure
-\fBXCreateGC\fR, which creates a new graphics context on each call.
-.PP
-Since the return values of \fBTk_GetGC\fR
-are shared, callers should never modify the graphics contexts
-returned by \fBTk_GetGC\fR.
-If a graphics context must be modified dynamically, then it should be
-created by calling \fBXCreateGC\fR instead of \fBTk_GetGC\fR.
-.PP
-When a graphics context
-is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeGC\fR should be called to release it.
-There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeGC\fR for
-each call to \fBTk_GetGC\fR.
-When a graphics context is no longer in use anywhere (i.e. it has
-been freed as many times as it has been gotten) \fBTk_FreeGC\fR
-will release it to the X server and delete it from the database.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-graphics context
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetHINSTANCE.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetHINSTANCE.3
deleted file mode 100644
index de38051..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetHINSTANCE.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetHISTANCE 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetHINSTANCE \- retrieve the global application instance handle
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
-.sp
-HINSTANCE
-\fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR()
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR returns the Windows application instance handle
-for the Tk application.  This function is only available on Windows platforms.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-identifier, instance
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetHWND.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetHWND.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a5ec2d..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetHWND.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\" 
-.TH HWND 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetHWND, Tk_AttachHWND \- manage interactions between the Windows handle and an X window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
-.sp
-HWND
-\fBTk_GetHWND\fR(\fIwindow\fR)
-.sp
-Window
-\fBTk_AttachHWND\fR(\fItkwin, hwnd\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Window window in
-X token for window.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Tk window for window.
-.AP HWND hwnd in
-Windows HWND for window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetHWND\fR returns the Windows HWND identifier for X Windows
-window given by \fIwindow\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_AttachHWND\fR binds the Windows HWND identifier to the
-specified Tk_Window given by \fItkwin\fR. It returns an X Windows
-window that encapsulates the HWND.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-identifier, window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetImage.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetImage.3
deleted file mode 100644
index f2407bc..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetImage.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage, Tk_FreeImage \- use an image in a widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Image
-\fBTk_GetImage\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_RedrawImage\fR(\fIimage, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable, drawableX, drawableY\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR(\fIimage, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeImage\fR(\fIimage\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Place to leave error message.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window in which image will be used.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Name of image.
-.AP Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc in
-Procedure for Tk to invoke whenever image content or size changes.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-One-word value for Tk to pass to \fIchangeProc\fR.
-.AP Tk_Image image in
-Token for image instance;  must have been returned by a previous
-call to \fBTk_GetImage\fR.
-.AP int imageX in
-X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region of image to redisplay
-(measured in pixels from the image's upper-left corner).
-.AP int imageY in
-Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of region of image to redisplay
-(measured in pixels from the image's upper-left corner).
-.AP "int" width (in)
-Width of region of image to redisplay.
-.AP "int" height (in)
-Height of region of image to redisplay.
-.AP Drawable drawable in
-Where to display image.  Must either be window specified to
-\fBTk_GetImage\fR or a pixmap compatible with that window.
-.AP int drawableX in
-Where to display image in \fIdrawable\fR: this is the x-coordinate
-in \fIdrawable\fR where x-coordinate \fIimageX\fR of the image
-should be displayed.
-.AP int drawableY in
-Where to display image in \fIdrawable\fR: this is the y-coordinate
-in \fIdrawable\fR where y-coordinate \fIimageY\fR of the image
-should be displayed.
-.AP "int" widthPtr out
-Store width of \fIimage\fR (in pixels) here.
-.AP "int" heightPtr out
-Store height of \fIimage\fR (in pixels) here.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures are invoked by widgets that wish to display images.
-\fBTk_GetImage\fR is invoked by a widget when it first decides to
-display an image.
-\fIname\fR gives the name of the desired image and \fItkwin\fR
-identifies the window where the image will be displayed.
-\fBTk_GetImage\fR looks up the image in the table of existing
-images and returns a token for a new instance of the image.
-If the image does not exist then \fBTk_GetImage\fR returns NULL
-and leaves an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
-.PP
-When a widget wishes to actually display an image it must
-call \fBTk_RedrawImage\fR, identifying the image (\fIimage\fR),
-a region within the image to redisplay (\fIimageX\fR, \fIimageY\fR,
-\fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR), and a place to display the
-image (\fIdrawable\fR, \fIdrawableX\fR, and \fIdrawableY\fR).
-Tk will then invoke the appropriate image manager, which will
-display the requested portion of the image before returning.
-.PP
-A widget can find out the dimensions of an image by calling
-\fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR:  the width and height will be stored
-in the locations given by \fIwidthPtr\fR and \fIheightPtr\fR,
-respectively.
-.PP
-When a widget is finished with an image (e.g., the widget is
-being deleted or it is going to use a different image instead
-of the current one), it must call \fBTk_FreeImage\fR to
-release the image instance.
-The widget should never again use the image token after passing
-it to \fBTk_FreeImage\fR.
-There must be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeImage\fR for each
-call to \fBTk_GetImage\fR.
-.PP
-If the contents or size of an image changes, then any widgets
-using the image will need to find out about the changes so that
-they can redisplay themselves.
-The \fIchangeProc\fR and \fIclientData\fR arguments to
-\fBTk_GetImage\fR are used for this purpose.
-\fIchangeProc\fR will be called by Tk whenever a change occurs
-in the image;  it must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ImageChangedProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        int \fIx\fR,
-        int \fIy\fR,
-        int \fIwidth\fR,
-        int \fIheight\fR,
-        int \fIimageWidth\fR,
-        int \fIimageHeight\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIclientData\fR argument to \fIchangeProc\fR is the same as the
-\fIclientData\fR argument to \fBTk_GetImage\fR.
-It is usually a pointer to the widget record for the widget or
-some other data structure managed by the widget.
-The arguments \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR
-identify a region within the image that must be redisplayed;
-they are specified in pixels measured from the upper-left
-corner of the image.
-The arguments \fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR give
-the image's (new) size.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_CreateImageType
-.SH KEYWORDS
-images, redisplay
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetJoinStl.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetJoinStl.3
deleted file mode 100644
index a717b72..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetJoinStl.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetJoinStyle 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetJoinStyle, Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \- translate between strings and join styles
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetJoinStyle(\fIinterp, string, joinPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfJoinStyle(\fIjoin\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-String containing name of join style \- one of
-.QW \fBbevel\fR ,
-.QW \fBmiter\fR ,
-or
-.QW \fBround\fR
-\- or a unique abbreviation of one.
-.AP int *joinPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store X join style corresponding to
-\fIstring\fR.
-.AP int join in
-Join style: one of \fBJoinBevel\fR, \fBJoinMiter\fR, \fBJoinRound\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR places in \fI*joinPtr\fR the X join style
-corresponding to \fIstring\fR, which will be one of
-\fBJoinBevel\fR, \fBJoinMiter\fR, or \fBJoinRound\fR.
-Join styles are typically used in X graphics contexts to indicate
-how adjacent line segments should be joined together.
-See the X documentation for information on what each style
-implies.
-.PP
-Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and
-\fIinterp\fR is unused.
-If \fIstring\fR does not contain a valid join style
-or an abbreviation of one of these names, then an error message is
-stored in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and
-\fI*joinPtr\fR is unmodified.
-.PP
-\fBTk_NameOfJoinStyle\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR.
-Given a join style such as \fBJoinBevel\fR it returns a
-statically-allocated string corresponding to \fIjoin\fR.
-If \fIjoin\fR is not a legal join style, then
-.QW "unknown join style"
-is returned.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bevel, join style, miter, round
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetJustify.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetJustify.3
deleted file mode 100644
index b51cb8d..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetJustify.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetJustifyFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, Tk_GetJustify, Tk_NameOfJustify \- translate between strings and justification styles
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, justifyPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetJustify(\fIinterp, string, justifyPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfJustify(\fIjustify\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tk_Justify" *justifyPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-String value contains name of justification style \- one of
-.QW \fBleft\fR ,
-.QW \fBright\fR ,
-or
-.QW \fBcenter\fR
-\- or a unique abbreviation of one.
-The internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding justify value.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of justification style is passed as
-a string.
-.AP int *justifyPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store justify value corresponding to
-\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR.
-.AP Tk_Justify justify in
-Justification style (one of the values listed below).
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR places in \fI*justifyPtr\fR the justify value
-corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value.
-This value will be one of the following:
-.TP
-\fBTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT\fR
-Means that the text on each line should start at the left edge of
-the line;  as a result, the right edges of lines may be ragged.
-.TP
-\fBTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT\fR
-Means that the text on each line should end at the right edge of
-the line;  as a result, the left edges of lines may be ragged.
-.TP
-\fBTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER\fR
-Means that the text on each line should be centered;  as a result,
-both the left and right edges of lines may be ragged.
-.PP
-Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and
-\fIinterp\fR is unused.
-If \fIobjPtr\fR does not contain a valid justification style
-or an abbreviation of one of these names, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned,
-\fI*justifyPtr\fR is unmodified, and an error message is
-stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.
-\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR caches information about the return
-value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to
-\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetJustify\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR except
-that the description of the justification is specified with a string instead
-of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetJustify\fR from caching the
-return value, so \fBTk_GetJustify\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_NameOfJustify\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetJustify\fR.
-Given a justify value it returns a statically-allocated string
-corresponding to \fIjustify\fR.
-If \fIjustify\fR is not a legal justify value, then
-.QW "unknown justification style"
-is returned.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-center, fill, justification, string
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetOption.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetOption.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 81846ad..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetOption.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetOption 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetOption \- retrieve an option from the option database
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Uid
-\fBTk_GetOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, class\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window *class
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Name of desired option.
-.AP "const char" *class in
-Class of desired option.  Null means there is no class for
-this option;  do lookup based on name only.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure is invoked to retrieve an option from the database
-associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window.  If there is an option
-for \fItkwin\fR that matches the given \fIname\fR or \fIclass\fR,
-then it is returned in the form of a Tk_Uid.  If multiple options
-match \fIname\fR and \fIclass\fR, then the highest-priority one
-is returned.  If no option matches, then NULL is returned.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetOption\fR caches options related to \fItkwin\fR so that
-successive calls for the same \fItkwin\fR will execute much more
-quickly than successive calls for different windows.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-class, name, option, retrieve
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetPixels.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetPixels.3
deleted file mode 100644
index e7a9043..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetPixels.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetPixelsFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM \- translate between strings and screen units
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetPixels(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, intPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetMMFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetScreenMM(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, doublePtr\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window whose screen geometry determines the conversion between absolute
-units and pixels.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-String value specifies a distance on the screen;
-internal rep will be modified to cache converted distance.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except specification of distance is passed as
-a string.
-.AP int *intPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store converted distance in pixels.
-.AP double *doublePtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store converted distance in millimeters.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures take as argument a specification of distance on
-the screen (\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR) and compute the
-corresponding distance either in integer pixels or floating-point millimeters.
-In either case,
-\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR
-specifies a screen distance as a
-floating-point number followed by one of the following characters
-that indicates units:
-.TP
-<none>
-The number specifies a distance in pixels.
-.TP
-\fBc\fR
-The number specifies a distance in centimeters on the screen.
-.TP
-\fBi\fR
-The number specifies a distance in inches on the screen.
-.TP
-\fBm\fR
-The number specifies a distance in millimeters on the screen.
-.TP
-\fBp\fR
-The number specifies a distance in printer's points (1/72 inch)
-on the screen.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR converts the value of \fIobjPtr\fR to the
-nearest even number of pixels and stores that value at \fI*intPtr\fR.
-It returns \fBTCL_OK\fR under normal circumstances.
-If an error occurs (e.g. \fIobjPtr\fR contains a number followed
-by a character that is not one of the ones above) then
-\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left
-in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR caches information about the return
-value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetPixels\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR except
-that the screen distance is specified with a string instead
-of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetPixels\fR from caching the
-return value, so \fBTk_GetPixels\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetMMFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR are similar to
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetPixels\fR (respectively) except
-that they convert the screen distance to millimeters and
-store a double-precision floating-point result at \fI*doublePtr\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-centimeters, convert, inches, millimeters, pixels, points, screen units
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetPixmap.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetPixmap.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 927c75c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetPixmap.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetPixmap 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetPixmap, Tk_FreePixmap \- allocate and free pixmaps
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Pixmap
-\fBTk_GetPixmap(\fIdisplay, d, width, height, depth\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreePixmap(\fIdisplay, pixmap\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Drawable" *pixelPtr
-.AP Display *display in
-X display for the pixmap.
-.AP Drawable d in
-Pixmap or window where the new pixmap will be used for drawing.
-.AP "int" width in
-Width of pixmap.
-.AP "int" height in
-Height of pixmap.
-.AP "int" depth in
-Number of bits per pixel in pixmap.
-.AP Pixmap pixmap in
-Pixmap to destroy.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures are identical to the Xlib procedures \fBXCreatePixmap\fR
-and \fBXFreePixmap\fR, except that they have extra code to manage X
-resource identifiers so that identifiers for deleted pixmaps can be
-reused in the future.
-It is important for Tk applications to use these procedures rather
-than \fBXCreatePixmap\fR and \fBXFreePixmap\fR;  otherwise long-running
-applications may run out of resource identifiers.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetPixmap\fR creates a pixmap suitable for drawing in \fId\fR,
-with dimensions given by \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, and \fIdepth\fR,
-and returns its identifier.
-\fBTk_FreePixmap\fR destroys the pixmap given by \fIpixmap\fR and makes
-its resource identifier available for reuse.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-pixmap, resource identifier
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetRelief.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetRelief.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 6e8681a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetRelief.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetReliefFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetReliefFromObj, Tk_GetRelief, Tk_NameOfRelief \- translate between strings and relief values
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetReliefFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, reliefPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetRelief(\fIinterp, name, reliefPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfRelief(\fIrelief\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *reliefPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-String value contains name of relief, one of
-.QW \fBflat\fR ,
-.QW \fBgroove\fR ,
-.QW \fBraised\fR ,
-.QW \fBridge\fR ,
-.QW \fBsolid\fR ,
-or
-.QW \fBsunken\fR
-(or any unique abbreviation thereof on input);
-the internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding relief value.
-.AP char *string in
-Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of relief is passed as
-a string.
-.AP int *reliefPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store relief value corresponding to
-\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIname\fR.
-.AP "const char" *name
-Name of the relief.
-.AP int relief in
-Relief value (one of \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR,
-\fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR,
-or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR).
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR places in \fI*reliefPtr\fR the relief value
-corresponding to the value of \fIobjPtr\fR.  This value will be one of
-\fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR,
-\fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR.
-Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and
-\fIinterp\fR is unused.
-If \fIobjPtr\fR does not contain one of the valid relief names
-or an abbreviation of one of them, then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned,
-\fI*reliefPtr\fR is unmodified, and an error message
-is stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.
-\fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR caches information about the return
-value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to
-\fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetRelief\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR except
-that the description of the relief is specified with a string instead
-of an object.  This prevents \fBTk_GetRelief\fR from caching the
-return value, so \fBTk_GetRelief\fR is less efficient than
-\fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_NameOfRelief\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetRelief\fR.
-Given a relief value it returns the corresponding string (\fBflat\fR,
-\fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBsolid\fR, or \fBridge\fR).
-If \fIrelief\fR is not a legal relief value, then
-.QW "unknown relief"
-is returned.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-name, relief, string
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetRootCrd.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetRootCrd.3
deleted file mode 100644
index a9d2cd9..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetRootCrd.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetRootCoords 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetRootCoords \- Compute root-window coordinates of window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window tkwin
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP int *xPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store root-window x-coordinate
-corresponding to left edge of \fItkwin\fR's border.
-.AP int *yPtr out
-Pointer to location in which to store root-window y-coordinate
-corresponding to top edge of \fItkwin\fR's border.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure scans through the structural information maintained
-by Tk to compute the root-window coordinates corresponding to
-the upper-left corner of \fItkwin\fR's border.  If \fItkwin\fR has
-no border, then \fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR returns the root-window
-coordinates corresponding to location (0,0) in \fItkwin\fR.
-\fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR is relatively efficient, since it does not have to
-communicate with the X server.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-coordinates, root window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetScroll.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetScroll.3
deleted file mode 100644
index abd0880..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetScroll.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetScrollInfo 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetScrollInfoObj, Tk_GetScrollInfo \- parse arguments for scrolling commands
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj(\fIinterp, objc, objv, dblPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetScrollInfo(\fIinterp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *fractionPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP int objc in
-Number of Tcl_Obj's in \fIobjv\fR array.
-.AP "Tcl_Obj *const" objv[] in
-Argument objects.  These represent the entire widget command, of
-which the first word is typically the widget name and the second
-word is typically \fBxview\fR or \fByview\fR.
-.AP int argc in
-Number of strings in \fIargv\fR array.
-.AP "const char" *argv[] in
-Argument strings.  These represent the entire widget command, of
-which the first word is typically the widget name and the second
-word is typically \fBxview\fR or \fByview\fR.
-.AP double *fractionPtr out
-Filled in with fraction from \fBmoveto\fR option, if any.
-.AP int *stepsPtr out
-Filled in with line or page count from \fBscroll\fR option, if any.
-The value may be negative.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR parses the arguments expected by widget
-scrolling commands such as \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR.
-It receives the entire list of words that make up a widget command
-and parses the words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2].
-The words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2] must have one of the following forms:
-.CS
-\fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR
-\fBscroll \fInumber\fB units\fR
-\fBscroll \fInumber\fB pages\fR
-.CE
-.LP
-Any of the \fBmoveto\fR, \fBscroll\fR, \fBunits\fR, and \fBpages\fR
-keywords may be abbreviated.
-If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBmoveto\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_MOVETO\fR
-is returned as result and \fI*fractionPtr\fR is filled in with the
-\fIfraction\fR argument to the command, which must be a proper real
-value.
-If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBscroll\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_UNITS\fR
-or \fBTK_SCROLL_PAGES\fR is returned and \fI*stepsPtr\fR is filled
-in with the \fInumber\fR value, which must be a proper integer.
-If an error occurs in parsing the arguments, \fBTK_SCROLL_ERROR\fR
-is returned and an error message is left in interpreter
-\fIinterp\fR's result.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR is identical in function to
-\fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR.  However, \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR accepts
-string arguments, making it more appropriate for use with legacy
-widgets.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-parse, scrollbar, scrolling command, xview, yview
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetSelect.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetSelect.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c30a2b..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetSelect.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetSelection \- retrieve the contents of a selection
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetSelection\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_GetSelProc clientData
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for reporting errors.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window on whose behalf to retrieve the selection (determines
-display from which to retrieve).
-.AP Atom selection in
-The name of the selection to be retrieved.
-.AP Atom target in
-Form in which to retrieve selection.
-.AP Tk_GetSelProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke to process pieces of the selection as they
-are retrieved.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetSelection\fR retrieves the selection specified by the atom
-\fIselection\fR in the format specified by \fItarget\fR.  The
-selection may actually be retrieved in several pieces; as each piece
-is retrieved, \fIproc\fR is called to process the piece.  \fIProc\fR
-should have arguments and result that match the type
-\fBTk_GetSelProc\fR:
-.PP
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTk_GetSelProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-        char *\fIportion\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR parameters to \fIproc\fR
-will be copies of the corresponding arguments to
-\fBTk_GetSelection\fR.  \fIPortion\fR will be a pointer to
-a string containing part or all of the selection.  For large
-selections, \fIproc\fR will be called several times with successive
-portions of the selection.  The X Inter-Client Communication
-Conventions Manual allows a selection to be returned in formats
-other than strings, e.g. as an array of atoms or integers.  If
-this happens, Tk converts the selection back into a string
-before calling \fIproc\fR.  If a selection is returned as an
-array of atoms, Tk converts it to a string containing the atom names
-separated by white space.  For any other format besides string,
-Tk converts a selection to a string containing hexadecimal
-values separated by white space.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetSelection\fR returns to its caller when the selection has
-been completely retrieved and processed by \fIproc\fR, or when a
-fatal error has occurred (e.g. the selection owner did not respond
-promptly).  \fBTk_GetSelection\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR;  if
-an error occurs, it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error message
-in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.  \fIProc\fR should also return either
-\fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  If \fIproc\fR encounters an error in
-dealing with the selection, it should leave an error message in the
-interpreter result and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR;  this will abort the
-selection retrieval.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-format, get, selection retrieval
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetUid.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetUid.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 06b466a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetUid.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetUid 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetUid, Tk_Uid \- convert from string to unique identifier
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Uid
-\fBTk_GetUid\fR(\fIstring\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP char *string in
-String for which the corresponding unique identifier is
-desired.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetUid\fR returns the unique identifier corresponding
-to \fIstring\fR.
-Unique identifiers are similar to atoms in Lisp, and are used
-in Tk to speed up comparisons and
-searches.  A unique identifier (type Tk_Uid) is a string pointer
-and may be used anywhere that a variable of type
-.QW "char *"
-could be used.  However, there is guaranteed to be exactly
-one unique identifier for any given string value.  If \fBTk_GetUid\fR
-is called twice, once with string \fIa\fR and once with string
-\fIb\fR, and if \fIa\fR and \fIb\fR have the same string value
-(strcmp(a, b) == 0), then \fBTk_GetUid\fR will return exactly
-the same Tk_Uid value for each call (Tk_GetUid(a) == Tk_GetUid(b)).
-This means that variables of type
-Tk_Uid may be compared directly (x == y) without having to call
-\fBstrcmp\fR.
-In addition, the return value from \fBTk_GetUid\fR will have the
-same string value as its argument (strcmp(Tk_GetUid(a), a) == 0).
-.SH KEYWORDS
-atom, unique identifier
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetVRoot.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetVRoot.3
deleted file mode 100644
index a65ef78..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetVRoot.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetVRootGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetVRootGeometry \- Get location and size of virtual root for window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_GetVRootGeometry(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window heightPtr
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window whose virtual root is to be queried.
-.AP int xPtr out
-Points to word in which to store x-offset of virtual root.
-.AP int yPtr out
-Points to word in which to store y-offset of virtual root.
-.AP "int" widthPtr out
-Points to word in which to store width of virtual root.
-.AP "int" heightPtr out
-Points to word in which to store height of virtual root.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetVRootGeometry\fR returns geometry information about the virtual
-root window associated with \fItkwin\fR.  The
-.QW associated
-virtual root is the one in which \fItkwin\fR's nearest top-level ancestor (or
-\fItkwin\fR itself if it is a top-level window) has
-been reparented by the window manager.  This window is identified by
-a \fB__SWM_ROOT\fR or \fB__WM_ROOT\fR property placed on the top-level
-window by the window manager.
-If \fItkwin\fR is not associated with a virtual root (e.g.
-because the window manager does not use virtual roots) then *\fIxPtr\fR and
-*\fIyPtr\fR will be set to 0 and *\fIwidthPtr\fR and *\fIheightPtr\fR
-will be set to the dimensions of the screen containing \fItkwin\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-geometry, height, location, virtual root, width, window manager
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/GetVisual.3 b/tk8.6/doc/GetVisual.3
deleted file mode 100644
index fe3d50c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/GetVisual.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetVisual 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetVisual \- translate from string to visual
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Visual *
-\fBTk_GetVisual(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Interp" *colormapPtr
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in which the visual will be used.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-String that identifies the desired visual.  See below for
-valid formats.
-.AP int *depthPtr out
-Depth of returned visual gets stored here.
-.AP Colormap *colormapPtr out
-If non-NULL then a suitable colormap for visual is found and its
-identifier is stored here.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetVisual\fR takes a string description of a visual and
-finds a suitable X Visual for use in \fItkwin\fR, if there is one.
-It returns a pointer to the X Visual structure for the visual
-and stores the number of bits per pixel for it at \fI*depthPtr\fR.
-If \fIstring\fR is unrecognizable or if no suitable visual could
-be found, then NULL is returned and \fBTk_GetVisual\fR leaves
-an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
-If \fIcolormap\fR is non-NULL then \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
-also locates an appropriate colormap for use with the result visual
-and stores its X identifier at \fI*colormapPtr\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIstring\fR argument specifies the desired visual in one
-of the following ways:
-.TP 15
-\fIclass depth\fR
-The string consists of a class name followed by an integer depth,
-with any amount of white space (including none) in between.
-\fIclass\fR selects what sort of visual is desired and must be one of
-\fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBgreyscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR,
-\fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, \fBstaticgrey\fR, or
-\fBtruecolor\fR, or a unique abbreviation.
-\fIdepth\fR specifies how many bits per pixel are needed for the
-visual.
-If possible, \fBTk_GetVisual\fR will return a visual with this depth;
-if there is no visual of the desired depth then \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
-looks first for a visual with greater depth, then one with less
-depth.
-.TP 15
-\fBdefault\fR
-Use the default visual for \fItkwin\fR's screen.
-.TP 15
-\fIpathName\fR
-Use the visual for the window given by \fIpathName\fR.
-\fIpathName\fR must be the name of a window on the same screen
-as \fItkwin\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fInumber\fR
-Use the visual whose X identifier is \fInumber\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fBbest\fR ?\fIdepth\fR?
-Choose the
-.QW "best possible"
-visual, using the following rules, in decreasing order of priority:
-.RS
-.IP (a)
-a visual that has exactly the desired depth is best, followed
-by a visual with greater depth than requested (but as little extra
-as possible), followed by a visual with less depth than requested
-(but as great a depth as possible);
-.IP (b)
-if no \fIdepth\fR is specified, then the deepest available visual
-is chosen;
-.IP (c)
-\fBpseudocolor\fR is better than \fBtruecolor\fR or \fBdirectcolor\fR,
-which are better than \fBstaticcolor\fR, which is better than
-\fBstaticgray\fR or \fBgrayscale\fR;
-.IP (d)
-the default visual for the screen is better than any other visual.
-.RE
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-The idea for \fBTk_GetVisual\fR, and the first implementation, came
-from Paul Mackerras.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-colormap, screen, visual
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/Grab.3 b/tk8.6/doc/Grab.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 1dba2df..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/Grab.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_Grab 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_Grab, Tk_Ungrab \- manipulate grab state in an application
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_Grab\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, grabGlobal\fR)
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_Ungrab\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window on whose behalf the pointer is to be grabbed or released
-.AP int grabGlobal in
-Boolean indicating whether the grab is global or application local
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These functions are used to set or release a global or
-application local grab.  When a grab is set on a particular window
-in a Tk application, mouse and keyboard events can only be received by
-that window and its descendants.  Mouse and keyboard events for
-windows outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR will be redirected to
-\fItkwin\fR.  If the grab is global, then all mouse and keyboard
-events for windows outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR (even those
-intended for windows in other applications) will be redirected to
-\fItkwin\fR.  If the grab is application local, only mouse and
-keyboard events intended for a windows within the same application
-(but outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR) will be redirected.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Grab\fR sets a grab on a particular window.  \fITkwin\fR
-specifies the window on whose behalf the pointer is to be grabbed.
-\fIGrabGlobal\fR indicates whether the grab should be global or
-application local; if it is non-zero, it means the grab should be
-global.  Normally, \fBTk_Grab\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs
-and the grab cannot be set, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message
-is left if \fIinterp\fR's result.  Once this call completes
-successfully, no window outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR will
-receive pointer- or keyboard-related events until the next call to
-Tk_Ungrab.  If a previous grab was in effect within the application,
-then it is replaced with a new one.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Ungrab\fR releases a grab on the mouse pointer and keyboard, if
-there is one set on the window given by \fItkwin\fR.  Once a grab is
-released, pointer and keyboard events will start being delivered to
-other windows again.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-grab, window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/HWNDToWindow.3 b/tk8.6/doc/HWNDToWindow.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 9795099..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/HWNDToWindow.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_HWNDToWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_HWNDToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for a Windows window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tkPlatDecls.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_HWNDToWindow\fR(\fIhwnd\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP HWND hwnd in
-Windows handle for the window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Given a Windows HWND window identifier, this procedure returns the
-corresponding Tk_Window handle. If there is no Tk_Window corresponding
-to \fIhwnd\fR then NULL is returned.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-Windows window id
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/HandleEvent.3 b/tk8.6/doc/HandleEvent.3
deleted file mode 100644
index bc293b6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/HandleEvent.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_HandleEvent 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_HandleEvent \- invoke event handlers for window system events
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_HandleEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS XEvent *eventPtr
-.AP XEvent *eventPtr in
-Pointer to X event to dispatch to relevant handler(s). It is important
-that all unused fields of the structure be set to zero.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_HandleEvent\fR is a lower-level procedure that deals with window
-events.  It is called by \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR (and indirectly by
-\fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR), and in a few other cases within Tk.
-It makes callbacks to any window event
-handlers (created by calls to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR)
-that match \fIeventPtr\fR and then returns.  In some cases
-it may be useful for an application to bypass the Tk event
-queue and call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR directly instead of
-calling \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR followed by
-\fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR.
-.PP
-This procedure may be invoked recursively.  For example,
-it is possible to invoke \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR recursively
-from a handler called by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR.  This sort
-of operation is useful in some modal situations, such
-as when a
-notifier has been popped up and an application wishes to
-wait for the user to click a button in the notifier before
-doing anything else.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-callback, event, handler, window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/IdToWindow.3 b/tk8.6/doc/IdToWindow.3
deleted file mode 100644
index f6e397d..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/IdToWindow.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_IdToWindow 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_IdToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for an X window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_IdToWindow\fR(\fIdisplay, window\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window display
-.AP Display *display in
-X display containing the window.
-.AP Window window in
-X id for window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Given an X window identifier and the X display it corresponds to,
-this procedure returns the corresponding Tk_Window handle.
-If there is no Tk_Window corresponding to \fIwindow\fR then
-NULL is returned.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-X window id
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ImgChanged.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ImgChanged.3
deleted file mode 100644
index f4d2c04..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ImgChanged.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_ImageChanged 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fIimageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ImageMaster imageHeight
-.AP Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster in
-Token for image, which was passed to image's \fIcreateProc\fR when
-the image was created.
-.AP int x in
-X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured
-from upper-left corner of image).
-.AP int y in
-Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured
-from upper-left corner of image).
-.AP "int" width in
-Width of region that needs to be redrawn, in pixels.
-.AP "int" height in
-Height of region that needs to be redrawn, in pixels.
-.AP "int" imageWidth in
-Current width of image, in pixels.
-.AP "int" imageHeight in
-Current height of image, in pixels.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-An image manager calls \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR for an image
-whenever anything happens that requires the image to be redrawn.
-As a result of calling \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR, any widgets using
-the image are notified so that they can redisplay themselves
-appropriately.
-The \fIimageMaster\fR argument identifies the image, and
-\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR
-specify a rectangular region within the image that needs to
-be redrawn.
-\fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR specify the image's (new) size.
-.PP
-An image manager should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR during
-its \fIcreateProc\fR to specify the image's initial size and to
-force redisplay if there are existing instances for the image.
-If any of the pixel values in the image should change later on,
-\fBTk_ImageChanged\fR should be called again with \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR,
-\fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR values that cover all the pixels
-that changed.
-If the size of the image should change, then \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR
-must be called to indicate the new size, even if no pixels
-need to be redisplayed.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_CreateImageType
-.SH KEYWORDS
-images, redisplay, image size changes
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/Inactive.3 b/tk8.6/doc/Inactive.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 5528fa5..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/Inactive.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_GetUserInactiveTime 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \- discover user inactivity time
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-long
-\fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Display *display
-.AP Display *display in
-The display on which the user inactivity timer is to be queried or
-reset.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime\fR returns the number of milliseconds that
-have passed since the last user interaction (usually via keyboard or
-mouse) with the respective display. On systems and displays that do not
-support querying the user inactiviy time, \fB\-1\fR is returned.
-\fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime\fR resets the user inactivity timer of the
-given display to zero.  On windowing systems that do not support
-multiple displays \fIdisplay\fR can be passed as \fBNULL\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-idle, inactive
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/InternAtom.3 b/tk8.6/doc/InternAtom.3
deleted file mode 100644
index a16eee1..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/InternAtom.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_InternAtom 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_InternAtom, Tk_GetAtomName \- manage cache of X atoms
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Atom
-\fBTk_InternAtom(\fItkwin, name\fR)
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_GetAtomName(\fItkwin, atom\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window parent
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.  Used to map atom or name relative to a particular display.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-String name for which atom is desired.
-.AP Atom atom in
-Atom for which corresponding string name is desired.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures are similar to the Xlib procedures
-\fBXInternAtom\fR and \fBXGetAtomName\fR.  \fBTk_InternAtom\fR
-returns the atom identifier associated with string given by
-\fIname\fR;  the atom identifier is only valid for the display
-associated with \fItkwin\fR.
-\fBTk_GetAtomName\fR returns the string associated
-with \fIatom\fR on \fItkwin\fR's display.  The string returned
-by \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR is in Tk's storage:  the caller need
-not free this space when finished with the string, and the caller
-should not modify the contents of the returned string.
-If there is no atom \fIatom\fR on \fItkwin\fR's display,
-then \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR returns the string
-.QW "?bad atom?" .
-.PP
-Tk caches
-the information returned by \fBTk_InternAtom\fR and \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR
-so that future calls
-for the same information can be serviced from the cache without
-contacting the server.  Thus \fBTk_InternAtom\fR and \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR
-are generally much faster than their Xlib counterparts, and they
-should be used in place of the Xlib procedures.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-atom, cache, display
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/MainLoop.3 b/tk8.6/doc/MainLoop.3
deleted file mode 100644
index ed4d0ea..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/MainLoop.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_MainLoop 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_MainLoop \- loop for events until all windows are deleted
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_MainLoop\fR()
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_MainLoop\fR is a procedure that loops repeatedly calling
-\fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR.  It returns only when there are no applications
-left in this process (i.e. no main windows exist anymore).  Most
-windowing applications will call \fBTk_MainLoop\fR after
-initialization; the main execution of the application will consist
-entirely of callbacks invoked via \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, event, main loop
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/MainWin.3 b/tk8.6/doc/MainWin.3
deleted file mode 100644
index c3af3e7..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/MainWin.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_MainWindow 3 7.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_MainWindow, Tk_GetNumMainWindows \- functions for querying main window information
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_MainWindow\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR()
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *pathName
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
-Interpreter associated with the application.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A main window is a special kind of toplevel window used as the
-outermost window in an application.
-.PP
-If \fIinterp\fR is associated with a Tk application then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR
-returns the application's main window. If there is no Tk application
-associated with \fIinterp\fR then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR returns NULL and
-leaves an error message in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR returns a count of the number of main
-windows currently open in the current thread.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, main window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/MaintGeom.3 b/tk8.6/doc/MaintGeom.3
deleted file mode 100644
index d1c2d1c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/MaintGeom.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_MaintainGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_MaintainGeometry, Tk_UnmaintainGeometry \- maintain geometry of one window relative to another
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR(\fIslave, master, x, y, width, height\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR(\fIslave, master\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window master
-.AP Tk_Window slave in
-Window whose geometry is to be controlled.
-.AP Tk_Window master in
-Window relative to which \fIslave\fR's geometry will be controlled.
-.AP int x in
-Desired x-coordinate of \fIslave\fR in \fImaster\fR, measured in pixels
-from the inside of \fImaster\fR's left border to the outside of
-\fIslave\fR's left border.
-.AP int y in
-Desired y-coordinate of \fIslave\fR in \fImaster\fR, measured in pixels
-from the inside of \fImaster\fR's top border to the outside of
-\fIslave\fR's top border.
-.AP int width in
-Desired width for \fIslave\fR, in pixels.
-.AP int height in
-Desired height for \fIslave\fR, in pixels.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR and \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR make it
-easier for geometry managers to deal with slaves whose masters are not
-their parents.
-Three problems arise if the master for a slave is not its parent:
-.IP [1]
-The x- and y-position of the slave must be translated from the
-coordinate system of the master to that of the parent before
-positioning the slave.
-.IP [2]
-If the master window, or any of its ancestors up to the slave's
-parent, is moved, then the slave must be repositioned within its
-parent in order to maintain the correct position relative to the
-master.
-.IP [3]
-If the master or one of its ancestors is mapped or unmapped, then
-the slave must be mapped or unmapped to correspond.
-.LP
-None of these problems is an issue if the parent and master are
-the same.  For example, if the master or one of its ancestors
-is unmapped, the slave is automatically removed by the screen
-by X.
-.PP
-\fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR deals with these problems for slaves
-whose masters are not their parents, as well as handling the simpler
-case of slaves whose masters are their parents.
-\fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR is typically called by a window manager
-once it has decided where a slave should be positioned relative
-to its master.
-\fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR translates the coordinates to the
-coordinate system of \fIslave\fR's parent and then moves and
-resizes the slave appropriately.
-Furthermore, it remembers the desired position and creates event
-handlers to monitor the master and all of its ancestors up
-to (but not including) the slave's parent.
-If any of these windows is moved, mapped, or unmapped,
-the slave will be adjusted so that it is mapped only when the
-master is mapped and its geometry relative to the master
-remains as specified by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and
-\fIheight\fR.
-.PP
-When a window manager relinquishes control over a window, or
-if it decides that it does not want the window to appear on the
-screen under any conditions, it calls \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR.
-\fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR unmaps the window and cancels any
-previous calls to \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR for the
-\fImaster\fR\-\fIslave\fR pair, so that the slave's
-geometry and mapped state are no longer maintained
-automatically.
-\fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR need not be called by a geometry
-manager if the slave, the master, or any of the master's ancestors
-is destroyed:  Tk will call it automatically.
-.PP
-If \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR is called repeatedly for the same
-\fImaster\fR\-\fIslave\fR pair, the information from the most
-recent call supersedes any older information.
-If \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR is called for a \fImaster\fR\-\fIslave\fR
-pair that is is not currently managed, the call has no effect.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-geometry manager, map, master, parent, position, slave, unmap
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ManageGeom.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ManageGeom.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 520546f..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ManageGeom.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_ManageGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ManageGeometry \- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR(\fItkwin, mgrPtr, clientData\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_GeometryProc clientData
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window to be managed.
-.AP "const Tk_GeomMgr" *mgrPtr in
-Pointer to data structure containing information about the
-geometry manager, or NULL to indicate that \fItkwin\fR's geometry
-should not be managed anymore.
-The data structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR must be static:
-Tk keeps a reference to it as long as the window is managed.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to geometry manager callbacks.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR arranges for a particular geometry manager,
-described by the \fImgrPtr\fR argument, to control the geometry
-of a particular slave window, given by \fItkwin\fR.
-If \fItkwin\fR was previously managed by some other geometry manager,
-the previous manager loses control in favor of the new one.
-If \fImgrPtr\fR is NULL, geometry management is cancelled for
-\fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-The structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR contains information about
-the geometry manager:
-.CS
-typedef struct {
-    const char *\fIname\fR;
-    Tk_GeomRequestProc *\fIrequestProc\fR;
-    Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *\fIlostSlaveProc\fR;
-} \fBTk_GeomMgr\fR;
-.CE
-The \fIname\fR field is the textual name for the geometry manager,
-such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR;  this value will be returned
-by the command \fBwinfo manager\fR.
-.PP
-\fIrequestProc\fR is a procedure in the geometry manager that
-will be invoked whenever \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR is called by the
-slave to change its desired geometry.
-\fIrequestProc\fR should have arguments and results that match the
-type \fBTk_GeomRequestProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_GeomRequestProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR);
-.CE
-The parameters to \fIrequestProc\fR will be identical to the
-corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR.
-\fIclientData\fR usually points to a data
-structure containing application-specific information about
-how to manage \fItkwin\fR's geometry.
-.PP
-The \fIlostSlaveProc\fR field of \fImgrPtr\fR points to another
-procedure in the geometry manager.
-Tk will invoke \fIlostSlaveProc\fR if some other manager
-calls \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR to claim
-\fItkwin\fR away from the current geometry manager.
-\fIlostSlaveProc\fR is not invoked if \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR is
-called with a NULL value for \fImgrPtr\fR (presumably the current
-geometry manager has made this call, so it already knows that the
-window is no longer managed), nor is it called if \fImgrPtr\fR
-is the same as the window's current geometry manager.
-\fIlostSlaveProc\fR should have
-arguments and results that match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_GeomLostSlaveProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR);
-.CE
-The parameters to \fIlostSlaveProc\fR will be identical to the
-corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-callback, geometry, managed, request, unmanaged
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/MapWindow.3 b/tk8.6/doc/MapWindow.3
deleted file mode 100644
index a3c6296..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/MapWindow.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_MapWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_MapWindow, Tk_UnmapWindow \- map or unmap a window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_MapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window parent
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures may be used to map and unmap windows
-managed by Tk.  \fBTk_MapWindow\fR maps the window given
-by \fItkwin\fR, and also creates an X window corresponding
-to \fItkwin\fR if it does not already exist.  See the
-\fBTk_CreateWindow\fR manual entry for information on
-deferred window creation.
-\fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR unmaps \fItkwin\fR's window
-from the screen.
-.PP
-If \fItkwin\fR is a child window (i.e. \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR was
-used to create a child window), then event handlers interested in map
-and unmap events are invoked immediately.  If \fItkwin\fR is not an
-internal window, then the event handlers will be invoked later, after
-X has seen the request and returned an event for it.
-.PP
-These procedures should be used in place of the X procedures
-\fBXMapWindow\fR and \fBXUnmapWindow\fR, since they update
-Tk's local data structure for \fItkwin\fR.  Applications
-using Tk should not invoke \fBXMapWindow\fR and \fBXUnmapWindow\fR
-directly.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-map, unmap, window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/MeasureChar.3 b/tk8.6/doc/MeasureChar.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3959978..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/MeasureChar.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,127 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_MeasureChars 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_MeasureChars, Tk_TextWidth, Tk_DrawChars, Tk_UnderlineChars \- routines to measure and display simple single-line strings.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_MeasureChars(\fItkfont, string, numBytes, maxPixels, flags, lengthPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_TextWidth(\fItkfont, string, numBytes\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_DrawChars(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, numBytes, x, y\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_UnderlineChars(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte, lastByte\fB)\fR
-.sp
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "const char" firstChar
-.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
-Token for font in which text is to be drawn or measured.  Must have been
-returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Text to be measured or displayed.  Need not be null terminated.  Any
-non-printing meta-characters in the string (such as tabs, newlines, and
-other control characters) will be measured or displayed in a
-platform-dependent manner.
-.AP int numBytes in
-The maximum number of bytes to consider when measuring or drawing
-\fIstring\fR.  Must be greater than or equal to 0.
-.AP int maxPixels in
-If \fImaxPixels\fR is >= 0, it specifies the longest permissible
-line length in pixels.  Characters from \fIstring\fR are processed only
-until this many pixels have been covered.  If \fImaxPixels\fR is < 0, then
-the line length is unbounded and the \fIflags\fR argument is ignored.
-.AP int flags in
-Various flag bits OR-ed together: \fBTK_PARTIAL_OK\fR means include a character
-as long as any part of it fits in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR;
-otherwise, a character must fit completely to be considered.
-\fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR means stop on a word boundary, if possible.  If
-\fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set, it means return at least one character even if no
-characters could fit in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR.  If
-\fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set and \fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR is also set, it means that if
-not even one word fits on the line, return the first few letters of the
-word that did fit; if not even one letter of the word fit, then the first
-letter will still be returned.
-.AP int *lengthPtr out
-Filled with the number of pixels occupied by the number of characters
-returned as the result of \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR.
-.AP Display *display in
-Display on which to draw.
-.AP Drawable drawable in
-Window or pixmap in which to draw.
-.AP GC gc in
-Graphics context for drawing characters.  The font selected into this GC
-must be the same as the \fItkfont\fR.
-.AP int "x, y" in
-Coordinates at which to place the left edge of the baseline when displaying
-\fIstring\fR.
-.AP int firstByte in
-The index of the first byte of the first character to underline in the
-\fIstring\fR.  Underlining begins at the left edge of this character.
-.AP int lastByte in
-The index of the first byte of the last character up to which the
-underline will be drawn.  The character specified by \fIlastByte\fR
-will not itself be underlined.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These routines are for measuring and displaying simple single-font,
-single-line strings.  To measure and display single-font, multi-line,
-justified text, refer to the documentation for \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR.
-There is no programming interface in the core of Tk that supports
-multi-font, multi-line text; support for that behavior must be built on
-top of simpler layers.
-Note that the interfaces described here are
-byte-oriented not character-oriented, so index values coming from Tcl
-scripts need to be converted to byte offsets using the
-\fBTcl_UtfAtIndex\fR and related routines.
-.PP
-A glyph is the displayable picture of a letter, number, or some other
-symbol.  Not all character codes in a given font have a glyph.
-Characters such as tabs, newlines/returns, and control characters that
-have no glyph are measured and displayed by these procedures in a
-platform-dependent manner; under X, they are replaced with backslashed
-escape sequences, while under Windows and Macintosh hollow or solid boxes
-may be substituted.  Refer to the documentation for
-\fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR for a programming interface that supports the
-platform-independent expansion of tab characters into columns and
-newlines/returns into multi-line text.
-.PP
-\fBTk_MeasureChars\fR is used both to compute the length of a given
-string and to compute how many characters from a string fit in a given
-amount of space.  The return value is the number of bytes from
-\fIstring\fR that fit in the space specified by \fImaxPixels\fR subject to
-the conditions described by \fIflags\fR.  If all characters fit, the return
-value will be \fInumBytes\fR.  \fI*lengthPtr\fR is filled with the computed
-width, in pixels, of the portion of the string that was measured.  For
-example, if the return value is 5, then \fI*lengthPtr\fR is filled with the
-distance between the left edge of \fIstring\fR[0] and the right edge of
-\fIstring\fR[4].
-.PP
-\fBTk_TextWidth\fR is a wrapper function that provides a simpler interface
-to the \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR function.  The return value is how much
-space in pixels the given \fIstring\fR needs.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DrawChars\fR draws the \fIstring\fR at the given location in the
-given \fIdrawable\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_UnderlineChars\fR underlines the given range of characters in the
-given \fIstring\fR.  It does not draw the characters (which are assumed to
-have been displayed previously by \fBTk_DrawChars\fR); it just draws the
-underline.  This procedure is used to underline a few characters without
-having to construct an underlined font.  To produce natively underlined
-text, the appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-font(n), FontId(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-font, measurement
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/MoveToplev.3 b/tk8.6/doc/MoveToplev.3
deleted file mode 100644
index effed29..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/MoveToplev.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_MoveToplevelWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \- Adjust the position of a top-level window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow(\fItkwin, x, y\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window tkwin
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for top-level window to move.
-.AP int x in
-New x-coordinate for the top-left pixel of \fItkwin\fR's border, or the
-top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for \fItkwin\fR by the
-window manager, if there is one.
-.AP int y in
-New y-coordinate for the top-left pixel of \fItkwin\fR's border, or the
-top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for \fItkwin\fR by the
-window manager, if there is one.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-In general, a window should never set its own position;  this should be
-done only by the geometry manger that is responsible for the window.
-For top-level windows the window manager is effectively the geometry
-manager;  Tk provides interface code between the application and the
-window manager to convey the application's desires to the geometry
-manager.  The desired size for a top-level window is conveyed using
-the usual \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR mechanism.  The procedure
-\fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR may be used by an application to request
-a particular position for a top-level window;  this procedure is
-similar in function to the \fBwm geometry\fR Tcl command except that
-negative offsets cannot be specified.  It is invoked by widgets such as
-menus that want to appear at a particular place on the screen.
-.PP
-When \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR is called it does not immediately
-pass on the new desired location to the window manager;  it defers
-this action until all other outstanding work has been completed,
-using the \fBTk_DoWhenIdle\fR mechanism.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-position, top-level window, window manager
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/Name.3 b/tk8.6/doc/Name.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b9c5bc..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/Name.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_Name 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_Name, Tk_PathName, Tk_NameToWindow \- convert between names and window tokens
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_Uid
-\fBTk_Name\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-char *
-\fBTk_PathName\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_NameToWindow\fR(\fIinterp, pathName, tkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *pathName
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
-Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP "const char" *pathName in
-Character string containing path name of window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Each window managed by Tk has two names, a short name that identifies
-a window among children of the same parent, and a path name that
-identifies the window uniquely among all the windows belonging to the
-same main window.  The path name is used more often in Tk than the
-short name;  many commands, like \fBbind\fR, expect path names as
-arguments.
-.PP
-The \fBTk_Name\fR macro returns a window's
-short name, which is the same as the \fIname\fR argument
-passed to \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR when
-the window was created.  The value is returned
-as a Tk_Uid, which may be used just like a string pointer but also has
-the properties of a unique identifier (see the manual entry for
-\fBTk_GetUid\fR for details).
-.PP
-The \fBTk_PathName\fR macro returns a hierarchical name for \fItkwin\fR.
-Path names have a structure similar to file names in Unix but with
-dots between elements instead of slashes:  the main window for
-an application has the path name
-.QW . ;
-its children have names like
-.QW .a
-and
-.QW .b ;
-their children have names like
-.QW .a.aa
-and
-.QW .b.bb ;
-and so on.  A window is considered to be a child of
-another window for naming purposes if the second window was named
-as the first window's \fIparent\fR when the first window was created.
-This is not always the same as the X window hierarchy.  For
-example, a pop-up
-is created as a child of the root window, but its logical parent will
-usually be a window within the application.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR returns the token for a window
-given its path name (the \fIpathName\fR argument) and another window
-belonging to the same main window (\fItkwin\fR).  It normally
-returns a token for the named window, but if no such window exists
-\fBTk_NameToWindow\fR leaves an error message in interpreter
-\fIinterp\fR's result
-and returns NULL.  The \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR
-is needed because path names are only unique within a single
-application hierarchy.  If, for example, a single process has opened
-two main windows, each will have a separate naming hierarchy and the
-same path name might appear in each of the hierarchies.  Normally
-\fItkwin\fR is the main window of the desired hierarchy, but this
-need not be the case:  any window in the desired hierarchy may be used.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-name, path name, token, window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/NameOfImg.3 b/tk8.6/doc/NameOfImg.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 78332db..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/NameOfImg.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_NameOfImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ImageMaster *masterPtr
-.AP Tk_ImageMaster *masterPtr in
-Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when
-the image was created.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure is invoked by image managers to find out the name
-of an image.  Given the token for the image, it returns the
-string name for the image.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-image manager, image name
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/OwnSelect.3 b/tk8.6/doc/OwnSelect.3
deleted file mode 100644
index ed9bcab..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/OwnSelect.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_OwnSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_OwnSelection \- make a window the owner of the primary selection
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_OwnSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection, proc, clientData\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_LostSelProc clientData
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window that is to become new selection owner.
-.AP Atom selection in
-The name of the selection to be owned, such as XA_PRIMARY.
-.AP Tk_LostSelProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke when \fItkwin\fR loses selection ownership later.
-.AP ClientData clientData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_OwnSelection\fR arranges for \fItkwin\fR to become the
-new owner of the selection specified by the atom
-\fIselection\fR.  After this call completes, future requests
-for the selection will be directed to handlers created for
-\fItkwin\fR using \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR.  When \fItkwin\fR
-eventually loses the selection ownership, \fIproc\fR will be
-invoked so that the window can clean itself up (e.g. by
-unhighlighting the selection).  \fIProc\fR should have arguments and
-result that match the type \fBTk_LostSelProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_LostSelProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the
-\fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTk_OwnSelection\fR, and is
-usually a pointer to a data structure containing application-specific
-information about \fItkwin\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-own, selection owner
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ParseArgv.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ParseArgv.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a9bd49..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ParseArgv.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,360 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_ParseArgv 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ParseArgv \- process command-line options
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for returning error messages.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window to use when arguments specify Tk options.  If NULL, then
-no Tk options will be processed.
-.AP int argcPtr in/out
-Pointer to number of arguments in argv;  gets modified to hold
-number of unprocessed arguments that remain after the call.
-.AP "const char" **argv in/out
-Command line arguments passed to main program.  Modified to
-hold unprocessed arguments that remain after the call.
-.AP Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable in
-Array of argument descriptors, terminated by element with
-type \fBTK_ARGV_END\fR.
-.AP int flags in
-If non-zero, then it specifies one or more flags that control the
-parsing of arguments.  Different flags may be OR'ed together.
-The flags currently defined are \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR,
-\fBTK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV\fR, \fBTK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS\fR, and
-\fBTK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR processes an array of command-line arguments according
-to a table describing the kinds of arguments that are expected.
-Each of the arguments in \fIargv\fR is processed in turn:  if it matches
-one of the entries in \fIargTable\fR, the argument is processed
-according to that entry and discarded.  The arguments that do not
-match anything in \fIargTable\fR are copied down to the beginning
-of \fIargv\fR (retaining their original order) and returned to
-the caller.  At the end of the call
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR sets \fI*argcPtr\fR to hold the number of
-arguments that are left in \fIargv\fR, and \fIargv[*argcPtr]\fR
-will hold the value NULL.  Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR
-assumes that \fIargv[0]\fR is a command name, so it is treated like
-an argument that does not match \fIargTable\fR and returned to the
-caller;  however, if the \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR bit is set in
-\fIflags\fR then \fIargv[0]\fR will be processed just like the other
-elements of \fIargv\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR normally returns the value \fBTCL_OK\fR.  If an error
-occurs while parsing the arguments, then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will leave an error message in the result of
-interpreter \fIinterp\fR in the standard Tcl fashion.  In
-the event of an error return, \fI*argvPtr\fR will not have been
-modified, but \fIargv\fR could have been partially modified.  The
-possible causes of errors are explained below.
-.PP
-The \fIargTable\fR array specifies the kinds of arguments that are
-expected;  each of its entries has the following structure:
-.CS
-typedef struct {
-    const char *\fIkey\fR;
-    int \fItype\fR;
-    char *\fIsrc\fR;
-    char *\fIdst\fR;
-    const char *\fIhelp\fR;
-} \fBTk_ArgvInfo\fR;
-.CE
-The \fIkey\fR field is a string such as
-.QW \-display
-or
-.QW \-bg
-that is compared with the values in \fIargv\fR.  \fIType\fR
-indicates how to process an argument that matches \fIkey\fR
-(more on this below).  \fISrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are additional
-values used in processing the argument.  Their exact usage
-depends on \fItype\fR, but typically \fIsrc\fR indicates
-a value and \fIdst\fR indicates where to store the
-value.  The \fBchar *\fR declarations for \fIsrc\fR and \fIdst\fR
-are placeholders:  the actual types may be different.  Lastly,
-\fIhelp\fR is a string giving a brief description
-of this option;  this string is printed when users ask for help
-about command-line options.
-.PP
-When processing an argument in \fIargv\fR, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR
-compares the argument to each of the \fIkey\fR's in \fIargTable\fR.
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR selects the first specifier whose \fIkey\fR matches
-the argument exactly, if such a specifier exists.  Otherwise
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR selects a specifier for which the argument
-is a unique abbreviation.  If the argument is a unique abbreviation
-for more than one specifier, then an error is returned.  If there
-is no matching entry in \fIargTable\fR, then the argument is
-skipped and returned to the caller.
-.PP
-Once a matching argument specifier is found, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR
-processes the argument according to the \fItype\fR field of the
-specifier.  The argument that matched \fIkey\fR is called
-.QW "the matching argument"
-in the descriptions below.  As part of the processing,
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR may also use the next argument in \fIargv\fR
-after the matching argument, which is called
-.QW "the following argument" .
-The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the processing
-that they cause, are as follows:
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_END\fR
-Marks the end of the table.  The last entry in \fIargTable\fR
-must have this type;  all of its other fields are ignored and it
-will never match any arguments.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_CONSTANT\fR
-\fISrc\fR is treated as an integer and \fIdst\fR is treated
-as a pointer to an integer.  \fISrc\fR is stored at \fI*dst\fR.
-The matching argument is discarded.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_INT\fR
-The following argument must contain an
-integer string in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g.
-.QW 0
-and
-.QW 0x
-prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal
-numbers, respectively).  \fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to an
-integer;  the following argument is converted to an integer value
-and stored at \fI*dst\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.  The matching
-and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_FLOAT\fR
-The following argument must contain a floating-point number in
-the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.
-\fIDst\fR is treated as the address of a double-precision
-floating point value;  the following argument is converted to a
-double-precision value and stored at \fI*dst\fR.  The matching
-and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR
-In this form, \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to a (char *);
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR a pointer to the following
-argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from
-\fIargv\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_UID\fR
-This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR, except that the argument
-is turned into a Tk_Uid by calling \fBTk_GetUid\fR.
-\fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to a
-Tk_Uid; \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR the Tk_Uid
-corresponding to the following
-argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from
-\fIargv\fR.  \fISrc\fR is ignored.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR
-This form causes a Tk option to be set (as if the \fBoption\fR
-command had been invoked).  The \fIsrc\fR field is treated as a
-pointer to a string giving the value of an option, and \fIdst\fR
-is treated as a pointer to the name of the option.  The matching
-argument is discarded.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument
-specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE\fR
-This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR, except that the
-value of the option is taken from the following argument instead
-of from \fIsrc\fR.  \fIDst\fR is used as the name of the option.
-\fISrc\fR is ignored.  The matching and following arguments
-are discarded.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument
-specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE\fR
-In this case the following argument is taken as the name of a Tk
-option and the argument after that is taken as the value for that
-option.  Both \fIsrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are ignored.  All three
-arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR.  If \fItkwin\fR is NULL,
-then argument
-specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist).
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR
-When this kind of option is encountered, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR uses the
-\fIhelp\fR fields of \fIargTable\fR to format a message describing
-all the valid arguments.  The message is placed in interpreter
-\fIinterp\fR's result
-and \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  When this happens, the
-caller normally prints the help message and aborts.  If the \fIkey\fR
-field of a \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR specifier is NULL, then the specifier will
-never match any arguments;  in this case the specifier simply provides
-extra documentation, which will be included when some other
-\fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR entry causes help information to be returned.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR
-This option is used by programs or commands that allow the last
-several of their options to be the name and/or options for some
-other program.  If a \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR argument is found, then
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR does not process any
-of the remaining arguments;  it returns them all at
-the beginning of \fIargv\fR (along with any other unprocessed arguments).
-In addition, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR treats \fIdst\fR as the address of an
-integer value, and stores at \fI*dst\fR the index of the first of the
-\fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options in the returned \fIargv\fR.  This allows the
-program to distinguish the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options from other
-unprocessed options that preceded the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_FUNC\fR
-For this kind of argument, \fIsrc\fR is treated as the address of
-a procedure, which is invoked to process the following argument.
-The procedure should have the following structure:
-.RS
-.CS
-int
-\fIfunc\fR(\fIdst\fR, \fIkey\fR, \fInextArg\fR)
-    char *\fIdst\fR;
-    char *\fIkey\fR;
-    char *\fInextArg\fR;
-{
-}
-.CE
-The \fIdst\fR and \fIkey\fR parameters will contain the
-corresponding fields from the \fIargTable\fR entry, and
-\fInextArg\fR will point to the following argument from \fIargv\fR
-(or NULL if there are not any more arguments left in \fIargv\fR).
-If \fIfunc\fR uses \fInextArg\fR (so that
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR should discard it), then it should return 1.  Otherwise it
-should return 0 and \fBTkParseArgv\fR will process the following
-argument in the normal fashion.  In either event the matching argument
-is discarded.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_GENFUNC\fR
-This form provides a more general procedural escape.  It treats
-\fIsrc\fR as the address of a procedure, and passes that procedure
-all of the remaining arguments.  The procedure should have the following
-form:
-.RS
-.CS
-int
-\fIgenfunc\fR(dst, interp, key, argc, argv)
-    char *\fIdst\fR;
-    Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR;
-    char *\fIkey\fR;
-    int \fIargc\fR;
-    char **\fIargv\fR;
-{
-}
-.CE
-The \fIdst\fR and \fIkey\fR parameters will contain the
-corresponding fields from the \fIargTable\fR entry.  \fIInterp\fR
-will be the same as the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTcl_ParseArgv\fR.
-\fIArgc\fR and \fIargv\fR refer to all of the options after the
-matching one.  \fIGenfunc\fR should behave in a fashion similar
-to \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR:  parse as many of the remaining arguments as it can,
-then return any that are left by compacting them to the beginning of
-\fIargv\fR (starting at \fIargv\fR[0]).  \fIGenfunc\fR
-should return a count of how many arguments are left in \fIargv\fR;
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will process them.  If \fIgenfunc\fR encounters
-an error then it should leave an error message in interpreter
-\fIinterp\fR's result,
-in the usual Tcl fashion, and return \-1;  when this happens
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will abort its processing and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
-.RE
-.SS "FLAGS"
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR
-\fBTk_ParseArgv\fR normally treats \fIargv[0]\fR as a program
-or command name, and returns it to the caller just as if it
-had not matched \fIargTable\fR.  If this flag is given, then
-\fIargv[0]\fR is not given special treatment.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV\fR
-Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR accepts unique abbreviations for
-\fIkey\fR values in \fIargTable\fR.  If this flag is given then
-only exact matches will be acceptable.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS\fR
-Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns unrecognized arguments to the
-caller.  If this bit is set in \fIflags\fR then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR
-will return an error if it encounters any argument that does not
-match \fIargTable\fR.  The only exception to this rule is \fIargv[0]\fR,
-which will be returned to the caller with no errors as
-long as \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR is not specified.
-.TP
-\fBTK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS\fR
-Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR searches an internal table of
-standard argument specifiers in addition to \fIargTable\fR.  If
-this bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will
-use only \fIargTable\fR and not its default table.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Here is an example definition of an \fIargTable\fR and
-some sample command lines that use the options.  Note the effect
-on \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR;  arguments processed by \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR
-are eliminated from \fIargv\fR, and \fIargc\fR
-is updated to reflect reduced number of arguments.
-.CS
-/*
- * Define and set default values for globals.
- */
-int debugFlag = 0;
-int numReps = 100;
-char defaultFileName[] = "out";
-char *fileName = defaultFileName;
-Boolean exec = FALSE;
-
-/*
- * Define option descriptions.
- */
-Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
-    {"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, (char *) &debugFlag,
-        "Turn on debugging printfs"},
-    {"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, (char *) NULL, (char *) &numReps,
-        "Number of repetitions"},
-    {"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &fileName,
-        "Name of file for output"},
-    {"x", TK_ARGV_REST, (char *) NULL, (char *) &exec,
-        "File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."},
-    {(char *) NULL, TK_ARGV_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-        (char *) NULL}
-};
-
-main(argc, argv)
-    int argc;
-    char *argv[];
-{
-    \&...
-
-    if (Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, &argc, argv, argTable, 0) != TCL_OK) {
-        fprintf(stderr, "%s\en", Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
-        exit(1);
-    }
-
-    /*
-     * Remainder of the program.
-     */
-}
-.CE
-.PP
-Note that default values can be assigned to variables named in
-\fIargTable\fR:  the variables will only be overwritten if the
-particular arguments are present in \fIargv\fR.
-Here are some example command lines and their effects.
-.CS
-prog \-N 200 infile        # just sets the numReps variable to 200
-prog \-of out200 infile    # sets fileName to reference "out200"
-prog \-XN 10 infile        # sets the debug flag, also sets numReps
-.CE
-In all of the above examples, \fIargc\fR will be set by \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR to 2,
-\fIargv\fR[0] will be
-.QW prog ,
-\fIargv\fR[1] will be
-.QW infile ,
-and \fIargv\fR[2] will be NULL.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-arguments, command line, options
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/QWinEvent.3 b/tk8.6/doc/QWinEvent.3
deleted file mode 100644
index caa5026..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/QWinEvent.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_QueueWindowEvent 3 7.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CollapseMotionEvents, Tk_QueueWindowEvent \- Add a window event to the Tcl event queue
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR(\fIdisplay, collapse\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr, position\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_QueuePosition position
-.AP Display *display  in
-Display for which to control motion event collapsing.
-.AP int collapse in
-Indicates whether motion events should be collapsed or not.
-.AP XEvent *eventPtr  in
-An event to add to the event queue. It is important
-that all unused fields of the structure be set to zero.
-.AP Tcl_QueuePosition position in
-Where to add the new event in the queue:  \fBTCL_QUEUE_TAIL\fR,
-\fBTCL_QUEUE_HEAD\fR, or \fBTCL_QUEUE_MARK\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR places a window event on Tcl's internal event
-queue for eventual servicing.  It creates a Tcl_Event structure, copies the
-event into that structure, and calls \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR to add the event
-to the queue.  When the event is eventually removed from the queue it is
-processed just like all window events.
-.PP
-When multiple motion events are received for the same window in rapid
-succession, they are collapsed by default.  This behavior can be controlled
-with \fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR.  \fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR always
-returns the previous value for collapse behavior on the \fIdisplay\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIposition\fR argument to \fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR has
-the same significance as for \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR;  see the
-documentation for \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR for details.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-callback, clock, handler, modal timeout, events
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/Restack.3 b/tk8.6/doc/Restack.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b9097f..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/Restack.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_RestackWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_RestackWindow \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_RestackWindow\fR(\fItkwin, aboveBelow, other\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window aboveBelow
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window to restack.
-.AP int aboveBelow in
-Indicates new position of \fItkwin\fR relative to \fIother\fR;
-must be \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR.
-.AP Tk_Window other in
-\fITkwin\fR will be repositioned just above or below this window.
-Must be a sibling of \fItkwin\fR or a descendant of a sibling.
-If NULL then \fItkwin\fR is restacked above or below all siblings.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_RestackWindow\fR changes the stacking order of \fIwindow\fR relative
-to its siblings.
-If \fIother\fR is specified as NULL then \fIwindow\fR is repositioned
-at the top or bottom of its stacking order, depending on whether
-\fIaboveBelow\fR is \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR.
-If \fIother\fR has a non-NULL value then \fIwindow\fR is repositioned
-just above or below \fIother\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIaboveBelow\fR argument must have one of the symbolic values
-\fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR.
-Both of these values are defined by the include file <X11/Xlib.h>.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-above, below, obscure, stacking order
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/RestrictEv.3 b/tk8.6/doc/RestrictEv.3
deleted file mode 100644
index eb1f040..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/RestrictEv.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_RestrictEvents 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_RestrictEvents \- filter and selectively delay X events
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_RestrictProc *
-\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR(\fIproc, arg, prevArgPtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_RestrictProc **prevArgPtr
-.AP Tk_RestrictProc *proc in
-Predicate procedure to call to filter incoming X events.
-NULL means do not restrict events at all.
-.AP ClientData arg in
-Arbitrary argument to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.AP ClientData *prevArgPtr out
-Pointer to place to save argument to previous restrict procedure.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure is useful in certain situations where applications
-are only prepared to receive certain X events.  After
-\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR is called, \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR (and
-hence \fBTk_MainLoop\fR) will filter X input events through
-\fIproc\fR.  \fIProc\fR indicates whether a
-given event is to be processed immediately, deferred until some
-later time (e.g. when the event restriction is lifted), or discarded.
-\fIProc\fR
-is a procedure with arguments and result that match
-the type \fBTk_RestrictProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef Tk_RestrictAction \fBTk_RestrictProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIarg\fR,
-        XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIarg\fR argument is a copy of the \fIarg\fR passed
-to \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR; it may be used to provide \fIproc\fR with
-information it needs to filter events.  The \fIeventPtr\fR points to
-an event under consideration.  \fIProc\fR returns a restrict action
-(enumerated type \fBTk_RestrictAction\fR) that indicates what
-\fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR should do with the event.  If the return value is
-\fBTK_PROCESS_EVENT\fR, then the event will be handled immediately.
-If the return value is \fBTK_DEFER_EVENT\fR, then the event will be
-left on the event queue for later processing.  If the return value is
-\fBTK_DISCARD_EVENT\fR, then the event will be removed from the event
-queue and discarded without being processed.
-.PP
-\fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR uses its return value and \fIprevArgPtr\fR
-to return information about the current event restriction procedure
-(a NULL return value means there are currently no restrictions).
-These values may be used to restore the previous restriction state
-when there is no longer any need for the current restriction.
-.PP
-There are very few places where \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR is needed.
-In most cases, the best way to restrict events is by changing the
-bindings with the \fBbind\fR Tcl command or by calling
-\fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR and \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR from C.
-The main place where \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR must be used is when
-performing synchronous actions (for example, if you need to wait
-for a particular event to occur on a particular window but you do not
-want to invoke any handlers for any other events).  The
-.QW obvious
-solution in these situations is to call \fBXNextEvent\fR or
-\fBXWindowEvent\fR, but these procedures cannot be used because
-Tk keeps its own event queue that is separate from the X event
-queue.  Instead, call \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR to set up a filter,
-then call \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR to retrieve the desired event(s).
-.SH KEYWORDS
-delay, event, filter, restriction
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/SetAppName.3 b/tk8.6/doc/SetAppName.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3978850..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/SetAppName.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_SetAppName 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_SetAppName \- Set the name of an application for 'send' commands
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_SetAppName\fR(\fItkwin, name\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window parent
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window in application.  Used only to select a particular
-application.
-.AP "const char" *name in
-Name under which to register the application.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetAppName\fR associates a name with a given application and
-records that association on the display containing with the application's
-main window.
-After this procedure has been invoked, other applications on the
-display will be able to use the \fBsend\fR command to invoke operations
-in the application.
-If \fIname\fR is already in use by some other application on the
-display, then a new name will be generated by appending
-.QW "\fB #2\fR"
-to \fIname\fR;  if this name is also in use,
-the number will be incremented until an unused name is found.
-The return value from the procedure is a pointer to the name actually
-used.
-.PP
-If the application already has a name when \fBTk_SetAppName\fR is
-called, then the new name replaces the old name.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetAppName\fR also adds a \fBsend\fR command to the application's
-interpreter, which can be used to send commands from this application
-to others on any of the displays where the application has windows.
-.PP
-The application's name registration persists until the interpreter is
-deleted or the \fBsend\fR command is deleted from \fIinterp\fR, at which
-point the name is automatically unregistered and the application
-becomes inaccessible via \fBsend\fR.
-The application can be made accessible again by calling \fBTk_SetAppName\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetAppName\fR is called automatically by \fBTk_Init\fR,
-so applications do not normally need to call it explicitly.
-.PP
-The command \fBtk appname\fR provides Tcl-level access to the
-functionality of \fBTk_SetAppName\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, name, register, send command
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/SetCaret.3 b/tk8.6/doc/SetCaret.3
deleted file mode 100644
index fd63f18..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/SetCaret.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_SetCaretPos 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_SetCaretPos \- set the display caret location
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR(\fItkwin, x, y, height\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP int x in
-Window-relative x coordinate.
-.AP int y in
-Window-relative y coordinate.
-.AP int h in
-Height of the caret in the window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR sets the caret location for the display of the
-specified Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR.  The caret is the per-display cursor
-location used for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft
-Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the over-the-spot XIM
-(X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-caret, cursor
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/SetClass.3 b/tk8.6/doc/SetClass.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 707975d..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/SetClass.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_SetClass 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_SetClass, Tk_Class \- set or retrieve a window's class
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetClass\fR(\fItkwin, class\fR)
-.sp
-Tk_Uid
-\fBTk_Class\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window parent
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP char *class in
-New class name for window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetClass\fR is called to associate a class with a particular
-window.  The \fIclass\fR string identifies the type of the
-window;  all windows with the same general class of behavior
-(button, menu, etc.) should have the same class.  By
-convention all class names start with a capital letter, and
-there exists a Tcl command with the same name as
-each class (except all in lower-case) which can be used to
-create and manipulate windows of that class.
-A window's class string is initialized to NULL
-when the window is created.
-.PP
-For main windows, Tk automatically propagates the name and class
-to the WM_CLASS property used by window managers.  This happens
-either when a main window is actually created (e.g. in
-\fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR), or when \fBTk_SetClass\fR
-is called, whichever occurs later.  If a main window has not been
-assigned a class then Tk will not set the WM_CLASS property for
-the window.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Class\fR is a macro that returns the
-current value of \fItkwin\fR's class.  The value is returned
-as a Tk_Uid, which may be used just like a string pointer but also has
-the properties of a unique identifier (see the manual entry for
-\fBTk_GetUid\fR for details).
-If \fItkwin\fR has not yet been given a class, then
-\fBTk_Class\fR will return NULL.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-class, unique identifier, window, window manager
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/SetClassProcs.3 b/tk8.6/doc/SetClassProcs.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 58618da..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/SetClassProcs.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_SetClassProcs 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_SetClassProcs \- register widget specific procedures
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR(\fItkwin, procs, instanceData\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_ClassProc instanceData
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window to modify.
-.AP "const Tk_ClassProcs" *procs in
-Pointer to data structure containing widget specific procedures.
-The data structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR must be static:
-Tk keeps a reference to it as long as the window exists.
-.AP ClientData instanceData in
-Arbitrary one-word value to pass to widget callbacks.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that
-are used as callbacks in different places.
-.PP
-The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following:
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
-    unsigned int \fIsize\fR;
-    Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *\fIworldChangedProc\fR;
-    Tk_ClassCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
-    Tk_ClassModalProc *\fImodalProc\fR;
-} \fBTk_ClassProcs\fR;
-.CE
-The \fIsize\fR field is used to simplify future expansion of the
-structure. It should always be set to (literally) \fBsizeof(Tk_ClassProcs)\fR.
-.PP
-\fIworldChangedProc\fR is invoked when the system has altered
-in some way that requires some reaction from the widget.  For example,
-when a font alias (see the \fBfont\fR manual entry) is reconfigured,
-widgets configured to use that font alias must update their display
-accordingly.  \fIworldChangedProc\fR should have arguments and results
-that match the type \fBTk_ClassWorldChangedProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ClassWorldChangedProc\fR(
-        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinstanceData\fR parameter passed to the \fIworldChangedProc\fR
-will be identical to the \fIinstanceData\fR parameter passed to
-\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR.
-.PP
-\fIcreateProc\fR is used to create platform-dependant windows.  It is
-invoked by \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR.  \fIcreateProc\fR should have
-arguments and results that match the type \fBTk_ClassCreateProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef Window \fBTk_ClassCreateProc\fR(
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-        Window \fIparent\fR,
-        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR);
-.CE
-The \fItkwin\fR and \fIinstanceData\fR parameters will be identical to
-the \fItkwin\fR and \fIinstanceData\fR parameters passed to
-\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR.  The \fIparent\fR parameter will be the parent
-of the window to be created.  The \fIcreateProc\fR should return the
-created window.
-.PP
-\fImodalProc\fR is invoked after all bindings on a widget have been
-triggered in order to handle a modal loop.  \fImodalProc\fR should
-have arguments and results that match the type \fBTk_ClassModalProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef void \fBTk_ClassModalProc\fR(
-        Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-        XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR);
-.CE
-The \fItkwin\fR parameter to \fImodalProc\fR will be identical to the
-\fItkwin\fR parameter passed to \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR.  The
-\fIeventPtr\fR parameter will be a pointer to an XEvent structure
-describing the event being processed.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-callback, class
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/SetGrid.3 b/tk8.6/doc/SetGrid.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 28e428b..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/SetGrid.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_SetGrid 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_SetGrid, Tk_UnsetGrid \- control the grid for interactive resizing
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_SetGrid\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window heightInc
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP int reqWidth in
-Width in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension \fItkwin\fR
-has requested via \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR.
-.AP int reqHeight in
-Height in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension \fItkwin\fR
-has requested via \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR.
-.AP int widthInc in
-Width of one grid unit, in pixels.
-.AP int heightInc in
-Height of one grid unit, in pixels.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetGrid\fR turns on gridded geometry management for \fItkwin\fR's
-toplevel window and specifies the geometry of the grid.
-\fBTk_SetGrid\fR is typically invoked by a widget when its \fBsetGrid\fR
-option is true.
-It restricts interactive resizing of \fItkwin\fR's toplevel window so
-that the space allocated to the toplevel is equal to its requested
-size plus or minus even multiples of \fIwidthInc\fR and \fIheightInc\fR.
-Furthermore, the \fIreqWidth\fR and \fIreqHeight\fR values are
-passed to the window manager so that it can report the window's
-size in grid units during interactive resizes.
-If \fItkwin\fR's configuration changes (e.g., the size of a grid unit
-changes) then the widget should invoke \fBTk_SetGrid\fR again with the new
-information.
-.PP
-\fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR cancels gridded geometry management for
-\fItkwin\fR's toplevel window.
-.PP
-For each toplevel window there can be at most one internal window
-with gridding enabled.
-If \fBTk_SetGrid\fR or \fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR is invoked when some
-other window is already controlling gridding for \fItkwin\fR's
-toplevel, the calls for the new window have no effect.
-.PP
-See the \fBwm\fR manual entry for additional information on gridded geometry
-management.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-grid, window, window manager
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/SetOptions.3 b/tk8.6/doc/SetOptions.3
deleted file mode 100644
index b5f0782..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/SetOptions.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,656 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_SetOptions 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue,  Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions, Tk_Offset \- process configuration options
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_OptionTable
-\fBTk_CreateOptionTable(\fIinterp, templatePtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_DeleteOptionTable(\fIoptionTable\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_InitOptions(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_SetOptions(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr, maskPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeSavedOptions(\fIsavedPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions(\fIsavedPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tcl_Obj *
-\fBTk_GetOptionValue(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR
-.sp
-Tcl_Obj *
-\fBTk_GetOptionInfo(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_Offset(\fItype, field\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-A Tcl interpreter.  Most procedures use this only for returning error
-messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned.  For
-\fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the
-interpreter in which the option table will be used.
-.AP "const Tk_OptionSpec" *templatePtr in
-Points to an array of static information that describes the configuration
-options that are supported.  Used to build a Tk_OptionTable.  The information
-pointed to by this argument must exist for the lifetime of the Tk_OptionTable.
-.AP Tk_OptionTable optionTable in
-Token for an option table.  Must have been returned by a previous call
-to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR.
-.AP char *recordPtr in/out
-Points to structure in which values of configuration options are stored;
-fields of this record are modified by procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR
-and read by procedures such as \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-For options such as \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR, this argument indicates
-the window in which the option will be used.  If \fIoptionTable\fR uses
-no window-dependent options, then a NULL value may be supplied for
-this argument.
-.AP int objc in
-Number of values in \fIobjv\fR.
-.AP Tcl_Obj "*const objv[]" in
-Command-line arguments for setting configuring options.
-.AP Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr out
-If not NULL, the structure pointed to by this argument is filled
-in with the old values of any options that were modified and old
-values are restored automatically if an error occurs in \fBTk_SetOptions\fR.
-.AP int *maskPtr out
-If not NULL, the word pointed to by \fImaskPtr\fR is filled in with the
-bit-wise OR of the \fItypeMask\fR fields for the options that
-were modified.
-.AP Tk_SavedOptions *savedPtr in/out
-Points to a structure previously filled in by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR with
-old values of modified options.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *namePtr in
-The value of this object is the name of a particular option.  If NULL
-is passed to \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR then information is returned for
-all options.  Must not be NULL when \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR is called.
-.AP "type name" type in
-The name of the type of a record.
-.AP "field name" field in
-The name of a field in records of type \fItype\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures handle most of the details of parsing configuration
-options such as those for Tk widgets.  Given a description of what
-options are supported, these procedures handle all the details of
-parsing options and storing their values into a C structure associated
-with the widget or object. The procedures were designed primarily for
-widgets in Tk, but they can also be used for other kinds of objects that
-have configuration options.  In the rest of this manual page
-.QW widget
-will be used to refer to the object whose options are being managed; in
-practice the object may not actually be a widget.  The term
-.QW "widget record"
-is used to refer to the C-level structure in
-which information about a particular widget or object is stored.
-.PP
-Note: the easiest way to learn how to use these procedures is to
-look at a working example.  In Tk, the simplest example is the code
-that implements the button family of widgets, which is in \fBtkButton.c\fR.
-Other examples are in \fBtkSquare.c\fR and \fBtkMenu.c\fR.
-.PP
-In order to use these procedures, the code that implements the widget
-must contain a static array of Tk_OptionSpec structures. This is a
-template that describes the various options supported by that class of
-widget; there is a separate template for each kind of widget.  The
-template contains information such as the name of each option, its type,
-its default value, and where the value of the option is stored in the
-widget record.  See TEMPLATES below for more detail.
-.PP
-In order to process configuration options efficiently, the static
-template must be augmented with additional information that is available
-only at runtime.  The procedure \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR creates this
-dynamic information from the template and returns a Tk_OptionTable token
-that describes both the static and dynamic information.  All of the
-other procedures, such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, take a Tk_OptionTable
-token as argument.  Typically, \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR is called the
-first time that a widget of a particular class is created and the
-resulting Tk_OptionTable is used in the future for all widgets of that
-class.  A Tk_OptionTable may be used only in a single interpreter, given
-by the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR.  When an
-option table is no longer needed \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR should be
-called to free all of its resources.  All of the option tables
-for a Tcl interpreter are freed automatically if the interpreter is deleted.
-.PP
-\fBTk_InitOptions\fR is invoked when a new widget is created to set the
-default values for all of the widget's configuration options that do not
-have \fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR set in their \fIflags\fR field.
-\fBTk_InitOptions\fR is passed a token for an option table
-(\fIoptionTable\fR) and a pointer to a widget record (\fIrecordPtr\fR),
-which is the C structure that holds information about this widget.
-\fBTk_InitOptions\fR uses the information in the option table to choose an
-appropriate default for each option, except those having
-\fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR set, then it stores the default value
-directly into the widget record, overwriting any information that was
-already present in the widget record.  \fBTk_InitOptions\fR normally
-returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.  If an error occurred while setting the default
-values (e.g., because a default value was erroneous) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
-is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if
-\fIinterp\fR is not NULL.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR is invoked to modify configuration options based
-on information specified in a Tcl command.  The command might be one that
-creates a new widget, or a command that modifies options on an existing
-widget.  The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe the
-values of the arguments from the Tcl command.  \fIObjv\fR must contain
-an even number of objects: the first object of each pair gives the name of
-an option and the second object gives the new value for that option.
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR looks up each name in \fIoptionTable\fR, checks that
-the new value of the option conforms to the type in \fIoptionTable\fR,
-and stores the value of the option into the widget record given by
-\fIrecordPtr\fR.  \fBTk_SetOptions\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.  If
-an error occurred (such as an unknown option name or an illegal option
-value) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in
-\fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.
-.PP
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR has two additional features.  First, if the
-\fImaskPtr\fR argument is not NULL then it points to an integer
-value that is filled in with information about the options that were
-modified.  For each option in the template passed to
-\fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR there is a \fItypeMask\fR field.  The
-bits of this field are defined by the code that implements the widget;
-for example, each bit might correspond to a particular configuration option.
-Alternatively, bits might be used functionally.  For example, one bit might
-be used for redisplay: all options that affect the widget's display, such
-that changing the option requires the widget to be redisplayed, might have
-that bit set.  Another bit might indicate that the geometry of the widget
-must be recomputed, and so on.  \fBTk_SetOptions\fR OR's together the
-\fItypeMask\fR fields from all the options that were modified and returns
-this value at *\fImaskPtr\fR; the caller can then use this information
-to optimize itself so that, for example, it does not redisplay the widget
-if the modified options do not affect the widget's appearance.
-.PP
-The second additional feature of \fBTk_SetOptions\fR has to do with error
-recovery.  If an error occurs while processing configuration options, this
-feature makes it possible to restore all the configuration options to their
-previous values.  Errors can occur either while processing options in
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR or later in the caller.  In many cases the caller does
-additional processing after \fBTk_SetOptions\fR returns; for example, it
-might use an option value to set a trace on a variable and may detect
-an error if the variable is an array instead of a scalar.  Error recovery
-is enabled by passing in a non-NULL value for the \fIsavePtr\fR argument
-to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR; this should be a pointer to an uninitialized
-Tk_SavedOptions structure on the caller's stack.  \fBTk_SetOptions\fR
-overwrites the structure pointed to by \fIsavePtr\fR with information
-about the old values of any options modified by the procedure.
-If \fBTk_SetOptions\fR returns successfully, the
-caller uses the structure in one of two ways.  If the caller completes
-its processing of the new options without any errors, then it must pass
-the structure to \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR so that the old values can be
-freed.  If the caller detects an error in its processing of the new
-options, then it should pass the structure to \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR,
-which will copy the old values back into the widget record and free
-the new values.
-If \fBTk_SetOptions\fR detects an error then it automatically restores
-any options that had already been modified and leaves *\fIsavePtr\fR in
-an empty state: the caller need not call either \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR or
-\fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR.
-If the \fIsavePtr\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR is NULL then
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR frees each old option value immediately when it sets a new
-value for the option.  In this case, if an error occurs in the third
-option, the old values for the first two options cannot be restored.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR returns the current value of a configuration option
-for a particular widget.  The \fInamePtr\fR argument contains the name of
-an option; \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR uses \fIoptionTable\fR
-to lookup the option and extract its value from the widget record
-pointed to by \fIrecordPtr\fR, then it returns an object containing
-that value.  If an error occurs (e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an
-unknown option name) then NULL is returned and an error message is left
-in \fIinterp\fR's result unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
-.PP
-\fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR returns information about configuration options in
-a form suitable for \fBconfigure\fR widget commands.  If the \fInamePtr\fR
-argument is not NULL, it points to an object that gives the name of a
-configuration option; \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR returns an object containing
-a list with five elements, which are the name of the option, the name and
-class used for the option in the option database, the default value for
-the option, and the current value for the option.  If the \fInamePtr\fR
-argument is NULL, then \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR returns information about
-all options in the form of a list of lists; each sublist describes one
-option.  Synonym options are handled differently depending on whether
-\fInamePtr\fR is NULL: if \fInamePtr\fR is NULL then the sublist for
-each synonym option has only two elements, which are the name of the
-option and the name of the other option that it refers to; if \fInamePtr\fR
-is non-NULL and names a synonym option then the object returned
-is the five-element list
-for the other option that the synonym refers to.  If an error occurs
-(e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL
-is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless
-\fIinterp\fR is NULL.
-.PP
-\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR must be invoked when a widget is deleted.
-It frees all of the resources associated with any of the configuration
-options defined in \fIrecordPtr\fR by \fIoptionTable\fR.
-.PP
-The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the
-\fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR values for entries in
-Tk_OptionSpec structures.  It takes two arguments: the name of a type
-of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte
-offset of the named field in records of the given type.
-.SH "TEMPLATES"
-.PP
-The array of Tk_OptionSpec structures passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR
-via its \fItemplatePtr\fR argument describes the configuration options
-supported by a particular class of widgets.  Each structure specifies
-one configuration option and has the following fields:
-.CS
-typedef struct {
-    Tk_OptionType \fItype\fR;
-    const char *\fIoptionName\fR;
-    const char *\fIdbName\fR;
-    const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
-    const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
-    int \fIobjOffset\fR;
-    int \fIinternalOffset\fR;
-    int \fIflags\fR;
-    const void *\fIclientData\fR;
-    int \fItypeMask\fR;
-} \fBTk_OptionSpec\fR;
-.CE
-The \fItype\fR field indicates what kind of configuration option this is
-(e.g. \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR for
-an integer value).  \fIType\fR determines how the
-value of the option is parsed (more on this below).
-The \fIoptionName\fR field is a string such as \fB\-font\fR or \fB\-bg\fR;
-it is the name used for the option in Tcl commands and passed to
-procedures via the \fIobjc\fR or \fInamePtr\fR arguments.
-The \fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR fields are used by \fBTk_InitOptions\fR
-to look up a default value for this option in the option database; if
-\fIdbName\fR is NULL then the option database is not used by
-\fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option.  The \fIdefValue\fR field
-specifies a default value for this configuration option if no
-value is specified in the option database.  The \fIobjOffset\fR and
-\fIinternalOffset\fR fields indicate where to store the value of this
-option in widget records (more on this below); values for the \fIobjOffset\fR
-and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields should always be generated with the
-\fBTk_Offset\fR macro.
-The \fIflags\fR field contains additional information
-to control the processing of this configuration option (see below
-for details).
-\fIClientData\fR provides additional type-specific data needed
-by certain types.  For instance, for \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR types,
-\fIclientData\fR is a string giving the default value to use on
-monochrome displays.  See the descriptions of the different types
-below for details.
-The last field, \fItypeMask\fR, is used by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to
-return information about which options were modified; see the description
-of \fBTk_SetOptions\fR above for details.
-.PP
-When \fBTk_InitOptions\fR and \fBTk_SetOptions\fR store the value of an
-option into the widget record, they can do it in either of two ways.
-If the \fIobjOffset\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec is greater than
-or equal to zero, then the value of the option is stored as a
-(Tcl_Obj *) at the location in the widget record given by \fIobjOffset\fR.
-If the \fIinternalOffset\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec is
-greater than or equal to zero, then the value of the option is stored
-in a type-specific internal form at the location in the widget record
-given by \fIinternalOffset\fR.  For example, if the option's type is
-\fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR then the internal form is an integer.  If the
-\fIobjOffset\fR or \fIinternalOffset\fR field is negative then the
-value is not stored in that form.  At least one of the offsets must be
-greater than or equal to zero.
-.PP
-The \fIflags\fR field consists of one or more bits ORed together. The
-following flags are supported:
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
-If this bit is set for an option then an empty string will be accepted as
-the value for the option and the resulting internal form will be a NULL
-pointer, a zero value, or \fBNone\fR, depending on the type of the option.
-If the flag is not set then empty strings will result in errors.
-\fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR is typically used to allow a
-feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to
-\fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor.
-Not all option types support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
-flag; for those that do, there is an explicit indication of that fact
-in the descriptions below.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR
-If this bit is set for an option then no default value will be set in
-\fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. Neither the option database, nor any
-system default value, nor \fIoptionTable\fR are used to give a default
-value to this option. Instead it is assumed that the caller has already
-supplied a default value in the widget code.
-.PP
-The \fItype\fR field of each Tk_OptionSpec structure determines
-how to parse the value of that configuration option. The
-legal value for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are
-described below.  If the type requires a \fItkwin\fR value to be
-passed into procedures like \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, or if it uses
-the \fIclientData\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec, then it is indicated
-explicitly; if not mentioned, the type requires neither \fItkwin\fR
-nor \fIclientData\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR
-The value must be a standard anchor position such as \fBne\fR or
-\fBcenter\fR.  The internal form is a Tk_Anchor value like the ones
-returned by \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_BITMAP\fR
-The value must be a standard Tk bitmap name. The internal form is a
-Pixmap token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR.
-This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
-such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR
-The value must be a standard boolean value such as \fBtrue\fR or
-\fBno\fR.  The internal form is an integer with value 0 or 1.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_BORDER\fR
-The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR.
-The internal form is a Tk_3DBorder token like the ones returned
-by \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR.
-This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
-such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR
-The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR.
-The internal form is an (XColor *) token like the ones returned by
-\fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR.
-This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
-such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_CURSOR\fR
-The value must be a standard cursor name such as \fBcross\fR or \fB@foo\fR.
-The internal form is a Tk_Cursor token like the ones returned by
-\fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR.
-This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
-such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and when the option is set the cursor
-for the window is changed by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR.  This
-option type also supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_CUSTOM\fR
-This option allows applications to define new option types.  The
-clientData field of the entry points to a structure defining the new
-option type.  See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_DOUBLE\fR
-The string value must be a floating-point number in
-the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR.  The internal form is a C
-\fBdouble\fR value.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
-flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to zero.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_END\fR
-Marks the end of the template.  There must be a Tk_OptionSpec structure
-with \fItype\fR \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR at the end of each template.  If the
-\fIclientData\fR field of this structure is not NULL, then it points to
-an additional array of Tk_OptionSpec's, which is itself terminated by
-another \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR entry.  Templates may be chained arbitrarily
-deeply.  This feature allows common options to be shared by several
-widget classes.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_FONT\fR
-The value must be a standard font name such as \fBTimes 16\fR.
-The internal form is a Tk_Font handle like the ones returned by
-\fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR.
-This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
-such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR
-The string value must be an integer in the format accepted by
-\fBstrtol\fR (e.g. \fB0\fR and \fB0x\fR prefixes may be used to
-specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively).  The internal
-form is a C \fBint\fR value.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_JUSTIFY\fR
-The value must be a standard justification value such as \fBleft\fR.
-The internal form is a Tk_Justify like the values returned by
-\fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR
-The value must specify a screen distance such as \fB2i\fR or \fB6.4\fR.
-The internal form is an integer value giving a
-distance in pixels, like the values returned by
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR.  Note: if the \fIobjOffset\fR field is not
-used then information about the original value of this option will be lost.
-See \fBOBJOFFSET VS. INTERNALOFFSET\fR below for details.  This option
-type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the
-internal representation is set to zero.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_RELIEF\fR
-The value must be standard relief such as \fBraised\fR.
-The internal form is an integer relief value such as
-\fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR.  This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR
-flag; if the empty string is specified as the value for the option,
-the integer relief value is set to \fBTK_RELIEF_NULL\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR
-The value may be any string.  The internal form is a (char *) pointer
-that points to a dynamically allocated copy of the value.
-This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR
-For this type, \fIclientData\fR is a pointer to an array of strings
-suitable for passing to \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR.  The value must
-be one of the strings in the table, or a unique abbreviation of
-one of the strings.  The internal form is an integer giving the index
-into the table of the matching string, like the return value
-from \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_SYNONYM\fR
-This type is used to provide alternative names for an option (for
-example, \fB\-bg\fR is often used as a synonym for \fB\-background\fR).
-The \fBclientData\fR field is a string that gives the name of another
-option in the same table.  Whenever the synonym option is used, the
-information from the other option will be used instead.
-.TP
-\fBTK_OPTION_WINDOW\fR
-The value must be a window path name.  The internal form is a
-\fBTk_Window\fR token for the window.
-This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures
-such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR (in order to identify the application),
-and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.SH "STORAGE MANAGEMENT ISSUES"
-.PP
-If a field of a widget record has its offset stored in the \fIobjOffset\fR
-or \fIinternalOffset\fR field of a Tk_OptionSpec structure then the
-procedures described here will handle all of the storage allocation and
-resource management issues associated with the field.  When the value
-of an option is changed, \fBTk_SetOptions\fR (or \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR)
-will automatically free any resources associated with the old value, such as
-Tk_Fonts for \fBTK_OPTION_FONT\fR options or dynamically allocated memory for
-\fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR options.  For an option stored as an object using the
-\fIobjOffset\fR field of a Tk_OptionSpec, the widget record shares the
-object pointed to by the \fIobjv\fR value from the call to
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR.  The reference count for this object is incremented
-when a pointer to it is stored in the widget record and decremented when
-the option is modified.  When the widget is deleted
-\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR should be invoked; it will free the resources
-associated with all options and decrement reference counts for any
-objects.
-.PP
-However, the widget code is responsible for storing NULL or \fBNone\fR in
-all pointer and token fields before invoking \fBTk_InitOptions\fR.
-This is needed to allow proper cleanup in the rare case where
-an error occurs in \fBTk_InitOptions\fR.
-.SH "OBJOFFSET VS. INTERNALOFFSET"
-.PP
-In most cases it is simplest to use the \fIinternalOffset\fR field of
-a Tk_OptionSpec structure and not the \fIobjOffset\fR field.  This
-makes the internal form of the value immediately available to the
-widget code so the value does not have to be extracted from an object
-each time it is used.  However, there are two cases where the
-\fIobjOffset\fR field is useful.  The first case is for
-\fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options.  In this case, the internal form is
-an integer pixel value that is valid only for a particular screen.
-If the value of the option is retrieved, it will be returned as a simple
-number.  For example, after the command \fB.b configure \-borderwidth 2m\fR,
-the command \fB.b configure \-borderwidth\fR might return 7, which is the
-integer pixel value corresponding to \fB2m\fR.  Unfortunately, this loses
-the original screen-independent value. Thus for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options
-it is better to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field.  In this case the original
-value of the option is retained in the object and can be returned when
-the option is retrieved.  In most cases it is convenient to use the
-\fIinternalOffset\fR field as well, so that the integer value is
-immediately available for use in the widget code (alternatively,
-\fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR can be used to extract the integer value from
-the object whenever it is needed).  Note: the problem of losing information
-on retrievals exists only for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options.
-.PP
-The second reason to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field is in order to
-implement new types of options not supported by these procedures.
-To implement a new type of option, you can use \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR as
-the type in the Tk_OptionSpec structure and set the \fIobjOffset\fR field
-but not the \fIinternalOffset\fR field.  Then, after calling
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR, convert the object to internal form yourself.
-.SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES"
-.PP
-Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with
-additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse, print,
-free, and restore saved copies of the type and creating a structure
-pointing to those procedures:
-.CS
-typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption {
-    char *name;
-    Tk_CustomOptionSetProc *\fIsetProc\fR;
-    Tk_CustomOptionGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR;
-    Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc *\fIrestoreProc\fR;
-    Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
-    ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
-} \fBTk_ObjCustomOption\fR;
-
-typedef int \fBTk_CustomOptionSetProc\fR(
-    ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-    Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-    Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-    Tcl_Obj **\fIvaluePtr\fR,
-    char *\fIrecordPtr\fR,
-    int \fIinternalOffset\fR,
-    char *\fIsaveInternalPtr\fR,
-    int \fIflags\fR);
-
-typedef Tcl_Obj *\fBTk_CustomOptionGetProc\fR(
-    ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-    Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-    char *\fIrecordPtr\fR,
-    int \fIinternalOffset\fR);
-
-typedef void \fBTk_CustomOptionRestoreProc\fR(
-    ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-    Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-    char *\fIinternalPtr\fR,
-    char *\fIsaveInternalPtr\fR);
-
-typedef void \fBTk_CustomOptionFreeProc\fR(
-    ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-    Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR,
-    char *\fIinternalPtr\fR);
-.CE
-.PP
-The Tk_ObjCustomOption structure contains six fields: a name
-for the custom option type; pointers to the four procedures; and a
-\fIclientData\fR value to be passed to those procedures when they are
-invoked.  The \fIclientData\fR value typically points to a structure
-containing information that is needed by the procedures when they are
-parsing and printing options.  \fIRestoreProc\fR and \fIfreeProc\fR
-may be NULL, indicating that no function should be called for those
-operations.
-.PP
-The \fIsetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to
-convert a Tcl_Obj into an internal representation and store the
-resulting value in the widget record.  The arguments are:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIclientData\fR
-A copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption
-structure.
-.TP
-\fIinterp\fR
-A pointer to a Tcl interpreter, used for error reporting.
-.TP
-\fITkwin\fR
-A copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR
-.TP
-\fIvaluePtr\fR
-A pointer to a reference to a Tcl_Obj describing the new value for the
-option; it could have been specified explicitly in the call to
-\fBTk_SetOptions\fR or it could come from the option database or a
-default.  If the objOffset for the option is non-negative (the option
-value is stored as a (Tcl_Obj *) in the widget record), the Tcl_Obj
-pointer referenced by \fIvaluePtr\fR is the pointer that will be
-stored at the objOffset for the option.  \fISetProc\fR may modify the
-value if necessary; for example, \fIsetProc\fR may change the value to
-NULL to support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag.
-.TP
-\fIrecordPtr\fR
-A pointer to the start of the widget record to modify.
-.TP
-\fIinternalOffset\fR
-Offset in bytes from the start of the widget record to the location
-where the internal representation of the option value is to be placed.
-.TP
-\fIsaveInternalPtr\fR
-A pointer to storage allocated in a Tk_SavedOptions structure for the
-internal representation of the original option value.  Before setting
-the option to its new value, \fIsetProc\fR should set the value
-referenced by \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR to the original value of the
-option in order to support \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR.
-.TP
-\fIflags\fR
-A copy of the \fIflags\fR field in the Tk_OptionSpec structure for the
-option
-.RE
-.PP
-\fISetProc\fR returns a standard Tcl result: \fBTCL_OK\fR to indicate successful
-processing, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to indicate a failure of any kind.  An error
-message may be left in the Tcl interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR in
-the case of an error.
-.PP
-The \fIgetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR and
-\fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR to retrieve a Tcl_Obj representation of the
-internal representation of an option.  The \fIclientData\fR argument
-is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption
-structure.  \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to
-\fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR or \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR.  \fIRecordPtr\fR
-is a pointer to the beginning of the widget record to query.
-\fIInternalOffset\fR is the offset in bytes from the beginning of the
-widget record to the location where the internal representation of the
-option value is stored.  \fIGetProc\fR must return a pointer to a
-Tcl_Obj representing the value of the option.
-.PP
-The \fIrestoreProc\fR procedure is invoked by
-\fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR to restore a previously saved internal
-representation of a custom option value.  The \fIclientData\fR argument
-is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption
-structure.  \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to
-\fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR or \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR.  \fIInternalPtr\fR
-is a pointer to the location where internal representation of the
-option value is stored.
-\fISaveInternalPtr\fR is a pointer to the saved value.
-\fIRestoreProc\fR must copy the value from \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR to
-\fIinternalPtr\fR to restore the value.  \fIRestoreProc\fR need not
-free any memory associated with either \fIinternalPtr\fR or
-\fIsaveInternalPtr\fR; \fIfreeProc\fR will be invoked to free that
-memory if necessary.  \fIRestoreProc\fR has no return value.
-.PP
-The \fIfreeProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR and
-\fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR to free any storage allocated for the
-internal representation of a custom option.  The \fIclientData\fR argument
-is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption
-structure.  \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to
-\fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR or \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR.  \fIInternalPtr\fR
-is a pointer to the location where the internal representation of the
-option value is stored.  The \fIfreeProc\fR must free any storage
-associated with the option.  \fIFreeProc\fR has no return value.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-anchor, bitmap, boolean, border, color, configuration option,
-cursor, double, font, integer, justify,
-pixels, relief, screen distance, synonym
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/SetVisual.3 b/tk8.6/doc/SetVisual.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d3fd83..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/SetVisual.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_SetWindowVisual 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_SetWindowVisual \- change visual characteristics of window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR(\fItkwin, visual, depth, colormap\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tk_Window int" colormap
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.AP Visual *visual in
-New visual type to use for \fItkwin\fR.
-.AP "int" depth in
-Number of bits per pixel desired for \fItkwin\fR.
-.AP Colormap colormap in
-New colormap for \fItkwin\fR, which must be compatible with
-\fIvisual\fR and \fIdepth\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-When Tk creates a new window it assigns it the default visual
-characteristics (visual, depth, and colormap) for its screen.
-\fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR may be called to change them.
-\fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR must be called before the window has
-actually been created in X (e.g. before \fBTk_MapWindow\fR or
-\fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR has been invoked for the window).
-The safest thing is to call \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR immediately
-after calling \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR.
-If \fItkwin\fR has already been created before \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR
-is called then it returns 0 and does not make any changes;  otherwise
-it returns 1 to signify that the operation
-completed successfully.
-.PP
-Note:  \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR should not be called if you just want
-to change a window's colormap without changing its visual or depth;
-call \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR instead.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-colormap, depth, visual
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/StrictMotif.3 b/tk8.6/doc/StrictMotif.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 4319d53..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/StrictMotif.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_StrictMotif 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_StrictMotif \- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_StrictMotif\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window tkwin
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure returns the current value of the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR
-variable in the interpreter associated with \fItkwin\fR's application.
-The value is returned as an integer that is either 0 or 1.
-1 means that strict Motif compliance has been requested, so anything
-that is not part of the Motif specification should be avoided.
-0 means that
-.QW Motif-like
-is good enough, and extra features are welcome.
-.PP
-This procedure uses a link to the Tcl variable to provide much
-faster access to the variable's value than could be had by calling
-\fBTcl_GetVar\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-Motif compliance, tk_strictMotif variable
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/TextLayout.3 b/tk8.6/doc/TextLayout.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 5729a44..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/TextLayout.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,276 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_ComputeTextLayout 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_ComputeTextLayout, Tk_FreeTextLayout, Tk_DrawTextLayout, Tk_UnderlineTextLayout, Tk_PointToChar, Tk_CharBbox, Tk_DistanceToTextLayout, Tk_IntersectTextLayout, Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript \- routines to measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tk_TextLayout
-\fBTk_ComputeTextLayout(\fItkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_FreeTextLayout(\fIlayout\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_DrawTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_UnderlineTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_PointToChar(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_CharBbox(\fIlayout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_IntersectTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y, width, height\fB)\fR
-.sp
-void
-\fBTk_TextLayoutToPostscript(\fIinterp, layout\fB)\fR
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_TextLayout "*xPtr, *yPtr"
-.AP Tk_Font tkfont in
-Font to use when constructing and displaying a text layout.  The
-\fItkfont\fR must remain valid for the lifetime of the text layout.  Must
-have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
-.AP "const char" *string in
-Potentially multi-line string whose dimensions are to be computed and
-stored in the text layout.  The \fIstring\fR must remain valid for the
-lifetime of the text layout.
-.AP int numChars in
-The number of characters to consider from \fIstring\fR.  If
-\fInumChars\fR is less than 0, then assumes \fIstring\fR is null
-terminated and uses \fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR to determine the length of
-\fIstring\fR.
-.AP int wrapLength in
-Longest permissible line length, in pixels.  Lines in \fIstring\fR will
-automatically be broken at word boundaries and wrapped when they reach
-this length.  If \fIwrapLength\fR is too small for even a single
-character to fit on a line, it will be expanded to allow one character to
-fit on each line.  If \fIwrapLength\fR is <= 0, there is no automatic
-wrapping; lines will get as long as they need to be and only wrap if a
-newline/return character is encountered.
-.AP Tk_Justify justify in
-How to justify the lines in a multi-line text layout.  Possible values
-are \fBTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT\fR, \fBTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER\fR, or
-\fBTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT\fR. If the text layout only occupies a single
-line, then \fIjustify\fR is irrelevant.
-.AP int flags in
-Various flag bits OR-ed together. \fBTK_IGNORE_TABS\fR means that tab
-characters should not be expanded to the next tab stop.
-\fBTK_IGNORE_NEWLINES\fR means that newline/return characters should
-not cause a line break.  If either tabs or newlines/returns are
-ignored, then they will be treated as regular characters, being
-measured and displayed in a platform-dependent manner as described in
-\fBTk_MeasureChars\fR, and will not have any special behaviors.
-.AP int *widthPtr out
-If non-NULL, filled with either the width, in pixels, of the widest
-line in the text layout, or the width, in pixels, of the bounding box for the
-character specified by \fIindex\fR.
-.AP int *heightPtr out
-If non-NULL, filled with either the total height, in pixels, of all
-the lines in the text layout, or the height, in pixels, of the bounding
-box for the character specified by \fIindex\fR.
-.AP Tk_TextLayout layout in
-A token that represents the cached layout information about the single-font,
-multi-line, justified piece of text.  This token is returned by
-\fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR.
-.AP Display *display in
-Display on which to draw.
-.AP Drawable drawable in
-Window or pixmap in which to draw.
-.AP GC gc in
-Graphics context to use for drawing text layout.  The font selected in
-this GC must correspond to the \fItkfont\fR used when constructing the
-text layout.
-.AP int "x, y" in
-Point, in pixels, at which to place the upper-left hand corner of the
-text layout when it is being drawn, or the coordinates of a point (with
-respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout) to check
-against the text layout.
-.AP int firstChar in
-The index of the first character to draw from the given text layout.
-The number 0 means to draw from the beginning.
-.AP int lastChar in
-The index of the last character up to which to draw.  The character
-specified by \fIlastChar\fR itself will not be drawn.  A number less
-than 0 means to draw all characters in the text layout.
-.AP int underline in
-Index of the single character to underline in the text layout, or a number
-less than 0 for no underline.
-.AP int index in
-The index of the character whose bounding box is desired.  The bounding
-box is computed with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout.
-.AP int "*xPtr, *yPtr" out
-Filled with the upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of the bounding box
-for the character specified by \fIindex\fR.  Either or both \fIxPtr\fR
-and \fIyPtr\fR may be NULL, in which case the corresponding value
-is not calculated.
-.AP int "width, height" in
-Specifies the width and height, in pixels, of the rectangular area to
-compare for intersection against the text layout.
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
-Postscript code that will print the text layout is appended to
-the result of interpreter \fIinterp\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These routines are for measuring and displaying single-font, multi-line,
-justified text.  To measure and display simple single-font, single-line
-strings, refer to the documentation for \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR.  There is
-no programming interface in the core of Tk that supports multi-font,
-multi-line text; support for that behavior must be built on top of
-simpler layers.
-Note that unlike the lower level text display routines, the functions
-described here all operate on character-oriented lengths and indices
-rather than byte-oriented values.  See the description of
-\fBTcl_UtfAtIndex\fR for more details on converting between character
-and byte offsets.
-.PP
-The routines described here are built on top of the programming interface
-described in the \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR documentation.  Tab characters and
-newline/return characters may be treated specially by these procedures,
-but all other characters are passed through to the lower level.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR computes the layout information needed to
-display a single-font, multi-line, justified \fIstring\fR of text and
-returns a Tk_TextLayout token that holds this information.  This token is
-used in subsequent calls to procedures such as \fBTk_DrawTextLayout\fR,
-\fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout\fR, and \fBTk_FreeTextLayout\fR.  The
-\fIstring\fR and \fItkfont\fR used when computing the layout must remain
-valid for the lifetime of this token.
-.PP
-\fBTk_FreeTextLayout\fR is called to release the storage associated with
-\fIlayout\fR when it is no longer needed.  A \fIlayout\fR should not be used
-in any other text layout procedures once it has been released.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DrawTextLayout\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to display a
-single-font, multi-line, justified string of text at the specified location.
-.PP
-\fBTk_UnderlineTextLayout\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to
-display an underline below an individual character.  This procedure does
-not draw the text, just the underline.  To produce natively underlined
-text, an underlined font should be constructed and used.  All characters,
-including tabs, newline/return characters, and spaces at the ends of
-lines, can be underlined using this method.  However, the underline will
-never be drawn outside of the computed width of \fIlayout\fR; the
-underline will stop at the edge for any character that would extend
-partially outside of \fIlayout\fR, and the underline will not be visible
-at all for any character that would be located completely outside of the
-layout.
-.PP
-\fBTk_PointToChar\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to determine the
-character closest to the given point.  The point is specified with respect
-to the upper-left hand corner of the \fIlayout\fR, which is considered to be
-located at (0, 0).  Any point whose \fIy\fR-value is less that 0 will be
-considered closest to the first character in the text layout; any point
-whose \fIy\fR-value is greater than the height of the text layout will be
-considered closest to the last character in the text layout.  Any point
-whose \fIx\fR-value is less than 0 will be considered closest to the first
-character on that line; any point whose \fIx\fR-value is greater than the
-width of the text layout will be considered closest to the last character on
-that line.  The return value is the index of the character that was closest
-to the point, or one more than the index of any character (to indicate that
-the point was after the end of the string and that the corresponding caret
-would be at the end of the string).  Given a \fIlayout\fR with no characters,
-the value 0 will always be returned, referring to a hypothetical zero-width
-placeholder character.
-.PP
-\fBTk_CharBbox\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to return the
-bounding box for the character specified by \fIindex\fR.  The width of the
-bounding box is the advance width of the character, and does not include any
-left or right bearing.  Any character that extends partially outside of
-\fIlayout\fR is considered to be truncated at the edge.  Any character
-that would be located completely outside of \fIlayout\fR is considered to
-be zero-width and pegged against the edge.  The height of the bounding
-box is the line height for this font, extending from the top of the
-ascent to the bottom of the descent; information about the actual height
-of individual letters is not available.  For measurement purposes, a
-\fIlayout\fR that contains no characters is considered to contain a
-single zero-width placeholder character at index 0.  If \fIindex\fR was
-not a valid character index, the return value is 0 and \fI*xPtr\fR,
-\fI*yPtr\fR, \fI*widthPtr\fR, and \fI*heightPtr\fR are unmodified.
-Otherwise, if \fIindex\fR did specify a valid, the return value is
-non-zero, and \fI*xPtr\fR, \fI*yPtr\fR, \fI*widthPtr\fR, and
-\fI*heightPtr\fR are filled with the bounding box information for the
-character.  If any of \fIxPtr\fR, \fIyPtr\fR, \fIwidthPtr\fR, or
-\fIheightPtr\fR are NULL, the corresponding value is not calculated or
-stored.
-.PP
-\fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout\fR computes the shortest distance in pixels from
-the given point (\fIx, y\fR) to the characters in \fIlayout\fR.
-Newline/return characters and non-displaying space characters that occur at
-the end of individual lines in the text layout are ignored for hit detection
-purposes, but tab characters are not.  The return value is 0 if the point
-actually hits the \fIlayout\fR.  If the point did not hit the \fIlayout\fR
-then the return value is the distance in pixels from the point to the
-\fIlayout\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_IntersectTextLayout\fR determines whether a \fIlayout\fR lies
-entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlaps a given rectangle.
-Newline/return characters and non-displaying space characters that occur
-at the end of individual lines in the \fIlayout\fR are ignored for
-intersection calculations.  The return value is \-1 if the \fIlayout\fR is
-entirely outside of the rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is
-entirely inside of the rectangle.
-.PP
-\fBTk_TextLayoutToPostscript\fR outputs code consisting of a Postscript
-array of strings that represent the individual lines in \fIlayout\fR.  It
-is the responsibility of the caller to take the Postscript array of
-strings and add some Postscript function operate on the array to render
-each of the lines.  The code that represents the Postscript array of
-strings is appended to interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
-.SH "DISPLAY MODEL"
-.PP
-When measuring a text layout, space characters that occur at the end of a
-line are ignored.  The space characters still exist and the insertion point
-can be positioned amongst them, but their additional width is ignored when
-justifying lines or returning the total width of a text layout.  All
-end-of-line space characters are considered to be attached to the right edge
-of the line; this behavior is logical for left-justified text and reasonable
-for center-justified text, but not very useful when editing right-justified
-text.  Spaces are considered variable width characters; the first space that
-extends past the edge of the text layout is clipped to the edge, and any
-subsequent spaces on the line are considered zero width and pegged against
-the edge.  Space characters that occur in the middle of a line of text are
-not suppressed and occupy their normal space width.
-.PP
-Tab characters are not ignored for measurement calculations.  If wrapping
-is turned on and there are enough tabs on a line, the next tab will wrap
-to the beginning of the next line.  There are some possible strange
-interactions between tabs and justification; tab positions are calculated
-and the line length computed in a left-justified world, and then the
-whole resulting line is shifted so it is centered or right-justified,
-causing the tab columns not to align any more.
-.PP
-When wrapping is turned on, lines may wrap at word breaks (space or tab
-characters) or newline/returns.  A dash or hyphen character in the middle
-of a word is not considered a word break.  \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR
-always attempts to place at least one word on each line.  If it cannot
-because the \fIwrapLength\fR is too small, the word will be broken and as
-much as fits placed on the line and the rest on subsequent line(s).  If
-\fIwrapLength\fR is so small that not even one character can fit on a
-given line, the \fIwrapLength\fR is ignored for that line and one
-character will be placed on the line anyhow.  When wrapping is turned
-off, only newline/return characters may cause a line break.
-.PP
-When a text layout has been created using an underlined \fItkfont\fR,
-then any space characters that occur at the end of individual lines,
-newlines/returns, and tabs will not be displayed underlined when
-\fBTk_DrawTextLayout\fR is called, because those characters are never
-actually drawn \- they are merely placeholders maintained in the
-\fIlayout\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-font
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/TkInitStubs.3 b/tk8.6/doc/TkInitStubs.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 04f5611..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/TkInitStubs.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_InitStubs 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_InitStubs \- initialize the Tk stubs mechanism
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_InitStubs\fR(\fIinterp, version, exact\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp in
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Tcl interpreter handle.
-.AP char *version in
-A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers
-separated by dots.
-.AP int exact in
-Non-zero means that only the particular Tk version specified by
-\fIversion\fR is acceptable.
-Zero means that versions newer than \fIversion\fR are also
-acceptable as long as they have the same major version number
-as \fIversion\fR.
-.BE
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-The Tcl stubs mechanism defines a way to dynamically bind
-extensions to a particular Tcl implementation at run time.
-the stubs mechanism requires no changes to applications
-incorporating Tcl/Tk interpreters.  Only developers creating
-C-based Tcl/Tk extensions need to take steps to use the
-stubs mechanism with their extensions.
-See the \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR page for more information.
-.PP
-Enabling the stubs mechanism for a Tcl/Tk extension requires the following
-steps:
-.IP 1) 5
-Call \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR in the extension before calling any other
-Tcl functions.
-.IP 2) 5
-Call \fBTk_InitStubs\fR if the extension before calling any other
-Tk functions.
-.IP 2) 5
-Define the \fBUSE_TCL_STUBS\fR and the \fBUSE_TK_STUBS\fR
-symbols. Typically, you would include the \fB\-DUSE_TCL_STUBS\fR and
-the \fB\-DUSE_TK_STUBS\fR flags when compiling the extension.
-.IP 3) 5
-Link the extension with the Tcl and Tk stubs libraries instead of the
-standard Tcl and Tk libraries.  On Unix platforms, the library names
-are \fIlibtclstub8.4.a\fR and \fIlibtkstub8.4.a\fR; on Windows
-platforms, the library names are \fItclstub84.lib\fR and
-\fItkstub84.lib\fR. Adjust the library names with appropriate version
-number but note that the extension may only be used with versions of
-Tcl/Tk that have that version number or higher.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_InitStubs\fR attempts to initialize the Tk stub table pointers
-and ensure that the correct version of Tk is loaded.  In addition
-to an interpreter handle, it accepts as arguments a version number
-and a Boolean flag indicating whether the extension requires
-an exact version match or not.  If \fIexact\fR is 0, then the
-extension is indicating that newer versions of Tk are acceptable
-as long as they have the same major version number as \fIversion\fR;
-non-zero means that only the specified \fIversion\fR is acceptable.
-\fBTcl_InitStubs\fR returns a string containing the actual version
-of Tk satisfying the request, or NULL if the Tk version is not
-acceptable, does not support the stubs mechanism, or any other
-error condition occurred.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBTcl_InitStubs\fR
-.SH KEYWORDS
-stubs
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/Tk_Init.3 b/tk8.6/doc/Tk_Init.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 7bc46dd..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/Tk_Init.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Tk_Init 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_Init, Tk_SafeInit \- add Tk to an interpreter and make a new Tk application.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_Init\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_SafeInit\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter in which to load Tk.  Tk should not already be loaded
-in this interpreter.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_Init\fR is the package initialization procedure for Tk.
-It is normally invoked by the \fBTcl_AppInit\fR procedure
-for an application or by the \fBload\fR command.
-\fBTk_Init\fR adds all of Tk's commands to \fIinterp\fR
-and creates a new Tk application, including its main window.
-If the initialization is successful \fBTk_Init\fR returns
-\fBTCL_OK\fR;  if there is an error it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
-\fBTk_Init\fR also leaves a result or error message
-in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result.
-.PP
-If there is a variable \fBargv\fR in \fIinterp\fR, \fBTk_Init\fR
-treats the contents of this variable as a list of options for the
-new Tk application.
-The options may have any of the forms documented for the
-\fBwish\fR application (in fact, \fBwish\fR uses Tk_Init to process
-its command-line arguments).
-.PP
-\fBTk_SafeInit\fR is identical to \fBTk_Init\fR except that it removes
-all Tk commands that are considered unsafe.  Those commands and the
-reasons for their exclusion are:
-.TP
-\fBbell\fR
-Continuous ringing of the bell is a nuisance.
-.TP
-\fBclipboard\fR
-A malicious script could replace the contents of the clipboard with
-the string
-.QW "\fBrm \-r *\fR"
-and lead to surprises when the contents of the clipboard are pasted.
-.TP
-\fBgrab\fR
-Grab can be used to block the user from using any other applications.
-.TP
-\fBmenu\fR
-Menus can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input from
-the user.
-.TP
-\fBselection\fR
-See clipboard.
-.TP
-\fBsend\fR
-Send can be used to cause unsafe interpreters to execute commands.
-.TP
-\fBtk\fR
-The tk command recreates the send command, which is unsafe.
-.TP
-\fBtkwait\fR
-Tkwait can block the containing process forever
-.TP
-\fBtoplevel\fR
-Toplevels can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input
-from the user.
-.TP
-\fBwm\fR
-If toplevels are ever allowed, wm can be used to remove decorations,
-move windows around, etc.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-safe, application, initialization, load, main window
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/Tk_Main.3 b/tk8.6/doc/Tk_Main.3
deleted file mode 100644
index ea5f771..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/Tk_Main.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_Main 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_Main \- main program for Tk-based applications
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-\fBTk_Main\fR(\fIargc, argv, appInitProc\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc
-.AP int argc in
-Number of elements in \fIargv\fR.
-.AP char *argv[] in
-Array of strings containing command-line arguments. On Windows, when
-using -DUNICODE, the parameter type changes to wchar_t *.
-.AP Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc in
-Address of an application-specific initialization procedure.
-The value for this argument is usually \fBTcl_AppInit\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_Main\fR acts as the main program for most Tk-based applications.
-Starting with Tk 4.0 it is not called \fBmain\fR anymore because it
-is part of the Tk library and having a function \fBmain\fR
-in a library (particularly a shared library) causes problems on many
-systems.
-Having \fBmain\fR in the Tk library would also make it hard to use
-Tk in C++ programs, since C++ programs must have special C++
-\fBmain\fR functions.
-.PP
-Normally each application contains a small \fBmain\fR function that does
-nothing but invoke \fBTk_Main\fR.
-\fBTk_Main\fR then does all the work of creating and running a
-\fBwish\fR-like application.
-.PP
-When it is has finished its own initialization, but before
-it processes commands, \fBTk_Main\fR calls the procedure given by
-the \fIappInitProc\fR argument.  This procedure provides a
-.QW hook
-for the application to perform its own initialization, such as defining
-application-specific commands.  The procedure must have an interface
-that matches the type \fBTcl_AppInitProc\fR:
-.CS
-typedef int \fBTcl_AppInitProc\fR(
-        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
-.CE
-\fIAppInitProc\fR is almost always a pointer to \fBTcl_AppInit\fR;
-for more details on this procedure, see the documentation
-for \fBTcl_AppInit\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Main\fR functions much the same as \fBTcl_Main\fR.  In particular,
-\fBTk_Main\fR supports both an interactive mode and a startup script
-mode, with the file name and encoding of a startup script under the
-control of the \fBTcl_SetStartupScript\fR and \fBTcl_GetStartupScript\fR
-routines. However it calls \fBTk_MainLoop\fR after processing any
-supplied script, and in interactive uses events registered with
-\fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR to process user input.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tcl_DoOneEvent(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application-specific initialization, command-line arguments, main program
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/WindowId.3 b/tk8.6/doc/WindowId.3
deleted file mode 100644
index f937963..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/WindowId.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,188 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH Tk_WindowId 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tk_WindowId, Tk_Parent, Tk_Display, Tk_DisplayName, Tk_ScreenNumber, Tk_Screen, Tk_X, Tk_Y, Tk_Width, Tk_Height, Tk_Changes, Tk_Attributes, Tk_IsContainer, Tk_IsEmbedded, Tk_IsMapped, Tk_IsTopLevel, Tk_ReqWidth, Tk_ReqHeight, Tk_MinReqWidth, Tk_MinReqHeight, Tk_InternalBorderLeft, Tk_InternalBorderRight, Tk_InternalBorderTop, Tk_InternalBorderBottom, Tk_Visual, Tk_Depth, Tk_Colormap, Tk_Interp  \- retrieve information from Tk's local data structure
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tk.h>\fR
-.sp
-Window
-\fBTk_WindowId\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-Tk_Window
-\fBTk_Parent\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-Display *
-\fBTk_Display\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-const char *
-\fBTk_DisplayName\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-Screen *
-\fBTk_Screen\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_X\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_Y\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_Width\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_Height\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-XWindowChanges *
-\fBTk_Changes\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-XSetWindowAttributes *
-\fBTk_Attributes\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_IsContainer\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_IsEmbedded\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_IsMapped\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_IsTopLevel\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ReqWidth\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_ReqHeight\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_MinReqHeight\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_InternalBorderLeft\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_InternalBorderRight\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_InternalBorderTop\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_InternalBorderBottom\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-Visual *
-\fBTk_Visual\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTk_Depth\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-Colormap
-\fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.sp
-Tcl_Interp *
-\fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tk_Window tkwin
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Token for window.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTk_WindowId\fR and the other names listed above are
-all macros that return fields from Tk's local data structure
-for \fItkwin\fR.  None of these macros requires any
-interaction with the server;  it is safe to assume that
-all are fast.
-.PP
-\fBTk_WindowId\fR returns the X identifier for \fItkwin\fR,
-or \fBNULL\fR if no X window has been created for \fItkwin\fR
-yet.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Parent\fR returns Tk's token for the logical parent of
-\fItkwin\fR.  The parent is the token that was specified when
-\fItkwin\fR was created, or NULL for main windows.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Interp\fR returns the Tcl interpreter associated with a
-\fItkwin\fR or NULL if there is an error.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Display\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib display structure
-corresponding to \fItkwin\fR.  \fBTk_DisplayName\fR returns an
-ASCII string identifying \fItkwin\fR's display.  \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR
-returns the index of \fItkwin\fR's screen among all the screens
-of \fItkwin\fR's display.  \fBTk_Screen\fR returns a pointer to
-the Xlib structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR's screen.
-.PP
-\fBTk_X\fR, \fBTk_Y\fR, \fBTk_Width\fR, and \fBTk_Height\fR
-return information about \fItkwin's\fR location within its
-parent and its size.  The location information refers to the
-upper-left pixel in the window, or its border if there is one.
-The width and height information refers to the interior size
-of the window, not including any border.  \fBTk_Changes\fR
-returns a pointer to a structure containing all of the above
-information plus a few other fields.  \fBTk_Attributes\fR
-returns a pointer to an XSetWindowAttributes structure describing
-all of the attributes of the \fItkwin\fR's window, such as background
-pixmap, event mask, and so on (Tk keeps track of all this information
-as it is changed by the application).  Note: it is essential that
-applications use Tk procedures like \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR instead
-of X procedures like \fBXResizeWindow\fR, so that Tk can keep its
-data structures up-to-date.
-.PP
-\fBTk_IsContainer\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR
-is a container, and that some other application may be embedding
-itself inside \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_IsEmbedded\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR
-is not a free-standing window, but rather is embedded in some
-other application.
-.PP
-\fBTk_IsMapped\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR
-is mapped and zero if \fItkwin\fR is not mapped.
-.PP
-\fBTk_IsTopLevel\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR
-is a top-level window (its X parent is the root window of the
-screen) and zero if \fItkwin\fR is not a top-level window.
-.PP
-\fBTk_ReqWidth\fR and \fBTk_ReqHeight\fR return information about
-the window's requested size.  These values correspond to the last
-call to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR for \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR and \fBTk_MinReqHeight\fR return information about
-the window's minimum requested size.  These values correspond to the last
-call to \fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR for \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_InternalBorderLeft\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderRight\fR,
-\fBTk_InternalBorderTop\fR and \fBTk_InternalBorderBottom\fR
-return the width of one side of the internal border
-that has been requested for \fItkwin\fR, or 0 if no internal border was
-requested.  The return value is simply the last value passed to
-\fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR or \fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR for \fItkwin\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTk_Visual\fR, \fBTk_Depth\fR, and \fBTk_Colormap\fR return
-information about the visual characteristics of a window.
-\fBTk_Visual\fR returns the visual type for
-the window, \fBTk_Depth\fR returns the number of bits per pixel,
-and \fBTk_Colormap\fR returns the current
-colormap for the window.  The visual characteristics are
-normally set from the defaults for the window's screen, but
-they may be overridden by calling \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-attributes, colormap, depth, display, height, geometry manager,
-identifier, mapped, requested size, screen, top-level,
-visual, width, window, x, y
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/bell.n b/tk8.6/doc/bell.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 21c4f1b..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/bell.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH bell n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-bell \- Ring a display's bell
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbell \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-nice\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command rings the bell on the display for \fIwindow\fR and
-returns an empty string.
-If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is omitted, the display of the
-application's main window is used by default.
-The command uses the current bell-related settings for the display, which
-may be modified with programs such as \fBxset\fR.
-.PP
-If \fB\-nice\fR is not specified, this command also resets the screen saver
-for the screen.  Some screen savers will ignore this, but others will reset
-so that the screen becomes visible again.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-beep, bell, ring
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/bind.n b/tk8.6/doc/bind.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c260bce..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/bind.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,730 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH bind n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-bind \- Arrange for X events to invoke Tcl scripts
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbind\fI tag\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fB+\fR??\fIscript\fR?
-.BE
-.SH "INTRODUCTION"
-.PP
-The \fBbind\fR command associates Tcl scripts with X events.
-If all three arguments are specified, \fBbind\fR will
-arrange for \fIscript\fR (a Tcl script called the
-.QW "binding script")
-to be evaluated whenever the event(s) given by \fIsequence\fR
-occur in the window(s) identified by \fItag\fR.
-If \fIscript\fR is prefixed with a
-.QW + ,
-then it is appended to
-any existing binding for \fIsequence\fR;  otherwise \fIscript\fR replaces
-any existing binding.
-If \fIscript\fR is an empty string then the current binding for
-\fIsequence\fR is destroyed, leaving \fIsequence\fR unbound.
-In all of the cases where a \fIscript\fR argument is provided,
-\fBbind\fR returns an empty string.
-.PP
-If \fIsequence\fR is specified without a \fIscript\fR, then the
-script currently bound to \fIsequence\fR is returned, or
-an empty string is returned if there is no binding for \fIsequence\fR.
-If neither \fIsequence\fR nor \fIscript\fR is specified, then the
-return value is a list whose elements are all the sequences
-for which there exist bindings for \fItag\fR.
-.PP
-The \fItag\fR argument determines which window(s) the binding applies to.
-If \fItag\fR begins with a dot, as in \fB.a.b.c\fR, then it must
-be the path name for a window; otherwise it may be an arbitrary
-string.
-Each window has an associated list of tags, and a binding applies
-to a particular window if its tag is among those specified for
-the window.
-Although the \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to assign an
-arbitrary set of binding tags to a window, the default binding
-tags provide the following behavior:
-.IP \(bu 3
-If a tag is the name of an internal window the binding applies
-to that window.
-.IP \(bu 3
-If the tag is the name of a toplevel window the binding applies
-to the toplevel window and all its internal windows.
-.IP \(bu 3
-If the tag is the name of a class of widgets, such as \fBButton\fR,
-the binding applies to all widgets in that class;
-.IP \(bu 3
-If \fItag\fR has the value \fBall\fR,
-the binding applies to all windows in the application.
-.SH "EVENT PATTERNS"
-.PP
-The \fIsequence\fR argument specifies a sequence of one or more
-event patterns, with optional white space between the patterns.  Each
-event pattern may
-take one of three forms.  In the simplest case it is a single
-printing ASCII character, such as \fBa\fR or \fB[\fR.  The character
-may not be a space character or the character \fB<\fR.  This form of
-pattern matches a \fBKeyPress\fR event for the particular
-character.  The second form of pattern is longer but more general.
-It has the following syntax:
-.CS
-\fB<\fImodifier\-modifier\-type\-detail\fB>\fR
-.CE
-The entire event pattern is surrounded by angle brackets.
-Inside the angle brackets are zero or more modifiers, an event
-type, and an extra piece of information (\fIdetail\fR) identifying
-a particular button or keysym.  Any of the fields may be omitted,
-as long as at least one of \fItype\fR and \fIdetail\fR is present.
-The fields must be separated by white space or dashes.
-.PP
-The third form of pattern is used to specify a user-defined, named virtual
-event.  It has the following syntax:
-.CS
-\fB<<\fIname\fB>>\fR
-.CE
-The entire virtual event pattern is surrounded by double angle brackets.
-Inside the angle brackets is the user-defined name of the virtual event.
-Modifiers, such as \fBShift\fR or \fBControl\fR, may not be combined with a
-virtual event to modify it.  Bindings on a virtual event may be created
-before the virtual event is defined, and if the definition of a virtual
-event changes dynamically, all windows bound to that virtual event will
-respond immediately to the new definition.
-.PP
-Some widgets (e.g. \fBmenu\fR and \fBtext\fR) issue virtual events
-when their internal state is updated in some ways.  Please see the
-manual page for each widget for details.
-.SS "MODIFIERS"
-.PP
-Modifiers consist of any of the following values:
-.DS
-.ta 6c
-\fBControl\fR	\fBMod1\fR, \fBM1\fR, \fBCommand\fR
-\fBAlt\fR	\fBMod2\fR, \fBM2\fR, \fBOption\fR
-\fBShift\fR	\fBMod3\fR, \fBM3\fR
-\fBLock\fR	\fBMod4\fR, \fBM4\fR
-\fBExtended\fR	\fBMod5\fR, \fBM5\fR
-\fBButton1\fR, \fBB1\fR	\fBMeta\fR, \fBM\fR
-\fBButton2\fR, \fBB2\fR	\fBDouble\fR
-\fBButton3\fR, \fBB3\fR	\fBTriple\fR
-\fBButton4\fR, \fBB4\fR	\fBQuadruple\fR
-\fBButton5\fR, \fBB5\fR
-.DE
-Where more than one value is listed, separated by commas, the values
-are equivalent.
-Most of the modifiers have the obvious X meanings.
-For example, \fBButton1\fR requires that
-button 1 be depressed when the event occurs.
-For a binding to match a given event, the modifiers in the event
-must include all of those specified in the event pattern.
-An event may also contain additional modifiers not specified in
-the binding.
-For example, if button 1 is pressed while the shift and control keys
-are down, the pattern \fB<Control\-Button\-1>\fR will match
-the event, but \fB<Mod1\-Button\-1>\fR will not.
-If no modifiers are specified, then any combination of modifiers may
-be present in the event.
-.PP
-\fBMeta\fR and \fBM\fR refer to whichever of the
-\fBM1\fR through \fBM5\fR modifiers is associated with the Meta
-key(s) on the keyboard (keysyms \fBMeta_R\fR and \fBMeta_L\fR).
-If there are no Meta keys, or if they are not associated with any
-modifiers, then \fBMeta\fR and \fBM\fR will not match any events.
-Similarly, the \fBAlt\fR modifier refers to whichever modifier
-is associated with the alt key(s) on the keyboard (keysyms
-\fBAlt_L\fR and \fBAlt_R\fR).
-.PP
-The \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR and \fBQuadruple\fR modifiers are a
-convenience for specifying double mouse clicks and other repeated
-events. They cause a particular event pattern to be repeated 2, 3 or 4
-times, and also place a time and space requirement on the sequence: for a
-sequence of events to match a \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR or \fBQuadruple\fR
-pattern, all of the events must occur close together in time and without
-substantial mouse motion in between.  For example, \fB<Double\-Button\-1>\fR
-is equivalent to \fB<Button\-1><Button\-1>\fR with the extra time and space
-requirement.
-.PP
-The \fBCommand\fR and \fBOption\fR modifiers are equivalents of \fBMod1\fR
-resp. \fBMod2\fR, they correspond to Macintosh-specific modifier keys.
-.PP
-The \fBExtended\fR modifier is, at present, specific to Windows.  It
-appears on events that are associated with the keys on the
-.QW "extended keyboard" .
-On a US keyboard, the extended keys include the \fBAlt\fR
-and \fBControl\fR keys at the right of the keyboard, the cursor keys
-in the cluster to the left of the numeric pad, the \fBNumLock\fR key,
-the \fBBreak\fR key, the \fBPrintScreen\fR key, and the \fB/\fR and
-\fBEnter\fR keys in the numeric keypad.
-.SS "EVENT TYPES"
-.PP
-The \fItype\fR field may be any of the standard X event types, with a
-few extra abbreviations.  The \fItype\fR field will also accept a
-couple non-standard X event types that were added to better support
-the Macintosh and Windows platforms.  Below is a list of all the valid
-types; where two names appear together, they are synonyms.
-.DS
-.ta \w'\fBButtonPress, Button\0\0\0\fR'u +\w'\fBKeyPress, Key\0\0\0\fR'u
-\fBActivate\fR	\fBDestroy\fR	\fBMap\fR
-\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButton\fR	\fBEnter\fR	\fBMapRequest\fR
-\fBButtonRelease\fR	\fBExpose\fR	\fBMotion\fR
-\fBCirculate\fR	\fBFocusIn\fR	\fBMouseWheel\fR
-\fBCirculateRequest\fR	\fBFocusOut\fR	\fBProperty\fR
-\fBColormap\fR	\fBGravity\fR	\fBReparent\fR
-\fBConfigure\fR	\fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKey\fR	\fBResizeRequest\fR
-\fBConfigureRequest\fR	\fBKeyRelease\fR	\fBUnmap\fR
-\fBCreate\fR	\fBLeave\fR	\fBVisibility\fR
-\fBDeactivate\fR
-.DE
-Most of the above events have the same fields and behaviors as events
-in the X Windowing system.  You can find more detailed descriptions of
-these events in any X window programming book.  A couple of the events
-are extensions to the X event system to support features unique to the
-Macintosh and Windows platforms.  We provide a little more detail on
-these events here.  These include:
-.IP "\fBActivate\fR, \fBDeactivate\fR" 5
-These two events are sent to every sub-window of a toplevel when they
-change state.  In addition to the focus Window, the Macintosh platform
-and Windows platforms have a notion of an active window (which often
-has but is not required to have the focus).  On the Macintosh, widgets
-in the active window have a different appearance than widgets in
-deactive windows.  The \fBActivate\fR event is sent to all the
-sub-windows in a toplevel when it changes from being deactive to
-active.  Likewise, the \fBDeactive\fR event is sent when the window's
-state changes from active to deactive.  There are no useful percent
-substitutions you would make when binding to these events.
-.IP \fBMouseWheel\fR 5
-Many contemporary mice support a mouse wheel, which is used
-for scrolling documents without using the scrollbars.  By rolling the
-wheel, the system will generate \fBMouseWheel\fR events that the
-application can use to scroll.  Like \fBKey\fR events the event is
-always routed to the window that currently has focus. When the event
-is received you can use the \fB%D\fR substitution to get the
-\fIdelta\fR field for the event, which is a integer value describing how
-the mouse wheel has moved.  The smallest value for which the
-system will report is defined by the OS. The sign of the
-value determines which direction your widget should scroll.  Positive
-values should scroll up and negative values should scroll down.
-.IP "\fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR" 5
-The \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events are generated
-whenever a key is pressed or released.  \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR
-events are sent to the window which currently has the keyboard focus.
-.IP "\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR" 5
-The \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events
-are generated when the user presses or releases a mouse button.
-\fBMotion\fR events are generated whenever the pointer is moved.
-\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events are
-normally sent to the window containing the pointer.
-.RS
-.PP
-When a mouse button is pressed, the window containing the pointer
-automatically obtains a temporary pointer grab.
-Subsequent \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
-events will be sent to that window,
-regardless of which window contains the pointer,
-until all buttons have been released.
-.RE
-.IP \fBConfigure\fR 5
-A \fBConfigure\fR event is sent to a window whenever its
-size, position, or border width changes, and sometimes
-when it has changed position in the stacking order.
-.IP "\fBMap\fR, \fBUnmap\fR" 5
-The \fBMap\fR and \fBUnmap\fR events are generated whenever the mapping
-state of a window changes.
-.RS
-.PP
-Windows are created in the unmapped state.
-Top-level windows become mapped when they transition to the
-\fBnormal\fR state, and are unmapped in the \fBwithdrawn\fR
-and \fBiconic\fR states.
-Other windows become mapped when they are placed under control
-of a geometry manager (for example \fBpack\fR or \fBgrid\fR).
-.PP
-A window is \fIviewable\fR only if it and all of its ancestors are mapped.
-Note that geometry managers typically do not map their children until
-they have been mapped themselves, and unmap all children
-when they become unmapped; hence in Tk \fBMap\fR and \fBUnmap\fR
-events indicate whether or not a window is viewable.
-.RE
-.IP \fBVisibility\fR 5
-A window is said to be \fIobscured\fR when another window
-above it in the stacking order fully or partially overlaps it.
-\fBVisibility\fR events are generated whenever a window's
-obscurity state changes; the \fIstate\fR field (\fB%s\fR)
-specifies the new state.
-.IP \fBExpose\fR 5
-An \fBExpose\fR event is generated whenever all or part of a
-window should be redrawn (for example, when a window is
-first mapped or if it becomes unobscured).
-It is normally not necessary for client applications to
-handle \fBExpose\fR events, since Tk handles them internally.
-.IP \fBDestroy\fR 5
-A \fBDestroy\fR event is delivered to a window when
-it is destroyed.
-.RS
-.PP
-When the \fBDestroy\fR event is delivered
-to a widget, it is in a
-.QW half-dead
-state: the widget still exists, but most operations on it will fail.
-.RE
-.IP "\fBFocusIn\fR, \fBFocusOut\fR" 5
-The \fBFocusIn\fR and \fBFocusOut\fR events are generated
-whenever the keyboard focus changes.
-A \fBFocusOut\fR event is sent to the old focus window,
-and a \fBFocusIn\fR event is sent to the new one.
-.RS
-.PP
-In addition,
-if the old and new focus windows do not share a common parent,
-.QW "virtual crossing"
-focus events are sent to the intermediate windows in the hierarchy.
-Thus a \fBFocusIn\fR event indicates
-that the target window or one of its descendants has acquired the focus,
-and a \fBFocusOut\fR event indicates that the focus
-has been changed to a window outside the target window's hierarchy.
-.PP
-The keyboard focus may be changed explicitly by a call to \fBfocus\fR,
-or implicitly by the window manager.
-.RE
-.IP "\fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR" 5
-An \fBEnter\fR event is sent to a window when the pointer
-enters that window, and a \fBLeave\fR event is sent when
-the pointer leaves it.
-.RS
-.PP
-If there is a pointer grab in effect, \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR
-events are only delivered to the window owning the grab.
-.PP
-In addition, when the pointer moves
-between two windows, \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR
-.QW "virtual crossing"
-events are sent to intermediate windows
-in the hierarchy in the same manner as for \fBFocusIn\fR and
-\fBFocusOut\fR events.
-.RE
-.IP \fBProperty\fR
-A \fBProperty\fR event is sent to a window whenever an X property
-belonging to that window is changed or deleted.
-\fBProperty\fR events are not normally delivered to Tk applications as
-they are handled by the Tk core.
-.IP \fBColormap\fR
-A \fBColormap\fR event is generated whenever the colormap
-associated with a window has been changed, installed, or uninstalled.
-.RS
-.PP
-Widgets may be assigned a private colormap by
-specifying a \fB\-colormap\fR option; the window manager
-is responsible for installing and uninstalling colormaps
-as necessary.
-.PP
-Note that Tk provides no useful details for this event type.
-.RE
-'\" The following events were added in TIP#47
-.IP "\fBMapRequest\fR, \fBCirculateRequest\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR" 5
-These events are not normally delivered to Tk applications.
-They are included for completeness, to make it possible to
-write X11 window managers in Tk.
-(These events are only delivered when a client has
-selected \fBSubstructureRedirectMask\fR on a window;
-the Tk core does not use this mask.)
-.IP "\fBGravity\fR, \fBReparent\fR, \fBCirculate\fR" 5
-The events \fBGravity\fR and \fBReparent\fR
-are not normally delivered to Tk applications.
-They are included for completeness.
-.RS
-.PP
-A \fBCirculate\fR event indicates that the window has moved
-to the top or to the bottom of the stacking order as
-a result of an \fBXCirculateSubwindows\fR protocol request.
-Note that the stacking order may be changed for other reasons
-which do not generate a \fBCirculate\fR event, and that
-Tk does not use \fBXCirculateSubwindows()\fR internally.
-This event type is included only for completeness;
-there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's
-position in the stacking order.
-.RE
-.SS "EVENT DETAILS"
-.PP
-The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR.  In the
-case of a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, it is the
-number of a button (1\-5).  If a button number is given, then only an
-event on that particular button will match;  if no button number is
-given, then an event on any button will match.  Note:  giving a
-specific button number is different than specifying a button modifier;
-in the first case, it refers to a button being pressed or released,
-while in the second it refers to some other button that is already
-depressed when the matching event occurs.  If a button
-number is given then \fItype\fR may be omitted:  if will default
-to \fBButtonPress\fR.  For example, the specifier \fB<1>\fR
-is equivalent to \fB<ButtonPress\-1>\fR.
-.PP
-If the event type is \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBKeyRelease\fR, then
-\fIdetail\fR may be specified in the form of an X keysym.  Keysyms
-are textual specifications for particular keys on the keyboard;
-they include all the alphanumeric ASCII characters (e.g.
-.QW a
-is the keysym for the ASCII character
-.QW a ),
-plus descriptions for non-alphanumeric characters
-.PQ comma "is the keysym for the comma character" ,
-plus descriptions for all the non-ASCII keys on the keyboard (e.g.
-.QW Shift_L
-is the keysym for the left shift key, and
-.QW F1
-is the keysym for the F1 function key, if it exists).  The
-complete list of keysyms is not presented here;  it is
-available in other X documentation and may vary from system to
-system.
-If necessary, you can use the \fB%K\fR notation described below
-to print out the keysym name for a particular key.
-If a keysym \fIdetail\fR is given, then the
-\fItype\fR field may be omitted;  it will default to \fBKeyPress\fR.
-For example, \fB<Control\-comma>\fR is equivalent to
-\fB<Control\-KeyPress\-comma>\fR.
-.SH "BINDING SCRIPTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS"
-.PP
-The \fIscript\fR argument to \fBbind\fR is a Tcl script, called the
-.QW "binding script",
-which will be executed whenever the given event sequence occurs.
-\fICommand\fR will be executed in the same interpreter that the
-\fBbind\fR command was executed in, and it will run at global
-level (only global variables will be accessible).
-If \fIscript\fR contains
-any \fB%\fR characters, then the script will not be
-executed directly.  Instead, a new script will be
-generated by replacing each \fB%\fR, and the character following
-it, with information from the current event.  The replacement
-depends on the character following the \fB%\fR, as defined in the
-list below.  Unless otherwise indicated, the
-replacement string is the decimal value of the given field from
-the current event.
-Some of the substitutions are only valid for
-certain types of events;  if they are used for other types of events
-the value substituted is undefined.
-.IP \fB%%\fR 5
-Replaced with a single percent.
-.IP \fB%#\fR 5
-The number of the last client request processed by the server
-(the \fIserial\fR field from the event).  Valid for all event
-types.
-.IP \fB%a\fR 5
-The \fIabove\fR field from the event,
-formatted as a hexadecimal number.
-Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR events.
-Indicates the sibling window immediately below the receiving window
-in the stacking order, or \fB0\fR if the receiving window is at the
-bottom.
-.IP \fB%b\fR 5
-The number of the button that was pressed or released.  Valid only
-for \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events.
-.IP \fB%c\fR 5
-The \fIcount\fR field from the event.  Valid only for \fBExpose\fR events.
-Indicates that there are \fIcount\fR pending \fBExpose\fR events which have not
-yet been delivered to the window.
-.IP \fB%d\fR 5
-The \fIdetail\fR or \fIuser_data\fR
-field from the event.  The \fB%d\fR is replaced by
-a string identifying the detail.  For \fBEnter\fR,
-\fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and \fBFocusOut\fR events,
-the string will be one of the following:
-.RS
-.DS
-.ta 6c
-\fBNotifyAncestor\fR	\fBNotifyNonlinearVirtual\fR
-\fBNotifyDetailNone\fR	\fBNotifyPointer\fR
-\fBNotifyInferior\fR	\fBNotifyPointerRoot\fR
-\fBNotifyNonlinear\fR	\fBNotifyVirtual\fR
-.DE
-For \fBConfigureRequest\fR events, the string will be one of:
-.DS
-.ta 6c
-\fBAbove\fR	\fBOpposite\fR
-\fBBelow\fR	\fBNone\fR
-\fBBottomIf\fR	\fBTopIf\fR
-.DE
-For virtual events, the string will be whatever value is stored in the
-\fIuser_data\fR field when the event was created (typically with
-\fBevent generate\fR), or the empty string if the field is NULL.
-Virtual events corresponding to key sequence presses (see \fBevent
-add\fR for details) set the \fIuser_data\fR to NULL.
-For events other than these, the substituted string is undefined.
-.RE
-.IP \fB%f\fR 5
-The \fIfocus\fR field from the event (\fB0\fR or \fB1\fR).  Valid only
-for \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events.  \fB1\fR if the receiving
-window is the focus window or a descendant of the focus window,
-\fB0\fR otherwise.
-.IP \fB%h\fR 5
-The \fIheight\fR field from the event.  Valid for the \fBConfigure\fR,
-\fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and
-\fBExpose\fR events.
-Indicates the new or requested height of the window.
-.IP \fB%i\fR 5
-The \fIwindow\fR field from the event, represented as a hexadecimal
-integer.  Valid for all event types.
-.IP \fB%k\fR 5
-The \fIkeycode\fR field from the event.  Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR
-and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
-.IP \fB%m\fR 5
-The \fImode\fR field from the event.  The substituted string is one of
-\fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or
-\fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR.  Valid only for \fBEnter\fR,
-\fBFocusIn\fR, \fBFocusOut\fR, and \fBLeave\fR events.
-.IP \fB%o\fR 5
-The \fIoverride_redirect\fR field from the event.  Valid only for
-\fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events.
-.IP \fB%p\fR 5
-The \fIplace\fR field from the event, substituted as one of the
-strings \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR.  Valid only
-for \fBCirculate\fR and \fBCirculateRequest\fR events.
-.IP \fB%s\fR 5
-The \fIstate\fR field from the event.  For \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR,
-\fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events, a decimal string
-is substituted.  For \fBVisibility\fR, one of the strings
-\fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR, \fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR,
-and \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR is substituted.
-For \fBProperty\fR events, substituted with
-either the string \fBNewValue\fR (indicating that the property
-has been created or modified) or \fBDelete\fR (indicating that
-the property has been removed).
-.IP \fB%t\fR 5
-The \fItime\fR field from the event.
-This is the X server timestamp (typically the time since
-the last server reset) in milliseconds, when the event occurred.
-Valid for most events.
-.IP \fB%w\fR 5
-The \fIwidth\fR field from the event.
-Indicates the new or requested width of the window.
-Valid only for
-\fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR,
-\fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events.
-.IP "\fB%x\fR, \fB%y\fR" 5
-The \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR fields from the event.
-For \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR,
-\fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, and \fBMouseWheel\fR events,
-\fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR indicate the position of the mouse pointer
-relative to the receiving window.
-For \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events, the position where the
-mouse pointer crossed the window, relative to the receiving window.
-For \fBConfigure\fR and \fBCreate\fR requests, the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR
-coordinates of the window relative to its parent window.
-.IP \fB%A\fR 5
-Substitutes the UNICODE character corresponding to the event, or
-the empty string if the event does not correspond to a UNICODE character
-(e.g. the shift key was pressed). \fBXmbLookupString\fR (or
-\fBXLookupString\fR when input method support is turned off) does all
-the work of translating from the event to a UNICODE character.
-Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
-.IP \fB%B\fR 5
-The \fIborder_width\fR field from the event.  Valid only for
-\fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, and \fBCreate\fR events.
-.IP \fB%D\fR 5
-This reports the \fIdelta\fR value of a \fBMouseWheel\fR event.  The
-\fIdelta\fR value represents the rotation units the mouse wheel has
-been moved. The sign of the value represents the direction the mouse
-wheel was scrolled.
-.IP \fB%E\fR 5
-The \fIsend_event\fR field from the event.  Valid for all event types.
-\fB0\fR indicates that this is a
-.QW normal
-event, \fB1\fR indicates that it is a
-.QW synthetic
-event generated by \fBSendEvent\fR.
-.IP \fB%K\fR 5
-The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a textual
-string.  Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
-.IP \fB%M\fR 5
-The number of script-based binding patterns matched so far for the
-event.  Valid for all event types.
-.IP \fB%N\fR 5
-The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a decimal
-number.  Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
-.IP \fB%P\fR 5
-The name of the property being updated or deleted (which
-may be converted to an XAtom using \fBwinfo atom\fR.) Valid
-only for \fBProperty\fR events.
-.IP \fB%R\fR 5
-The \fIroot\fR window identifier from the event.  Valid only for
-events containing a \fIroot\fR field.
-.IP \fB%S\fR 5
-The \fIsubwindow\fR window identifier from the event,
-formatted as a hexadecimal number.
-Valid only for events containing a \fIsubwindow\fR field.
-.IP \fB%T\fR 5
-The \fItype\fR field from the event.  Valid for all event types.
-.IP \fB%W\fR 5
-The path name of the window to which the event was reported (the
-\fIwindow\fR field from the event).  Valid for all event types.
-.IP "\fB%X\fR, \fB%Y\fR" 5
-The \fIx_root\fR and  \fIy_root\fR fields from the event.
-If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted
-values are the corresponding x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the virtual root.
-Valid only for
-\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR,
-and \fBMotion\fR events.
-Same meaning as \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR, except relative to the (virtual) root
-window.
-.LP
-The replacement string for a %-replacement is formatted as a proper
-Tcl list element.
-This means that spaces or special characters such as \fB$\fR and
-\fB{\fR may be preceded by backslashes.
-This guarantees that the string will be passed through the Tcl
-parser when the binding script is evaluated.
-Most replacements are numbers or well-defined strings such
-as \fBAbove\fR;  for these replacements no special formatting
-is ever necessary.
-The most common case where reformatting occurs is for the \fB%A\fR
-substitution.  For example, if \fIscript\fR is
-.CS
-\fBinsert\0%A\fR
-.CE
-and the character typed is an open square bracket, then the script
-actually executed will be
-.CS
-\fBinsert\0\e[\fR
-.CE
-This will cause the \fBinsert\fR to receive the original replacement
-string (open square bracket) as its first argument.
-If the extra backslash had not been added, Tcl would not have been
-able to parse the script correctly.
-.SH "MULTIPLE MATCHES"
-.PP
-It is possible for several bindings to match a given X event.
-If the bindings are associated with different \fItag\fR's,
-then each of the bindings will be executed, in order.
-By default, a binding for the widget will be executed first, followed
-by a class binding, a binding for its toplevel, and
-an \fBall\fR binding.
-The \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to change this order for
-a particular window or to associate additional binding tags with
-the window.
-.PP
-The \fBcontinue\fR and \fBbreak\fR commands may be used inside a
-binding script to control the processing of matching scripts.
-If \fBcontinue\fR is invoked within a binding script, then this
-binding script, including all other
-.QW +
-appended scripts, is terminated but Tk will continue processing
-binding scripts associated with other \fItag\fR's.
-If the \fBbreak\fR command is invoked within a binding script,
-then that script terminates and no other scripts will be invoked
-for the event.
-.PP
-Within a script called from the binding script, \fBreturn\fR
-\fB-code ok\fR may be used to continue processing (including
-.QW +
-appended scripts), or \fBreturn\fR \fB-code break\fR may be used to
-stop processing all other binding scripts.
-.PP
-If more than one binding matches a particular event and they
-have the same \fItag\fR, then the most specific binding
-is chosen and its script is evaluated.
-The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of
-several matching sequences is more specific:
-.RS
-.IP (a)
-an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific
-than one that does not;
-.IP (b)
-a longer sequence (in terms of number
-of events matched) is more specific than a shorter sequence;
-.IP (c)
-if the modifiers specified in one pattern are a subset of the
-modifiers in another pattern, then the pattern with more modifiers
-is more specific.
-.IP (d)
-a virtual event whose physical pattern matches the sequence is less
-specific than the same physical pattern that is not associated with a
-virtual event.
-.IP (e)
-given a sequence that matches two or more virtual events, one
-of the virtual events will be chosen, but the order is undefined.
-.RE
-.PP
-If the matching sequences contain more than one event, then tests
-(c)\-(e) are applied in order from the most recent event to the least recent
-event in the sequences.  If these tests fail to determine a winner, then the
-most recently registered sequence is the winner.
-.PP
-If there are two (or more) virtual events that are both triggered by the
-same sequence, and both of those virtual events are bound to the same window
-tag, then only one of the virtual events will be triggered, and it will
-be picked at random:
-.CS
-event add <<Paste>> <Control\-y>
-event add <<Paste>> <Button\-2>
-event add <<Scroll>> <Button\-2>
-\fBbind\fR Entry <<Paste>> {puts Paste}
-\fBbind\fR Entry <<Scroll>> {puts Scroll}
-.CE
-If the user types Control\-y, the \fB<<Paste>>\fR binding
-will be invoked, but if the user presses button 2 then one of
-either the \fB<<Paste>>\fR or the \fB<<Scroll>>\fR bindings will
-be invoked, but exactly which one gets invoked is undefined.
-.PP
-If an X event does not match any of the existing bindings, then the
-event is ignored.
-An unbound event is not considered to be an error.
-.SH "MULTI-EVENT SEQUENCES AND IGNORED EVENTS"
-.PP
-When a \fIsequence\fR specified in a \fBbind\fR command contains
-more than one event pattern, then its script is executed whenever
-the recent events (leading up to and including the current event)
-match the given sequence.  This means, for example, that if button 1 is
-clicked repeatedly the sequence \fB<Double\-ButtonPress\-1>\fR will match
-each button press but the first.
-If extraneous events that would prevent a match occur in the middle
-of an event sequence then the extraneous events are
-ignored unless they are \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBButtonPress\fR events.
-For example, \fB<Double\-ButtonPress\-1>\fR will match a sequence of
-presses of button 1, even though there will be \fBButtonRelease\fR
-events (and possibly \fBMotion\fR events) between the
-\fBButtonPress\fR events.
-Furthermore, a \fBKeyPress\fR event may be preceded by any number
-of other \fBKeyPress\fR events for modifier keys without the
-modifier keys preventing a match.
-For example, the event sequence \fBaB\fR will match a press of the
-\fBa\fR key, a release of the \fBa\fR key, a press of the \fBShift\fR
-key, and a press of the \fBb\fR key:  the press of \fBShift\fR is
-ignored because it is a modifier key.
-Finally, if several \fBMotion\fR events occur in a row, only
-the last one is used for purposes of matching binding sequences.
-.SH "ERRORS"
-.PP
-If an error occurs in executing the script for a binding then the
-\fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error.
-The \fBbgerror\fR command will be executed at global level
-(outside the context of any Tcl procedure).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Arrange for a string describing the motion of the mouse to be printed
-out when the mouse is double-clicked:
-.CS
-\fBbind\fR . <Double\-1> {
-    puts "hi from (%x,%y)"
-}
-.CE
-.PP
-A little GUI that displays what the keysym name of the last key
-pressed is:
-.CS
-set keysym "Press any key"
-pack [label .l \-textvariable keysym \-padx 2m \-pady 1m]
-\fBbind\fR . <Key> {
-    set keysym "You pressed %K"
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bgerror(n), bindtags(n), event(n), focus(n), grab(n), keysyms(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-binding, event
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/bindtags.n b/tk8.6/doc/bindtags.n
deleted file mode 100644
index dc3973b..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/bindtags.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH bindtags n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-bindtags \- Determine which bindings apply to a window, and order of evaluation
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbindtags \fIwindow \fR?\fItagList\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-When a binding is created with the \fBbind\fR command, it is
-associated either with a particular window such as \fB.a.b.c\fR,
-a class name such as \fBButton\fR, the keyword \fBall\fR, or any
-other string.
-All of these forms are called \fIbinding tags\fR.
-Each window contains a list of binding tags that determine how
-events are processed for the window.
-When an event occurs in a window, it is applied to each of the
-window's tags in order:  for each tag, the most specific binding
-that matches the given tag and event is executed.
-See the \fBbind\fR command for more information on the matching
-process.
-.PP
-By default, each window has four binding tags consisting of the
-name of the window, the window's class name, the name of the window's
-nearest toplevel ancestor, and \fBall\fR, in that order.
-Toplevel windows have only three tags by default, since the toplevel
-name is the same as that of the window.
-The \fBbindtags\fR command allows the binding tags for a window to be
-read and modified.
-.PP
-If \fBbindtags\fR is invoked with only one argument, then the
-current set of binding tags for \fIwindow\fR is returned as a list.
-If the \fItagList\fR argument is specified to \fBbindtags\fR,
-then it must be a proper list; the tags for \fIwindow\fR are changed
-to the elements of the list.
-The elements of \fItagList\fR may be arbitrary strings;  however,
-any tag starting with a dot is treated as the name of a window;  if
-no window by that name exists at the time an event is processed,
-then the tag is ignored for that event.
-The order of the elements in \fItagList\fR determines the order in
-which binding scripts are executed in response to events.
-For example, the command
-.CS
-\fBbindtags .b {all . Button .b}\fR
-.CE
-reverses the order in which binding scripts will be evaluated for
-a button named \fB.b\fR so that \fBall\fR bindings are invoked
-first, following by bindings for \fB.b\fR's toplevel
-.PQ . "" ,
-followed by class bindings, followed by bindings for \fB.b\fR.
-If \fItagList\fR is an empty list then the binding tags for \fIwindow\fR
-are returned to the default state described above.
-.PP
-The \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to introduce arbitrary
-additional binding tags for a window, or to remove standard tags.
-For example, the command
-.CS
-\fBbindtags .b {.b TrickyButton . all}\fR
-.CE
-replaces the \fBButton\fR tag for \fB.b\fR with \fBTrickyButton\fR.
-This means that the default widget bindings for buttons, which are
-associated with the \fBButton\fR tag, will no longer apply to \fB.b\fR,
-but any bindings associated with \fBTrickyButton\fR (perhaps some
-new button behavior) will apply.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-If you have a set of nested \fBframe\fR widgets and you want events
-sent to a \fBbutton\fR widget to also be delivered to all the widgets
-up to the current \fBtoplevel\fR (in contrast to Tk's default
-behavior, where events are not delivered to those intermediate
-windows) to make it easier to have accelerators that are only active
-for part of a window, you could use a helper procedure like this to
-help set things up:
-.CS
-proc setupBindtagsForTreeDelivery {widget} {
-    set tags [list $widget [winfo class $widget]]
-    set w $widget
-    set t [winfo toplevel $w]
-    while {$w ne $t} {
-        set w [winfo parent $w]
-        lappend tags $w
-    }
-    lappend tags all
-    \fBbindtags\fR $widget $tags
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-binding, event, tag
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/bitmap.n b/tk8.6/doc/bitmap.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ead3311..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/bitmap.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,124 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH bitmap n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-bitmap \- Images that display two colors
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBimage create bitmap \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
-
-\fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A bitmap is an image whose pixels can display either of two colors
-or be transparent.
-A bitmap image is defined by four things:  a background color,
-a foreground color, and two bitmaps, called the \fIsource\fR
-and the \fImask\fR.
-Each of the bitmaps specifies 0/1 values for a rectangular
-array of pixels, and the two bitmaps must have the same
-dimensions.
-For pixels where the mask is zero, the image displays nothing,
-producing a transparent effect.
-For other pixels, the image displays the foreground color if
-the source data is one and the background color if the source
-data is zero.
-.SH "CREATING BITMAPS"
-.PP
-Like all images, bitmaps are created using the \fBimage create\fR
-command.
-Bitmaps support the following \fIoptions\fR:
-.TP
-\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
-.
-Specifies a background color for the image in any of the standard
-ways accepted by Tk.  If this option is set to an empty string
-then the background pixels will be transparent.  This effect
-is achieved by using the source bitmap as the mask bitmap, ignoring
-any \fB\-maskdata\fR or \fB\-maskfile\fR options.
-.TP
-\fB\-data \fIstring\fR
-.
-Specifies the contents of the source bitmap as a string.
-The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
-If both the \fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified,
-the \fB\-data\fR option takes precedence.
-.TP
-\fB\-file \fIname\fR
-.
-\fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the
-source bitmap.
-The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
-.TP
-\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
-.
-Specifies a foreground color for the image in any of the standard
-ways accepted by Tk.
-.TP
-\fB\-maskdata \fIstring\fR
-.
-Specifies the contents of the mask as a string.
-The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
-If both the \fB\-maskdata\fR and \fB\-maskfile\fR options are specified,
-the \fB\-maskdata\fR option takes precedence.
-.TP
-\fB\-maskfile \fIname\fR
-.
-\fIname\fR gives the name of a file whose contents define the
-mask.
-The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the \fBbitmap\fR program).
-.SH "IMAGE COMMAND"
-.PP
-When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command
-whose name is the same as the image.
-This command may be used to invoke various operations
-on the image.
-It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for bitmap images:
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
-\fBimage create\fR \fBbitmap\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options for the image.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
-\fBimage create\fR \fBbitmap\fR command.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bitmap, image
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/busy.n b/tk8.6/doc/busy.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ab2fd8a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/busy.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,275 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1998 Lucent Technologies, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Jos Decoster
-'\"
-'\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
-'\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
-'\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
-'\" the copyright notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
-'\" documentation, and that the names of Lucent Technologies any of their
-'\" entities not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
-'\" distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.
-'\"
-'\" Lucent Technologies disclaims all warranties with regard to this software,
-'\" including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness. In no
-'\" event shall Lucent Technologies be liable for any special, indirect or
-'\" consequential damages or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of
-'\" use, data or profits, whether in an action of contract, negligence or
-'\" other tortuous action, arising out of or in connection with the use or
-'\" performance of this software.
-'\"
-'\" BLT::busy command created by George Howlett.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-busy \- confine pointer events to a window sub-tree
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk busy\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.sp
-\fBtk busy hold\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.sp
-\fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
-.sp
-\fBtk busy forget\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow \fR?...
-.sp
-\fBtk busy current\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-.sp
-\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtk busy\fR command provides a simple means to block pointer events from
-Tk widgets, while overriding the widget's cursor with a configurable busy
-cursor. Note this command does not prevent keyboard events from being sent to
-the widgets made busy.
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-There are many times in applications where you want to temporarily restrict
-what actions the user can take. For example, an application could have a
-.QW Run
-button that when pressed causes some processing to occur. However, while the
-application is busy processing, you probably don't want the user to be
-able to click the
-.QW Run
-button again. You may also want restrict the user from other tasks such as
-clicking a
-.QW Print
-button.
-.PP
-The \fBtk busy\fR command lets you make Tk widgets busy. This means that user
-interactions such as button clicks, moving the mouse, typing at the keyboard,
-etc.\0are ignored by the widget. You can set a special cursor (like a watch)
-that overrides the widget's normal cursor, providing feedback that the
-application (widget) is temporarily busy.
-.PP
-When a widget is made busy, the widget and all of its descendants will ignore
-pointer events. It's easy to make an entire panel of widgets busy. You can
-simply make the toplevel widget (such as
-.QW . )
-busy. This is easier and far much more efficient than recursively traversing
-the widget hierarchy, disabling each widget and re-configuring its cursor.
-.PP
-Often, the \fBtk busy\fR command can be used instead of Tk's \fBgrab\fR
-command. Unlike \fBgrab\fR which restricts all user interactions to one
-widget, with the \fBtk busy\fR command you can have more than one widget
-active (for example, a
-.QW Cancel
-dialog and a
-.QW Help
-button).
-.SS EXAMPLE
-.PP
-You can make several widgets busy by simply making its ancestor widget busy
-using the \fBhold\fR operation.
-.PP
-.CS
-frame .top
-button .top.button; canvas .top.canvas
-pack .top.button .top.canvas
-pack .top
-# . . .
-\fBtk busy\fR hold .top
-update
-.CE
-.PP
-All the widgets within \fB.top\fR (including \fB.top\fR) are now busy. Using
-\fBupdate\fR insures that \fBtk busy\fR command will take effect before any
-other user events can occur.
-.PP
-When the application is no longer busy processing, you can allow user
-interactions again and free any resources it allocated by the \fBforget\fR
-operation.
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBtk busy\fR forget .top
-.CE
-.PP
-The busy window has a configurable cursor. You can change the busy cursor
-using the \fBconfigure\fR operation.
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBtk busy\fR configure .top \-cursor "watch"
-.CE
-.PP
-Destroying the widget will also clean up any resources allocated by the \fBtk
-busy\fR command.
-.PP
-.SH OPERATIONS
-.PP
-The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command:
-.TP
-\fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
-.
-Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command.
-.TP
-\fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
-.
-Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window
-hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget.
-A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent
-window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified
-window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally
-\fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold
-operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The
-following configuration options are valid:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-cursor \fIcursorName\fR
-.
-Specifies the cursor to be displayed when the widget is made busy.
-\fICursorName\fR can be in any form accepted by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The
-default cursor is \fBwait\fR on Windows and \fBwatch\fR on other platforms.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtk busy cget \fIwindow\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Queries the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for \fIwindow\fR.
-\fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made busy by the
-\fBhold\fR operation. The command returns the present value of the specified
-\fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
-\fBhold\fR operation.
-.TP
-\fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?...
-.
-Queries or modifies the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for
-\fIwindow\fR. \fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made
-busy by the \fBhold\fR operation.  If no options are specified, a list
-describing all of the available options for \fIwindow\fR (see
-\fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list) is
-returned. If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command
-returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to
-the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is
-specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the
-command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
-this case the command returns the empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of
-the values accepted by the \fBhold\fR operation.
-.RS
-.PP
-Please note that the option database is referenced through \fIwindow\fR. For
-example, if the widget \fB.frame\fR is to be made busy, the busy cursor can be
-specified for it by either \fBoption\fR command:
-.PP
-.CS
-option add *frame.busyCursor gumby
-option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?...
-.
-Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR,
-including the transparent window. User events will again be received by
-\fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed.
-\fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR
-operation, otherwise an error is reported.
-.TP
-\fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-.
-Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a
-\fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching
-\fIpattern\fR are returned.
-.TP
-\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Returns the status of a widget \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR presently can not
-receive user interactions, \fB1\fR is returned, otherwise \fB0\fR.
-.SH "EVENT HANDLING"
-.SS BINDINGS
-.PP
-The event blocking feature is implemented by creating and mapping a
-transparent window that completely covers the widget. When the busy window is
-mapped, it invisibly shields the widget and its hierarchy from all events that
-may be sent. Like Tk widgets, busy windows have widget names in the Tk window
-hierarchy. This means that you can use the \fBbind\fR command, to handle
-events in the busy window.
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBtk busy\fR hold .frame.canvas
-bind .frame.canvas_Busy <Enter> { ... }
-.CE
-.PP
-Normally the busy window is a sibling of the widget. The name of the busy
-window is
-.QW \fIwidget\fB_Busy\fR
-where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the widget to be made busy. In the previous
-example, the pathname of the busy window is
-.QW \fB.frame.canvas_Busy\fR .
-The exception is when the widget is a toplevel widget (such as
-.QW . )
-where the busy window can't be made a sibling. The busy window is then a child
-of the widget named
-.QW \fIwidget\fB._Busy\fR
-where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the toplevel widget. In the following
-example, the pathname of the busy window is
-.QW \fB._Busy\fR .
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBtk busy\fR hold .
-bind ._Busy <Enter> { ... }
-.CE
-.SS "ENTER/LEAVE EVENTS"
-.PP
-Mapping and unmapping busy windows generates Enter/Leave events for all
-widgets they cover. Please note this if you are tracking Enter/Leave events in
-widgets.
-.SS "KEYBOARD EVENTS"
-.PP
-When a widget is made busy, the widget is prevented from gaining the keyboard
-focus by a user clicking on it by the busy window. But if the widget already had
-focus, it still may receive keyboard events. The widget can also still receive
-focus through keyboard traversal. To prevent this, you must move
-focus to another window and make sure the focus can not go back to the widgets
-made busy (e.g. but restricting focus to a cancel button).
-.PP
-.CS
-pack [frame .frame]
-pack [text .frame.text]
-\fBtk busy\fR hold .frame
-pack [button .cancel -text "Cancel" -command exit]
-focus .cancel
-bind .cancel <Tab> {break}
-bind .cancel <Shift-Tab> {break}
-update
-.CE
-.PP
-The above example moves the focus from .frame immediately after invoking the
-\fBhold\fR so that no keyboard events will be sent to \fB.frame\fR or any of
-its descendants. It also makes sure it's not possible to leave button
-\fB.cancel\fR using the keyboard.
-.SH PORTABILITY
-.PP
-Note that the \fBtk busy\fR command does not currently have any effect on OSX
-when Tk is built using Aqua support.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-grab(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-busy, keyboard events, pointer events, window
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/button.n b/tk8.6/doc/button.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 233feb6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/button.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,210 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH button n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-button \- Create and manipulate 'button' action widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-font	\-relief
-\-activeforeground	\-foreground	\-repeatdelay
-\-anchor	\-highlightbackground	\-repeatinterval
-\-background	\-highlightcolor	\-takefocus
-\-bitmap	\-highlightthickness	\-text
-\-borderwidth	\-image	\-textvariable
-\-compound	\-justify	\-underline
-\-cursor	\-padx	\-wraplength
-\-disabledforeground	\-pady
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button.  This command
-is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the button
-window.
-.OP \-default default Default
-Specifies one of three states for the default ring: \fBnormal\fR,
-\fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR.  In active state, the button is drawn
-with the platform specific appearance for a default button.  In normal
-state, the button is drawn with the platform specific appearance for a
-non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default button
-appearance.  The normal and active states will result in buttons of
-the same size.  In disabled state, the button is drawn with the
-non-default button appearance without leaving space for the default
-appearance.  The disabled state may result in a smaller button than
-the active state.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies a desired height for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option is not specified, the button's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.OP \-overrelief overRelief OverRelief
-Specifies an alternative relief for the button, to be used when the
-mouse cursor is over the widget.  This option can be used to make
-toolbar buttons, by configuring \fB\-relief flat \-overrelief
-raised\fR.  If the value of this option is the empty string, then no
-alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the button.
-The empty string is the default value.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the button:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
-or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the button is displayed using the
-\fB\-foreground\fR and \fB\-background\fR options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the button.  In active state
-the button is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR and
-\fB\-activebackground\fR options.  Disabled state means that the button
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and
-\fB\-background\fR options determine how the button is displayed.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies a desired width for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
-For a text button (no image or with \fB\-compound none\fR) then the width
-specifies how much space in characters to allocate for the text label.
-If the width is negative then this specifies a minimum width.
-If this option is not specified, the button's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBbutton\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a button widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the button such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The \fBbutton\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A button is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the \fB\-wraplength\fR option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-\fB\-underline\fR option.
-It can display itself in either of three different ways, according
-to
-the \fB\-state\fR option;
-it can be made to appear raised, sunken, or flat;
-and it can be made to flash.  When a user invokes the
-button (by pressing mouse button 1 with the cursor over the
-button), then the Tcl command specified in the \fB\-command\fR
-option is invoked.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for button widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBflash\fR
-Flash the button.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the button
-several times, alternating between the configured activebackground
-and background colors.  At the end of the flash the button is left
-in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked.
-This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
-Invoke the Tcl command associated with the button, if there is one.
-The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
-empty string if there is no command associated with the button.
-This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for buttons that give them
-default behavior:
-.IP [1]
-A button activates whenever the mouse passes over it and deactivates
-whenever the mouse leaves the button.
-Under Windows, this binding is only active when mouse button 1 has
-been pressed over the button.
-.IP [2]
-A button's relief is changed to sunken whenever mouse button 1 is
-pressed over the button, and the relief is restored to its original
-value when button 1 is later released.
-.IP [3]
-If mouse button 1 is pressed over a button and later released over
-the button, the button is invoked.  However, if the mouse is not
-over the button when button 1 is released, then no invocation occurs.
-.IP [4]
-When a button has the input focus, the space key causes the button
-to be invoked.
-.PP
-If the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above
-actions occur:  the button is completely non-responsive.
-.PP
-The behavior of buttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "PLATFORM NOTES"
-.PP
-On Aqua/Mac OS X, some configuration options are ignored for the purpose of
-drawing of the widget because they would otherwise conflict with platform
-guidelines. The \fBconfigure\fR and \fBcget\fR subcommands can still
-manipulate the values, but do not cause any variation to the look of the
-widget. The options affected notably include \fB\-background\fR and
-\fB\-relief\fR.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-This is the classic Tk
-.QW "Hello, World!"
-demonstration:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBbutton\fR .b \-text "Hello, World!" \-command exit
-pack .b
-.CE
-.PP
-This example demonstrates how to handle button accelerators:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBbutton\fR .b1 \-text Hello \-underline 0
-\fBbutton\fR .b2 \-text World \-underline 0
-bind . <Key\-h> {.b1 flash; .b1 invoke}
-bind . <Key\-w> {.b2 flash; .b2 invoke}
-pack .b1 .b2
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::button(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-button, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/canvas.n b/tk8.6/doc/canvas.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b65283..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/canvas.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1923 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Scriptics Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH canvas n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-canvas \- Create and manipulate 'canvas' hypergraphics drawing surface widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBcanvas\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
-\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor	\-highlightthickness
-\-insertbackground	\-insertborderwidth	\-insertofftime
-\-insertontime	\-insertwidth	\-relief
-\-selectbackground	\-selectborderwidth	\-selectforeground
-\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand	\-yscrollcommand
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-closeenough closeEnough CloseEnough
-Specifies a floating-point value indicating how close the mouse cursor
-must be to an item before it is considered to be
-.QW inside
-the item. Defaults to 1.0.
-.OP \-confine confine Confine
-Specifies a boolean value that indicates whether or not it should be
-allowable to set the canvas's view outside the region defined by the
-\fBscrollRegion\fR argument.
-Defaults to true, which means that the view will
-be constrained within the scroll region.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies a desired window height that the canvas widget should request from
-its geometry manager. The value may be specified in any
-of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section below.
-.OP \-scrollregion scrollRegion ScrollRegion
-Specifies a list with four coordinates describing the left, top, right, and
-bottom coordinates of a rectangular region.
-This region is used for scrolling purposes and is considered to be
-the boundary of the information in the canvas.
-Each of the coordinates may be specified
-in any of the forms given in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section below.
-.OP \-state state State
-Modifies the default state of the canvas where \fIstate\fR may be set to
-one of: \fBnormal\fR, \fBdisabled\fR, or \fBhidden\fR. Individual canvas
-objects all have their own state option which may override the default
-state. Many options can take separate specifications such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in different situations. The
-options that start with \fBactive\fR control the appearance when the mouse
-pointer is over it, while the option starting with \fBdisabled\fR controls
-the appearance when the state is disabled. Canvas items which are
-\fBdisabled\fR will not react to canvas bindings.
-.OP \-width width width
-Specifies a desired window width that the canvas widget should request from
-its geometry manager. The value may be specified in any
-of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section below.
-.OP \-xscrollincrement xScrollIncrement ScrollIncrement
-Specifies an increment for horizontal scrolling, in any of the usual forms
-permitted for screen distances. If the value of this option is greater
-than zero, the horizontal view in the window will be constrained so that
-the canvas x coordinate at the left edge of the window is always an even
-multiple of \fBxScrollIncrement\fR; furthermore, the units for scrolling
-(e.g., the change in view when the left and right arrows of a scrollbar
-are selected) will also be \fBxScrollIncrement\fR. If the value of
-this option is less than or equal to zero, then horizontal scrolling
-is unconstrained.
-.OP \-yscrollincrement yScrollIncrement ScrollIncrement
-Specifies an increment for vertical scrolling, in any of the usual forms
-permitted for screen distances. If the value of this option is greater
-than zero, the vertical view in the window will be constrained so that
-the canvas y coordinate at the top edge of the window is always an even
-multiple of \fByScrollIncrement\fR; furthermore, the units for scrolling
-(e.g., the change in view when the top and bottom arrows of a scrollbar
-are selected) will also be \fByScrollIncrement\fR. If the value of
-this option is less than or equal to zero, then vertical scrolling
-is unconstrained.
-.BE
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new window (given
-by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a canvas widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the
-command line or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the canvas such as its colors and 3-D relief.
-The \fBcanvas\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-Canvas widgets implement structured graphics.
-A canvas displays any number of \fIitems\fR, which may be things like
-rectangles, circles, lines, and text.
-Items may be manipulated (e.g. moved or re-colored) and commands may
-be associated with items in much the same way that the \fBbind\fR
-command allows commands to be bound to widgets. For example,
-a particular command may be associated with the <Button-1> event
-so that the command is invoked whenever button 1 is pressed with
-the mouse cursor over an item.
-This means that items in a canvas can have behaviors defined by
-the Tcl scripts bound to them.
-.SH "DISPLAY LIST"
-.PP
-The items in a canvas are ordered for purposes of display,
-with the first item in the display list being displayed
-first, followed by the next item in the list, and so on.
-Items later in the display list obscure those that are
-earlier in the display list and are sometimes referred to as being
-.QW "on top"
-of earlier items.
-When a new item is created it is placed at the end of the
-display list, on top of everything else.
-Widget commands may be used to re-arrange the order of the
-display list.
-.PP
-Window items are an exception to the above rules. The underlying
-window systems require them always to be drawn on top of other items.
-In addition, the stacking order of window items
-is not affected by any of the canvas widget commands; you must use
-the Tk \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command instead.
-.SH "ITEM IDS AND TAGS"
-.PP
-Items in a canvas widget may be named in either of two ways:
-by id or by tag.
-Each item has a unique identifying number, which is assigned to
-that item when it is created. The id of an item never changes
-and id numbers are never re-used within the lifetime of a
-canvas widget.
-.PP
-Each item may also have any number of \fItags\fR associated
-with it. A tag is just a string of characters, and it may
-take any form except that of an integer.
-For example,
-.QW x123
-is OK but
-.QW 123
-is not.
-The same tag may be associated with many different items.
-This is commonly done to group items in various interesting
-ways; for example, all selected items might be given the tag
-.QW selected .
-.PP
-The tag \fBall\fR is implicitly associated with every item
-in the canvas; it may be used to invoke operations on
-all the items in the canvas.
-.PP
-The tag \fBcurrent\fR is managed automatically by Tk;
-it applies to the \fIcurrent item\fR, which is the
-topmost item whose drawn area covers the position of
-the mouse cursor (different item types interpret this in varying ways; see the
-individual item type documentation for details).
-If the mouse is not in the canvas widget or is not over
-an item, then no item has the \fBcurrent\fR tag.
-.PP
-When specifying items in canvas widget commands, if the
-specifier is an integer then it is assumed to refer to
-the single item with that id.
-If the specifier is not an integer, then it is assumed to
-refer to all of the items in the canvas that have a tag
-matching the specifier.
-The symbol \fItagOrId\fR is used below to indicate that
-an argument specifies either an id that selects a single
-item or a tag that selects zero or more items.
-.PP
-\fItagOrId\fR may contain a logical expressions of
-tags by using operators:
-.QW \fB&&\fR ,
-.QW \fB||\fR ,
-.QW \fB^\fR ,
-.QW \fB!\fR ,
-and parenthesized subexpressions. For example:
-.CS
-      .c find withtag {(a&&!b)||(!a&&b)}
-.CE
-or equivalently:
-.CS
-      .c find withtag {a^b}
-.CE
-will find only those items with either
-.QW a
-or
-.QW b
-tags, but not both.
-.PP
-Some widget commands only operate on a single item at a
-time; if \fItagOrId\fR is specified in a way that
-names multiple items, then the normal behavior is for
-the command to use the first (lowest) of these items in
-the display list that is suitable for the command.
-Exceptions are noted in the widget command descriptions
-below.
-.SH "COORDINATES"
-.PP
-All coordinates related to canvases are stored as floating-point
-numbers.
-Coordinates and distances are specified in screen units,
-which are floating-point numbers optionally followed
-by one of several letters.
-If no letter is supplied then the distance is in pixels.
-If the letter is \fBm\fR then the distance is in millimeters on
-the screen; if it is \fBc\fR then the distance is in centimeters;
-\fBi\fR means inches, and \fBp\fR means printers points (1/72 inch).
-Larger y-coordinates refer to points lower on the screen; larger
-x-coordinates refer to points farther to the right.
-Coordinates can be specified either as an even number of parameters,
-or as a single list parameter containing an even number of x and y
-coordinate values.
-.SS TRANSFORMATIONS
-.PP
-Normally the origin of the canvas coordinate system is at the
-upper-left corner of the window containing the canvas.
-It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas
-coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the
-\fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR widget commands; this is typically used
-for scrolling.
-Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate
-system relative to the window coordinate system.
-.PP
-Individual items may be moved or scaled using widget commands
-described below, but they may not be rotated.
-.PP
-Note that the default origin of the canvas's visible area is
-coincident with the origin for the whole window as that makes bindings
-using the mouse position easier to work with; you only need to use the
-\fBcanvasx\fR and \fBcanvasy\fR widget commands if you adjust the
-origin of the visible area. However, this also means that any focus
-ring (as controlled by the \fB\-highlightthickness\fR option) and
-window border (as controlled by the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option) must
-be taken into account before you get to the visible area of the
-canvas.
-.SH "INDICES"
-.PP
-Text items support the notion of an \fIindex\fR for identifying
-particular positions within the item.
-In a similar fashion, line and polygon items support \fIindex\fR for
-identifying, inserting and deleting subsets of their coordinates.
-Indices are used for commands such as inserting or deleting
-a range of characters or coordinates, and setting the insertion
-cursor position. An index may be specified in any of a number
-of ways, and different types of items may support different forms
-for specifying indices.
-Text items support the following forms for an index; if you
-define new types of text-like items, it would be advisable to
-support as many of these forms as practical.
-Note that it is possible to refer to the character just after
-the last one in the text item; this is necessary for such
-tasks as inserting new text at the end of the item.
-Lines and Polygons do not support the insertion cursor
-and the selection. Their indices are supposed to be even
-always, because coordinates always appear in pairs.
-.TP 10
-\fInumber\fR
-.
-A decimal number giving the position of the desired character
-within the text item.
-0 refers to the first character, 1 to the next character, and
-so on. If indexes are odd for lines and polygons, they will be
-automatically decremented by one.
-A number less than 0 is treated as if it were zero, and a
-number greater than the length of the text item is treated
-as if it were equal to the length of the text item. For
-polygons, numbers less than 0 or greater than the length
-of the coordinate list will be adjusted by adding or subtracting
-the length until the result is between zero and the length,
-inclusive.
-.TP 10
-\fBend\fR
-.
-Refers to the character or coordinate just after the last one
-in the item (same as the number of characters or coordinates
-in the item).
-.TP 10
-\fBinsert\fR
-.
-Refers to the character just before which the insertion cursor
-is drawn in this item. Not valid for lines and polygons.
-.TP 10
-\fBsel.first\fR
-.
-Refers to the first selected character in the item.
-If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal.
-.TP 10
-\fBsel.last\fR
-.
-Refers to the last selected character in the item.
-If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal.
-.TP 10
-\fB@\fIx,y\fR
-.
-Refers to the character or coordinate at the point given by \fIx\fR and
-\fIy\fR, where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified in the coordinate
-system of the canvas.
-If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lie outside the coordinates covered by the
-text item, then they refer to the first or last character in the
-line that is closest to the given point.
-.SH "DASH PATTERNS"
-.PP
-Many items support the notion of a dash pattern for outlines.
-.PP
-The first possible syntax is a list of integers. Each element
-represents the number of pixels of a line segment. Only the odd
-segments are drawn using the
-.QW outline
-color. The other segments are drawn transparent.
-.PP
-The second possible syntax is a character list containing only
-5 possible characters
-.QW "\fB.,-_ \fR" .
-The space can be used
-to enlarge the space between other line elements, and cannot
-occur as the first position in the string. Some examples:
-.CS
-\-dash .     \(-> \-dash {2 4}
-\-dash -     \(-> \-dash {6 4}
-\-dash -.    \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4}
-\-dash -..   \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4 2 4}
-\-dash {. }  \(-> \-dash {2 8}
-\-dash ,     \(-> \-dash {4 4}
-.CE
-.PP
-The main difference of this syntax with the previous is that it
-is shape-conserving. This means that all values in the dash
-list will be multiplied by the line width before display. This
-assures that
-.QW .
-will always be displayed as a dot and
-.QW -
-always as a dash regardless of the line width.
-.PP
-On systems which support only a limited set of dash patterns, the dash
-pattern will be displayed as the closest dash pattern that is available.
-For example, on Windows only the first 4 of the above examples are
-available. The last 2 examples will be displayed identically to the first
-one.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR. This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.
-The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBaddtag \fItag searchSpec \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-For each item that meets the constraints specified by
-\fIsearchSpec\fR and the \fIarg\fRs, add
-\fItag\fR to the list of tags associated with the item if it
-is not already present on that list.
-It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints
-given by \fIsearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fRs, in which case the
-command has no effect.
-This command returns an empty string as result.
-\fISearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fR's may take any of the following
-forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBabove \fItagOrId\fR
-.
-Selects the item just after (above) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR
-in the display list.
-If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the last (topmost)
-of these items in the display list is used.
-.TP
-\fBall\fR
-.
-Selects all the items in the canvas.
-.TP
-\fBbelow \fItagOrId\fR
-.
-Selects the item just before (below) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR
-in the display list.
-If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the first (lowest)
-of these items in the display list is used.
-.TP
-\fBclosest \fIx y \fR?\fIhalo\fR? ?\fIstart\fR?
-.
-Selects the item closest to the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.
-If more than one item is at the same closest distance (e.g. two
-items overlap the point), then the top-most of these items (the
-last one in the display list) is used.
-If \fIhalo\fR is specified, then it must be a non-negative
-value.
-Any item closer than \fIhalo\fR to the point is considered to
-overlap it.
-The \fIstart\fR argument may be used to step circularly through
-all the closest items.
-If \fIstart\fR is specified, it names an item using a tag or id
-(if by tag, it selects the first item in the display list with
-the given tag).
-Instead of selecting the topmost closest item, this form will
-select the topmost closest item that is below \fIstart\fR in
-the display list; if no such item exists, then the selection
-behaves as if the \fIstart\fR argument had not been specified.
-.TP
-\fBenclosed\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR
-.
-Selects all the items completely enclosed within the rectangular
-region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR.
-\fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be
-no greater than \fIy2\fR.
-.TP
-\fBoverlapping\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR
-.
-Selects all the items that overlap or are enclosed within the
-rectangular region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR,
-and \fIy2\fR.
-\fIX1\fR must be no greater than \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be
-no greater than \fIy2\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwithtag \fItagOrId\fR
-.
-Selects all the items given by \fItagOrId\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBbbox \fItagOrId\fR ?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR?
-.
-Returns a list with four elements giving an approximate bounding box
-for all the items named by the \fItagOrId\fR arguments.
-The list has the form
-.QW "\fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR"
-such that the drawn
-areas of all the named elements are within the region bounded by
-\fIx1\fR on the left, \fIx2\fR on the right, \fIy1\fR on the top,
-and \fIy2\fR on the bottom.
-The return value may overestimate the actual bounding box by
-a few pixels.
-If no items match any of the \fItagOrId\fR arguments or if the
-matching items have empty bounding boxes (i.e. they have nothing
-to display)
-then an empty string is returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBbind \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR?
-.
-This command associates \fIcommand\fR with all the items given by
-\fItagOrId\fR such that whenever the event sequence given by
-\fIsequence\fR occurs for one of the items the command will
-be invoked.
-This widget command is similar to the \fBbind\fR command except that
-it operates on items in a canvas rather than entire widgets.
-See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for complete details
-on the syntax of \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed
-on \fIcommand\fR before invoking it.
-If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing
-any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagOrId\fR
-(if the first character of \fIcommand\fR is
-.QW +
-then \fIcommand\fR augments an existing binding rather than replacing it).
-In this case the return value is an empty string.
-If \fIcommand\fR is omitted then the command returns the \fIcommand\fR
-associated with \fItagOrId\fR and \fIsequence\fR (an error occurs
-if there is no such binding).
-If both \fIcommand\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command
-returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been
-defined for \fItagOrId\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to
-the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
-\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR) or virtual events.
-The handling of events in canvases uses the current item defined in
-\fBITEM IDS AND TAGS\fR above. \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events
-trigger for an
-item when it becomes the current item or ceases to be the current item;
-note that these events are different than \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR
-events for windows. Mouse-related events are directed to the current
-item, if any. Keyboard-related events are directed to the focus item, if
-any (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command below for more on this). If a
-virtual event is used in a binding, that binding can trigger only if the
-virtual event is defined by an underlying mouse-related or
-keyboard-related event.
-.PP
-It is possible for multiple bindings to match a particular event.
-This could occur, for example, if one binding is associated with the
-item's id and another is associated with one of the item's tags.
-When this occurs, all of the matching bindings are invoked.
-A binding associated with the \fBall\fR tag is invoked first,
-followed by one binding for each of the item's tags (in order),
-followed by a binding associated with the item's id.
-If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag,
-then only the most specific binding is invoked.
-A \fBcontinue\fR command in a binding script terminates that
-script, and a \fBbreak\fR command terminates that script
-and skips any remaining scripts for the event, just as for the
-\fBbind\fR command.
-.PP
-If bindings have been created for a canvas window using the \fBbind\fR
-command, then they are invoked in addition to bindings created for
-the canvas's items using the \fBbind\fR widget command.
-The bindings for items will be invoked before any of the bindings
-for the window as a whole.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcanvasx \fIscreenx\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR?
-.
-Given a window x-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreenx\fR, this command returns
-the canvas x-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
-If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
-rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcanvasy \fIscreeny\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR?
-.
-Given a window y-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreeny\fR this command returns
-the canvas y-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
-If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
-rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIx0 y0 ...\fR?
-.TP
-\fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIcoordList\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the coordinates that define an item.
-If no coordinates are specified, this command returns a list
-whose elements are the coordinates of the item named by
-\fItagOrId\fR.
-If coordinates are specified, then they replace the current
-coordinates for the named item.
-If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then
-the first one in the display list is used.
-.RS
-.PP
-Note that for rectangles, ovals and arcs the returned list of coordinates
-has a fixed order, namely the left, top, right and bottom coordinates,
-which may not be the order originally given. Also the coordinates are always
-returned in screen units with no units (that is, in pixels). So if the
-original coordinates were specified for instance in centimeters or inches,
-the returned values will nevertheless be in pixels.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype x y \fR?\fIx y ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype coordList \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-Create a new item in \fIpathName\fR of type \fItype\fR.
-The exact format of the arguments after \fItype\fR depends
-on \fItype\fR, but usually they consist of the coordinates for
-one or more points, followed by specifications for zero or
-more item options.
-See the subsections on individual item types below for more
-on the syntax of this command.
-This command returns the id for the new item.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdchars \fItagOrId first \fR?\fIlast\fR?
-.
-For each item given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the characters, or coordinates,
-in the range given by \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive.
-If some of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support
-indexing operations then they ignore this operation.
-Text items interpret \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR as indices to a character,
-line and polygon items interpret them as indices to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
-Indices are described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
-If \fIlast\fR is omitted, it defaults to \fIfirst\fR.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelete \fR?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR?
-.
-Delete each of the items given by each \fItagOrId\fR, and return
-an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdtag \fItagOrId \fR?\fItagToDelete\fR?
-.
-For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the
-tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those
-associated with the item.
-If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then
-the item is unaffected by the command.
-If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBfind \fIsearchCommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-This command returns a list consisting of all the items that
-meet the constraints specified by \fIsearchCommand\fR and
-\fIarg\fR's.
-\fISearchCommand\fR and \fIargs\fR have any of the forms
-accepted by the \fBaddtag\fR command.
-The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBfocus \fR?\fItagOrId\fR?
-.
-Set the keyboard focus for the canvas widget to the item given by
-\fItagOrId\fR.
-If \fItagOrId\fR refers to several items, then the focus is set
-to the first such item in the display list that supports the
-insertion cursor.
-If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items, or if none of them
-support the insertion cursor, then the focus is not changed.
-If \fItagOrId\fR is an empty
-string, then the focus item is reset so that no item has the focus.
-If \fItagOrId\fR is not specified then the command returns the
-id for the item that currently has the focus, or an empty string
-if no item has the focus.
-.RS
-.PP
-Once the focus has been set to an item, the item will display
-the insertion cursor and all keyboard events will be directed
-to that item.
-The focus item within a canvas and the focus window on the
-screen (set with the \fBfocus\fR command) are totally independent:
-a given item does not actually have the input focus unless (a)
-its canvas is the focus window and (b) the item is the focus item
-within the canvas.
-In most cases it is advisable to follow the \fBfocus\fR widget
-command with the \fBfocus\fR command to set the focus window to
-the canvas (if it was not there already).
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBgettags\fR \fItagOrId\fR
-.
-Return a list whose elements are the tags associated with the
-item given by \fItagOrId\fR.
-If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the tags
-are returned from the first such item in the display list.
-If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items, or if the item
-contains no tags, then an empty string is returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBicursor \fItagOrId index\fR
-.
-Set the position of the insertion cursor for the item(s) given by \fItagOrId\fR
-to just before the character whose position is given by \fIindex\fR.
-If some or all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support
-an insertion cursor then this command has no effect on them.
-See \fBINDICES\fR above for a description of the
-legal forms for \fIindex\fR.
-Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if
-that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget
-command, above), but the cursor position may
-be set even when the item does not have the focus.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR
-.VS 8.6
-This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items
-indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR).
-Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules
-described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line
-and polygon items may have their coordinates relocated this way.
-.VE 8.6
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR
-.
-This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index
-within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
-\fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position
-as described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
-Text items interpret \fIindex\fR as an index to a character,
-line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
-The return value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number
-of characters, or coordinates, within the item, inclusive.
-If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the index
-is processed in the first of these items that supports indexing
-operations (in display list order).
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinsert \fItagOrId beforeThis string\fR
-.
-For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, if the item supports
-text or coordinate, insertion then \fIstring\fR is inserted into the item's
-text just before the character, or coordinate, whose index is \fIbeforeThis\fR.
-Text items interpret \fIbeforeThis\fR as an index to a character,
-line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
-For lines and polygons the \fIstring\fR must be a valid coordinate
-sequence.
-See \fBINDICES\fR above for information about the forms allowed
-for \fIbeforeThis\fR.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBitemcget\fR \fItagOrId\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option for the
-item given by \fItagOrId\fR whose name is \fIoption\fR.
-This command is similar to the \fBcget\fR widget command except that
-it applies to a particular item rather than the widget as a whole.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcreate\fR
-widget command when the item was created.
-If \fItagOrId\fR is a tag that refers to more than one item,
-the first (lowest) such item is used.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR widget command except
-that it modifies item-specific options for the items given by
-\fItagOrId\fR instead of modifying options for the overall
-canvas widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for the first item given by \fItagOrId\fR
-(see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s) in
-each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR; in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-The \fIoption\fRs and \fIvalue\fRs are the same as those permissible
-in the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item(s) were created;
-see the sections describing individual item types below for details
-on the legal options.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBlower \fItagOrId \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR?
-.
-Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position
-in the display list just before the item given by \fIbelowThis\fR.
-If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved
-but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
-\fIBelowThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one
-item then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used
-as the destination location for the moved items.
-Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always
-obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
-determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the
-\fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmove \fItagOrId xAmount yAmount\fR
-.
-Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
-space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point
-associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of
-each point associated with the item.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR
-.VS 8.6
-Move the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate
-space so that the first coordinate pair of the bottommost item with
-tag \fItagOrId\fR is located at
-position (\fIxPos\fR,\fIyPos\fR). \fIxPos\fR and \fIyPos\fR may be
-the empty string, in which case the corresponding coordinate
-will be unchanged. All items matching
-\fItagOrId\fR remain in the same positions relative to each other.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.VE 8.6
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
-.
-Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas.
-If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written
-to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript
-is returned as the result of the command.
-If the interpreter that owns the canvas is marked as safe, the operation
-will fail because safe interpreters are not allowed to write files.
-If the \fB\-channel\fR option is specified, the argument denotes the name
-of a channel already opened for writing. The Postscript is written to
-that channel, and the channel is left open for further writing at the end
-of the operation.
-The Postscript is created in Encapsulated Postscript form using
-version 3.0 of the Document Structuring Conventions.
-Note: by default Postscript is only generated for information that
-appears in the canvas's window on the screen. If the canvas is
-freshly created it may still have its initial size of 1x1 pixel
-so nothing will appear in the Postscript. To get around this problem
-either invoke the \fBupdate\fR command to wait for the canvas window
-to reach its final size, or else use the \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR
-options to specify the area of the canvas to print.
-The \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR argument pairs provide additional
-information to control the generation of Postscript. The following
-options are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-channel \fIchannelName\fR
-.
-Specifies the name of the channel to which to write the Postscript.
-If this option and the \fB\-file\fR option are
-not specified then the Postscript is returned as the
-result of the command.
-.TP
-\fB\-colormap \fIvarName\fR
-.
-\fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable
-that specifies a color mapping to use in the Postscript.
-Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of Postscript
-code to set a particular color value (e.g.
-.QW "\fB1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor\fR" ).
-When outputting color information in the Postscript, Tk checks
-to see if there is an element of \fIvarName\fR with the same
-name as the color.
-If so, Tk uses the value of the element as the Postscript command
-to set the color.
-If this option has not been specified, or if there is no entry
-in \fIvarName\fR for a given color, then Tk uses the red, green,
-and blue intensities from the X color.
-.TP
-\fB\-colormode \fImode\fR
-.
-Specifies how to output color information. \fIMode\fR must be either
-\fBcolor\fR (for full color output), \fBgray\fR (convert all colors
-to their gray-scale equivalents) or \fBmono\fR (convert all colors
-to black or white).
-.TP
-\fB\-file \fIfileName\fR
-.
-Specifies the name of the file in which to write the Postscript.
-If this option and the \fB\-channel\fR option are
-not specified then the Postscript is returned as the
-result of the command.
-.TP
-\fB\-fontmap \fIvarName\fR
-.
-\fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable
-that specifies a font mapping to use in the Postscript.
-Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of a Tcl list with
-two elements, which are the name and point size of a Postscript font.
-When outputting Postscript commands for a particular font, Tk
-checks to see if \fIvarName\fR contains an element with the same
-name as the font.
-If there is such an element, then the font information contained in
-that element is used in the Postscript.
-Otherwise Tk attempts to guess what Postscript font to use.
-Tk's guesses generally only work for well-known fonts such as
-Times and Helvetica and Courier, and only if the X font name does not
-omit any dashes up through the point size.
-For example, \fB\-*\-Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal\-\-*\-120\-*\fR will work but
-\fB*Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal*120*\fR will not; Tk needs the dashes to
-parse the font name).
-.TP
-\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
-.
-Specifies the height of the area of the canvas to print.
-Defaults to the height of the canvas window.
-.TP
-\fB\-pageanchor \fIanchor\fR
-.
-Specifies which point of the printed area of the canvas should appear over
-the positioning point on the page (which is given by the \fB\-pagex\fR
-and \fB\-pagey\fR options).
-For example, \fB\-pageanchor n\fR means that the top center of the
-area of the canvas being printed (as it appears in the canvas window)
-should be over the positioning point. Defaults to \fBcenter\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-pageheight \fIsize\fR
-.
-Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
-that the printed area is \fIsize\fR high on the Postscript page.
-\fISize\fR consists of a floating-point number followed by
-\fBc\fR for centimeters, \fBi\fR for inches, \fBm\fR for millimeters,
-or \fBp\fR or nothing for printer's points (1/72 inch).
-Defaults to the height of the printed area on the screen.
-If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then
-the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling
-is not implemented).
-.TP
-\fB\-pagewidth \fIsize\fR
-.
-Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
-that the printed area is \fIsize\fR wide on the Postscript page.
-\fISize\fR has the same form as for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
-Defaults to the width of the printed area on the screen.
-If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then
-the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling
-is not implemented).
-.TP
-\fB\-pagex \fIposition\fR
-.
-\fIPosition\fR gives the x-coordinate of the positioning point on
-the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
-Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagey\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options
-to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
-Defaults to the center of the page.
-.TP
-\fB\-pagey \fIposition\fR
-.
-\fIPosition\fR gives the y-coordinate of the positioning point on
-the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR.
-Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagex\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options
-to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
-Defaults to the center of the page.
-.TP
-\fB\-rotate \fIboolean\fR
-.
-\fIBoolean\fR specifies whether the printed area is to be rotated 90
-degrees.
-In non-rotated output the x-axis of the printed area runs along
-the short dimension of the page
-.PQ portrait " orientation" ;
-in rotated output the x-axis runs along the long dimension of the page
-.PQ landscape " orientation" .
-Defaults to non-rotated.
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
-.
-Specifies the width of the area of the canvas to print.
-Defaults to the width of the canvas window.
-.TP
-\fB\-x \fIposition\fR
-.
-Specifies the x-coordinate of the left edge of the area of the
-canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
-coordinates.
-Defaults to the coordinate of the left edge of the window.
-.TP
-\fB\-y \fIposition\fR
-.
-Specifies the y-coordinate of the top edge of the area of the
-canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
-coordinates.
-Defaults to the coordinate of the top edge of the window.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBraise \fItagOrId \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
-.
-Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position
-in the display list just after the item given by \fIaboveThis\fR.
-If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved
-but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
-\fIAboveThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one
-item then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used
-as the destination location for the moved items.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.RS
-.PP
-Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always
-obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
-determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the
-\fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR
-.VS 8.6
-This command causes the text or coordinates between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
-for each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be replaced by
-\fIstring\fR. Each item interprets \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR independently
-according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard
-set of items, text items support this operation by altering their text as
-directed, and line and polygon items support this operation by altering their
-coordinate list (in which case \fIstring\fR should be a list of coordinates to
-use as a replacement). The other items ignore this operation.
-.VE 8.6
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR
-.
-Rescale the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas
-coordinate space.
-\fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling
-operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale
-factors for x- and y-coordinates, respectively (a scale factor of
-1.0 implies no change to that coordinate).
-For each of the points defining each item, the x-coordinate is
-adjusted to change the distance from \fIxOrigin\fR by a factor
-of \fIxScale\fR.
-Similarly, each y-coordinate is adjusted to change the distance
-from \fIyOrigin\fR by a factor of \fIyScale\fR.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.RS
-.PP
-Note that some items have only a single pair of coordinates (e.g., text,
-images and windows) and so scaling of them by this command can only move them
-around.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR
-.
-This command is used to implement scanning on canvases. It has
-two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR
-.
-Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR and the canvas's current view; used
-in conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.
-Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in
-the widget and \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are the coordinates of the
-mouse. It returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx y ?gain?\fR
-.
-This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR
-arguments (which are typically mouse coordinates) and the \fIx\fR and
-\fIy\fR arguments to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget.
-It then adjusts the view by \fIgain\fR times the
-difference in coordinates, where \fIgain\fR defaults to 10.
-This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the canvas at high speed through its window. The return
-value is an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect \fIoption\fR ?\fItagOrId arg\fR?
-.
-Manipulates the selection in one of several ways, depending on
-\fIoption\fR.
-The command may take any of the forms described below.
-In all of the descriptions below, \fItagOrId\fR must refer to
-an item that supports indexing and selection; if it refers to
-multiple items then the first of
-these that supports indexing and the selection is used.
-\fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of a position
-within \fItagOrId\fR, as described in \fBINDICES\fR above.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect adjust \fItagOrId index\fR
-.
-Locate the end of the selection in \fItagOrId\fR nearest
-to the character given by \fIindex\fR, and adjust that
-end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR (i.e. including
-but not going beyond \fIindex\fR).
-The other end of the selection is made the anchor point
-for future \fBselect to\fR commands.
-If the selection is not currently in \fItagOrId\fR then
-this command behaves the same as the \fBselect to\fR widget
-command.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect clear\fR
-.
-Clear the selection if it is in this widget.
-If the selection is not in this widget then the command
-has no effect.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect from \fItagOrId index\fR
-.
-Set the selection anchor point for the widget to be just
-before the character
-given by \fIindex\fR in the item given by \fItagOrId\fR.
-This command does not change the selection; it just sets
-the fixed end of the selection for future \fBselect to\fR
-commands.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect item\fR
-.
-Returns the id of the selected item, if the selection is in an
-item in this canvas.
-If the selection is not in this canvas then an empty string
-is returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect to \fItagOrId index\fR
-.
-Set the selection to consist of those characters of \fItagOrId\fR
-between the selection anchor point and
-\fIindex\fR.
-The new selection will include the character given by \fIindex\fR;
-it will include the character given by the anchor point only if
-\fIindex\fR is greater than or equal to the anchor point.
-The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect adjust\fR
-or \fBselect from\fR command for this widget.
-If the selection anchor point for the widget is not currently in
-\fItagOrId\fR, then it is set to the same character given
-by \fIindex\fR.
-Returns an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtype\fI tagOrId\fR
-.
-Returns the type of the item given by \fItagOrId\fR, such as
-\fBrectangle\fR or \fBtext\fR.
-If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the type
-of the first item in the display list is returned.
-If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items at all then
-an empty string is returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
-.
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-information displayed in the canvas's window.
-It can take any of the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
-.
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the canvas's area (as defined by the \fB\-scrollregion\fR option)
-is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the canvas is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the
-total width of the canvas is off-screen to the left.
-\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-.
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
-\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units
-of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
-or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise.
-If \fIwhat is \fBpages\fR then the view
-adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's width.
-If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left
-becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right
-becomes visible.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview \fI?args\fR?
-.
-This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
-information displayed in the canvas's window.
-It can take any of the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview\fR
-.
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
-the vertical span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .6 and the second element is 1.0,
-the lowest 40% of the canvas's area (as defined by the \fB\-scrollregion\fR
-option) is visible in the window.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the canvas's
-area is off-screen to the top.
-\fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-.
-This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
-\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down in units
-of the \fByScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero,
-or in units of one-tenth the window's height otherwise.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then
-the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's height.
-If \fInumber\fR is negative then higher information becomes
-visible; if it is positive then lower information
-becomes visible.
-.RE
-.SH "OVERVIEW OF ITEM TYPES"
-.PP
-The sections below describe the various types of items supported
-by canvas widgets. Each item type is characterized by two things:
-first, the form of the \fBcreate\fR command used to create
-instances of the type; and second, a set of configuration options
-for items of that type, which may be used in the
-\fBcreate\fR and \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands.
-Most items do not support indexing or selection or the commands
-related to them, such as \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR.
-Where items do support these facilities, it is noted explicitly
-in the descriptions below.
-At present, text, line and polygon items provide this support.
-For lines and polygons the indexing facility is used to manipulate
-the coordinates of the item.
-.SS "COMMON ITEM OPTIONS"
-.PP
-Many items share a common set of options. These options are
-explained here, and then referred to be each widget type for brevity.
-.TP
-\fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR
-.
-\fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the item relative to the
-positioning point for the item; it may have any of the forms
-accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR
-is \fBcenter\fR then the item is centered on the point; if
-\fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the item will be drawn so that
-its top center point is at the positioning point.
-This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-dash \fIpattern\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activedash \fIpattern\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disableddash \fIpattern\fR
-.
-This option specifies dash patterns for the normal, active
-state, and disabled state of an item.
-\fIpattern\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetDash\fR.
-If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
-See \fBDASH PATTERNS\fR for more information.
-.TP
-\fB\-dashoffset \fIoffset\fR
-.
-The starting \fIoffset\fR in pixels into the pattern provided by the
-\fB\-dash\fR option. \fB\-dashoffset\fR is ignored if there is no
-\fB\-dash\fR pattern. The \fIoffset\fR may have any of the forms described
-in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
-.TP
-\fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR
-.
-Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area.
-in its normal, active, and disabled states,
-\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-If \fIcolor\fR is an empty string (the default),
-then the item will not be filled.
-For the line item, it specifies the color of the line drawn.
-For the text item, it specifies the foreground color of the text.
-.TP
-\fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activeoutline \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledoutline \fIcolor\fR
-.
-This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the
-outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
-\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-This option defaults to \fBblack\fR. If \fIcolor\fR is specified
-as an empty string then no outline is drawn for the item.
-.TP
-\fB\-offset \fIoffset\fR
-.
-Specifies the offset of stipples. The offset value can be of the form
-\fBx,y\fR or \fIside\fR, where side can be \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR,
-\fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. In the
-first case the origin is the origin of the toplevel of the current window.
-For the canvas itself and canvas objects the origin is the canvas origin,
-but putting \fB#\fR in front of the coordinate pair indicates using the
-toplevel origin instead. For canvas objects, the \fB\-offset\fR option is
-used for stippling as well. For the line and polygon canvas items you can
-also specify an index as argument, which connects the stipple origin to one
-of the coordinate points of the line/polygon. Note that stipple offsets are
-\fIonly supported on X11\fR; they are silently ignored on other platforms.
-.TP
-\fB\-outlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activeoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
-outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
-Indicates that the outline for the item should be drawn with a stipple pattern;
-\fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-If the \fB\-outline\fR option has not been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
-in a solid fashion.
-\fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not
-use X11 as their drawing API.\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-outlineoffset \fIoffset\fR
-.
-Specifies the offset of the stipple pattern used for outlines, in the same way
-that the \fB\-outline\fR option controls fill stipples. (See the
-\fB\-outline\fR option for a description of the syntax of \fIoffset\fR.)
-.TP
-\fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activestipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledstipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill
-the item in its normal, active and disabled states.
-\fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-If the \fB\-fill\fR option has not been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then filling is done
-in a solid fashion.
-For the text item, it affects the actual text.
-\fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not
-use X11 as their drawing API.\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-state \fIstate\fR
-.
-This allows an item to override the canvas widget's global \fIstate\fR
-option. It takes the same values:
-\fInormal\fR, \fIdisabled\fR or \fIhidden\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-tags \fItagList\fR
-.
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-\fITagList\fR consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item. \fITagList\fR may be an empty list.
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIoutlineWidth\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activewidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledwidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR
-.
-Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-the item's region, in its normal, active and disabled states.
-\fIoutlineWidth\fR may be in any of the forms described in the
-\fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
-If the \fB\-outline\fR option has been specified as an empty string then
-this option has no effect. This option defaults to 1.0.
-For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the
-arc's region.
-.SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES"
-.SS "ARC ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions.
-An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified
-by the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options) and displayed in
-one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option).
-Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give
-the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a
-rectangular region enclosing the oval that defines the arc.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. An arc item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is
-over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be
-painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by arcs:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-dash\fR	\fB\-activedash\fR
-\fB\-disableddash\fR	\fB\-dashoffset\fR
-\fB\-fill\fR	\fB\-activefill\fR
-\fB\-disabledfill\fR	\fB\-offset\fR
-\fB\-outline\fR	\fB\-activeoutline\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutline\fR	\fB\-outlineoffset\fR
-\fB\-outlinestipple\fR	\fB\-activeoutlinestipple\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
-\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
-\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
-\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
-\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
-.DE
-The following extra options are supported for arcs:
-.TP
-\fB\-extent \fIdegrees\fR
-Specifies the size of the angular range occupied by the arc.
-The arc's range extends for \fIdegrees\fR degrees counter-clockwise
-from the starting angle given by the \fB\-start\fR option.
-\fIDegrees\fR may be negative.
-If it is greater than 360 or less than \-360, then \fIdegrees\fR
-modulo 360 is used as the extent.
-.TP
-\fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR
-Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the
-arc.
-\fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise
-from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative.
-.TP
-\fB\-style \fItype\fR
-Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR
-(the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section
-of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center
-of the oval and each end of the perimeter section.
-If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined
-by a section of the oval's perimeter plus a single line segment
-connecting the two end points of the perimeter section.
-If \fItype\fR is \fBarc\fR then the arc's region consists of
-a section of the perimeter alone.
-In this last case the \fB\-fill\fR option is ignored.
-.SS "BITMAP ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBbitmap\fR appear on the display as images with
-two colors, foreground and background.
-Bitmaps are created with widget commands of the following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate bitmap \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate bitmap \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR (which must have two
-elements) specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the bitmap on the display, as controlled by the
-\fB\-anchor\fR option.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. A bitmap item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer
-is over any part of its bounding box.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by bitmaps:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
-\fB\-tags\fR
-.DE
-The following extra options are supported for bitmaps:
-.TP
-\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activebackground \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledbackground \fIcolor\fR
-Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's
-.QW 0
-valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states.
-\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as an empty
-string, then nothing is displayed where the bitmap pixels are 0; this
-produces a transparent effect.
-.TP
-\fB\-bitmap \fIbitmap\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activebitmap \fIbitmap\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledbitmap \fIbitmap\fR
-Specifies the bitmaps to display in the item in its normal, active and
-disabled states.
-\fIBitmap\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activeforeground \fIcolor\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledforeground \fIcolor\fR
-Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's
-.QW 1
-valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states.
-\fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR and
-defaults to \fBblack\fR.
-.SS "IMAGE ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBimage\fR are used to display images on a
-canvas.
-Images are created with widget commands of the following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate image \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate image \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the image on the display, as controlled by the
-\fB\-anchor\fR option.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. An image item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer
-is over any part of its bounding box.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by images:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
-\fB\-tags\fR
-.DE
-The following extra options are supported for images:
-.TP
-\fB\-image \fIname\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-activeimage \fIname\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-disabledimage \fIname\fR
-Specifies the name of the images to display in the item in is normal,
-active and disabled states.
-This image must have been created previously with the
-\fBimage create\fR command.
-.SS "LINE ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBline\fR appear on the display as one or more connected
-line segments or curves.
-Line items support coordinate indexing operations using the \fBdchars\fR,
-\fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR widget commands.
-Lines are created with widget commands of the following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate line \fIx1 y1... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate line \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx1\fR through \fIyn\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give
-the coordinates for a series of two or more points that describe
-a series of connected line segments.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. A line item is the current item whenever the mouse pointer is
-over any segment of the line, whether drawn or not and whether or not the line
-is smoothed.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by lines:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-dash\fR	\fB\-activedash\fR
-\fB\-disableddash\fR	\fB\-dashoffset\fR
-\fB\-fill\fR	\fB\-activefill\fR
-\fB\-disabledfill\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
-\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
-\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
-\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
-\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
-.DE
-The following extra options are supported for lines:
-.TP
-\fB\-arrow \fIwhere\fR
-Indicates whether or not arrowheads are to be drawn at one or both
-ends of the line.
-\fIWhere\fR must have one of the values \fBnone\fR (for no arrowheads),
-\fBfirst\fR (for an arrowhead at the first point of the line),
-\fBlast\fR (for an arrowhead at the last point of the line), or
-\fBboth\fR (for arrowheads at both ends).
-This option defaults to \fBnone\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-arrowshape \fIshape\fR
-This option indicates how to draw arrowheads.
-The \fIshape\fR argument must be a list with three elements, each
-specifying a distance in any of the forms described in
-the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
-The first element of the list gives the distance along the line
-from the neck of the arrowhead to its tip.
-The second element gives the distance along the line from the
-trailing points of the arrowhead to the tip, and the third
-element gives the distance from the outside edge of the line to the
-trailing points.
-If this option is not specified then Tk picks a
-.QW reasonable
-shape.
-.TP
-\fB\-capstyle \fIstyle\fR
-Specifies the ways in which caps are to be drawn at the endpoints
-of the line.
-\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR
-(\fBbutt\fR, \fBprojecting\fR, or \fBround\fR).
-If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBbutt\fR.
-Where arrowheads are drawn the cap style is ignored.
-.TP
-\fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR
-Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
-of the line.
-\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR
-(\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR).
-If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR.
-If the line only contains two points then this option is
-irrelevant.
-.TP
-\fB\-smooth \fIsmoothMethod\fR
-\fIsmoothMethod\fR must have one of the forms accepted by
-\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR or a line smoothing method.
-Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are
-supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean
-false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean
-truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing.
-If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the line
-should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline
-is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second
-and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within
-a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
-If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the line
-should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is
-such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair
-thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other
-coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight
-line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points
-equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is a
-control point and not a knot point, the point is repeated (one or two
-times) so that it also becomes a knot point.
-.TP
-\fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR
-Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline
-will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This
-option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR.
-.SS "OVAL ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBoval\fR appear as circular or oval regions on
-the display. Each oval may have an outline, a fill, or
-both. Ovals are created with widget commands of the
-following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate oval \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate oval \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give
-the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a
-rectangular region enclosing the oval.
-The oval will include the top and left edges of the rectangle
-not the lower or right edges.
-If the region is square then the resulting oval is circular;
-otherwise it is elongated in shape.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. An oval item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is
-over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be
-painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by ovals:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-dash\fR	\fB\-activedash\fR
-\fB\-disableddash\fR	\fB\-dashoffset\fR
-\fB\-fill\fR	\fB\-activefill\fR
-\fB\-disabledfill\fR	\fB\-offset\fR
-\fB\-outline\fR	\fB\-activeoutline\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutline\fR	\fB\-outlineoffset\fR
-\fB\-outlinestipple\fR	\fB\-activeoutlinestipple\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
-\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
-\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
-\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
-\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
-.DE
-There are no oval-specific options.
-.SS "POLYGON ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBpolygon\fR appear as polygonal or curved filled regions
-on the display.
-Polygon items support coordinate indexing operations using the \fBdchars\fR,
-\fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR widget commands.
-Polygons are created with widget commands of the following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIx1 y1 ... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx1\fR through \fIyn\fR or \fIcoordList\fR specify the coordinates for
-three or more points that define a polygon.
-The first point should not be repeated as the last to
-close the shape; Tk will automatically close the periphery between
-the first and last points.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. A polygon item is the current item whenever the mouse pointer
-is over any part of the polygon, whether drawn or not and whether or not the
-outline is smoothed.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by polygons:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-dash\fR	\fB\-activedash\fR
-\fB\-disableddash\fR	\fB\-dashoffset\fR
-\fB\-fill\fR	\fB\-activefill\fR
-\fB\-disabledfill\fR	\fB\-offset\fR
-\fB\-outline\fR	\fB\-activeoutline\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutline\fR	\fB\-outlineoffset\fR
-\fB\-outlinestipple\fR	\fB\-activeoutlinestipple\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
-\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
-\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
-\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
-\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
-.DE
-The following extra options are supported for polygons:
-.TP
-\fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR
-Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
-of the outline.
-\fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR
-(\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR).
-If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-smooth \fIboolean\fR
-\fIBoolean\fR must have one of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR
-or a line smoothing method. Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are
-supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean
-false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean
-truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing.
-If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the polygon
-should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline
-is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second
-and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within
-a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
-If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon
-should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is
-such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair
-thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other
-coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight
-line segments can be venerated within a curve by making control points
-equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is not the
-second point of a pair of control points, the point is repeated (one or two
-times) so that it also becomes the second point of a pair of control
-points (the associated knot point will be the first control point).
-.TP
-\fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR
-Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline
-will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This
-option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR.
-.PP
-Polygon items are different from other items such as rectangles, ovals
-and arcs in that interior points are considered to be
-.QW inside
-a polygon (e.g. for purposes of the \fBfind closest\fR and
-\fBfind overlapping\fR widget commands) even if it is not filled.
-For most other item types, an
-interior point is considered to be inside the item only if the item
-is filled or if it has neither a fill nor an outline. If you would
-like an unfilled polygon whose interior points are not considered
-to be inside the polygon, use a line item instead.
-.SS "RECTANGLE ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBrectangle\fR appear as rectangular regions on
-the display. Each rectangle may have an outline, a fill, or
-both. Rectangles are created with widget commands of the
-following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate rectangle \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate rectangle \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR
-(which must have four elements) give
-the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of the rectangle
-(the rectangle will include its upper and left edges but not
-its lower or right edges).
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. A rectangle item becomes the current item when the mouse
-pointer is over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that
-would be painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were
-non-empty.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by rectangles:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-dash\fR	\fB\-activedash\fR
-\fB\-disableddash\fR	\fB\-dashoffset\fR
-\fB\-fill\fR	\fB\-activefill\fR
-\fB\-disabledfill\fR	\fB\-offset\fR
-\fB\-outline\fR	\fB\-activeoutline\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutline\fR	\fB\-outlineoffset\fR
-\fB\-outlinestipple\fR	\fB\-activeoutlinestipple\fR
-\fB\-disabledoutlinestipple\fR	\fB\-stipple\fR
-\fB\-activestipple\fR	\fB\-disabledstipple\fR
-\fB\-state\fR	\fB\-tags\fR
-\fB\-width\fR	\fB\-activewidth\fR
-\fB\-disabledwidth\fR
-.DE
-There are no rectangle-specific options.
-.SS "TEXT ITEMS"
-.PP
-A text item displays a string of characters on the screen in one
-or more lines.
-Text items support indexing, editing and selection through the \fBdchars\fR
-widget command, the \fBfocus\fR widget command, the \fBicursor\fR widget
-command, the \fBindex\fR widget command, the \fBinsert\fR widget command, and
-the \fBselect\fR widget command.
-Text items are created with widget commands of the following
-form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate text \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate text \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR (which must have two
-elements) specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the text on the display (see the options
-below for more information on how text is displayed).
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. A text item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer
-is over any part of its bounding box.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by text items:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-fill\fR
-\fB\-activefill\fR	\fB\-disabledfill\fR
-\fB\-stipple\fR	\fB\-activestipple\fR
-\fB\-disabledstipple\fR	\fB\-state\fR
-\fB\-tags\fR
-.DE
-The following extra options are supported for text items:
-.TP
-\fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR
-.VS 8.6
-\fIRotationDegrees\fR tells how many degrees to rotate the text anticlockwise
-about the positioning point for the text; it may have any floating-point value
-from 0.0 to 360.0. For example, if \fIrotationDegrees\fR is \fB90\fR, then the
-text will be drawn vertically from bottom to top.
-This option defaults to \fB0.0\fR.
-.VE 8.6
-.TP
-\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
-Specifies the font to use for the text item.
-\fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
-If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent
-font.
-.TP
-\fB\-justify \fIhow\fR
-Specifies how to justify the text within its bounding region.
-\fIHow\fR must be one of the values \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR,
-or \fBcenter\fR.
-This option will only matter if the text is displayed as multiple
-lines.
-If the option is omitted, it defaults to \fBleft\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-text \fIstring\fR
-\fIString\fR specifies the characters to be displayed in the text item.
-Newline characters cause line breaks.
-The characters in the item may also be changed with the
-\fBinsert\fR and \fBdelete\fR widget commands.
-This option defaults to an empty string.
-.TP
-\fB\-underline \fI\fR
-Specifies the integer index of a character within the text to be
-underlined. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text
-displayed, 1 to the next character, and so on. \-1 means that no
-underline should be drawn (if the whole text item is to be underlined,
-the appropriate font should be used instead).
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIlineLength\fR
-Specifies a maximum line length for the text, in any of the forms
-described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
-If this option is zero (the default) the text is broken into
-lines only at newline characters.
-However, if this option is non-zero then any line that would
-be longer than \fIlineLength\fR is broken just before a space
-character to make the line shorter than \fIlineLength\fR; the
-space character is treated as if it were a newline
-character.
-.SS "WINDOW ITEMS"
-.PP
-Items of type \fBwindow\fR cause a particular window to be displayed
-at a given position on the canvas.
-Window items are created with widget commands of the following form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName \fBcreate window \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fIpathName \fBcreate window \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.CE
-The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR (which must have two
-elements) specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the window on the display, as controlled by the
-\fB\-anchor\fR option.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be
-used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's
-configuration. Theoretically, a window item becomes the current item when the
-mouse pointer is over any part of its bounding box, but in practice this
-typically does not happen because the mouse pointer ceases to be over the
-canvas at that point.
-.PP
-The following standard options are supported by window items:
-.DS
-.ta 3i
-\fB\-anchor\fR	\fB\-state\fR
-\fB\-tags\fR
-.DE
-The following extra options are supported for window items:
-.TP
-\fB\-height \fIpixels\fR
-.
-Specifies the height to assign to the item's window.
-\fIPixels\fR may have any of the
-forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
-If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero,
-then the window is given whatever height it requests internally.
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIpixels\fR
-.
-Specifies the width to assign to the item's window.
-\fIPixels\fR may have any of the
-forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above.
-If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero,
-then the window is given whatever width it requests internally.
-.TP
-\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
-.
-Specifies the window to associate with this item.
-The window specified by \fIpathName\fR must either be a child of
-the canvas widget or a child of some ancestor of the canvas widget.
-\fIPathName\fR may not refer to a top-level window.
-.PP
-Note: due to restrictions in the ways that windows are managed, it is not
-possible to draw other graphical items (such as lines and images) on top
-of window items. A window item always obscures any graphics that
-overlap it, regardless of their order in the display list. Also note that
-window items, unlike other canvas items, are not clipped for display by their
-containing canvas's border, and are instead clipped by the parent widget of
-the window specified by the \fB\-window\fR option; when the parent widget is
-the canvas, this means that the window item can overlap the canvas's border.
-.SH "APPLICATION-DEFINED ITEM TYPES"
-.PP
-It is possible for individual applications to define new item
-types for canvas widgets using C code.
-See the documentation for \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-In the current implementation, new canvases are not given any
-default behavior: you will have to execute explicit Tcl commands
-to give the canvas its behavior.
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-Tk's canvas widget is a blatant ripoff of ideas from Joel Bartlett's
-\fIezd\fR program. \fIEzd\fR provides structured graphics in a Scheme
-environment and preceded canvases by a year or two. Its simple
-mechanisms for placing and animating graphical objects inspired the
-functions of canvases.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n), font(n), image(n), scrollbar(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-canvas, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" fill-column: 78
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/checkbutton.n b/tk8.6/doc/checkbutton.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bfefca4..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/checkbutton.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,293 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH checkbutton n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-checkbutton \- Create and manipulate 'checkbutton' boolean selection widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBcheckbutton\fI pathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
-\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
-\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
-\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
-\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable
-\-compound	\-image	\-underline
-\-cursor	\-justify	\-wraplength
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button.  This command
-is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the button
-window.  The button's global variable (\fB\-variable\fR option) will
-be updated before the command is invoked.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies a desired height for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option is not specified, the button's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.OP \-indicatoron indicatorOn IndicatorOn
-Specifies whether or not the indicator should be drawn.  Must be a
-proper boolean value.  If false, the \fB\-relief\fR option is
-ignored and the widget's relief is always sunken if the widget is
-selected and raised otherwise.
-.OP \-offrelief offRelief OffRelief
-Specifies the relief for the checkbutton when the indicator is not drawn and
-the checkbutton is off.  The default value is
-.QW raised .
-By setting this option to
-.QW flat
-and setting \fB\-indicatoron\fR to false and \fB\-overrelief\fR to
-.QW raised ,
-the effect is achieved
-of having a flat button that raises on mouse-over and which is
-depressed when activated.  This is the behavior typically exhibited by
-the Bold, Italic, and Underline checkbuttons on the toolbar of a
-word-processor, for example.
-.OP \-offvalue offValue Value
-Specifies value to store in the button's associated variable whenever
-this button is deselected.  Defaults to
-.QW 0 .
-.OP \-onvalue onValue Value
-Specifies value to store in the button's associated variable whenever
-this button is selected.  Defaults to
-.QW 1 .
-.OP \-overrelief overRelief OverRelief
-Specifies an alternative relief for the checkbutton, to be used when the
-mouse cursor is over the widget.  This option can be used to make
-toolbar buttons, by configuring \fB\-relief flat \-overrelief
-raised\fR.  If the value of this option is the empty string, then no
-alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the checkbutton.
-The empty string is the default value.
-.OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background
-Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected.
-If \fBindicatorOn\fR is true then the color is used as the background for
-the indicator regardless of the select state.
-If \fBindicatorOn\fR is false, this color is used as the background
-for the entire widget, in place of \fBbackground\fR or \fBactiveBackground\fR,
-whenever the widget is selected.
-If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for
-displaying when the widget is selected.
-.OP \-selectimage selectImage SelectImage
-Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option)
-when the checkbutton is selected.
-This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been
-specified.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the checkbutton:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
-or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the checkbutton is displayed using the
-\fB\-foreground\fR and \fB\-background\fR options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the checkbutton.  In active state
-the checkbutton is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR and
-\fB\-activebackground\fR options.  Disabled state means that the checkbutton
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and
-\fB\-background\fR options determine how the checkbutton is displayed.
-.OP \-tristateimage tristateImage TristateImage
-Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option)
-when the checkbutton is in tri-state mode.
-This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been
-specified.
-.OP \-tristatevalue tristateValue Value
-Specifies the value that causes the checkbutton to display the multi-value
-selection, also known as the tri-state mode.  Defaults to
-.QW "" .
-.OP \-variable variable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable to set to indicate whether
-or not this button is selected.  Defaults to the name of the
-button within its parent (i.e. the last element of the button
-window's path name).
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies a desired width for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option is not specified, the button's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBcheckbutton\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a checkbutton widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the checkbutton such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The \fBcheckbutton\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A checkbutton is a widget
-that displays a textual string, bitmap or image
-and a square called an \fIindicator\fR.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the \fB\-wraplength\fR option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-\fB\-underline\fR option.
-A checkbutton has
-all of the behavior of a simple button, including the
-following: it can display itself in either of three different
-ways, according to the \fB\-state\fR option;
-it can be made to appear
-raised, sunken, or flat; it can be made to flash; and it invokes
-a Tcl command whenever mouse button 1 is clicked over the
-checkbutton.
-.PP
-In addition, checkbuttons can be \fIselected\fR.
-If a checkbutton is selected then the indicator is normally
-drawn with a selected appearance, and
-a Tcl variable associated with the checkbutton is set to a particular
-value (normally 1).
-The indicator is drawn with a check mark inside.
-If the checkbutton is not selected, then the indicator is drawn with a
-deselected appearance, and the associated variable is
-set to a different value (typically 0).
-The indicator is drawn without a check mark inside.  In the special case
-where the variable (if specified) has a value that matches the tristatevalue,
-the indicator is drawn with a tri-state appearance and is in the tri-state
-mode indicating mixed or multiple values.  (This is used when the check
-box represents the state of multiple items.)
-The indicator is drawn in a platform dependent manner.  Under Unix and
-Windows, the background interior of the box is
-.QW grayed .
-Under Mac, the indicator is drawn with a dash mark inside.
-By default, the name of the variable associated with a checkbutton is the
-same as the \fIname\fR used to create the checkbutton.
-The variable name, and the
-.QW on ,
-.QW off
-and
-.QW tristate
-values stored in it, may be modified with options on the command line
-or in the option database.
-Configuration options may also be used to modify the way the
-indicator is displayed (or whether it is displayed at all).
-By default a checkbutton is configured to select and deselect
-itself on alternate button clicks.
-In addition, each checkbutton monitors its associated variable and
-automatically selects and deselects itself when the variables value
-changes to and from the button's
-.QW on ,
-.QW off
-and
-.QW tristate
-values.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBcheckbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for checkbutton widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcheckbutton\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR
-Deselects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its
-.QW off
-value.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBflash\fR
-Flashes the checkbutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the checkbutton
-several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
-the end of the flash the checkbutton is left in the same normal/active
-state as when the command was invoked.
-This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
-Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the checkbutton
-with the mouse: toggle the selection state of the button and invoke
-the Tcl command associated with the checkbutton, if there is one.
-The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
-empty string if there is no command associated with the checkbutton.
-This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect\fR
-Selects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its
-.QW on
-value.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtoggle\fR
-Toggles the selection state of the button, redisplaying it and
-modifying its associated variable to reflect the new state.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for checkbuttons that give them
-the following default behavior:
-.IP [1]
-On Unix systems, a checkbutton activates whenever the mouse passes
-over it and deactivates whenever the mouse leaves the checkbutton.  On
-Mac and Windows systems, when mouse button 1 is pressed over a
-checkbutton, the button activates whenever the mouse pointer is inside
-the button, and deactivates whenever the mouse pointer leaves the
-button.
-.IP [2]
-When mouse button 1 is pressed over a checkbutton, it is invoked (its
-selection state toggles and the command associated with the button is
-invoked, if there is one).
-.IP [3]
-When a checkbutton has the input focus, the space key causes the checkbutton
-to be invoked.  Under Windows, there are additional key bindings; plus
-(\fB+\fR) and equal (\fB=\fR) select the button, and minus (\fB\-\fR)
-deselects the button.
-.PP
-If the checkbutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above
-actions occur:  the checkbutton is completely non-responsive.
-.PP
-The behavior of checkbuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-This example shows a group of uncoupled checkbuttons.
-.PP
-.CS
-labelframe .lbl \-text "Steps:"
-\fBcheckbutton\fR .c1 \-text Lights  \-variable lights
-\fBcheckbutton\fR .c2 \-text Cameras \-variable cameras
-\fBcheckbutton\fR .c3 \-text Action! \-variable action
-pack .c1 .c2 .c3 \-in .lbl
-pack .lbl
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-button(n), options(n), radiobutton(n), ttk::checkbutton(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-checkbutton, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/chooseColor.n b/tk8.6/doc/chooseColor.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 015b17d..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/chooseColor.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk_chooseColor n 4.2 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_chooseColor \- pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_chooseColor \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The procedure \fBtk_chooseColor\fR pops up a dialog box for the
-user to select a color. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
-possible as command line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\-initialcolor\fR \fIcolor\fR
-Specifies the color to display in the color dialog when it pops
-up. \fIcolor\fR must be in a form acceptable to the \fBTk_GetColor\fR
-function.
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
-Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the color dialog. The color
-dialog is displayed on top of its parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
-.LP
-If the user selects a color, \fBtk_chooseColor\fR will return the
-name of the color in a form acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  If the
-user cancels the operation, both commands will return the empty
-string.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-button .b \-bg [tk_chooseColor \-initialcolor gray \-title "Choose color"]
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-color, color selection, dialog
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/chooseDirectory.n b/tk8.6/doc/chooseDirectory.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8528ddb..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/chooseDirectory.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\"
-.TH tk_chooseDirectory n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_chooseDirectory \- pops up a dialog box for the user to select a directory.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_chooseDirectory \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The procedure \fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR pops up a dialog box for the
-user to select a directory. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
-possible as command line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\-initialdir\fR \fIdirname\fR
-Specifies that the directories in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
-when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
-the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
-on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
-On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
-user-selected directory for the application. If the
-parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
-relative path to an absolute path.
-.TP
-\fB\-mustexist\fR \fIboolean\fR
-Specifies whether the user may specify non-existent directories.  If
-this parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that
-already exist.  The default value is \fIfalse\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
-Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog
-is displayed on top of its parent window. On Mac OS X, this
-turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-set dir [\fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR \e
-        \-initialdir ~ \-title "Choose a directory"]
-if {$dir eq ""} {
-   label .l \-text "No directory selected"
-} else {
-   label .l \-text "Selected $dir"
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-tk_getOpenFile(n), tk_getSaveFile(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-directory, selection, dialog, platform-specific
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/clipboard.n b/tk8.6/doc/clipboard.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f047dd..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/clipboard.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH clipboard n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-clipboard \- Manipulate Tk clipboard
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBclipboard \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command provides a Tcl interface to the Tk clipboard,
-which stores data for later retrieval using the selection mechanism
-(via the \fB\-selection CLIPBOARD\fR option).
-In order to copy data into the clipboard, \fBclipboard clear\fR must
-be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to \fBclipboard
-append\fR.  To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all
-appends should be completed before returning to the event loop.
-.PP
-The first argument to \fBclipboard\fR determines the format of the
-rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command.  The following
-forms are currently supported:
-.TP
-\fBclipboard append\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIdata\fR
-.
-Appends \fIdata\fR to the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
-display in the form given by \fItype\fR with the representation given
-by \fIformat\fR and claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
-display.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
-(the desired
-.QW target
-for conversion, in ICCCM terminology), and
-should be an atom name such as \fBSTRING\fR or \fBFILE_NAME\fR; see the
-Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-\fIType\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument specifies the representation that should be
-used to transmit the selection to the requester (the second column of
-Table 2 of the ICCCM), and defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  If \fIformat\fR is
-\fBSTRING\fR, the selection is transmitted as 8-bit ASCII characters.  If
-\fIformat\fR is \fBATOM\fR, then the \fIdata\fR is
-divided into fields separated by white space; each field is converted
-to its atom value, and the 32-bit atom value is transmitted instead of
-the atom name.  For any other \fIformat\fR,  \fIdata\fR is divided
-into fields separated by white space and each
-field is converted to a 32-bit integer; an array of integers is
-transmitted to the selection requester.  Note that strings passed to
-\fBclipboard append\fR are concatenated before conversion, so the
-caller must take care to ensure appropriate spacing across string
-boundaries.  All items appended to the clipboard with the same
-\fItype\fR must have the same \fIformat\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with
-clipboard requesters that do not use Tk.  If the Tk toolkit is being
-used to retrieve the \fBCLIPBOARD\fR selection then the value is
-converted back to a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is
-irrelevant.
-.PP
-A \fB\-\|\-\fR argument may be specified to mark the end of options:  the
-next argument will always be used as \fIdata\fR.
-This feature may be convenient if, for example, \fIdata\fR starts
-with a \fB\-\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBclipboard clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR?
-.
-Claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display and removes
-any previous contents.  \fIWindow\fR defaults to
-.QW . .
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBclipboard get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR?
-.
-Retrieve data from the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display.
-\fIWindow\fR defaults to
-.QW . .
-\fIType\fR specifies the form in which
-the data is to be returned and should be an atom name such as \fBSTRING\fR
-or \fBFILE_NAME\fR.  \fIType\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  This command is
-equivalent to
-.QW "\fBselection get\fR \fB\-selection CLIPBOARD\fR" .
-.RS
-.PP
-Note that on modern X11 systems, the most useful type to retrieve for
-transferred strings is not \fBSTRING\fR, but rather \fBUTF8_STRING\fR.
-.RE
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-Get the current contents of the clipboard.
-.CS
-if {[catch {\fBclipboard get\fR} contents]} {
-    # There were no clipboard contents at all
-}
-.CE
-.PP
-Set the clipboard to contain a fixed string.
-.CS
-\fBclipboard clear\fR
-\fBclipboard append\fR "some fixed string"
-.CE
-.PP
-You can put custom data into the clipboard by using a custom \fB\-type\fR
-option. This is not necessarily portable, but can be very useful. The
-method of passing Tcl scripts this way is effective, but should be mixed
-with safe interpreters in production code.
-.CS
-# This is a very simple canvas serializer;
-# it produces a script that recreates the item(s) when executed
-proc getItemConfig {canvas tag} {
-   set script {}
-   foreach item [$canvas find withtag $tag] {
-      append script {$canvas create } [$canvas type $item]
-      append script { } [$canvas coords $item] { }
-      foreach config [$canvas itemconf $item] {
-         lassign $config name \- \- \- value
-         append script [list $name $value] { }
-      }
-      append script \en
-   }
-   return [string trim $script]
-}
-
-# Set up a binding on a canvas to cut and paste an item
-set c [canvas .c]
-pack $c
-$c create text 150 30 \-text "cut and paste me"
-bind $c <<Cut>> {
-   \fBclipboard clear\fR
-   \fBclipboard append \-type\fR TkCanvasItem \e
-         [getItemConfig %W current]
-   # Delete because this is cut, not copy.
-   %W delete current
-}
-bind $c <<Paste>> {
-   catch {
-      set canvas %W
-      eval [\fBclipboard get \-type\fR TkCanvasItem]
-   }
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-interp(n), selection(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-clear, format, clipboard, append, selection, type
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/colors.n b/tk8.6/doc/colors.n
deleted file mode 100644
index dc7007b..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/colors.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,957 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2003 ActiveState Corporation.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
-'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Donal K. Fellows
-'\"
-.TH colors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-colors \- symbolic color names recognized by Tk
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Tk recognizes many symbolic color names (e.g., \fBred\fR) when
-specifying colors.  The symbolic names recognized by Tk and their
-8-bit-per-channel RGB values are:
-.DS
-.ta 7.2cR 9.5cR 11cR
-\fBName\fR	\fBRed\fR	\fBGreen\fR	\fBBlue\fR
-alice blue	240	248 	255
-AliceBlue	240	248 	255
-antique white	250	235 	215
-AntiqueWhite	250	235 	215
-AntiqueWhite1	255	239 	219
-AntiqueWhite2	238	223 	204
-AntiqueWhite3	205	192 	176
-AntiqueWhite4	139	131 	120
-agua	0	255	255
-aquamarine	127	255 	212
-aquamarine1	127	255 	212
-aquamarine2	118	238 	198
-aquamarine3	102	205 	170
-aquamarine4	69	139 	116
-azure	240	255 	255
-azure1	240	255 	255
-azure2	224	238 	238
-azure3	193	205 	205
-azure4	131	139 	139
-beige	245	245 	220
-bisque	255	228 	196
-bisque1	255	228 	196
-bisque2	238	213 	183
-bisque3	205	183 	158
-bisque4	139	125 	107
-black	0	0 	0
-blanched almond	255	235 	205
-BlanchedAlmond	255	235 	205
-blue	0	0 	255
-blue violet	138	43 	226
-blue1	0	0 	255
-blue2	0	0 	238
-blue3	0	0 	205
-blue4	0	0 	139
-BlueViolet	138	43 	226
-brown	165	42 	42
-brown1	255	64 	64
-brown2	238	59 	59
-brown3	205	51 	51
-brown4	139	35 	35
-burlywood	222	184 	135
-burlywood1	255	211 	155
-burlywood2	238	197 	145
-burlywood3	205	170 	125
-burlywood4	139	115 	85
-cadet blue	95	158 	160
-CadetBlue	95	158 	160
-CadetBlue1	152	245 	255
-CadetBlue2	142	229 	238
-CadetBlue3	122	197 	205
-CadetBlue4	83	134 	139
-chartreuse	127	255 	0
-chartreuse1	127	255 	0
-chartreuse2	118	238 	0
-chartreuse3	102	205 	0
-chartreuse4	69	139 	0
-chocolate	210	105 	30
-chocolate1	255	127 	36
-chocolate2	238	118 	33
-chocolate3	205	102 	29
-chocolate4	139	69 	19
-coral	255	127 	80
-coral1	255	114 	86
-coral2	238	106 	80
-coral3	205	91 	69
-coral4	139	62 	47
-cornflower blue	100	149 	237
-CornflowerBlue	100	149 	237
-cornsilk	255	248 	220
-cornsilk1	255	248 	220
-cornsilk2	238	232 	205
-cornsilk3	205	200 	177
-cornsilk4	139	136 	120
-crymson	220	20	60
-cyan	0	255 	255
-cyan1	0	255 	255
-cyan2	0	238 	238
-cyan3	0	205 	205
-cyan4	0	139 	139
-dark blue	0	0 	139
-dark cyan	0	139 	139
-dark goldenrod	184	134 	11
-dark gray	169	169 	169
-dark green	0	100 	0
-dark grey	169	169 	169
-dark khaki	189	183 	107
-dark magenta	139	0 	139
-dark olive green	85	107 	47
-dark orange	255	140 	0
-dark orchid	153	50 	204
-dark red	139	0 	0
-dark salmon	233	150 	122
-dark sea green	143	188 	143
-dark slate blue	72	61 	139
-dark slate gray	47	79 	79
-dark slate grey	47	79 	79
-dark turquoise	0	206 	209
-dark violet	148	0 	211
-DarkBlue	0	0 	139
-DarkCyan	0	139 	139
-DarkGoldenrod	184	134 	11
-DarkGoldenrod1	255	185 	15
-DarkGoldenrod2	238	173 	14
-DarkGoldenrod3	205	149 	12
-DarkGoldenrod4	139	101 	8
-DarkGray	169	169 	169
-DarkGreen	0	100 	0
-DarkGrey	169	169 	169
-DarkKhaki	189	183 	107
-DarkMagenta	139	0 	139
-DarkOliveGreen	85	107 	47
-DarkOliveGreen1	202	255 	112
-DarkOliveGreen2	188	238 	104
-DarkOliveGreen3	162	205 	90
-DarkOliveGreen4	110	139 	61
-DarkOrange	255	140 	0
-DarkOrange1	255	127 	0
-DarkOrange2	238	118 	0
-DarkOrange3	205	102 	0
-DarkOrange4	139	69 	0
-DarkOrchid	153	50 	204
-DarkOrchid1	191	62 	255
-DarkOrchid2	178	58 	238
-DarkOrchid3	154	50 	205
-DarkOrchid4	104	34 	139
-DarkRed	139	0 	0
-DarkSalmon	233	150 	122
-DarkSeaGreen	143	188 	143
-DarkSeaGreen1	193	255 	193
-DarkSeaGreen2	180	238 	180
-DarkSeaGreen3	155	205 	155
-DarkSeaGreen4	105	139 	105
-DarkSlateBlue	72	61 	139
-DarkSlateGray	47	79 	79
-DarkSlateGray1	151	255 	255
-DarkSlateGray2	141	238 	238
-DarkSlateGray3	121	205 	205
-DarkSlateGray4	82	139 	139
-DarkSlateGrey	47	79 	79
-DarkTurquoise	0	206 	209
-DarkViolet	148	0 	211
-deep pink	255	20 	147
-deep sky blue	0	191 	255
-DeepPink	255	20 	147
-DeepPink1	255	20 	147
-DeepPink2	238	18 	137
-DeepPink3	205	16 	118
-DeepPink4	139	10 	80
-DeepSkyBlue	0	191 	255
-DeepSkyBlue1	0	191 	255
-DeepSkyBlue2	0	178 	238
-DeepSkyBlue3	0	154 	205
-DeepSkyBlue4	0	104 	139
-dim gray	105	105 	105
-dim grey	105	105 	105
-DimGray	105	105 	105
-DimGrey	105	105 	105
-dodger blue	30	144 	255
-DodgerBlue	30	144 	255
-DodgerBlue1	30	144 	255
-DodgerBlue2	28	134 	238
-DodgerBlue3	24	116 	205
-DodgerBlue4	16	78 	139
-firebrick	178	34 	34
-firebrick1	255	48 	48
-firebrick2	238	44 	44
-firebrick3	205	38 	38
-firebrick4	139	26 	26
-floral white	255	250 	240
-FloralWhite	255	250 	240
-forest green	34	139 	34
-ForestGreen	34	139 	34
-fuchsia	255	0	255
-gainsboro	220	220 	220
-ghost white	248	248 	255
-GhostWhite	248	248 	255
-gold	255	215 	0
-gold1	255	215 	0
-gold2	238	201 	0
-gold3	205	173 	0
-gold4	139	117 	0
-goldenrod	218	165 	32
-goldenrod1	255	193 	37
-goldenrod2	238	180 	34
-goldenrod3	205	155 	29
-goldenrod4	139	105 	20
-gray	128	128	128
-gray0	0	0 	0
-gray1	3	3 	3
-gray2	5	5 	5
-gray3	8	8 	8
-gray4	10	10 	10
-gray5	13	13 	13
-gray6	15	15 	15
-gray7	18	18 	18
-gray8	20	20 	20
-gray9	23	23 	23
-gray10	26	26 	26
-gray11	28	28 	28
-gray12	31	31 	31
-gray13	33	33 	33
-gray14	36	36 	36
-gray15	38	38 	38
-gray16	41	41 	41
-gray17	43	43 	43
-gray18	46	46 	46
-gray19	48	48 	48
-gray20	51	51 	51
-gray21	54	54 	54
-gray22	56	56 	56
-gray23	59	59 	59
-gray24	61	61 	61
-gray25	64	64 	64
-gray26	66	66 	66
-gray27	69	69 	69
-gray28	71	71 	71
-gray29	74	74 	74
-gray30	77	77 	77
-gray31	79	79 	79
-gray32	82	82 	82
-gray33	84	84 	84
-gray34	87	87 	87
-gray35	89	89 	89
-gray36	92	92 	92
-gray37	94	94 	94
-gray38	97	97 	97
-gray39	99	99 	99
-gray40	102	102 	102
-gray41	105	105 	105
-gray42	107	107 	107
-gray43	110	110 	110
-gray44	112	112 	112
-gray45	115	115 	115
-gray46	117	117 	117
-gray47	120	120 	120
-gray48	122	122 	122
-gray49	125	125 	125
-gray50	127	127 	127
-gray51	130	130 	130
-gray52	133	133 	133
-gray53	135	135 	135
-gray54	138	138 	138
-gray55	140	140 	140
-gray56	143	143 	143
-gray57	145	145 	145
-gray58	148	148 	148
-gray59	150	150 	150
-gray60	153	153 	153
-gray61	156	156 	156
-gray62	158	158 	158
-gray63	161	161 	161
-gray64	163	163 	163
-gray65	166	166 	166
-gray66	168	168 	168
-gray67	171	171 	171
-gray68	173	173 	173
-gray69	176	176 	176
-gray70	179	179 	179
-gray71	181	181 	181
-gray72	184	184 	184
-gray73	186	186 	186
-gray74	189	189 	189
-gray75	191	191 	191
-gray76	194	194 	194
-gray77	196	196 	196
-gray78	199	199 	199
-gray79	201	201 	201
-gray80	204	204 	204
-gray81	207	207 	207
-gray82	209	209 	209
-gray83	212	212 	212
-gray84	214	214 	214
-gray85	217	217 	217
-gray86	219	219 	219
-gray87	222	222 	222
-gray88	224	224 	224
-gray89	227	227 	227
-gray90	229	229 	229
-gray91	232	232 	232
-gray92	235	235 	235
-gray93	237	237 	237
-gray94	240	240 	240
-gray95	242	242 	242
-gray96	245	245 	245
-gray97	247	247 	247
-gray98	250	250 	250
-gray99	252	252 	252
-gray100	255	255 	255
-green	0	128 	0
-green yellow	173	255 	47
-green1	0	255 	0
-green2	0	238 	0
-green3	0	205 	0
-green4	0	139 	0
-GreenYellow	173	255 	47
-grey	128	128	128
-grey0	0	0 	0
-grey1	3	3 	3
-grey2	5	5 	5
-grey3	8	8 	8
-grey4	10	10 	10
-grey5	13	13 	13
-grey6	15	15 	15
-grey7	18	18 	18
-grey8	20	20 	20
-grey9	23	23 	23
-grey10	26	26 	26
-grey11	28	28 	28
-grey12	31	31 	31
-grey13	33	33 	33
-grey14	36	36 	36
-grey15	38	38 	38
-grey16	41	41 	41
-grey17	43	43 	43
-grey18	46	46 	46
-grey19	48	48 	48
-grey20	51	51 	51
-grey21	54	54 	54
-grey22	56	56 	56
-grey23	59	59 	59
-grey24	61	61 	61
-grey25	64	64 	64
-grey26	66	66 	66
-grey27	69	69 	69
-grey28	71	71 	71
-grey29	74	74 	74
-grey30	77	77 	77
-grey31	79	79 	79
-grey32	82	82 	82
-grey33	84	84 	84
-grey34	87	87 	87
-grey35	89	89 	89
-grey36	92	92 	92
-grey37	94	94 	94
-grey38	97	97 	97
-grey39	99	99 	99
-grey40	102	102 	102
-grey41	105	105 	105
-grey42	107	107 	107
-grey43	110	110 	110
-grey44	112	112 	112
-grey45	115	115 	115
-grey46	117	117 	117
-grey47	120	120 	120
-grey48	122	122 	122
-grey49	125	125 	125
-grey50	127	127 	127
-grey51	130	130 	130
-grey52	133	133 	133
-grey53	135	135 	135
-grey54	138	138 	138
-grey55	140	140 	140
-grey56	143	143 	143
-grey57	145	145 	145
-grey58	148	148 	148
-grey59	150	150 	150
-grey60	153	153 	153
-grey61	156	156 	156
-grey62	158	158 	158
-grey63	161	161 	161
-grey64	163	163 	163
-grey65	166	166 	166
-grey66	168	168 	168
-grey67	171	171 	171
-grey68	173	173 	173
-grey69	176	176 	176
-grey70	179	179 	179
-grey71	181	181 	181
-grey72	184	184 	184
-grey73	186	186 	186
-grey74	189	189 	189
-grey75	191	191 	191
-grey76	194	194 	194
-grey77	196	196 	196
-grey78	199	199 	199
-grey79	201	201 	201
-grey80	204	204 	204
-grey81	207	207 	207
-grey82	209	209 	209
-grey83	212	212 	212
-grey84	214	214 	214
-grey85	217	217 	217
-grey86	219	219 	219
-grey87	222	222 	222
-grey88	224	224 	224
-grey89	227	227 	227
-grey90	229	229 	229
-grey91	232	232 	232
-grey92	235	235 	235
-grey93	237	237 	237
-grey94	240	240 	240
-grey95	242	242 	242
-grey96	245	245 	245
-grey97	247	247 	247
-grey98	250	250 	250
-grey99	252	252 	252
-grey100	255	255 	255
-honeydew	240	255 	240
-honeydew1	240	255 	240
-honeydew2	224	238 	224
-honeydew3	193	205 	193
-honeydew4	131	139 	131
-hot pink	255	105 	180
-HotPink	255	105 	180
-HotPink1	255	110 	180
-HotPink2	238	106 	167
-HotPink3	205	96 	144
-HotPink4	139	58 	98
-indian red	205	92 	92
-IndianRed	205	92 	92
-IndianRed1	255	106 	106
-IndianRed2	238	99 	99
-IndianRed3	205	85 	85
-IndianRed4	139	58 	58
-indigo	75	0	130
-ivory	255	255 	240
-ivory1	255	255 	240
-ivory2	238	238 	224
-ivory3	205	205 	193
-ivory4	139	139 	131
-khaki	240	230 	140
-khaki1	255	246 	143
-khaki2	238	230 	133
-khaki3	205	198 	115
-khaki4	139	134 	78
-lavender	230	230 	250
-lavender blush	255	240 	245
-LavenderBlush	255	240 	245
-LavenderBlush1	255	240 	245
-LavenderBlush2	238	224 	229
-LavenderBlush3	205	193 	197
-LavenderBlush4	139	131 	134
-lawn green	124	252 	0
-LawnGreen	124	252 	0
-lemon chiffon	255	250 	205
-LemonChiffon	255	250 	205
-LemonChiffon1	255	250 	205
-LemonChiffon2	238	233 	191
-LemonChiffon3	205	201 	165
-LemonChiffon4	139	137 	112
-light blue	173	216 	230
-light coral	240	128 	128
-light cyan	224	255 	255
-light goldenrod	238	221 	130
-light goldenrod yellow	250	250 	210
-light gray	211	211 	211
-light green	144	238 	144
-light grey	211	211 	211
-light pink	255	182 	193
-light salmon	255	160 	122
-light sea green	32	178 	170
-light sky blue	135	206 	250
-light slate blue	132	112 	255
-light slate gray	119	136 	153
-light slate grey	119	136 	153
-light steel blue	176	196 	222
-light yellow	255	255 	224
-LightBlue	173	216 	230
-LightBlue1	191	239 	255
-LightBlue2	178	223 	238
-LightBlue3	154	192 	205
-LightBlue4	104	131 	139
-LightCoral	240	128 	128
-LightCyan	224	255 	255
-LightCyan1	224	255 	255
-LightCyan2	209	238 	238
-LightCyan3	180	205 	205
-LightCyan4	122	139 	139
-LightGoldenrod	238	221 	130
-LightGoldenrod1	255	236 	139
-LightGoldenrod2	238	220 	130
-LightGoldenrod3	205	190 	112
-LightGoldenrod4	139	129 	76
-LightGoldenrodYellow	250	250 	210
-LightGray	211	211 	211
-LightGreen	144	238 	144
-LightGrey	211	211 	211
-LightPink	255	182 	193
-LightPink1	255	174 	185
-LightPink2	238	162 	173
-LightPink3	205	140 	149
-LightPink4	139	95 	101
-LightSalmon	255	160 	122
-LightSalmon1	255	160 	122
-LightSalmon2	238	149 	114
-LightSalmon3	205	129 	98
-LightSalmon4	139	87 	66
-LightSeaGreen	32	178 	170
-LightSkyBlue	135	206 	250
-LightSkyBlue1	176	226 	255
-LightSkyBlue2	164	211 	238
-LightSkyBlue3	141	182 	205
-LightSkyBlue4	96	123 	139
-LightSlateBlue	132	112 	255
-LightSlateGray	119	136 	153
-LightSlateGrey	119	136 	153
-LightSteelBlue	176	196 	222
-LightSteelBlue1	202	225 	255
-LightSteelBlue2	188	210 	238
-LightSteelBlue3	162	181 	205
-LightSteelBlue4	110	123 	139
-LightYellow	255	255 	224
-LightYellow1	255	255 	224
-LightYellow2	238	238 	209
-LightYellow3	205	205 	180
-LightYellow4	139	139 	122
-lime	0	255	0
-lime green	50	205 	50
-LimeGreen	50	205 	50
-linen	250	240 	230
-magenta	255	0 	255
-magenta1	255	0 	255
-magenta2	238	0 	238
-magenta3	205	0 	205
-magenta4	139	0 	139
-maroon	128	0 	0
-maroon1	255	52 	179
-maroon2	238	48 	167
-maroon3	205	41 	144
-maroon4	139	28 	98
-medium aquamarine	102	205 	170
-medium blue	0	0 	205
-medium orchid	186	85 	211
-medium purple	147	112 	219
-medium sea green	60	179 	113
-medium slate blue	123	104 	238
-medium spring green	0	250 	154
-medium turquoise	72	209 	204
-medium violet red	199	21 	133
-MediumAquamarine	102	205 	170
-MediumBlue	0	0 	205
-MediumOrchid	186	85 	211
-MediumOrchid1	224	102 	255
-MediumOrchid2	209	95 	238
-MediumOrchid3	180	82 	205
-MediumOrchid4	122	55 	139
-MediumPurple	147	112 	219
-MediumPurple1	171	130 	255
-MediumPurple2	159	121 	238
-MediumPurple3	137	104 	205
-MediumPurple4	93	71 	139
-MediumSeaGreen	60	179 	113
-MediumSlateBlue	123	104 	238
-MediumSpringGreen	0	250 	154
-MediumTurquoise	72	209 	204
-MediumVioletRed	199	21 	133
-midnight blue	25	25 	112
-MidnightBlue	25	25 	112
-mint cream	245	255 	250
-MintCream	245	255 	250
-misty rose	255	228 	225
-MistyRose	255	228 	225
-MistyRose1	255	228 	225
-MistyRose2	238	213 	210
-MistyRose3	205	183 	181
-MistyRose4	139	125 	123
-moccasin	255	228 	181
-navajo white	255	222 	173
-NavajoWhite	255	222 	173
-NavajoWhite1	255	222 	173
-NavajoWhite2	238	207 	161
-NavajoWhite3	205	179 	139
-NavajoWhite4	139	121 	94
-navy	0	0 	128
-navy blue	0	0 	128
-NavyBlue	0	0 	128
-old lace	253	245 	230
-OldLace	253	245 	230
-olive	128	128	0
-olive drab	107	142 	35
-OliveDrab	107	142 	35
-OliveDrab1	192	255 	62
-OliveDrab2	179	238 	58
-OliveDrab3	154	205 	50
-OliveDrab4	105	139 	34
-orange	255	165 	0
-orange red	255	69 	0
-orange1	255	165 	0
-orange2	238	154 	0
-orange3	205	133 	0
-orange4	139	90 	0
-OrangeRed	255	69 	0
-OrangeRed1	255	69 	0
-OrangeRed2	238	64 	0
-OrangeRed3	205	55 	0
-OrangeRed4	139	37 	0
-orchid	218	112 	214
-orchid1	255	131 	250
-orchid2	238	122 	233
-orchid3	205	105 	201
-orchid4	139	71 	137
-pale goldenrod	238	232 	170
-pale green	152	251 	152
-pale turquoise	175	238 	238
-pale violet red	219	112 	147
-PaleGoldenrod	238	232 	170
-PaleGreen	152	251 	152
-PaleGreen1	154	255 	154
-PaleGreen2	144	238 	144
-PaleGreen3	124	205 	124
-PaleGreen4	84	139 	84
-PaleTurquoise	175	238 	238
-PaleTurquoise1	187	255 	255
-PaleTurquoise2	174	238 	238
-PaleTurquoise3	150	205 	205
-PaleTurquoise4	102	139 	139
-PaleVioletRed	219	112 	147
-PaleVioletRed1	255	130 	171
-PaleVioletRed2	238	121 	159
-PaleVioletRed3	205	104 	127
-PaleVioletRed4	139	71 	93
-papaya whip	255	239 	213
-PapayaWhip	255	239 	213
-peach puff	255	218 	185
-PeachPuff	255	218 	185
-PeachPuff1	255	218 	185
-PeachPuff2	238	203 	173
-PeachPuff3	205	175 	149
-PeachPuff4	139	119 	101
-peru	205	133 	63
-pink	255	192 	203
-pink1	255	181 	197
-pink2	238	169 	184
-pink3	205	145 	158
-pink4	139	99 	108
-plum	221	160 	221
-plum1	255	187 	255
-plum2	238	174 	238
-plum3	205	150 	205
-plum4	139	102 	139
-powder blue	176	224 	230
-PowderBlue	176	224 	230
-purple	128	0 	128
-purple1	155	48 	255
-purple2	145	44 	238
-purple3	125	38 	205
-purple4	85	26 	139
-red	255	0 	0
-red1	255	0 	0
-red2	238	0 	0
-red3	205	0 	0
-red4	139	0 	0
-rosy brown	188	143 	143
-RosyBrown	188	143 	143
-RosyBrown1	255	193 	193
-RosyBrown2	238	180 	180
-RosyBrown3	205	155 	155
-RosyBrown4	139	105 	105
-royal blue	65	105 	225
-RoyalBlue	65	105 	225
-RoyalBlue1	72	118 	255
-RoyalBlue2	67	110 	238
-RoyalBlue3	58	95 	205
-RoyalBlue4	39	64 	139
-saddle brown	139	69 	19
-SaddleBrown	139	69 	19
-salmon	250	128 	114
-salmon1	255	140 	105
-salmon2	238	130 	98
-salmon3	205	112 	84
-salmon4	139	76 	57
-sandy brown	244	164 	96
-SandyBrown	244	164 	96
-sea green	46	139 	87
-SeaGreen	46	139 	87
-SeaGreen1	84	255 	159
-SeaGreen2	78	238 	148
-SeaGreen3	67	205 	128
-SeaGreen4	46	139 	87
-seashell	255	245 	238
-seashell1	255	245 	238
-seashell2	238	229 	222
-seashell3	205	197 	191
-seashell4	139	134 	130
-sienna	160	82 	45
-sienna1	255	130 	71
-sienna2	238	121 	66
-sienna3	205	104 	57
-sienna4	139	71 	38
-silver	192	192	192
-sky blue	135	206 	235
-SkyBlue	135	206 	235
-SkyBlue1	135	206 	255
-SkyBlue2	126	192 	238
-SkyBlue3	108	166 	205
-SkyBlue4	74	112 	139
-slate blue	106	90 	205
-slate gray	112	128 	144
-slate grey	112	128 	144
-SlateBlue	106	90 	205
-SlateBlue1	131	111 	255
-SlateBlue2	122	103 	238
-SlateBlue3	105	89 	205
-SlateBlue4	71	60 	139
-SlateGray	112	128 	144
-SlateGray1	198	226 	255
-SlateGray2	185	211 	238
-SlateGray3	159	182 	205
-SlateGray4	108	123 	139
-SlateGrey	112	128 	144
-snow	255	250 	250
-snow1	255	250 	250
-snow2	238	233 	233
-snow3	205	201 	201
-snow4	139	137 	137
-spring green	0	255 	127
-SpringGreen	0	255 	127
-SpringGreen1	0	255 	127
-SpringGreen2	0	238 	118
-SpringGreen3	0	205 	102
-SpringGreen4	0	139 	69
-steel blue	70	130 	180
-SteelBlue	70	130 	180
-SteelBlue1	99	184 	255
-SteelBlue2	92	172 	238
-SteelBlue3	79	148 	205
-SteelBlue4	54	100 	139
-tan	210	180 	140
-tan1	255	165 	79
-tan2	238	154 	73
-tan3	205	133 	63
-tan4	139	90 	43
-teal	0	128	128
-thistle	216	191 	216
-thistle1	255	225 	255
-thistle2	238	210 	238
-thistle3	205	181 	205
-thistle4	139	123 	139
-tomato	255	99 	71
-tomato1	255	99 	71
-tomato2	238	92 	66
-tomato3	205	79 	57
-tomato4	139	54 	38
-turquoise	64	224 	208
-turquoise1	0	245 	255
-turquoise2	0	229 	238
-turquoise3	0	197 	205
-turquoise4	0	134 	139
-violet	238	130 	238
-violet red	208	32 	144
-VioletRed	208	32 	144
-VioletRed1	255	62 	150
-VioletRed2	238	58 	140
-VioletRed3	205	50 	120
-VioletRed4	139	34 	82
-wheat	245	222 	179
-wheat1	255	231 	186
-wheat2	238	216 	174
-wheat3	205	186 	150
-wheat4	139	126 	102
-white	255	255 	255
-white smoke	245	245 	245
-WhiteSmoke	245	245 	245
-yellow	255	255 	0
-yellow green	154	205 	50
-yellow1	255	255 	0
-yellow2	238	238 	0
-yellow3	205	205 	0
-yellow4	139	139 	0
-YellowGreen	154	205 	50
-.DE
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.TP
-\fBMac OS X\fR
-.
-On Mac OS X, the following additional system colors are available
-(note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme,
-and typically many of these will in fact be patterns rather than pure colors):
-.RS
-.DS
-systemActiveAreaFill
-systemAlertActiveText
-systemAlertBackgroundActive
-systemAlertBackgroundInactive
-systemAlertInactiveText
-systemAlternatePrimaryHighlightColor
-systemAppleGuideCoachmark
-systemBevelActiveDark
-systemBevelActiveLight
-systemBevelButtonActiveText
-systemBevelButtonInactiveText
-systemBevelButtonPressedText
-systemBevelButtonStickyActiveText
-systemBevelButtonStickyInactiveText
-systemBevelInactiveDark
-systemBevelInactiveLight
-systemBlack
-systemBlackText
-systemButtonActiveDarkHighlight
-systemButtonActiveDarkShadow
-systemButtonActiveLightHighlight
-systemButtonActiveLightShadow
-systemButtonFace
-systemButtonFaceActive
-systemButtonFaceInactive
-systemButtonFacePressed
-systemButtonFrame
-systemButtonFrameActive
-systemButtonFrameInactive
-systemButtonInactiveDarkHighlight
-systemButtonInactiveDarkShadow
-systemButtonInactiveLightHighlight
-systemButtonInactiveLightShadow
-systemButtonPressedDarkHighlight
-systemButtonPressedDarkShadow
-systemButtonPressedLightHighlight
-systemButtonPressedLightShadow
-systemButtonText
-systemChasingArrows
-systemDialogActiveText
-systemDialogBackgroundActive
-systemDialogBackgroundInactive
-systemDialogInactiveText
-systemDocumentWindowBackground
-systemDocumentWindowTitleActiveText
-systemDocumentWindowTitleInactiveText
-systemDragHilite
-systemDrawerBackground
-systemFinderWindowBackground
-systemFocusHighlight
-systemHighlight
-systemHighlightAlternate
-systemHighlightSecondary
-systemHighlightText
-systemIconLabelBackground
-systemIconLabelBackgroundSelected
-systemIconLabelSelectedText
-systemIconLabelText
-systemListViewBackground
-systemListViewColumnDivider
-systemListViewEvenRowBackground
-systemListViewOddRowBackground
-systemListViewSeparator
-systemListViewSortColumnBackground
-systemListViewText
-systemListViewWindowHeaderBackground
-systemMenu
-systemMenuActive
-systemMenuActiveText
-systemMenuBackground
-systemMenuBackgroundSelected
-systemMenuDisabled
-systemMenuItemActiveText
-systemMenuItemDisabledText
-systemMenuItemSelectedText
-systemMenuText
-systemMetalBackground
-systemModelessDialogActiveText
-systemModelessDialogBackgroundActive
-systemModelessDialogBackgroundInactive
-systemModelessDialogInactiveText
-systemMovableModalBackground
-systemMovableModalWindowTitleActiveText
-systemMovableModalWindowTitleInactiveText
-systemNotificationText
-systemNotificationWindowBackground
-systemPlacardActiveText
-systemPlacardBackground
-systemPlacardInactiveText
-systemPlacardPressedText
-systemPopupArrowActive
-systemPopupArrowInactive
-systemPopupArrowPressed
-systemPopupButtonActiveText
-systemPopupButtonInactiveText
-systemPopupButtonPressedText
-systemPopupLabelActiveText
-systemPopupLabelInactiveText
-systemPopupWindowTitleActiveText
-systemPopupWindowTitleInactiveText
-systemPrimaryHighlightColor
-systemPushButtonActiveText
-systemPushButtonInactiveText
-systemPushButtonPressedText
-systemRootMenuActiveText
-systemRootMenuDisabledText
-systemRootMenuSelectedText
-systemScrollBarDelimiterActive
-systemScrollBarDelimiterInactive
-systemSecondaryGroupBoxBackground
-systemSecondaryHighlightColor
-systemSheetBackground
-systemSheetBackgroundOpaque
-systemSheetBackgroundTransparent
-systemStaticAreaFill
-systemSystemDetailText
-systemTabFrontActiveText
-systemTabFrontInactiveText
-systemTabNonFrontActiveText
-systemTabNonFrontInactiveText
-systemTabNonFrontPressedText
-systemTabPaneBackground
-systemToolbarBackground
-systemTransparent
-systemUtilityWindowBackgroundActive
-systemUtilityWindowBackgroundInactive
-systemUtilityWindowTitleActiveText
-systemUtilityWindowTitleInactiveText
-systemWhite
-systemWhiteText
-systemWindowBody
-systemWindowHeaderActiveText
-systemWindowHeaderBackground
-systemWindowHeaderInactiveText
-.DE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBWindows\fR
-.
-On Windows, the following additional system colors are available
-(note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme):
-.RS
-.DS
-.ta 6c
-system3dDarkShadow	systemHighlight
-system3dLight	systemHighlightText
-systemActiveBorder	systemInactiveBorder
-systemActiveCaption	systemInactiveCaption
-systemAppWorkspace	systemInactiveCaptionText
-systemBackground	systemInfoBackground
-systemButtonFace	systemInfoText
-systemButtonHighlight	systemMenu
-systemButtonShadow	systemMenuText
-systemButtonText	systemScrollbar
-systemCaptionText	systemWindow
-systemDisabledText	systemWindowFrame
-systemGrayText	systemWindowText
-.DE
-.RE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-options(n), Tk_GetColor(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-color, option
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/console.n b/tk8.6/doc/console.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 1313d3a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/console.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH console n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-console \- Control the console on systems without a real console
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBconsole\fR \fIsubcommand\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The console window is a replacement for a real console to allow input
-and output on the standard I/O channels on platforms that do not have
-a real console.  It is implemented as a separate interpreter with the
-Tk toolkit loaded, and control over this interpreter is given through
-the \fBconsole\fR command.  The behaviour of the console window is
-defined mainly through the contents of the \fIconsole.tcl\fR file in
-the Tk library. Except for TkAqua, this command is not available when
-Tk is loaded into a tclsh interpreter with
-.QW "\fBpackage require Tk\fR" ,
-as a conventional terminal is expected to be present in that case.
-In TkAqua, this command is only available when stdin is \fB/dev/null\fR
-(as is the case e.g. when the application embedding Tk is started
-from the Mac OS X Finder).
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBconsole eval \fIscript\fR
-Evaluate the \fIscript\fR argument as a Tcl script in the console
-interpreter.  The normal interpreter is accessed through the
-\fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter.
-.TP
-\fBconsole hide\fR
-Hide the console window from view.  Precisely equivalent to
-withdrawing the \fB.\fR window in the console interpreter.
-.TP
-\fBconsole show\fR
-Display the console window.  Precisely equivalent to deiconifying the
-\fB.\fR window in the console interpreter.
-.TP
-\fBconsole title \fR?\fIstring\fR?
-Query or modify the title of the console window.  If \fIstring\fR is
-not specified, queries the title of the console window, and sets the
-title of the console window to \fIstring\fR otherwise.  Precisely
-equivalent to using the \fBwm title\fR command in the console
-interpreter.
-.SH "ACCESS TO THE MAIN INTERPRETER"
-.PP
-The \fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter allows
-scripts to be evaluated in the main interpreter.  It supports two
-subcommands: \fBeval\fR and \fBrecord\fR.
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBconsoleinterp eval \fIscript\fR
-Evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level in the main
-interpreter.
-.TP
-\fBconsoleinterp record \fIscript\fR
-Records and evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level
-in the main interpreter as if \fIscript\fR had been typed in at the
-console.
-.SH "ADDITIONAL TRAP CALLS"
-.PP
-There are several additional commands in the console interpreter that
-are called in response to activity in the main interpreter.
-\fIThese are documented here for completeness only; they form part of
-the internal implementation of the console and are likely to change or
-be modified without warning.\fR
-.PP
-Output to the console from the main interpreter via the stdout and
-stderr channels is handled by invoking the \fBtk::ConsoleOutput\fR
-command in the console interpreter with two arguments.  The first
-argument is the name of the channel being written to, and the second
-argument is the string being written to the channel (after encoding
-and end-of-line translation processing has been performed.)
-.PP
-When the \fB.\fR window of the main interpreter is destroyed, the
-\fBtk::ConsoleExit\fR command in the console interpreter is called
-(assuming the console interpreter has not already been deleted itself,
-that is.)
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-The default script creates a console window (implemented using a text
-widget) that has the following behaviour:
-.IP [1]
-Pressing the tab key inserts a TAB character (as defined by the Tcl
-\et escape.)
-.IP [2]
-Pressing the return key causes the current line (if complete by the
-rules of \fBinfo complete\fR) to be passed to the main interpreter for
-evaluation.
-.IP [3]
-Pressing the delete key deletes the selected text (if any text is
-selected) or the character to the right of the cursor (if not at the
-end of the line.)
-.IP [4]
-Pressing the backspace key deletes the selected text (if any text is
-selected) or the character to the left of the cursor (of not at the
-start of the line.)
-.IP [5]
-Pressing either Control+A or the home key causes the cursor to go to
-the start of the line (but after the prompt, if a prompt is present on
-the line.)
-.IP [6]
-Pressing either Control+E or the end key causes the cursor to go to
-the end of the line.
-.IP [7]
-Pressing either Control+P or the up key causes the previous entry in
-the command history to be selected.
-.IP [8]
-Pressing either Control+N or the down key causes the next entry in the
-command history to be selected.
-.IP [9]
-Pressing either Control+B or the left key causes the cursor to move
-one character backward as long as the cursor is not at the prompt.
-.IP [10]
-Pressing either Control+F or the right key causes the cursor to move
-one character forward.
-.IP [11]
-Pressing F9 rebuilds the console window by destroying all its children
-and reloading the Tcl script that defined the console's behaviour.
-.PP
-Most other behaviour is the same as a conventional text widget except
-for the way that the \fI<<Cut>>\fR event is handled identically to the
-\fI<<Copy>>\fR event.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Not all platforms have the \fBconsole\fR command, so debugging code
-often has the following code fragment in it so output produced by
-\fBputs\fR can be seen while during development:
-.CS
-catch {\fBconsole show\fR}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-destroy(n), fconfigure(n), history(n), interp(n), puts(n), text(n), wm(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-console, interpreter, window, interactive, output channels
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/cursors.n b/tk8.6/doc/cursors.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 1662de4..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/cursors.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,191 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\" 
-'\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
-'\" 
-.TH cursors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-cursors \- mouse cursors available in Tk
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fB\-cursor\fR widget option allows a Tk programmer to change the
-mouse cursor for a particular widget.  The cursor names recognized by
-Tk on all platforms are:
-.CS
-X_cursor
-arrow
-based_arrow_down
-based_arrow_up
-boat
-bogosity
-bottom_left_corner
-bottom_right_corner
-bottom_side
-bottom_tee
-box_spiral
-center_ptr
-circle
-clock
-coffee_mug
-cross
-cross_reverse
-crosshair
-diamond_cross
-dot
-dotbox
-double_arrow
-draft_large
-draft_small
-draped_box
-exchange
-fleur
-gobbler
-gumby
-hand1
-hand2
-heart
-icon
-iron_cross
-left_ptr
-left_side
-left_tee
-leftbutton
-ll_angle
-lr_angle
-man
-middlebutton
-mouse
-none
-pencil
-pirate
-plus
-question_arrow
-right_ptr
-right_side
-right_tee
-rightbutton
-rtl_logo
-sailboat
-sb_down_arrow
-sb_h_double_arrow
-sb_left_arrow
-sb_right_arrow
-sb_up_arrow
-sb_v_double_arrow
-shuttle
-sizing
-spider
-spraycan
-star
-target
-tcross
-top_left_arrow
-top_left_corner
-top_right_corner
-top_side
-top_tee
-trek
-ul_angle
-umbrella
-ur_angle
-watch
-xterm
-.CE
-.PP
-The \fBnone\fR cursor can be specified to eliminate the cursor.
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.TP
-\fBWindows\fR
-On Windows systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
-.RS
-.CS
-arrow
-center_ptr
-crosshair
-fleur
-ibeam
-icon
-none
-sb_h_double_arrow
-sb_v_double_arrow
-watch
-xterm
-.CE
-And the following additional cursors are available:
-.CS
-no
-starting
-size
-size_ne_sw
-size_ns
-size_nw_se
-size_we
-uparrow
-wait
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBMac OS X\fR
-On Mac OS X systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
-.RS
-.CS
-arrow
-top_left_arrow
-left_ptr
-cross
-crosshair
-tcross
-ibeam
-none
-xterm
-.CE
-And the following additional native cursors are available:
-.CS
-copyarrow
-aliasarrow
-contextualmenuarrow
-movearrow
-text
-cross-hair
-hand
-openhand
-closedhand
-fist
-pointinghand
-resize
-resizeleft
-resizeright
-resizeleftright
-resizeup
-resizedown
-resizeupdown
-resizebottomleft
-resizetopleft
-resizebottomright
-resizetopright
-notallowed
-poof
-wait
-countinguphand
-countingdownhand
-countingupanddownhand
-spinning
-help
-bucket
-cancel
-eyedrop
-eyedrop-full
-zoom-in
-zoom-out
-.CE
-.RE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-cursor, option
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/destroy.n b/tk8.6/doc/destroy.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d4743a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/destroy.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH destroy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-destroy \- Destroy one or more windows
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBdestroy \fR?\fIwindow window ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command deletes the windows given by the
-\fIwindow\fR arguments, plus all of their descendants.
-If a \fIwindow\fR
-.QW .
-is deleted then all windows will be destroyed and the application will
-(normally) exit.
-The \fIwindow\fRs are destroyed in order, and if an error occurs
-in destroying a window the command aborts without destroying the
-remaining windows.
-No error is returned if \fIwindow\fR does not exist.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Destroy all checkbuttons that are direct children of the given widget:
-.CS
-proc killCheckbuttonChildren {parent} {
-   foreach w [winfo children $parent] {
-      if {[winfo class $w] eq "Checkbutton"} {
-         \fBdestroy\fR $w
-      }
-   }
-}
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, destroy, window
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/dialog.n b/tk8.6/doc/dialog.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d2031d3..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/dialog.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk_dialog n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_dialog \- Create modal dialog and wait for response
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_dialog \fIwindow title text bitmap default string string ...\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure is part of the Tk script library.
-It is largely \fIdeprecated\fR by the \fBtk_messageBox\fR.
-Its arguments describe a dialog box:
-.TP
-\fIwindow\fR
-Name of top-level window to use for dialog.  Any existing window
-by this name is destroyed.
-.TP
-\fItitle\fR
-Text to appear in the window manager's title bar for the dialog.
-.TP
-\fItext\fR
-Message to appear in the top portion of the dialog box.
-.TP
-\fIbitmap\fR
-If non-empty, specifies a bitmap (in a form suitable for Tk_GetBitmap)
-to display in the top portion of
-the dialog, to the left of the text.
-If this is an empty string then no bitmap is displayed in the dialog.
-.TP
-\fIdefault\fR
-If this is an integer greater than or equal to zero, then it gives
-the index of the button that is to be the default button for the dialog
-(0 for the leftmost button, and so on).
-If less than zero or an empty string then there will not be any default
-button.
-.TP
-\fIstring\fR
-There will be one button for each of these arguments.
-Each \fIstring\fR specifies text to display in a button,
-in order from left to right.
-.PP
-After creating a dialog box, \fBtk_dialog\fR waits for the user to
-select one of the buttons either by clicking on the button with the
-mouse or by typing return to invoke the default button (if any).
-Then it returns the index of the selected button:  0 for the leftmost
-button, 1 for the button next to it, and so on.
-If the dialog's window is destroyed before the user selects one
-of the buttons, then \-1 is returned.
-.PP
-While waiting for the user to respond, \fBtk_dialog\fR sets a local
-grab.  This prevents the user from interacting with the application
-in any way except to invoke the dialog box.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-set reply [\fBtk_dialog\fR .foo "The Title" "Do you want to say yes?" \e
-        questhead 0 Yes No "I'm not sure"]
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-tk_messageBox(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bitmap, dialog, modal
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/entry.n b/tk8.6/doc/entry.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ccfcd24..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/entry.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,539 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH entry n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-entry \- Create and manipulate 'entry' one-line text entry widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBentry\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-selectbackground
-\-borderwidth	\-insertbackground	\-selectborderwidth
-\-cursor	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectforeground
-\-exportselection	\-insertofftime	\-takefocus
-\-font	\-insertontime	\-textvariable
-\-foreground	\-insertwidth	\-xscrollcommand
-\-highlightbackground	\-justify
-\-highlightcolor	\-relief
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-disabledbackground disabledBackground DisabledBackground
-Specifies the background color to use when the entry is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-.OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground
-Specifies the foreground color to use when the entry is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal foreground color is used.
-.OP "\-invalidcommand or \-invcmd" invalidCommand InvalidCommand
-Specifies a script to eval when \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns 0.
-Setting it to {} disables this feature (the default).  The best use
-of this option is to set it to \fIbell\fR.  See \fBVALIDATION\fR
-below for more information.
-.OP \-readonlybackground readonlyBackground ReadonlyBackground
-Specifies the background color to use when the entry is readonly.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-.OP \-show show Show
-If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry
-are not displayed in the window.
-Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as
-the first character in the value of this option, such as
-.QW * .
-This is useful, for example, if the entry is to be used to enter
-a password.
-If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the
-information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents
-of the entry.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the entry:  \fBnormal\fR,
-\fBdisabled\fR, or \fBreadonly\fR.  If the entry is readonly, then the
-value may not be changed using widget commands and no insertion cursor
-will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget; the
-contents of the widget may still be selected.  If the entry is
-disabled, the value may not be changed, no insertion cursor will be
-displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the entry may
-be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the
-\fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options.
-.OP \-validate validate Validate
-Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: \fBnone\fR,
-\fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR.
-It defaults to \fBnone\fR.  When you want validation, you must explicitly
-state which mode you wish to use.  See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more.
-.OP "\-validatecommand or \-vcmd" validateCommand ValidateCommand
-Specifies a script to eval when you want to validate the input into
-the entry widget.  Setting it to {} disables this feature (the default).
-This command must return a valid Tcl boolean value.  If it returns 0 (or
-the valid Tcl boolean equivalent) then it means you reject the new edition
-and it will not occur and the \fB\-invalidcommand\fR will be evaluated if it
-is set. If it returns 1, then the new edition occurs.
-See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more information.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window,
-in average-size characters of the widget's font.
-If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks a
-size just large enough to hold its current text.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBentry\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into an entry widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the
-command line or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the entry such as its colors, font,
-and relief.  The \fBentry\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-An entry is a widget that displays a one-line text string and
-allows that string to be edited using widget commands described below, which
-are typically bound to keystrokes and mouse actions.
-When first created, an entry's string is empty.
-A portion of the entry may be selected as described below.
-If an entry is exporting its selection (see the \fB\-exportselection\fR
-option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols for handling the
-selection;  entry selections are available as type \fBSTRING\fR.
-Entries also observe the standard Tk rules for dealing with the
-input focus.  When an entry has the input focus it displays an
-\fIinsertion cursor\fR to indicate where new characters will be
-inserted.
-.PP
-Entries are capable of displaying strings that are too long to
-fit entirely within the widget's window.  In this case, only a
-portion of the string will be displayed;  commands described below
-may be used to change the view in the window.  Entries use
-the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR mechanism for interacting with
-scrollbars (see the description of the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option
-for details).  They also support scanning, as described below.
-.SH VALIDATION
-.PP
-Validation works by setting the \fB\-validatecommand\fR option to a
-script (\fIvalidateCommand\fR) which will be evaluated according to
-the \fB\-validate\fR option as follows:
-.PP
-.IP \fBnone\fR 10
-Default.  This means no validation will occur.
-.IP \fBfocus\fR 10
-\fIvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry receives or
-loses focus.
-.IP \fBfocusin\fR 10
-\fIvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry receives focus.
-.IP \fBfocusout\fR 10
-\fIvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry loses focus.
-.IP \fBkey\fR 10
-\fIvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry is edited.
-.IP \fBall\fR 10
-\fIvalidateCommand\fR will be called for all above conditions.
-.PP
-It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the value of the
-\fB\-validatecommand\fR and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR options,
-just as you would in a \fBbind\fR script.  The following substitutions
-are recognized:
-.PP
-.IP \fB%d\fR 5
-Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR, 0 for \fBdelete\fR,
-or \-1 for focus, forced or textvariable validation.
-.IP \fB%i\fR 5
-Index of char string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1.
-.IP \fB%P\fR 5
-The value of the entry if the edit is allowed.  If you are configuring the
-entry widget to have a new textvariable, this will be the value of that
-textvariable.
-.IP \fB%s\fR 5
-The current value of entry prior to editing.
-.IP \fB%S\fR 5
-The text string being inserted/deleted, if any, {} otherwise.
-.IP \fB%v\fR 5
-The type of validation currently set.
-.IP \fB%V\fR 5
-The type of validation that triggered the callback
-(key, focusin, focusout, forced).
-.IP \fB%W\fR 5
-The name of the entry widget.
-.PP
-In general, the \fB\-textvariable\fR and \fB\-validatecommand\fR options can be
-dangerous to mix.  Any problems have been overcome so that using the
-\fB\-validatecommand\fR will not interfere with the traditional behavior of
-the entry widget.  Using the \fB\-textvariable\fR for read-only purposes will
-never cause problems.  The danger comes when you try set the
-\fB\-textvariable\fR to something that the \fB\-validatecommand\fR would not
-accept, which causes \fB\-validate\fR to become \fInone\fR (the
-\fB\-invalidcommand\fR will not be triggered).  The same happens
-when an error occurs evaluating the \fB\-validatecommand\fR.
-.PP
-Primarily, an error will occur when the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or
-\fB\-invalidcommand\fR encounters an error in its script while evaluating or
-\fB\-validatecommand\fR does not return a valid Tcl boolean value.  The
-\fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the
-entry widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the
-\fB\-invalidcommand\fR.  Such editions will override the one that was being
-validated.  If you wish to edit the entry widget (for example set it to {})
-during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should
-include the command
-.CS
-after idle {%W config \-validate %v}
-.CE
-in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you
-were editing the entry widget from).  It is also recommended to not set an
-associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the
-entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBentry\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName subcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fISubcommand\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.
-.SS INDICES
-.PP
-Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as
-arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the entry's
-string, in any of the following ways:
-.TP 12
-\fInumber\fR
-Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
-to the first character in the string.
-.TP 12
-\fBanchor\fR
-Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
-\fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands.
-.TP 12
-\fBend\fR
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string.
-This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
-of the entry's string.
-.TP 12
-\fBinsert\fR
-Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
-insertion cursor.
-.TP 12
-\fBsel.first\fR
-Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
-use this form if the selection is not in the entry window.
-.TP 12
-\fBsel.last\fR
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
-It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the
-entry window.
-.TP 12
-\fB@\fInumber\fR
-In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the
-entry's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
-For example,
-.QW \fB@0\fR
-indicates the left-most character in the window.
-.LP
-Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g.
-.QW \fBe\fR
-or
-.QW \fBsel.f\fR .
-In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the
-nearest legal value.
-.SS SUBCOMMANDS
-.PP
-The following commands are possible for entry widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
-character given by \fIindex\fR.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
-the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
-(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
-the width and height of the character, in pixels.
-The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
-of the window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
-Delete one or more elements of the entry.
-\fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and
-\fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last
-one to delete.
-If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1,
-i.e. a single character is deleted.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR
-Returns the entry's string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR
-Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
-given by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR
-Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR
-Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character
-indicated by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR
-This command is used to implement scanning on entries.  It has
-two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR
-Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the entry window;  used in
-conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.  Typically this
-command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
-returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR
-This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument
-and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for
-the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
-difference in x-coordinates.  This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the entry at high speed through the window.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
-This command is used to adjust the selection within an entry.  It
-has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR
-Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
-\fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR
-(i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR).  The other
-end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
-\fBselect to\fR commands.  If the selection
-is not currently in the entry, then a new selection is created to
-include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent
-selection anchor point, inclusive.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR
-Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
-selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR
-Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
-given by \fIindex\fR.  Does not change the selection.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection present\fR
-Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry,
-0 if nothing is selected.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart\fR \fIend\fR
-Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
-the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just
-before \fIend\fR.
-If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an
-earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR
-If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including
-the anchor point.
-If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
-If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
-\fIindex\fR.
-The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR
-or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget.
-If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is
-created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
-Returns an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR
-This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
-independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
-This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR.
-It returns 0 or 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
-is displayed at the left edge of the window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
-way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
-\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
-\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
-\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display;  if it is
-\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
-If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-.RE
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for entries that give them
-the following default behavior. In the descriptions below,
-.QW word
-refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or
-.QW _
-characters, or any single character other than these.
-.IP [1]
-Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor
-just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the
-input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget.
-Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between
-the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse.
-.IP [2]
-Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse
-and positions the insertion cursor at the end of the word.
-Dragging after a double click will stroke out a selection consisting
-of whole words.
-.IP [3]
-Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects all of the text in the
-entry and positions the insertion cursor at the end of the line.
-.IP [4]
-The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse
-button 1 while the Shift key is down;  this will adjust the end
-of the selection that was nearest to the mouse cursor when button
-1 was pressed.
-If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection
-will be adjusted in units of whole words.
-.IP [5]
-Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will position the
-insertion cursor in the entry without affecting the selection.
-.IP [6]
-If any normal printing characters are typed in an entry, they are
-inserted at the point of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [7]
-The view in the entry can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2.
-If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection
-is copied into the entry at the position of the mouse cursor.
-.IP [8]
-If the mouse is dragged out of the entry on the left or right sides
-while button 1 is pressed, the entry will automatically scroll to
-make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side
-where the mouse left the window).
-.IP [9]
-The Left and Right keys move the insertion cursor one character to the
-left or right;  they also clear any selection in the entry and set
-the selection anchor.
-If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion
-cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-Left and Control-Right move the insertion cursor by words, and
-Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insertion cursor
-by words and also extend the selection.
-Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively.
-Meta-b and Meta-f behave the same as Control-Left and Control-Right,
-respectively.
-.IP [10]
-The Home key, or Control-a, will move the insertion cursor to the
-beginning of the entry and clear any selection in the entry.
-Shift-Home moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the entry
-and also extends the selection to that point.
-.IP [11]
-The End key, or Control-e, will move the insertion cursor to the
-end of the entry and clear any selection in the entry.
-Shift-End moves the cursor to the end and extends the selection
-to that point.
-.IP [12]
-The Select key and Control-Space set the selection anchor to the position
-of the insertion cursor.  They do not affect the current selection.
-Shift-Select and Control-Shift-Space adjust the selection to the
-current position of the insertion cursor, selecting from the anchor
-to the insertion cursor if there was not any selection previously.
-.IP [13]
-Control-/ selects all the text in the entry.
-.IP [14]
-Control-\e clears any selection in the entry.
-.IP [15]
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection.
-.IP [16]
-The F20 key (labelled Cut on many Sun workstations) or Control-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard and deletes
-the selection.
-If there is no selection in the widget then these keys have no effect.
-.IP [17]
-The F18 key (labelled Paste on many Sun workstations) or Control-y
-inserts the contents of the clipboard at the position of the
-insertion cursor.
-.IP [18]
-The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the entry.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-.IP [19]
-The BackSpace key and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one
-in the entry.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the left of
-the insertion cursor.
-.IP [20]
-Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [21]
-Meta-d deletes the word to the right of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [22]
-Control-k deletes all the characters to the right of the insertion
-cursor.
-.IP [23]
-Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-.PP
-If the entry is disabled using the \fB\-state\fR option, then the entry's
-view can still be adjusted and text in the entry can still be selected,
-but no insertion cursor will be displayed and no text modifications will
-take place
-except if the entry is linked to a variable using the \fB\-textvariable\fR
-option, in which case any changes to the variable are reflected by the
-entry whatever the value of its \fB\-state\fR option.
-.PP
-The behavior of entries can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::entry(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-entry, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/event.n b/tk8.6/doc/event.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 54ad42e..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/event.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,602 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH event n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-event \- Miscellaneous event facilities: define virtual events and generate events
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBevent\fI option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBevent\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with
-window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing
-events.  The command has several different forms, determined by the
-first argument.  The following forms are currently supported:
-.TP
-\fBevent add <<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fI sequence \fR?\fIsequence ...\fR?
-Associates the virtual event \fIvirtual\fR with the physical
-event sequence(s) given by the \fIsequence\fR arguments, so that
-the virtual event will trigger whenever any one of the \fIsequence\fRs
-occurs.
-\fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have
-any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the
-\fBbind\fR command.
-If \fIvirtual\fR is already defined, the new physical event sequences
-add to the existing sequences for the event.
-.TP
-\fBevent delete <<\fIvirtual\fB>> \fR?\fIsequence\fR \fIsequence ...\fR?
-Deletes each of the \fIsequence\fRs from those associated with
-the virtual event given by \fIvirtual\fR.
-\fIVirtual\fR may be any string value and \fIsequence\fR may have
-any of the values allowed for the \fIsequence\fR argument to the
-\fBbind\fR command.
-Any \fIsequence\fRs not currently associated with \fIvirtual\fR
-are ignored.
-If no \fIsequence\fR argument is provided, all physical event sequences
-are removed for \fIvirtual\fR, so that the virtual event will not
-trigger anymore.
-.TP
-\fBevent generate \fIwindow event \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
-Generates a window event and arranges for it to be processed just as if
-it had come from the window system.
-\fIWindow\fR gives the path name of the window for which the event
-will be generated; it may also be an identifier (such as returned by
-\fBwinfo id\fR) as long as it is for a window in the current application.
-\fIEvent\fR provides a basic description of
-the event, such as \fB<Shift-Button-2>\fR or \fB<<Paste>>\fR.
-If \fIWindow\fR is empty the whole screen is meant, and coordinates
-are relative to the screen.
-\fIEvent\fR may have any of the forms allowed for the \fIsequence\fR
-argument of the \fBbind\fR command except that it must consist
-of a single event pattern, not a sequence.
-\fIOption-value\fR pairs may be used to specify additional
-attributes of the event, such as the x and y mouse position;  see
-\fBEVENT FIELDS\fR below.  If the \fB\-when\fR option is not specified, the
-event is processed immediately:  all of the handlers for the event
-will complete before the \fBevent generate\fR command returns.
-If the \fB\-when\fR option is specified then it determines when the
-event is processed.  Certain events, such as key events, require
-that the window has focus to receive the event properly.
-.TP
-\fBevent info \fR?\fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR?
-Returns information about virtual events.
-If the \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR argument is omitted, the return value
-is a list of all the virtual events that are currently defined.
-If \fB<<\fIvirtual\fB>>\fR is specified then the return value is
-a list whose elements are the physical event sequences currently
-defined for the given virtual event;  if the virtual event is
-not defined then an empty string is returned.
-.RS
-.PP
-Note that virtual events that are not bound to physical event
-sequences are \fInot\fR returned by \fBevent info\fR.
-.RE
-.SH "EVENT FIELDS"
-.PP
-The following options are supported for the \fBevent generate\fR
-command.  These correspond to the
-.QW %
-expansions allowed in binding scripts for the \fBbind\fR command.
-.TP
-\fB\-above\fI window\fR
-\fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIabove\fR field for the event,
-either as a window path name or as an integer window id.
-Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%a\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-borderwidth\fI size\fR
-\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the
-\fIborder_width\fR field for the event.
-Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-button\fI number\fR
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field
-for a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, overriding
-any button  number provided in the base \fIevent\fR argument.
-Corresponds to the \fB%b\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-count\fI number\fR
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIcount\fR field
-for the event.  Valid for \fBExpose\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%c\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-data\fI string\fR
-\fIString\fR may be any value; it specifies the \fIuser_data\fR field
-for the event.  Only valid for virtual events.  Corresponds to the
-\fB%d\fR substitution for virtual events in binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-delta\fI number\fR
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIdelta\fR field
-for the \fBMouseWheel\fR event.  The \fIdelta\fR refers to the
-direction and magnitude the mouse wheel was rotated.  Note the value
-is not a screen distance but are units of motion in the mouse wheel.
-Typically these values are multiples of 120.  For example, 120 should
-scroll the text widget up 4 lines and \-240 would scroll the text
-widget down 8 lines.  Of course, other widgets may define different
-behaviors for mouse wheel motion.  This field corresponds to the
-\fB%D\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-detail\fI detail\fR
-\fIDetail\fR specifies the \fIdetail\fR field for the event
-and must be one of the following:
-.RS
-.DS
-.ta 6c
-\fBNotifyAncestor\fR	\fBNotifyNonlinearVirtual\fR
-\fBNotifyDetailNone\fR	\fBNotifyPointer\fR
-\fBNotifyInferior\fR	\fBNotifyPointerRoot\fR
-\fBNotifyNonlinear\fR	\fBNotifyVirtual\fR
-.DE
-Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR and
-\fBFocusOut\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%d\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-focus\fI boolean\fR
-\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the \fIfocus\fR
-field for the event.
-Valid for \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%f\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-height\fI size\fR
-\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIheight\fR
-field for the event.  Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-keycode\fI number\fR
-\fINumber\fR  must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR
-field for the event.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%k\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-keysym\fI name\fR
-\fIName\fR must be the name of a valid keysym, such as \fBg\fR,
-\fBspace\fR, or \fBReturn\fR;  its corresponding
-keycode value is used as the \fIkeycode\fR field for event, overriding
-any detail specified in the base \fIevent\fR argument.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%K\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-mode\fI notify\fR
-\fINotify\fR specifies the \fImode\fR field for the event and must be
-one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or
-\fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR.
-Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and
-\fBFocusOut\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%m\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-override\fI boolean\fR
-\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the
-\fIoverride_redirect\fR field for the event.
-Valid for \fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%o\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-place\fI where\fR
-\fIWhere\fR specifies the \fIplace\fR field for the event;  it must be
-either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR.
-Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-root\fI window\fR
-\fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window
-identifier;  it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
-events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%R\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-rootx\fI coord\fR
-\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIx_root\fR
-field for the event.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
-events.  Corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-rooty\fI coord\fR
-\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIy_root\fR
-field for the event.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR
-events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-sendevent\fI boolean\fR
-\fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies the \fIsend_event\fR
-field for the event.  Valid for all events.  Corresponds to the
-\fB%E\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-serial\fI number\fR
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer;  it specifies the \fIserial\fR field
-for the event.  Valid for all events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%#\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-state\fI state\fR
-\fIState\fR specifies the \fIstate\fR field for the event.
-For \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events
-it must be an integer value.
-For \fBVisibility\fR events it must be one of \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR,
-\fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, or \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR.
-This option overrides any modifiers such as \fBMeta\fR or \fBControl\fR
-specified in the base \fIevent\fR.
-Corresponds to the \fB%s\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-subwindow\fI window\fR
-\fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIsubwindow\fR field for the event, either
-as a path name for a Tk widget or as an integer window identifier.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events.
-Similar to \fB%S\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-time\fI integer\fR
-\fIInteger\fR must be an integer value;  it specifies the \fItime\fR field
-for the event.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBMotion\fR,
-and \fBProperty\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%t\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-warp\fI boolean\fR
-\fIboolean\fR must be a boolean value;  it specifies whether
-the screen pointer should be warped as well.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events.  The pointer will
-only warp to a window if it is mapped.
-.TP
-\fB\-width\fI size\fR
-\fISize\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIwidth\fR field
-for the event.
-Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%w\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-when\fI when\fR
-\fIWhen\fR determines when the event will be processed;  it must have one
-of the following values:
-.RS
-.IP \fBnow\fR 10
-Process the event immediately, before the command returns.
-This also happens if the \fB\-when\fR option is omitted.
-.IP \fBtail\fR 10
-Place the event on Tcl's event queue behind any events already
-queued for this application.
-.IP \fBhead\fR 10
-Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue, so that it
-will be handled before any other events already queued.
-.IP \fBmark\fR 10
-Place the event at the front of Tcl's event queue but behind any
-other events already queued with \fB\-when mark\fR.
-This option is useful when generating a series of events that should
-be processed in order but at the front of the queue.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-x\fI coord\fR
-\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIx\fR field
-for the event.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
-\fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR
-events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%x\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the
-screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution
-for binding scripts.
-.TP
-\fB\-y\fI coord\fR
-\fICoord\fR must be a screen distance;  it specifies the \fIy\fR
-field for the event.
-Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR,
-\fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR
-events.
-Corresponds to the \fB%y\fR substitution for binding scripts.
-If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the
-screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution
-for binding scripts.
-.PP
-Any options that are not specified when generating an event are filled
-with the value 0, except for \fIserial\fR, which is filled with the
-next X event serial number.
-.SH "PREDEFINED VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-.PP
-Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of
-notification:
-.TP
-\fB<<AltUnderlined>>\fR
-This is sent to widget to notify it that the letter it has underlined
-(as an accelerator indicator) with the \fB\-underline\fR option has
-been pressed in combination with the Alt key. The usual response to
-this is to either focus into the widget (or some related widget) or to
-invoke the widget.
-.TP
-\fB<<Invoke>>\fR
-This can be sent to some widgets (e.g. button, listbox, menu) as an
-alternative to <space>.
-.TP
-\fB<<ListboxSelect>>\fR
-This is sent to a listbox when the set of selected item(s) in the
-listbox is updated.
-.TP
-\fB<<MenuSelect>>\fR
-This is sent to a menu when the currently selected item in the menu
-changes. It is intended for use with context-sensitive help systems.
-.TP
-\fB<<Modified>>\fR
-This is sent to a text widget when the contents of the widget are
-changed.
-.TP
-\fB<<Selection>>\fR
-This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is
-changed.
-.TP
-\fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR
-This is sent to a text widget when the ttk (Tile) theme changed.
-.TP
-\fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR
-This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a
-user-driven
-.QW "tab to widget"
-action.
-.TP
-\fB<<TraverseOut>>\fR
-This is sent to a widget when the focus leaves the widget because of a
-user-driven
-.QW "tab to widget"
-action.
-.TP
-\fB<<UndoStack>>\fR
-This is sent to a text widget when its undo stack or redo stack becomes
-empty or unempty.
-.TP
-\fB<<WidgetViewSync>>\fR
-This is sent to a text widget when its internal data become obsolete,
-and again when these internal data are back in sync with the widget
-view. The detail field (%d substitution) is either true (when the
-widget is in sync) or false (when it is not).
-.PP
-Tk defines the following virtual events for the purposes of unifying
-bindings across multiple platforms. Users expect them to behave in the
-following way:
-.TP
-\fB<<Clear>>\fR
-Delete the currently selected widget contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<Copy>>\fR
-Copy the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard.
-.TP
-\fB<<Cut>>\fR
-Move the currently selected widget contents to the clipboard.
-.TP
-\fB<<LineEnd>>\fR
-.
-Move to the end of the line in the current widget while deselecting any
-selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<LineStart>>\fR
-.
-Move to the start of the line in the current widget while deselecting any
-selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<NextChar>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next item (i.e., visible character) in the current widget while
-deselecting any selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<NextLine>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next line in the current widget while deselecting any selected
-contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<NextPara>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next paragraph in the current widget while deselecting any
-selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<NextWord>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
-while deselecting any selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<Paste>>\fR
-Replace the currently selected widget contents with the contents of
-the clipboard.
-.TP
-\fB<<PasteSelection>>\fR
-Insert the contents of the selection at the mouse location. (This
-event has meaningful \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR substitutions).
-.TP
-\fB<<PrevChar>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous item (i.e., visible character) in the current widget
-while deselecting any selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<PrevLine>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous line in the current widget while deselecting any selected
-contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<PrevPara>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous paragraph in the current widget while deselecting any
-selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<PrevWindow>>\fR
-Traverse to the previous window.
-.TP
-\fB<<PrevWord>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
-while deselecting any selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<Redo>>\fR
-Redo one undone action.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectAll>>\fR
-.
-Set the range of selected contents to the complete widget.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectLineEnd>>\fR
-.
-Move to the end of the line in the current widget while extending the range
-of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectLineStart>>\fR
-.
-Move to the start of the line in the current widget while extending the range
-of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectNextChar>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next item (i.e., visible character) in the current widget while
-extending the range of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectNextLine>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next line in the current widget while extending the range of
-selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectNextPara>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next paragraph in the current widget while extending the range
-of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectNextWord>>\fR
-.
-Move to the next group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
-while extending the range of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectNone>>\fR
-.
-Reset the range of selected contents to be empty.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectPrevChar>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous item (i.e., visible character) in the current widget
-while extending the range of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectPrevLine>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous line in the current widget while extending the range of
-selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectPrevPara>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous paragraph in the current widget while extending the
-range of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<SelectPrevWord>>\fR
-.
-Move to the previous group of items (i.e., visible word) in the current widget
-while extending the range of selected contents.
-.TP
-\fB<<ToggleSelection>>\fR
-.
-Toggle the selection.
-.TP
-\fB<<Undo>>\fR
-.
-Undo the last action.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.SS "MAPPING KEYS TO VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-.PP
-In order for a virtual event binding to trigger, two things must
-happen.  First, the virtual event must be defined with the
-\fBevent add\fR command.  Second, a binding must be created for
-the virtual event with the \fBbind\fR command.
-Consider the following virtual event definitions:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBevent add\fR <<Paste>> <Control-y>
-\fBevent add\fR <<Paste>> <Button-2>
-\fBevent add\fR <<Save>> <Control-X><Control-S>
-\fBevent add\fR <<Save>> <Shift-F12>
-if {[tk windowingsystem] eq "aqua"} {
-    \fBevent add\fR <<Save>> <Command-s>
-}
-.CE
-.PP
-In the \fBbind\fR command, a virtual event can be bound like any other
-builtin event type as follows:
-.PP
-.CS
-bind Entry <<Paste>> {%W insert [selection get]}
-.CE
-.PP
-The double angle brackets are used to specify that a virtual event is being
-bound.  If the user types Control-y or presses button 2, or if
-a \fB<<Paste>>\fR virtual event is synthesized with \fBevent generate\fR,
-then the \fB<<Paste>>\fR binding will be invoked.
-.PP
-If a virtual binding has the exact same sequence as a separate
-physical binding, then the physical binding will take precedence.
-Consider the following example:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBevent add\fR <<Paste>> <Control-y> <Meta-Control-y>
-bind Entry <Control-y> {puts Control-y}
-bind Entry <<Paste>> {puts Paste}
-.CE
-.PP
-When the user types Control-y the \fB<Control-y>\fR binding
-will be invoked, because a physical event is considered
-more specific than a virtual event, all other things being equal.
-However, when the user types Meta-Control-y the
-\fB<<Paste>>\fR binding will be invoked, because the
-\fBMeta\fR modifier in the physical pattern associated with the
-virtual binding is more specific than the \fB<Control-y\fR> sequence for
-the physical event.
-.PP
-Bindings on a virtual event may be created before the virtual event exists.
-Indeed, the virtual event never actually needs to be defined, for instance,
-on platforms where the specific virtual event would be meaningless or
-ungeneratable.
-.PP
-When a definition of a virtual event changes at run time, all windows
-will respond immediately to the new definition.
-Starting from the preceding example, if the following code is executed:
-.PP
-.CS
-bind Entry <Control-y> {}
-\fBevent add\fR <<Paste>> <Key-F6>
-.CE
-.PP
-the behavior will change such in two ways.  First, the shadowed
-\fB<<Paste>>\fR binding will emerge.
-Typing Control-y will no longer invoke the \fB<Control-y>\fR binding,
-but instead invoke the virtual event \fB<<Paste>>\fR.  Second,
-pressing the F6 key will now also invoke the \fB<<Paste>>\fR binding.
-.SS "MOVING THE MOUSE POINTER"
-.PP
-Sometimes it is useful to be able to really move the mouse pointer. For
-example, if you have some software that is capable of demonstrating directly
-to the user how to use the program. To do this, you need to
-.QW warp
-the mouse around by using \fBevent generate\fR, like this:
-.PP
-.CS
-for {set xy 0} {$xy < 200} {incr xy} {
-    \fBevent generate\fR . <Motion> -x $xy -y $xy -warp 1
-    update
-    after 50
-}
-.CE
-.PP
-Note that it is usually considered bad style to move the mouse pointer for the
-user because it removes control from them. Therefore this technique should be
-used with caution. Also note that it is not guaranteed to function on all
-platforms.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-event, binding, define, handle, virtual event
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/focus.n b/tk8.6/doc/focus.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b8bb2a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/focus.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH focus n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-focus \- Manage the input focus
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBfocus\fR
-\fBfocus \fIwindow\fR
-\fBfocus \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBfocus\fR command is used to manage the Tk input focus.
-At any given time, one window on each display is designated as
-the \fIfocus window\fR;  any key press or key release events for the
-display are sent to that window.
-It is normally up to the window manager to redirect the focus among the
-top-level windows of a display.  For example, some window managers
-automatically set the input focus to a top-level window whenever
-the mouse enters it;  others redirect the input focus only when
-the user clicks on a window.
-Usually the window manager will set the focus
-only to top-level windows, leaving it up to the application to
-redirect the focus among the children of the top-level.
-.PP
-Tk remembers one focus window for each top-level (the most recent
-descendant of that top-level to receive the focus);  when the window
-manager gives the focus
-to a top-level, Tk automatically redirects it to the remembered
-window.  Within a top-level Tk uses an \fIexplicit\fR focus model
-by default.  Moving the mouse within a top-level does not normally
-change the focus;  the focus changes only when a widget
-decides explicitly to claim the focus (e.g., because of a button
-click), or when the user types a key such as Tab that moves the
-focus.
-.PP
-The Tcl procedure \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR may be invoked to
-create an \fIimplicit\fR focus model:  it reconfigures Tk so that
-the focus is set to a window whenever the mouse enters it.
-The Tcl procedures \fBtk_focusNext\fR and \fBtk_focusPrev\fR
-implement a focus order among the windows of a top-level;  they
-are used in the default bindings for Tab and Shift-Tab, among other
-things.
-.PP
-The \fBfocus\fR command can take any of the following forms:
-.TP
-\fBfocus\fR
-Returns the path name of the focus window on the display containing
-the application's main window,  or an empty string if no window in
-this application has the focus on that display.   Note:  it is
-better to specify the display explicitly using \fB\-displayof\fR
-(see below) so that the code will work in applications using multiple
-displays.
-.TP
-\fBfocus \fIwindow\fR
-If the application currently has the input focus on \fIwindow\fR's
-display, this command resets the input focus for \fIwindow\fR's display
-to \fIwindow\fR and returns an empty string.
-If the application does not currently have the input focus on
-\fIwindow\fR's display, \fIwindow\fR will be remembered as the focus
-for its top-level;  the next time the focus arrives at the top-level,
-Tk will redirect it to \fIwindow\fR.
-If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing.
-.TP
-\fBfocus \-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the name of the focus window on the display containing \fIwindow\fR.
-If the focus window for \fIwindow\fR's display is not in this
-application, the return value is an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBfocus \-force \fIwindow\fR
-Sets the focus of \fIwindow\fR's display to \fIwindow\fR, even if
-the application does not currently have the input focus for the display.
-This command should be used sparingly, if at all.
-In normal usage, an application should not claim the focus for
-itself;  instead, it should wait for the window manager to give it
-the focus.
-If \fIwindow\fR is an empty string then the command does nothing.
-.TP
-\fBfocus \-lastfor\fR \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the name of the most recent window to have the input focus
-among all the windows in the same top-level as \fIwindow\fR.
-If no window in that top-level has ever had the input focus, or
-if the most recent focus window has been deleted, then the name
-of the top-level is returned.  The return value is the window that
-will receive the input focus the next time the window manager gives
-the focus to the top-level.
-.SH "QUIRKS"
-.PP
-When an internal window receives the input focus, Tk does not actually
-set the X focus to that window;  as far as X is concerned, the focus
-will stay on the top-level window containing the window with the focus.
-However, Tk generates FocusIn and FocusOut events just as if the X
-focus were on the internal window.   This approach gets around a
-number of problems that would occur if the X focus were actually moved;
-the fact that the X focus is on the top-level is invisible unless
-you use C code to query the X server directly.
-.SH "EXAMPLE"
-.PP
-To make a window that only participates in the focus traversal ring
-when a variable is set, add the following bindings to the widgets
-\fIbefore\fR and \fIafter\fR it in that focus ring:
-.CS
-button .before \-text "Before"
-button .middle \-text "Middle"
-button .after  \-text "After"
-checkbutton .flag \-variable traverseToMiddle \-takefocus 0
-pack .flag \-side left
-pack .before .middle .after
-bind .before <Tab> {
-   if {!$traverseToMiddle} {
-      \fBfocus\fR .after
-      break
-   }
-}
-bind .after <Shift\-Tab> {
-   if {!$traverseToMiddle} {
-      \fBfocus\fR .before
-      break
-   }
-}
-\fBfocus\fR .before
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-events, focus, keyboard, top-level, window manager
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/focusNext.n b/tk8.6/doc/focusNext.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ffcf971..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/focusNext.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_focusNext \fIwindow\fR
-.sp
-\fBtk_focusPrev \fIwindow\fR
-.sp
-\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBtk_focusNext\fR is a utility procedure used for keyboard traversal.
-It returns the
-.QW next
-window after \fIwindow\fR in focus order. The focus order is determined by
-the stacking order of windows and the structure of the window hierarchy.
-Among siblings, the focus order is the same as the stacking order, with the
-lowest window being first.
-If a window has children, the window is visited first, followed by
-its children (recursively), followed by its next sibling.
-Top-level windows other than \fIwindow\fR are skipped, so that
-\fBtk_focusNext\fR never returns a window in a different top-level
-from \fIwindow\fR.
-.PP
-After computing the next window, \fBtk_focusNext\fR examines the
-window's \fB\-takefocus\fR option to see whether it should be skipped.
-If so, \fBtk_focusNext\fR continues on to the next window in the focus
-order, until it eventually finds a window that will accept the focus
-or returns back to \fIwindow\fR.
-.PP
-\fBtk_focusPrev\fR is similar to \fBtk_focusNext\fR except that it
-returns the window just before \fIwindow\fR in the focus order.
-.PP
-\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR changes the focus model for the application
-to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus.
-After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window
-Tk will automatically give it the input focus.
-The \fBfocus\fR command may be used to move the focus to a window
-other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves
-into a new window the focus will jump to that window.
-Note: at present there is no built-in support for returning the
-application to an explicit focus model;  to do this you will have
-to write a script that deletes the bindings created by
-\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-focus, keyboard traversal, top-level
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/font.n b/tk8.6/doc/font.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 72f9270..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/font.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,409 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH font n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-font \- Create and inspect fonts.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBfont\fI option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBfont\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with
-fonts, such as defining named fonts and inspecting the actual attributes of
-a font.  The command has several different forms, determined by the
-first argument.  The following forms are currently supported:
-.TP
-\fBfont actual \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIchar\fR?
-.
-Returns information about the actual attributes that are obtained when
-\fIfont\fR is used on \fIwindow\fR's display; the actual attributes obtained
-may differ from the attributes requested due to platform-dependent
-limitations, such as the availability of font families and point sizes.
-\fIfont\fR is a font description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the
-\fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults to the main window.  If
-\fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that attribute; if it is
-omitted, the return value is a list of all the attributes and their values.
-See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible attributes.  If the
-\fIchar\fR argument is supplied, it must be a single character. The font
-attributes returned will be those of the specific font used to render
-that character, which will be different from the base font if the base
-font does not contain the given character.  If \fIchar\fR may be a hyphen, it
-should be preceded by \fB\-\|\-\fR to distinguish it from a misspelled
-\fIoption\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfont configure \fIfontname\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the desired attributes for the named font called
-\fIfontname\fR.  If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing
-all the options and their values for \fIfontname\fR.  If a single \fIoption\fR
-is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then returns the current value of that
-attribute.  If one or more \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs are specified,
-then the command modifies the given named font to have the given values; in
-this case, all widgets using that font will redisplay themselves using the
-new attributes for the font.  See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the
-possible attributes.
-.RS
-.PP
-Note that on Aqua/Mac OS X, the system fonts (see
-\fBPLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS\fR below) may not be actually altered because they
-are implemented by the system theme. To achieve the effect of modification,
-use \fBfont actual\fR to get their configuration and \fBfont create\fR to
-synthesize a copy of the font which can be modified.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfont create\fR ?\fIfontname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-Creates a new named font and returns its name.  \fIfontname\fR specifies the
-name for the font; if it is omitted, then Tk generates a new name of the
-form \fBfont\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is an integer.  There may be any number
-of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, which provide the desired attributes for
-the new named font.  See \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below for a list of the possible
-attributes.
-.TP
-\fBfont delete\fR \fIfontname\fR ?\fIfontname ...\fR?
-.
-Delete the specified named fonts.  If there are widgets using the named font,
-the named font will not actually be deleted until all the instances are
-released.  Those widgets will continue to display using the last known values
-for the named font.  If a deleted named font is subsequently recreated with
-another call to \fBfont create\fR, the widgets will use the new named font
-and redisplay themselves using the new attributes of that font.
-.TP
-\fBfont families\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR?
-.
-The return value is a list of the case-insensitive names of all font families
-that exist on \fIwindow\fR's display.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
-omitted, it defaults to the main window.
-.TP
-\fBfont measure \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fItext\fR
-.
-Measures the amount of space the string \fItext\fR would use in the given
-\fIfont\fR when displayed in \fIwindow\fR.  \fIfont\fR is a font description;
-see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
-omitted, it
-defaults to the main window.  The return value is the total width in pixels
-of \fItext\fR, not including the extra pixels used by highly exaggerated
-characters such as cursive
-.QW f .
-If the string contains newlines or tabs,
-those characters are not expanded or treated specially when measuring the
-string.
-.TP
-\fBfont metrics \fIfont\fR ?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIoption\fR?
-.
-Returns information about the metrics (the font-specific data), for
-\fIfont\fR when it is used on \fIwindow\fR's display.  \fIfont\fR is a font
-description; see \fBFONT DESCRIPTIONS\fR below.  If the \fIwindow\fR
-argument is
-omitted, it defaults to the main window.  If \fIoption\fR is specified,
-returns the value of that metric; if it is omitted, the return value is a
-list of all the metrics and their values.  See \fBFONT METRICS\fR
-below for a list of the possible metrics.
-.TP
-\fBfont names\fR
-The return value is a list of all the named fonts that are currently defined.
-.SH "FONT DESCRIPTIONS"
-.PP
-The following formats are accepted as a font description anywhere
-\fIfont\fR is specified as an argument above; these same forms are also
-permitted when specifying the \fB\-font\fR option for widgets.
-.TP
-[1] \fIfontname\fR
-.
-The name of a named font, created using the \fBfont create\fR command.  When
-a widget uses a named font, it is guaranteed that this will never cause an
-error, as long as the named font exists, no matter what potentially invalid
-or meaningless set of attributes the named font has.  If the named font
-cannot be displayed with exactly the specified attributes, some other close
-font will be substituted automatically.
-.TP
-[2] \fIsystemfont\fR
-.
-The platform-specific name of a font, interpreted by the graphics server.
-This also includes, under X, an XLFD (see [4]) for which a single
-.QW \fB*\fR
-character was used to elide more than one field in the middle of the
-name.  See \fBPLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS\fR for a list of the system fonts.
-.TP
-[3] \fIfamily \fR?\fIsize\fR? ?\fIstyle\fR? ?\fIstyle ...\fR?
-.
-A properly formed list whose first element is the desired font
-\fIfamily\fR and whose optional second element is the desired \fIsize\fR.
-The interpretation of the \fIsize\fR attribute follows the same rules
-described for \fB\-size\fR in \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below.  Any
-additional optional
-arguments following the \fIsize\fR are font \fIstyle\fRs.  Possible values
-for the \fIstyle\fR arguments are as follows:
-.RS
-.DS
-.ta 3c 6c 9c
-\fBnormal\fR	\fBbold\fR	\fBroman\fR	\fBitalic\fR
-\fBunderline\fR	\fBoverstrike\fR
-.DE
-.RE
-.TP
-[4] X-font names (XLFD)
-.
-A Unix-centric font name of the form
-\fI\-foundry\-family\-weight\-slant\-setwidth\-addstyle\-pixel\-point\-resx\-resy\-spacing\-width\-charset\-encoding\fR.
-The
-.QW \fB*\fR
-character may be used to skip individual fields that the
-user does not care about.  There must be exactly one
-.QW \fB*\fR
-for each field skipped, except that a
-.QW \fB*\fR
-at the end of the XLFD skips any
-remaining fields; the shortest valid XLFD is simply
-.QW \fB*\fR ,
-signifying all fields as defaults.  Any fields that were skipped are
-given default
-values.  For compatibility, an XLFD always chooses a font of the specified
-pixel size (not point size); although this interpretation is not strictly
-correct, all existing applications using XLFDs assumed that one
-.QW point
-was in fact one pixel and would display incorrectly (generally larger) if
-the correct size font were actually used.
-.TP
-[5] \fIoption value \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-A properly formed list of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs that specify
-the desired attributes of the font, in the same format used when defining
-a named font; see \fBFONT OPTIONS\fR below.
-.LP
-When font description \fIfont\fR is used, the system attempts to parse the
-description according to each of the above five rules, in the order specified.
-Cases [1] and [2] must match the name of an existing named font or of a
-system font.  Cases [3], [4], and [5] are accepted on all
-platforms and the closest available font will be used.  In some situations
-it may not be possible to find any close font (e.g., the font family was
-a garbage value); in that case, some system-dependent default font is
-chosen.  If the font description does not match any of the above patterns,
-an error is generated.
-.SH "FONT METRICS"
-.PP
-The following options are used by the \fBfont metrics\fR command to query
-font-specific data determined when the font was created.  These properties are
-for the whole font itself and not for individual characters drawn in that
-font.  In the following definitions, the
-.QW baseline
-of a font is the
-horizontal line where the bottom of most letters line up; certain letters,
-such as lower-case
-.QW g
-stick below the baseline.
-.TP
-\fB\-ascent        \0\fR
-.
-The amount in pixels that the tallest letter sticks up above the baseline of
-the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.
-.TP
-\fB\-descent       \0\fR
-.
-The largest amount in pixels that any letter sticks down below the baseline
-of the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.
-.TP
-\fB\-linespace\fR
-.
-Returns how far apart vertically in pixels two lines of text using the same
-font should be placed so that none of the characters in one line overlap any
-of the characters in the other line.  This is generally the sum of the ascent
-above the baseline line plus the descent below the baseline.
-.TP
-\fB\-fixed          \0\fR
-.
-Returns a boolean flag that is
-.QW \fB1\fR
-if this is a fixed-width font,
-where each normal character is the same width as all the other
-characters, or is
-.QW \fB0\fR
-if this is a proportionally-spaced font, where
-individual characters have different widths.  The widths of control
-characters, tab characters, and other non-printing characters are not
-included when calculating this value.
-.SH "FONT OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The following options are supported on all platforms, and are used when
-constructing a named font or when specifying a font using style [5] as
-above:
-.TP
-\fB\-family \fIname\fR
-.
-The case-insensitive font family name.  Tk guarantees to support the font
-families named \fBCourier\fR (a monospaced
-.QW typewriter
-font), \fBTimes\fR (a serifed
-.QW newspaper
-font), and \fBHelvetica\fR (a sans-serif
-.QW European
-font).  The most closely matching native font family will
-automatically be substituted when one of the above font families is used.
-The \fIname\fR may also be the name of a native, platform-specific font
-family; in that case it will work as desired on one platform but may not
-display correctly on other platforms.  If the family is unspecified or
-unrecognized, a platform-specific default font will be chosen.
-.TP
-\fB\-size \fIsize\fR
-.
-The desired size of the font.  If the \fIsize\fR argument is a positive
-number, it is interpreted as a size in points.  If \fIsize\fR is a negative
-number, its absolute value is interpreted as a size in pixels.  If a
-font cannot be displayed at the specified size, a nearby size will be
-chosen.  If \fIsize\fR is unspecified or zero, a platform-dependent default
-size will be chosen.
-.RS
-.PP
-Sizes should normally be specified in points so the application will remain
-the same ruler size on the screen, even when changing screen resolutions or
-moving scripts across platforms.  However, specifying pixels is useful in
-certain circumstances such as when a piece of text must line up with respect
-to a fixed-size bitmap.  The mapping between points and pixels is set when
-the application starts, based on properties of the installed monitor, but it
-can be overridden by calling the \fBtk scaling\fR command.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-weight \fIweight\fR
-.
-The nominal thickness of the characters in the font.  The value
-\fBnormal\fR specifies a normal weight font, while \fBbold\fR specifies a
-bold font.  The closest available weight to the one specified will
-be chosen.  The default weight is \fBnormal\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-slant \fIslant\fR
-The amount the characters in the font are slanted away from the
-vertical.  Valid values for slant are \fBroman\fR and \fBitalic\fR.
-A roman font is the normal, upright appearance of a font, while
-an italic font is one that is tilted some number of degrees from upright.
-The closest available slant to the one specified will be chosen.
-The default slant is \fBroman\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR
-The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether characters in this
-font should be underlined.  The default value for underline is \fBfalse\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR
-The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether a horizontal line should
-be drawn through the middle of characters in this font.  The default value
-for overstrike is \fBfalse\fR.
-.SH "STANDARD FONTS"
-.PP
-The following named fonts are supported on all systems, and default to values
-that match appropriate system defaults.
-.TP
-\fBTkDefaultFont\fR
-.
-This font is the default for all GUI items not otherwise specified.
-.TP
-\fBTkTextFont\fR
-.
-This font should be used for user text in entry widgets, listboxes etc.
-.TP
-\fBTkFixedFont\fR
-.
-This font is the standard fixed-width font.
-.TP
-\fBTkMenuFont\fR
-.
-This font is used for menu items.
-.TP
-\fBTkHeadingFont\fR
-.
-This font should be used for column headings in lists and tables.
-.TP
-\fBTkCaptionFont\fR
-.
-This font should be used for window and dialog caption bars.
-.TP
-\fBTkSmallCaptionFont\fR
-.
-This font should be used for captions on contained windows or tool dialogs.
-.TP
-\fBTkIconFont\fR
-.
-This font should be used for icon captions.
-.TP
-\fBTkTooltipFont\fR
-.
-This font should be used for tooltip windows (transient information windows).
-.LP
-It is \fInot\fR advised to change these fonts, as they may be modified by Tk
-itself in response to system changes. Instead, make a copy of the font and
-modify that.
-.SH "PLATFORM SPECIFIC FONTS"
-.PP
-The following system fonts are supported:
-.TP
-\fBX Windows\fR
-All valid X font names, including those listed by xlsfonts(1), are available.
-.TP
-\fBMS Windows\fR
-The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's
-style defaults.
-.RS
-.DS
-.ta 3c 6c
-\fBsystem\fR	\fBansi\fR	\fBdevice\fR
-\fBsystemfixed\fR	\fBansifixed\fR	\fBoemfixed\fR
-.DE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBMac OS X\fR
-The following fonts are supported, and are mapped to the user's
-style defaults.
-.RS
-.DS
-.ta 3c 6c
-\fBsystem\fR	\fBapplication\fR	\fBmenu\fR
-.DE
-.PP
-Additionally, the following named fonts provide access to the Aqua
-theme fonts:
-.DS
-.ta 5c
-\fBsystemSystemFont\fR	\fBsystemEmphasizedSystemFont\fR
-\fBsystemSmallSystemFont\fR	\fBsystemSmallEmphasizedSystemFont\fR
-\fBsystemApplicationFont\fR	\fBsystemLabelFont\fR
-\fBsystemViewsFont\fR	\fBsystemMenuTitleFont\fR
-\fBsystemMenuItemFont\fR	\fBsystemMenuItemMarkFont\fR
-\fBsystemMenuItemCmdKeyFont\fR	\fBsystemWindowTitleFont\fR
-\fBsystemPushButtonFont\fR	\fBsystemUtilityWindowTitleFont\fR
-\fBsystemAlertHeaderFont\fR	\fBsystemToolbarFont\fR
-\fBsystemMiniSystemFont\fR	\fBsystemDetailSystemFont\fR
-\fBsystemDetailEmphasizedSystemFont\fR
-.DE
-.RE
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Fill a text widget with lots of font demonstrators, one for every font
-family installed on your system:
-.CS
-pack [text .t \-wrap none] \-fill both \-expand 1
-set count 0
-set tabwidth 0
-foreach family [lsort \-dictionary [\fBfont families\fR]] {
-    .t tag configure f[incr count] \-font [list $family 10]
-    .t insert end ${family}:\\t {} \e
-            "This is a simple sampler\en" f$count
-    set w [\fBfont measure\fR [.t cget \-font] ${family}:]
-    if {$w+5 > $tabwidth} {
-        set tabwidth [expr {$w+5}]
-        .t configure \-tabs $tabwidth
-    }
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-options(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-font
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/fontchooser.n b/tk8.6/doc/fontchooser.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bdd51c7..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/fontchooser.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,181 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <das@users.sourceforge.net>
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-fontchooser \- control font selection dialog
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR ?\fI\-option value \-option value ...\fR?
-.sp
-\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR
-.sp
-\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command controls the Tk font selection dialog. It uses
-the native platform font selection dialog where available, or a dialog
-implemented in Tcl otherwise.
-.PP
-Unlike most of the other Tk dialog commands, \fBtk fontchooser\fR does not
-return an immediate result, as on some platforms (Mac OS X) the standard font
-dialog is modeless while on others (Windows) it is modal. To accommodate this
-difference, all user interaction with the dialog will be communicated to the
-caller via callbacks or virtual events.
-.PP
-The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command can have one of the following forms:
-.TP
-\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure \fR?\fI\-option value \-option value ...\fR?
-.
-Set or query one or more of the configurations options below (analogous to Tk
-widget configuration).
-.TP
-\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR
-.
-Show the font selection dialog. Depending on the platform, may return
-immediately or only once the dialog has been withdrawn.
-.TP
-\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR
-.
-Hide the font selection dialog if it is visible and cause any pending
-\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR command to return.
-.PP
-.SH "CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR
-Specifies/returns the logical parent window of the font selection dialog
-(similar to the \fB\-parent\fR option to other dialogs). The font selection
-dialog is hidden if it is visible when the parent window is destroyed.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR
-Specifies/returns the title of the dialog. Has no effect on platforms where the
-font selection dialog does not support titles.
-.TP
-\fB\-font\fR
-Specifies/returns the font that is currently selected in the dialog if it is
-visible, or that will be initially selected when the dialog is shown (if
-supported by the platform). Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no
-font should be selected. Fonts can be specified in any form given by the "FONT
-DESCRIPTION" section in the \fBfont\fR manual page.
-.TP
-\fB\-command\fR
-Specifies/returns the command prefix to be called when a font selection has
-been made by the user. The command prefix is evaluated at the global level
-after having the specification of the selected font appended. On platforms
-where the font selection dialog offers the user control of further font
-attributes (such as color), additional key/value pairs may be appended before
-evaluation. Can be set to the empty string to indicate that no callback should
-be invoked. Fonts are specified by a list of form [3] of the "FONT DESCRIPTION"
-section in the \fBfont\fR manual page (i.e. a list of the form
-\fI{family size style ?style ...?}\fR).
-.TP
-\fB\-visible\fR
-Read-only option that returns a boolean indicating whether the font selection
-dialog is currently visible. Attempting to set this option results in an error.
-
-.PP
-.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-.TP
-\fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR
-Sent to the dialog parent whenever the visibility of the font selection dialog
-changes, both as a result of user action (e.g. disposing of the dialog via
-OK/Cancel button or close box) and of the \fBtk fontchooser\fR
-\fBshow\fR/\fBhide\fR commands being called. Binding scripts can determine the
-current visibility of the dialog by querying the \fB\-visible\fR configuration
-option.
-.TP
-\fB<<TkFontchooserFontChanged>>\fR
-Sent to the dialog parent whenever the font selection dialog is visible and the
-selected font changes, both as a result of user action and of the \fB\-font\fR
-configuration option being set. Binding scripts can determine the currently
-selected font by querying the \fB\-font\fR configuration option.
-.PP
-.SH NOTES
-.PP
-Callers should not expect a result from \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR and may
-not assume that the dialog has been withdrawn or closed when the command
-returns. All user interaction with the dialog is communicated to the caller via
-the \fB\-command\fR callback and the \fB<<TkFontchooser*>>\fR virtual events.
-It is implementation dependent which exact user actions result in the callback
-being called resp. the virtual events being sent. Where an Apply or OK button
-is present in the dialog, that button will trigger the \fB\-command\fR callback
-and \fB<<TkFontchooserFontChanged>>\fR virtual event. On some implementations
-other user actions may also have that effect; on Mac OS X for instance, the
-standard font selection dialog immediately reflects all user choices to the
-caller.
-.PP
-In the presence of multiple widgets intended to be influenced by the font
-selection dialog, care needs to be taken to correctly handle focus changes: the
-font selected in the dialog should always match the current font of the widget
-with the focus, and the \fB\-command\fR callback should only act on the widget
-with the focus. The recommended practice is to set font dialog \fB\-font\fR and
-\fB\-command\fR configuration options in per\-widget \fB<FocusIn>\fR handlers
-(and if necessary to unset them \- i.e. set to the empty string \- in
-corresponding \fB<FocusOut>\fR handlers). This is particularly important for
-implementers of library code using the font selection dialog, to avoid
-conflicting with application code that may also want to use the dialog.
-.PP
-Because the font selection dialog is application-global, in the presence of
-multiple interpreters calling \fBtk fontchooser\fR, only the \fB\-command\fR
-callback set by the interpreter that most recently called \fBtk fontchooser\fR
-\fBconfigure\fR or \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR will be invoked in response
-to user action and only the \fB\-parent\fR set by that interpreter will receive
-\fB<<TkFontchooser*>>\fR virtual events.
-.PP
-The font dialog implementation may only store (and return) \fBfont\fR
-\fBactual\fR data as the value of the \fB\-font\fR configuration option. This
-can be an issue when \fB\-font\fR is set to a named font, if that font is
-subsequently changed, the font dialog \fB\-font\fR option needs to be set again
-to ensure its selected font matches the new value of the named font.
-.PP
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-proc fontchooserDemo {} {
-    wm title . "Font Chooser Demo"
-    \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-parent .
-    button .b \-command fontchooserToggle \-takefocus 0
-    fontchooserVisibility .b
-    bind . \fB<<TkFontchooserVisibility>>\fR \\
-            [list fontchooserVisibility .b]
-    foreach w {.t1 .t2} {
-        text $w \-width 20 \-height 4 \-borderwidth 1 \-relief solid
-        bind $w <FocusIn> [list fontchooserFocus $w]
-        $w insert end "Text Widget $w"
-    }
-    .t1 configure \-font {Courier 14}
-    .t2 configure \-font {Times 16}
-    pack .b .t1 .t2; focus .t1
-}
-proc fontchooserToggle {} {
-    \fBtk fontchooser\fR [expr {
-            [\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-visible] ?
-            "\fBhide\fR" : "\fBshow\fR"}]
-}
-proc fontchooserVisibility {w} {
-    $w configure \-text [expr {
-            [\fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-visible] ?
-            "Hide Font Dialog" : "Show Font Dialog"}]
-}
-proc fontchooserFocus {w} {
-    \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR \-font [$w cget \-font] \\
-            \-command [list fontchooserFontSelection $w]
-}
-proc fontchooserFontSelection {w font args} {
-    $w configure \-font [font actual $font]
-}
-fontchooserDemo
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-font(n), tk(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-dialog, font, font selection, font chooser, font panel
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/frame.n b/tk8.6/doc/frame.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 72a22db..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/frame.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH frame n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-frame \- Create and manipulate 'frame' simple container widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBframe\fR \fIpathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-pady
-\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
-\-highlightbackground	\-padx	\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-background background Background
-This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option
-except that its value may also be specified as an empty string.
-In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
-no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
-and border.
-.OP \-class class Class
-Specifies a class for the window.
-This class will be used when querying the option database for
-the window's other options, and it will also be used later for
-other purposes such as bindings.
-The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-colormap colormap Colormap
-Specifies a colormap to use for the window.
-The value may be either \fBnew\fR, in which case a new colormap is
-created for the window and its children, or the name of another
-window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual
-as \fIpathName\fR), in which case the new window will use the colormap
-from the specified window.
-If the \fB\-colormap\fR option is not specified, the new window
-uses the same colormap as its parent.
-This option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-container container Container
-The value must be a boolean.  If true, it means that this window will
-be used as a container in which some other application will be embedded
-(for example, a Tk toplevel can be embedded using the \fB\-use\fR option).
-The window will support the appropriate window manager protocols for
-things like geometry requests.  The window should not have any
-children of its own in this application.
-This option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-Note that \fB\-borderwidth\fR, \fB\-padx\fR and \fB\-pady\fR are ignored when
-configured as a container since a container has no border.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.  If this option is less than or equal
-to zero then the window will not request any size at all.  Note that this
-sets the total height of the frame, any \fB\-borderwidth\fR or similar is
-not added.  Normally \fB\-height\fR should not be used if a propagating
-geometry manager, such as \fBgrid\fR or \fBpack\fR, is used within the
-frame since the geometry manager will override the height of the frame.
-.OP \-visual visual Visual
-Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the
-forms accepted by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR.
-If this option is not specified, the new window will use the same
-visual as its parent.
-The \fB\-visual\fR option may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the desired width for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.  If this option is less than or equal
-to zero then the window will not request any size at all.  Note that this
-sets the total width of the frame, any \fB\-borderwidth\fR or similar is
-not added.  Normally \fB\-width\fR should not be used if a propagating
-geometry manager, such as \fBgrid\fR or \fBpack\fR, is used within the
-frame since the geometry manager will override the width of the frame.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBframe\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a frame widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the frame such as its background color
-and relief.  The \fBframe\fR command returns the
-path name of the new window.
-.PP
-A frame is a simple widget.  Its primary purpose is to act as a
-spacer or container for complex window layouts.  The only features
-of a frame are its background color and an optional 3-D border to make the
-frame appear raised or sunken.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is the same as the path name of the frame's window.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
-the frame widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for frame widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBframe\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? \fI?value option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBframe\fR
-command.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-When a new frame is created, it has no default event bindings:
-frames are not intended to be interactive.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-labelframe(n), toplevel(n), ttk::frame(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-frame, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/getOpenFile.n b/tk8.6/doc/getOpenFile.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 39bce41..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/getOpenFile.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH tk_getOpenFile n 4.2 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_getOpenFile, tk_getSaveFile \- pop up a dialog box for the user to select a file to open or save.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBtk_getOpenFile \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-\fBtk_getSaveFile \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The procedures \fBtk_getOpenFile\fR and \fBtk_getSaveFile\fR pop up a
-dialog box for the user to select a file to open or save. The
-\fBtk_getOpenFile\fR command is usually associated with the \fBOpen\fR
-command in the \fBFile\fR menu. Its purpose is for the user to select an
-existing file \fIonly\fR. If the user enters a non-existent file, the
-dialog box gives the user an error prompt and requires the user to give
-an alternative selection. If an application allows the user to create
-new files, it should do so by providing a separate \fBNew\fR menu command.
-.PP
-The \fBtk_getSaveFile\fR command is usually associated with the \fBSave
-as\fR command in the \fBFile\fR menu. If the user enters a file that
-already exists, the dialog box prompts the user for confirmation
-whether the existing file should be overwritten or not.
-.PP
-The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line
-arguments to these two commands:
-.TP
-\fB\-confirmoverwrite\fR \fIboolean\fR
-Configures how the Save dialog reacts when the selected file already
-exists, and saving would overwrite it.  A true value requests a
-confirmation dialog be presented to the user.  A false value requests
-that the overwrite take place without confirmation.  Default value is true.
-.TP
-\fB\-defaultextension\fR \fIextension\fR
-.
-Specifies a string that will be appended to the filename if the user
-enters a filename without an extension. The default value is the empty
-string, which means no extension will be appended to the filename in
-any case. This option is ignored on Mac OS X, which
-does not require extensions to filenames,
-and the UNIX implementation guesses reasonable values for this from
-the \fB\-filetypes\fR option when this is not supplied.
-.TP
-\fB\-filetypes\fR \fIfilePatternList\fR
-.
-If a \fBFile types\fR listbox exists in the file dialog on the particular
-platform, this option gives the \fIfiletype\fRs in this listbox. When
-the user choose a filetype in the listbox, only the files of that type
-are listed. If this option is unspecified, or if it is set to the
-empty list, or if the \fBFile types\fR listbox is not supported by the
-particular platform then all files are listed regardless of their
-types. See the section \fBSPECIFYING FILE PATTERNS\fR below for a
-discussion on the contents of \fIfilePatternList\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-initialdir\fR \fIdirectory\fR
-.
-Specifies that the files in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
-when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified,
-the initial directory defaults to the current working directory
-on non-Windows systems and on Windows systems prior to Vista.
-On Vista and later systems, the initial directory defaults to the last
-user-selected directory for the application. If the
-parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
-relative path to an absolute path.
-.TP
-\fB\-initialfile\fR \fIfilename\fR
-.
-Specifies a filename to be displayed in the dialog when it pops up.
-.TP
-\fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR
-.
-Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog.
-This is only available on Mac OS X.
-.TP
-\fB\-multiple\fR \fIboolean\fR
-.
-Allows the user to choose multiple files from the Open dialog.
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the file dialog. The file
-dialog is displayed on top of its parent window. On Mac OS X, this
-turns the file dialog into a sheet attached to the parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
-.
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title is displayed.
-.TP
-\fB\-typevariable\fR \fIvariableName\fR
-.
-The global variable \fIvariableName\fR is used to preselect which filter is
-used from \fIfilterList\fR when the dialog box is opened and is
-updated when the dialog box is closed, to the last selected
-filter. The variable is read once at the beginning to select the
-appropriate filter. If the variable does not exist, or its value does
-not match any filter typename, or is empty (\fB{}\fR), the dialog box
-will revert to the default behavior of selecting the first filter in
-the list. If the dialog is canceled, the variable is not modified.
-.PP
-If the user selects a file, both \fBtk_getOpenFile\fR and
-\fBtk_getSaveFile\fR return the full pathname of this file. If the
-user cancels the operation, both commands return the empty string.
-.SH "SPECIFYING FILE PATTERNS"
-.PP
-The \fIfilePatternList\fR value given by the \fB\-filetypes\fR option
-is a list of file patterns. Each file pattern is a list of the
-form
-.CS
-\fItypeName\fR {\fIextension\fR ?\fIextension ...\fR?} ?{\fImacType\fR ?\fImacType ...\fR?}?
-.CE
-\fItypeName\fR is the name of the file type described by this
-file pattern and is the text string that appears in the \fBFile types\fR
-listbox. \fIextension\fR is a file extension for this file pattern.
-\fImacType\fR is a four-character Macintosh file type. The list of
-\fImacType\fRs is optional and may be omitted for applications that do
-not need to execute on the Macintosh platform.
-.PP
-Several file patterns may have the same \fItypeName,\fR in which case
-they refer to the same file type and share the same entry in the
-listbox. When the user selects an entry in the listbox, all the files
-that match at least one of the file patterns corresponding
-to that entry are listed. Usually, each file pattern corresponds to a
-distinct type of file. The use of more than one file pattern for one
-type of file is only necessary on the Macintosh platform.
-.PP
-On the Macintosh platform, a file matches a file pattern if its
-name matches at least one of the \fIextension\fR(s) AND it
-belongs to at least one of the \fImacType\fR(s) of the
-file pattern. For example, the \fBC Source Files\fR file pattern in the
-sample code matches with files that have a \fB\.c\fR extension AND
-belong to the \fImacType\fR \fBTEXT\fR. To use the OR rule instead,
-you can use two file patterns, one with the \fIextensions\fR only and
-the other with the \fImacType\fR only. The \fBGIF Files\fR file type
-in the sample code matches files that \fIeither\fR have a \fB\.gif\fR
-extension OR belong to the \fImacType\fR \fBGIFF\fR.
-.PP
-On the Unix and Windows platforms, a file matches a file pattern
-if its name matches at least one of the \fIextension\fR(s) of
-the file pattern. The \fImacType\fRs are ignored.
-.SH "SPECIFYING EXTENSIONS"
-.PP
-On the Unix and Macintosh platforms, extensions are matched using
-glob-style pattern matching. On the Windows platform, extensions are
-matched by the underlying operating system. The types of possible
-extensions are:
-.IP (1)
-the special extension
-.QW *
-matches any file;
-.IP (2)
-the special extension
-.MT
-matches any files that do not have an extension (i.e., the filename
-contains no full stop character);
-.IP (3)
-any character string that does not contain any wild card characters (*
-and ?).
-.PP
-Due to the different pattern matching rules on the various platforms,
-to ensure portability, wild card characters are not allowed in the
-extensions, except as in the special extension
-.QW * .
-Extensions without a full stop character (e.g.
-.QW ~ )
-are allowed but may not work on all platforms.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-set types {
-    {{Text Files}       {.txt}        }
-    {{TCL Scripts}      {.tcl}        }
-    {{C Source Files}   {.c}      TEXT}
-    {{GIF Files}        {.gif}        }
-    {{GIF Files}        {}        GIFF}
-    {{All Files}        *             }
-}
-set filename [\fBtk_getOpenFile\fR \-filetypes $types]
-
-if {$filename ne ""} {
-    # Open the file ...
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-tk_chooseDirectory
-.SH KEYWORDS
-file selection dialog
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/grab.n b/tk8.6/doc/grab.n
deleted file mode 100644
index a6d0d19..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/grab.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH grab n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR
-.sp
-\fBgrab \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg \fR...?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk.
-Tk's grabs are different than the grabs
-described in the Xlib documentation.
-When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer
-events to the grab window and its descendants in Tk's window hierarchy.
-Whenever the pointer is within the grab window's subtree, the pointer
-will behave exactly the same as if there had been no grab at all
-and all events will be reported in the normal fashion.
-When the pointer is outside \fIwindow\fR's tree, button presses and
-releases and
-mouse motion events are reported to \fIwindow\fR, and window entry
-and window exit events are ignored. The grab subtree
-.QW owns
-the pointer:
-windows outside the grab subtree will be visible on the screen
-but they will be insensitive until the grab is released.
-The tree of windows underneath the grab window can include top-level
-windows, in which case all of those top-level windows
-and their descendants will continue to receive mouse events
-during the grab.
-.PP
-Two forms of grabs are possible:  local and global.
-A local grab affects only the grabbing application:  events will
-be reported to other applications as if the grab had never occurred.
-Grabs are local by default.
-A global grab locks out all applications on the screen,
-so that only the given subtree of the grabbing application will be
-sensitive to pointer events (mouse button presses, mouse button releases,
-pointer motions, window entries, and window exits).
-During global grabs the window manager will not receive pointer
-events either.
-.PP
-During local grabs, keyboard events (key presses and key releases)
-are delivered as usual:  the window
-manager controls which application receives keyboard events, and
-if they are sent to any window in the grabbing application then they are
-redirected to the focus window.
-During a global grab Tk grabs the keyboard so that all keyboard events
-are always sent to the grabbing application.
-The \fBfocus\fR command is still used to determine which window in the
-application receives the keyboard events.
-The keyboard grab is released when the grab is released.
-.PP
-Grabs apply to particular displays.  If an application has windows
-on multiple displays then it can establish a separate grab on each
-display.
-The grab on a particular display affects only the windows on
-that display.
-It is possible for different applications on a single display to have
-simultaneous local grabs, but only one application can have a global
-grab on a given display at once.
-.PP
-The \fBgrab\fR command can take any of the following forms:
-.TP
-\fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR
-Same as \fBgrab set\fR, described below.
-.TP
-\fBgrab current \fR?\fIwindow\fR?
-If \fIwindow\fR is specified, returns the name of the current grab
-window in this application for \fIwindow\fR's display, or an empty
-string if there is no such window.
-If \fIwindow\fR is omitted, the command returns a list whose elements
-are all of the windows grabbed by this application for all displays,
-or an empty string if the application has no grabs.
-.TP
-\fBgrab release \fIwindow\fR
-Releases the grab on \fIwindow\fR if there is one, otherwise does
-nothing.  Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBgrab set \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR
-Sets a grab on \fIwindow\fR.  If \fB\-global\fR is specified then the
-grab is global, otherwise it is local.
-If a grab was already in effect for this application on
-\fIwindow\fR's display then it is automatically released.
-If there is already a grab on \fIwindow\fR and it has the same
-global/local form as the requested grab, then the command
-does nothing.  Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBgrab status \fIwindow\fR
-Returns \fBnone\fR if no grab is currently set on \fIwindow\fR,
-\fBlocal\fR if a local grab is set on \fIwindow\fR, and
-\fBglobal\fR if a global grab is set.
-.SH WARNING
-.PP
-It is very easy to use global grabs to render a display completely
-unusable (e.g. by setting a grab on a widget which does not respond to
-events and not providing any mechanism for releasing the grab).  Take
-\fIextreme\fR care when using them!
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-It took an incredibly complex and gross implementation to produce
-the simple grab effect described above.
-Given the current implementation, it is not safe for applications
-to use the Xlib grab facilities at all except through the Tk grab
-procedures.
-If applications try to manipulate X's grab mechanisms directly,
-things will probably break.
-.PP
-If a single process is managing several different Tk applications,
-only one of those applications can have a local grab for a given
-display at any given time.  If the applications are in different
-processes, this restriction does not exist.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Set a grab so that only one button may be clicked out of a group.  The
-other buttons are unresponsive to the mouse until the middle button is
-clicked.
-.CS
-pack [button .b1 \-text "Click me! #1" \-command {destroy .b1}]
-pack [button .b2 \-text "Click me! #2" \-command {destroy .b2}]
-pack [button .b3 \-text "Click me! #3" \-command {destroy .b3}]
-\fBgrab\fR .b2
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-busy(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-grab, keyboard events, pointer events, window
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/grid.n b/tk8.6/doc/grid.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c558071..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/grid.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,456 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH grid n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-grid \- Geometry manager that arranges widgets in a grid
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBgrid \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBgrid\fR command is used to communicate with the grid
-geometry manager that arranges widgets in rows and columns inside
-of another window, called the geometry master (or master window).
-The \fBgrid\fR command can have any of several forms, depending
-on the \fIoption\fR argument:
-.TP
-\fBgrid \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
-.
-If the first argument to \fBgrid\fR is suitable as the first slave
-argument to \fBgrid configure\fR, either a window name (any value
-starting with \fB.\fR) or one of the characters \fBx\fR or \fB^\fR
-(see the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section below), then the command is
-processed in the same way as \fBgrid configure\fR.
-.TP
-\fBgrid anchor \fImaster\fR ?\fIanchor\fR?
-.
-The anchor value controls how to place the grid within the master
-when no row/column has any weight.  See \fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below
-for further details.  The default \fIanchor\fR is \fInw\fR.
-.TP
-\fBgrid bbox \fImaster\fR ?\fIcolumn row\fR? ?\fIcolumn2 row2\fR?
-.
-With no arguments,
-the bounding box (in pixels) of the grid is returned.
-The return value consists of 4 integers.  The first two are the pixel
-offset from the master window (x then y) of the top-left corner of the
-grid, and the second two integers are the width and height of the grid,
-also in pixels.  If a single \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR is specified on
-the command line, then the bounding box for that cell is returned, where the
-top left cell is numbered from zero.  If both \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR
-arguments are specified, then the bounding box spanning the rows and columns
-indicated is returned.
-.TP
-\fBgrid columnconfigure \fImaster index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR?
-.
-Query or set the column properties of the \fIindex\fR column of the
-geometry master, \fImaster\fR.
-The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR
-and \fB\-pad\fR.
-If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as
-a list of column indices to which the configuration options will operate on.
-Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR
-the options apply to all columns currently occupied be slave windows. For
-a window name, that window must be a slave of this master and the options
-apply to all columns currently occupied be the slave.
-The \fB\-minsize\fR option sets the minimum size, in screen units,
-that will be permitted for this column.
-The \fB\-weight\fR option (an integer value)
-sets the relative weight for apportioning
-any extra spaces among
-columns.
-A weight of zero (0) indicates the column will not deviate from its requested
-size.  A column whose weight is two will grow at twice the rate as a column
-of weight one when extra space is allocated to the layout.
-The \fB\-uniform\fR option, when a non-empty value is supplied, places
-the column in a \fIuniform group\fR with other columns that have the
-same value for \fB\-uniform\fR.  The space for columns belonging to a
-uniform group is allocated so that their sizes are always in strict
-proportion to their \fB\-weight\fR values.  See
-\fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below for further details.
-The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be
-added to the largest window contained completely in that column when the
-grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
-If only an option is specified, with no value,
-the current value of that option is returned.
-If only the master window and index is specified, all the current settings
-are returned in a list of
-.QW "\-option value"
-pairs.
-.TP
-\fBgrid configure \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
-.
-The arguments consist of the names of one or more slave windows
-followed by pairs of arguments that specify how
-to manage the slaves.
-The characters \fB\-\fR,  \fBx\fR and \fB^\fR,
-can be specified instead of a window name to alter the default
-location of a \fIslave\fR, as described in the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR
-section, below.
-The following options are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-column \fIn\fR
-.
-Insert the slave so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth column in the grid.
-Column numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
-slave is arranged just to the right of previous slave specified on this
-call to \fBgrid\fR, or column
-.QW 0
-if it is the first slave.  For each
-\fBx\fR that immediately precedes the \fIslave\fR, the column position
-is incremented by one.  Thus the \fBx\fR represents a blank column
-for this row in the grid.
-.TP
-\fB\-columnspan \fIn\fR
-.
-Insert the slave so that it occupies \fIn\fR columns in the grid.
-The default is one column, unless the window name is followed by a
-\fB\-\fR, in which case the columnspan is incremented once for each immediately
-following \fB\-\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-in \fIother\fR
-.
-Insert the slave(s) in the master
-window given by \fIother\fR.  The default is the first slave's
-parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR
-.
-The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).  This is space is added
-inside the slave(s) border.
-The \fIamount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR.
-It defaults to 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR
-.
-The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to
-leave on the top and bottom of the slave(s).
-This space is added inside the slave(s) border.
-The \fIamount\fR  defaults to 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-padx \fIamount\fR
-.
-The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s), in screen units.
-\fIAmount\fR may be a list
-of two values to specify padding for left and right separately.
-The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0.
-This space is added outside the slave(s) border.
-.TP
-\fB\-pady \fIamount\fR
-.
-The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to
-leave on the top and bottom of the slave(s), in screen units.
-\fIAmount\fR may be a list
-of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately.
-The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0.
-This space is added outside the slave(s) border.
-.TP
-\fB\-row \fIn\fR
-.
-Insert the slave so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth row in the grid.
-Row numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
-slave is arranged on the same row as the previous slave specified on this
-call to \fBgrid\fR, or the next row after the highest occupied row
-if this is the first slave.
-.TP
-\fB\-rowspan \fIn\fR
-.
-Insert the slave so that it occupies \fIn\fR rows in the grid.
-The default is one row.  If the next \fBgrid\fR command contains
-\fB^\fR characters instead of \fIslaves\fR that line up with the columns
-of this \fIslave\fR, then the \fBrowspan\fR of this \fIslave\fR is
-extended by one.
-.TP
-\fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR
-.
-If a slave's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this
-option may be used to position (or stretch) the slave within its cell.
-\fIStyle\fR  is a string that contains zero or more of the characters
-\fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR.
-The string can optionally contains spaces or
-commas, but they are ignored.  Each letter refers to a side (north, south,
-east, or west) that the slave will
-.QW stick
-to.  If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR) are
-specified, the slave will be stretched to fill the entire
-height (or width) of its cavity.  The \fB\-sticky\fR option subsumes the
-combination of \fB\-anchor\fR and \fB\-fill\fR that is used by \fBpack\fR.
-The default is
-.QW "" ,
-which causes the slave to be centered in its cavity, at its requested size.
-.LP
-If any of the slaves are already managed by the geometry manager
-then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
-than receiving default values.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBgrid forget \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR?
-.
-Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its
-master and unmaps their windows.
-The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
-The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the
-slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial
-default settings are used.
-.TP
-\fBgrid info \fIslave\fR
-.
-Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
-the slave given by \fIslave\fR in the same option-value form that
-might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR.
-The first two elements of the list are
-.QW "\fB\-in \fImaster\fR"
-where \fImaster\fR is the slave's master.
-.TP
-\fBgrid location \fImaster x y\fR
-.
-Given  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR values in screen units relative to the master window,
-the column and row number at that \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR location is returned.
-For locations that are above or to the left of the grid, \fB\-1\fR is
-returned.
-.TP
-\fBgrid propagate \fImaster\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
-.
-If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR
-then propagation is enabled for \fImaster\fR, which must be a window
-name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below).
-If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is
-disabled for \fImaster\fR.
-In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
-If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or
-\fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
-for \fImaster\fR.
-Propagation is enabled by default.
-.TP
-\fBgrid rowconfigure \fImaster index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR?
-.
-Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the
-geometry master, \fImaster\fR.
-The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR
-and \fB\-pad\fR.
-If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as
-a list of row indices to which the configuration options will operate on.
-Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR
-the options apply to all rows currently occupied be slave windows. For
-a window name, that window must be a slave of this master and the options
-apply to all rows currently occupied be the slave.
-The \fB\-minsize\fR option sets the minimum size, in screen units,
-that will be permitted for this row.
-The \fB\-weight\fR option (an integer value)
-sets the relative weight for apportioning
-any extra spaces among
-rows.
-A weight of zero (0) indicates the row will not deviate from its requested
-size.  A row whose weight is two will grow at twice the rate as a row
-of weight one when extra space is allocated to the layout.
-The \fB\-uniform\fR option, when a non-empty value is supplied, places
-the row in a \fIuniform group\fR with other rows that have the
-same value for \fB\-uniform\fR.  The space for rows belonging to a
-uniform group is allocated so that their sizes are always in strict
-proportion to their \fB\-weight\fR values.  See
-\fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below for further details.
-The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be
-added to the largest window contained completely in that row when the
-grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
-If only an option is specified, with no value,
-the current value of that option is returned.
-If only the master window and index is specified, all the current settings
-are returned in a list of
-.QW "-option value"
-pairs.
-.TP
-\fBgrid remove \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR?
-.
-Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its
-master and unmaps their windows.
-The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
-However, the configuration options for that window are remembered,
-so that if the
-slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous
-values are retained.
-.TP
-\fBgrid size \fImaster\fR
-.
-Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fImaster\fR.
-The size is determined either by the \fIslave\fR occupying the largest
-row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR,
-\fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero.
-.TP
-\fBgrid slaves \fImaster\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?
-.
-If no options are supplied, a list of all of the slaves in \fImaster\fR
-are returned, most recently manages first.
-\fIOption\fR can be either \fB\-row\fR or \fB\-column\fR which
-causes only the slaves in the row (or column) specified by \fIvalue\fR
-to be returned.
-.SH "RELATIVE PLACEMENT"
-.PP
-The \fBgrid\fR command contains a limited set of capabilities that
-permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column
-information for each slave.  This permits slaves to be rearranged,
-added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and
-column information.
-When no column or row information is specified for a \fIslave\fR,
-default values are chosen for
-\fB\-column\fR, \fB\-row\fR, \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR
-at the time the \fIslave\fR is managed. The values are chosen
-based upon the current layout of the grid, the position of the \fIslave\fR
-relative to other \fIslave\fRs in the same grid command, and the presence
-of the characters \fB\-\fR, \fBx\fR, and \fB^\fR in \fBgrid\fR
-command where \fIslave\fR names are normally expected.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-\fR
-.
-This increases the \fB\-columnspan\fR of the \fIslave\fR to the left.  Several
-\fB\-\fR's in a row will successively increase the number of columns spanned. A \fB\-\fR
-may not follow a \fB^\fR or a \fBx\fR, nor may it be the first \fIslave\fR
-argument to \fBgrid configure\fR.
-.TP
-\fBx\fR
-.
-This leaves an empty column between the \fIslave\fR on the left and
-the \fIslave\fR on the right.
-.TP
-\fB^\fR
-.
-This extends the \fB\-rowspan\fR of the \fIslave\fR above the \fB^\fR's
-in the grid.  The number of \fB^\fR's in a row must match the number of
-columns spanned by the \fIslave\fR above it.
-.RE
-.SH "THE GRID ALGORITHM"
-.PP
-The grid geometry manager lays out its slaves in three steps.
-In the first step, the minimum size needed to fit all of the slaves
-is computed, then (if propagation is turned on), a request is made
-of the master window to become that size.
-In the second step, the requested size is compared against the actual size
-of the master.  If the sizes are different, then spaces is added to or taken
-away from the layout as needed.
-For the final step, each slave is positioned in its row(s) and column(s)
-based on the setting of its \fIsticky\fR flag.
-.PP
-To compute the minimum size of a layout, the grid geometry manager
-first looks at all slaves whose \fB\-columnspan\fR and \fB\-rowspan\fR values are one,
-and computes the nominal size of each row or column to be either the
-\fIminsize\fR for that row or column, or the sum of the \fIpad\fRding
-plus the size of the largest slave, whichever is greater.  After that
-the rows or columns in each uniform group adapt to each other.  Then
-the slaves whose row-spans or column-spans are greater than one are
-examined.  If a group of rows or columns need to be increased in size
-in order to accommodate these slaves, then extra space is added to each
-row or column in the group according to its \fIweight\fR.  For each
-group whose weights are all zero, the additional space is apportioned
-equally.
-.PP
-When multiple rows or columns belong to a uniform group, the space
-allocated to them is always in proportion to their weights. (A weight
-of zero is considered to be 1.)  In other words, a row or column
-configured with \fB\-weight 1 \-uniform a\fR will have exactly the same
-size as any other row or column configured with \fB\-weight 1 \-uniform
-a\fR.  A row or column configured with \fB\-weight 2 \-uniform b\fR will
-be exactly twice as large as one that is configured with \fB\-weight 1
-\-uniform b\fR.
-.PP
-More technically, each row or column in the group will have a size
-equal to \fIk*weight\fR for some constant \fIk\fR.  The constant
-\fIk\fR is chosen so that no row or column becomes smaller than its
-minimum size.  For example, if all rows or columns in a group have the
-same weight, then each row or column will have the same size as the
-largest row or column in the group.
-.PP
-For masters whose size is larger than the requested layout, the additional
-space is apportioned according to the row and column weights.  If all of
-the weights are zero, the layout is placed within its master according to
-the \fIanchor\fR value.
-For masters whose size is smaller than the requested layout, space is taken
-away from columns and rows according to their weights.  However, once a
-column or row shrinks to its minsize, its weight is taken to be zero.
-If more space needs to be removed from a layout than would be permitted, as
-when all the rows or columns are at their minimum sizes, the layout is
-placed and clipped according to the \fIanchor\fR value.
-.SH "GEOMETRY PROPAGATION"
-.PP
-The grid geometry manager normally computes how large a master must be to
-just exactly meet the needs of its slaves, and it sets the
-requested width and height of the master to these dimensions.
-This causes geometry information to propagate up through a
-window hierarchy to a top-level window so that the entire
-sub-tree sizes itself to fit the needs of the leaf windows.
-However, the \fBgrid propagate\fR command may be used to
-turn off propagation for one or more masters.
-If propagation is disabled then grid will not set
-the requested width and height of the master window.
-This may be useful if, for example, you wish for a master
-window to have a fixed size that you specify.
-.SH "RESTRICTIONS ON MASTER WINDOWS"
-.PP
-The master for each slave must either be the slave's parent
-(the default) or a descendant of the slave's parent.
-This restriction is necessary to guarantee that the
-slave can be placed over any part of its master that is
-visible without danger of the slave being clipped by its parent.
-In addition, all slaves in one call to \fBgrid\fR must have the same master.
-.SH "STACKING ORDER"
-.PP
-If the master for a slave is not its parent then you must make sure
-that the slave is higher in the stacking order than the master.
-Otherwise the master will obscure the slave and it will appear as
-if the slave has not been managed correctly.
-The easiest way to make sure the slave is higher than the master is
-to create the master window first:  the most recently created window
-will be highest in the stacking order.
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-The \fBgrid\fR command is based on ideas taken from the \fIGridBag\fR
-geometry manager written by Doug. Stein, and the \fBblt_table\fR geometry
-manager, written by George Howlett.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-A toplevel window containing a text widget and two scrollbars:
-.PP
-.CS
-# Make the widgets
-toplevel .t
-text .t.txt \-wrap none \-xscroll {.t.h set} \-yscroll {.t.v set}
-scrollbar .t.v \-orient vertical   \-command {.t.txt yview}
-scrollbar .t.h \-orient horizontal \-command {.t.txt xview}
-
-# Lay them out
-\fBgrid\fR .t.txt .t.v \-sticky nsew
-\fBgrid\fR .t.h        \-sticky nsew
-
-# Tell the text widget to take all the extra room
-\fBgrid rowconfigure\fR    .t .t.txt \-weight 1
-\fBgrid columnconfigure\fR .t .t.txt \-weight 1
-.CE
-.PP
-Three widgets of equal width, despite their different
-.QW natural
-widths:
-.PP
-.CS
-button .b \-text "Foo"
-entry .e \-variable foo
-label .l \-text "This is a fairly long piece of text"
-
-\fBgrid\fR .b .e .l \-sticky ew
-\fBgrid columnconfigure\fR . "all" \-uniform allTheSame
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-pack(n), place(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-geometry manager, location, grid, cell, propagation, size, pack
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/image.n b/tk8.6/doc/image.n
deleted file mode 100644
index fd51cc0..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/image.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-image \- Create and manipulate images
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBimage\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBimage\fR command is used to create, delete, and query images.
-It can take several different forms, depending on the
-\fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:
-.TP
-\fBimage create \fItype \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-Creates a new image and a command with the same name and returns its name.
-\fItype\fR specifies the type of the image, which must be one of
-the types currently defined (e.g., \fBbitmap\fR).
-\fIname\fR specifies the name for the image;  if it is omitted then
-Tk picks a name of the form \fBimage\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is
-an integer.
-There may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs,
-which provide configuration options for the new image.
-The legal set of options is defined separately for each image
-type;  see below for details on the options for built-in image types.
-If an image already exists by the given name then it is replaced
-with the new image and any instances of that image will redisplay
-with the new contents.
-It is important to note that the image command will silently overwrite any
-procedure that may currently be defined by the given name, so choose the
-name wisely.  It is recommended to use a separate namespace for image names
-(e.g., \fB::img::logo\fR, \fB::img::large\fR).
-.TP
-\fBimage delete \fR?\fIname name\fR ...?
-Deletes each of the named images and returns an empty string.
-If there are instances of the images displayed in widgets,
-the images will not actually be deleted until all of the instances
-are released.
-However, the association between the instances and the image
-manager will be dropped.
-Existing instances will retain their sizes but redisplay as
-empty areas.
-If a deleted image is recreated with another call to \fBimage create\fR,
-the existing instances will use the new image.
-.TP
-\fBimage height \fIname\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the height of image \fIname\fR
-in pixels.
-.TP
-\fBimage inuse \fIname\fR
-Returns a boolean value indicating whether or not the image given by
-\fIname\fR is in use by any widgets.
-.TP
-\fBimage names\fR
-Returns a list containing the names of all existing images.
-.TP
-\fBimage type \fIname\fR
-Returns the type of image \fIname\fR (the value of the \fItype\fR
-argument to \fBimage create\fR when the image was created).
-.TP
-\fBimage types\fR
-Returns a list whose elements are all of the valid image types
-(i.e., all of the values that may be supplied for the \fItype\fR
-argument to \fBimage create\fR).
-.TP
-\fBimage width \fIname\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the width of image \fIname\fR
-in pixels.
-.PP
-Additional operations (e.g. writing the image to a file) may be
-available as subcommands of the image instance command. See the manual
-page for the particular image type for details.
-.SH "BUILT-IN IMAGE TYPES"
-.PP
-The following image types are defined by Tk so they will be available
-in any Tk application.
-Individual applications or extensions may define additional types.
-.TP
-\fBbitmap\fR
-Each pixel in the image displays a foreground color, a background
-color, or nothing.
-See the \fBbitmap\fR manual entry for more information.
-.TP
-\fBphoto\fR
-Displays a variety of full-color images, using dithering to
-approximate colors on displays with limited color capabilities.
-See the \fBphoto\fR manual entry for more information.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bitmap(n), options(n), photo(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-height, image, types of images, width
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/keysyms.n b/tk8.6/doc/keysyms.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 512c1a6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/keysyms.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,937 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\"
-.TH keysyms n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-keysyms \- keysyms recognized by Tk
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Tk recognizes many keysyms when specifying key bindings (e.g.,
-.QW "\fBbind\fR \fB. <Key-\fR\fIkeysym\fR\fB>\fR" ).
-The following list enumerates the
-keysyms that will be recognized by Tk.  Note that not all keysyms will
-be valid on all platforms, and some keysyms are also available on
-platforms that have a different native name for that key.
-For example, on Unix systems, the presence
-of a particular keysym is dependant on the configuration of the
-keyboard modifier map.  This list shows keysyms along with their
-decimal and hexadecimal values.
-.PP
-.CS
-space                               32     0x0020
-exclam                              33     0x0021
-quotedbl                            34     0x0022
-numbersign                          35     0x0023
-dollar                              36     0x0024
-percent                             37     0x0025
-ampersand                           38     0x0026
-quoteright                          39     0x0027
-parenleft                           40     0x0028
-parenright                          41     0x0029
-asterisk                            42     0x002a
-plus                                43     0x002b
-comma                               44     0x002c
-minus                               45     0x002d
-period                              46     0x002e
-slash                               47     0x002f
-0                                   48     0x0030
-1                                   49     0x0031
-2                                   50     0x0032
-3                                   51     0x0033
-4                                   52     0x0034
-5                                   53     0x0035
-6                                   54     0x0036
-7                                   55     0x0037
-8                                   56     0x0038
-9                                   57     0x0039
-colon                               58     0x003a
-semicolon                           59     0x003b
-less                                60     0x003c
-equal                               61     0x003d
-greater                             62     0x003e
-question                            63     0x003f
-at                                  64     0x0040
-A                                   65     0x0041
-B                                   66     0x0042
-C                                   67     0x0043
-D                                   68     0x0044
-E                                   69     0x0045
-F                                   70     0x0046
-G                                   71     0x0047
-H                                   72     0x0048
-I                                   73     0x0049
-J                                   74     0x004a
-K                                   75     0x004b
-L                                   76     0x004c
-M                                   77     0x004d
-N                                   78     0x004e
-O                                   79     0x004f
-P                                   80     0x0050
-Q                                   81     0x0051
-R                                   82     0x0052
-S                                   83     0x0053
-T                                   84     0x0054
-U                                   85     0x0055
-V                                   86     0x0056
-W                                   87     0x0057
-X                                   88     0x0058
-Y                                   89     0x0059
-Z                                   90     0x005a
-bracketleft                         91     0x005b
-backslash                           92     0x005c
-bracketright                        93     0x005d
-asciicircum                         94     0x005e
-underscore                          95     0x005f
-quoteleft                           96     0x0060
-a                                   97     0x0061
-b                                   98     0x0062
-c                                   99     0x0063
-d                                  100     0x0064
-e                                  101     0x0065
-f                                  102     0x0066
-g                                  103     0x0067
-h                                  104     0x0068
-i                                  105     0x0069
-j                                  106     0x006a
-k                                  107     0x006b
-l                                  108     0x006c
-m                                  109     0x006d
-n                                  110     0x006e
-o                                  111     0x006f
-p                                  112     0x0070
-q                                  113     0x0071
-r                                  114     0x0072
-s                                  115     0x0073
-t                                  116     0x0074
-u                                  117     0x0075
-v                                  118     0x0076
-w                                  119     0x0077
-x                                  120     0x0078
-y                                  121     0x0079
-z                                  122     0x007a
-braceleft                          123     0x007b
-bar                                124     0x007c
-braceright                         125     0x007d
-asciitilde                         126     0x007e
-nobreakspace                       160     0x00a0
-exclamdown                         161     0x00a1
-cent                               162     0x00a2
-sterling                           163     0x00a3
-currency                           164     0x00a4
-yen                                165     0x00a5
-brokenbar                          166     0x00a6
-section                            167     0x00a7
-diaeresis                          168     0x00a8
-copyright                          169     0x00a9
-ordfeminine                        170     0x00aa
-guillemotleft                      171     0x00ab
-notsign                            172     0x00ac
-hyphen                             173     0x00ad
-registered                         174     0x00ae
-macron                             175     0x00af
-degree                             176     0x00b0
-plusminus                          177     0x00b1
-twosuperior                        178     0x00b2
-threesuperior                      179     0x00b3
-acute                              180     0x00b4
-mu                                 181     0x00b5
-paragraph                          182     0x00b6
-periodcentered                     183     0x00b7
-cedilla                            184     0x00b8
-onesuperior                        185     0x00b9
-masculine                          186     0x00ba
-guillemotright                     187     0x00bb
-onequarter                         188     0x00bc
-onehalf                            189     0x00bd
-threequarters                      190     0x00be
-questiondown                       191     0x00bf
-Agrave                             192     0x00c0
-Aacute                             193     0x00c1
-Acircumflex                        194     0x00c2
-Atilde                             195     0x00c3
-Adiaeresis                         196     0x00c4
-Aring                              197     0x00c5
-AE                                 198     0x00c6
-Ccedilla                           199     0x00c7
-Egrave                             200     0x00c8
-Eacute                             201     0x00c9
-Ecircumflex                        202     0x00ca
-Ediaeresis                         203     0x00cb
-Igrave                             204     0x00cc
-Iacute                             205     0x00cd
-Icircumflex                        206     0x00ce
-Idiaeresis                         207     0x00cf
-Eth                                208     0x00d0
-Ntilde                             209     0x00d1
-Ograve                             210     0x00d2
-Oacute                             211     0x00d3
-Ocircumflex                        212     0x00d4
-Otilde                             213     0x00d5
-Odiaeresis                         214     0x00d6
-multiply                           215     0x00d7
-Ooblique                           216     0x00d8
-Ugrave                             217     0x00d9
-Uacute                             218     0x00da
-Ucircumflex                        219     0x00db
-Udiaeresis                         220     0x00dc
-Yacute                             221     0x00dd
-Thorn                              222     0x00de
-ssharp                             223     0x00df
-agrave                             224     0x00e0
-aacute                             225     0x00e1
-acircumflex                        226     0x00e2
-atilde                             227     0x00e3
-adiaeresis                         228     0x00e4
-aring                              229     0x00e5
-ae                                 230     0x00e6
-ccedilla                           231     0x00e7
-egrave                             232     0x00e8
-eacute                             233     0x00e9
-ecircumflex                        234     0x00ea
-ediaeresis                         235     0x00eb
-igrave                             236     0x00ec
-iacute                             237     0x00ed
-icircumflex                        238     0x00ee
-idiaeresis                         239     0x00ef
-eth                                240     0x00f0
-ntilde                             241     0x00f1
-ograve                             242     0x00f2
-oacute                             243     0x00f3
-ocircumflex                        244     0x00f4
-otilde                             245     0x00f5
-odiaeresis                         246     0x00f6
-division                           247     0x00f7
-oslash                             248     0x00f8
-ugrave                             249     0x00f9
-uacute                             250     0x00fa
-ucircumflex                        251     0x00fb
-udiaeresis                         252     0x00fc
-yacute                             253     0x00fd
-thorn                              254     0x00fe
-ydiaeresis                         255     0x00ff
-Aogonek                            417     0x01a1
-breve                              418     0x01a2
-Lstroke                            419     0x01a3
-Lcaron                             421     0x01a5
-Sacute                             422     0x01a6
-Scaron                             425     0x01a9
-Scedilla                           426     0x01aa
-Tcaron                             427     0x01ab
-Zacute                             428     0x01ac
-.CE
-.CS
-Zcaron                             430     0x01ae
-Zabovedot                          431     0x01af
-aogonek                            433     0x01b1
-ogonek                             434     0x01b2
-lstroke                            435     0x01b3
-lcaron                             437     0x01b5
-sacute                             438     0x01b6
-caron                              439     0x01b7
-scaron                             441     0x01b9
-scedilla                           442     0x01ba
-tcaron                             443     0x01bb
-zacute                             444     0x01bc
-doubleacute                        445     0x01bd
-zcaron                             446     0x01be
-zabovedot                          447     0x01bf
-Racute                             448     0x01c0
-Abreve                             451     0x01c3
-Cacute                             454     0x01c6
-Ccaron                             456     0x01c8
-Eogonek                            458     0x01ca
-Ecaron                             460     0x01cc
-Dcaron                             463     0x01cf
-Nacute                             465     0x01d1
-Ncaron                             466     0x01d2
-Odoubleacute                       469     0x01d5
-Rcaron                             472     0x01d8
-Uring                              473     0x01d9
-Udoubleacute                       475     0x01db
-Tcedilla                           478     0x01de
-racute                             480     0x01e0
-abreve                             483     0x01e3
-cacute                             486     0x01e6
-ccaron                             488     0x01e8
-eogonek                            490     0x01ea
-ecaron                             492     0x01ec
-dcaron                             495     0x01ef
-nacute                             497     0x01f1
-ncaron                             498     0x01f2
-odoubleacute                       501     0x01f5
-rcaron                             504     0x01f8
-uring                              505     0x01f9
-udoubleacute                       507     0x01fb
-tcedilla                           510     0x01fe
-abovedot                           511     0x01ff
-Hstroke                            673     0x02a1
-Hcircumflex                        678     0x02a6
-Iabovedot                          681     0x02a9
-Gbreve                             683     0x02ab
-Jcircumflex                        684     0x02ac
-hstroke                            689     0x02b1
-hcircumflex                        694     0x02b6
-idotless                           697     0x02b9
-gbreve                             699     0x02bb
-jcircumflex                        700     0x02bc
-Cabovedot                          709     0x02c5
-Ccircumflex                        710     0x02c6
-Gabovedot                          725     0x02d5
-Gcircumflex                        728     0x02d8
-Ubreve                             733     0x02dd
-Scircumflex                        734     0x02de
-cabovedot                          741     0x02e5
-ccircumflex                        742     0x02e6
-gabovedot                          757     0x02f5
-gcircumflex                        760     0x02f8
-ubreve                             765     0x02fd
-scircumflex                        766     0x02fe
-kappa                              930     0x03a2
-Rcedilla                           931     0x03a3
-Itilde                             933     0x03a5
-Lcedilla                           934     0x03a6
-Emacron                            938     0x03aa
-Gcedilla                           939     0x03ab
-Tslash                             940     0x03ac
-rcedilla                           947     0x03b3
-itilde                             949     0x03b5
-lcedilla                           950     0x03b6
-emacron                            954     0x03ba
-gacute                             955     0x03bb
-tslash                             956     0x03bc
-ENG                                957     0x03bd
-eng                                959     0x03bf
-Amacron                            960     0x03c0
-Iogonek                            967     0x03c7
-Eabovedot                          972     0x03cc
-Imacron                            975     0x03cf
-Ncedilla                           977     0x03d1
-Omacron                            978     0x03d2
-Kcedilla                           979     0x03d3
-Uogonek                            985     0x03d9
-Utilde                             989     0x03dd
-Umacron                            990     0x03de
-amacron                            992     0x03e0
-iogonek                            999     0x03e7
-eabovedot                         1004     0x03ec
-imacron                           1007     0x03ef
-ncedilla                          1009     0x03f1
-omacron                           1010     0x03f2
-kcedilla                          1011     0x03f3
-uogonek                           1017     0x03f9
-utilde                            1021     0x03fd
-umacron                           1022     0x03fe
-overline                          1150     0x047e
-kana_fullstop                     1185     0x04a1
-kana_openingbracket               1186     0x04a2
-kana_closingbracket               1187     0x04a3
-kana_comma                        1188     0x04a4
-kana_middledot                    1189     0x04a5
-kana_WO                           1190     0x04a6
-kana_a                            1191     0x04a7
-kana_i                            1192     0x04a8
-kana_u                            1193     0x04a9
-kana_e                            1194     0x04aa
-kana_o                            1195     0x04ab
-kana_ya                           1196     0x04ac
-kana_yu                           1197     0x04ad
-kana_yo                           1198     0x04ae
-kana_tu                           1199     0x04af
-prolongedsound                    1200     0x04b0
-kana_A                            1201     0x04b1
-kana_I                            1202     0x04b2
-kana_U                            1203     0x04b3
-kana_E                            1204     0x04b4
-kana_O                            1205     0x04b5
-kana_KA                           1206     0x04b6
-kana_KI                           1207     0x04b7
-kana_KU                           1208     0x04b8
-kana_KE                           1209     0x04b9
-kana_KO                           1210     0x04ba
-kana_SA                           1211     0x04bb
-kana_SHI                          1212     0x04bc
-kana_SU                           1213     0x04bd
-kana_SE                           1214     0x04be
-kana_SO                           1215     0x04bf
-kana_TA                           1216     0x04c0
-kana_TI                           1217     0x04c1
-kana_TU                           1218     0x04c2
-kana_TE                           1219     0x04c3
-kana_TO                           1220     0x04c4
-kana_NA                           1221     0x04c5
-kana_NI                           1222     0x04c6
-kana_NU                           1223     0x04c7
-kana_NE                           1224     0x04c8
-kana_NO                           1225     0x04c9
-kana_HA                           1226     0x04ca
-kana_HI                           1227     0x04cb
-kana_HU                           1228     0x04cc
-kana_HE                           1229     0x04cd
-kana_HO                           1230     0x04ce
-kana_MA                           1231     0x04cf
-kana_MI                           1232     0x04d0
-kana_MU                           1233     0x04d1
-kana_ME                           1234     0x04d2
-kana_MO                           1235     0x04d3
-kana_YA                           1236     0x04d4
-kana_YU                           1237     0x04d5
-kana_YO                           1238     0x04d6
-kana_RA                           1239     0x04d7
-kana_RI                           1240     0x04d8
-kana_RU                           1241     0x04d9
-kana_RE                           1242     0x04da
-kana_RO                           1243     0x04db
-kana_WA                           1244     0x04dc
-kana_N                            1245     0x04dd
-voicedsound                       1246     0x04de
-semivoicedsound                   1247     0x04df
-Arabic_comma                      1452     0x05ac
-Arabic_semicolon                  1467     0x05bb
-Arabic_question_mark              1471     0x05bf
-Arabic_hamza                      1473     0x05c1
-Arabic_maddaonalef                1474     0x05c2
-Arabic_hamzaonalef                1475     0x05c3
-Arabic_hamzaonwaw                 1476     0x05c4
-Arabic_hamzaunderalef             1477     0x05c5
-Arabic_hamzaonyeh                 1478     0x05c6
-Arabic_alef                       1479     0x05c7
-Arabic_beh                        1480     0x05c8
-Arabic_tehmarbuta                 1481     0x05c9
-Arabic_teh                        1482     0x05ca
-Arabic_theh                       1483     0x05cb
-Arabic_jeem                       1484     0x05cc
-Arabic_hah                        1485     0x05cd
-Arabic_khah                       1486     0x05ce
-Arabic_dal                        1487     0x05cf
-Arabic_thal                       1488     0x05d0
-Arabic_ra                         1489     0x05d1
-Arabic_zain                       1490     0x05d2
-Arabic_seen                       1491     0x05d3
-Arabic_sheen                      1492     0x05d4
-Arabic_sad                        1493     0x05d5
-Arabic_dad                        1494     0x05d6
-Arabic_tah                        1495     0x05d7
-Arabic_zah                        1496     0x05d8
-Arabic_ain                        1497     0x05d9
-Arabic_ghain                      1498     0x05da
-Arabic_tatweel                    1504     0x05e0
-Arabic_feh                        1505     0x05e1
-Arabic_qaf                        1506     0x05e2
-Arabic_kaf                        1507     0x05e3
-Arabic_lam                        1508     0x05e4
-Arabic_meem                       1509     0x05e5
-.CE
-.CS
-Arabic_noon                       1510     0x05e6
-Arabic_heh                        1511     0x05e7
-Arabic_waw                        1512     0x05e8
-Arabic_alefmaksura                1513     0x05e9
-Arabic_yeh                        1514     0x05ea
-Arabic_fathatan                   1515     0x05eb
-Arabic_dammatan                   1516     0x05ec
-Arabic_kasratan                   1517     0x05ed
-Arabic_fatha                      1518     0x05ee
-Arabic_damma                      1519     0x05ef
-Arabic_kasra                      1520     0x05f0
-Arabic_shadda                     1521     0x05f1
-Arabic_sukun                      1522     0x05f2
-Serbian_dje                       1697     0x06a1
-Macedonia_gje                     1698     0x06a2
-Cyrillic_io                       1699     0x06a3
-Ukranian_je                       1700     0x06a4
-Macedonia_dse                     1701     0x06a5
-Ukranian_i                        1702     0x06a6
-Ukranian_yi                       1703     0x06a7
-Serbian_je                        1704     0x06a8
-Serbian_lje                       1705     0x06a9
-Serbian_nje                       1706     0x06aa
-Serbian_tshe                      1707     0x06ab
-Macedonia_kje                     1708     0x06ac
-Byelorussian_shortu               1710     0x06ae
-Serbian_dze                       1711     0x06af
-numerosign                        1712     0x06b0
-Serbian_DJE                       1713     0x06b1
-Macedonia_GJE                     1714     0x06b2
-Cyrillic_IO                       1715     0x06b3
-Ukranian_JE                       1716     0x06b4
-Macedonia_DSE                     1717     0x06b5
-Ukranian_I                        1718     0x06b6
-Ukranian_YI                       1719     0x06b7
-Serbian_JE                        1720     0x06b8
-Serbian_LJE                       1721     0x06b9
-Serbian_NJE                       1722     0x06ba
-Serbian_TSHE                      1723     0x06bb
-Macedonia_KJE                     1724     0x06bc
-Byelorussian_SHORTU               1726     0x06be
-Serbian_DZE                       1727     0x06bf
-Cyrillic_yu                       1728     0x06c0
-Cyrillic_a                        1729     0x06c1
-Cyrillic_be                       1730     0x06c2
-Cyrillic_tse                      1731     0x06c3
-Cyrillic_de                       1732     0x06c4
-Cyrillic_ie                       1733     0x06c5
-Cyrillic_ef                       1734     0x06c6
-Cyrillic_ghe                      1735     0x06c7
-Cyrillic_ha                       1736     0x06c8
-Cyrillic_i                        1737     0x06c9
-Cyrillic_shorti                   1738     0x06ca
-Cyrillic_ka                       1739     0x06cb
-Cyrillic_el                       1740     0x06cc
-Cyrillic_em                       1741     0x06cd
-Cyrillic_en                       1742     0x06ce
-Cyrillic_o                        1743     0x06cf
-Cyrillic_pe                       1744     0x06d0
-Cyrillic_ya                       1745     0x06d1
-Cyrillic_er                       1746     0x06d2
-Cyrillic_es                       1747     0x06d3
-Cyrillic_te                       1748     0x06d4
-Cyrillic_u                        1749     0x06d5
-Cyrillic_zhe                      1750     0x06d6
-Cyrillic_ve                       1751     0x06d7
-Cyrillic_softsign                 1752     0x06d8
-Cyrillic_yeru                     1753     0x06d9
-Cyrillic_ze                       1754     0x06da
-Cyrillic_sha                      1755     0x06db
-Cyrillic_e                        1756     0x06dc
-Cyrillic_shcha                    1757     0x06dd
-Cyrillic_che                      1758     0x06de
-Cyrillic_hardsign                 1759     0x06df
-Cyrillic_YU                       1760     0x06e0
-Cyrillic_A                        1761     0x06e1
-Cyrillic_BE                       1762     0x06e2
-Cyrillic_TSE                      1763     0x06e3
-Cyrillic_DE                       1764     0x06e4
-Cyrillic_IE                       1765     0x06e5
-Cyrillic_EF                       1766     0x06e6
-Cyrillic_GHE                      1767     0x06e7
-Cyrillic_HA                       1768     0x06e8
-Cyrillic_I                        1769     0x06e9
-Cyrillic_SHORTI                   1770     0x06ea
-Cyrillic_KA                       1771     0x06eb
-Cyrillic_EL                       1772     0x06ec
-Cyrillic_EM                       1773     0x06ed
-Cyrillic_EN                       1774     0x06ee
-Cyrillic_O                        1775     0x06ef
-Cyrillic_PE                       1776     0x06f0
-Cyrillic_YA                       1777     0x06f1
-Cyrillic_ER                       1778     0x06f2
-Cyrillic_ES                       1779     0x06f3
-Cyrillic_TE                       1780     0x06f4
-Cyrillic_U                        1781     0x06f5
-Cyrillic_ZHE                      1782     0x06f6
-Cyrillic_VE                       1783     0x06f7
-Cyrillic_SOFTSIGN                 1784     0x06f8
-Cyrillic_YERU                     1785     0x06f9
-Cyrillic_ZE                       1786     0x06fa
-Cyrillic_SHA                      1787     0x06fb
-Cyrillic_E                        1788     0x06fc
-Cyrillic_SHCHA                    1789     0x06fd
-Cyrillic_CHE                      1790     0x06fe
-Cyrillic_HARDSIGN                 1791     0x06ff
-Greek_ALPHAaccent                 1953     0x07a1
-Greek_EPSILONaccent               1954     0x07a2
-Greek_ETAaccent                   1955     0x07a3
-Greek_IOTAaccent                  1956     0x07a4
-Greek_IOTAdiaeresis               1957     0x07a5
-Greek_IOTAaccentdiaeresis         1958     0x07a6
-Greek_OMICRONaccent               1959     0x07a7
-Greek_UPSILONaccent               1960     0x07a8
-Greek_UPSILONdieresis             1961     0x07a9
-Greek_UPSILONaccentdieresis       1962     0x07aa
-Greek_OMEGAaccent                 1963     0x07ab
-Greek_alphaaccent                 1969     0x07b1
-Greek_epsilonaccent               1970     0x07b2
-Greek_etaaccent                   1971     0x07b3
-Greek_iotaaccent                  1972     0x07b4
-Greek_iotadieresis                1973     0x07b5
-Greek_iotaaccentdieresis          1974     0x07b6
-Greek_omicronaccent               1975     0x07b7
-Greek_upsilonaccent               1976     0x07b8
-Greek_upsilondieresis             1977     0x07b9
-Greek_upsilonaccentdieresis       1978     0x07ba
-Greek_omegaaccent                 1979     0x07bb
-Greek_ALPHA                       1985     0x07c1
-Greek_BETA                        1986     0x07c2
-Greek_GAMMA                       1987     0x07c3
-Greek_DELTA                       1988     0x07c4
-Greek_EPSILON                     1989     0x07c5
-Greek_ZETA                        1990     0x07c6
-Greek_ETA                         1991     0x07c7
-Greek_THETA                       1992     0x07c8
-Greek_IOTA                        1993     0x07c9
-Greek_KAPPA                       1994     0x07ca
-Greek_LAMBDA                      1995     0x07cb
-Greek_MU                          1996     0x07cc
-Greek_NU                          1997     0x07cd
-Greek_XI                          1998     0x07ce
-Greek_OMICRON                     1999     0x07cf
-Greek_PI                          2000     0x07d0
-Greek_RHO                         2001     0x07d1
-Greek_SIGMA                       2002     0x07d2
-Greek_TAU                         2004     0x07d4
-Greek_UPSILON                     2005     0x07d5
-Greek_PHI                         2006     0x07d6
-Greek_CHI                         2007     0x07d7
-Greek_PSI                         2008     0x07d8
-Greek_OMEGA                       2009     0x07d9
-Greek_alpha                       2017     0x07e1
-Greek_beta                        2018     0x07e2
-Greek_gamma                       2019     0x07e3
-Greek_delta                       2020     0x07e4
-Greek_epsilon                     2021     0x07e5
-Greek_zeta                        2022     0x07e6
-Greek_eta                         2023     0x07e7
-Greek_theta                       2024     0x07e8
-Greek_iota                        2025     0x07e9
-Greek_kappa                       2026     0x07ea
-Greek_lambda                      2027     0x07eb
-Greek_mu                          2028     0x07ec
-Greek_nu                          2029     0x07ed
-Greek_xi                          2030     0x07ee
-Greek_omicron                     2031     0x07ef
-Greek_pi                          2032     0x07f0
-Greek_rho                         2033     0x07f1
-Greek_sigma                       2034     0x07f2
-Greek_finalsmallsigma             2035     0x07f3
-Greek_tau                         2036     0x07f4
-Greek_upsilon                     2037     0x07f5
-Greek_phi                         2038     0x07f6
-Greek_chi                         2039     0x07f7
-Greek_psi                         2040     0x07f8
-Greek_omega                       2041     0x07f9
-leftradical                       2209     0x08a1
-topleftradical                    2210     0x08a2
-horizconnector                    2211     0x08a3
-topintegral                       2212     0x08a4
-botintegral                       2213     0x08a5
-vertconnector                     2214     0x08a6
-topleftsqbracket                  2215     0x08a7
-botleftsqbracket                  2216     0x08a8
-toprightsqbracket                 2217     0x08a9
-botrightsqbracket                 2218     0x08aa
-topleftparens                     2219     0x08ab
-botleftparens                     2220     0x08ac
-toprightparens                    2221     0x08ad
-botrightparens                    2222     0x08ae
-leftmiddlecurlybrace              2223     0x08af
-rightmiddlecurlybrace             2224     0x08b0
-topleftsummation                  2225     0x08b1
-botleftsummation                  2226     0x08b2
-topvertsummationconnector         2227     0x08b3
-botvertsummationconnector         2228     0x08b4
-toprightsummation                 2229     0x08b5
-botrightsummation                 2230     0x08b6
-rightmiddlesummation              2231     0x08b7
-.CE
-.CS
-lessthanequal                     2236     0x08bc
-notequal                          2237     0x08bd
-greaterthanequal                  2238     0x08be
-integral                          2239     0x08bf
-therefore                         2240     0x08c0
-variation                         2241     0x08c1
-infinity                          2242     0x08c2
-nabla                             2245     0x08c5
-approximate                       2248     0x08c8
-similarequal                      2249     0x08c9
-ifonlyif                          2253     0x08cd
-implies                           2254     0x08ce
-identical                         2255     0x08cf
-radical                           2262     0x08d6
-includedin                        2266     0x08da
-includes                          2267     0x08db
-intersection                      2268     0x08dc
-union                             2269     0x08dd
-logicaland                        2270     0x08de
-logicalor                         2271     0x08df
-partialderivative                 2287     0x08ef
-function                          2294     0x08f6
-leftarrow                         2299     0x08fb
-uparrow                           2300     0x08fc
-rightarrow                        2301     0x08fd
-downarrow                         2302     0x08fe
-blank                             2527     0x09df
-soliddiamond                      2528     0x09e0
-checkerboard                      2529     0x09e1
-ht                                2530     0x09e2
-ff                                2531     0x09e3
-cr                                2532     0x09e4
-lf                                2533     0x09e5
-nl                                2536     0x09e8
-vt                                2537     0x09e9
-lowrightcorner                    2538     0x09ea
-uprightcorner                     2539     0x09eb
-upleftcorner                      2540     0x09ec
-lowleftcorner                     2541     0x09ed
-crossinglines                     2542     0x09ee
-horizlinescan1                    2543     0x09ef
-horizlinescan3                    2544     0x09f0
-horizlinescan5                    2545     0x09f1
-horizlinescan7                    2546     0x09f2
-horizlinescan9                    2547     0x09f3
-leftt                             2548     0x09f4
-rightt                            2549     0x09f5
-bott                              2550     0x09f6
-topt                              2551     0x09f7
-vertbar                           2552     0x09f8
-emspace                           2721     0x0aa1
-enspace                           2722     0x0aa2
-em3space                          2723     0x0aa3
-em4space                          2724     0x0aa4
-digitspace                        2725     0x0aa5
-punctspace                        2726     0x0aa6
-thinspace                         2727     0x0aa7
-hairspace                         2728     0x0aa8
-emdash                            2729     0x0aa9
-endash                            2730     0x0aaa
-signifblank                       2732     0x0aac
-ellipsis                          2734     0x0aae
-doubbaselinedot                   2735     0x0aaf
-onethird                          2736     0x0ab0
-twothirds                         2737     0x0ab1
-onefifth                          2738     0x0ab2
-twofifths                         2739     0x0ab3
-threefifths                       2740     0x0ab4
-fourfifths                        2741     0x0ab5
-onesixth                          2742     0x0ab6
-fivesixths                        2743     0x0ab7
-careof                            2744     0x0ab8
-figdash                           2747     0x0abb
-leftanglebracket                  2748     0x0abc
-decimalpoint                      2749     0x0abd
-rightanglebracket                 2750     0x0abe
-marker                            2751     0x0abf
-oneeighth                         2755     0x0ac3
-threeeighths                      2756     0x0ac4
-fiveeighths                       2757     0x0ac5
-seveneighths                      2758     0x0ac6
-trademark                         2761     0x0ac9
-signaturemark                     2762     0x0aca
-trademarkincircle                 2763     0x0acb
-leftopentriangle                  2764     0x0acc
-rightopentriangle                 2765     0x0acd
-emopencircle                      2766     0x0ace
-emopenrectangle                   2767     0x0acf
-leftsinglequotemark               2768     0x0ad0
-rightsinglequotemark              2769     0x0ad1
-leftdoublequotemark               2770     0x0ad2
-rightdoublequotemark              2771     0x0ad3
-prescription                      2772     0x0ad4
-minutes                           2774     0x0ad6
-seconds                           2775     0x0ad7
-latincross                        2777     0x0ad9
-hexagram                          2778     0x0ada
-filledrectbullet                  2779     0x0adb
-filledlefttribullet               2780     0x0adc
-filledrighttribullet              2781     0x0add
-emfilledcircle                    2782     0x0ade
-emfilledrect                      2783     0x0adf
-enopencircbullet                  2784     0x0ae0
-enopensquarebullet                2785     0x0ae1
-openrectbullet                    2786     0x0ae2
-opentribulletup                   2787     0x0ae3
-opentribulletdown                 2788     0x0ae4
-openstar                          2789     0x0ae5
-enfilledcircbullet                2790     0x0ae6
-enfilledsqbullet                  2791     0x0ae7
-filledtribulletup                 2792     0x0ae8
-filledtribulletdown               2793     0x0ae9
-leftpointer                       2794     0x0aea
-rightpointer                      2795     0x0aeb
-club                              2796     0x0aec
-diamond                           2797     0x0aed
-heart                             2798     0x0aee
-maltesecross                      2800     0x0af0
-dagger                            2801     0x0af1
-doubledagger                      2802     0x0af2
-checkmark                         2803     0x0af3
-ballotcross                       2804     0x0af4
-musicalsharp                      2805     0x0af5
-musicalflat                       2806     0x0af6
-malesymbol                        2807     0x0af7
-femalesymbol                      2808     0x0af8
-telephone                         2809     0x0af9
-telephonerecorder                 2810     0x0afa
-phonographcopyright               2811     0x0afb
-caret                             2812     0x0afc
-singlelowquotemark                2813     0x0afd
-doublelowquotemark                2814     0x0afe
-cursor                            2815     0x0aff
-leftcaret                         2979     0x0ba3
-rightcaret                        2982     0x0ba6
-downcaret                         2984     0x0ba8
-upcaret                           2985     0x0ba9
-overbar                           3008     0x0bc0
-downtack                          3010     0x0bc2
-upshoe                            3011     0x0bc3
-downstile                         3012     0x0bc4
-underbar                          3014     0x0bc6
-jot                               3018     0x0bca
-quad                              3020     0x0bcc
-uptack                            3022     0x0bce
-circle                            3023     0x0bcf
-upstile                           3027     0x0bd3
-downshoe                          3030     0x0bd6
-rightshoe                         3032     0x0bd8
-leftshoe                          3034     0x0bda
-lefttack                          3036     0x0bdc
-righttack                         3068     0x0bfc
-hebrew_aleph                      3296     0x0ce0
-hebrew_beth                       3297     0x0ce1
-hebrew_gimmel                     3298     0x0ce2
-hebrew_daleth                     3299     0x0ce3
-hebrew_he                         3300     0x0ce4
-hebrew_waw                        3301     0x0ce5
-hebrew_zayin                      3302     0x0ce6
-hebrew_het                        3303     0x0ce7
-hebrew_teth                       3304     0x0ce8
-hebrew_yod                        3305     0x0ce9
-hebrew_finalkaph                  3306     0x0cea
-hebrew_kaph                       3307     0x0ceb
-hebrew_lamed                      3308     0x0cec
-hebrew_finalmem                   3309     0x0ced
-hebrew_mem                        3310     0x0cee
-hebrew_finalnun                   3311     0x0cef
-hebrew_nun                        3312     0x0cf0
-hebrew_samekh                     3313     0x0cf1
-hebrew_ayin                       3314     0x0cf2
-hebrew_finalpe                    3315     0x0cf3
-hebrew_pe                         3316     0x0cf4
-hebrew_finalzadi                  3317     0x0cf5
-hebrew_zadi                       3318     0x0cf6
-hebrew_kuf                        3319     0x0cf7
-hebrew_resh                       3320     0x0cf8
-hebrew_shin                       3321     0x0cf9
-hebrew_taf                        3322     0x0cfa
-BackSpace                        65288     0xff08
-Tab                              65289     0xff09
-Linefeed                         65290     0xff0a
-Clear                            65291     0xff0b
-Return                           65293     0xff0d
-Pause                            65299     0xff13
-Scroll_Lock                      65300     0xff14
-Sys_Req                          65301     0xff15
-Escape                           65307     0xff1b
-Multi_key                        65312     0xff20
-Kanji                            65313     0xff21
-Home                             65360     0xff50
-Left                             65361     0xff51
-Up                               65362     0xff52
-Right                            65363     0xff53
-Down                             65364     0xff54
-Prior                            65365     0xff55
-Next                             65366     0xff56
-End                              65367     0xff57
-Begin                            65368     0xff58
-Win_L                            65371     0xff5b
-Win_R                            65372     0xff5c
-.CE
-.CS
-App                              65373     0xff5d
-Select                           65376     0xff60
-Print                            65377     0xff61
-Execute                          65378     0xff62
-Insert                           65379     0xff63
-Undo                             65381     0xff65
-Redo                             65382     0xff66
-Menu                             65383     0xff67
-Find                             65384     0xff68
-Cancel                           65385     0xff69
-Help                             65386     0xff6a
-Break                            65387     0xff6b
-Hebrew_switch                    65406     0xff7e
-Num_Lock                         65407     0xff7f
-KP_Space                         65408     0xff80
-KP_Tab                           65417     0xff89
-KP_Enter                         65421     0xff8d
-KP_F1                            65425     0xff91
-KP_F2                            65426     0xff92
-KP_F3                            65427     0xff93
-KP_F4                            65428     0xff94
-KP_Multiply                      65450     0xffaa
-KP_Add                           65451     0xffab
-KP_Separator                     65452     0xffac
-KP_Subtract                      65453     0xffad
-KP_Decimal                       65454     0xffae
-KP_Divide                        65455     0xffaf
-KP_0                             65456     0xffb0
-KP_1                             65457     0xffb1
-KP_2                             65458     0xffb2
-KP_3                             65459     0xffb3
-KP_4                             65460     0xffb4
-KP_5                             65461     0xffb5
-KP_6                             65462     0xffb6
-KP_7                             65463     0xffb7
-KP_8                             65464     0xffb8
-KP_9                             65465     0xffb9
-KP_Equal                         65469     0xffbd
-F1                               65470     0xffbe
-F2                               65471     0xffbf
-F3                               65472     0xffc0
-F4                               65473     0xffc1
-F5                               65474     0xffc2
-F6                               65475     0xffc3
-F7                               65476     0xffc4
-F8                               65477     0xffc5
-F9                               65478     0xffc6
-F10                              65479     0xffc7
-L1                               65480     0xffc8
-L2                               65481     0xffc9
-L3                               65482     0xffca
-L4                               65483     0xffcb
-L5                               65484     0xffcc
-L6                               65485     0xffcd
-L7                               65486     0xffce
-L8                               65487     0xffcf
-L9                               65488     0xffd0
-L10                              65489     0xffd1
-R1                               65490     0xffd2
-R2                               65491     0xffd3
-R3                               65492     0xffd4
-R4                               65493     0xffd5
-R5                               65494     0xffd6
-R6                               65495     0xffd7
-R7                               65496     0xffd8
-R8                               65497     0xffd9
-R9                               65498     0xffda
-R10                              65499     0xffdb
-R11                              65500     0xffdc
-R12                              65501     0xffdd
-F33                              65502     0xffde
-R14                              65503     0xffdf
-R15                              65504     0xffe0
-Shift_L                          65505     0xffe1
-Shift_R                          65506     0xffe2
-Control_L                        65507     0xffe3
-Control_R                        65508     0xffe4
-Caps_Lock                        65509     0xffe5
-Shift_Lock                       65510     0xffe6
-Meta_L                           65511     0xffe7
-Meta_R                           65512     0xffe8
-Alt_L                            65513     0xffe9
-Alt_R                            65514     0xffea
-Super_L                          65515     0xffeb
-Super_R                          65516     0xffec
-Hyper_L                          65517     0xffed
-Hyper_R                          65518     0xffee
-Delete                           65535     0xffff
-XF86AudioLowerVolume         269025041     0x1008FF11
-XF86AudioMute                269025042     0x1008FF12
-XF86AudioRaiseVolume         269025043     0x1008FF13
-XF86AudioPlay                269025044     0x1008FF14
-XF86AudioStop                269025045     0x1008FF15
-XF86AudioPrev                269025046     0x1008FF16
-XF86AudioNext                269025047     0x1008FF17
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n), event(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bind, binding, event, keysym
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/label.n b/tk8.6/doc/label.n
deleted file mode 100644
index f2ba88c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/label.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH label n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-label \- Create and manipulate 'label' non-interactive text or image widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlabel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
-\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
-\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
-\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
-\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable
-\-compound	\-image	\-underline
-\-cursor	\-justify	\-wraplength
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies a desired height for the label.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option is not specified, the label's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the label:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
-or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the button is displayed using the
-\fB\-foreground\fR and \fB\-background\fR options.  In active state
-the label is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR and
-\fB\-activebackground\fR options.  In the disabled state the
-\fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-background\fR options determine how
-the button is displayed.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies a desired width for the label.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option is not specified, the label's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a label widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the label such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The \fBlabel\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A label is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the \fB\-wraplength\fR option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-\fB\-underline\fR option.
-The label can be manipulated in a few simple ways, such as
-changing its relief or text, using the commands described below.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for label widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR
-command.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-When a new label is created, it has no default event bindings:
-labels are not intended to be interactive.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-# Make the widgets
-\fBlabel\fR .t \-text "This widget is at the top"    \-bg red
-\fBlabel\fR .b \-text "This widget is at the bottom" \-bg green
-\fBlabel\fR .l \-text "Left\enHand\enSide"
-\fBlabel\fR .r \-text "Right\enHand\enSide"
-text .mid
-\&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout"
-# Lay them out
-pack .t   \-side top    \-fill x
-pack .b   \-side bottom \-fill x
-pack .l   \-side left   \-fill y
-pack .r   \-side right  \-fill y
-pack .mid \-expand 1    \-fill both
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-labelframe(n), button(n), ttk::label(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-label, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/labelframe.n b/tk8.6/doc/labelframe.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 857208e..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/labelframe.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,175 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH labelframe n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-labelframe \- Create and manipulate 'labelframe' labelled container widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlabelframe\fR \fIpathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightbackground	\-pady
-\-cursor	\-highlightcolor	\-relief
-\-font	\-highlightthickness	\-takefocus
-\-foreground	\-padx	\-text
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-background background Background
-This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option
-except that its value may also be specified as an empty string.
-In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
-no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
-and border.
-.OP \-class class Class
-Specifies a class for the window.
-This class will be used when querying the option database for
-the window's other options, and it will also be used later for
-other purposes such as bindings.
-The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-colormap colormap Colormap
-Specifies a colormap to use for the window.
-The value may be either \fBnew\fR, in which case a new colormap is
-created for the window and its children, or the name of another
-window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual
-as \fIpathName\fR), in which case the new window will use the colormap
-from the specified window.
-If the \fB\-colormap\fR option is not specified, the new window
-uses the same colormap as its parent.
-This option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-.OP \-labelanchor labelAnchor LabelAnchor
-Specifies where to place the label. A label is only displayed if the
-\fB\-text\fR option is not the empty string.
-Valid values for this option are (listing them clockwise)
-\fBnw\fR, \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBen\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBes\fR,
-\fBse\fR, \fBs\fR,\fBsw\fR, \fBws\fR, \fBw\fR and \fBwn\fR.
-The default value is \fBnw\fR.
-.OP \-labelwidget labelWidget LabelWidget
-Specifies a widget to use as label. This overrides any \fB\-text\fR
-option. The widget must exist before being used as \fB\-labelwidget\fR
-and if it is not a descendant of this window, it will be raised
-above it in the stacking order.
-.OP \-visual visual Visual
-Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the
-forms accepted by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR.
-If this option is not specified, the new window will use the same
-visual as its parent.
-The \fB\-visual\fR option may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the desired width for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBlabelframe\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a labelframe widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the labelframe such as its background color
-and relief.  The \fBlabelframe\fR command returns the
-path name of the new window.
-.PP
-A labelframe is a simple widget.  Its primary purpose is to act as a
-spacer or container for complex window layouts.  It has the features
-of a \fBframe\fR plus the ability to display a label.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBlabelframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is the same as the path name of the labelframe's window.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
-the labelframe widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for frame widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabelframe\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? \fI?value option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabelframe\fR
-command.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-When a new labelframe is created, it has no default event bindings:
-labelframes are not intended to be interactive.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-This shows how to build part of a GUI for a hamburger vendor. The
-\fBlabelframe\fR widgets are used to organize the available choices by
-the kinds of things that the choices are being made over.
-.PP
-.CS
-grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .burger \-text "Burger"] \e
-     [\fBlabelframe\fR .bun    \-text "Bun"] \-sticky news
-grid [\fBlabelframe\fR .cheese \-text "Cheese Option"] \e
-     [\fBlabelframe\fR .pickle \-text "Pickle Option"] \-sticky news
-foreach {type name val} {
-    burger Beef    beef
-    burger Lamb    lamb
-    burger Vegetarian beans
-
-    bun    Plain   white
-    bun    Sesame  seeds
-    bun    Wholemeal brown
-
-    cheese None    none
-    cheese Cheddar cheddar
-    cheese Edam    edam
-    cheese Brie    brie
-    cheese Gruy\eu00e8re gruyere
-    cheese "Monterey Jack" jack
-
-    pickle None    none
-    pickle Gherkins gherkins
-    pickle Onions  onion
-    pickle Chili   chili
-} {
-    set w [radiobutton .$type.$val \-text $name \-anchor w \e
-            \-variable $type \-value $val]
-    pack $w \-side top \-fill x
-}
-set burger beef
-set bun    white
-set cheese none
-set pickle none
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-frame(n), label(n), ttk::labelframe(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-labelframe, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/license.terms b/tk8.6/doc/license.terms
deleted file mode 100644
index 0126435..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/license.terms
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-This software is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of
-California, Sun Microsystems, Inc., Scriptics Corporation, ActiveState
-Corporation, Apple Inc. and other parties.  The following terms apply to
-all files associated with the software unless explicitly disclaimed in
-individual files.
-
-The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute,
-and license this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided
-that existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and that this
-notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement,
-license, or royalty fee is required for any of the authorized uses.
-Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors
-and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that
-the new terms are clearly indicated on the first page of each file where
-they apply.
-
-IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR DISTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY
-FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
-ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, ITS DOCUMENTATION, OR ANY
-DERIVATIVES THEREOF, EVEN IF THE AUTHORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
-POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-
-THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
-INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.  THIS SOFTWARE
-IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS HAVE
-NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR
-MODIFICATIONS.
-
-GOVERNMENT USE: If you are acquiring this software on behalf of the
-U.S. government, the Government shall have only "Restricted Rights"
-in the software and related documentation as defined in the Federal
-Acquisition Regulations (FARs) in Clause 52.227.19 (c) (2).  If you
-are acquiring the software on behalf of the Department of Defense, the
-software shall be classified as "Commercial Computer Software" and the
-Government shall have only "Restricted Rights" as defined in Clause
-252.227-7013 (b) (3) of DFARs.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the
-authors grant the U.S. Government and others acting in its behalf
-permission to use and distribute the software in accordance with the
-terms specified in this license.
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/listbox.n b/tk8.6/doc/listbox.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 66b75b9..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/listbox.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,582 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH listbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-listbox \- Create and manipulate 'listbox' item list widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlistbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
-\-disabledforeground	\-exportselection	\-font
-\-foreground	\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor
-\-highlightthickness	\-justify	\-relief
-\-selectbackground	\-selectborderwidth	\-selectforeground
-\-setgrid	\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand
-\-yscrollcommand
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-activestyle activeStyle ActiveStyle
-Specifies the style in which to draw the active element.  This must be
-one of \fBdotbox\fR (show a focus ring around the active element),
-\fBnone\fR (no special indication of active element) or
-\fBunderline\fR (underline the active element).
-The default is \fBunderline\fR on Windows, and \fBdotbox\fR elsewhere.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines.
-If zero or less, then the desired height for the window is made just
-large enough to hold all the elements in the listbox.
-.OP \-listvariable listVariable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable.  The value of the variable is a list to
-be displayed inside the widget; if the variable value changes then the
-widget will automatically update itself to reflect the new value.  Attempts
-to assign a variable with an invalid list value to \fB\-listvariable\fR
-will cause an error.  Attempts to unset a variable in use as a
-\fB\-listvariable\fR will fail but will not generate an error.
-.OP \-selectmode selectMode SelectMode
-Specifies one of several styles for manipulating the selection.
-The value of the option may be arbitrary, but the default bindings
-expect it to be either \fBsingle\fR, \fBbrowse\fR, \fBmultiple\fR,
-or \fBextended\fR;  the default value is \fBbrowse\fR.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of two states for the listbox:  \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR.
-If the listbox is disabled then items may not be inserted or deleted,
-items are drawn in the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR color, and selection
-cannot be modified and is not shown (though selection information is retained).
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the desired width for the window in characters.
-If the font does not have a uniform width then the width of the character
-.QW 0
-is used in translating from character units to screen units.
-If zero or less, then the desired width for the window is made just
-large enough to hold all the elements in the listbox.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a listbox widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the listbox such as its colors, font,
-text, and relief.  The \fBlistbox\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A listbox is a widget that displays a list of strings, one per line.
-When first created, a new listbox has no elements.
-Elements may be added or deleted using widget commands described
-below.  In addition, one or more elements may be selected as described
-below.
-If a listbox is exporting its selection (see \fB\-exportselection\fR
-option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols
-for handling the selection.
-Listbox selections are available as type \fBSTRING\fR;
-the value of the selection will be the text of the selected elements, with
-newlines separating the elements.
-.PP
-It is not necessary for all the elements to be
-displayed in the listbox window at once;  commands described below
-may be used to change the view in the window.  Listboxes allow
-scrolling in both directions using the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
-and \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR options.
-They also support scanning, as described below.
-.SH "INDICES"
-.PP
-Many of the widget commands for listboxes take one or more indices
-as arguments.
-An index specifies a particular element of the listbox, in any of
-the following ways:
-.TP 12
-\fInumber\fR
-.
-Specifies the element as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
-to the first element in the listbox.
-.TP 12
-\fBactive\fR
-.
-Indicates the element that has the location cursor.  This element
-will be displayed as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the listbox
-has the keyboard focus, and it is specified with the \fBactivate\fR
-widget command.
-.TP 12
-\fBanchor\fR
-.
-Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
-\fBselection anchor\fR widget command.
-.TP 12
-\fBend\fR
-.
-Indicates the end of the listbox.
-For most commands this refers to the last element in the listbox,
-but for a few commands such as \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR
-it refers to the element just after the last one.
-.TP 12
-\fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR
-Indicates the element that covers the point in the listbox window
-specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates).  If no
-element covers that point, then the closest element to that
-point is used.
-.LP
-In the widget command descriptions below, arguments named \fIindex\fR,
-\fIfirst\fR, and \fIlast\fR always contain text indices in one of
-the above forms.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for listbox widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBactivate\fR \fIindex\fR
-.
-Sets the active element to the one indicated by \fIindex\fR.
-If \fIindex\fR is outside the range of elements in the listbox
-then the closest element is activated.
-The active element is drawn as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the
-widget has the input focus, and its index may be retrieved with the
-index \fBactive\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBbbox\fR \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of
-the text in the element given by \fIindex\fR.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates
-of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the text
-(specified in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two
-elements give the width and height of the area, in pixels.
-If no part of the element given by \fIindex\fR is visible on the
-screen,
-or if \fIindex\fR refers to a non-existent element,
-then the result is an empty string;  if the element is
-partially visible, the result gives the full area of the element,
-including any parts that are not visible.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcurselection\fR
-.
-Returns a list containing the numerical indices of
-all of the elements in the listbox that are currently selected.
-If there are no elements selected in the listbox then an empty
-string is returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
-.
-Deletes one or more elements of the listbox.  \fIFirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
-are indices specifying the first and last elements in the range
-to delete.  If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to
-\fIfirst\fR, i.e. a single element is deleted.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget \fIfirst\fR ?\fIlast\fR?
-.
-If \fIlast\fR is omitted, returns the contents of the listbox
-element indicated by \fIfirst\fR,
-or an empty string if \fIfirst\fR refers to a non-existent element.
-If \fIlast\fR is specified, the command returns a list whose elements
-are all of the listbox elements between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR,
-inclusive.
-Both \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may have any of the standard
-forms for indices.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns the integer index value that corresponds to \fIindex\fR.
-If \fIindex\fR is \fBend\fR the return value is a count of the number
-of elements in the listbox (not the index of the last element).
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
-.
-Inserts zero or more new elements in the list just before the
-element given by \fIindex\fR.  If \fIindex\fR is specified as
-\fBend\fR then the new elements are added to the end of the
-list.  Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBitemcget \fIindex option\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the item configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted
-by the \fBitemconfigure\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of an item in the listbox.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for the item (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string. The following options
-are currently supported for items:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the
-item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
-item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIcolor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the
-item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIcolor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
-item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBnearest \fIy\fR
-.
-Given a y-coordinate within the listbox window, this command returns
-the index of the (visible) listbox element nearest to that y-coordinate.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR
-.
-This command is used to implement scanning on listboxes.  It has
-two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR
-.
-Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR and the current view in the listbox
-window;  used in conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.
-Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in
-the widget.  It returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx y\fR.
-.
-This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR
-arguments and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last
-\fBscan mark\fR command for the widget.
-It then adjusts the view by 10 times the
-difference in coordinates.  This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the list at high speed through the window.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR
-.
-Adjust the view in the listbox so that the element given by \fIindex\fR
-is visible.
-If the element is already visible then the command has no effect;
-if the element is near one edge of the window then the listbox
-scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge;  otherwise
-the listbox scrolls to center the element.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
-.
-This command is used to adjust the selection within a listbox.  It
-has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection anchor \fIindex\fR
-.
-Sets the selection anchor to the element given by \fIindex\fR.
-If \fIindex\fR refers to a non-existent element, then the closest
-element is used.
-The selection anchor is the end of the selection that is fixed
-while dragging out a selection with the mouse.
-The index \fBanchor\fR may be used to refer to the anchor
-element.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection clear \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
-.
-If any of the elements between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR
-(inclusive) are selected, they are deselected.
-The selection state is not changed for elements outside
-this range.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection includes \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns 1 if the element indicated by \fIindex\fR is currently
-selected, 0 if it is not.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection set \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
-.
-Selects all of the elements in the range between
-\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive, without affecting
-the selection state of elements outside that range.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsize\fR
-.
-Returns a decimal string indicating the total number of elements
-in the listbox.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR
-.
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-information in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
-.
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the listbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fIindex\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character position given by
-\fIindex\fR is displayed at the left edge of the window.
-Character positions are defined by the width of the character \fB0\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the
-total width of the listbox text is off-screen to the left.
-\fIfraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-.
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
-\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
-\fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character)
-on the display;  if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by
-\fInumber\fR screenfuls.
-If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
-.
-This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
-text in the widget's window.
-It can take any of the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview\fR
-Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions
-between 0 and 1.
-The first element gives the position of the listbox element at the
-top of the window, relative to the listbox as a whole (0.5 means
-it is halfway through the listbox, for example).
-The second element gives the position of the listbox element just after
-the last one in the window, relative to the listbox as a whole.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview \fIindex\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the element given by
-\fIindex\fR is displayed at the top of the window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the element given by \fIfraction\fR
-appears at the top of the window.
-\fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1;  0 indicates the first
-element in the listbox, 0.33 indicates the element one-third the
-way through the listbox, and so on.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-.
-This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
-\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by
-\fInumber\fR lines;  if it is \fBpages\fR then
-the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
-If \fInumber\fR is negative then earlier elements
-become visible;  if it is positive then later elements
-become visible.
-.RE
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for listboxes that give them
-Motif-like behavior.  Much of the behavior of a listbox is determined
-by its \fB\-selectmode\fR option, which selects one of four ways
-of dealing with the selection.
-.PP
-If the selection mode is \fBsingle\fR or \fBbrowse\fR, at most one
-element can be selected in the listbox at once.
-In both modes, clicking button 1 on an element selects
-it and deselects any other selected item.
-In \fBbrowse\fR mode it is also possible to drag the selection
-with button 1.
-On button 1, the listbox will also take focus if it has a \fBnormal\fR
-state.
-.PP
-If the selection mode is \fBmultiple\fR or \fBextended\fR,
-any number of elements may be selected at once, including discontiguous
-ranges.  In \fBmultiple\fR mode, clicking button 1 on an element
-toggles its selection state without affecting any other elements.
-In \fBextended\fR mode, pressing button 1 on an element selects
-it, deselects everything else, and sets the anchor to the element
-under the mouse;  dragging the mouse with button 1
-down extends the selection to include all the elements between
-the anchor and the element under the mouse, inclusive.
-.PP
-Most people will probably want to use \fBbrowse\fR mode for
-single selections and \fBextended\fR mode for multiple selections;
-the other modes appear to be useful only in special situations.
-.PP
-Any time the set of selected item(s) in the listbox is updated by the
-user through the keyboard or mouse, the virtual event
-\fB<<ListboxSelect>>\fR will be generated. This virtual event will not
-be generated when adjusting the selection with the \fIpathName
-\fBselection\fR  command. It is easiest to bind to this event to be
-made aware of any user changes to listbox selection.
-.PP
-In addition to the above behavior, the following additional behavior
-is defined by the default bindings:
-.IP [1]
-In \fBextended\fR mode, the selected range can be adjusted by pressing
-button 1 with the Shift key down:  this modifies the selection to
-consist of the elements between the anchor and the element under
-the mouse, inclusive.
-The un-anchored end of this new selection can also be dragged with
-the button down.
-.IP [2]
-In \fBextended\fR mode, pressing button 1 with the Control key down
-starts a toggle operation: the anchor is set to the element under
-the mouse, and its selection state is reversed.  The selection state
-of other elements is not changed.
-If the mouse is dragged with button 1 down, then the selection state
-of all elements between the anchor and the element under the mouse
-is set to match that of the anchor element;  the selection state of
-all other elements remains what it was before the toggle operation
-began.
-.IP [3]
-If the mouse leaves the listbox window with button 1 down, the window
-scrolls away from the mouse, making information visible that used
-to be off-screen on the side of the mouse.
-The scrolling continues until the mouse re-enters the window, the
-button is released, or the end of the listbox is reached.
-.IP [4]
-Mouse button 2 may be used for scanning.
-If it is pressed and dragged over the listbox, the contents of
-the listbox drag at high speed in the direction the mouse moves.
-.IP [5]
-If the Up or Down key is pressed, the location cursor (active
-element) moves up or down one element.
-If the selection mode is \fBbrowse\fR or \fBextended\fR then the
-new active element is also selected and all other elements are
-deselected.
-In \fBextended\fR mode the new active element becomes the
-selection anchor.
-.IP [6]
-In \fBextended\fR mode, Shift-Up and Shift-Down move the location
-cursor (active element) up or down one element and also extend
-the selection to that element in a fashion similar to dragging
-with mouse button 1.
-.IP [7]
-The Left and Right keys scroll the listbox view left and right
-by the width of the character \fB0\fR.
-Control-Left and Control-Right scroll the listbox view left and
-right by the width of the window.
-Control-Prior and Control-Next also scroll left and right by
-the width of the window.
-.IP [8]
-The Prior and Next keys scroll the listbox view up and down
-by one page (the height of the window).
-.IP [9]
-The Home and End keys scroll the listbox horizontally to
-the left and right edges, respectively.
-.IP [10]
-Control-Home sets the location cursor to the first element in
-the listbox, selects that element, and deselects everything else
-in the listbox.
-.IP [11]
-Control-End sets the location cursor to the last element in
-the listbox, selects that element, and deselects everything else
-in the listbox.
-.IP [12]
-In \fBextended\fR mode, Control-Shift-Home extends the selection
-to the first element in the listbox and Control-Shift-End extends
-the selection to the last element.
-.IP [13]
-In \fBmultiple\fR mode, Control-Shift-Home moves the location cursor
-to the first element in the listbox and Control-Shift-End moves
-the location cursor to the last element.
-.IP [14]
-The space and Select keys make a selection at the location cursor
-(active element) just as if mouse button 1 had been pressed over
-this element.
-.IP [15]
-In \fBextended\fR mode, Control-Shift-space and Shift-Select
-extend the selection to the active element just as if button 1
-had been pressed with the Shift key down.
-.IP [16]
-In \fBextended\fR mode, the Escape key cancels the most recent
-selection and restores all the elements in the selected range
-to their previous selection state.
-.IP [17]
-Control-slash selects everything in the widget, except in
-\fBsingle\fR and \fBbrowse\fR modes, in which case it selects
-the active element and deselects everything else.
-.IP [18]
-Control-backslash deselects everything in the widget, except in
-\fBbrowse\fR mode where it has no effect.
-.IP [19]
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is
-a selection.
-.PP
-The behavior of listboxes can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::treeview(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-listbox, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/loadTk.n b/tk8.6/doc/loadTk.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3673e98..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/loadTk.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH "Safe Tk" n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-safe::loadTk \- Load Tk into a safe interpreter.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBsafe::loadTk \fIslave\fR ?\fB\-use\fR \fIwindowId\fR? ?\fB\-display\fR \fIdisplayName\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Safe Tk is based on Safe Tcl, which provides a mechanism that allows
-restricted and mediated access to auto-loading and packages for safe
-interpreters.  Safe Tk adds the ability to configure the interpreter for safe
-Tk operations and load Tk into safe interpreters.
-.PP
-The \fBsafe::loadTk\fR command initializes the required data structures in
-the named safe interpreter and then loads Tk into it.  The interpreter must
-have been created with \fBsafe::interpCreate\fR or have been initialized
-with \fBsafe::interpInit\fR.  The command returns the name of the safe
-interpreter.  If \fB\-use\fR is specified, the window identified by the
-specified system dependent identifier \fIwindowId\fR is used to contain the
-.QW .
-window of the safe interpreter; it can be any valid id, eventually referencing
-a window belonging to another application. As a convenience, if the window you
-plan to use is a Tk Window of the application you can use the window name
-(e.g.,
-.QW \fB.x.y\fR )
-instead of its window Id (e.g., from \fBwinfo id\fR \fB.x.y\fR).
-When \fB\-use\fR is not specified, a new toplevel window is created for the
-.QW .
-window of the safe interpreter. On X11 if you want the embedded window to use
-another display than the default one, specify it with \fB\-display\fR.  See
-the \fBSECURITY ISSUES\fR section below for implementation details.
-.SH "SECURITY ISSUES"
-.PP
-Please read the \fBsafe\fR manual page for Tcl to learn about the basic
-security considerations for Safe Tcl.
-.PP
-\fBsafe::loadTk\fR adds the value of \fBtk_library\fR taken from the master
-interpreter to the virtual access path of the safe interpreter so that
-auto-loading will work in the safe interpreter.
-.PP
-Tk initialization is now safe with respect to not trusting the slave's state
-for startup. \fBsafe::loadTk\fR registers the slave's name so when the Tk
-initialization (\fBTk_SafeInit\fR) is called and in turn calls the master's
-\fBsafe::InitTk\fR it will return the desired \fBargv\fR equivalent
-(\fB\-use\fR \fIwindowId\fR, correct \fB\-display\fR, etc.)
-.PP
-When \fB\-use\fR is not used, the new toplevel created is specially decorated
-so the user is always aware that the user interface presented comes from a
-potentially unsafe code and can easily delete the corresponding interpreter.
-.PP
-On X11, conflicting \fB\-use\fR and \fB\-display\fR are likely to generate a
-fatal X error.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-safe(n), interp(n), library(n), load(n), package(n), source(n), unknown(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-alias, auto-loading, auto_mkindex, load, master interpreter, safe
-interpreter, slave interpreter, source
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/lower.n b/tk8.6/doc/lower.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8159a8b..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/lower.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH lower n 3.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lower \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlower \fIwindow \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-If the \fIbelowThis\fR argument is omitted then the command lowers
-\fIwindow\fR so that it is below all of its siblings in the stacking
-order (it will be obscured by any siblings that overlap it and
-will not obscure any siblings).
-If \fIbelowThis\fR is specified then it must be the path name of
-a window that is either a sibling of \fIwindow\fR or the descendant
-of a sibling of \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the \fBlower\fR command will insert
-\fIwindow\fR into the stacking order just below \fIbelowThis\fR
-(or the ancestor of \fIbelowThis\fR that is a sibling of \fIwindow\fR);
-this could end up either raising or lowering \fIwindow\fR.
-.PP
-All \fBtoplevel\fR windows may be restacked with respect to each
-other, whatever their relative path names, but the window manager is
-not obligated to strictly honor requests to restack.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-raise
-.SH KEYWORDS
-lower, obscure, stacking order
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/man.macros b/tk8.6/doc/man.macros
deleted file mode 100644
index ddd073d..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/man.macros
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,267 +0,0 @@
-.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
-.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
-.\"
-.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
-.\"
-.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
-.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-.\"
-.\" .BS
-.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
-.\"	enclosed in one large box.
-.\"
-.\" .BE
-.\"	End of box enclosure.
-.\"
-.\" .CS
-.\"	Begin code excerpt.
-.\"
-.\" .CE
-.\"	End code excerpt.
-.\"
-.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
-.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-.\"
-.\" .VE
-.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
-.\"
-.\" .DS
-.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
-.\"
-.\" .DE
-.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
-.\"
-.\" .SO ?manpage?
-.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
-.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
-.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
-.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
-.\"
-.\" .SE
-.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-.\"
-.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
-.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-.\"	the option's class in the option database.
-.\"
-.\" .UL arg1 arg2
-.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-.\"
-.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
-.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
-.\"
-.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
-.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
-.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
-.\"
-.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-.\"	# Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-.   el          .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-.\"	# BS - start boxed text
-.\"	# ^y = starting y location
-.\"	# ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
-.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
-.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
-.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-.\"	# page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-.\"	# DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-.\"	# DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
-'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.\"	# UL - underline word
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
-.de QW
-.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
-.\"" fix emacs highlighting
-.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
-..
-.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
-.de PQ
-.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
-.\"" fix emacs highlighting
-.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
-..
-.\"	# QR - quoted range
-.de QR
-.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
-.\"" fix emacs highlighting
-.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
-..
-.\"	# MT - "empty" string
-.de MT
-.QW ""
-..
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/menu.n b/tk8.6/doc/menu.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5742e23..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/menu.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,837 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH menu n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-menu, tk_menuSetFocus \- Create and manipulate 'menu' widgets and menubars
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBmenu\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-\fBtk_menuSetFocus\fR \fIpathName\fR
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-borderwidth	\-foreground
-\-activeborderwidth	\-cursor	\-relief
-\-activeforeground	\-disabledforeground	\-takefocus
-\-background	\-font
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-postcommand postCommand Command
-If this option is specified then it provides a Tcl command to execute
-each time the menu is posted.  The command is invoked by the \fBpost\fR
-widget command before posting the menu. Note that in Tk 8.0 on Macintosh
-and Windows, all post-commands in a system of menus are executed before any
-of those menus are posted.
-This is due to the limitations in the individual platforms' menu managers.
-.OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background
-For menu entries that are check buttons or radio buttons, this option
-specifies the color to display in the indicator when the check button
-or radio button is selected.
-.OP \-tearoff tearOff TearOff
-This option must have a proper boolean value, which specifies
-whether or not the menu should include a tear-off entry at the
-top.  If so, it will exist as entry 0 of the menu and the other
-entries will number starting at 1.  The default
-menu bindings arrange for the menu to be torn off when the tear-off
-entry is invoked.
-This option is ignored under Aqua/Mac OS X, where menus cannot
-be torn off.
-.OP \-tearoffcommand tearOffCommand TearOffCommand
-If this option has a non-empty value, then it specifies a Tcl command
-to invoke whenever the menu is torn off.  The actual command will
-consist of the value of this option, followed by a space, followed
-by the name of the menu window, followed by a space, followed by
-the name of the name of the torn off menu window.  For example, if
-the option's value is
-.QW "\fBa b\fR"
-and menu \fB.x.y\fR is torn off to
-create a new menu \fB.x.tearoff1\fR, then the command
-.QW "\fBa b .x.y .x.tearoff1\fR"
-will be invoked.
-This option is ignored under Aqua/Mac OS X, where menus cannot
-be torn off.
-.OP \-title title Title
-The string will be used to title the window created when this menu is
-torn off. If the title is NULL, then the window will have the title
-of the menubutton or the text of the cascade item from which this menu
-was invoked.
-.OP \-type type Type
-This option can be one of \fBmenubar\fR, \fBtearoff\fR, or
-\fBnormal\fR, and is set when the menu is created. While the string
-returned by the configuration database will change if this option is
-changed, this does not affect the menu widget's behavior. This is used
-by the cloning mechanism and is not normally set outside of the Tk
-library.
-.BE
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-The \fBmenu\fR command creates a new top-level window (given
-by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a menu widget.
-That menu widget can either be used as a pop-up window or applied to a
-\fBtoplevel\fR (with its \fB\-menu\fR option) to make it into the menubar for
-that toplevel.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the menu such as its colors and font.
-The \fBmenu\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A menu is a widget that displays a collection of one-line entries arranged
-in one or more columns.  There exist several different types of entries,
-each with different properties.  Entries of different types may be
-combined in a single menu.  Menu entries are not the same as
-entry widgets.  In fact, menu entries are not even distinct widgets;
-the entire menu is one widget.
-.PP
-Menu entries are displayed with up to three separate fields.
-The main field is a label in the form of a text string,
-a bitmap, or an image, controlled by the \fB\-label\fR,
-\fB\-bitmap\fR, and \fB\-image\fR options for the entry.
-If the  \fB\-accelerator\fR option is specified for an entry then a second
-textual field is displayed to the right of the label.  The accelerator
-typically describes a keystroke sequence that may be used in the
-application to cause the same result as invoking the menu entry.
-This is a display option, it does not actually set the corresponding
-binding (which can be achieved using the \fBbind\fR command).
-The third field is an \fIindicator\fR.  The indicator is present only for
-checkbutton or radiobutton entries.  It indicates whether the entry
-is selected or not, and is displayed to the left of the entry's
-string.
-.PP
-In normal use, an entry becomes active (displays itself differently)
-whenever the mouse pointer is over the entry.  If a mouse
-button is released over the entry then the entry is \fIinvoked\fR.
-The effect of invocation is different for each type of entry;
-these effects are described below in the sections on individual
-entries.
-.PP
-Entries may be \fIdisabled\fR, which causes their labels
-and accelerators to be displayed
-with dimmer colors.
-The default menu bindings will not allow
-a disabled entry to be activated or invoked.
-Disabled entries may be re-enabled, at which point it becomes
-possible to activate and invoke them again.
-.PP
-Whenever a menu's active entry is changed, a <<MenuSelect>> virtual
-event is send to the menu. The active item can then be queried from
-the menu, and an action can be taken, such as setting
-context-sensitive help text for the entry.
-.SH "TYPES OF ENTRIES"
-.SS "COMMAND ENTRIES"
-.PP
-The most common kind of menu entry is a command entry, which
-behaves much like a button widget.  When a command entry is
-invoked, a Tcl command is executed.  The Tcl
-command is specified with the \fB\-command\fR option.
-.SS "SEPARATOR ENTRIES"
-.PP
-A separator is an entry that is displayed as a horizontal dividing
-line.  A separator may not be activated or invoked, and it has
-no behavior other than its display appearance.
-.SS "CHECKBUTTON ENTRIES"
-.PP
-A checkbutton menu entry behaves much like a checkbutton widget.
-When it is invoked it toggles back and forth between the selected
-and deselected states.  When the entry is selected, a particular
-value is stored in a particular global variable (as determined by
-the \fB\-onvalue\fR and \fB\-variable\fR options for the entry);  when
-the entry is deselected another value (determined by the
-\fB\-offvalue\fR option) is stored in the global variable.
-An indicator box is displayed to the left of the label in a checkbutton
-entry.  If the entry is selected then the indicator's center is displayed
-in the color given by the \fB\-selectcolor\fR option for the entry;
-otherwise the indicator's center is displayed in the background color for
-the menu.  If a \fB\-command\fR option is specified for a checkbutton
-entry, then its value is evaluated as a Tcl command each time the entry
-is invoked;  this happens after toggling the entry's
-selected state.
-.SS "RADIOBUTTON ENTRIES"
-.PP
-A radiobutton menu entry behaves much like a radiobutton widget.
-Radiobutton entries are organized in groups of which only one
-entry may be selected at a time.  Whenever a particular entry
-becomes selected it stores a particular value into a particular
-global variable (as determined by the \fB\-value\fR and
-\fB\-variable\fR options for the entry).  This action
-causes any previously-selected entry in the same group
-to deselect itself.
-Once an entry has become selected, any change to the entry's
-associated variable will cause the entry to deselect itself.
-Grouping of radiobutton entries is determined by their
-associated variables:  if two entries have the same associated
-variable then they are in the same group.
-An indicator diamond is displayed to the left of the label in each
-radiobutton entry.  If the entry is selected then the indicator's
-center is displayed in the color given by the \fB\-selectcolor\fR option
-for the entry;
-otherwise the indicator's center is displayed in the background color for
-the menu.  If a \fB\-command\fR option is specified for a radiobutton
-entry, then its value is evaluated as a Tcl command each time the entry
-is invoked;  this happens after selecting the entry.
-.SS "CASCADE ENTRIES"
-.PP
-A cascade entry is one with an associated menu (determined
-by the \fB\-menu\fR option).  Cascade entries allow the construction
-of cascading menus.
-The \fBpostcascade\fR widget command can be used to post and unpost
-the associated menu just next to of the cascade entry.
-The associated menu must be a child of the menu containing
-the cascade entry (this is needed in order for menu traversal to
-work correctly).
-.PP
-A cascade entry posts its associated menu by invoking a
-Tcl command of the form
-.CS
-\fImenu\fB post \fIx y\fR
-.CE
-where \fImenu\fR is the path name of the associated menu, and \fIx\fR
-and \fIy\fR are the root-window coordinates of the upper-right
-corner of the cascade entry.
-On Unix, the lower-level menu is unposted by executing a Tcl command with
-the form
-.CS
-\fImenu\fB unpost\fR
-.CE
-where \fImenu\fR is the name of the associated menu.
-On other platforms, the platform's native code takes care of unposting the
-menu.
-.PP
-If a \fB\-command\fR option is specified for a cascade entry then it is
-evaluated as a Tcl command whenever the entry is invoked. This is not
-supported on Windows.
-.SS "TEAR-OFF ENTRIES"
-.PP
-A tear-off entry appears at the top of the menu if enabled with the
-\fB\-tearoff\fR option.  It is not like other menu entries in that
-it cannot be created with the \fBadd\fR widget command and
-cannot be deleted with the \fBdelete\fR widget command.
-When a tear-off entry is created it appears as a dashed line at
-the top of the menu.  Under the default bindings, invoking the
-tear-off entry causes a torn-off copy to be made of the menu and
-all of its submenus.
-.SH "MENUBARS"
-.PP
-Any menu can be set as a menubar for a toplevel window (see
-\fBtoplevel\fR command for syntax). On the Macintosh, whenever the
-toplevel is in front, this menu's cascade items will appear in the
-menubar across the top of the main monitor. On Windows and Unix, this
-menu's items will be displayed in a menubar across the top of the
-window. These menus will behave according to the interface guidelines
-of their platforms. For every menu set as a menubar, a clone menu is
-made. See the \fBCLONES\fR section for more information.
-.PP
-As noted, menubars may behave differently on different platforms.  One
-example of this concerns the handling of checkbuttons and radiobuttons
-within the menu.  While it is permitted to put these menu elements on
-menubars, they may not be drawn with indicators on some platforms, due
-to system restrictions.
-.SS "SPECIAL MENUS IN MENUBARS"
-.PP
-Certain menus in a menubar will be treated specially.  On the Macintosh,
-access to the special Application, Window and Help menus is provided. On
-Windows, access to the Windows System menu in each window is provided.
-On X Windows, a special right-justified help menu may be provided if
-Motif menu compatibility is enabled. In all cases, these menus must be
-created with the command name of the menubar menu concatenated with the
-special name. So for a menubar named .menubar, on the Macintosh, the
-special menus would be .menubar.apple, .menubar.window and .menubar.help;
-on Windows, the special menu would be .menubar.system; on X Windows,
-the help menu would be .menubar.help.
-.PP
-When Tk sees a .menubar.apple menu as the first menu in a menubar on the
-Macintosh, that menu's contents make up the first items of the
-Application menu whenever the window containing the menubar is in front.
-After all of the Tk-defined items, the menu will have a separator,
-followed by all standard Application menu items.
-Such a .apple menu must be present in a menu when that menu is first
-configured as a toplevel's menubar, otherwise a default application menu
-(hidden from Tk) will be inserted into the menubar at that time and
-subsequent addition of a .apple menu will no longer result in it
-becoming the Application menu.
-.PP
-When Tk sees a .menubar.window menu on the Macintosh, the menu's
-contents are inserted into the standard Window menu of the user's
-menubar whenever the window's menubar is in front. The first items in
-the menu are provided by Mac OS X, and the names of the current
-toplevels are automatically appended after all the Tk-defined items and
-a separator.
-.PP
-When Tk sees a .menubar.help menu on the Macintosh, the menu's contents
-are appended to the standard Help menu of the user's menubar whenever
-the window's menubar is in front. The first items in the menu
-are provided by Mac OS X.
-.PP
-When Tk sees a System menu on Windows, its items are appended to the
-system menu that the menubar is attached to. This menu is tied to the
-application icon and can be invoked with the mouse or by typing
-Alt+Spacebar.  Due to limitations in the Windows API, any font changes,
-colors, images, bitmaps, or tearoff images will not appear in the
-system menu.
-.PP
-When Tk sees a Help menu on X Windows and Motif menu compatibility is
-enabled the menu is moved to be last in the menubar and is right
-justified. Motif menu compatibility is enabled by setting the Tk option
-\fB*Menu.useMotifHelp\fR to true or by calling
-\fBtk::classic::restore menu\fR.
-.SH "CLONES"
-.PP
-When a menu is set as a menubar for a toplevel window, or when a menu
-is torn off, a clone of the menu is made. This clone is a menu widget
-in its own right, but it is a child of the original. Changes in the
-configuration of the original are reflected in the
-clone. Additionally, any cascades that are pointed to are also cloned
-so that menu traversal will work right. Clones are destroyed when
-either the tearoff or menubar goes away, or when the original menu is
-destroyed.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBmenu\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.
-.PP
-Many of the widget commands for a menu take as one argument an
-indicator of which entry of the menu to operate on. These
-indicators are called \fIindex\fRes and may be specified in
-any of the following forms:
-.TP 12
-\fBactive\fR
-.
-Indicates the entry that is currently active.  If no entry is
-active then this form is equivalent to \fBnone\fR.  This form may
-not be abbreviated.
-.TP 12
-\fBend\fR
-.
-Indicates the bottommost entry in the menu.  If there are no
-entries in the menu then this form is equivalent to \fBnone\fR.
-This form may not be abbreviated.
-.TP 12
-\fBlast\fR
-.
-Same as \fBend\fR.
-.TP 12
-\fBnone\fR
-.
-Indicates
-.QW "no entry at all" ;
-this is used most commonly with
-the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the
-menu.  In most cases the specification of \fBnone\fR causes
-nothing to happen in the widget command.
-This form may not be abbreviated.
-.TP 12
-\fB@\fInumber\fR
-.
-In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as a y-coordinate in the
-menu's window;  the entry closest to that y-coordinate is used.
-For example,
-.QW \fB@0\fR
-indicates the top-most entry in the window.
-.TP 12
-\fInumber\fR
-.
-Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds
-to the top-most entry of the menu, 1 to the entry below it, and
-so on.
-.TP 12
-\fIpattern\fR
-.
-If the index does not satisfy one of the above forms then this
-form is used.  \fIPattern\fR is pattern-matched against the label of
-each entry in the menu, in order from the top down, until a
-matching entry is found.  The rules of \fBstring match\fR
-are used.
-.PP
-If the index could match more than one of the above forms, then
-the form earlier in the above list takes precedence.
-.PP
-The following widget commands are possible for menu widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBactivate \fIindex\fR
-.
-Change the state of the entry indicated by \fIindex\fR to \fBactive\fR
-and redisplay it using its active colors.
-Any previously-active entry is deactivated.  If \fIindex\fR
-is specified as \fBnone\fR, or if the specified entry is
-disabled, then the menu ends up with no active entry.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBadd \fItype \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
-.
-Add a new entry to the bottom of the menu.  The new entry's type
-is given by \fItype\fR and must be one of \fBcascade\fR,
-\fBcheckbutton\fR, \fBcommand\fR, \fBradiobutton\fR, or \fBseparator\fR,
-or a unique abbreviation of one of the above.  If additional arguments
-are present, they specify the options listed in the \fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR
-section below.
-The \fBadd\fR widget command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBclone \fInewPathname\fR ?\fIcloneType\fR?
-.
-Makes a clone of the current menu named \fInewPathName\fR. This clone
-is a menu in its own right, but any changes to the clone are
-propagated to the original menu and vice versa. \fIcloneType\fR can be
-\fBnormal\fR, \fBmenubar\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR. Should not normally be
-called outside of the Tk library. See the \fBCLONES\fR section for
-more information.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenu\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2\fR?
-.
-Delete all of the menu entries between \fIindex1\fR and
-\fIindex2\fR inclusive.
-If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fIindex1\fR.
-Attempts to delete a tear-off menu entry are ignored (instead, you
-should change the \fB\-tearoff\fR option to remove the tear-off entry).
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBentrycget \fIindex option\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of a configuration option for
-the entry given by \fIindex\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the names described in the
-\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR section below.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBentryconfigure \fIindex \fR?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.
-This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR command, except that
-it applies to the options for an individual entry, whereas \fBconfigure\fR
-applies to the options for the menu as a whole.
-\fIOptions\fR may have any of the values described in the
-\fBMENU ENTRY OPTIONS\fR
-section below.  If \fIoptions\fR are specified, options are
-modified as indicated in the command and the command returns an empty string.
-If no \fIoptions\fR are specified, returns a list describing
-the current options for entry \fIindex\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR, or
-\fBnone\fR if \fIindex\fR was specified as \fBnone\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex type \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR?
-.
-Same as the \fBadd\fR widget command except that it inserts the new
-entry just before the entry given by \fIindex\fR, instead of appending
-to the end of the menu.  The \fItype\fR, \fIoption\fR, and \fIvalue\fR
-arguments have the same interpretation as for the \fBadd\fR widget
-command.  It is not possible to insert new menu entries before the
-tear-off entry, if the menu has one.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinvoke \fIindex\fR
-.
-Invoke the action of the menu entry.  See the sections on the
-individual entries above for details on what happens.  If the
-menu entry is disabled then nothing happens.  If the
-entry has a command associated with it then the result of that
-command is returned as the result of the \fBinvoke\fR widget
-command.  Otherwise the result is an empty string.  Note:  invoking
-a menu entry does not automatically unpost the menu;  the default
-bindings normally take care of this before invoking the \fBinvoke\fR
-widget command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpost \fIx y\fR
-.
-Arrange for the menu to be displayed on the screen at the root-window
-coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.  These coordinates are
-adjusted if necessary to guarantee that the entire menu is visible on
-the screen.  This command normally returns an empty string.
-If the \fB\-postcommand\fR option has been specified, then its value is
-executed as a Tcl script before posting the menu and the result of
-that script is returned as the result of the \fBpost\fR widget
-command.
-If an error returns while executing the command, then the error is
-returned without posting the menu.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpostcascade \fIindex\fR
-.
-Posts the submenu associated with the cascade entry given by
-\fIindex\fR, and unposts any previously posted submenu.
-If \fIindex\fR does not correspond to a cascade entry,
-or if \fIpathName\fR is not posted,
-the command has no effect except to unpost any currently posted
-submenu.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtype \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns the type of the menu entry given by \fIindex\fR.
-This is the \fItype\fR argument passed to the \fBadd\fR or \fBinsert\fR widget
-command when the entry was created, such as \fBcommand\fR
-or \fBseparator\fR, or \fBtearoff\fR for a tear-off entry.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBunpost\fR
-.
-Unmap the window so that it is no longer displayed.  If a
-lower-level cascaded menu is posted, unpost that menu.  Returns an
-empty string. This subcommand does not work on Windows and the
-Macintosh, as those platforms have their own way of unposting menus.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxposition \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate within the menu
-window of the leftmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByposition \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate within the menu
-window of the topmost pixel in the entry specified by \fIindex\fR.
-.SH "MENU ENTRY OPTIONS"
-The following options are allowed on menu entries. Most options are not
-supported by all entry types.
-.TP
-\fB\-activebackground \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is active.
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-\fB\-activebackground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
-If the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable has been set to request strict
-Motif compliance, then this option is ignored and the \fB\-background\fR
-option is used in its place.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-activeforeground \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is active.
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-\fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-accelerator \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry.
-Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be
-used to invoke the same function as the menu entry. This is a display
-option, it does not actually set the corresponding binding (which can
-be achieved using the \fBbind\fR command). This option is not available
-for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-background \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-\fB\-background\fR option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-bitmap \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a bitmap to display in the menu instead of a textual
-label, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR option
-(as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option)
-but may be reset
-to an empty string to enable a textual label to be displayed.
-If a \fB\-image\fR option has been specified, it overrides
-\fB\-bitmap\fR.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-columnbreak \fIvalue\fR
-.
-When this option is zero, the entry appears below the previous entry. When
-this option is one, the entry appears at the top of a new column in the
-menu.
-This option is ignored on Aqua/Mac OS X, where menus are always a single
-column.
-.TP
-\fB\-command \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a Tcl command to execute when the menu entry is invoked.
-Not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-compound \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies whether the menu entry should display both an image and text,
-and if so, where the image should be placed relative to the text.
-Valid values for this option are \fBbottom\fR, \fBcenter\fR,
-\fBleft\fR, \fBnone\fR, \fBright\fR and \fBtop\fR.  The default value
-is \fBnone\fR, meaning that the button will display either an image or
-text, depending on the values of the \fB\-image\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR
-options.
-.TP
-\fB\-font \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies the font to use when drawing the label or accelerator
-string in this entry.
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default) then
-the \fB\-font\fR option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-foreground \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-\fB\-foreground\fR option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-hidemargin \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies whether the standard margins should be drawn for this menu
-entry. This is useful when creating palette with images in them, i.e.,
-color palettes, pattern palettes, etc. 1 indicates that the margin for
-the entry is hidden; 0 means that the margin is used.
-.TP
-\fB\-image \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies an image to display in the menu instead of a text string
-or bitmap.
-The image must have been created by some previous invocation of
-\fBimage create\fR.
-This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR and \fB\-bitmap\fR options
-(as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option)
-but may be reset to an empty string to enable a textual or
-bitmap label to be displayed.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-indicatoron \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
-\fIValue\fR is a boolean that determines whether or not the
-indicator should be displayed.
-.TP
-\fB\-label \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies a string to display as an identifying label in the menu
-entry.  Not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-menu \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for cascade entries.  Specifies the path name of
-the submenu associated with this entry.
-The submenu must be a child of the menu.
-.TP
-\fB\-offvalue \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
-store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is
-deselected.
-.TP
-\fB\-onvalue \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
-store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.
-.TP
-\fB\-selectcolor \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
-Specifies the color to display in the indicator when the entry is
-selected.
-If the value is an empty string (the default) then the \fB\-selectcolor\fR
-option for the menu determines the indicator color.
-.TP
-\fB\-selectimage \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
-Specifies an image to display in the entry (in place of
-the \fB\-image\fR option) when it is selected.
-\fIValue\fR is the name of an image, which must have been created
-by some previous invocation of \fBimage create\fR.
-This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has
-been specified.
-.TP
-\fB\-state \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies one of three states for the entry:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
-or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the entry is displayed using the
-\fB\-foreground\fR option for the menu and the \fB\-background\fR
-option from the entry or the menu.
-The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the entry.
-In active state the entry is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR
-option for the menu along with the \fB\-activebackground\fR option from
-the entry.  Disabled state means that the entry
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-or invoke the entry.
-In this state the entry is displayed according to the
-\fB\-disabledforeground\fR option for the menu and the
-\fB\-background\fR option from the entry.
-This option is not available for separator entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-underline \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the entry.
-This option is also queried by the default bindings and used to
-implement keyboard traversal.
-0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the entry,
-1 to the next character, and so on.
-If a bitmap or image is displayed in the entry then this option is ignored.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-value \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for radiobutton entries.  Specifies the value to
-store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.
-If an empty string is specified, then the \fB\-label\fR option
-for the entry as the value to store in the variable.
-.TP
-\fB\-variable \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.  Specifies
-the name of a global variable to set when the entry is selected.
-For checkbutton entries the variable is also set when the entry
-is deselected.  For radiobutton entries, changing the variable
-causes the currently-selected entry to deselect itself.
-.RS
-.PP
-For checkbutton entries, the default value of this option is taken from the
-\fB\-label\fR option, and for radiobutton entries a single fixed value is
-used. It is recommended that you always set the \fB\-variable\fR option when
-creating either a checkbutton or a radiobutton.
-.RE
-.SH "MENU CONFIGURATIONS"
-.PP
-The default bindings support four different ways of using menus:
-.TP
-\fBPulldown Menus in Menubar\fR
-.
-This is the most common case. You create a menu widget that will become the
-menu bar. You then add cascade entries to this menu, specifying the
-pull down menus you wish to use in your menu bar. You then create all
-of the pulldowns. Once you have done this, specify the menu using the
-\fB\-menu\fR option of the toplevel's widget command. See the
-\fBtoplevel\fR manual entry for details.
-.TP
-\fBPulldown Menus in Menu Buttons\fR
-.
-This is the compatible way to do menu bars.  You create one menubutton
-widget for each top-level menu, and typically you arrange a series of
-menubuttons in a row in a menubar window.  You also create the top-level menus
-and any cascaded submenus, and tie them together with \fB\-menu\fR
-options in menubuttons and cascade menu entries.  The top-level menu must
-be a child of the menubutton, and each submenu must be a child of the
-menu that refers to it.  Once you have done this, the default bindings
-will allow users to traverse and invoke the tree of menus via its
-menubutton;  see the \fBmenubutton\fR manual entry for details.
-.TP
-\fBPopup Menus\fR
-.
-Popup menus typically post in response to a mouse button press or
-keystroke.  You create the popup menus and any cascaded submenus,
-then you call the \fBtk_popup\fR procedure at the appropriate time
-to post the top-level menu.
-.TP
-\fBOption Menus\fR
-.
-An option menu consists of a menubutton with an associated menu
-that allows you to select one of several values.  The current value
-is displayed in the menubutton and is also stored in a global
-variable.  Use the \fBtk_optionMenu\fR procedure to create option
-menubuttons and their menus.
-.TP
-\fBTorn-off Menus\fR
-.
-You create a torn-off menu by invoking the tear-off entry at
-the top of an existing menu.  The default bindings will create a new menu
-that is a copy of the original menu and leave it permanently
-posted as a top-level window.  The torn-off menu behaves just
-the same as the original menu.
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for menus that give them
-the following default behavior:
-.IP [1]
-When the mouse enters a menu, the entry underneath the mouse
-cursor activates;  as the mouse moves around the menu, the active
-entry changes to track the mouse.
-.IP [2]
-When the mouse leaves a menu all of the entries in the menu
-deactivate, except in the special case where the mouse moves from
-a menu to a cascaded submenu.
-.IP [3]
-When a button is released over a menu, the active entry (if any) is invoked.
-The menu also unposts unless it is a torn-off menu.
-.IP [4]
-The Space and Return keys invoke the active entry and
-unpost the menu.
-.IP [5]
-If any of the entries in a menu have letters underlined with
-the \fB\-underline\fR option, then pressing one of the underlined
-letters (or its upper-case or lower-case equivalent) invokes that
-entry and unposts the menu.
-.IP [6]
-The Escape key aborts a menu selection in progress without invoking any
-entry.  It also unposts the menu unless it is a torn-off menu.
-.IP [7]
-The Up and Down keys activate the next higher or lower entry
-in the menu.  When one end of the menu is reached, the active
-entry wraps around to the other end.
-.IP [8]
-The Left key moves to the next menu to the left.
-If the current menu is a cascaded submenu, then the submenu is
-unposted and the current menu entry becomes the cascade entry
-in the parent.
-If the current menu is a top-level menu posted from a
-menubutton, then the current menubutton is unposted and the
-next menubutton to the left is posted.
-Otherwise the key has no effect.
-The left-right order of menubuttons is determined by their stacking
-order:  Tk assumes that the lowest menubutton (which by default
-is the first one created) is on the left.
-.IP [9]
-The Right key moves to the next menu to the right.
-If the current entry is a cascade entry, then the submenu is
-posted and the  current menu entry becomes the first entry
-in the submenu.
-Otherwise, if the current menu was posted from a
-menubutton, then the current menubutton is unposted and the
-next menubutton to the right is posted.
-.PP
-Disabled menu entries are non-responsive:  they do not activate and
-they ignore mouse button presses and releases.
-.PP
-Several of the bindings make use of the command \fBtk_menuSetFocus\fR.
-It saves the current focus and sets the focus to its \fIpathName\fR
-argument, which is a menu widget.
-.PP
-The behavior of menus can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-At present it is not possible to use the
-option database to specify values for the options to individual
-entries.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n), menubutton(n), ttk::menubutton(n), toplevel(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-menu, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/menubar.n b/tk8.6/doc/menubar.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 023bf37..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/menubar.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk_menuBar n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_menuBar, tk_bindForTraversal \- Obsolete support for menu bars
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_menuBar \fIframe \fR?\fImenu menu ...\fR?
-.sp
-\fBtk_bindForTraversal \fIarg arg ... \fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-These procedures were used in Tk 3.6 and earlier releases to help
-manage pulldown menus and to implement keyboard traversal of menus.
-In Tk 4.0 and later releases they are no
-longer needed.  Stubs for these procedures have been retained for
-backward compatibility, but they have no effect.  You should remove
-calls to these procedures from your code, since eventually the
-procedures will go away.
-.PP
-From Tk 8.0 onwards, you should instead construct your menubar as a
-normal \fBmenu\fR and then attach it to the \fBtoplevel\fR of your
-choice using the \fB\-menu\fR option of that widget.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-menu(n), toplevel(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-keyboard traversal, menu, menu bar, post
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/menubutton.n b/tk8.6/doc/menubutton.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 08b52a0..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/menubutton.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH menubutton n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-menubutton \- Create and manipulate 'menubutton' pop-up menu indicator widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBmenubutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
-\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
-\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
-\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
-\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable
-\-cursor	\-image	\-underline
-\-compound	\-justify	\-wraplength
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-direction direction Height
-Specifies where the menu is going to be popup up. \fBabove\fR tries to
-pop the menu above the menubutton. \fBbelow\fR tries to pop the menu
-below the menubutton. \fBleft\fR tries to pop the menu to the left of
-the menubutton. \fBright\fR tries to pop the menu to the right of the
-menu button. \fBflush\fR pops the menu directly over the menubutton.
-In the case of \fBabove\fR or \fBbelow\fR, the direction will be
-reversed if the menu would show offscreen.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies a desired height for the menubutton.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the menubutton then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option is not specified, the menubutton's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.OP \-indicatoron indicatorOn IndicatorOn
-The value must be a proper boolean value.  If it is true then
-a small indicator rectangle will be displayed on the right side
-of the menubutton and the default menu bindings will treat this
-as an option menubutton.  If false then no indicator will be
-displayed.
-.OP \-menu menu MenuName
-Specifies the path name of the menu associated with this menubutton.
-The menu must be a child of the menubutton.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the menubutton:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
-or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the menubutton is displayed using the
-\fBforeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the menubutton.  In active state
-the menubutton is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR and
-\fB\-activebackground\fR options.  Disabled state means that the menubutton
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and
-\fB\-background\fR options determine how the button is displayed.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies a desired width for the menubutton.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the menubutton then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option is not specified, the menubutton's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.BE
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-The \fBmenubutton\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a menubutton widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the menubutton such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The \fBmenubutton\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A menubutton is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap, or image
-and is associated with a menu widget.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the \fB\-wraplength\fR option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-\fB\-underline\fR option.  In normal usage, pressing
-mouse button 1 over the menubutton causes the associated menu to
-be posted just underneath the menubutton.  If the mouse is moved over
-the menu before releasing the mouse button, the button release
-causes the underlying menu entry to be invoked.  When the button
-is released, the menu is unposted.
-.PP
-Menubuttons are used to construct a \fBtk_optionMenu\fR, which is the
-preferred mechanism for allowing a user to select one item from a list
-on Mac OS X.
-.PP
-Menubuttons were also typically organized into groups called menu bars
-that allow scanning:
-if the mouse button is pressed over one menubutton (causing it
-to post its menu) and the mouse is moved over another menubutton
-in the same menu bar without releasing the mouse button, then the
-menu of the first menubutton is unposted and the menu of the
-new menubutton is posted instead.
-\fIThis use is deprecated\fR in favor of setting a \fBmenu\fR directly as a
-menubar; see the \fBtoplevel\fR's \fB\-menu\fR option for how to do that.
-.PP
-There are several interactions between menubuttons and menus;  see
-the \fBmenu\fR manual entry for information on various menu configurations,
-such as pulldown menus and option menus.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBmenubutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for menubutton widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR
-command.
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for menubuttons that give them
-the following default behavior:
-.IP [1]
-A menubutton activates whenever the mouse passes over it and deactivates
-whenever the mouse leaves it.
-.IP [2]
-Pressing mouse button 1 over a menubutton posts the menubutton:
-its relief changes to raised and its associated menu is posted
-under the menubutton.  If the mouse is dragged down into the menu
-with the button still down, and if the mouse button is then
-released over an entry in the menu, the menubutton is unposted
-and the menu entry is invoked.
-.IP [3]
-If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and then released over that
-menubutton, the menubutton stays posted: you can still move the mouse
-over the menu and click button 1 on an entry to invoke it.
-Once a menu entry has been invoked, the menubutton unposts itself.
-.IP [4]
-If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and then dragged over some
-other menubutton, the original menubutton unposts itself and the
-new menubutton posts.
-.IP [5]
-If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and released outside
-any menubutton or menu, the menubutton unposts without invoking
-any menu entry.
-.IP [6]
-When a menubutton is posted, its associated menu claims the input
-focus to allow keyboard traversal of the menu and its submenus.
-See the \fBmenu\fR manual entry for details on these bindings.
-.IP [7]
-If the \fB\-underline\fR option has been specified for a menubutton
-then keyboard traversal may be used to post the menubutton:
-Alt+\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is the underlined character (or its
-lower-case or upper-case equivalent), may be typed in any window
-under the menubutton's toplevel to post the menubutton.
-.IP [8]
-The F10 key may be typed in any window to post the first menubutton
-under its toplevel window that is not disabled.
-.IP [9]
-If a menubutton has the input focus, the space and return keys
-post the menubutton.
-.PP
-If the menubutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above
-actions occur:  the menubutton is completely non-responsive.
-.PP
-The behavior of menubuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::menubutton(n), menu(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-menubutton, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/message.n b/tk8.6/doc/message.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bd635ac..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/message.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH message n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-message \- Create and manipulate 'message' non-interactive text widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBmessage\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-anchor	\-background	\-borderwidth
-\-cursor	\-font	\-foreground
-\-highlightbackground	\-highlightcolor	\-highlightthickness
-\-padx	\-pady	\-relief
-\-takefocus	\-text	\-textvariable
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-aspect aspect Aspect
-Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired
-aspect ratio for the text.  The aspect ratio is specified as
-100*width/height.  100 means the text should
-be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should
-be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should
-be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on.
-Used to choose line length for text if \fB\-width\fR option
-is not specified.
-Defaults to 150.
-.OP \-justify justify Justify
-Specifies how to justify lines of text.
-Must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR.  Defaults
-to \fBleft\fR.
-This option works together with the \fB\-anchor\fR, \fB\-aspect\fR,
-\fB\-padx\fR, \fB\-pady\fR, and \fB\-width\fR options to provide a variety
-of arrangements of the text within the window.
-The \fB\-aspect\fR and \fB\-width\fR options determine the amount of
-screen space needed to display the text.
-The \fB\-anchor\fR, \fB\-padx\fR, and \fB\-pady\fR options determine where this
-rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the
-\fB\-justify\fR option determines how each line is displayed within that
-rectangular region.
-For example, suppose \fB\-anchor\fR is \fBe\fR and \fB\-justify\fR is
-\fBleft\fR, and that the message window is much larger than needed
-for the text.
-The text will be displayed so that the left edges of all the lines
-line up and the right edge of the longest line is \fB\-padx\fR from
-the right side of the window;  the entire text block will be centered
-in the vertical span of the window.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the length of lines in the window.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If this option has a value greater than zero then the \fB\-aspect\fR
-option is ignored and the \fB\-width\fR option determines the line
-length.
-If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then
-the \fB\-aspect\fR option determines the line length.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a message widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the message such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The \fBmessage\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A message is a widget that displays a textual string.  A message
-widget has three special features that differentiate it from a
-\fBlabel\fR widget.  First, it breaks up
-its string into lines in order to produce a given aspect ratio
-for the window.  The line breaks are chosen at word boundaries
-wherever possible (if not even a single word would fit on a
-line, then the word will be split across lines).  Newline characters
-in the string will force line breaks;  they can be used, for example,
-to leave blank lines in the display.
-.PP
-The second feature of a message widget is justification.  The text
-may be displayed left-justified (each line starts at the left side of
-the window), centered on a line-by-line basis, or right-justified
-(each line ends at the right side of the window).
-.PP
-The third feature of a message widget is that it handles control
-characters and non-printing characters specially.  Tab characters
-are replaced with enough blank space to line up on the next
-8-character boundary.  Newlines cause line breaks.  Other control
-characters (ASCII code less than 0x20) and characters not defined
-in the font are displayed as a four-character sequence \fB\ex\fIhh\fR where
-\fIhh\fR is the two-digit hexadecimal number corresponding to
-the character.  In the unusual case where the font does not contain
-all of the characters in
-.QW 0123456789abcdef\ex
-then control characters and undefined characters are not displayed at all.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for message widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmessage\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmessage\fR
-command.
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-When a new message is created, it has no default event bindings:
-messages are intended for output purposes only.
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-Tabs do not work very well with text that is centered or right-justified.
-The most common result is that the line is justified wrong.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-label(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-message, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/messageBox.n b/tk8.6/doc/messageBox.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ce1745..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/messageBox.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH tk_messageBox n 4.2 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_messageBox \- pops up a message window and waits for user response.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_messageBox \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure creates and displays a message window with an
-application-specified message, an icon and a set of buttons.  Each of
-the buttons in the message window is identified by a unique symbolic
-name (see the \fB\-type\fR options).  After the message window is
-popped up, \fBtk_messageBox\fR waits for the user to select one of the
-buttons. Then it returns the symbolic name of the selected button.
-.PP
-The following option-value pairs are supported:
-.TP
-\fB\-default\fR \fIname\fR
-.
-\fIName\fR gives the symbolic name of the default button for
-this message window (
-.QW ok ,
-.QW cancel ,
-and so on). See \fB\-type\fR
-for a list of the symbolic names.  If this option is not specified,
-the first button in the dialog will be made the default.
-.TP
-\fB\-detail\fR \fIstring\fR
-.
-Specifies an auxiliary message to the main message given by the
-\fB\-message\fR option. The message detail will be presented beneath the main
-message and, where supported by the OS, in a less emphasized font than the
-main message.
-.TP
-\fB\-icon\fR \fIiconImage\fR
-.
-Specifies an icon to display. \fIIconImage\fR must be one of the
-following: \fBerror\fR, \fBinfo\fR, \fBquestion\fR or
-\fBwarning\fR. If this option is not specified, then the info icon will be
-displayed.
-.TP
-\fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR
-.
-Specifies the message to display in this message box. The
-default value is an empty string.
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message
-box is displayed on top of its parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
-.
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. This option
-is ignored on Mac OS X, where platform guidelines forbid the use of a title
-on this kind of dialog.
-.TP
-\fB\-type\fR \fIpredefinedType\fR
-.
-Arranges for a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The
-following values are possible for \fIpredefinedType\fR:
-.RS
-.TP 18
-\fBabortretryignore\fR
-.
-Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fBabort\fR,
-\fBretry\fR and \fBignore\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fBok\fR
-.
-Displays one button whose symbolic name is \fBok\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fBokcancel\fR
-.
-Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBok\fR and \fBcancel\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fBretrycancel\fR
-.
-Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBretry\fR and \fBcancel\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fByesno\fR
-.
-Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR and \fBno\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fByesnocancel\fR
-.
-Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR, \fBno\fR
-and \fBcancel\fR.
-.RE
-.PP
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-set answer [\fBtk_messageBox\fR \-message "Really quit?" \e
-        \-icon question \-type yesno \e
-        \-detail "Select \e"Yes\e" to make the application exit"]
-switch \-\- $answer {
-    yes exit
-    no {\fBtk_messageBox\fR \-message "I know you like this application!" \e
-            \-type ok}
-}
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-message box
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/option.n b/tk8.6/doc/option.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 2763d64..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/option.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH option n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-option \- Add/retrieve window options to/from the option database
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBoption add \fIpattern value \fR?\fIpriority\fR?
-\fBoption clear\fR
-\fBoption get \fIwindow name class\fR
-\fBoption readfile \fIfileName \fR?\fIpriority\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBoption\fR command allows you to add entries to the Tk option
-database or to retrieve options from the database.  The \fBadd\fR
-form of the command adds a new option to the database.
-\fIPattern\fR contains
-the option being specified, and consists of names and/or classes
-separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format (see
-\fBPATTERN FORMAT\fR).  \fIValue\fR
-contains a text string to associate with \fIpattern\fR;  this is the
-value that will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR or by
-invocations of the \fBoption get\fR command.  If \fIpriority\fR
-is specified, it indicates the priority level for this option (see
-below for legal values);  it defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
-This command always returns an empty string.
-.PP
-The \fBoption clear\fR command clears the option database.  Default
-options (from the
-\fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or the \fB.Xdefaults\fR
-file) will be reloaded automatically the next time an
-option is added to the database or removed from it.  This command
-always returns an empty string.
-.PP
-The \fBoption get\fR command returns the value of the option
-specified for \fIwindow\fR
-under \fIname\fR and \fIclass\fR.  If several entries in the option
-database match \fIwindow\fR, \fIname\fR, and \fIclass\fR, then
-the command returns whichever was created with highest
-\fIpriority\fR level.  If there are several matching
-entries at the same priority level, then it returns whichever entry
-was most recently entered into the option database.  If there are
-no matching entries, then the empty string is returned.
-.PP
-The \fBreadfile\fR form of the command reads \fIfileName\fR,
-which should have the standard format for an
-X resource database such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, and adds all the
-options specified in that file to the option database.  If \fIpriority\fR
-is specified, it indicates the priority level at which to enter the
-options;  \fIpriority\fR defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
-.PP
-The file is read through a channel which is in "utf-8" encoding,
-invalid byte sequences are automatically converted to valid ones.
-This means that encodings like ISO 8859-1 or cp1252 with high
-probability will work as well, but this cannot be guaranteed.
-This cannot be changed, setting the [encoding system] has no effect.
-.PP
-The \fIpriority\fR arguments to the \fBoption\fR command are
-normally specified symbolically using one of the following values:
-.TP
-\fBwidgetDefault\fR
-Level 20.  Used for default values hard-coded into widgets.
-.TP
-\fBstartupFile\fR
-Level 40.  Used for options specified in application-specific
-startup files.
-.TP
-\fBuserDefault\fR
-Level 60.  Used for options specified in user-specific defaults
-files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into
-the X server, or user-specific startup files.
-.TP
-\fBinteractive\fR
-Level 80.  Used for options specified interactively after the application
-starts running.  If \fIpriority\fR is not specified, it defaults to
-this level.
-.PP
-Any of the above keywords may be abbreviated.  In addition, priorities
-may be specified numerically using integers between 0 and 100,
-inclusive.  The numeric form is probably a bad idea except for new priority
-levels other than the ones given above.
-.SH "PATTERN FORMAT"
-.PP
-Patterns consist of a sequence of words separated by either periods,
-.QW . ,
-or asterisks
-.QW * .
-The overall pattern may also be optionally preceded by an asterisk.
-.PP
-Each word in the pattern conventionally starts with either an upper-case
-letter (in which case it denotes the class of either a widget or an option) or
-any other character, when it denotes the name of a widget or option. The last
-word in the pattern always indicates the option; the preceding ones constrain
-which widgets that option will be looked for in.
-.PP
-When two words are separated by a period, the latter widget must be a direct
-child of the former (or the option must apply to only the indicated widgets).
-When two words are separated by an asterisk, any depth of widgets may lie
-between the former and latter widgets (and the option applies to all widgets
-that are children of the former widget).
-.PP
-If the overall pattern is preceded by an asterisk, then the overall pattern
-applies anywhere it can throughout the whole widget hierarchy. Otherwise the
-first word of the pattern is matched against the name and class of the
-.QW \fB.\fR
-\fBtoplevel\fR, which are usually set by options to \fBwish\fR.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-Instruct every button in the application to have red text on it unless
-explicitly overridden, by setting the \fBforeground\fR for the \fBButton\fR
-class (note that on some platforms the option is ignored):
-.CS
-\fBoption add\fR *Button.foreground red startupFile
-.CE
-.PP
-Allow users to control what happens in an entry widget when the Return
-key is pressed by specifying a script in the option database and add a
-default option for that which rings the bell:
-.CS
-entry .e
-bind .e <Return> [\fBoption get\fR .e returnCommand Command]
-\fBoption add\fR *.e.returnCommand bell widgetDefault
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-options(n), wish(1)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-database, option, priority, retrieve
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/optionMenu.n b/tk8.6/doc/optionMenu.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 42275ce..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/optionMenu.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk_optionMenu n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_optionMenu \- Create an option menubutton and its menu
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_optionMenu \fIpathName varName value \fR?\fIvalue value ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure creates an option menubutton whose name is \fIpathName\fR,
-plus an associated menu.
-Together they allow the user to select one of the values
-given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments.
-The current value will be stored in the global variable whose
-name is given by \fIvarName\fR and it will also be displayed as the label
-in the option menubutton.
-The user can click on the menubutton to display a menu containing
-all of the \fIvalue\fRs and thereby select a new value.
-Once a new value is selected, it will be stored in the variable
-and appear in the option menubutton.
-The current value can also be changed by setting the variable.
-.PP
-The return value from \fBtk_optionMenu\fR is the name of the menu
-associated with \fIpathName\fR, so that the caller can change its
-configuration options or manipulate it in other ways.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-tk_optionMenu .foo myVar Foo Bar Boo Spong Wibble
-pack .foo
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-option menu
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/options.n b/tk8.6/doc/options.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 738a1c6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/options.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,358 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH options n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-options \- Standard options supported by widgets
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This manual entry describes the common configuration options supported
-by widgets in the Tk toolkit.  Every widget does not necessarily support
-every option (see the manual entries for individual widgets for a list
-of the standard options supported by that widget), but if a widget does
-support an option with one of the names listed below, then the option
-has exactly the effect described below.
-.PP
-In the descriptions below,
-.QW "Command-Line Name"
-refers to the
-switch used in class commands and \fBconfigure\fR widget commands to
-set this value.  For example, if an option's command-line switch is
-\fB\-foreground\fR and there exists a widget \fB.a.b.c\fR, then the
-command
-.CS
-\&\fB.a.b.c\0\0configure\0\0\-foreground black\fR
-.CE
-may be used to specify the value \fBblack\fR for the option in
-the widget \fB.a.b.c\fR.  Command-line switches may be abbreviated,
-as long as the abbreviation is unambiguous.
-.QW "Database Name"
-refers to the option's name in the option database (e.g. in .Xdefaults files).
-.QW "Database Class"
-refers to the option's class value in the option database.
-.OP \-activebackground activeBackground Foreground
-Specifies background color to use when drawing active elements.
-An element (a widget or portion of a widget) is active if the
-mouse cursor is positioned over the element and pressing a mouse button
-will cause some action to occur.
-If strict Motif compliance has been requested by setting the
-\fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable, this option will normally be
-ignored;  the normal background color will be used instead.
-For some elements on Windows and Macintosh systems, the active color
-will only be used while mouse button 1 is pressed over the element.
-.OP \-activeborderwidth activeBorderWidth BorderWidth
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating
-the width of the 3-D border drawn around active elements.  See above for
-definition of active elements.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more
-than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons).
-.OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background
-Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements.
-See above for definition of active elements.
-.OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
-Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap)
-is to be displayed in the widget.
-Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
-\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR.
-For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its
-top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget.
-.OP "\-background or \-bg" background Background
-Specifies the normal background color to use when displaying the
-widget.
-.OP \-bitmap bitmap Bitmap
-Specifies a bitmap to display in the widget, in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR.
-The exact way in which the bitmap is displayed may be affected by
-other options such as \fB\-anchor\fR or \fB\-justify\fR.
-Typically, if this option is specified then it overrides other
-options that specify a textual value to display in the widget
-but this is controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option;
-the \fB\-bitmap\fR option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable
-a text display.
-In widgets that support both \fB\-bitmap\fR and \fB\-image\fR options,
-\fB\-image\fR will usually override \fB\-bitmap\fR.
-.OP "\-borderwidth or \-bd" borderWidth BorderWidth
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
-of the 3-D border to draw around the outside of the widget (if such a
-border is being drawn;  the \fB\-relief\fR option typically determines
-this).  The value may also be used when drawing 3-D effects in the
-interior of the widget.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-cursor cursor Cursor
-Specifies the mouse cursor to be used for the widget.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR.
-In addition, if an empty string is specified, it indicates that the
-widget should defer to its parent for cursor specification.
-.OP \-compound compound Compound
-Specifies if the widget should display text and bitmaps/images at the
-same time, and if so, where the bitmap/image should be placed relative
-to the text.  Must be one of the values \fBnone\fR, \fBbottom\fR,
-\fBtop\fR, \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR.  For example, the
-(default) value \fBnone\fR specifies that the bitmap or image should
-(if defined) be displayed instead of the text, the value \fBleft\fR
-specifies that the bitmap or image should be displayed to the left of
-the text, and the value \fBcenter\fR specifies that the bitmap or
-image should be displayed on top of the text.
-.OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground
-Specifies foreground color to use when drawing a disabled element.
-If the option is specified as an empty string (which is typically the
-case on monochrome displays), disabled elements are drawn with the
-normal foreground color but they are dimmed by drawing them
-with a stippled fill pattern.
-.OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection
-Specifies whether or not a selection in the widget should also be
-the X selection.
-The value may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR,
-such as \fBtrue\fR, \fBfalse\fR, \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, \fByes\fR, or \fBno\fR.
-If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects
-the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any
-widget selection, and the widget will respond to selection retrieval
-requests when it has a selection.  The default is usually for widgets
-to export selections.
-.OP \-font font Font
-Specifies the font to use when drawing text inside the widget.
-The value may have any of the forms described in the \fBfont\fR manual
-page under \fBFONT DESCRIPTION\fR.
-.OP "\-foreground or \-fg" foreground Foreground
-Specifies the normal foreground color to use when displaying the widget.
-.OP \-highlightbackground highlightBackground HighlightBackground
-Specifies the color to display in the traversal highlight region when
-the widget does not have the input focus.
-.OP \-highlightcolor highlightColor HighlightColor
-Specifies the color to use for the traversal highlight rectangle that is
-drawn around the widget when it has the input focus.
-.OP \-highlightthickness highlightThickness HighlightThickness
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the highlight
-rectangle to draw around the outside of the widget when it has the
-input focus.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If the value is zero, no focus highlight is drawn around the widget.
-.OP \-image image Image
-Specifies an image to display in the widget, which must have been
-created with the \fBimage create\fR command.
-Typically, if the \fB\-image\fR option is specified then it overrides other
-options that specify a bitmap or textual value to display in the
-widget, though this is controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option;
-the \fB\-image\fR option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable
-a bitmap or text display.
-.OP \-insertbackground insertBackground Foreground
-Specifies the color to use as background in the area covered by the
-insertion cursor.  This color will normally override either the normal
-background for the widget (or the selection background if the insertion
-cursor happens to fall in the selection).
-.OP \-insertborderwidth insertBorderWidth BorderWidth
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
-of the 3-D border to draw around the insertion cursor.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-insertofftime insertOffTime OffTime
-Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of
-milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain
-.QW off
-in each blink cycle.
-If this option is zero then the cursor does not blink:  it is on
-all the time.
-.OP \-insertontime insertOnTime OnTime
-Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of
-milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain
-.QW on
-in each blink cycle.
-.OP \-insertwidth insertWidth InsertWidth
-Specifies a  value indicating the total width of the insertion cursor.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If a border has been specified for the insertion
-cursor (using the \fB\-insertborderwidth\fR option), the border
-will be drawn inside the width specified by the \fB\-insertwidth\fR
-option.
-.OP \-jump jump Jump
-For widgets with a slider that can be dragged to adjust a value,
-such as scrollbars, this option determines when
-notifications are made about changes in the value.
-The option's value must be a boolean of the form accepted by
-\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
-If the value is false, updates are made continuously as the
-slider is dragged.
-If the value is true, updates are delayed until the mouse button
-is released to end the drag;  at that point a single notification
-is made (the value
-.QW jumps
-rather than changing smoothly).
-.OP \-justify justify Justify
-When there are multiple lines of text displayed in a widget, this
-option determines how the lines line up with each other.
-Must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR.
-\fBLeft\fR means that the lines' left edges all line up, \fBcenter\fR
-means that the lines' centers are aligned, and \fBright\fR means
-that the lines' right edges line up.
-.OP \-orient orient Orient
-For widgets that can lay themselves out with either a horizontal
-or vertical orientation, such as scrollbars, this option specifies
-which orientation should be used.  Must be either \fBhorizontal\fR
-or \fBvertical\fR or an abbreviation of one of these.
-.OP \-padx padX Pad
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space
-to request for the widget in the X-direction.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will
-add this amount to the width it would normally need (as determined
-by the width of the things displayed in the widget);  if the geometry
-manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra
-internal space to the left and/or right of what it displays inside.
-Most widgets only use this option for padding text:  if they are
-displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding
-options.
-.OP \-pady padY Pad
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space
-to request for the widget in the Y-direction.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will add
-this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by
-the height of the things displayed in the widget);  if the geometry
-manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra
-internal space above and/or below what it displays inside.
-Most widgets only use this option for padding text:  if they are
-displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding
-options.
-.OP \-relief relief Relief
-Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget.  Acceptable
-values are \fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBflat\fR, \fBridge\fR,
-\fBsolid\fR, and \fBgroove\fR.
-The value
-indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative
-to its exterior;  for example, \fBraised\fR means the interior of
-the widget should appear to protrude from the screen, relative to
-the exterior of the widget.
-.OP \-repeatdelay repeatDelay RepeatDelay
-Specifies the number of milliseconds a button or key must be held
-down before it begins to auto-repeat.  Used, for example, on the
-up- and down-arrows in scrollbars.
-.OP \-repeatinterval repeatInterval RepeatInterval
-Used in conjunction with \fB\-repeatdelay\fR:  once auto-repeat
-begins, this option determines the number of milliseconds between
-auto-repeats.
-.OP \-selectbackground selectBackground Foreground
-Specifies the background color to use when displaying selected
-items.
-.OP \-selectborderwidth selectBorderWidth BorderWidth
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
-of the 3-D border to draw around selected items.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-selectforeground selectForeground Background
-Specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected
-items.
-.OP \-setgrid setGrid SetGrid
-Specifies a boolean value that determines whether this widget controls the
-resizing grid for its top-level window.
-This option is typically used in text widgets, where the information
-in the widget has a natural size (the size of a character) and it makes
-sense for the window's dimensions to be integral numbers of these units.
-These natural window sizes form a grid.
-If the \fB\-setgrid\fR option is set to true then the widget will
-communicate with the window manager so that when the user interactively
-resizes the top-level window that contains the widget, the dimensions of
-the window will be displayed to the user in grid units and the window
-size will be constrained to integral numbers of grid units.
-See the section \fBGRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR in the \fBwm\fR manual
-entry for more details.
-.OP \-takefocus takeFocus TakeFocus
-Determines whether the window accepts the focus during keyboard
-traversal (e.g., Tab and Shift-Tab).
-Before setting the focus to a window, the traversal scripts
-consult the value of the \fB\-takefocus\fR option.
-A value of \fB0\fR means that the window should be skipped entirely
-during keyboard traversal.
-\fB1\fR means that the window should receive the input
-focus as long as it is viewable (it and all of its ancestors are mapped).
-An empty value for the option means that the traversal scripts make
-the decision about whether or not to focus on the window:  the current
-algorithm is to skip the window if it is
-disabled, if it has no key bindings, or if it is not viewable.
-If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take
-the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space),
-and evaluate the resulting string as a Tcl script.
-The script must return \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, or an empty string:  a
-\fB0\fR or \fB1\fR value specifies whether the window will receive
-the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision
-described above.
-Note: this interpretation of the option is defined entirely by
-the Tcl scripts that implement traversal:  the widget implementations
-ignore the option entirely, so you can change its meaning if you
-redefine the keyboard traversal scripts.
-.OP \-text text Text
-Specifies a string to be displayed inside the widget.  The way in which
-the string is displayed depends on the particular widget and may be
-determined by other options, such as \fB\-anchor\fR or \fB\-justify\fR.
-.OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable.  The value of the variable is a text
-string to be displayed inside the widget;  if the variable value changes
-then the widget will automatically update itself to reflect the new value.
-The way in which the string is displayed in the widget depends on the
-particular widget and may be determined by other options, such as
-\fB\-anchor\fR or \fB\-justify\fR.
-.OP \-troughcolor troughColor Background
-Specifies the color to use for the rectangular trough areas
-in widgets such as scrollbars and scales.  This option is ignored for
-scrollbars on Windows (native widget does not recognize this option).
-.OP \-underline underline Underline
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the widget.
-This option is used by the default bindings to implement keyboard
-traversal for menu buttons and menu entries.
-0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the
-widget, 1 to the next character, and so on.
-.OP \-wraplength wrapLength WrapLength
-For widgets that can perform word-wrapping, this option specifies
-the maximum line length.
-Lines that would exceed this length are wrapped onto the next line,
-so that no line is longer than the specified length.
-The value may be specified in any of the standard forms for
-screen distances.
-If this value is less than or equal to 0 then no wrapping is done:  lines
-will break only at newline characters in the text.
-.OP \-xscrollcommand xScrollCommand ScrollCommand
-Specifies the prefix for a command used to communicate with horizontal
-scrollbars.
-When the view in the widget's window changes (or
-whenever anything else occurs that could change the display in a
-scrollbar, such as a change in the total size of the widget's
-contents), the widget will
-generate a Tcl command by concatenating the scroll command and
-two numbers.
-Each of the numbers is a fraction between 0 and 1, which indicates
-a position in the document.  0 indicates the beginning of the document,
-1 indicates the end, .333 indicates a position one third the way through
-the document, and so on.
-The first fraction indicates the first information in the document
-that is visible in the window, and the second fraction indicates
-the information just after the last portion that is visible.
-The command is
-then passed to the Tcl interpreter for execution.  Typically the
-\fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option consists of the path name of a scrollbar
-widget followed by
-.QW set ,
-e.g.
-.QW ".x.scrollbar set" :
-this will cause
-the scrollbar to be updated whenever the view in the window changes.
-If this option is not specified, then no command will be executed.
-.OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand
-Specifies the prefix for a command used to communicate with vertical
-scrollbars.  This option is treated in the same way as the
-\fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option, except that it is used for vertical
-scrollbars and is provided by widgets that support vertical scrolling.
-See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR for details
-on how this option is used.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-colors, cursors, font
-.SH KEYWORDS
-class, name, standard option, switch
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/pack-old.n b/tk8.6/doc/pack-old.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 217dba9..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/pack-old.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,195 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH pack-old n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-pack-old \- Obsolete syntax for packer geometry manager
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpack after \fIsibling \fIwindow options\fR ?\fIwindow options \fR...?
-.sp
-\fBpack append \fIparent \fIwindow options\fR ?\fIwindow options \fR...?
-.sp
-\fBpack before \fIsibling \fIwindow options\fR ?\fIwindow options \fR...?
-.sp
-\fBpack unpack \fIwindow\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fINote: this manual entry describes the syntax for the \fBpack\fI
-command as it existed before Tk version 3.3.
-Although this syntax continues to be supported for backward
-compatibility, it is obsolete and should not be used anymore.
-At some point in the future it may cease to be supported.\fR
-.PP
-The packer is a geometry manager that arranges the
-children of a parent by packing them in order around the edges of
-the parent.  The first child is placed against one side of
-the window, occupying the entire span of the window along that
-side.  This reduces the space remaining for other children as
-if the side had been moved in by the size of the first child.
-Then the next child is placed against one side of the remaining
-cavity, and so on until all children have been placed or there
-is no space left in the cavity.
-.PP
-The \fBbefore\fR, \fBafter\fR, and \fBappend\fR forms of the \fBpack\fR
-command are used to insert one or more children into the packing order
-for their parent.  The \fBbefore\fR form inserts the children before
-window \fIsibling\fR in the order;  all of the other windows must be
-siblings of \fIsibling\fR.  The \fBafter\fR form inserts the windows
-after \fIsibling\fR, and the \fBappend\fR form appends one or more
-windows to the end of the packing order for \fIparent\fR.  If a
-\fIwindow\fR named in any of these commands is already packed in
-its parent, it is removed from its current position in the packing
-order and repositioned as indicated by the command.  All of these
-commands return an empty string as result.
-.PP
-The \fBunpack\fR form of the \fBpack\fR command removes \fIwindow\fR
-from the packing order of its parent and unmaps it.  After the
-execution of this command the packer will no longer manage
-\fIwindow\fR's geometry.
-.PP
-The placement of each child is actually a four-step process;
-the \fIoptions\fR argument following each \fIwindow\fR consists of
-a list of one or more fields that govern the placement of that
-window.  In the discussion below, the term \fIcavity\fR refers
-to the space left in a parent when a particular child is placed
-(i.e. all the space that was not claimed by earlier children in
-the packing order).  The term \fIparcel\fR refers to the space
-allocated to a particular child;  this is not necessarily the
-same as the child window's final geometry.
-.PP
-The first step in placing a child is to determine which side of
-the cavity it will lie against.  Any one of the following options
-may be used to specify a side:
-.TP
-\fBtop\fR
-Position the child's parcel against the top of the cavity,
-occupying the full width of the cavity.
-.TP
-\fBbottom\fR
-Position the child's parcel against the bottom of the cavity,
-occupying the full width of the cavity.
-.TP
-\fBleft\fR
-Position the child's parcel against the left side of the cavity,
-occupying the full height of the cavity.
-.TP
-\fBright\fR
-Position the child's parcel against the right side of the cavity,
-occupying the full height of the cavity.
-.LP
-At most one of these options should be specified for any given window.
-If no side is specified, then the default is \fBtop\fR.
-.PP
-The second step is to decide on a parcel for the child.  For \fBtop\fR
-and \fBbottom\fR windows, the desired parcel width is normally the cavity
-width and the desired parcel height is the window's requested height,
-as passed to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR. For \fBleft\fR and \fBright\fR
-windows, the desired parcel height is normally the cavity height and the
-desired width is the window's requested width.  However, extra
-space may be requested for the window using any of the following
-options:
-.TP 12
-\fBpadx \fInum\fR
-Add \fInum\fR pixels to the window's requested width before computing
-the parcel size as described above.
-.TP 12
-\fBpady \fInum\fR
-Add \fInum\fR pixels to the window's requested height before computing
-the parcel size as described above.
-.TP 12
-\fBexpand\fR
-This option requests that the window's parcel absorb any extra space left over
-in the parent's cavity after packing all the children.
-The amount of space left over depends on the sizes requested by the
-other children, and may be zero.  If several windows have all specified
-\fBexpand\fR then the extra width will be divided equally among all the
-\fBleft\fR and \fBright\fR windows that specified \fBexpand\fR and
-the extra height will be divided equally among all the \fBtop\fR and
-\fBbottom\fR windows that specified \fBexpand\fR.
-.LP
-If the desired width or height for a parcel is larger than the corresponding
-dimension of the cavity, then the cavity's dimension is used instead.
-.PP
-The third step in placing the window is to decide on the window's
-width and height.  The default is for the window to receive either
-its requested width and height or the those of the parcel, whichever
-is smaller.  If the parcel is larger than the window's requested
-size, then the following options may be used to expand the
-window to partially or completely fill the parcel:
-.TP
-\fBfill\fR
-Set the window's size to equal the parcel size.
-.TP
-\fBfillx\fR
-Increase the window's width to equal the parcel's width, but retain
-the window's requested height.
-.TP
-\fBfilly\fR
-Increase the window's height to equal the parcel's height, but retain
-the window's requested width.
-.PP
-The last step is to decide the window's location within its parcel.
-If the window's size equals the parcel's size, then the window simply
-fills the entire parcel.  If the parcel is larger than the window,
-then one of
-the following options may be used to specify where the window should
-be positioned within its parcel:
-.TP 15
-\fBframe center\fR
-Center the window in its parcel.  This is the default if no framing
-option is specified.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe n\fR
-Position the window with its top edge centered on the top edge of
-the parcel.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe ne\fR
-Position the window with its upper-right corner at the upper-right corner
-of the parcel.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe e\fR
-Position the window with its right edge centered on the right edge of
-the parcel.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe se\fR
-Position the window with its lower-right corner at the lower-right corner
-of the parcel.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe s\fR
-Position the window with its bottom edge centered on the bottom edge of
-the parcel.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe sw\fR
-Position the window with its lower-left corner at the lower-left corner
-of the parcel.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe w\fR
-Position the window with its left edge centered on the left edge of
-the parcel.
-.TP 15
-\fBframe nw\fR
-Position the window with its upper-left corner at the upper-left corner
-of the parcel.
-.PP
-The packer manages the mapped/unmapped state of all the packed
-children windows.  It automatically maps the windows when it packs
-them, and it unmaps any windows for which there was no space left
-in the cavity.
-.PP
-The packer makes geometry requests on behalf of the parent windows
-it manages.  For each parent window it requests a size large enough
-to accommodate all the options specified by all the packed children,
-such that zero space would be leftover for \fBexpand\fR options.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-geometry manager, location, packer, parcel, size
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/pack.n b/tk8.6/doc/pack.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 538af62..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/pack.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,283 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH pack n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-pack \- Geometry manager that packs around edges of cavity
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpack \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBpack\fR command is used to communicate with the packer,
-a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by
-packing them in order around the edges of the parent.
-The \fBpack\fR command can have any of several forms, depending
-on the \fIoption\fR argument:
-.TP
-\fBpack \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
-If the first argument to \fBpack\fR is a window name (any value
-starting with
-.QW . ),
-then the command is processed in the same way as \fBpack configure\fR.
-.TP
-\fBpack configure \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
-The arguments consist of the names of one or more slave windows
-followed by pairs of arguments that specify how
-to manage the slaves.
-See \fBTHE PACKER ALGORITHM\fR below for details on how the options
-are used by the packer.
-The following options are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-after \fIother\fR
-\fIOther\fR must the name of another window.
-Use its master as the master for the slaves, and insert
-the slaves just after \fIother\fR in the packing order.
-.TP
-\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
-\fIAnchor\fR must be a valid anchor position such as \fBn\fR
-or \fBsw\fR; it specifies where to position each slave in its
-parcel.
-Defaults to \fBcenter\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-before \fIother\fR
-\fIOther\fR must the name of another window.
-Use its master as the master for the slaves, and insert
-the slaves just before \fIother\fR in the packing order.
-.TP
-\fB\-expand \fIboolean\fR
-Specifies whether the slaves should be expanded to consume
-extra space in their master.
-\fIBoolean\fR may have any proper boolean value, such as \fB1\fR
-or \fBno\fR.
-Defaults to 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-fill \fIstyle\fR
-If a slave's parcel is larger than its requested dimensions, this
-option may be used to stretch the slave.
-\fIStyle\fR must have one of the following values:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBnone\fR
-Give the slave its requested dimensions plus any internal padding
-requested with \fB\-ipadx\fR or \fB\-ipady\fR.  This is the default.
-.TP
-\fBx\fR
-Stretch the slave horizontally to fill the entire width of its
-parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-padx\fR).
-.TP
-\fBy\fR
-Stretch the slave vertically to fill the entire height of its
-parcel (except leave external padding as specified by \fB\-pady\fR).
-.TP
-\fBboth\fR
-Stretch the slave both horizontally and vertically.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-in \fIother\fR
-Insert the slave(s) at the end of the packing order for the master
-window given by \fIother\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR
-\fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).
-\fIAmount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR.
-It defaults to 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR
-\fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).
-\fIAmount\fR  defaults to 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-padx \fIamount\fR
-\fIAmount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).  \fIAmount\fR may be a list
-of two values to specify padding for left and right separately.
-\fIAmount\fR defaults to 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-pady \fIamount\fR
-\fIAmount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).  \fIAmount\fR may be a list
-of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately.
-\fIAmount\fR defaults to 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-side \fIside\fR
-Specifies which side of the master the slave(s) will be packed against.
-Must be \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, \fBtop\fR, or \fBbottom\fR.
-Defaults to \fBtop\fR.
-.LP
-If no \fB\-in\fR, \fB\-after\fR or \fB\-before\fR option is specified
-then each of the slaves will be inserted at the end of the packing list
-for its parent unless it is already managed by the packer (in which
-case it will be left where it is).
-If one of these options is specified then all the slaves will be
-inserted at the specified point.
-If any of the slaves are already managed by the geometry manager
-then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
-than receiving default values.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBpack forget \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR?
-Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from the packing order for its
-master and unmaps their windows.
-The slaves will no longer be managed by the packer.
-.TP
-\fBpack info \fIslave\fR
-Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
-the slave given by \fIslave\fR in the same option-value form that
-might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR.
-The first two elements of the list are
-.QW "\fB\-in \fImaster\fR"
-where \fImaster\fR is the slave's master.
-.TP
-\fBpack propagate \fImaster\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
-If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR
-then propagation is enabled for \fImaster\fR, which must be a window
-name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below).
-If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is
-disabled for \fImaster\fR.
-In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
-If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or
-\fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
-for \fImaster\fR.
-Propagation is enabled by default.
-.TP
-\fBpack slaves \fImaster\fR
-Returns a list of all of the slaves in the packing order for \fImaster\fR.
-The order of the slaves in the list is the same as their order in
-the packing order.
-If \fImaster\fR has no slaves then an empty string is returned.
-.SH "THE PACKER ALGORITHM"
-.PP
-For each master the packer maintains an ordered list of slaves
-called the \fIpacking list\fR.
-The \fB\-in\fR, \fB\-after\fR, and \fB\-before\fR configuration
-options are used to specify the master for each slave and the slave's
-position in the packing list.
-If none of these options is given for a slave then the slave
-is added to the end of the packing list for its parent.
-.PP
-The packer arranges the slaves for a master by scanning the
-packing list in order.
-At the time it processes each slave, a rectangular area within
-the master is still unallocated.
-This area is called the \fIcavity\fR;  for the first slave it
-is the entire area of the master.
-.PP
-For each slave the packer carries out the following steps:
-.IP [1]
-The packer allocates a rectangular \fIparcel\fR for the slave
-along the side of the cavity given by the slave's \fB\-side\fR option.
-If the side is top or bottom then the width of the parcel is
-the width of the cavity and its height is the requested height
-of the slave plus the \fB\-ipady\fR and \fB\-pady\fR options.
-For the left or right side the height of the parcel is
-the height of the cavity and the width is the requested width
-of the slave plus the \fB\-ipadx\fR and \fB\-padx\fR options.
-The parcel may be enlarged further because of the \fB\-expand\fR
-option (see \fBEXPANSION\fR below)
-.IP [2]
-The packer chooses the dimensions of the slave.
-The width will normally be the slave's requested width plus
-twice its \fB\-ipadx\fR option and the height will normally be
-the slave's requested height plus twice its \fB\-ipady\fR
-option.
-However, if the \fB\-fill\fR option is \fBx\fR or \fBboth\fR
-then the width of the slave is expanded to fill the width of the parcel,
-minus twice the \fB\-padx\fR option.
-If the \fB\-fill\fR option is \fBy\fR or \fBboth\fR
-then the height of the slave is expanded to fill the width of the parcel,
-minus twice the \fB\-pady\fR option.
-.IP [3]
-The packer positions the slave over its parcel.
-If the slave is smaller than the parcel then the \fB\-anchor\fR
-option determines where in the parcel the slave will be placed.
-If \fB\-padx\fR or \fB\-pady\fR is non-zero, then the given
-amount of external padding will always be left between the
-slave and the edges of the parcel.
-.PP
-Once a given slave has been packed, the area of its parcel
-is subtracted from the cavity, leaving a smaller rectangular
-cavity for the next slave.
-If a slave does not use all of its parcel, the unused space
-in the parcel will not be used by subsequent slaves.
-If the cavity should become too small to meet the needs of
-a slave then the slave will be given whatever space is
-left in the cavity.
-If the cavity shrinks to zero size, then all remaining slaves
-on the packing list will be unmapped from the screen until
-the master window becomes large enough to hold them again.
-.SS "EXPANSION"
-.PP
-If a master window is so large that there will be extra space
-left over after all of its slaves have been packed, then the
-extra space is distributed uniformly among all of the slaves
-for which the \fB\-expand\fR option is set.
-Extra horizontal space is distributed among the expandable
-slaves whose \fB\-side\fR is \fBleft\fR or \fBright\fR,
-and extra vertical space is distributed among the expandable
-slaves whose \fB\-side\fR is \fBtop\fR or \fBbottom\fR.
-.SS "GEOMETRY PROPAGATION"
-.PP
-The packer normally computes how large a master must be to
-just exactly meet the needs of its slaves, and it sets the
-requested width and height of the master to these dimensions.
-This causes geometry information to propagate up through a
-window hierarchy to a top-level window so that the entire
-sub-tree sizes itself to fit the needs of the leaf windows.
-However, the \fBpack propagate\fR command may be used to
-turn off propagation for one or more masters.
-If propagation is disabled then the packer will not set
-the requested width and height of the packer.
-This may be useful if, for example, you wish for a master
-window to have a fixed size that you specify.
-.SH "RESTRICTIONS ON MASTER WINDOWS"
-.PP
-The master for each slave must either be the slave's parent
-(the default) or a descendant of the slave's parent.
-This restriction is necessary to guarantee that the
-slave can be placed over any part of its master that is
-visible without danger of the slave being clipped by its parent.
-.SH "PACKING ORDER"
-.PP
-If the master for a slave is not its parent then you must make sure
-that the slave is higher in the stacking order than the master.
-Otherwise the master will obscure the slave and it will appear as
-if the slave has not been packed correctly.
-The easiest way to make sure the slave is higher than the master is
-to create the master window first:  the most recently created window
-will be highest in the stacking order.
-Or, you can use the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR commands to change
-the stacking order of either the master or the slave.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-# Make the widgets
-label .t \-text "This widget is at the top"    \-bg red
-label .b \-text "This widget is at the bottom" \-bg green
-label .l \-text "Left\enHand\enSide"
-label .r \-text "Right\enHand\enSide"
-text .mid
-\&.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout"
-# Lay them out
-\fBpack\fR .t   \-side top    \-fill x
-\fBpack\fR .b   \-side bottom \-fill x
-\fBpack\fR .l   \-side left   \-fill y
-\fBpack\fR .r   \-side right  \-fill y
-\fBpack\fR .mid \-expand 1    \-fill both
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-grid(n), place(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-geometry manager, location, packer, parcel, propagation, size
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/palette.n b/tk8.6/doc/palette.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 085c4c6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/palette.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk_setPalette n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_setPalette, tk_bisque \- Modify the Tk color palette
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_setPalette \fIbackground\fR
-.sp
-\fBtk_setPalette \fIname value \fR?\fIname value ...\fR?
-.sp
-\fBtk_bisque\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtk_setPalette\fR procedure changes the color scheme for Tk.
-It does this by modifying the colors of existing widgets and by changing
-the option database so that future widgets will use the new color scheme.
-If \fBtk_setPalette\fR is invoked with a single argument, the
-argument is the name of a color to use as the normal background
-color;  \fBtk_setPalette\fR will compute a complete color palette
-from this background color.
-Alternatively, the arguments to \fBtk_setPalette\fR may consist of any number
-of \fIname\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, where the first argument of the pair
-is the name of an option in the Tk option database and the second
-argument is the new value to use for that option.  The following
-database names are currently supported:
-.DS
-.ta 4c 8c
-\fBactiveBackground\fR	\fBforeground\fR	\fBselectColor\fR
-\fBactiveForeground\fR	\fBhighlightBackground\fR	\fBselectBackground\fR
-\fBbackground\fR	\fBhighlightColor\fR	\fBselectForeground\fR
-\fBdisabledForeground\fR	\fBinsertBackground\fR	\fBtroughColor\fR
-.DE
-\fBtk_setPalette\fR tries to compute reasonable defaults for any
-options that you do not specify.  You can specify options other
-than the above ones and Tk will change those options on widgets as
-well.  This feature may be useful if you are using custom widgets with
-additional color options.
-.PP
-Once it has computed the new value to use for each of the color options,
-\fBtk_setPalette\fR scans the widget hierarchy to modify the options
-of all existing widgets.  For each widget, it checks to see if any
-of the above options is defined for the widget.  If so, and if the
-option's current value is the default, then the value is changed;  if
-the option has a value other than the default, \fBtk_setPalette\fR
-will not change it.  The default for an option is the one provided by
-the widget (\fB[lindex [$w configure $option] 3]\fR) unless
-\fBtk_setPalette\fR has been run previously, in which case it is the
-value specified in the previous invocation of \fBtk_setPalette\fR.
-.PP
-After modifying all the widgets in the application, \fBtk_setPalette\fR
-adds options to the option database to change the defaults for
-widgets created in the future.  The new options are added at
-priority \fBwidgetDefault\fR, so they will be overridden by options
-from the .Xdefaults file or options specified on the command-line
-that creates a widget.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBtk_bisque\fR is provided for backward compatibility:
-it restores the application's colors to the light brown
-.PQ bisque
-color scheme used in Tk 3.6 and earlier versions.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bisque, color, palette
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/panedwindow.n b/tk8.6/doc/panedwindow.n
deleted file mode 100644
index fcfebf4..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/panedwindow.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,339 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH panedwindow n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-panedwindow \- Create and manipulate 'panedwindow' split container widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpanedwindow\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-background	\-borderwidth	\-cursor
-\-orient	\-relief
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-handlepad handlePad HandlePad
-When sash handles are drawn, specifies the distance from the top or
-left end of the sash (depending on the orientation of the widget) at
-which to draw the handle.  May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-handlesize handleSize HandleSize
-Specifies the side length of a sash handle.  Handles are always
-drawn as squares.  May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies a desired height for the overall panedwindow widget. May be any
-value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If an empty string, the widget will be
-made high enough to allow all contained widgets to have their natural height.
-.OP \-proxybackground proxyBackground ProxyBackground
-Background color to use when drawing the proxy. If an empty string, the
-value of the \fB-background\fR option will be used.
-.OP \-proxyborderwidth proxyBorderWidth ProxyBorderWidth
-Specifies the borderwidth of the proxy. May be any value accepted by
-\fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-proxyrelief proxyRelief ProxyRelief
-Relief to use when drawing the proxy. May be any of the standard Tk
-relief values. If an empty string, the value of the \fB-sashrelief\fR
-option will be used.
-.OP \-opaqueresize opaqueResize OpaqueResize
-Specifies whether panes should be resized as a sash is moved (true),
-or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false).
-.OP \-sashcursor sashCursor SashCursor
-Mouse cursor to use when over a sash.  If null,
-\fBsb_h_double_arrow\fR will be used for horizontal panedwindows, and
-\fBsb_v_double_arrow\fR will be used for vertical panedwindows.
-.OP \-sashpad sashPad SashPad
-Specifies the amount of padding to leave of each side of a sash.  May
-be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-sashrelief sashRelief SashRelief
-Relief to use when drawing a sash.  May be any of the standard Tk
-relief values.
-.OP \-sashwidth sashWidth SashWidth
-Specifies the width of each sash.  May be any value accepted by
-\fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-showhandle showHandle ShowHandle
-Specifies whether sash handles should be shown.  May be any valid Tcl
-boolean value.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies a desired width for the overall panedwindow widget. May be any
-value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If an empty string, the widget will be
-made wide enough to allow all contained widgets to have their natural width.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a panedwindow widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command
-line or in the option database to configure aspects of the panedwindow
-such as its default background color and relief.  The
-\fBpanedwindow\fR command returns the path name of the new window.
-.PP
-A panedwindow widget contains any number of panes, arranged
-horizontally or vertically, according to the value of the
-\fB\-orient\fR option.  Each pane contains one widget, and each pair of
-panes is separated by a moveable (via mouse movements) sash.  Moving a
-sash causes the widgets on either side of the sash to be resized.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is
-the same as the path name of the panedwindow's window.  This command
-may be used to invoke various operations on the widget.  It has the
-following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
-the panedwindow widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for panedwindow widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBadd \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-Add one or more windows to the panedwindow, each in a separate pane.
-The arguments consist of the names of one or more windows
-followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the windows.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
-\fBconfigure\fR subcommand.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
-\fIoption\fR.  \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
-\fBpanedwindow\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.  If no
-\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the
-available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have
-any of the values accepted by the \fBpanedwindow\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBforget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR?
-.
-Remove the pane containing \fIwindow\fR from the panedwindow.  All
-geometry management options for \fIwindow\fR will be forgotten.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-.
-Identify the panedwindow component underneath the point given by
-\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, in window coordinates.  If the point is over a
-sash or a sash handle, the result is a two element list containing the
-index of the sash or handle, and a word indicating whether it is over
-a sash or a handle, such as {0 sash} or {2 handle}.  If the point is
-over any other part of the panedwindow, the result is an empty list.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBproxy \fR?\fIargs\fR?
-.
-This command is used to query and change the position of the sash
-proxy, used for rubberband-style pane resizing. It can take any of
-the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBproxy coord\fR
-.
-Return a list containing the x and y coordinates of the most recent
-proxy location.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBproxy forget\fR
-.
-Remove the proxy from the display.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBproxy place \fIx y\fR
-.
-Place the proxy at the given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsash \fR?\fIargs\fR?
-This command is used to query and change the position of sashes in the
-panedwindow.  It can take any of the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsash coord \fIindex\fR
-.
-Return the current x and y coordinate pair for the sash given by
-\fIindex\fR.  \fIIndex\fR must be an integer between 0 and 1 less than
-the number of panes in the panedwindow.  The coordinates given are
-those of the top left corner of the region containing the sash.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsash dragto \fIindex x y\fR
-.
-This command computes the difference between the given coordinates and the
-coordinates given to the last \fBsash mark\fR command for the given
-sash.  It then moves that sash the computed difference.  The return
-value is the empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsash mark \fIindex x y\fR
-.
-Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR for the sash given by \fIindex\fR; used in
-conjunction with later \fBsash dragto\fR commands to move the sash.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsash place \fIindex x y\fR
-.
-Place the sash given by \fIindex\fR at the given coordinates.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpanecget \fIwindow option\fR
-.
-Query a management option for \fIwindow\fR.  \fIOption\fR may be any
-value allowed by the \fBpaneconfigure\fR subcommand.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpaneconfigure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the management options for \fIwindow\fR.  If no
-\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the
-available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.  The following options
-are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-after \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Insert the window after the window specified.  \fIwindow\fR should be the
-name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-before \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Insert the window before the window specified.  \fIwindow\fR should be
-the name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
-.
-Specify a height for the window.  The height will be the outer
-dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If \fIsize\fR
-is an empty string, or if \fB\-height\fR is not specified, then the
-height requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
-height may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
-panedwindow.  \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR
-.
-Controls the visibility of a pane.  When the \fIboolean\fR is true
-(according to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR) the pane will not be visible, but
-it will still be maintained in the list of panes.
-.TP
-\fB\-minsize \fIn\fR
-.
-Specifies that the size of the window cannot be made less than
-\fIn\fR.  This constraint only affects the size of the widget in the
-paned dimension \(em the x dimension for horizontal panedwindows, the y
-dimension for vertical panedwindows.  May be any value accepted by
-\fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-padx \fIn\fR
-.
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-leave on each side of the window in the X-direction.  The value may
-have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-pady \fIn\fR
-.
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-leave on each side of the window in the Y-direction.  The value may
-have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR
-.
-If a window's pane is larger than the requested dimensions of the
-window, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the window
-within its pane.  \fIStyle\fR  is a string that contains zero or more
-of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR.  The string
-can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored.  Each
-letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the window
-will
-.QW stick
-to.  If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR)
-are specified, the window will be stretched to fill the entire height
-(or width) of its cavity.
-.TP
-\fB\-stretch \fIwhen\fR
-.
-Controls how extra space is allocated to each of the panes.
-\fIWhen\fR is one of \fBalways\fR, \fBfirst\fR, \fBlast\fR,
-\fBmiddle\fR, and \fBnever\fR.
-The panedwindow will calculate the required size of all its panes. Any
-remaining (or deficit) space will be distributed to those panes marked
-for stretching. The space will be distributed based on each panes
-current ratio of the whole.  The \fIwhen\fR values have the following
-definition:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBalways\fR
-.
-This pane will always stretch.
-.TP
-\fBfirst\fR
-.
-Only if this pane is the first pane (left-most or top-most) will it
-stretch.
-.TP
-\fBlast\fR
-.
-Only if this pane is the last pane (right-most or bottom-most) will it
-stretch.  This is the default value.
-.TP
-\fBmiddle\fR
-.
-Only if this pane is not the first or last pane will it stretch.
-.TP
-\fBnever\fR
-.
-This pane will never stretch.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
-.
-Specify a width for the window.  The width will be the outer
-dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If \fIsize\fR
-is an empty string, or if \fB\-width\fR is not specified, then the
-width requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
-width may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
-panedwindow.  \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpanes\fR
-.
-Returns an ordered list of the widgets managed by \fIpathName\fR.
-.SH "RESIZING PANES"
-.PP
-A pane is resized by grabbing the sash (or sash handle if present) and
-dragging with the mouse.  This is accomplished via mouse motion
-bindings on the widget.  When a sash is moved, the sizes of the panes
-on each side of the sash, and thus the widgets in those panes, are
-adjusted.
-.PP
-When a pane is resized from outside (e.g. it is packed to expand and
-fill, and the containing toplevel is resized), space is added to the final
-(rightmost or bottommost) pane in the window.
-.PP
-Unlike slave windows managed by e.g. pack or grid, the panes managed by a
-panedwindow do not change width or height to accomodate changes in the
-requested widths or heights of the panes, once these have become mapped.
-Therefore it may be advisable, particularly when creating layouts
-interactively, to not add a pane to the panedwindow widget until after the
-geometry requests of that pane has been finalized (i.e., all components of
-the pane inserted, all options affecting geometry set to their proper
-values, etc.).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::panedwindow(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-panedwindow, widget, geometry management
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/photo.n b/tk8.6/doc/photo.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 0fe0c61..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/photo.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,543 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-'\" Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
-'\"	    Department of Computer Science,
-'\"	    Australian National University.
-'\"
-.TH photo n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-photo \- Full-color images
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBimage create photo \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
-
-\fIimageName \fBblank\fR
-\fIimageName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-\fIimageName \fBcopy \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-\fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-\fIimageName \fBget \fIx y\fR
-\fIimageName \fBput \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-\fIimageName \fBread \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-\fIimageName \fBredither\fR
-\fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-\fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A photo is an image whose pixels can display any color or be
-transparent.  A photo image is stored internally in full color (32
-bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary.  Image
-data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it
-can be supplied from
-C code through a procedural interface.  At present, only
-.VS 8.6
-PNG,
-.VE 8.6
-GIF and PPM/PGM
-formats are supported, but an interface exists to allow additional
-image file formats to be added easily.  A photo image is transparent
-in regions where no image data has been supplied
-or where it has been set transparent by the \fBtransparency set\fR
-subcommand.
-.SH "CREATING PHOTOS"
-.PP
-Like all images, photos are created using the \fBimage create\fR
-command.
-Photos support the following \fIoptions\fR:
-.TP
-\fB\-data \fIstring\fR
-.
-Specifies the contents of the image as a string.  The string should
-contain binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is
-currently guaranteed to be supported for PNG and GIF images). The
-format of the
-string must be one of those for which there is an image file format
-handler that will accept string data.  If both the \fB\-data\fR
-and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR option takes
-precedence.
-.TP
-\fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR
-.
-Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the
-\fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option.
-.TP
-\fB\-file \fIname\fR
-.
-\fIname\fR gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data
-for the photo image.  The file format must be one of those for which
-there is an image file format handler that can read data.
-.TP
-\fB\-gamma \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Specifies that the colors allocated for displaying this image in a
-window should be corrected for a non-linear display with the specified
-gamma exponent value.  (The intensity produced by most
-CRT displays is a power function of the input value, to a good
-approximation; gamma is the exponent and is typically around 2).
-The value specified must be greater than zero.  The default
-value is one (no correction).  In general, values greater than one
-will make the image lighter, and values less than one will make it
-darker.
-.TP
-\fB\-height \fInumber\fR
-.
-Specifies the height of the image, in pixels.  This option is useful
-primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
-of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
-image to expand or shrink vertically to fit the data stored in it.
-.TP
-\fB\-palette \fIpalette-spec\fR
-.
-Specifies the resolution of the color cube to be allocated for
-displaying this image, and thus the number of colors used from the
-colormaps of the windows where it is displayed.  The
-\fIpalette-spec\fR string may be either a single decimal number,
-specifying the number of shades of gray to use, or three decimal
-numbers separated by slashes (/), specifying the number of shades of
-red, green and blue to use, respectively.  If the first form (a single
-number) is used, the image will be displayed in monochrome (i.e.,
-grayscale).
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fInumber\fR
-.
-Specifies the width of the image, in pixels.    This option is useful
-primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
-of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
-image to expand or shrink horizontally to fit the data stored in it.
-.SH "IMAGE COMMAND"
-.PP
-When a photo image is created, Tk also creates a new command
-whose name is the same as the image.
-This command may be used to invoke various operations
-on the image.
-It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.
-.PP
-Those options that write data to the image generally expand the size
-of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the
-image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the
-\fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR configuration options, in which
-case the width and/or height, respectively, of the image will not be
-changed.
-.PP
-The following commands are possible for photo images:
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBblank\fR
-.
-Blank the image; that is, set the entire image to have no data, so it
-will be displayed as transparent, and the background of whatever
-window it is displayed in will show through.
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
-\fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options for the image.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIimageName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the
-\fBimage create\fR \fBphoto\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBcopy\fR \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-.
-Copies a region from the image called \fIsourceImage\fR (which must
-be a photo image) to the image called \fIimageName\fR, possibly with
-pixel zooming and/or subsampling.  If no options are specified, this
-command copies the whole of \fIsourceImage\fR into \fIimageName\fR,
-starting at coordinates (0,0) in \fIimageName\fR.  The following
-options may be specified:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
-.
-Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the source image to be copied.
-(\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite corners of
-the rectangle.  If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified, the
-default value is the bottom-right corner of the source image.  The
-pixels copied will include the left and top edges of the specified
-rectangle but not the bottom or right edges.  If the \fB\-from\fR
-option is not given, the default is the whole source image.
-.TP
-\fB\-to \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
-.
-Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the destination image to be
-affected.  (\fIx1,y1\fR) and (\fIx2,y2\fR) specify diagonally opposite
-corners of the rectangle.  If \fIx2\fR and \fIy2\fR are not specified,
-the default value is (\fIx1,y1\fR) plus the size of the source
-region (after subsampling and zooming, if specified).  If \fIx2\fR and
-\fIy2\fR are specified, the source region will be replicated if
-necessary to fill the destination region in a tiled fashion.
-.TP
-\fB\-shrink\fR
-.
-Specifies that the size of the destination image should be reduced, if
-necessary, so that the region being copied into is at the bottom-right
-corner of the image.  This option will not affect the width or height
-of the image if the user has specified a non-zero value for the
-\fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR configuration option, respectively.
-.TP
-\fB\-zoom \fIx y\fR
-.
-Specifies that the source region should be magnified by a factor of
-\fIx\fR in the X direction and \fIy\fR in the Y direction.  If \fIy\fR
-is not given, the default value is the same as \fIx\fR.  With this
-option, each pixel in the source image will be expanded into a block
-of \fIx\fR x \fIy\fR pixels in the destination image, all the same
-color.  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR must be greater than 0.
-.TP
-\fB\-subsample \fIx y\fR
-.
-Specifies that the source image should be reduced in size by using
-only every \fIx\fRth pixel in the X direction and \fIy\fRth pixel in
-the Y direction.  Negative values will cause the image to be flipped
-about the Y or X axes, respectively.  If \fIy\fR is not given, the
-default value is the same as \fIx\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-compositingrule \fIrule\fR
-.
-Specifies how transparent pixels in the source image are combined with
-the destination image.  When a compositing rule of \fIoverlay\fR is
-set, the old contents of the destination image are visible, as if the
-source image were printed on a piece of transparent film and placed
-over the top of the destination.  When a compositing rule of \fIset\fR
-is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and
-the source image is used as-is.  The default compositing rule is
-\fIoverlay\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-.
-Returns image data in the form of a string. The following options
-may be specified:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-background\fI color\fR
-.
-If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
-information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
-the specified color.
-.TP
-\fB\-format\fI format-name\fR
-.
-Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used.
-Specifically, this subcommand searches
-for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of
-\fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write a string
-containing this image data.
-If this option is not given, this subcommand uses a format that
-consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element per
-pixel/column) of colors in
-.QW \fB#\fIrrggbb\fR
-format (where \fIrr\fR is a pair of hexadecimal digits for the red
-channel, \fIgg\fR for green, and \fIbb\fR for blue).
-.TP
-\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
-.
-Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be returned.
-If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
-extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
-\fIimageName\fR.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
-diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1
-and excluding x2,y2.  The default, if this option is not given, is the
-whole image.
-.TP
-\fB\-grayscale\fR
-.
-If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
-information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBget\fR \fIx y\fR
-.
-Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) in the
-image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the
-red, green and blue components respectively.
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBput\fR \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-.
-Sets pixels in \fI imageName\fR to the data specified in \fIdata\fR.
-This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for
-a handler that can interpret the data in \fIdata\fR, and then reads
-the image encoded within into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image).
-If \fIdata\fR does not match any known format, an attempt to interpret
-it as a (top-to-bottom) list of scan-lines is made, with each
-scan-line being a (left-to-right) list of pixel colors (see
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR for a description of valid colors.)  Every scan-line
-must be of the same length.  Note that when \fIdata\fR is a single
-color name, you are instructing Tk to fill a rectangular region with
-that color.  The following options may be specified:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR
-.
-Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR.
-Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
-\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
-format handler to read the data.
-.TP
-\fB\-to \fIx1 y1\fR ?\fIx2 y2\fR?
-.
-Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR)
-of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which the image data will be
-copied.  The default position is (0,0).  If \fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR is given
-and \fIdata\fR is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by
-this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the
-entire destination rectangle.  Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a
-single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner
-represented by (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) will be filled with that color.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBread\fR \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-.
-Reads image data from the file named \fIfilename\fR into the image.
-This command first searches the list of
-image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data
-in \fIfilename\fR, and then reads the image in \fIfilename\fR into
-\fIimageName\fR (the destination image).  The following options may be
-specified:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR
-.
-Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR.
-Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
-\fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data
-format handler to read the data.
-.TP
-\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
-.
-Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied
-to the destination image.  If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are
-specified, the region extends from (\fIx1,y1\fR) to the bottom-right
-corner of the image in the image file.  If all four coordinates are
-specified, they specify diagonally opposite corners or the region.
-The default, if this option is not specified, is the whole of the
-image in the image file.
-.TP
-\fB\-shrink\fR
-.
-If this option, the size of \fIimageName\fR will be reduced, if
-necessary, so that the region into which the image file data are read
-is at the bottom-right corner of the \fIimageName\fR.  This option
-will not affect the width or height of the image if the user has
-specified a non-zero value for the \fB\-width\fR or \fB\-height\fR
-configuration option, respectively.
-.TP
-\fB\-to \fIx y\fR
-.
-Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner of the region of
-\fIimageName\fR into which data from \fIfilename\fR are to be read.
-The default is (0,0).
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBredither\fR
-.
-The dithering algorithm used in displaying photo images propagates
-quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors.
-If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the
-dithered image may not be exactly correct.  Normally the difference is
-not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to
-recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is
-displayed.
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in
-the photo image.  Several subcommands are available:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR
-.
-Returns a boolean indicating if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is
-transparent.
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y boolean\fR
-.
-Makes the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) transparent if \fIboolean\fR is
-true, and makes that pixel opaque otherwise.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR?
-.
-Writes image data from \fIimageName\fR to a file named \fIfilename\fR.
-The following options may be specified:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-background\fI color\fR
-.
-If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
-information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
-the specified color.
-.TP
-\fB\-format\fI format-name\fR
-.
-Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to
-write the data to the file.  Specifically, this subcommand searches
-for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of
-\fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write an image
-file.  If this option is not given, the format is guessed from
-the file extension. If that cannot be determined, this subcommand
-uses the first handler that has the capability to write an image file.
-.TP
-\fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR
-.
-Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be written to the
-image file.  If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region
-extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of
-\fIimageName\fR.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
-diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region.  The default,
-if this option is not given, is the whole image.
-.TP
-\fB\-grayscale\fR
-.
-If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
-information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
-.RE
-.SH "IMAGE FORMATS"
-.PP
-The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional
-image file formats to be added easily.  The photo image code maintains
-a list of these handlers.  Handlers are added to the list by
-registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR.  The
-standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF
-formats, which are automatically registered on initialization.
-.PP
-When reading an image file or processing
-string data specified with the \fB\-data\fR configuration option, the
-photo image code invokes each handler in turn until one is
-found that claims to be able to read the data in the file or string.
-Usually this will find the correct handler, but if it does not, the
-user may give a format name with the \fB\-format\fR option to specify
-which handler to use.  In fact the photo image code will try those
-handlers whose names begin with the string specified for the
-\fB\-format\fR option (the comparison is case-insensitive).  For
-example, if the user specifies \fB\-format gif\fR, then a handler
-named GIF87 or GIF89 may be invoked, but a handler
-named JPEG may not (assuming that such handlers had been
-registered).
-.PP
-When writing image data to a file, the processing of the
-\fB\-format\fR option is slightly different: the string value given
-for the \fB\-format\fR option must begin with the complete name of the
-requested handler, and may contain additional information following
-that, which the handler can use, for example, to specify which variant
-to use of the formats supported by the handler.
-Note that not all image handlers may support writing transparency data
-to a file, even where the target image format does.
-.SS "FORMAT SUBOPTIONS"
-.PP
-.VS 8.6
-Some image formats support sub-options, which are specified at the time that
-the image is loaded using additional words in the \fB\-format\fR option. At
-the time of writing, the following are supported:
-.TP
-\fBgif \-index\fI indexValue\fR
-.
-When parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first
-image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th value
-may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer from 0 up to the
-number of image parts in the GIF data.
-.TP
-\fBpng \-alpha\fI alphaValue\fR
-.
-An additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the
-background on which the image is displayed to show through. This usually also
-has the effect of desaturating the image. The \fIalphaValue\fR must be between
-0.0 and 1.0.
-.VE 8.6
-.SH "COLOR ALLOCATION"
-.PP
-When a photo image is displayed in a window, the photo image code
-allocates colors to use to display the image and dithers the image, if
-necessary, to display a reasonable approximation to the image using
-the colors that are available.  The colors are allocated as a color
-cube, that is, the number of colors allocated is the product of the
-number of shades of red, green and blue.
-.PP
-Normally, the number of
-colors allocated is chosen based on the depth of the window.  For
-example, in an 8-bit PseudoColor window, the photo image code will
-attempt to allocate seven shades of red, seven shades of green and
-four shades of blue, for a total of 198 colors.  In a 1-bit StaticGray
-(monochrome) window, it will allocate two colors, black and white.  In
-a 24-bit DirectColor or TrueColor window, it will allocate 256 shades
-each of red, green and blue.  Fortunately, because of the way that
-pixel values can be combined in DirectColor and TrueColor windows,
-this only requires 256 colors to be allocated.  If not all of the
-colors can be allocated, the photo image code reduces the number of
-shades of each primary color and tries again.
-.PP
-The user can exercise some control over the number of colors that a
-photo image uses with the \fB\-palette\fR configuration option.  If
-this option is used, it specifies the maximum number of shades of
-each primary color to try to allocate.  It can also be used to force
-the image to be displayed in shades of gray, even on a color display,
-by giving a single number rather than three numbers separated by
-slashes.
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-The photo image type was designed and implemented by Paul Mackerras,
-based on his earlier photo widget and some suggestions from
-John Ousterhout.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Load an image from a file and tile it to the size of a window, which
-is useful for producing a tiled background:
-.PP
-.CS
-# These lines should be called once
-\fBimage create photo\fR untiled \-file "theFile.ppm"
-\fBimage create photo\fR tiled
-
-# These lines should be called whenever .someWidget changes
-# size; a <Configure> binding is useful here
-set width  [winfo width .someWidget]
-set height [winfo height .someWidget]
-tiled \fBcopy\fR untiled \-to 0 0 $width $height \-shrink
-.CE
-.PP
-.VS 8.6
-The PNG image loader allows the application of an additional alpha factor
-during loading, which is useful for generating images suitable for disabled
-buttons:
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png"
-\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e
-        \-format "png \-alpha 0.5"
-button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled
-.CE
-.VE 8.6
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-image(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-photo, image, color
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/place.n b/tk8.6/doc/place.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a092c2..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/place.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,255 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH place n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-place \- Geometry manager for fixed or rubber-sheet placement
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBplace \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The placer is a geometry manager for Tk.
-It provides simple fixed placement of windows, where you specify
-the exact size and location of one window, called the \fIslave\fR,
-within another window, called the \fImaster\fR.
-The placer also provides rubber-sheet placement, where you specify the
-size and location of the slave in terms of the dimensions of
-the master, so that the slave changes size and location
-in response to changes in the size of the master.
-Lastly, the placer allows you to mix these styles of placement so
-that, for example, the slave has a fixed width and height but is
-centered inside the master.
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBplace \fIwindow option value \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-Arrange for the placer to manage the geometry of a slave whose
-pathName is \fIwindow\fR.  The remaining arguments consist of one or
-more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs that specify the way in which
-\fIwindow\fR's geometry is managed.  \fIOption\fR may have any of the
-values accepted by the \fBplace configure\fR command.
-.TP
-\fBplace configure \fIwindow \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the geometry options of the slave given by
-\fIwindow\fR.  If no \fIoption\fR is specified, this command returns a
-list describing the available options (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case
-the command returns an empty string.
-.RS
-.PP
-The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are supported:
-.TP
-\fB\-anchor \fIwhere\fR
-\fIWhere\fR specifies which point of \fIwindow\fR is to be positioned
-at the (x,y) location selected by the \fB\-x\fR, \fB\-y\fR,
-\fB\-relx\fR, and \fB\-rely\fR options.
-The anchor point is in terms of the outer area of \fIwindow\fR
-including its border, if any.
-Thus if \fIwhere\fR is \fBse\fR then the lower-right corner of
-\fIwindow\fR's border will appear at the given (x,y) location
-in the master.
-The anchor position defaults to \fBnw\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-bordermode \fImode\fR
-\fIMode\fR determines the degree to which borders within the
-master are used in determining the placement of the slave.
-The default and most common value is \fBinside\fR.
-In this case the placer considers the area of the master to
-be the innermost area of the master, inside any border:
-an option of \fB\-x 0\fR corresponds to an x-coordinate just
-inside the border and an option of \fB\-relwidth 1.0\fR
-means \fIwindow\fR will fill the area inside the master's
-border.
-.RS
-.PP
-If \fImode\fR is \fBoutside\fR then the placer considers
-the area of the master to include its border;
-this mode is typically used when placing \fIwindow\fR
-outside its master, as with the options \fB\-x 0 \-y 0 \-anchor ne\fR.
-Lastly, \fImode\fR may be specified as \fBignore\fR, in which
-case borders are ignored:  the area of the master is considered
-to be its official X area, which includes any internal border but
-no external border.  A bordermode of \fBignore\fR is probably
-not very useful.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-height \fIsize\fR
-\fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
-The height will be the outer dimension of \fIwindow\fR including its
-border, if any.
-If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-height\fR or
-\fB\-relheight\fR option is specified, then the height requested
-internally by the window will be used.
-.TP
-\fB\-in \fImaster\fR
-\fIMaster\fR specifies the path name of the window relative
-to which \fIwindow\fR is to be placed.
-\fIMaster\fR must either be \fIwindow\fR's parent or a descendant
-of \fIwindow\fR's parent.
-In addition, \fImaster\fR and \fIwindow\fR must both be descendants
-of the same top-level window.
-These restrictions are necessary to guarantee
-that \fIwindow\fR is visible whenever \fImaster\fR is visible.
-If this option is not specified then the master defaults to
-\fIwindow\fR's parent.
-.TP
-\fB\-relheight \fIsize\fR
-\fISize\fR specifies the height for \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the height is specified as a floating-point number
-relative to the height of the master: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will
-be half as high as the master, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have
-the same height as the master, and so on.
-If both \fB\-height\fR and \fB\-relheight\fR are specified for a slave,
-their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relheight 1.0 \-height \-2\fR
-makes the slave 2 pixels shorter than the master.
-.TP
-\fB\-relwidth \fIsize\fR
-\fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the width is specified as a floating-point number
-relative to the width of the master: 0.5 means \fIwindow\fR will
-be half as wide as the master, 1.0 means \fIwindow\fR will have
-the same width as the master, and so on.
-If both \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-relwidth\fR are specified for a slave,
-their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relwidth 1.0 \-width 5\fR
-makes the slave 5 pixels wider than the master.
-.TP
-\fB\-relx \fIlocation\fR
-\fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the location is specified in a relative fashion
-as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the left edge
-of the master and 1.0 corresponds to the right edge of the master.
-\fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0.
-If both \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR are specified for a slave
-then their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-relx 0.5 \-x \-2\fR
-positions the left edge of the slave 2 pixels to the left of the
-center of its master.
-.TP
-\fB\-rely \fIlocation\fR
-\fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the value is specified in a relative fashion
-as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the top edge
-of the master and 1.0 corresponds to the bottom edge of the master.
-\fILocation\fR need not be in the range 0.0\-1.0.
-If both \fB\-y\fR and \fB\-rely\fR are specified for a slave
-then their values are summed.  For example, \fB\-rely 0.5 \-x 3\fR
-positions the top edge of the slave 3 pixels below the
-center of its master.
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIsize\fR
-\fISize\fR specifies the width for \fIwindow\fR in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
-The width will be the outer width of \fIwindow\fR including its
-border, if any.
-If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if no \fB\-width\fR
-or \fB\-relwidth\fR option is specified, then the width requested
-internally by the window will be used.
-.TP
-\fB\-x \fIlocation\fR
-\fILocation\fR specifies the x-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
-The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
-accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds
-of the master window.
-.TP
-\fB\-y \fIlocation\fR
-\fILocation\fR specifies the y-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for \fIwindow\fR.
-The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
-accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) and need not lie within the bounds
-of the master window.
-.PP
-If the same value is specified separately with
-two different options, such as \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-relx\fR, then
-the most recent option is used and the older one is ignored.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBplace forget \fIwindow\fR
-Causes the placer to stop managing the geometry of \fIwindow\fR.  As a
-side effect of this command \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped so that it
-does not appear on the screen.  If \fIwindow\fR is not currently managed
-by the placer then the command has no effect.  This command returns an
-empty string.
-.TP
-\fBplace info \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR.
-The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the
-same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a list of all the slave windows for which \fIwindow\fR is the master.
-If there are no slaves for \fIwindow\fR then an empty string is returned.
-.PP
-If the configuration of a window has been retrieved with
-\fBplace info\fR, that configuration can be restored later by
-first using \fBplace forget\fR to erase any existing information
-for the window and then invoking \fBplace configure\fR with
-the saved information.
-.SH "FINE POINTS"
-.PP
-It is not necessary for the master window to be the parent
-of the slave window.
-This feature is useful in at least two situations.
-First, for complex window layouts it means you can create a
-hierarchy of subwindows whose only purpose
-is to assist in the layout of the parent.
-The
-.QW "real children"
-of the parent (i.e. the windows that
-are significant for the application's user interface) can be
-children of the parent yet be placed inside the windows
-of the geometry-management hierarchy.
-This means that the path names of the
-.QW "real children"
-do not reflect the geometry-management hierarchy and users
-can specify options for the real children
-without being aware of the structure of the geometry-management
-hierarchy.
-.PP
-A second reason for having a master different than the slave's
-parent is to tie two siblings together.
-For example, the placer can be used to force a window always to
-be positioned centered just below one of its
-siblings by specifying the configuration
-.CS
-\fB\-in \fIsibling\fB \-relx 0.5 \-rely 1.0 \-anchor n \-bordermode outside\fR
-.CE
-Whenever the sibling is repositioned in the future, the slave
-will be repositioned as well.
-.PP
-Unlike many other geometry managers (such as the packer)
-the placer does not make any attempt to manipulate the geometry of
-the master windows or the parents of slave windows (i.e. it does not
-set their requested sizes).
-To control the sizes of these windows, make them windows like
-frames and canvases that provide configuration options for this purpose.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Make the label occupy the middle bit of the toplevel, no matter how it
-is resized:
-.CS
-label .l \-text "In the\enMiddle!" \-bg black \-fg white
-\fBplace\fR .l \-relwidth .3 \-relx .35 \-relheight .3 \-rely .35
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-grid(n), pack(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-geometry manager, height, location, master, place, rubber sheet, slave, width
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/popup.n b/tk8.6/doc/popup.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d32362..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/popup.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk_popup n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_popup \- Post a popup menu
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_popup \fImenu x y \fR?\fIentry\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure posts a menu at a given position on the screen and
-configures Tk so that the menu and its cascaded children can be
-traversed with the mouse or the keyboard.
-\fIMenu\fR is the name of a menu widget and \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR
-are the root coordinates at which to display the menu.
-If \fIentry\fR is omitted or an empty string, the
-menu's upper left corner is positioned at the given point.
-Otherwise \fIentry\fR gives the index of an entry in \fImenu\fR and
-the menu will be positioned so that the entry is positioned over
-the given point.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-How to attach a simple popup menu to a widget.
-.CS
-# Create a menu
-set m [menu .popupMenu]
-$m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell
-$m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell
-
-# Create something to attach it to
-pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"]
-
-# Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked
-bind .l <1> {\fBtk_popup\fR .popupMenu %X %Y}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n), menu(n), tk_optionMenu(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-menu, popup
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/radiobutton.n b/tk8.6/doc/radiobutton.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 086a4e2..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/radiobutton.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH radiobutton n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-radiobutton \- Create and manipulate 'radiobutton' pick-one widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBradiobutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-disabledforeground	\-padx
-\-activeforeground	\-font	\-pady
-\-anchor	\-foreground	\-relief
-\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-takefocus
-\-bitmap	\-highlightcolor	\-text
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightthickness	\-textvariable
-\-compound	\-image	\-underline
-\-cursor	\-justify	\-wraplength
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button.  This command
-is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the button
-window.  The button's global variable (\fB\-variable\fR option) will
-be updated before the command is invoked.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies a desired height for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option is not specified, the button's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.OP \-indicatoron indicatorOn IndicatorOn
-Specifies whether or not the indicator should be drawn.  Must be a
-proper boolean value.  If false, the \fB\-relief\fR option is
-ignored and the widget's relief is always sunken if the widget is
-selected and raised otherwise.
-.OP \-offrelief offRelief OffRelief
-Specifies the relief for the checkbutton when the indicator is not drawn and
-the checkbutton is off.  The default value is
-.QW raised .
-By setting this option to
-.QW flat
-and setting \fB\-indicatoron\fR to false and \fB\-overrelief\fR to
-.QW raised ,
-the effect is achieved
-of having a flat button that raises on mouse-over and which is
-depressed when activated.  This is the behavior typically exhibited by
-the Align-Left, Align-Right, and Center radiobuttons on the toolbar of a
-word-processor, for example.
-.OP \-overrelief overRelief OverRelief
-Specifies an alternative relief for the radiobutton, to be used when the
-mouse cursor is over the widget.  This option can be used to make
-toolbar buttons, by configuring \fB\-relief flat \-overrelief
-raised\fR.  If the value of this option is the empty string, then no
-alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the radiobutton.
-The empty string is the default value.
-.OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background
-Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected.
-If \fB\-indicatoron\fR is true then the color applies to the indicator.
-Under Windows, this color is used as the background for the indicator
-regardless of the select state.
-If \fB\-indicatoron\fR is false, this color is used as the background
-for the entire widget, in place of \fB\-background\fR or \fB\-activeBackground\fR,
-whenever the widget is selected.
-If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for
-displaying when the widget is selected.
-.OP \-selectimage selectImage SelectImage
-Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option)
-when the radiobutton is selected.
-This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been
-specified.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the radiobutton:  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR,
-or \fBdisabled\fR.  In normal state the radiobutton is displayed using the
-\fB\-foreground\fR and \fB\-background\fR options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the radiobutton.  In active state
-the radiobutton is displayed using the \fB\-activeforeground\fR and
-\fB\-activebackground\fR options.  Disabled state means that the radiobutton
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and
-\fB\-background\fR options determine how the radiobutton is displayed.
-.OP \-tristateimage tristateImage TristateImage
-Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fB\-image\fR option)
-when the radiobutton is selected.
-This option is ignored unless the \fB\-image\fR option has been
-specified.
-.OP \-tristatevalue tristateValue Value
-Specifies the value that causes the radiobutton to display the multi-value
-selection, also known as the tri-state mode.  Defaults to
-.QW "" .
-.OP \-value value Value
-Specifies value to store in the button's associated variable whenever
-this button is selected.
-.OP \-variable variable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable to set whenever this button is
-selected.  Changes in this variable also cause the button to select
-or deselect itself.
-Defaults to the value \fBselectedButton\fR.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies a desired width for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button, the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option is not specified, the button's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a radiobutton widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the radiobutton such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The \fBradiobutton\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A radiobutton is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image
-and a diamond or circle called an \fIindicator\fR.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the \fB\-wraplength\fR option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-\fB\-underline\fR option.  A radiobutton has
-all of the behavior of a simple button: it can display itself in either
-of three different ways, according to the \fB\-state\fR option;
-it can be made to appear
-raised, sunken, or flat; it can be made to flash; and it invokes
-a Tcl command whenever mouse button 1 is clicked over the
-check button.
-.PP
-In addition, radiobuttons can be \fIselected\fR.
-If a radiobutton is selected, the indicator is normally
-drawn with a selected appearance, and
-a Tcl variable associated with the radiobutton is set to a particular
-value (normally 1).
-Under Unix, the indicator is drawn with a sunken relief and a special
-color.  Under Windows, the indicator is drawn with a round mark inside.
-If the radiobutton is not selected, then the indicator is drawn with a
-deselected appearance, and the associated variable is
-set to a different value (typically 0).
-The indicator is drawn without a round mark inside.
-Typically, several radiobuttons share a single variable and the
-value of the variable indicates which radiobutton is to be selected.
-When a radiobutton is selected it sets the value of the variable to
-indicate that fact;  each radiobutton also monitors the value of
-the variable and automatically selects and deselects itself when the
-variable's value changes.
-If the variable's value matches the \fB\-tristatevalue\fR, then the radiobutton
-is drawn using the tri-state mode.  This mode is used to indicate mixed or
-multiple values.  (This is used when the radiobutton represents the state
-of multiple items.)
-By default the variable \fBselectedButton\fR
-is used;  its contents give the name of the button that is
-selected, or the empty string if no button associated with that
-variable is selected.
-The name of the variable for a radiobutton,
-plus the variable to be stored into it, may be modified with options
-on the command line or in the option database.
-Configuration options may also be used to modify the way the
-indicator is displayed (or whether it is displayed at all).
-By default a radiobutton is configured to select itself on button clicks.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for radiobutton widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR
-.
-Deselects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to an
-empty string.
-If this radiobutton was not currently selected, the command has
-no effect.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBflash\fR
-.
-Flashes the radiobutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the radiobutton
-several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
-the end of the flash the radiobutton is left in the same normal/active
-state as when the command was invoked.
-This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
-.
-Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the radiobutton
-with the mouse: selects the button and invokes
-its associated Tcl command, if there is one.
-The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
-empty string if there is no command associated with the radiobutton.
-This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselect\fR
-.
-Selects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to the
-value corresponding to this widget.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for radiobuttons that give them
-the following default behavior:
-.IP [1]
-On Unix systems, a radiobutton activates whenever the mouse passes
-over it and deactivates whenever the mouse leaves the radiobutton.  On
-Mac and Windows systems, when mouse button 1 is pressed over a
-radiobutton, the button activates whenever the mouse pointer is inside
-the button, and deactivates whenever the mouse pointer leaves the
-button.
-.IP [2]
-When mouse button 1 is pressed over a radiobutton it is invoked (it
-becomes selected and the command associated with the button is
-invoked, if there is one).
-.IP [3]
-When a radiobutton has the input focus, the space key causes the radiobutton
-to be invoked.
-.PP
-If the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above
-actions occur:  the radiobutton is completely non-responsive.
-.PP
-The behavior of radiobuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-checkbutton(n), labelframe(n), listbox(n), options(n), scale(n), ttk::radiobutton(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-radiobutton, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/raise.n b/tk8.6/doc/raise.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c8feb71..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/raise.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH raise n 3.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-raise \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBraise \fIwindow \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-If the \fIaboveThis\fR argument is omitted then the command raises
-\fIwindow\fR so that it is above all of its siblings in the stacking
-order (it will not be obscured by any siblings and will obscure
-any siblings that overlap it).
-If \fIaboveThis\fR is specified then it must be the path name of
-a window that is either a sibling of \fIwindow\fR or the descendant
-of a sibling of \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the \fBraise\fR command will insert
-\fIwindow\fR into the stacking order just above \fIaboveThis\fR
-(or the ancestor of \fIaboveThis\fR that is a sibling of \fIwindow\fR);
-this could end up either raising or lowering \fIwindow\fR.
-.PP
-All \fBtoplevel\fR windows may be restacked with respect to each
-other, whatever their relative path names, but the window manager is
-not obligated to strictly honor requests to restack.
-.PP
-On macOS raising an iconified \fBtoplevel\fR window causes it to be
-deiconified.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Make a button appear to be in a sibling frame that was created after
-it. This is is often necessary when building GUIs in the style where
-you create your activity widgets first before laying them out on the
-display:
-.CS
-button .b \-text "Hi there!"
-pack [frame .f \-background blue]
-pack [label .f.l1 \-text "This is above"]
-pack .b \-in .f
-pack [label .f.l2 \-text "This is below"]
-\fBraise\fR .b
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-lower(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-obscure, raise, stacking order
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/scale.n b/tk8.6/doc/scale.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b960ce..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/scale.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,253 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH scale n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-scale \- Create and manipulate 'scale' value-controlled slider widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBscale\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-foreground	\-relief
-\-background	\-highlightbackground	\-repeatdelay
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-repeatinterval
-\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-takefocus
-\-font	\-orient	\-troughcolor
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-bigincrement bigIncrement BigIncrement
-Some interactions with the scale cause its value to change by
-.QW large
-increments;  this option specifies the size of the
-large increments.  If specified as 0, the large increments default
-to 1/10 the range of the scale.
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke whenever the scale's
-value is changed via a widget command.
-The actual command consists
-of this option followed by a space and a real number indicating the
-new value of the scale.
-.OP \-digits digits Digits
-An integer specifying how many significant digits should be retained
-when converting the value of the scale to a string.
-If the number is less than or equal to zero, then the scale picks
-the smallest value that guarantees that every possible slider
-position prints as a different string.
-.OP \-from from From
-A real value corresponding to the left or top end of the scale.
-.OP \-label label Label
-A string to display as a label for the scale.  For
-vertical scales the label is displayed just to the right of the
-top end of the scale.  For horizontal scales the label is displayed
-just above the left end of the scale.  If the option is specified
-as an empty string, no label is displayed.
-.OP \-length length Length
-Specifies the desired long dimension of the scale in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
-For vertical scales this is the scale's height;  for horizontal scales
-it is the scale's width.
-.OP \-resolution resolution Resolution
-A real value specifying the resolution for the scale.
-If this value is greater than zero then the scale's value will always be
-rounded to an even multiple of this value, as will tick marks and
-the endpoints of the scale.  If the value is less than zero then no
-rounding occurs.  Defaults to 1 (i.e., the value will be integral).
-.OP \-showvalue showValue ShowValue
-Specifies a boolean value indicating whether or not the current
-value of the scale is to be displayed.
-.OP \-sliderlength sliderLength SliderLength
-Specifies the size of the slider, measured in screen units along the slider's
-long dimension.  The value may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
-to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.OP \-sliderrelief sliderRelief SliderRelief
-Specifies the relief to use when drawing the slider, such as \fBraised\fR
-or \fBsunken\fR.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the scale:  \fBnormal\fR,
-\fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR.
-If the scale is disabled then the value may not be changed and the scale
-will not activate.
-If the scale is active, the slider is displayed using the color
-specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR option.
-.OP \-tickinterval tickInterval TickInterval
-Must be a real value.
-Determines the spacing between numerical
-tick marks displayed below or to the left of the slider.
-If 0, no tick marks will be displayed.
-.OP \-to to To
-Specifies a real value corresponding
-to the right or bottom end of the scale.
-This value may be either less than or greater than the \fB\-from\fR option.
-.OP \-variable variable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale.  Whenever the
-value of the variable changes, the scale will update to reflect this
-value.
-Whenever the scale is manipulated interactively, the variable
-will be modified to reflect the scale's new value.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the desired narrow dimension of the scale in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR).
-For vertical scales this is the scale's width;  for horizontal scales
-this is the scale's height.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBscale\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a scale widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the scale such as its colors, orientation,
-and relief.  The \fBscale\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A scale is a widget that displays a rectangular \fItrough\fR and a
-small \fIslider\fR.  The trough corresponds to a range
-of real values (determined by the \fB\-from\fR, \fB\-to\fR, and
-\fB\-resolution\fR options),
-and the position of the slider selects a particular real value.
-The slider's position (and hence the scale's value) may be adjusted
-with the mouse or keyboard as described in the \fBBINDINGS\fR
-section below.  Whenever the scale's value is changed, a Tcl
-command is invoked (using the \fB\-command\fR option) to notify
-other interested widgets of the change.
-In addition, the value
-of the scale can be linked to a Tcl variable (using the \fB\-variable\fR
-option), so that changes in either are reflected in the other.
-.PP
-Three annotations may be displayed in a scale widget:  a label
-appearing at the top right of the widget (top left for horizontal
-scales), a number displayed just to the left of the slider
-(just above the slider for horizontal scales), and a collection
-of numerical tick marks just to the left of the current value
-(just below the trough for horizontal scales).  Each of these three
-annotations may be enabled or disabled using the
-configuration options.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBscale\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for scale widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscale\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcoords \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
-.
-Returns a list whose elements are the x and y coordinates of
-the point along the centerline of the trough that corresponds
-to \fIvalue\fR.
-If \fIvalue\fR is omitted then the scale's current value is used.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fIx y\fR?
-.
-If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are omitted, returns the current value
-of the scale.  If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they give
-pixel coordinates within the widget;  the command returns
-the scale value corresponding to the given pixel.
-Only one of \fIx\fR or \fIy\fR is used:  for horizontal scales
-\fIy\fR is ignored, and for vertical scales \fIx\fR is ignored.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-.
-Returns a string indicating what part of the scale lies under
-the coordinates given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.
-A return value of \fBslider\fR means that the point is over
-the slider;  \fBtrough1\fR means that the point is over the
-portion of the slider above  or to the left of the slider;
-and \fBtrough2\fR means that the point is over the portion
-of the slider below or to the right of the slider.
-If the point is not over one of these elements, an empty string
-is returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset \fIvalue\fR
-.
-This command is invoked to change the current value of the scale,
-and hence the position at which the slider is displayed.  \fIValue\fR
-gives the new value for the scale.
-The command has no effect if the scale is disabled.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for scales that give them
-the following default behavior.
-Where the behavior is different for vertical and horizontal scales,
-the horizontal behavior is described in parentheses.
-.IP [1]
-If button 1 is pressed in the trough, the scale's value will
-be incremented or decremented by the value of the \fB\-resolution\fR
-option so that the slider moves in the direction of the cursor.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-.IP [2]
-If button 1 is pressed over the slider, the slider can be dragged
-with the mouse.
-.IP [3]
-If button 1 is pressed in the trough with the Control key down,
-the slider moves all the way to the end of its range, in the
-direction towards the mouse cursor.
-.IP [4]
-If button 2 is pressed, the scale's value is set to the mouse
-position.  If the mouse is dragged with button 2 down, the scale's
-value changes with the drag.
-.IP [5]
-The Up and Left keys move the slider up (left) by the value
-of the \fB\-resolution\fR option.
-.IP [6]
-The Down and Right keys move the slider down (right) by the value
-of the \fB\-resolution\fR option.
-.IP [7]
-Control-Up and Control-Left move the slider up (left) by the
-value of the \fB\-bigincrement\fR option.
-.IP [8]
-Control-Down and Control-Right move the slider down (right) by the
-value of the \fB\-bigincrement\fR option.
-.IP [9]
-Home moves the slider to the top (left) end of its range.
-.IP [10]
-End moves the slider to the bottom (right) end of its range.
-.PP
-If the scale is disabled using the \fB\-state\fR option then
-none of the above bindings have any effect.
-.PP
-The behavior of scales can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::scale(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-scale, slider, trough, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/scrollbar.n b/tk8.6/doc/scrollbar.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d148af..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/scrollbar.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,360 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH scrollbar n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-scrollbar \- Create and manipulate 'scrollbar' scrolling control and indicator widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBscrollbar\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-highlightcolor	\-repeatdelay
-\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-repeatinterval
-\-borderwidth	\-jump	\-takefocus
-\-cursor	\-orient	\-troughcolor
-\-highlightbackground	\-relief
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-activerelief activeRelief ActiveRelief
-Specifies the relief to use when displaying the element that is
-active, if any.
-Elements other than the active element are always displayed with
-a raised relief.
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke to change the view
-in the widget associated with the scrollbar.  When a user requests
-a view change by manipulating the scrollbar, a Tcl command is
-invoked.  The actual command consists of this option followed by
-additional information as described later.  This option almost always has
-a value such as \fB.t xview\fR or \fB.t yview\fR, consisting of the
-name of a widget and either \fBxview\fR (if the scrollbar is for
-horizontal scrolling) or \fByview\fR (for vertical scrolling).
-All scrollable widgets have \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR commands
-that take exactly the additional arguments appended by the scrollbar
-as described in \fBSCROLLING COMMANDS\fR below.
-.OP \-elementborderwidth elementBorderWidth BorderWidth
-Specifies the width of borders drawn around the internal elements
-of the scrollbar (the two arrows and the slider).  The value may
-have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If this value is less than zero, the value of the \fB\-borderwidth\fR
-option is used in its place.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the desired narrow dimension of the scrollbar window,
-not including 3-D border, if any.  For vertical
-scrollbars this will be the width and for horizontal scrollbars
-this will be the height.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBscrollbar\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a scrollbar widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command
-line or in the option database to configure aspects of the scrollbar
-such as its colors, orientation, and relief.
-The \fBscrollbar\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument.
-At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window
-named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A scrollbar is a widget that displays two arrows, one at each end of
-the scrollbar, and a \fIslider\fR in the middle portion of the
-scrollbar.
-It provides information about what is visible in an \fIassociated window\fR
-that displays a document of some sort (such as a file being edited or
-a drawing).
-The position and size of the slider indicate which portion of the
-document is visible in the associated window.  For example, if the
-slider in a vertical scrollbar covers the top third of the area
-between the two arrows, it means that the associated window displays
-the top third of its document.
-.PP
-Scrollbars can be used to adjust the view in the associated window
-by clicking or dragging with the mouse.  See the \fBBINDINGS\fR section
-below for details.
-.SH "ELEMENTS"
-.PP
-A scrollbar displays five elements, which are referred to in the
-widget commands for the scrollbar:
-.TP 10
-\fBarrow1\fR
-The top or left arrow in the scrollbar.
-.TP 10
-\fBtrough1\fR
-The region between the slider and \fBarrow1\fR.
-.TP 10
-\fBslider\fR
-The rectangle that indicates what is visible in the associated widget.
-.TP 10
-\fBtrough2\fR
-The region between the slider and \fBarrow2\fR.
-.TP 10
-\fBarrow2\fR
-The bottom or right arrow in the scrollbar.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBscrollbar\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for scrollbar widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBactivate \fR?\fIelement\fR?
-.
-Marks the element indicated by \fIelement\fR as active, which
-causes it to be displayed as specified by the \fB\-activebackground\fR
-and \fB\-activerelief\fR options.
-The only element values understood by this command are \fBarrow1\fR,
-\fBslider\fR, or \fBarrow2\fR.
-If any other value is specified then no element of the scrollbar
-will be active.
-If \fIelement\fR is not specified, the command returns
-the name of the element that is currently active, or an empty string
-if no element is active.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBscrollbar\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelta \fIdeltaX deltaY\fR
-.
-Returns a real number indicating the fractional change in
-the scrollbar setting that corresponds to a given change
-in slider position.  For example, if the scrollbar is horizontal,
-the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change
-to move the slider \fIdeltaX\fR pixels to the right (\fIdeltaY\fR is
-ignored in this case).
-If the scrollbar is vertical, the result indicates how much the
-scrollbar setting must change to move the slider \fIdeltaY\fR pixels
-down.  The arguments and the result may be zero or negative.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBfraction \fIx y\fR
-.
-Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating where the point
-given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lies in the trough area of the scrollbar.
-The value 0 corresponds to the top or left of the trough, the
-value 1 corresponds to the bottom or right, 0.5 corresponds to
-the middle, and so on.
-\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
-widget.
-If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR refer to a point outside the trough, the closest
-point in the trough is used.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR
-.
-Returns the scrollbar settings in the form of a list whose
-elements are the arguments to the most recent \fBset\fR widget command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-.
-Returns the name of the element under the point given by \fIx\fR and
-\fIy\fR (such as \fBarrow1\fR), or an empty string if the point does
-not lie in any element of the scrollbar.
-\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
-widget.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset \fIfirst last\fR
-.
-This command is invoked by the scrollbar's associated widget to
-tell the scrollbar about the current view in the widget.
-The command takes two arguments, each of which is a real fraction
-between 0 and 1.
-The fractions describe the range of the document that is visible in
-the associated widget.
-For example, if \fIfirst\fR is 0.2 and \fIlast\fR is 0.4, it means
-that the first part of the document visible in the window is 20%
-of the way through the document, and the last visible part is 40%
-of the way through.
-.SH "SCROLLING COMMANDS"
-.PP
-When the user interacts with the scrollbar, for example by dragging
-the slider, the scrollbar notifies the associated widget that it
-must change its view.
-The scrollbar makes the notification by evaluating a Tcl command
-generated from the scrollbar's \fB\-command\fR option.
-The command may take any of the following forms.
-In each case, \fIprefix\fR is the contents of the
-\fB\-command\fR option, which usually has a form like
-.QW \fB.t yview\fR .
-.TP
-\fIprefix \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR
-.
-\fIFraction\fR is a real number between 0 and 1.
-The widget should adjust its view so that the point given
-by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget.
-If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the
-document.  1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333
-refers to a point one-third of the way through the document,
-and so on.
-.TP
-\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR
-.
-The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units.
-The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget,
-such as characters or lines in a text widget.
-\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off
-the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit
-should scroll off the bottom or right of the window.
-.TP
-\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR
-.
-The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages.
-It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page;  typically
-it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there
-is a slight overlap between the old and new views.
-\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should
-become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should
-become visible.
-.SH "OLD COMMAND SYNTAX"
-.PP
-In versions of Tk before 4.0, the \fBset\fR and \fBget\fR widget
-commands used a different form.
-This form is still supported for backward compatibility, but it
-is deprecated.
-In the old command syntax, the \fBset\fR widget command has the
-following form:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset \fItotalUnits windowUnits firstUnit lastUnit\fR
-In this form the arguments are all integers.
-\fITotalUnits\fR gives the total size of the object being displayed in the
-associated widget.  The meaning of one unit depends on the associated
-widget;  for example, in a text editor widget units might
-correspond to lines of
-text.  \fIWindowUnits\fR indicates the total number of units that
-can fit in the associated window at one time.  \fIFirstUnit\fR
-and \fIlastUnit\fR give the indices of the first and last units
-currently visible in the associated window (zero corresponds to the
-first unit of the object).
-.LP
-Under the old syntax the \fBget\fR widget command returns a list
-of four integers, consisting of the \fItotalUnits\fR, \fIwindowUnits\fR,
-\fIfirstUnit\fR, and \fIlastUnit\fR values from the last \fBset\fR
-widget command.
-.PP
-The commands generated by scrollbars also have a different form
-when the old syntax is being used:
-.TP
-\fIprefix\fR \fIunit\fR
-\fIUnit\fR is an integer that indicates what should appear at
-the top or left of the associated widget's window.
-It has the same meaning as the \fIfirstUnit\fR and \fIlastUnit\fR
-arguments to the \fBset\fR widget command.
-.LP
-The most recent \fBset\fR widget command determines whether or not
-to use the old syntax.
-If it is given two real arguments then the new syntax will be
-used in the future, and if it is given four integer arguments then
-the old syntax will be used.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for scrollbars that give them
-the following default behavior.
-If the behavior is different for vertical and horizontal scrollbars,
-the horizontal behavior is described in parentheses.
-.IP [1]
-Pressing button 1 over \fBarrow1\fR causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift up (left) by one unit so that the
-document appears to move down (right) one unit.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-.IP [2]
-Pressing button 1 over \fBtrough1\fR causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift up (left) by one screenful so that the
-document appears to move down (right) one screenful.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-.IP [3]
-Pressing button 1 over the slider and dragging causes the view
-to drag with the slider.
-If the \fBjump\fR option is true, then the view does not drag along
-with the slider;  it changes only when the mouse button is released.
-.IP [4]
-Pressing button 1 over \fBtrough2\fR causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift down (right) by one screenful so that the
-document appears to move up (left) one screenful.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-.IP [5]
-Pressing button 1 over \fBarrow2\fR causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift down (right) by one unit so that the
-document appears to move up (left) one unit.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-.IP [6]
-If button 2 is pressed over the trough or the slider, it sets
-the view to correspond to the mouse position;  dragging the
-mouse with button 2 down causes the view to drag with the mouse.
-If button 2 is pressed over one of the arrows, it causes the
-same behavior as pressing button 1.
-.IP [7]
-If button 1 is pressed with the Control key down, then if the
-mouse is over \fBarrow1\fR or \fBtrough1\fR the view changes
-to the very top (left) of the document;  if the mouse is over
-\fBarrow2\fR or \fBtrough2\fR the view changes
-to the very bottom (right) of the document;  if the mouse is
-anywhere else then the button press has no effect.
-.IP [8]
-In vertical scrollbars the Up and Down keys have the same behavior
-as mouse clicks over \fBarrow1\fR and \fBarrow2\fR, respectively.
-In horizontal scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-.IP [9]
-In vertical scrollbars Control-Up and Control-Down have the same
-behavior as mouse clicks over \fBtrough1\fR and \fBtrough2\fR, respectively.
-In horizontal scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-.IP [10]
-In horizontal scrollbars the Up and Down keys have the same behavior
-as mouse clicks over \fBarrow1\fR and \fBarrow2\fR, respectively.
-In vertical scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-.IP [11]
-In horizontal scrollbars Control-Up and Control-Down have the same
-behavior as mouse clicks over \fBtrough1\fR and \fBtrough2\fR, respectively.
-In vertical scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-.IP [12]
-The Prior and Next keys have the same behavior
-as mouse clicks over \fBtrough1\fR and \fBtrough2\fR, respectively.
-.IP [13]
-The Home key adjusts the view to the top (left edge) of the document.
-.IP [14]
-The End key adjusts the view to the bottom (right edge) of the document.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Create a window with a scrollable \fBtext\fR widget:
-.CS
-toplevel .tl
-text .tl.t \-yscrollcommand {.tl.s set}
-\fBscrollbar\fR .tl.s \-command {.tl.t yview}
-grid .tl.t .tl.s \-sticky nsew
-grid columnconfigure .tl 0 \-weight 1
-grid rowconfigure .tl 0 \-weight 1
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk:scrollbar(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-scrollbar, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/selection.n b/tk8.6/doc/selection.n
deleted file mode 100644
index f5bb660..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/selection.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,186 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH selection n 8.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-selection \- Manipulate the X selection
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBselection \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command provides a Tcl interface to the X selection mechanism and
-implements the full selection functionality described in the
-X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM).
-.PP
-Note that for management of the \fBCLIPBOARD\fR selection (see below), the
-\fBclipboard\fR command may also be used.
-.PP
-The first argument to \fBselection\fR determines the format of the
-rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command.  The following
-forms are currently supported:
-.TP
-\fBselection clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR?
-.
-If \fIselection\fR exists anywhere on \fIwindow\fR's display, clear it
-so that no window owns the selection anymore.  \fISelection\fR
-specifies the X selection that should be cleared, and should be an
-atom name such as \fBPRIMARY\fR or \fBCLIPBOARD\fR; see the Inter-Client
-Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-\fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and \fIwindow\fR defaults to
-.QW . .
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBselection get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR?
-.
-Retrieves the value of \fIselection\fR from \fIwindow\fR's display and
-returns it as a result.  \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and
-\fIwindow\fR defaults to
-.QW . .
-\fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
-(the desired
-.QW target
-for conversion, in ICCCM terminology), and
-should be an atom name such as \fBSTRING\fR or \fBFILE_NAME\fR; see the
-Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-\fIType\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  The selection owner may choose to
-return the selection in any of several different representation
-formats, such as \fBSTRING\fR, \fBUTF8_STRING\fR, \fBATOM\fR,
-\fBINTEGER\fR, etc. (this format is different
-than the selection type; see the ICCCM for all the confusing details).
-If the selection is returned in a non-string format, such as \fBINTEGER\fR
-or \fBATOM\fR, the \fBselection\fR command converts it to string format as a
-collection of fields separated by spaces: atoms are converted to their
-textual names, and anything else is converted to hexadecimal integers.
-Note that \fBselection get\fR does not retrieve the selection in the
-\fBUTF8_STRING\fR format unless told to.
-.TP
-\fBselection handle\fR ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIs\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fIt\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIf\fR? \fIwindow command\fR
-.
-Creates a handler for selection requests, such that \fIcommand\fR will
-be executed whenever selection \fIs\fR is owned by \fIwindow\fR and
-someone attempts to retrieve it in the form given by type \fIt\fR
-(e.g. \fIt\fR is specified in the \fBselection get\fR command).
-\fIS\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR, \fIt\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR, and
-\fIf\fR defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  If \fIcommand\fR is an empty string
-then any existing handler for \fIwindow\fR, \fIt\fR, and
-\fIs\fR is removed.
-Note that when the selection is handled as type \fBSTRING\fR it is also
-automatically handled as type \fBUTF8_STRING\fR as well.
-.RS
-.PP
-When \fIselection\fR is requested, \fIwindow\fR is the selection owner,
-and \fItype\fR is the requested type, \fIcommand\fR will be executed
-as a Tcl command with two additional numbers appended to it
-(with space separators).
-The two additional numbers
-are \fIoffset\fR and \fImaxChars\fR:  \fIoffset\fR specifies a starting
-character position in the selection and \fImaxChars\fR gives the maximum
-number of characters to retrieve.  The command should return a value consisting
-of at most \fImaxChars\fR of the selection, starting at position
-\fIoffset\fR.  For very large selections (larger than \fImaxChars\fR)
-the selection will be retrieved using several invocations of \fIcommand\fR
-with increasing \fIoffset\fR values.  If \fIcommand\fR returns a string
-whose length is less than \fImaxChars\fR, the return value is assumed to
-include all of the remainder of the selection;  if the length of
-\fIcommand\fR's result is equal to \fImaxChars\fR then
-\fIcommand\fR will be invoked again, until it eventually
-returns a result shorter than \fImaxChars\fR.  The value of \fImaxChars\fR
-will always be relatively large (thousands of characters).
-.PP
-If \fIcommand\fR returns an error then the selection retrieval is rejected
-just as if the selection did not exist at all.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument specifies the representation that should be
-used to transmit the selection to the requester (the second column of
-Table 2 of the ICCCM), and defaults to \fBSTRING\fR.  If \fIformat\fR is
-\fBSTRING\fR, the selection is transmitted as 8-bit ASCII characters (i.e.
-just in the form returned by \fIcommand\fR, in the system \fBencoding\fR;
-the \fBUTF8_STRING\fR format always uses UTF-8 as its encoding).
-If \fIformat\fR is
-\fBATOM\fR, then the return value from \fIcommand\fR is divided into fields
-separated by white space;  each field is converted to its atom value,
-and the 32-bit atom value is transmitted instead of the atom name.
-For any other \fIformat\fR, the return value from \fIcommand\fR is
-divided into fields separated by white space and each field is
-converted to a 32-bit integer;  an array of integers is transmitted
-to the selection requester.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with
-selection requesters that do not use Tk.  If Tk is being
-used to retrieve the selection then the value is converted back to
-a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is
-irrelevant.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR?
-.TP
-\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-command\fR \fIcommand\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? \fIwindow\fR
-.
-The first form of \fBselection own\fR returns the path name of the
-window in this application that owns \fIselection\fR on the display
-containing \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no window in this
-application owns the selection.  \fISelection\fR defaults to \fBPRIMARY\fR and
-\fIwindow\fR defaults to
-.QW . .
-.RS
-.PP
-The second form of \fBselection own\fR causes \fIwindow\fR to become
-the new owner of \fIselection\fR on \fIwindow\fR's display, returning
-an empty string as result. The existing owner, if any, is notified
-that it has lost the selection.
-If \fIcommand\fR is specified, it is a Tcl script to execute when
-some other window claims ownership of the selection away from
-\fIwindow\fR.  \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY.
-.RE
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-On X11 platforms, one of the standard selections available is the
-\fBSECONDARY\fR selection. Hardly anything uses it, but here is how to read
-it using Tk:
-.PP
-.CS
-set selContents [\fBselection get\fR \-selection SECONDARY]
-.CE
-.PP
-Many different types of data may be available for a selection; the
-special type \fBTARGETS\fR allows you to get a list of available types:
-.PP
-.CS
-foreach type [\fBselection get\fR \-type TARGETS] {
-   puts "Selection PRIMARY supports type $type"
-}
-.CE
-.PP
-To claim the selection, you must first set up a handler to supply the
-data for the selection. Then you have to claim the selection...
-.CS
-# Set up the data handler ready for incoming requests
-set foo "This is a string with some data in it... blah blah"
-\fBselection handle\fR \-selection SECONDARY . getData
-proc getData {offset maxChars} {
-   puts "Retrieving selection starting at $offset"
-   return [string range $::foo $offset [expr {$offset+$maxChars-1}]]
-}
-
-# Now we grab the selection itself
-puts "Claiming selection"
-\fBselection own\fR \-command lost \-selection SECONDARY .
-proc lost {} {
-   puts "Lost selection"
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-clipboard(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-clear, format, handler, ICCCM, own, selection, target, type
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/send.n b/tk8.6/doc/send.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a683d5..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/send.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH send n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-send \- Execute a command in a different application
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBsend ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIapp cmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command arranges for \fIcmd\fR (and \fIarg\fRs) to be executed in the
-application named by \fIapp\fR.  It returns the result or
-error from that command execution.
-\fIApp\fR may be the name of any application whose main window is
-on the display containing the sender's main window;  it need not
-be within the same process.
-If no \fIarg\fR arguments are present, then the command to be executed is
-contained entirely within the \fIcmd\fR argument.  If one or
-more \fIarg\fRs are present, they are concatenated to form the
-command to be executed, just as for the \fBeval\fR command.
-.PP
-If the initial arguments of the command begin with
-.QW \-
-they are treated as options.  The following options are currently defined:
-.TP
-\fB\-async\fR
-Requests asynchronous invocation.  In this case the \fBsend\fR
-command will complete immediately without waiting for \fIcmd\fR
-to complete in the target application;  no result will be available
-and errors in the sent command will be ignored.
-If the target application is in the same process as the sending
-application then the \fB\-async\fR option is ignored.
-.TP
-\fB\-displayof\fR \fIpathName\fR
-Specifies that the target application's main window is on the display
-of the window given by \fIpathName\fR, instead of the display containing
-the application's main window.
-.TP
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-Serves no purpose except to terminate the list of options.  This
-option is needed only if \fIapp\fR could contain a leading
-.QW \-
-character.
-.SH "APPLICATION NAMES"
-.PP
-The name of an application is set initially from the name of the
-program or script that created the application.
-You can query and change the name of an application with the
-\fBtk appname\fR command.
-.SH "DISABLING SENDS"
-.PP
-If the \fBsend\fR command is removed from an application (e.g.
-with the command \fBrename\fR \fBsend {}\fR) then the application
-will not respond to incoming send requests anymore,  nor will it
-be able to issue outgoing requests.
-Communication can be reenabled by invoking the \fBtk appname\fR
-command.
-.SH SECURITY
-.PP
-The \fBsend\fR command is potentially a serious security loophole. On Unix,
-any application that can connect to your X server can send
-scripts to your applications.
-These incoming scripts can use Tcl to read and
-write your files and invoke subprocesses under your name.
-Host-based access control such as that provided by \fBxhost\fR
-is particularly insecure, since it allows anyone with an account
-on particular hosts to connect to your server, and if disabled it
-allows anyone anywhere to connect to your server.
-In order to provide at least a small amount of
-security, Tk checks the access control being used by the server
-and rejects incoming sends unless (a) \fBxhost\fR-style access control
-is enabled (i.e. only certain hosts can establish connections) and (b) the
-list of enabled hosts is empty.
-This means that applications cannot connect to your server unless
-they use some other form of authorization
-such as that provide by \fBxauth\fR.
-Under Windows, \fBsend\fR is currently disabled.  Most of the
-functionality is provided by the \fBdde\fR command instead.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-This script fragment can be used to make an application that only runs
-once on a particular display.
-.CS
-if {[tk appname FoobarApp] ne "FoobarApp"} {
-    \fBsend\fR \-async FoobarApp RemoteStart $argv
-    exit
-}
-# The command that will be called remotely, which raises
-# the application main window and opens the requested files
-proc RemoteStart args {
-    raise .
-    foreach filename $args {
-        OpenFile $filename
-    }
-}
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, dde, name, remote execution, security, send
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/spinbox.n b/tk8.6/doc/spinbox.n
deleted file mode 100644
index acf06d6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/spinbox.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,602 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Jeffrey Hobbs.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH spinbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-spinbox \- Create and manipulate 'spinbox' value spinner widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBspinbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-activebackground	\-highlightthickness	\-repeatinterval
-\-background	\-insertbackground	\-selectbackground
-\-borderwidth	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectborderwidth
-\-cursor	\-insertontime	\-selectforeground
-\-exportselection	\-insertwidth	\-takefocus
-\-font	\-insertofftime	\-textvariable
-\-foreground	\-justify	\-xscrollcommand
-\-highlightbackground	\-relief
-\-highlightcolor	\-repeatdelay
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-buttonbackground buttonBackground Background
-The background color to be used for the spin buttons.
-.OP \-buttoncursor buttonCursor Cursor
-The cursor to be used when over the spin buttons.  If this is empty
-(the default), a default cursor will be used.
-.OP \-buttondownrelief buttonDownRelief Relief
-The relief to be used for the upper spin button.
-.OP \-buttonuprelief buttonUpRelief Relief
-The relief to be used for the lower spin button.
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies a Tcl command to invoke whenever a spinbutton is invoked.
-The command recognizes several percent substitutions: \fB%W\fR for
-the widget path, \fB%s\fR for the current value of the widget, and
-\fB%d\fR for the direction of the button pressed (\fBup\fR or \fBdown\fR).
-.OP \-disabledbackground disabledBackground DisabledBackground
-Specifies the background color to use when the spinbox is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-.OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground
-Specifies the foreground color to use when the spinbox is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal foreground color is used.
-.OP \-format format Format
-Specifies an alternate format to use when setting the string value
-when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range.
-This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR,
-as it will format a floating-point number.
-.OP \-from from From
-A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a spinbox, to
-be used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR.  When all
-are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its
-contents.  This value must be less than the \fB\-to\fR option.
-If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option.
-.OP "\-invalidcommand or \-invcmd" invalidCommand InvalidCommand
-Specifies a script to eval when \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns 0.  Setting
-it to an empty string disables this feature (the default).  The best use of
-this option is to set it to \fIbell\fR.  See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for
-more information.
-.OP \-increment increment Increment
-A floating-point value specifying the increment.  When used with
-\fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR, the value in the widget will be adjusted by
-\fB\-increment\fR when a spin button is pressed (up adds the value,
-down subtracts the value).
-.OP \-readonlybackground readonlyBackground ReadonlyBackground
-Specifies the background color to use when the spinbox is readonly.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of three states for the spinbox:  \fBnormal\fR,
-\fBdisabled\fR, or \fBreadonly\fR.  If the spinbox is readonly, then the
-value may not be changed using widget commands and no insertion cursor
-will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget; the
-contents of the widget may still be selected.  If the spinbox is
-disabled, the value may not be changed, no insertion cursor will be
-displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the spinbox may
-be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the
-\fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options.
-.OP \-to to To
-A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the spinbox,
-to be used in conjunction with \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR.  When
-all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control
-its contents.  This value must be greater than the \fB\-from\fR option.
-If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option.
-.OP \-validate validate Validate
-Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: \fBnone\fR,
-\fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR.
-It defaults to \fBnone\fR.  When you want validation, you must explicitly
-state which mode you wish to use.  See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more.
-.OP "\-validatecommand or \-vcmd" validateCommand ValidateCommand
-Specifies a script to evaluate when you want to validate the input in the
-widget.  Setting it to an empty string disables this feature (the default).
-Validation occurs according to the value of \fB\-validate\fR.
-This command must return a valid Tcl boolean value.  If it returns 0 (or
-the valid Tcl boolean equivalent) then the value of the widget will not
-change and the \fB\-invalidcommand\fR will be evaluated if it is set.  If it
-returns 1, then value will be changed.
-See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more information.
-.OP \-values values Values
-Must be a proper list value.  If specified, the spinbox will use these
-values as to control its contents, starting with the first value.  This
-option has precedence over the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the spinbox window,
-in average-size characters of the widget's font.
-If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks a
-size just large enough to hold its current text.
-.OP \-wrap wrap wrap
-Must be a proper boolean value.  If on, the spinbox will wrap around the
-values of data in the widget.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new window (given by the
-\fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a spinbox widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the
-command line or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the spinbox such as its colors, font,
-and relief.  The \fBspinbox\fR command returns its
-\fIpathName\fR argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but
-\fIpathName\fR's parent must exist.
-.PP
-A \fBspinbox\fR is an extended \fBentry\fR widget that allows he user
-to move, or spin, through a fixed set of ascending or descending values
-such as times or dates in addition to editing the value as in an
-\fBentry\fR.  When first created, a spinbox's string is empty.
-A portion of the spinbox may be selected as described below.
-If a spinbox is exporting its selection (see the \fB\-exportselection\fR
-option), then it will observe the standard protocols for handling the
-selection;  spinbox selections are available as type \fBSTRING\fR.
-Spinboxes also observe the standard Tk rules for dealing with the
-input focus.  When a spinbox has the input focus it displays an
-\fIinsertion cursor\fR to indicate where new characters will be
-inserted.
-.PP
-Spinboxes are capable of displaying strings that are too long to
-fit entirely within the widget's window.  In this case, only a
-portion of the string will be displayed; commands described below
-may be used to change the view in the window.  Spinboxes use
-the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR mechanism for interacting with
-scrollbars (see the description of the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option
-for details).  They also support scanning, as described below.
-.SH VALIDATION
-.PP
-Validation works by setting the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
-option to a script which will be evaluated according to the \fB\-validate\fR
-option as follows:
-.PP
-.IP \fBnone\fR 10
-Default.  This means no validation will occur.
-.IP \fBfocus\fR 10
-The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox receives or
-loses focus.
-.IP \fBfocusin\fR 10
-The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox receives focus.
-.IP \fBfocusout\fR 10
-The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox loses focus.
-.IP \fBkey\fR 10
-The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called when the spinbox is edited.
-.IP \fBall\fR 10
-The \fB\-validatecommand\fR will be called for all above conditions.
-.PP
-It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
-and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR scripts, just as you would in a \fBbind\fR script.  The
-following substitutions are recognized:
-.PP
-.IP \fB%d\fR 5
-Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR, 0 for \fBdelete\fR,
-or \-1 for focus, forced or textvariable validation.
-.IP \fB%i\fR 5
-Index of char string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1.
-.IP \fB%P\fR 5
-The value of the spinbox should edition occur.  If you are configuring the
-spinbox widget to have a new textvariable, this will be the value of that
-textvariable.
-.IP \fB%s\fR 5
-The current value of spinbox before edition.
-.IP \fB%S\fR 5
-The text string being inserted/deleted, if any.
-Otherwise it is an empty string.
-.IP \fB%v\fR 5
-The type of validation currently set.
-.IP \fB%V\fR 5
-The type of validation that triggered the callback
-(key, focusin, focusout, forced).
-.IP \fB%W\fR 5
-The name of the spinbox widget.
-.PP
-In general, the \fB\-textvariable\fR and \fB\-validatecommand\fR can be
-dangerous to mix.  Any problems have been overcome so that using the
-\fB\-validatecommand\fR will not interfere with the traditional behavior of
-the spinbox widget.  Using the \fB\-textvariable\fR for read-only purposes will
-never cause problems.  The danger comes when you try set the
-\fB\-textvariable\fR to something that the \fB\-validatecommand\fR would not
-accept, which causes \fB\-validate\fR to become \fBnone\fR (the
-\fB\-invalidcommand\fR will not be triggered).  The same happens
-when an error occurs evaluating the \fB\-validatecommand\fR.
-.PP
-Primarily, an error will occur when the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or
-\fB\-invalidcommand\fR encounters an error in its script while evaluating or
-\fB\-validatecommand\fR does not return a valid Tcl boolean value.  The
-\fB\-validate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the
-spinbox widget from within either the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or the
-\fB\-invalidcommand\fR.  Such editions will override the one that was being
-validated.  If you wish to edit the value of the widget
-during validation and still have the \fB\-validate\fR option set, you should
-include the command
-.CS
-     \fI%W config \-validate %v\fR
-.CE
-in the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR (whichever one you
-were editing the spinbox widget from).  It is also recommended to not set an
-associated \fB\-textvariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the
-spinbox widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR.
-.PP
-Also, the \fB-validate\fR option will set itself to \fBnone\fR when the
-spinbox value gets changed because of adjustment of \fB-from\fR or \fB-to\fR
-and the \fB-validatecommand\fR returns false. For instance
-.CS
-     \fIspinbox pathName \-from 1 \-to 10 \-validate all \-vcmd {return 0}\fR
-.CE
-will in fact set the \fB-validate\fR option to \fBnone\fR because the default
-value for the spinbox gets changed (due to the \fB-from\fR and \fB-to\fR
-options) to a value not accepted by the validation script.
-.PP
-Moreover, forced validation is performed when invoking any spinbutton of
-the spinbox. If the validation script returns false in this situation,
-then the \fB-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is \fIpathName\fR.  This command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.
-.SS INDICES
-.PP
-Many of the widget commands for spinboxes take one or more indices as
-arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the spinbox's
-string, in any of the following ways:
-.TP 12
-\fInumber\fR
-Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
-to the first character in the string.
-.TP 12
-\fBanchor\fR
-Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
-\fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands.
-.TP 12
-\fBend\fR
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the spinbox's string.
-This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
-of the spinbox's string.
-.TP 12
-\fBinsert\fR
-Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
-insertion cursor.
-.TP 12
-\fBsel.first\fR
-Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
-use this form if the selection is not in the spinbox window.
-.TP 12
-\fBsel.last\fR
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
-It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the
-spinbox window.
-.TP 12
-\fB@\fInumber\fR
-In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the
-spinbox's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
-For example,
-.QW \fB@0\fR
-indicates the left-most character in the window.
-.LP
-Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g.
-.QW \fBe\fR
-or
-.QW \fBsel.f\fR .
-In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the
-nearest legal value.
-.SS SUBCOMMANDS
-.PP
-The following commands are possible for spinbox widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
-character given by \fIindex\fR.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
-the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
-(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
-the width and height of the character, in pixels.
-The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
-of the window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBspinbox\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
-Delete one or more elements of the spinbox.
-\fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and
-\fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last
-one to delete.
-If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1,
-i.e. a single character is deleted.
-This command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR
-Returns the spinbox's string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR
-Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
-given by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify\fI x y\fR
-Returns the name of the window element corresponding to coordinates
-\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR in the spinbox.  Return value is one of:
-\fBnone\fR, \fBbuttondown\fR, \fBbuttonup\fR, \fBentry\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR
-Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR
-Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character
-indicated by \fIindex\fR.  Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fI element\fR
-Causes the specified element, either \fBbuttondown\fR or \fBbuttonup\fR,
-to be invoked, triggering the action associated with it.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR
-This command is used to implement scanning on spinboxes.  It has
-two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR
-Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the spinbox window;  used in
-conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands.  Typically this
-command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
-returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR
-This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument
-and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for
-the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
-difference in x-coordinates.  This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the spinbox at high speed through the window.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
-This command is used to adjust the selection within a spinbox.  It
-has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR
-Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
-\fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR
-(i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR).  The other
-end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
-\fBselect to\fR commands.  If the selection
-is not currently in the spinbox, then a new selection is created to
-include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent
-selection anchor point, inclusive.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR
-Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
-selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection element\fR ?\fIelement\fR?
-Sets or gets the currently selected element.  If a spinbutton element
-is specified, it will be displayed depressed.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR
-Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
-given by \fIindex\fR.  Does not change the selection.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection present\fR
-Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the spinbox,
-0 if nothing is selected.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart end\fR
-Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
-the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just
-before \fIend\fR.
-If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an
-earlier one, then the spinbox's selection is cleared.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR
-If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including
-the anchor point.
-If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
-If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
-\fIindex\fR.
-The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR
-or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget.
-If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is
-created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
-Returns an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset\fR ?\fIstring\fR?
-If \fIstring\fR is specified, the spinbox will try and set it to this
-value, otherwise it just returns the spinbox's string.
-If validation is on, it will occur when setting the string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR
-This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fB\-validatecommand\fR
-independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
-This is done by temporarily setting the \fB\-validate\fR option to \fBall\fR.
-It returns 0 or 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the spinbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fIindex\fR
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
-is displayed at the left edge of the window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
-way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
-\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
-\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
-\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display;  if it is
-\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
-If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-.RE
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for spinboxes that give them
-the following default behavior.
-In the descriptions below,
-.QW word
-refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or
-.QW _
-characters, or any single character other than these.
-.IP [1]
-Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor
-just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the
-input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget.
-Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between
-the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse.
-.IP [2]
-Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse
-and positions the insertion cursor at the beginning of the word.
-Dragging after a double click will stroke out a selection consisting
-of whole words.
-.IP [3]
-Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects all of the text in the
-spinbox and positions the insertion cursor before the first character.
-.IP [4]
-The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse
-button 1 while the Shift key is down;  this will adjust the end
-of the selection that was nearest to the mouse cursor when button
-1 was pressed.
-If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection
-will be adjusted in units of whole words.
-.IP [5]
-Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will position the
-insertion cursor in the spinbox without affecting the selection.
-.IP [6]
-If any normal printing characters are typed in a spinbox, they are
-inserted at the point of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [7]
-The view in the spinbox can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2.
-If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection
-is copied into the spinbox at the position of the mouse cursor.
-.IP [8]
-If the mouse is dragged out of the spinbox on the left or right sides
-while button 1 is pressed, the spinbox will automatically scroll to
-make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side
-where the mouse left the window).
-.IP [9]
-The Left and Right keys move the insertion cursor one character to the
-left or right;  they also clear any selection in the spinbox and set
-the selection anchor.
-If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion
-cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-Left and Control-Right move the insertion cursor by words, and
-Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insertion cursor
-by words and also extend the selection.
-Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively.
-Meta-b and Meta-f behave the same as Control-Left and Control-Right,
-respectively.
-.IP [10]
-The Home key, or Control-a, will move the insertion cursor to the
-beginning of the spinbox and clear any selection in the spinbox.
-Shift-Home moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the spinbox
-and also extends the selection to that point.
-.IP [11]
-The End key, or Control-e, will move the insertion cursor to the
-end of the spinbox and clear any selection in the spinbox.
-Shift-End moves the cursor to the end and extends the selection
-to that point.
-.IP [12]
-The Select key and Control-Space set the selection anchor to the position
-of the insertion cursor.  They do not affect the current selection.
-Shift-Select and Control-Shift-Space adjust the selection to the
-current position of the insertion cursor, selecting from the anchor
-to the insertion cursor if there was not any selection previously.
-.IP [13]
-Control-/ selects all the text in the spinbox.
-.IP [14]
-Control-\e clears any selection in the spinbox.
-.IP [15]
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection.
-.IP [16]
-The F20 key (labelled Cut on many Sun workstations) or Control-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard and deletes
-the selection.
-If there is no selection in the widget then these keys have no effect.
-.IP [17]
-The F18 key (labelled Paste on many Sun workstations) or Control-y
-inserts the contents of the clipboard at the position of the
-insertion cursor.
-.IP [18]
-The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the spinbox.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-.IP [19]
-The BackSpace key and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one
-in the spinbox.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the left of
-the insertion cursor.
-.IP [20]
-Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [21]
-Meta-d deletes the word to the right of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [22]
-Control-k deletes all the characters to the right of the insertion
-cursor.
-.IP [23]
-Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-.PP
-If the spinbox is disabled using the \fB\-state\fR option, then the spinbox's
-view can still be adjusted and text in the spinbox can still be selected,
-but no insertion cursor will be displayed and no text modifications will
-take place.
-.PP
-The behavior of spinboxes can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::spinbox(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-spinbox, entry, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/text.n b/tk8.6/doc/text.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a161e6..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/text.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2285 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH text n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-text, tk_textCopy, tk_textCut, tk_textPaste \- Create and manipulate 'text' hypertext editing widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBtext\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-\fBtk_textCopy\fR \fIpathName\fR
-\fBtk_textCut\fR \fIpathName\fR
-\fBtk_textPaste\fR \fIpathName\fR
-.SO
-\-background	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
-\-borderwidth	\-insertbackground	\-selectbackground
-\-cursor	\-insertborderwidth	\-selectborderwidth
-\-exportselection	\-insertofftime	\-selectforeground
-\-font	\-insertontime	\-setgrid
-\-foreground	\-insertwidth	\-takefocus
-\-highlightbackground	\-padx	\-xscrollcommand
-\-highlightcolor	\-pady	\-yscrollcommand
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-autoseparators autoSeparators AutoSeparators
-Specifies a boolean that says whether separators are automatically inserted in
-the undo stack. Only meaningful when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true.
-.OP \-blockcursor blockCursor BlockCursor
-Specifies a boolean that says whether the blinking insertion cursor should be
-drawn as a character-sized rectangular block. If false (the default) a thin
-vertical line is used for the insertion cursor.
-.OP \-endline endLine EndLine
-Specifies an integer line index representing the line of the underlying
-textual data store that should be just after the last line contained in
-the widget. This allows a text widget to reflect only a portion of a
-larger piece of text. Instead of an integer, the empty string can be
-provided to this configuration option, which will configure the widget
-to end at the very last line in the textual data store.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies the desired height for the window, in units of characters in the
-font given by the \fB\-font\fR option. Must be at least one.
-.OP \-inactiveselectbackground inactiveSelectBackground Foreground
-Specifies the colour to use for the selection (the \fBsel\fR tag) when the
-window does not have the input focus. If empty, \fB{}\fR, then no selection is
-shown when the window does not have the focus.
-.OP \-insertunfocussed insertUnfocussed InsertUnfocussed
-.VS 8.6
-Specifies how to display the insertion cursor when the widget does not have
-the focus. Must be \fBnone\fR (the default) which means to not display the
-cursor, \fBhollow\fR which means to display a hollow box, or \fBsolid\fR which
-means to display a solid box. Note that \fBhollow\fR and \fBsolid\fR will
-appear very similar when the \fB\-blockcursor\fR option is false.
-.VE 8.6
-.OP \-maxundo maxUndo MaxUndo
-Specifies the maximum number of compound undo actions on the undo stack. A
-zero or a negative value imply an unlimited undo stack.
-.OP \-spacing1 spacing1 Spacing1
-Requests additional space above each text line in the widget, using any of the
-standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies
-to the first line on the display. This option may be overridden with
-\fB\-spacing1\fR options in tags.
-.OP \-spacing2 spacing2 Spacing2
-For lines that wrap (so that they cover more than one line on the display)
-this option specifies additional space to provide between the display lines
-that represent a single line of text. The value may have any of the standard
-forms for screen distances. This option may be overridden with
-\fB\-spacing2\fR options in tags.
-.OP \-spacing3 spacing3 Spacing3
-Requests additional space below each text line in the widget, using any of the
-standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies
-to the last line on the display. This option may be overridden with
-\fB\-spacing3\fR options in tags.
-.OP \-startline startLine StartLine
-Specifies an integer line index representing the first line of the underlying
-textual data store that should be contained in the widget. This allows a text
-widget to reflect only a portion of a larger piece of text. Instead of an
-integer, the empty string can be provided to this configuration option, which
-will configure the widget to start at the very first line in the textual data
-store.
-.OP \-state state State
-Specifies one of two states for the text: \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR. If
-the text is disabled then characters may not be inserted or deleted and no
-insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget.
-.OP \-tabs tabs Tabs
-Specifies a set of tab stops for the window. The option's value consists of a
-list of screen distances giving the positions of the tab stops, each of which
-is a distance relative to the left edge of the widget (excluding borders,
-padding, etc). Each position may optionally be followed in the next list
-element by one of the keywords \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or
-\fBnumeric\fR, which specifies how to justify text relative to the tab stop.
-\fBLeft\fR is the default; it causes the text following the tab character to
-be positioned with its left edge at the tab position. \fBRight\fR means that
-the right edge of the text following the tab character is positioned at the
-tab position, and \fBcenter\fR means that the text is centered at the tab
-position. \fBNumeric\fR means that the decimal point in the text is positioned
-at the tab position; if there is no decimal point then the least significant
-digit of the number is positioned just to the left of the tab position; if
-there is no number in the text then the text is right-justified at the tab
-position. For example,
-.QW "\fB\-tabs {2c left 4c 6c center}\fR"
-creates three tab stops at two-centimeter intervals; the first two use left
-justification and the third uses center justification.
-.RS
-.PP
-If the list of tab stops does not have enough elements to cover all of the
-tabs in a text line, then Tk extrapolates new tab stops using the spacing and
-alignment from the last tab stop in the list. Tab distances must be strictly
-positive, and must always increase from one tab stop to the next (if not, an
-error is thrown). The value of the \fB\-tabs\fR option may be overridden by
-\fB\-tabs\fR options in tags.
-.PP
-If no \fB\-tabs\fR option is specified, or if it is specified as an empty
-list, then Tk uses default tabs spaced every eight (average size) characters.
-To achieve a different standard spacing, for example every 4 characters,
-simply configure the widget with
-.QW "\fB\-tabs \N'34'[expr {4 * [font measure $font 0]}] left\N'34' \-tabstyle wordprocessor\fR" .
-.RE
-.OP \-tabstyle tabStyle TabStyle
-Specifies how to interpret the relationship between tab stops on a line and
-tabs in the text of that line. The value must be \fBtabular\fR (the default)
-or \fBwordprocessor\fR. Note that tabs are interpreted as they are encountered
-in the text. If the tab style is \fBtabular\fR then the \fIn\fR'th tab
-character in the line's text will be associated with the \fIn\fR'th tab stop
-defined for that line. If the tab character's x coordinate falls to the right
-of the \fIn\fR'th tab stop, then a gap of a single space will be inserted as a
-fallback. If the tab style is \fBwordprocessor\fR then any tab character being
-laid out will use (and be defined by) the first tab stop to the right of the
-preceding characters already laid out on that line. The value of the
-\fB\-tabstyle\fR option may be overridden by \fB\-tabstyle\fR options in tags.
-.OP \-undo undo Undo
-Specifies a boolean that says whether the undo mechanism is active or not.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the desired width for the window in units of characters in the font
-given by the \fB\-font\fR option. If the font does not have a uniform width
-then the width of the character
-.QW 0
-is used in translating from character units to screen units.
-.OP \-wrap wrap Wrap
-Specifies how to handle lines in the text that are too long to be displayed in
-a single line of the text's window. The value must be \fBnone\fR or \fBchar\fR
-or \fBword\fR. A wrap mode of \fBnone\fR means that each line of text appears
-as exactly one line on the screen; extra characters that do not fit on the
-screen are not displayed. In the other modes each line of text will be broken
-up into several screen lines if necessary to keep all the characters visible.
-In \fBchar\fR mode a screen line break may occur after any character; in
-\fBword\fR mode a line break will only be made at word boundaries.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtext\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR
-argument) and makes it into a text widget. Additional options, described
-above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to
-configure aspects of the text such as its default background color and relief.
-The \fBtext\fR command returns the path name of the new window.
-.PP
-A text widget displays one or more lines of text and allows that text to be
-edited. Text widgets support four different kinds of annotations on the text,
-called tags, marks, embedded windows or embedded images. Tags allow different
-portions of the text to be displayed with different fonts and colors. In
-addition, Tcl commands can be associated with tags so that scripts are invoked
-when particular actions such as keystrokes and mouse button presses occur in
-particular ranges of the text. See \fBTAGS\fR below for more details.
-.PP
-The second form of annotation consists of floating markers in the text called
-.QW marks .
-Marks are used to keep track of various interesting positions in the text as
-it is edited. See \fBMARKS\fR below for more details.
-.PP
-The third form of annotation allows arbitrary windows to be embedded in a text
-widget. See \fBEMBEDDED WINDOWS\fR below for more details.
-.PP
-The fourth form of annotation allows Tk images to be embedded in a text
-widget. See \fBEMBEDDED IMAGES\fR below for more details.
-.PP
-The text widget also has a built-in undo/redo mechanism. See
-\fBTHE UNDO MECHANISM\fR below for more details.
-.PP
-The text widget allows for the creation of peer widgets. These are other text
-widgets which share the same underlying data (text, marks, tags, images, etc).
-See \fBPEER WIDGETS\fR below for more details.
-.SH INDICES
-.PP
-Many of the widget commands for texts take one or more indices as arguments.
-An index is a string used to indicate a particular place within a text, such
-as a place to insert characters or one endpoint of a range of characters to
-delete. Indices have the syntax
-.CS
-\fIbase modifier modifier modifier ...\fR
-.CE
-Where \fIbase\fR gives a starting point and the \fImodifier\fRs adjust the
-index from the starting point (e.g. move forward or backward one character).
-Every index must contain a \fIbase\fR, but the \fImodifier\fRs are optional.
-Most modifiers (as documented below) allow an optional submodifier. Valid
-submodifiers are \fBany\fR and \fBdisplay\fR. If the submodifier is
-abbreviated, then it must be followed by whitespace, but otherwise there need
-be no space between the submodifier and the following \fImodifier\fR.
-Typically the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier adjusts the meaning of the following
-\fImodifier\fR to make it refer to visual or non-elided units rather than
-logical units, but this is explained for each relevant case below. Lastly,
-where \fIcount\fR is used as part of a modifier, it can be positive or
-negative, so
-.QW "\fIbase\fR \- \-3 lines"
-is perfectly valid (and equivalent to
-.QW "\fIbase\fR +3lines" ).
-.PP
-The \fIbase\fR for an index must have one of the following forms:
-.TP 12
-\fIline\fB.\fIchar\fR
-.
-Indicates \fIchar\fR'th character on line \fIline\fR. Lines are numbered from
-1 for consistency with other UNIX programs that use this numbering scheme.
-Within a line, characters are numbered from 0. If \fIchar\fR is \fBend\fR then
-it refers to the newline character that ends the line.
-.TP 12
-\fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR
-.
-Indicates the character that covers the pixel whose x and y coordinates within
-the text's window are \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR.
-.TP 12
-\fBend\fR
-.
-Indicates the end of the text (the character just after the last newline).
-.TP 12
-\fImark\fR
-.
-Indicates the character just after the mark whose name is \fImark\fR.
-.TP 12
-\fItag\fB.first\fR
-.
-Indicates the first character in the text that has been tagged with \fItag\fR.
-This form generates an error if no characters are currently tagged with
-\fItag\fR.
-.TP 12
-\fItag\fB.last\fR
-.
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the text that has been
-tagged with \fItag\fR. This form generates an error if no characters are
-currently tagged with \fItag\fR.
-.TP 12
-\fIpathName\fR
-.
-Indicates the position of the embedded window whose name is \fIpathName\fR.
-This form generates an error if there is no embedded window by the given name.
-.TP 12
-\fIimageName\fR
-.
-Indicates the position of the embedded image whose name is \fIimageName\fR.
-This form generates an error if there is no embedded image by the given name.
-.PP
-If the \fIbase\fR could match more than one of the above forms, such as a
-\fImark\fR and \fIimageName\fR both having the same value, then the form
-earlier in the above list takes precedence. If modifiers follow the base
-index, each one of them must have one of the forms listed below. Keywords such
-as \fBchars\fR and \fBwordend\fR may be abbreviated as long as the
-abbreviation is unambiguous.
-.TP
-\fB+ \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBchars\fR
-.
-Adjust the index forward by \fIcount\fR characters, moving to later lines in
-the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR characters in the
-text after the current index, then set the index to the last index in the
-text. Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR
-submodifier is given, elided characters are skipped over without being
-counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all characters are counted. For
-historical reasons, if neither modifier is given then the count actually takes
-place in units of index positions (see \fBINDICES\fR for details). This
-behaviour may be changed in a future major release, so if you need an index
-count, you are encouraged to use \fBindices\fR instead wherever possible.
-.TP
-\fB\- \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBchars\fR
-.
-Adjust the index backward by \fIcount\fR characters, moving to earlier lines
-in the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR characters in
-the text before the current index, then set the index to the first index in
-the text (1.0). Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the
-\fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, elided characters are skipped over without
-being counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all characters are counted. For
-historical reasons, if neither modifier is given then the count actually takes
-place in units of index positions (see \fBINDICES\fR for details). This
-behavior may be changed in a future major release, so if you need an index
-count, you are encouraged to use \fBindices\fR instead wherever possible.
-.TP
-\fB+ \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBindices\fR
-.
-Adjust the index forward by \fIcount\fR index positions, moving to later lines
-in the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR index positions
-in the text after the current index, then set the index to the last index
-position in the text. Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. Note
-that an index position is either a single character or a single embedded image
-or embedded window. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, elided indices
-are skipped over without being counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all
-indices are counted; this is also the default behaviour if no modifier is
-given.
-.TP
-\fB\- \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBindices\fR
-.
-Adjust the index backward by \fIcount\fR index positions, moving to earlier
-lines in the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR index
-positions in the text before the current index, then set the index to the
-first index position (1.0) in the text. Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR
-are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, elided indices are
-skipped over without being counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all indices
-are counted; this is also the default behaviour if no modifier is given.
-.TP
-\fB+ \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlines\fR
-.
-Adjust the index forward by \fIcount\fR lines, retaining the same character
-position within the line. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR lines after the
-line containing the current index, then set the index to refer to the same
-character position on the last line of the text. Then, if the line is not long
-enough to contain a character at the indicated character position, adjust the
-character position to refer to the last character of the line (the newline).
-Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR
-submodifier is given, then each visual display line is counted separately.
-Otherwise, if \fBany\fR (or no modifier) is given, then each logical line (no
-matter how many times it is visually wrapped) counts just once. If the
-relevant lines are not wrapped, then these two methods of counting are
-equivalent.
-.TP
-\fB\- \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlines\fR
-.
-Adjust the index backward by \fIcount\fR logical lines, retaining the same
-character position within the line. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR lines
-before the line containing the current index, then set the index to refer to
-the same character position on the first line of the text. Then, if the line
-is not long enough to contain a character at the indicated character position,
-adjust the character position to refer to the last character of the line (the
-newline). Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the
-\fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, then each visual display line is counted
-separately. Otherwise, if \fBany\fR (or no modifier) is given, then each
-logical line (no matter how many times it is visually wrapped) counts just
-once. If the relevant lines are not wrapped, then these two methods of
-counting are equivalent.
-.TP
-?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlinestart\fR
-.
-Adjust the index to refer to the first index on the line. If the \fBdisplay\fR
-submodifier is given, this is the first index on the display line, otherwise
-on the logical line.
-.TP
-?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlineend\fR
-.
-Adjust the index to refer to the last index on the line (the newline). If the
-\fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, this is the last index on the display
-line, otherwise on the logical line.
-.TP
-?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBwordstart\fR
-.
-Adjust the index to refer to the first character of the word containing the
-current index. A word consists of any number of adjacent characters that are
-letters, digits, or underscores, or a single character that is not one of
-these. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, this only examines
-non-elided characters, otherwise all characters (elided or not) are examined.
-.TP
-?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBwordend\fR
-.
-Adjust the index to refer to the character just after the last one of the word
-containing the current index. If the current index refers to the last
-character of the text then it is not modified. If the \fBdisplay\fR
-submodifier is given, this only examines non-elided characters, otherwise all
-characters (elided or not) are examined.
-.PP
-If more than one modifier is present then they are applied in left-to-right
-order. For example, the index
-.QW "\fBend \- 1 chars\fR"
-refers to the next-to-last character in the text and
-.QW "\fBinsert wordstart \- 1 c\fR"
-refers to the character just before the first one in the word containing the
-insertion cursor. Modifiers are applied one by one in this left to right
-order, and after each step the resulting index is constrained to be a valid
-index in the text widget. So, for example, the index
-.QW "\fB1.0 \-1c +1c\fR"
-refers to the index
-.QW \fB2.0\fR .
-.PP
-Where modifiers result in index changes by display lines, display chars or
-display indices, and the \fIbase\fR refers to an index inside an elided tag,
-that base index is considered to be equivalent to the first following
-non-elided index.
-.SH TAGS
-.PP
-The first form of annotation in text widgets is a tag. A tag is a textual
-string that is associated with some of the characters in a text. Tags may
-contain arbitrary characters, but it is probably best to avoid using the
-characters
-.QW " "
-(space), \fB+\fR, or \fB\-\fR: these characters have special meaning in
-indices, so tags containing them cannot be used as indices. There may be any
-number of tags associated with characters in a text. Each tag may refer to a
-single character, a range of characters, or several ranges of characters. An
-individual character may have any number of tags associated with it.
-.PP
-A priority order is defined among tags, and this order is used in implementing
-some of the tag-related functions described below. When a tag is defined (by
-associating it with characters or setting its display options or binding
-commands to it), it is given a priority higher than any existing tag. The
-priority order of tags may be redefined using the
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag raise\fR"
-and
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag lower\fR"
-widget commands.
-.PP
-Tags serve three purposes in text widgets. First, they control the way
-information is displayed on the screen. By default, characters are displayed
-as determined by the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-font\fR, and \fB\-foreground\fR
-options for the text widget. However, display options may be associated with
-individual tags using the
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR"
-widget command. If a character has been tagged, then the display options
-associated with the tag override the default display style. The following
-options are currently supported for tags:
-.TP
-\fB\-background \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use for characters associated
-with the tag. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-bgstipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.
-\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern for the
-background. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If
-\fIbitmap\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string,
-then a solid fill will be used for the background.
-.TP
-\fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies the width of a border to draw around the tag using any
-of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option should be used in
-conjunction with the \fB\-relief\fR option to provide the desired border.
-.TP
-\fB\-elide \fIboolean\fR
-.
-\fIElide\fR specifies whether the data should be elided. Elided data
-(characters, images, embedded windows, etc.) is not displayed and takes no
-space on screen, but further on behaves just as normal data.
-.TP
-\fB\-fgstipple \fIbitmap\fR
-.
-\fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern when drawing
-text and other foreground information such as underlines. It may have any of
-the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR has not been
-specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then a solid fill will be
-used.
-.TP
-\fB\-font \fIfontName\fR
-.
-\fIFontName\fR is the name of a font to use for drawing characters. It may
-have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetFont\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when drawing text and other foreground
-information such as underlines. It may have any of the forms accepted by
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR
-.
-If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, then \fIjustify\fR determines how to justify the
-line. It must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. If a line
-wraps, then the justification for each line on the display is determined by
-the first non-elided character of that display line.
-.TP
-\fB\-lmargin1 \fIpixels\fR
-.
-If the first non-elided character of a text line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how much the line
-should be indented from the left edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any
-of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line of text wraps, this
-option only applies to the first line on the display; the \fB\-lmargin2\fR
-option controls the indentation for subsequent lines.
-.TP
-\fB\-lmargin2 \fIpixels\fR
-.
-If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, and if the display line is not the first for its
-text line (i.e., the text line has wrapped), then \fIpixels\fR specifies how
-much the line should be indented from the left edge of the window.
-\fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This
-option is only used when wrapping is enabled, and it only applies to the
-second and later display lines for a text line.
-.TP
-\fB\-lmargincolor \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not
-contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-lmargin1\fR or
-\fB\-lmargin2\fR. It may have any of the forms accepted by
-\fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is
-specified as an empty string, then the color used is specified by the
-\fB-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also unspecified, by the
-\fB-background\fR widget option).
-.TP
-\fB\-offset \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies an amount by which the text's baseline should be offset
-vertically from the baseline of the overall line, in pixels. For example, a
-positive offset can be used for superscripts and a negative offset can be used
-for subscripts. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen
-distances.
-.TP
-\fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR
-.
-Specifies whether or not to draw a horizontal rule through the middle of
-characters. \fIBoolean\fR may have any of the forms accepted by
-\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-overstrikefg \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the overstrike. It may
-have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
-been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
-specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used.
-.TP
-\fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR
-.
-\fIRelief\fR specifies the relief style to use for drawing the border, in any
-of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. This option is used in
-conjunction with the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option to enable to the desired
-border appearance.
-.TP
-\fB\-rmargin \fIpixels\fR
-.
-If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how wide a margin to
-leave between the end of the line and the right edge of the window.
-\fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This
-option is only used when wrapping is enabled. If a text line wraps, the right
-margin for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided
-character of that display line.
-.TP
-\fB\-rmargincolor \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use in regions that do not
-contain characters because they are indented by \fB\-rmargin\fR. It may
-have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
-been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
-used is specified by the \fB-background\fR tag option (or, if this is also
-unspecified, by the \fB-background\fR widget option).
-.TP
-\fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR
-\fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying selected
-items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If
-\fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty
-string, then the color specified by the \fB\-background\fR tag option is
-used.
-.TP
-\fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR
-\fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected
-items. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If
-\fIcolor\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty
-string, then the color specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is
-used.
-.TP
-\fB\-spacing1 \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left above each
-text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line
-wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display.
-.TP
-\fB\-spacing2 \fIpixels\fR
-.
-For lines that wrap, this option specifies how much additional space to leave
-between the display lines for a single text line. \fIPixels\fR may have any of
-the standard forms for screen distances.
-.TP
-\fB\-spacing3 \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left below each
-text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line
-wraps, this option only applies to the last line on the display.
-.TP
-\fB\-tabs \fItabList\fR
-.
-\fITabList\fR specifies a set of tab stops in the same form as for the
-\fB\-tabs\fR option for the text widget. This option only applies to a display
-line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If
-this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it
-unspecified for the tag (the default). If the option is specified as a
-non-empty string that is an empty list, such as \fB\-tags\0{\0}\fR, then it
-requests default 8-character tabs as described for the \fB\-tags\fR widget
-option.
-.TP
-\fB\-tabstyle \fIstyle\fR
-.
-\fIStyle\fR specifies either the \fItabular\fR or \fIwordprocessor\fR style of
-tabbing to use for the text widget. This option only applies to a display line
-if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If this
-option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it
-unspecified for the tag (the default).
-.TP
-\fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR
-.
-\fIBoolean\fR specifies whether or not to draw an underline underneath
-characters. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-underlinefg \fIcolor\fR
-.
-\fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when displaying the underline. It may
-have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR has not
-been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then the color
-specified by the \fB\-foreground\fR tag option is used.
-.TP
-\fB\-wrap \fImode\fR
-.
-\fIMode\fR specifies how to handle lines that are wider than the text's
-window. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the
-first non-elided character on that display line. It has the same legal
-values as the \fB\-wrap\fR option for the text widget: \fBnone\fR,
-\fBchar\fR, or \fBword\fR. If this tag option is specified, it
-overrides the \fB\-wrap\fR option for the text widget.
-.PP
-If a character has several tags associated with it, and if their display
-options conflict, then the options of the highest priority tag are used. If a
-particular display option has not been specified for a particular tag, or if
-it is specified as an empty string, then that option will never be used; the
-next-highest-priority tag's option will used instead. If no tag specifies a
-particular display option, then the default style for the widget will be used.
-.PP
-The second purpose for tags is event bindings. You can associate bindings with
-a tag in much the same way you can associate bindings with a widget class:
-whenever particular X events occur on characters with the given tag, a given
-Tcl command will be executed. Tag bindings can be used to give behaviors to
-ranges of characters; among other things, this allows hypertext-like features
-to be implemented. For details, see the description of the
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag bind\fR"
-widget command below. Tag bindings are shared between all peer widgets
-(including any bindings for the special \fBsel\fR tag).
-.PP
-The third use for tags is in managing the selection. See \fBTHE SELECTION\fR
-below. With the exception of the special \fBsel\fR tag, all tags are shared
-between peer text widgets, and may be manipulated on an equal basis from any
-such widget. The \fBsel\fR tag exists separately and independently in each
-peer text widget (but any tag bindings to \fBsel\fR are shared).
-.SH MARKS
-.PP
-The second form of annotation in text widgets is a mark. Marks are used for
-remembering particular places in a text. They are something like tags, in that
-they have names and they refer to places in the file, but a mark is not
-associated with particular characters. Instead, a mark is associated with the
-gap between two characters. Only a single position may be associated with a
-mark at any given time. If the characters around a mark are deleted the mark
-will still remain; it will just have new neighbor characters. In contrast, if
-the characters containing a tag are deleted then the tag will no longer have
-an association with characters in the file. Marks may be manipulated with the
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBmark\fR"
-widget command, and their current locations may be determined by using the
-mark name as an index in widget commands.
-.PP
-Each mark also has a
-.QW gravity ,
-which is either \fBleft\fR or \fBright\fR. The gravity for a mark specifies
-what happens to the mark when text is inserted at the point of the mark. If a
-mark has left gravity, then the mark is treated as if it were attached to the
-character on its left, so the mark will remain to the left of any text
-inserted at the mark position. If the mark has right gravity, new text
-inserted at the mark position will appear to the left of the mark (so that the
-mark remains rightmost). The gravity for a mark defaults to \fBright\fR.
-.PP
-The name space for marks is different from that for tags: the same name may be
-used for both a mark and a tag, but they will refer to different things.
-.PP
-Two marks have special significance. First, the mark \fBinsert\fR is
-associated with the insertion cursor, as described under
-\fBTHE INSERTION CURSOR\fR
-below. Second, the mark \fBcurrent\fR is associated with the
-character closest to the mouse and is adjusted automatically to track the
-mouse position and any changes to the text in the widget (one exception:
-\fBcurrent\fR is not updated in response to mouse motions if a mouse button is
-down; the update will be deferred until all mouse buttons have been released).
-Neither of these special marks may be deleted. With the exception of these two
-special marks, all marks are shared between peer text widgets, and may be
-manipulated on an equal basis from any peer.
-.SH "EMBEDDED WINDOWS"
-.PP
-The third form of annotation in text widgets is an embedded window. Each
-embedded window annotation causes a window to be displayed at a particular
-point in the text. There may be any number of embedded windows in a text
-widget, and any widget may be used as an embedded window (subject to the usual
-rules for geometry management, which require the text window to be the parent
-of the embedded window or a descendant of its parent).
-.PP
-The embedded window's position on the screen will be updated as the text is
-modified or scrolled, and it will be mapped and unmapped as it moves into and
-out of the visible area of the text widget. Each embedded window occupies one
-unit's worth of index space in the text widget, and it may be referred to
-either by the name of its embedded window or by its position in the widget's
-index space. If the range of text containing the embedded window is deleted
-then the window is destroyed. Similarly if the text widget as a whole is
-deleted, then the window is destroyed.
-.PP
-Eliding an embedded window immediately after scheduling it for creation via
-\fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will prevent it from being
-effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded window scheduled for creation
-via \fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will automatically
-trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded
-window, the latter won't get automatically recreated.
-.PP
-When an embedded window is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName
-\fBwindow create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be
-associated with it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName
-\fBwindow configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently
-supported:
-.TP
-\fB\-align \fIwhere\fR
-.
-If the window is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option
-determines where the window is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have
-one of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the window with the top of the
-line), \fBcenter\fR (center the window within the range of the line),
-\fBbottom\fR (align the bottom of the window with the bottom of the line's
-area), or \fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the window with the baseline of
-the line).
-.TP
-\fB\-create \fIscript\fR
-.
-Specifies a Tcl script that may be evaluated to create the window for the
-annotation. If no \fB\-window\fR option has been specified for the annotation
-this script will be evaluated when the annotation is about to be displayed on
-the screen. \fIScript\fR must create a window for the annotation and return
-the name of that window as its result. Two substitutions will be performed in
-\fIscript\fR before evaluation. \fI%W\fR will be substituted by the name of
-the parent text widget, and \fI%%\fR will be substituted by a single \fI%\fR.
-If the annotation's window should ever be deleted, \fIscript\fR will be
-evaluated again the next time the annotation is displayed.
-.TP
-\fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the
-embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen
-distance.
-.TP
-\fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on
-the bottom of the embedded window. It may have any of the usual forms defined
-for a screen distance.
-.TP
-\fB\-stretch \fIboolean\fR
-.
-If the requested height of the embedded window is less than the height of the
-line in which it is displayed, this option can be used to specify whether the
-window should be stretched vertically to fill its line. If the \fB\-pady\fR
-option has been specified as well, then the requested padding will be retained
-even if the window is stretched.
-.TP
-\fB\-window \fIpathName\fR
-.
-Specifies the name of a window to display in the annotation. Note that if a
-\fIpathName\fR has been set, then later configuring a window to the empty
-string will not delete the widget corresponding to the old \fIpathName\fR.
-Rather it will remove the association between the old \fIpathName\fR and the
-text widget. If multiple peer widgets are in use, it is usually simpler to use
-the \fB\-create\fR option if embedded windows are desired in each peer.
-.SH "EMBEDDED IMAGES"
-.PP
-The final form of annotation in text widgets is an embedded image. Each
-embedded image annotation causes an image to be displayed at a particular
-point in the text. There may be any number of embedded images in a text
-widget, and a particular image may be embedded in multiple places in the same
-text widget.
-.PP
-The embedded image's position on the screen will be updated as the text is
-modified or scrolled. Each embedded image occupies one unit's worth of index
-space in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by its position in
-the widget's index space, or the name it is assigned when the image is inserted
-into the text widget with \fIpathName \fBimage create\fR. If the range of text
-containing the embedded image is deleted then that copy of the image is removed
-from the screen.
-.PP
-Eliding an embedded image immediately after scheduling it for creation via
-\fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will prevent it from being
-effectively created. Uneliding an elided embedded image scheduled for creation
-via \fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex \fB-create\fR will automatically
-trigger the associated creation script. After destroying an elided embedded
-image, the latter won't get automatically recreated.
-.PP
-When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage
-create\fR widget command, a name unique to this instance of the image is
-returned. This name may then be used to refer to this image instance. The name
-is taken to be the value of the \fB\-name\fR option (described below). If the
-\fB\-name\fR option is not provided, the \fB\-image\fR name is used instead.
-If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use in the text widget, then \fB#\fInn\fR
-is added to the end of the \fIimageName\fR, where \fInn\fR is an arbitrary
-integer. This insures the \fIimageName\fR is unique. Once this name is
-assigned to this instance of the image, it does not change, even though the
-\fB\-image\fR or \fB\-name\fR values can be changed with \fIpathName \fBimage
-configure\fR.
-.PP
-When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the \fIpathName \fBimage
-create\fR widget command, several configuration options may be associated with
-it. These options may be modified later with the \fIpathName \fBimage
-configure\fR widget command. The following options are currently supported:
-.TP
-\fB\-align \fIwhere\fR
-.
-If the image is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed, this option
-determines where the image is displayed in the line. \fIWhere\fR must have one
-of the values \fBtop\fR (align the top of the image with the top of the line),
-\fBcenter\fR (center the image within the range of the line), \fBbottom\fR
-(align the bottom of the image with the bottom of the line's area), or
-\fBbaseline\fR (align the bottom of the image with the baseline of the line).
-.TP
-\fB\-image \fIimage\fR
-.
-Specifies the name of the Tk image to display in the annotation. If
-\fIimage\fR is not a valid Tk image, then an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fB\-name \fIImageName\fR
-.
-Specifies the name by which this image instance may be referenced in the text
-widget. If \fIImageName\fR is not supplied, then the name of the Tk image is
-used instead. If the \fIimageName\fR is already in use, \fI#nn\fR is appended
-to the end of the name as described above.
-.TP
-\fB\-padx \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on each side of the
-embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen
-distance.
-.TP
-\fB\-pady \fIpixels\fR
-.
-\fIPixels\fR specifies the amount of extra space to leave on the top and on
-the bottom of the embedded image. It may have any of the usual forms defined
-for a screen distance.
-.SH "THE SELECTION"
-.PP
-Selection support is implemented via tags. If the \fB\-exportselection\fR option
-for the text widget is true then the \fBsel\fR tag will be associated with the
-selection:
-.IP [1]
-Whenever characters are tagged with \fBsel\fR the text widget will claim
-ownership of the selection.
-.IP [2]
-Attempts to retrieve the selection will be serviced by the text widget,
-returning all the characters with the \fBsel\fR tag.
-.IP [3]
-If the selection is claimed away by another application or by another window
-within this application, then the \fBsel\fR tag will be removed from all
-characters in the text.
-.IP [4]
-Whenever the \fBsel\fR tag range changes a virtual event \fB<<Selection>>\fR
-is generated.
-.PP
-The \fBsel\fR tag is automatically defined when a text widget is created, and
-it may not be deleted with the
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag delete\fR"
-widget command. Furthermore, the \fB\-selectbackground\fR,
-\fB\-selectborderwidth\fR, and \fB\-selectforeground\fR options for the text
-widget are tied to the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-borderwidth\fR, and
-\fB\-foreground\fR options for the \fBsel\fR tag: changes in either will
-automatically be reflected in the other. Also the
-\fB\-inactiveselectbackground\fR option for the text widget is used instead of
-\fB\-selectbackground\fR when the text widget does not have the focus. This
-allows programmatic control over the visualization of the \fBsel\fR tag for
-foreground and background windows, or to have \fBsel\fR not shown at all (when
-\fB\-inactiveselectbackground\fR is empty) for background windows. Each peer
-text widget has its own \fBsel\fR tag which can be separately configured and
-set.
-.SH "THE INSERTION CURSOR"
-.PP
-The mark named \fBinsert\fR has special significance in text widgets. It is
-defined automatically when a text widget is created and it may not be unset
-with the
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBmark unset\fR"
-widget command. The \fBinsert\fR mark represents the position of the insertion
-cursor, and the insertion cursor will automatically be drawn at this point
-whenever the text widget has the input focus.
-.SH "THE MODIFIED FLAG"
-.PP
-The text widget can keep track of changes to the content of the widget by
-means of the modified flag. Inserting or deleting text will set this flag. The
-flag can be queried, set and cleared programmatically as well. Whenever the
-flag changes state a \fB<<Modified>>\fR virtual event is generated. See the
-\fIpathName \fBedit modified\fR widget command for more details.
-.SH "THE UNDO MECHANISM"
-.PP
-The text widget has an unlimited undo and redo mechanism (when the
-\fB\-undo\fR widget option is true) which records every insert and delete
-action on a stack.
-.PP
-Boundaries (called
-.QW separators )
-are inserted between edit actions. The purpose of these separators is to group
-inserts, deletes and replaces into one compound edit action. When undoing a
-change everything between two separators will be undone. The undone changes
-are then moved to the redo stack, so that an undone edit can be redone again.
-The redo stack is cleared whenever new edit actions are recorded on the undo
-stack. The undo and redo stacks can be cleared to keep their depth under
-control.
-.PP
-Separators are inserted automatically when the \fB\-autoseparators\fR widget
-option is true. You can insert separators programmatically as well. If a
-separator is already present at the top of the undo stack no other will be
-inserted. That means that two separators on the undo stack are always
-separated by at least one insert or delete action.
-.PP
-The \fB<<UndoStack>>\fR virtual event is generated every time the undo stack
-or the redo stack becomes empty or unempty.
-.PP
-The undo mechanism is also linked to the modified flag. This means that
-undoing or redoing changes can take a modified text widget back to the
-unmodified state or vice versa. The modified flag will be set automatically to
-the appropriate state. This automatic coupling does not work when the modified
-flag has been set by the user, until the flag has been reset again.
-.PP
-See below for the \fIpathName \fBedit\fR widget command that controls the undo
-mechanism.
-.SH "PEER WIDGETS"
-.PP
-The text widget has a separate store of all its data concerning each line's
-textual contents, marks, tags, images and windows, and the undo stack.
-.PP
-While this data store cannot be accessed directly (i.e. without a text widget
-as an intermediary), multiple text widgets can be created, each of which
-present different views on the same underlying data. Such text widgets are
-known as peer text widgets.
-.PP
-As text is added, deleted, edited and coloured in any one widget, and as
-images, marks, tags are adjusted, all such changes will be reflected in all
-peers.
-.PP
-All data and markup is shared, except for a few small details. First, the
-\fBsel\fR tag may be set and configured (in its display style) differently for
-each peer. Second, each peer has its own \fBinsert\fR and \fBcurrent\fR mark
-positions (but all other marks are shared). Third, embedded windows, which are
-arbitrary other widgets, cannot be shared between peers. This means the
-\fB\-window\fR option of embedded windows is independently set for each peer
-(it is advisable to use the \fB\-create\fR script capabilities to allow each
-peer to create its own embedded windows as needed). Fourth, all of the
-configuration options of each peer (e.g. \fB\-font\fR, etc) can be set
-independently, with the exception of \fB\-undo\fR, \fB\-maxundo\fR,
-\fB\-autoseparators\fR (i.e. all undo, redo and modified state issues are
-shared).
-.PP
-Finally any single peer need not contain all lines from the underlying data
-store. When creating a peer, a contiguous range of lines (e.g. only lines 52
-through 125) may be specified. This allows a peer to contain just a small
-portion of the overall text. The range of lines will expand and contract as
-text is inserted or deleted. The peer will only ever display complete lines of
-text (one cannot share just part of a line). If the peer's contents contracts
-to nothing (i.e. all complete lines in the peer widget have been deleted from
-another widget), then it is impossible for new lines to be inserted. The peer
-will simply become an empty shell on which the background can be configured,
-but which will never show any content (without manual reconfiguration of the
-start and end lines). Note that a peer which does not contain all of the
-underlying data store still has indices numbered from
-.QW 1.0
-to
-.QW end .
-It is simply that those indices reflect a subset of the total data, and data
-outside the contained range is not accessible to the peer. This means that the
-command \fIpeerName \fBindex end\fR may return quite different values in
-different peers. Similarly, commands like \fIpeerName \fBtag ranges\fR will
-not return index ranges outside that which is meaningful to the peer. The
-configuration options \fB\-startline\fR and \fB\-endline\fR may be used to
-control how much of the underlying data is contained in any given text widget.
-.PP
-Note that peers are really peers. Deleting the
-.QW original
-text widget will not cause any other peers to be deleted, or otherwise
-affected.
-.PP
-See below for the \fIpathName \fBpeer\fR widget command that controls the
-creation of peer widgets.
-.SH "ASYNCHRONOUS UPDATE OF LINE HEIGHTS"
-.PP
-In order to maintain a responsive user-experience, the text widget calculates
-lines metrics (line heights in pixels) asynchronously. Because of this, some
-commands of the text widget may return wrong results if the asynchronous
-calculations are not finished at the time of calling. This applies to
-\fIpathName \fBcount -ypixels\fR and \fIpathName \fByview\fR.
-.PP
-Again for performance reasons, it would not be appropriate to let these
-commands always wait for the end of the update calculation each time they are
-called. In most use cases of these commands a more or less inaccurate result
-does not really matter compared to execution speed.
-.PP
-In case accurate result is needed (and if the text widget is managed by a
-geometry manager), one can resort to \fIpathName \fBsync\fR and \fIpathName
-\fBpendingsync\fR to control the synchronization of the view of text widgets.
-.PP
-The \fB<<WidgetViewSync>>\fR virtual event fires when the line heights of the
-text widget become obsolete (due to some editing command or configuration
-change), and again when the internal data of the text widget are back in sync
-with the widget view. The detail field (%d substitution) is either true (when
-the widget is in sync) or false (when it is not).
-.PP
-\fIpathName \fBsync\fR, \fIpathName \fBpendingsync\fR and
-\fB<<WidgetViewSync>>\fR apply to each text widget independently of its peers.
-.PP
-Examples of use:
-.CS
-## Example 1:
-# immediately complete line metrics at any cost (GUI unresponsive)
-$w sync
-$w yview moveto $fraction
-
-## Example 2:
-# synchronously wait for up-to-date line metrics (GUI responsive)
-# before executing the scheduled command, but don't block execution flow
-$w sync -command [list $w yview moveto $fraction]
-
-## Example 3:
-# init
-set yud($w) 0
-proc updateaction w {
-\&set ::yud($w) 1
-\&# any other update action here...
-}
-# runtime, synchronously wait for up-to-date line metrics (GUI responsive)
-$w sync -command [list updateaction $w]
-vwait yud($w)
-$w yview moveto $fraction
-
-## Example 4:
-# init
-set todo($w) {}
-proc updateaction w {
-\&foreach cmd $::todo($w) {uplevel #0 $cmd}
-\&set todo($w) {}
-}
-# runtime
-lappend todo($w) [list $w yview moveto $fraction]
-$w sync -command [list updateaction $w]
-
-## Example 5:
-# init
-set todo($w) {}
-bind $w <<WidgetViewSync>> {
-\&if {%d} {
-\&\&foreach cmd $todo(%W) {eval $cmd}
-\&\&set todo(%W) {}
-\&}
-}
-# runtime
-if {![$w pendingsync]} {
-\&$w yview moveto $fraction
-} else {
-\&lappend todo($w) [list $w yview moveto $fraction]
-}
-.CE
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBtext\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the
-path name of the text's window. This command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget. It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the text
-widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact
-behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for text widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns a list of four elements describing the screen area of the character
-given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y
-coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the character,
-and the last two elements give the width and height of the area. If the
-character is only partially visible on the screen, then the return value
-reflects just the visible part. If the character is not visible on the screen
-then the return value is an empty list.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcompare\fR \fIindex1 op index2\fR
-.
-Compares the indices given by \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR according to the
-relational operator given by \fIop\fR, and returns 1 if the relationship is
-satisfied and 0 if it is not. \fIOp\fR must be one of the operators <, <=, ==,
->=, >, or !=. If \fIop\fR is == then 1 is returned if the two indices refer to
-the same character, if \fIop\fR is < then 1 is returned if \fIindex1\fR refers
-to an earlier character in the text than \fIindex2\fR, and so on.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? \fI?value option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is
-specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for
-\fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of
-this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command
-returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to
-the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is
-specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the
-command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in
-this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of
-the values accepted by the \fBtext\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcount\fR \fI?options\fR? \fIindex1 index2\fR
-.
-Counts the number of relevant things between the two indices. If \fIindex1\fR
-is after \fIindex2\fR, the result will be a negative number (and this holds
-for each of the possible options). The actual items which are counted depend
-on the options given. The result is a list of integers, one for the result of
-each counting option given. Valid counting options are \fB\-chars\fR,
-\fB\-displaychars\fR, \fB\-displayindices\fR, \fB\-displaylines\fR,
-\fB\-indices\fR, \fB\-lines\fR, \fB\-xpixels\fR and \fB\-ypixels\fR. The
-default value, if no option is specified, is \fB\-indices\fR. There is an
-additional possible option \fB\-update\fR which is a modifier. If given (and
-if the text widget is managed by a geometry manager), then all subsequent
-options ensure that any possible out of date information is recalculated.
-This currently only has any effect for the \fB\-ypixels\fR count (which, if
-\fB\-update\fR is not given, will use the text widget's current cached value
-for each line). This \fB\-update\fR option is obsoleted by \fIpathName
-\fBsync\fR, \fIpathName \fBpendingsync\fR and \fB<<WidgetViewSync>>\fR.  The
-count options are interpreted as follows:
-.RS
-.IP \fB\-chars\fR
-count all characters, whether elided or not. Do not count embedded windows or
-images.
-.IP \fB\-displaychars\fR
-count all non-elided characters.
-.IP \fB\-displayindices\fR
-count all non-elided characters, windows and images.
-.IP \fB\-displaylines\fR
-count all display lines (i.e. counting one for each time a line wraps) from
-the line of the first index up to, but not including the display line of the
-second index. Therefore if they are both on the same display line, zero will
-be returned. By definition displaylines are visible and therefore this only
-counts portions of actual visible lines.
-.IP \fB\-indices\fR
-count all characters and embedded windows or images (i.e. everything which
-counts in text-widget index space), whether they are elided or not.
-.IP \fB\-lines\fR
-count all logical lines (irrespective of wrapping) from the line of the first
-index up to, but not including the line of the second index. Therefore if they
-are both on the same line, zero will be returned. Logical lines are counted
-whether they are currently visible (non-elided) or not.
-.IP \fB\-xpixels\fR
-count the number of horizontal pixels from the first pixel of the first index
-to (but not including) the first pixel of the second index. To count the total
-desired width of the text widget (assuming wrapping is not enabled), first
-find the longest line and then use
-.QW ".text count \-xpixels \N'34'${line}.0\N'34' \N'34'${line}.0 lineend\N'34'" .
-.IP \fB\-ypixels\fR
-count the number of vertical pixels from the first pixel of the first index to
-(but not including) the first pixel of the second index. If both indices are
-on the same display line, zero will be returned. To count the total number of
-vertical pixels in the text widget, use
-.QW ".text count \-ypixels 1.0 end" ,
-and to ensure this is up to date, use
-.QW ".text count \-update \-ypixels 1.0 end" .
-.PP
-The command returns a positive or negative integer corresponding to the number
-of items counted between the two indices. One such integer is returned for
-each counting option given, so a list is returned if more than one option was
-supplied. For example
-.QW ".text count \-xpixels \-ypixels 1.3 4.5"
-is perfectly valid and will return a list of two elements.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdebug \fR?\fIboolean\fR?
-.
-If \fIboolean\fR is specified, then it must have one of the true or false
-values accepted by Tcl_GetBoolean. If the value is a true one then internal
-consistency checks will be turned on in the B-tree code associated with text
-widgets. If \fIboolean\fR has a false value then the debugging checks will be
-turned off. In either case the command returns an empty string. If
-\fIboolean\fR is not specified then the command returns \fBon\fR or \fBoff\fR
-to indicate whether or not debugging is turned on. There is a single debugging
-switch shared by all text widgets: turning debugging on or off in any widget
-turns it on or off for all widgets. For widgets with large amounts of text,
-the consistency checks may cause a noticeable slow-down.
-.RS
-.PP
-When debugging is turned on, the drawing routines of the text widget set the
-global variables \fBtk_textRedraw\fR and \fBtk_textRelayout\fR to the lists of
-indices that are redrawn. The values of these variables are tested by Tk's
-test suite.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2 ...\fR?
-.
-Delete a range of characters from the text.
-If both \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR are specified, then delete
-all the characters starting with the one given by \fIindex1\fR
-and stopping just before \fIindex2\fR (i.e. the character at
-\fIindex2\fR is not deleted).
-If \fIindex2\fR does not specify a position later in the text
-than \fIindex1\fR then no characters are deleted.
-If \fIindex2\fR is not specified then the single character at
-\fIindex1\fR is deleted.
-Attempts to delete characters in a way that would leave
-the text without a newline as the last character will be tweaked by the
-text widget to avoid this. In particular, deletion of complete lines of
-text up to the end of the text will also delete the newline character just
-before the deleted block so that it is replaced by the new final newline
-of the text widget.
-The command returns an empty string.
-If more indices are given, multiple ranges of text will be deleted.
-All indices are first checked for validity before any deletions are made.
-They are sorted and the text is removed from the last range to the
-first range so deleted text does not cause an undesired index shifting
-side-effects.  If multiple ranges with the same start index are given,
-then the longest range is used.  If overlapping ranges are given, then
-they will be merged into spans that do not cause deletion of text
-outside the given ranges due to text shifted during deletion.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdlineinfo \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns a list with five elements describing the area occupied by the display
-line containing \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and
-y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the line, the
-third and fourth elements give the width and height of the area, and the fifth
-element gives the position of the baseline for the line, measured down from
-the top of the area. All of this information is measured in pixels. If the
-current wrap mode is \fBnone\fR and the line extends beyond the boundaries of
-the window, the area returned reflects the entire area of the line, including
-the portions that are out of the window. If the line is shorter than the full
-width of the window then the area returned reflects just the portion of the
-line that is occupied by characters and embedded windows. If the display line
-containing \fIindex\fR is not visible on the screen then the return value is
-an empty list.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdump \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIindex1 \fR?\fIindex2\fR?
-.
-Return the contents of the text widget from \fIindex1\fR up to, but not
-including \fIindex2\fR, including the text and information about marks, tags,
-and embedded windows. If \fIindex2\fR is not specified, then it defaults to
-one character past \fIindex1\fR. The information is returned in the following
-format:
-.RS
-.LP
-\fIkey1 value1 index1 key2 value2 index2\fR ...
-.LP
-The possible \fIkey\fR values are \fBtext\fR, \fBmark\fR, \fBtagon\fR,
-\fBtagoff\fR, \fBimage\fR, and \fBwindow\fR. The corresponding \fIvalue\fR is
-the text, mark name, tag name, image name, or window name. The \fIindex\fR
-information is the index of the start of the text, mark, tag transition, image
-or window. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
-may be specified to control the dump:
-.TP
-\fB\-all\fR
-.
-Return information about all elements: text, marks, tags, images and windows.
-This is the default.
-.TP
-\fB\-command \fIcommand\fR
-.
-Instead of returning the information as the result of the dump operation,
-invoke the \fIcommand\fR on each element of the text widget within the range.
-The command has three arguments appended to it before it is evaluated: the
-\fIkey\fR, \fIvalue\fR, and \fIindex\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-image\fR
-.
-Include information about images in the dump results.
-.TP
-\fB\-mark\fR
-.
-Include information about marks in the dump results.
-.TP
-\fB\-tag\fR
-.
-Include information about tag transitions in the dump results. Tag information
-is returned as \fBtagon\fR and \fBtagoff\fR elements that indicate the begin
-and end of each range of each tag, respectively.
-.TP
-\fB\-text\fR
-.
-Include information about text in the dump results. The value is the text up
-to the next element or the end of range indicated by \fIindex2\fR. A text
-element does not span newlines. A multi-line block of text that contains no
-marks or tag transitions will still be dumped as a set of text segments that
-each end with a newline. The newline is part of the value.
-.TP
-\fB\-window\fR
-.
-Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a
-window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It
-must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you
-must query the window by its index position to get more information.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-This command controls the undo mechanism and the modified flag. The exact
-behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the
-\fBedit\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently
-supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit canredo\fR
-.
-Returns a boolean true if redo is possible, i.e. when the redo stack is not
-empty. Otherwise returns false.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit canundo\fR
-.
-Returns a boolean true if undo is possible, i.e. when the undo stack is not
-empty. Otherwise returns false.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit modified \fR?\fIboolean\fR?
-.
-If \fIboolean\fR is not specified, returns the modified flag of the widget.
-The insert, delete, edit undo and edit redo commands or the user can set or
-clear the modified flag. If \fIboolean\fR is specified, sets the modified flag
-of the widget to \fIboolean\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit redo\fR
-.
-When the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, reapplies the last undone edits provided
-no other edits were done since then. Generates an error when the redo stack is
-empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit reset\fR
-.
-Clears the undo and redo stacks.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit separator\fR
-.
-Inserts a separator (boundary) on the undo stack. Does nothing when the
-\fB\-undo\fR option is false.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBedit undo\fR
-.
-Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. An edit
-action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded on
-the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo
-stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fB\-displaychars\fR? ?\fB\-\-\fR? \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2 ...\fR?
-.
-Return a range of characters from the text. The return value will be all the
-characters in the text starting with the one whose index is \fIindex1\fR and
-ending just before the one whose index is \fIindex2\fR (the character at
-\fIindex2\fR will not be returned). If \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the single
-character at \fIindex1\fR is returned. If there are no characters in the
-specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR
-is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then an empty string is returned. If
-the specified range contains embedded windows, no information about them is
-included in the returned string. If multiple index pairs are given, multiple
-ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be
-represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the
-order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is
-given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided
-will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges
-are empty strings.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBimage \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-This command is used to manipulate embedded images. The behavior of the
-command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBtag\fR
-argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBimage cget \fIindex option\fR
-.
-Returns the value of a configuration option for an embedded image. \fIIndex\fR
-identifies the embedded image, and \fIoption\fR specifies a particular
-configuration option, which must be one of the ones listed in the section
-\fBEMBEDDED IMAGES\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBimage configure \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options for an embedded image. If no
-\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
-options for the embedded image at \fIindex\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no
-\fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option
-(this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value
-returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR
-pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given option(s) to have the
-given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. See
-\fBEMBEDDED IMAGES\fR for information on the options that are supported.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBimage create \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-This command creates a new image annotation, which will appear in the text at
-the position given by \fIindex\fR. Any number of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs may
-be specified to configure the annotation. Returns a unique identifier that may
-be used as an index to refer to this image. See \fBEMBEDDED IMAGES\fR for
-information on the options that are supported, and a description of the
-identifier returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBimage names\fR
-.
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all image instances currently
-embedded in \fIwindow\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns the position corresponding to \fIindex\fR in the form \fIline.char\fR
-where \fIline\fR is the line number and \fIchar\fR is the character number.
-\fIIndex\fR may have any of the forms described under \fBINDICES\fR above.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex chars \fR?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR?
-.
-Inserts all of the \fIchars\fR arguments just before the character at
-\fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR refers to the end of the text (the character after
-the last newline) then the new text is inserted just before the last newline
-instead. If there is a single \fIchars\fR argument and no \fItagList\fR, then
-the new text will receive any tags that are present on both the character
-before and the character after the insertion point; if a tag is present on
-only one of these characters then it will not be applied to the new text. If
-\fItagList\fR is specified then it consists of a list of tag names; the new
-characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless
-of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple
-\fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same
-effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been
-issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be
-omitted.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmark \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-This command is used to manipulate marks. The exact behavior of the command
-depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBmark\fR argument. The
-following forms of the command are currently supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmark gravity \fImarkName\fR ?\fIdirection\fR?
-.
-If \fIdirection\fR is not specified, returns \fBleft\fR or \fBright\fR to
-indicate which of its adjacent characters \fImarkName\fR is attached to. If
-\fIdirection\fR is specified, it must be \fBleft\fR or \fBright\fR; the
-gravity of \fImarkName\fR is set to the given value.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmark names\fR
-.
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all the marks that are
-currently set.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmark next \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns the name of the next mark at or after \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is
-specified in numerical form, then the search for the next mark begins at that
-index. If \fIindex\fR is the name of a mark, then the search for the next mark
-begins immediately after that mark. This can still return a mark at the same
-position if there are multiple marks at the same index. These semantics mean
-that the \fBmark next\fR operation can be used to step through all the marks
-in a text widget in the same order as the mark information returned by the
-\fIpathName \fBdump\fR operation. If a mark has been set to the special
-\fBend\fR index, then it appears to be \fIafter\fR \fBend\fR with respect to
-the \fIpathName \fBmark next\fR operation. An empty string is returned if
-there are no marks after \fIindex\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmark previous \fIindex\fR
-.
-Returns the name of the mark at or before \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is
-specified in numerical form, then the search for the previous mark begins with
-the character just before that index. If \fIindex\fR is the name of a mark,
-then the search for the next mark begins immediately before that mark. This
-can still return a mark at the same position if there are multiple marks at
-the same index. These semantics mean that the \fIpathName \fBmark previous\fR
-operation can be used to step through all the marks in a text widget in the
-reverse order as the mark information returned by the \fIpathName \fBdump\fR
-operation. An empty string is returned if there are no marks before
-\fIindex\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmark set \fImarkName index\fR
-.
-Sets the mark named \fImarkName\fR to a position just before the character at
-\fIindex\fR. If \fImarkName\fR already exists, it is moved from its old
-position; if it does not exist, a new mark is created. This command returns an
-empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBmark unset \fImarkName \fR?\fImarkName markName ...\fR?
-.
-Remove the mark corresponding to each of the \fImarkName\fR arguments. The
-removed marks will not be usable in indices and will not be returned by future
-calls to
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBmark names\fR" .
-This command returns an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpeer \fIoption args\fR
-.
-This command is used to create and query widget peers. It has two forms,
-depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpeer create \fInewPathName\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
-.
-Creates a peer text widget with the given \fInewPathName\fR, and any optional
-standard configuration options (as for the \fItext\fR command). By default the
-peer will have the same start and end line as the parent widget, but these can
-be overridden with the standard configuration options.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpeer names\fR
-.
-Returns a list of peers of this widget (this does not include the widget
-itself). The order within this list is undefined.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBpendingsync\fR
-Returns 1 if the line heights calculations are not up-to-date, 0 otherwise.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBreplace\fR \fIindex1 index2 chars\fR ?\fItagList chars tagList ...\fR?
-Replaces the range of characters between \fIindex1\fR and \fIindex2\fR
-with the given characters and tags.  See the section on \fIpathName
-\fBinsert\fR for an explanation of the handling of the \fItagList...\fR
-arguments, and the section on \fIpathName
-\fBdelete\fR for an explanation of the handling of the indices.  If
-\fIindex2\fR corresponds to an index earlier in the text than
-\fIindex1\fR, an error will be generated.
-.RS
-.PP
-The deletion and insertion are arranged so that no unnecessary scrolling of
-the window or movement of insertion cursor occurs. In addition the undo/redo
-stack are correctly modified, if undo operations are active in the text
-widget. The command returns an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan \fIoption args\fR
-.
-This command is used to implement scanning on texts. It has two forms,
-depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR
-.
-Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR and the current view in the text window, for use
-in conjunction with later \fIpathName \fBscan dragto\fR commands. Typically
-this command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget. It returns
-an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx y\fR
-.
-This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments
-and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last \fIpathName \fBscan mark\fR
-command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in
-coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in
-the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the text at high speed through
-the window. The return value is an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsearch \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIpattern index \fR?\fIstopIndex\fR?
-.
-Searches the text in \fIpathName\fR starting at \fIindex\fR for a range of
-characters that matches \fIpattern\fR. If a match is found, the index of the
-first character in the match is returned as result; otherwise an empty string
-is returned. One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
-may be specified to control the search:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-forwards\fR
-.
-The search will proceed forward through the text, finding the first matching
-range starting at or after the position given by \fIindex\fR. This is the
-default.
-.TP
-\fB\-backwards\fR
-.
-The search will proceed backward through the text, finding the matching range
-closest to \fIindex\fR whose first character is before \fIindex\fR (it is not
-allowed to be at \fIindex\fR). Note that, for a variety of reasons, backwards
-searches can be substantially slower than forwards searches (particularly when
-using \fB\-regexp\fR), so it is recommended that performance-critical code use
-forward searches.
-.TP
-\fB\-exact\fR
-.
-Use exact matching: the characters in the matching range must be identical to
-those in \fIpattern\fR. This is the default.
-.TP
-\fB\-regexp\fR
-.
-Treat \fIpattern\fR as a regular expression and match it against the text
-using the rules for regular expressions (see the \fBregexp\fR command
-and the \fBre_syntax\fR page for
-details). The default matching automatically passes both the
-\fB\-lineanchor\fR and \fB\-linestop\fR options to the regexp engine (unless
-\fB\-nolinestop\fR is used), so that \fI^$\fR match beginning and end of line,
-and \fI.\fR, \fI[^\fR sequences will never match the newline character
-\fI\en\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-nolinestop\fR
-.
-This allows \fI.\fR and \fI[^\fR sequences to match the newline character
-\fI\en\fR, which they will otherwise not do (see the \fBregexp\fR command for
-details). This option is only meaningful if \fB\-regexp\fR is also given, and
-an error will be thrown otherwise. For example, to match the entire text, use
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBsearch \-nolinestop \-regexp\fR \N'34'.*\N'34' 1.0" .
-.TP
-\fB\-nocase\fR
-.
-Ignore case differences between the pattern and the text.
-.TP
-\fB\-count\fI varName\fR
-.
-The argument following \fB\-count\fR gives the name of a variable; if a match
-is found, the number of index positions between beginning and end of the
-matching range will be stored in the variable. If there are no embedded images
-or windows in the matching range (and there are no elided characters if
-\fB\-elide\fR is not given), this is equivalent to the number of characters
-matched. In either case, the range \fImatchIdx\fR to \fImatchIdx + $count
-chars\fR will return the entire matched text.
-.TP
-\fB\-all\fR
-.
-Find all matches in the given range and return a list of the indices of the
-first character of each match. If a \fB\-count\fI varName\fR switch is given,
-then \fIvarName\fR is also set to a list containing one element for each
-successful match. Note that, even for exact searches, the elements of this
-list may be different, if there are embedded images, windows or hidden text.
-Searches with \fB\-all\fR behave very similarly to the Tcl command \fBregexp
-\-all\fR, in that overlapping matches are not normally returned. For example,
-applying an \fB\-all\fR search of the pattern
-.QW \ew+
-against
-.QW "hello there"
-will just match twice, once for each word, and matching
-.QW "Z[a\-z]+Z"
-against
-.QW ZooZooZoo
-will just match once.
-.TP
-\fB\-overlap\fR
-.
-When performing \fB\-all\fR searches, the normal behaviour is that matches
-which overlap an already-found match will not be returned. This switch changes
-that behaviour so that all matches which are not totally enclosed within
-another match are returned. For example, applying an \fB\-overlap\fR search of
-the pattern
-.QW \ew+
-against
-.QW "hello there"
-will just match twice (i.e. no different to just \fB\-all\fR), but matching
-.QW Z[a\-z]+Z
-against
-.QW ZooZooZoo
-will now match twice. An error will be thrown if this switch is used without
-\fB\-all\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-strictlimits\fR
-.
-When performing any search, the normal behaviour is that the start and stop
-limits are checked with respect to the start of the matching text. With the
-\fB\-strictlimits\fR flag, the entire matching range must lie inside the start
-and stop limits specified for the match to be valid.
-.TP
-\fB\-elide\fR
-.
-Find elided (hidden) text as well. By default only displayed text is searched.
-.TP
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-.
-This switch has no effect except to terminate the list of switches: the next
-argument will be treated as \fIpattern\fR even if it starts with \fB\-\fR.
-.PP
-The matching range may be within a single line of text, or run across multiple
-lines (if parts of the pattern can match a new-line). For regular expression
-matching one can use the various newline-matching features such as \fB$\fR to
-match the end of a line, \fB^\fR to match the beginning of a line, and to
-control whether \fB.\fR is allowed to match a new-line. If \fIstopIndex\fR is
-specified, the search stops at that index: for forward searches, no match at
-or after \fIstopIndex\fR will be considered; for backward searches, no match
-earlier in the text than \fIstopIndex\fR will be considered. If
-\fIstopIndex\fR is omitted, the entire text will be searched: when the
-beginning or end of the text is reached, the search continues at the other end
-until the starting location is reached again; if \fIstopIndex\fR is specified,
-no wrap-around will occur. This means that, for example, if the search is
-\fB\-forwards\fR but \fIstopIndex\fR is earlier in the text than
-\fIstartIndex\fR, nothing will ever be found. See \fBKNOWN BUGS\fR below for a
-number of minor limitations of the \fIpathName \fBsearch\fR command.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is
-completely visible. If \fIindex\fR is already visible then the command does
-nothing. If \fIindex\fR is a short distance out of view, the command adjusts
-the view just enough to make \fIindex\fR visible at the edge of the window.
-If \fIindex\fR is far out of view, then the command centers \fIindex\fR in the
-window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsync\fR ?\fB-command \fIcommand\fR?
-Controls the synchronization of the view of the text widget.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsync\fR
-Immediately brings the line metrics up-to-date by forcing computation of any
-outdated line heights. The command returns immediately if there is no such
-outdated line heights, otherwise it returns only at the end of the computation.
-The command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBsync -command \fIcommand\fR
-Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon
-as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics
-calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty
-string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-This command is used to manipulate tags. The exact behavior of the command
-depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBtag\fR argument. The
-following forms of the command are currently supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag add \fItagName index1 \fR?\fIindex2 index1 index2 ...\fR?
-.
-Associate the tag \fItagName\fR with all of the characters starting with
-\fIindex1\fR and ending just before \fIindex2\fR (the character at
-\fIindex2\fR is not tagged). A single command may contain any number of
-\fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the
-single character at \fIindex1\fR is tagged. If there are no characters in the
-specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR
-is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command has no effect.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag bind \fItagName\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIscript\fR?
-.
-This command associates \fIscript\fR with the tag given by \fItagName\fR.
-Whenever the event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for a character
-that has been tagged with \fItagName\fR, the script will be invoked. This
-widget command is similar to the \fBbind\fR command except that it operates on
-characters in a text rather than entire widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual
-entry for complete details on the syntax of \fIsequence\fR and the
-substitutions performed on \fIscript\fR before invoking it. If all arguments
-are specified then a new binding is created, replacing any existing binding
-for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagName\fR (if the first character of
-\fIscript\fR is
-.QW +
-then \fIscript\fR augments an existing binding rather than replacing it). In
-this case the return value is an empty string. If \fIscript\fR is omitted then
-the command returns the \fIscript\fR associated with \fItagName\fR and
-\fIsequence\fR (an error occurs if there is no such binding). If both
-\fIscript\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of
-all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the
-mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR,
-\fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR) or virtual events. Event bindings for a text
-widget use the \fBcurrent\fR mark described under \fBMARKS\fR above. An
-\fBEnter\fR event triggers for a tag when the tag first becomes present on the
-current character, and a \fBLeave\fR event triggers for a tag when it ceases
-to be present on the current character. \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events can
-happen either because the \fBcurrent\fR mark moved or because the character at
-that position changed. Note that these events are different than \fBEnter\fR
-and \fBLeave\fR events for windows. Mouse and keyboard events are directed to
-the current character. If a virtual event is used in a binding, that binding
-can trigger only if the virtual event is defined by an underlying
-mouse-related or keyboard-related event.
-.PP
-It is possible for the current character to have multiple tags, and for each
-of them to have a binding for a particular event sequence. When this occurs,
-one binding is invoked for each tag, in order from lowest-priority to highest
-priority. If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag, then the
-most specific binding is chosen (see the manual entry for the \fBbind\fR
-command for details). \fBcontinue\fR and \fBbreak\fR commands within binding
-scripts are processed in the same way as for bindings created with the
-\fBbind\fR command.
-.PP
-If bindings are created for the widget as a whole using the \fBbind\fR
-command, then those bindings will supplement the tag bindings. The tag
-bindings will be invoked first, followed by bindings for the window as a
-whole.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag cget \fItagName option\fR
-.
-This command returns the current value of the option named \fIoption\fR
-associated with the tag given by \fItagName\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of
-the values accepted by the \fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR widget command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag configure \fItagName\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-This command is similar to the \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR widget command
-except that it modifies options associated with the tag given by \fItagName\fR
-instead of modifying options for the overall text widget. If no \fIoption\fR
-is specified, the command returns a list describing all of the available
-options for \fItagName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the
-format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then
-the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be
-identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
-\fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
-specified, then the command modifies the given option(s) to have the given
-value(s) in \fItagName\fR; in this case the command returns an empty string.
-See \fBTAGS\fR above for details on the options available for tags.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag delete \fItagName \fR?\fItagName ...\fR?
-.
-Deletes all tag information for each of the \fItagName\fR arguments. The
-command removes the tags from all characters in the file and also deletes any
-other information associated with the tags, such as bindings and display
-information. The command returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName\fB tag lower \fItagName \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR?
-.
-Changes the priority of tag \fItagName\fR so that it is just lower in priority
-than the tag whose name is \fIbelowThis\fR. If \fIbelowThis\fR is omitted,
-then \fItagName\fR's priority is changed to make it lowest priority of all
-tags.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag names \fR?\fIindex\fR?
-.
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all the tags that are active at
-the character position given by \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is omitted, then
-the return value will describe all of the tags that exist for the text (this
-includes all tags that have been named in a
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag\fR"
-widget command but have not been deleted by a
-.QW "\fIpathName \fBtag delete\fR"
-widget command, even if no characters are currently marked with the tag). The
-list will be sorted in order from lowest priority to highest priority.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag nextrange \fItagName index1 \fR?\fIindex2\fR?
-.
-This command searches the text for a range of characters tagged with
-\fItagName\fR where the first character of the range is no earlier than the
-character at \fIindex1\fR and no later than the character just before
-\fIindex2\fR (a range starting at \fIindex2\fR will not be considered). If
-several matching ranges exist, the first one is chosen. The command's return
-value is a list containing two elements, which are the index of the first
-character of the range and the index of the character just after the last one
-in the range. If no matching range is found then the return value is an empty
-string. If \fIindex2\fR is not given then it defaults to the end of the text.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag prevrange \fItagName index1 \fR?\fIindex2\fR?
-.
-This command searches the text for a range of characters tagged with
-\fItagName\fR where the first character of the range is before the character
-at \fIindex1\fR and no earlier than the character at \fIindex2\fR (a range
-starting at \fIindex2\fR will be considered). If several matching ranges
-exist, the one closest to \fIindex1\fR is chosen. The command's return value
-is a list containing two elements, which are the index of the first character
-of the range and the index of the character just after the last one in the
-range. If no matching range is found then the return value is an empty string.
-If \fIindex2\fR is not given then it defaults to the beginning of the text.
-.TP
-\fIpathName\fB tag raise \fItagName \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
-.
-Changes the priority of tag \fItagName\fR so that it is just higher in
-priority than the tag whose name is \fIaboveThis\fR. If \fIaboveThis\fR is
-omitted, then \fItagName\fR's priority is changed to make it highest priority
-of all tags.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag ranges \fItagName\fR
-.
-Returns a list describing all of the ranges of text that have been tagged with
-\fItagName\fR. The first two elements of the list describe the first tagged
-range in the text, the next two elements describe the second range, and so on.
-The first element of each pair contains the index of the first character of
-the range, and the second element of the pair contains the index of the
-character just after the last one in the range. If there are no characters
-tagged with \fItag\fR then an empty string is returned.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag remove \fItagName index1 \fR?\fIindex2 index1 index2 ...\fR?
-.
-Remove the tag \fItagName\fR from all of the characters starting at
-\fIindex1\fR and ending just before \fIindex2\fR (the character at
-\fIindex2\fR is not affected). A single command may contain any number of
-\fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the
-tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no
-characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the
-file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command
-has no effect. This command returns an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBwindow \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.
-This command is used to manipulate embedded windows. The behavior of the
-command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBwindow\fR
-argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBwindow cget \fIindex option\fR
-.
-Returns the value of a configuration option for an embedded window.
-\fIIndex\fR identifies the embedded window, and \fIoption\fR specifies a
-particular configuration option, which must be one of the ones listed in the
-section \fBEMBEDDED WINDOWS\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBwindow configure \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options for an embedded window. If no
-\fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
-options for the embedded window at \fIindex\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no
-\fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option
-(this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value
-returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR
-pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given option(s) to have the
-given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. See
-\fBEMBEDDED WINDOWS\fR for information on the options that are supported.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBwindow create \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.
-This command creates a new window annotation, which will appear in the text at
-the position given by \fIindex\fR. Any number of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs may
-be specified to configure the annotation. See \fBEMBEDDED WINDOWS\fR for
-information on the options that are supported. Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBwindow names\fR
-.
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all windows currently embedded
-in \fIwindow\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fIoption args\fR
-.
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text
-in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
-.
-Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction
-between 0 and 1; together they describe the portion of the document's
-horizontal span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first
-element is .2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the text is off-screen to
-the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and 40% of the text is
-off-screen to the right. The fractions refer only to the lines that are
-actually visible in the window: if the lines in the window are all very short,
-so that they are entirely visible, the returned fractions will be 0 and 1,
-even if there are other lines in the text that are much wider than the window.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the horizontal span
-of the text is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0
-and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-.
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or
-\fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR
-must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
-.QW 2.0c
-or
-.QW 1i
-(the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given,
-pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or
-right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is
-\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is
-\fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR pixels. If \fInumber\fR is
-negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive
-then characters farther to the right become visible.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR?
-.
-This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in
-the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview\fR
-.
-Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions
-between 0 and 1. The first element gives the position of the first visible
-pixel of the first character (or image, etc) in the top line in the window,
-relative to the text as a whole (0.5 means it is halfway through the text, for
-example). The second element gives the position of the first pixel just after
-the last visible one in the bottom line of the window, relative to the text as
-a whole. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the
-\fB\-yscrollcommand\fR option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-.
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the pixel given by \fIfraction\fR
-appears at the top of the top line of the window. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction
-between 0 and 1; 0 indicates the first pixel of the first character in the
-text, 0.33 indicates the pixel that is one-third the way through the text; and
-so on. Values close to 1 will indicate values close to the last pixel in the
-text (1 actually refers to one pixel beyond the last pixel), but in such cases
-the widget will never scroll beyond the last pixel, and so a value of 1 will
-effectively be rounded back to whatever fraction ensures the last pixel is at
-the bottom of the window, and some other pixel is at the top.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-.
-This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or
-\fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR
-must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
-.QW 2.0c
-or
-.QW 1i
-(the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given,
-pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down
-by \fInumber\fR lines on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view
-adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view
-adjusts by \fInumber\fR pixels. If \fInumber\fR is negative then earlier
-positions in the text become visible; if it is positive then later positions
-in the text become visible.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fB\-pickplace\fR? \fIindex\fR
-.
-Changes the view in the widget's window to make \fIindex\fR visible. If the
-\fB\-pickplace\fR option is not specified then \fIindex\fR will appear at the
-top of the window. If \fB\-pickplace\fR is specified then the widget chooses
-where \fIindex\fR appears in the window:
-.RS
-.IP [1]
-If \fIindex\fR is already visible somewhere in the window then the command
-does nothing.
-.IP [2]
-If \fIindex\fR is only a few lines off-screen above the window then it will be
-positioned at the top of the window.
-.IP [3]
-If \fIindex\fR is only a few lines off-screen below the window then it will be
-positioned at the bottom of the window.
-.IP [4]
-Otherwise, \fIindex\fR will be centered in the window.
-.PP
-The \fB\-pickplace\fR option has been obsoleted by the \fIpathName \fBsee\fR
-widget command (\fIpathName \fBsee\fR handles both x- and y-motion to make a
-location visible, whereas the \fB\-pickplace\fR mode only handles motion in
-y).
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview \fInumber\fR
-.
-This command makes the first character on the line after the one given by
-\fInumber\fR visible at the top of the window. \fINumber\fR must be an
-integer. This command used to be used for scrolling, but now it is obsolete.
-.RE
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for texts that give them the following
-default behavior. In the descriptions below,
-.QW word
-is dependent on the value of the \fBtcl_wordchars\fR variable. See
-\fBtclvars\fR(n).
-.IP [1]
-Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor just before the
-character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the input focus to this widget,
-and clears any selection in the widget. Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes
-out a selection between the insertion cursor and the character under the
-mouse.
-.IP [2]
-Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse and
-positions the insertion cursor at the start of the word. Dragging after a
-double click will stroke out a selection consisting of whole words.
-.IP [3]
-Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the line under the mouse and
-positions the insertion cursor at the start of the line. Dragging after a
-triple click will stroke out a selection consisting of whole lines.
-.IP [4]
-The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 1
-while the Shift key is down; this will adjust the end of the selection that
-was nearest to the mouse cursor when button 1 was pressed. If the button is
-double-clicked before dragging then the selection will be adjusted in units of
-whole words; if it is triple-clicked then the selection will be adjusted in
-units of whole lines.
-.IP [5]
-Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will reposition the
-insertion cursor without affecting the selection.
-.IP [6]
-If any normal printing characters are typed, they are inserted at the point of
-the insertion cursor.
-.IP [7]
-The view in the widget can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2. If
-mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection is copied
-into the text at the position of the mouse cursor. The Insert key also inserts
-the selection, but at the position of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [8]
-If the mouse is dragged out of the widget while button 1 is pressed, the entry
-will automatically scroll to make more text visible (if there is more text
-off-screen on the side where the mouse left the window).
-.IP [9]
-The Left and Right keys move the insertion cursor one character to the left or
-right; they also clear any selection in the text. If Left or Right is typed
-with the Shift key down, then the insertion cursor moves and the selection is
-extended to include the new character. Control-Left and Control-Right move the
-insertion cursor by words, and Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move
-the insertion cursor by words and also extend the selection. Control-b and
-Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively. Meta-b and Meta-f
-behave the same as Control-Left and Control-Right, respectively.
-.IP [10]
-The Up and Down keys move the insertion cursor one line up or down and clear
-any selection in the text. If Up or Right is typed with the Shift key down,
-then the insertion cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the
-new character. Control-Up and Control-Down move the insertion cursor by
-paragraphs (groups of lines separated by blank lines), and Control-Shift-Up
-and Control-Shift-Down move the insertion cursor by paragraphs and also extend
-the selection. Control-p and Control-n behave the same as Up and Down,
-respectively.
-.IP [11]
-The Next and Prior keys move the insertion cursor forward or backwards by one
-screenful and clear any selection in the text. If the Shift key is held down
-while Next or Prior is typed, then the selection is extended to include the
-new character.
-.IP [12]
-Control-Next and Control-Prior scroll the view right or left by one page
-without moving the insertion cursor or affecting the selection.
-.IP [13]
-Home and Control-a move the insertion cursor to the beginning of its display
-line and clear any selection in the widget. Shift-Home moves the insertion
-cursor to the beginning of the display line and also extends the selection to
-that point.
-.IP [14]
-End and Control-e move the insertion cursor to the end of the display line and
-clear any selection in the widget. Shift-End moves the cursor to the end of
-the display line and extends the selection to that point.
-.IP [15]
-Control-Home and Meta-< move the insertion cursor to the beginning of the text
-and clear any selection in the widget. Control-Shift-Home moves the insertion
-cursor to the beginning of the text and also extends the selection to that
-point.
-.IP [16]
-Control-End and Meta-> move the insertion cursor to the end of the text and
-clear any selection in the widget. Control-Shift-End moves the cursor to the
-end of the text and extends the selection to that point.
-.IP [17]
-The Select key and Control-Space set the selection anchor to the position of
-the insertion cursor. They do not affect the current selection. Shift-Select
-and Control-Shift-Space adjust the selection to the current position of the
-insertion cursor, selecting from the anchor to the insertion cursor if there
-was not any selection previously.
-.IP [18]
-Control-/ selects the entire contents of the widget.
-.IP [19]
-Control-\e clears any selection in the widget.
-.IP [20]
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w copies the
-selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection. This
-action is carried out by the command \fBtk_textCopy\fR.
-.IP [21]
-The F20 key (labelled Cut on many Sun workstations) or Control-w copies the
-selection in the widget to the clipboard and deletes the selection. This
-action is carried out by the command \fBtk_textCut\fR. If there is no
-selection in the widget then these keys have no effect.
-.IP [22]
-The F18 key (labelled Paste on many Sun workstations) or Control-y inserts the
-contents of the clipboard at the position of the insertion cursor. This action
-is carried out by the command \fBtk_textPaste\fR.
-.IP [23]
-The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the widget. If there
-is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of the insertion
-cursor.
-.IP [24]
-Backspace and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one in the widget.
-If there is no selection, they delete the character to the left of the
-insertion cursor.
-.IP [25]
-Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [26]
-Meta-d deletes the word to the right of the insertion cursor.
-.IP [27]
-Control-k deletes from the insertion cursor to the end of its line; if the
-insertion cursor is already at the end of a line, then Control-k deletes the
-newline character.
-.IP [28]
-Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in front of the
-insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor.
-.IP [29]
-Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the insertion
-cursor.
-.IP [30]
-Control-x deletes whatever is selected in the text widget after copying it to
-the clipboard.
-.IP [31]
-Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of the
-insertion cursor.
-.IP [32]
-Control-z undoes the last edit action if the \fB\-undo\fR option is true.
-Does nothing otherwise.
-.IP [33]
-Control-Z (or Control-y on Windows) reapplies the last undone edit action if
-the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. Does nothing otherwise.
-.PP
-If the widget is disabled using the \fB\-state\fR option, then its view can
-still be adjusted and text can still be selected, but no insertion cursor will
-be displayed and no text modifications will take place.
-.PP
-The behavior of texts can be changed by defining new bindings for individual
-widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-.SH "KNOWN ISSUES"
-.SS "ISSUES CONCERNING CHARS AND INDICES"
-.PP
-Before Tk 8.5, the widget used the string
-.QW chars
-to refer to index positions (which included characters, embedded windows and
-embedded images). As of Tk 8.5 the text widget deals separately and correctly
-with
-.QW chars
-and
-.QW indices .
-For backwards compatibility, however, the index modifiers
-.QW "+N chars"
-and
-.QW "\-N chars"
-continue to refer to indices. One must use any of the full forms
-.QW "+N any chars"
-or
-.QW "\-N any chars"
-etc. to refer to actual character indices. This confusion may be fixed in a
-future release by making the widget correctly interpret
-.QW "+N chars"
-as a synonym for
-.QW "+N any chars" .
-.SS "PERFORMANCE ISSUES"
-.PP
-Text widgets should run efficiently under a variety of conditions. The text
-widget uses about 2-3 bytes of main memory for each byte of text, so texts
-containing a megabyte or more should be practical on most workstations. Text
-is represented internally with a modified B-tree structure that makes
-operations relatively efficient even with large texts. Tags are included in
-the B-tree structure in a way that allows tags to span large ranges or have
-many disjoint smaller ranges without loss of efficiency. Marks are also
-implemented in a way that allows large numbers of marks. In most cases it is
-fine to have large numbers of unique tags, or a tag that has many distinct
-ranges.
-.PP
-One performance problem can arise if you have hundreds or thousands of
-different tags that all have the following characteristics: the first and last
-ranges of each tag are near the beginning and end of the text, respectively,
-or a single tag range covers most of the text widget. The cost of adding and
-deleting tags like this is proportional to the number of other tags with the
-same properties. In contrast, there is no problem with having thousands of
-distinct tags if their overall ranges are localized and spread uniformly
-throughout the text.
-.PP
-Very long text lines can be expensive, especially if they have many marks and
-tags within them.
-.PP
-The display line with the insert cursor is redrawn each time the cursor
-blinks, which causes a steady stream of graphics traffic. Set the
-\fB\-insertofftime\fR attribute to 0 avoid this.
-.SS "KNOWN BUGS"
-.PP
-The \fIpathName \fBsearch \-regexp\fR sub-command attempts to perform
-sophisticated regexp matching across multiple lines in an efficient fashion
-(since Tk 8.5), examining each line individually, and then in small groups of
-lines, whether searching forwards or backwards. Under certain conditions the
-search result might differ from that obtained by applying the same regexp to
-the entire text from the widget in one go. For example, when searching with a
-greedy regexp, the widget will continue to attempt to add extra lines to the
-match as long as one of two conditions are true: either Tcl's regexp library
-returns a code to indicate a longer match is possible (but there are known
-bugs in Tcl which mean this code is not always correctly returned); or if each
-extra line added results in at least a partial match with the pattern. This
-means in the case where the first extra line added results in no match and
-Tcl's regexp system returns the incorrect code and adding a second extra line
-would actually match, the text widget will return the wrong result. In
-practice this is a rare problem, but it can occur, for example:
-.CS
-pack [\fBtext\fR .t]
-\&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\encccc\enbbbb\enaaaa\en"
-\&.t search \-regexp \-\- {(a+|b+\enc+\enb+)+\ena+} 1.0
-.CE
-will not find a match when one exists of 19 characters starting from the first
-.QW b .
-.PP
-Whenever one possible match is fully enclosed in another, the search command
-will attempt to ensure only the larger match is returned. When performing
-backwards regexp searches it is possible that Tcl will not always achieve
-this, in the case where a match is preceded by one or more short,
-non-overlapping matches, all of which are preceded by a large match which
-actually encompasses all of them. The search algorithm used by the widget does
-not look back arbitrarily far for a possible match which might cover large
-portions of the widget. For example:
-.CS
-pack [\fBtext\fR .t]
-\&.t insert 1.0 "aaaa\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\enbbbb\\n"
-\&.t search \-regexp \-backward \-\- {b+\en|a+\en(b+\en)+} end
-.CE
-matches at
-.QW 5.0
-when a true greedy match would match at
-.QW 1.0 .
-Similarly if we add \fB\-all\fR to this case, it matches at all of
-.QW 5.0 ,
-.QW 4.0 ,
-.QW 3.0
-and
-.QW 1.0 ,
-when really it should only match at
-.QW 1.0
-since that match encloses all the others.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-entry(n), scrollbar(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-text, widget, tkvars
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/tk.n b/tk8.6/doc/tk.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 1165b67..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/tk.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtk\fR command provides access to miscellaneous
-elements of Tk's internal state.
-Most of the information manipulated by this command pertains to the
-application as a whole, or to a screen or display, rather than to a
-particular window.
-The command can take any of a number of different forms
-depending on the \fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:
-.TP
-\fBtk appname \fR?\fInewName\fR?
-.
-If \fInewName\fR is not specified, this command returns the name
-of the application (the name that may be used in \fBsend\fR
-commands to communicate with the application).
-If \fInewName\fR is specified, then the name of the application
-is changed to \fInewName\fR.
-If the given name is already in use, then a suffix of the form
-.QW "\fB #2\fR"
-or
-.QW "\fB #3\fR"
-is appended in order to make the name unique.
-The command's result is the name actually chosen.
-\fInewName\fR should not start with a capital letter.
-This will interfere with option processing, since names starting with
-capitals are assumed to be classes;  as a result, Tk may not
-be able to find some options for the application.
-If sends have been disabled by deleting the \fBsend\fR command,
-this command will reenable them and recreate the \fBsend\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fBtk busy \fIsubcommand\fR ...
-.
-This command controls the marking of window hierarchies as
-.QW busy ,
-rendering them non-interactive while some other operation is proceeding. For
-more details see the \fBbusy\fR manual page.
-.TP
-\fBtk caret \fIwindow \fR?\fB\-x \fIx\fR? ?\fB\-y \fIy\fR? ?\fB\-height \fIheight\fR?
-.
-Sets and queries the caret location for the display of the specified
-Tk window \fIwindow\fR.  The caret is the per-display cursor location
-used for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft
-Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the over-the-spot
-XIM (X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows.  If no options are specified,
-the last values used for setting the caret are return in option-value pair
-format.  \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-y\fR represent window-relative coordinates, and
-\fB\-height\fR is the height of the current cursor location, or the height
-of the specified \fIwindow\fR if none is given.
-.TP
-\fBtk inactive \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fBreset\fR?
-.
-Returns a positive integer, the number of milliseconds since the last
-time the user interacted with the system. If the \fB\-displayof\fR
-option is given then the return value refers to the display of
-\fIwindow\fR; otherwise it refers to the display of the application's
-main window.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fBtk inactive\fR will return \-1, if querying the user inactive time
-is not supported by the system, and in safe interpreters.
-.PP
-If the literal string \fBreset\fR is given as an additional argument,
-the timer is reset and an empty string is returned. Resetting the
-inactivity time is forbidden in safe interpreters and will throw an
-error if tried.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtk fontchooser \fIsubcommand\fR ...
-Controls the Tk font selection dialog. For more details see the
-\fBfontchooser\fR manual page.
-.TP
-\fBtk scaling \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fInumber\fR?
-.
-Sets and queries the current scaling factor used by Tk to convert between
-physical units (for example, points, inches, or millimeters) and pixels.  The
-\fInumber\fR argument is a floating point number that specifies the number of
-pixels per point on \fIwindow\fR's display.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
-omitted, it defaults to the main window.  If the \fInumber\fR argument is
-omitted, the current value of the scaling factor is returned.
-.RS
-.PP
-A
-.QW point
-is a unit of measurement equal to 1/72 inch.  A scaling factor
-of 1.0 corresponds to 1 pixel per point, which is equivalent to a standard
-72 dpi monitor.  A scaling factor of 1.25 would mean 1.25 pixels per point,
-which is the setting for a 90 dpi monitor; setting the scaling factor to
-1.25 on a 72 dpi monitor would cause everything in the application to be
-displayed 1.25 times as large as normal.  The initial value for the scaling
-factor is set when the application starts, based on properties of the
-installed monitor, but it can be changed at any time.  Measurements made
-after the scaling factor is changed will use the new scaling factor, but it
-is undefined whether existing widgets will resize themselves dynamically to
-accommodate the new scaling factor.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtk useinputmethods \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIboolean\fR?
-.
-Sets and queries the state of whether Tk should use XIM (X Input Methods)
-for filtering events.  The resulting state is returned.  XIM is used in
-some locales (i.e., Japanese, Korean), to handle special input devices. This
-feature is only significant on X.  If XIM support is not available, this
-will always return 0.  If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults
-to the main window.  If the \fIboolean\fR argument is omitted, the current
-state is returned.  This is turned on by default for the main display.
-.TP
-\fBtk windowingsystem\fR
-.
-Returns the current Tk windowing system, one of
-\fBx11\fR (X11-based), \fBwin32\fR (MS Windows),
-or \fBaqua\fR (Mac OS X Aqua).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-busy(n), fontchooser(n), send(n), winfo(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application name, send
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/tk_mac.n b/tk8.6/doc/tk_mac.n
deleted file mode 100644
index f29ef2f..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/tk_mac.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,237 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2011 Kevin Walzer.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2011 Donal K. Fellows.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tk::mac n 8.6 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk::mac \- Access Mac-Specific Functionality on OS X from Tk
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::OpenDocument \fIfile...\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::OnHide\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::OnShow\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
-
-\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR
-
-\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
-\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR
-
-\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH "EVENT HANDLER CALLBACKS"
-.PP
-The Aqua/Mac OS X application environment defines a number of additional
-events that applications should respond to. These events are mapped by Tk to
-calls to commands in the \fB::tk::mac\fR namespace; unless otherwise noted, if
-the command is absent, no action will be taken.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::ShowPreferences\fR
-.
-The default Apple Event handler for kAEShowPreferences,
-.QW pref .
-The application menu
-.QW "Preferences"
-menu item is only enabled when this proc is defined. Typically this command is
-used to wrap a specific own preferences command, which pops up a preferences
-window. Something like:
-.RS
-.PP
-.CS
-proc ::tk::mac::ShowPreferences {} {
-    setPref
-}
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::OpenApplication\fR
-.
-If a proc of this name is defined, this proc fill fire when your application
-is intially opened. It is the default Apple Event handler for
-kAEOpenApplication,
-.QW oapp .
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::ReopenApplication\fR
-.
-If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
-kAEReopenApplication,
-.QW rapp ,
-the Apple Event sent when your application is opened when it is already
-running (e.g. by clicking its icon in the Dock). Here is a sample that raises
-a minimized window when the Dock icon is clicked:
-.RS
-.PP
-.CS
-proc ::tk::mac::ReopenApplication {} {
-    if {[wm state .] eq "withdrawn"} {
-        wm state . normal
-    } else {
-        wm deiconify .
-    }
-    raise .
-}
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::OpenDocument \fIfile...\fR
-.
-If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
-kAEOpenDocuments,
-.QW odoc ,
-the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to open one or more
-documents (e.g., by drag & drop onto the app or by opening a document of a
-type associated to the app). The proc should take as arguments paths to the
-files to be opened, like so:
-.RS
-.PP
-.CS
-proc ::tk::mac::OpenDocument {args} {
-    foreach f $args {my_open_document $f}
-}
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::PrintDocument \fIfile...\fR
-.
-If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
-kAEPrintDocuments,
-.QW pdoc ,
-the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to print one or more
-documents (e.g., via the Print menu item in the Finder).  It works the same
-way as \fBtk::mac::OpenDocument\fR in terms of arguments.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::Quit\fR
-.
-If a proc of this name is defined it is the default Apple Event handler for
-kAEQuitApplication,
-.QW quit ,
-the Apple Event sent when your application is asked to be quit, e.g. via the
-quit menu item in the application menu, the quit menu item in the Dock menu,
-or during a logout/restart/shutdown etc. If this is not defined, \fBexit\fR is
-called instead.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::OnHide\fR
-.
-If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppHidden
-event, e.g. via the hide menu item in the application or Dock menus.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::OnShow\fR
-.
-If defined, this is called when your application receives a kEventAppShown
-event, e.g. via the show all menu item in the application menu, or by clicking
-the Dock icon of a hidden application.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::ShowHelp\fR
-.
-Customizes behavior of Apple Help menu; if this procedure is not defined, the
-platform-specific standard Help menu item
-.QW "YourApp Help"
-performs the default Cocoa action of showing the Help Book configured in the
-application's Info.plist (or displaying an alert if no Help Book is set).
-.SH "ADDITIONAL DIALOGS"
-.PP
-The Aqua/Mac OS X defines additional dialogs that applications should
-support.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR
-.
-Brings the standard Cocoa about panel to the front, with all its information
-filled in from your application bundle files (standard about panel with no
-options specified). See Apple Technote TN2179 and the AppKit documentation for
--[NSApplication orderFrontStandardAboutPanelWithOptions:] for details on the
-Info.plist keys and app bundle files used by the about panel.
-.SH "SYSTEM CONFIGURATION"
-.PP
-There are a number of additional global configuration options that control the
-details of how Tk renders by default.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR
-.
-Preserves compatibility with older Tk/Aqua metrics; set to \fBfalse\fR for
-more native spacing.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::CGAntialiasLimit \fIlimit\fR
-.
-Sets the antialiasing limit; lines thinner that \fIlimit\fR pixels will not be
-antialiased. Integer, set to 0 by default, making all lines be antialiased.
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::antialiasedtext \fInumber\fR
-.
-Sets anti-aliased text.  Controls text antialiasing, possible values for
-\fInumber\fR are -1 (default, use system default for text AA), 0 (no text AA),
-1 (use text AA).
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::useThemedToplevel \fIboolean\fR
-.
-Sets toplevel windows to draw with the modern grayish/ pinstripe Mac
-background. Equivalent to configuring the toplevel with
-.QW "\fB\-background systemWindowHeaderBackground\fR" ,
-or to using a \fBttk::frame\fR.
-.SH "SUPPORT COMMANDS"
-.TP
-\fB::tk::mac::iconBitmap \fIname width height \-kind value\fR
-.
-Renders native icons and bitmaps in Tk applications (including any image file
-readable by NSImage). A native bitmap name is interpreted as follows (in
-order):
-.RS
-.IP \(bu 3
-predefined builtin 32x32 icon name (\fBstop\fR, \fBcaution\fR, \fBdocument\fR,
-etc.)
-.IP \(bu 3
-\fIname\fR, as defined by \fBtk::mac::iconBitmap\fR
-.IP \(bu 3
-NSImage named image name
-.IP \(bu 3
-NSImage url string
-.IP \(bu 3
-4-char OSType of IconServices icon
-.PP
-The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR arguments to \fBtk::mac::iconBitmap\fR define
-the dimensions of the image to create, and \fI\-kind\fR must be one of:
-.TP
-\fB\-file\fR
-.
-icon of file at given path
-.TP
-\fB\-fileType\fR
-.
-icon of given file type
-.TP
-\fB\-osType\fR
-.
-icon of given 4-char OSType file type
-.TP
-\fB\-systemType\fR
-.
-icon for given IconServices 4-char OSType
-.TP
-\fB\-namedImage\fR
-.
-named NSImage for given name
-.TP
-\fB\-imageFile\fR
-.
-image at given path
-.RE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n), wm(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-about dialog, antialiasing, Apple event, icon, NSImage
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/tkerror.n b/tk8.6/doc/tkerror.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 53cb0d1..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/tkerror.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH tkerror n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tkerror \- Command invoked to process background errors
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtkerror \fImessage\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Note: as of Tk 4.1 the \fBtkerror\fR command has been renamed to
-\fBbgerror\fR because the event loop (which is what usually invokes
-it) is now part of Tcl.  For backward compatibility
-the \fBbgerror\fR provided by the current Tk version still
-tries to call \fBtkerror\fR if there is one (or an auto loadable one),
-so old script defining that error handler should still work, but you
-should anyhow modify your scripts to use \fBbgerror\fR instead
-of \fBtkerror\fR because that support for the old name might vanish
-in the near future. If that call fails, \fBbgerror\fR
-posts a dialog showing the error and offering to see the stack trace
-to the user. If you want your own error management you should
-directly override \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR.
-Documentation for \fBbgerror\fR is available as part of Tcl's
-documentation.
-.SH KEYWORDS
-background error, reporting
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/tkvars.n b/tk8.6/doc/tkvars.n
deleted file mode 100644
index a80fd54..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/tkvars.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tkvars n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-geometry, tk_library, tk_patchLevel, tk_strictMotif, tk_version \- Variables used or set by Tk
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The following Tcl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times
-in its execution:
-.TP 15
-\fBtk_library\fR
-.
-This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library
-of Tcl scripts related to Tk.  These scripts include an initialization
-file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up,
-plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors
-for widgets.
-.RS
-.PP
-The initial value of \fBtcl_library\fR is set when Tk is added to
-an interpreter;  this is done by searching several different directories
-until one is found that contains an appropriate Tk startup script.
-If the \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR environment variable exists, then
-the directory it names is checked first.
-If \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR is not set or does not refer to an appropriate
-directory, then Tk checks several other directories based on a
-compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory,
-the location of the binary containing the application, and the current
-working directory.
-.PP
-The variable can be modified by an application to switch to a different
-library.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtk_patchLevel\fR
-.
-Contains a dot-separated sequence of decimal integers giving the
-current patch level for Tk.
-The patch level is incremented for each new release or patch, and
-it uniquely identifies an official version of Tk.
-.RS
-.PP
-This value is normally the same as the result of
-.QW "\fBpackage require\fR \fBTk\fR" .
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtk_strictMotif\fR
-.
-This variable is set to zero by default.
-If an application sets it to one, then Tk attempts to adhere as
-closely as possible to Motif look-and-feel standards.
-For example, active elements such as buttons and scrollbar
-sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them.
-Modern applications should not normally set this variable.
-.TP 15
-\fBtk_version\fR
-.
-Tk sets this variable in the interpreter for each application.
-The variable holds the current version number of the Tk
-library in the form \fImajor\fR.\fIminor\fR.  \fIMajor\fR and
-\fIminor\fR are integers.  The major version number increases in
-any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible
-(i.e. whenever existing Tk applications and scripts may have to change to
-work with the new release).  The minor version number increases with
-each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the
-major version number changes.
-.SS "INTERNAL AND DEBUGGING VARIABLES"
-.PP
-These variables should not normally be set by user code.
-.TP
-\fBtk::Priv\fR
-.
-This variable is an array containing several pieces of information
-that are private to Tk.  The elements of \fBtk::Priv\fR are used by
-Tk library procedures and default bindings.
-They should not be accessed by any code outside Tk.
-.TP
-\fBtk_textRedraw\fR
-.TP
-\fBtk_textRelayout\fR
-.
-These variables are set by text widgets when they have debugging
-turned on.  The values written to these variables can be used to
-test or debug text widget operations.  These variables are mostly
-used by Tk's test suite.
-.SH "OTHER GLOBAL VARIABLES"
-The following variables are only guaranteed to exist in \fBwish\fR
-executables; the Tk library does not define them itself but many Tk
-environments do.
-.TP 6
-\fBgeometry\fR
-.
-If set, contains the user-supplied geometry specification to use for
-the main Tk window.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-package(n), tclvars(n), wish(1)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-environment, text, variables, version
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/tkwait.n b/tk8.6/doc/tkwait.n
deleted file mode 100644
index a31aee7..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/tkwait.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtkwait variable \fIname\fR
-.sp
-\fBtkwait visibility \fIname\fR
-.sp
-\fBtkwait window \fIname\fR
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtkwait\fR command waits for one of several things to happen,
-then it returns without taking any other actions.
-The return value is always an empty string.
-If the first argument is \fBvariable\fR (or any abbreviation of
-it) then the second argument is the name of a global variable and the
-command waits for that variable to be modified.
-If the first argument is \fBvisibility\fR (or any abbreviation
-of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
-\fBtkwait\fR command waits for a change in its
-visibility state (as indicated by the arrival of a VisibilityNotify
-event).  This form is typically used to wait for a newly-created
-window to appear on the screen before taking some action.
-If the first argument is \fBwindow\fR (or any abbreviation
-of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
-\fBtkwait\fR command waits for that window to be destroyed.
-This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting
-with a dialog box before using the result of that interaction.
-.PP
-While the \fBtkwait\fR command is waiting it processes events in
-the normal fashion, so the application will continue to respond
-to user interactions.
-If an event handler invokes \fBtkwait\fR again, the nested call
-to \fBtkwait\fR must complete before the outer call can complete.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind(n), vwait(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-variable, visibility, wait, window
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/toplevel.n b/tk8.6/doc/toplevel.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 271d9f1..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/toplevel.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH toplevel n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-toplevel \- Create and manipulate 'toplevel' main and popup window widgets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtoplevel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.SO
-\-borderwidth	\-highlightcolor	\-pady
-\-cursor	\-highlightthickness	\-relief
-\-highlightbackground	\-padx	\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-background background Background
-This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option
-except that its value may also be specified as an empty string.
-In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
-no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
-and border.
-.OP \-class class Class
-Specifies a class for the window.
-This class will be used when querying the option database for
-the window's other options, and it will also be used later for
-other purposes such as bindings.
-The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-colormap colormap Colormap
-Specifies a colormap to use for the window.
-The value may be either \fBnew\fR, in which case a new colormap is
-created for the window and its children, or the name of another
-window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual
-as \fIpathName\fR), in which case the new window will use the colormap
-from the specified window.
-If the \fB\-colormap\fR option is not specified, the new window
-uses the default colormap of its screen.
-This option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-container container Container
-The value must be a boolean.  If true, it means that this window will
-be used as a container in which some other application will be embedded
-(for example, a Tk toplevel can be embedded using the \fB\-use\fR option).
-The window will support the appropriate window manager protocols for
-things like geometry requests.  The window should not have any
-children of its own in this application.
-This option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-.OP \-menu menu Menu
-Specifies a menu widget to be used as a menubar. On the Macintosh, the
-menubar will be displayed across the top of the main monitor. On
-Microsoft Windows and all UNIX platforms, the menu will appear across
-the toplevel window as part of the window dressing maintained by the
-window manager.
-.OP \-screen "" ""
-Specifies the screen on which to place the new window.
-Any valid screen name may be used, even one associated with a
-different display.
-Defaults to the same screen as its parent.
-This option is special in that it may not be specified via the option
-database, and it may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-use use Use
-This option is used for embedding. If the value is not an empty string,
-it must be the window identifier of a container window, specified as
-a hexadecimal string like the ones returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR
-command. The toplevel widget will be created as a child of the given
-container instead of the root window for the screen.  If the container
-window is in a Tk application, it must be a frame or toplevel widget for
-which the \fB\-container\fR option was specified.
-This option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-visual visual Visual
-Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the
-forms accepted by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR.
-If this option is not specified, the new window will use the default
-visual for its screen.
-The \fB\-visual\fR option may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR
-widget command.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies the desired width for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtoplevel\fR command creates a new toplevel widget (given
-by the \fIpathName\fR argument).  Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the toplevel such as its background color
-and relief.  The \fBtoplevel\fR command returns the
-path name of the new window.
-.PP
-A toplevel is similar to a frame except that it is created as a
-top-level window:  its X parent is the root window of a screen
-rather than the logical parent from its path name.  The primary
-purpose of a toplevel is to serve as a container for dialog boxes
-and other collections of widgets.  The only visible features
-of a toplevel are its background color and an optional 3-D border
-to make the toplevel appear raised or sunken.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The \fBtoplevel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose
-name is the same as the path name of the toplevel's window.  This
-command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-.CS
-\fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as
-the toplevel widget's path name.  \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs
-determine the exact behavior of the command.  The following
-commands are possible for toplevel widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtoplevel\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for
-information on the format of this list).  If \fIoption\fR is specified
-with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified).  If
-one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-\fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBtoplevel\fR
-command.
-.SH BINDINGS
-.PP
-When a new toplevel is created, it has no default event bindings:
-toplevels are not intended to be interactive.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-frame(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-toplevel, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_Geometry.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_Geometry.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 61015c5..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_Geometry.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,223 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-.TH Geometry 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Ttk_MakeBox, Ttk_PadBox, Ttk_ExpandBox, Ttk_PackBox, Ttk_StickBox, Ttk_PlaceBox, Ttk_BoxContains, Ttk_MakePadding, Ttk_UniformPadding, Ttk_AddPadding, Ttk_RelievePadding, Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj, Ttk_GetBorderFromObj, Ttk_GetStickyFromObj \- Tk themed geometry utilities
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tkTheme.h>\fR
-
-Ttk_Box
-\fBTtk_MakeBox\fR(int \fIx\fR, int \fIy\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR);
-
-Ttk_Box
-\fBTtk_PadBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, Ttk_Padding \fIpadding\fR);
-
-Ttk_Box
-\fBTtk_ExpandBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, Ttk_Padding \fIpadding\fR);
-
-Ttk_Box
-\fBTtk_PackBox\fR(Ttk_Box *\fIcavity\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, Ttk_Side \fIside\fR);
-
-Ttk_Box
-\fBTtk_StickBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, unsigned \fIsticky\fR);
-
-Ttk_Box
-\fBTtk_PlaceBox\fR(Ttk_Box *\fIcavity\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, Ttk_Side \fIside\fR, unsigned \fIsticky\fR);
-
-Ttk_Box
-\fBTtk_AnchorBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, Tk_Anchor \fIanchor\fR);
-
-Ttk_Padding
-\fBTtk_MakePadding\fR(short \fIleft\fR, short \fItop\fR, short \fIright\fR, short \fIbottom\fR);
-
-Ttk_Padding
-\fBTtk_UniformPadding\fR(short \fIborder\fR);
-
-Ttk_Padding
-\fBTtk_AddPadding\fR(Ttk_Padding \fIpadding1\fR, Ttk_Padding \fIpadding2\fR;
-
-Ttk_Padding
-\fBTtk_RelievePadding\fR(Ttk_Padding \fIpadding\fR, int \fIrelief\fR);
-
-int
-\fBTtk_BoxContains\fR(Ttk_Box \fIbox\fR, int \fIx\fR, int \fIy\fR);
-
-int
-\fBTtk_GetPaddingFromObj\fR(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR, Ttk_Padding *\fIpadding_rtn\fR);
-
-int
-\fBTtk_GetBorderFromObj\fR(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR, Ttk_Padding *\fIpadding_rtn\fR);
-
-int
-\fBTtk_GetStickyFromObj\fR(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR, int *\fIsticky_rtn\fR);
-.fi
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Tk_Anchor anchor in
-One of the symbolic constants \fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_NE\fR,
-etc.  See \fITk_GetAnchorFromObj(3)\fR.
-.AP "Ttk_Box *" cavity in/out
-A rectangular region from which a parcel is allocated.
-.AP short border in
-Extra padding (in pixels) to add uniformly to each side of a region.
-.AP short bottom in
-Extra padding (in pixels) to add to the bottom of a region.
-.AP Ttk_Box box in
-.AP "Ttk_Box *" box_rtn out
-Specifies a rectangular region.
-.AP int height in
-The height in pixels of a region.
-.AP "Tcl_Interp *" interp in
-Used to store error messages.
-.AP int left in
-Extra padding (in pixels) to add to the left side of a region.
-.AP "Tcl_Obj *" objPtr in
-String value contains a symbolic name
-to be converted to an enumerated value or bitmask.
-Internal rep may be be modified to cache corresponding value.
-.AP Ttk_Padding padding in
-.AP "Ttk_Padding *" padding_rtn out
-Extra padding to add on the inside of a region.
-.AP Ttk_Box parcel in
-A rectangular region, allocated from a cavity.
-.AP int relief in
-One of the standard Tk relief options
-(TK_RELIEF_RAISED, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN, etc.).
-See \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR.
-.AP short right in
-Extra padding (in pixels) to add to the right side of a region.
-.AP Ttk_Side side in
-One of \fBTTK_SIDE_LEFT\fR, \fBTTK_SIDE_TOP\fR,
-\fBTTK_SIDE_RIGHT\fR, or \fBTTK_SIDE_BOTTOM\fR.
-.AP unsigned sticky in
-A bitmask containing one or more of the bits
-\fBTTK_STICK_W\fR (west, or left),
-\fBTTK_STICK_E\fR (east, or right,
-\fBTTK_STICK_N\fR (north, or top), and
-\fBTTK_STICK_S\fR (south, or bottom).
-\fBTTK_FILL_X\fR is defined as a synonym for (TTK_STICK_W|TTK_STICK_E),
-\fBTTK_FILL_Y\fR is a synonym for (TTK_STICK_N|TTK_STICK_S),
-and  \fBTTK_FILL_BOTH\fR and \fBTTK_STICK_ALL\fR
-are synonyms for (TTK_FILL_X|TTK_FILL_Y).
-See also: \fIgrid(n)\fR.
-.AP Tk_Window tkwin in
-Window whose screen geometry determines
-the conversion between absolute units and pixels.
-.AP short top in
-Extra padding at the top of a region.
-.AP int width in
-The width in pixels of a region.
-.AP int x in
-X coordinate of upper-left corner of region.
-.AP int y in
-Y coordinate of upper-left corner of region.
-.BE
-.SH "BOXES"
-.PP
-The \fBTtk_Box\fR structure represents a rectangular region of a window:
-.CS
-typedef struct {
-    int \fIx\fR;
-    int \fIy\fR;
-    int \fIwidth\fR;
-    int \fIheight\fR;
-} \fBTtk_Box\fR;
-.CE
-All coordinates are relative to the window.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_MakeBox\fR is a convenience routine that constructs
-a \fBTtk_Box\fR structure representing a region \fIwidth\fR pixels
-wide, \fIheight\fR pixels tall, at the specified \fIx, y\fR coordinates.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_PadBox\fR returns a new box located inside the specified \fIparcel\fR,
-shrunken according to the left, top, right, and bottom margins
-specified by \fIpadding\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_ExpandBox\fR is the inverse of \fBTtk_PadBox\fR:
-it returns a new box surrounding the specified \fIparcel\fR,
-expanded  according to the left, top, right, and bottom margins
-specified by \fIpadding\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_PackBox\fR allocates a parcel \fIwidth\fR by \fIheight\fR
-pixels wide on the specified \fIside\fR of the \fIcavity\fR,
-and shrinks the \fIcavity\fR accordingly.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_StickBox\fR places a box with the requested \fIwidth\fR
-and \fIheight\fR inside the \fIparcel\fR according to the
-\fIsticky\fR bits.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_PlaceBox\fR combines \fBTtk_PackBox\fR and \fBTtk_StickBox\fR:
-it allocates a parcel on the specified \fIside\fR of the \fIcavity\fR,
-places a box of the requested size inside the parcel according to \fIsticky\fR,
-and shrinks the \fIcavity\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_AnchorBox\fR places a box with the requested \fIwidth\fR
-and \fIheight\fR inside the \fIparcel\fR according to the
-specified \fIanchor\fR option.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_BoxContains\fR tests if the specified \fIx, y\fR coordinate
-lies within the rectangular region \fIbox\fR.
-.SH "PADDDING"
-.PP
-The \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure is used to represent
-borders, internal padding, and external margins:
-.CS
-typedef struct {
-    short \fIleft\fR;
-    short \fItop\fR;
-    short \fIright\fR;
-    short \fIbottom\fR;
-} \fBTtk_Padding\fR;
-.CE
-.PP
-\fBTtk_MakePadding\fR is a convenience routine that constructs
-a \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure with the specified left, top, right, and bottom
-components.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_UniformPadding\fR constructs a \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure
-with all components equal to the specified \fIborder\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_AddPadding\fR adds two \fBTtk_Padding\fRs together
-and returns a combined padding containing the sum of the
-individual padding components.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_RelievePadding\fR
-adds an extra 2 pixels of padding to \fIpadding\fR
-according to the specified \fIrelief\fR.
-If \fIrelief\fR is \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR,
-adds two pixels at the top and left
-so the inner region is shifted down and to the left.
-If it is \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, adds two pixels
-at the bottom and right so
-the inner region is shifted up and to the right.
-Otherwise, adds 1 pixel on all sides.
-This is typically used in element geometry procedures to simulate a
-.QW pressed-in
-look for pushbuttons.
-.SH "CONVERSION ROUTINES"
-.PP
-\fBTtk_GetPaddingFromObj\fR converts the string in \fIobjPtr\fR
-to a \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure.
-The string representation is a list of
-up to four length specifications
-.QW "\fIleft top right bottom\fR" .
-If fewer than four elements are specified,
-\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
-\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
-\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
-See \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(3)\fR for the syntax of length specifications.
-.PP
-\fBTtk_GetBorderFromObj\fR is the same as \fBTtk_GetPaddingFromObj\fR
-except that the lengths are specified as integers
-(i.e., resolution-dependant values like \fI3m\fR are not allowed).
-.PP
-\fBTtk_GetStickyFromObj\fR converts the string in \fIobjPtr\fR
-to a \fIsticky\fR bitmask.  The string contains zero or more
-of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR, or \fBw\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tk_GetReliefFromObj(3), Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(3), Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(3)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-geometry, padding, margins, box, region, sticky, relief
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_Theme.3 b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_Theme.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 8031b8a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_Theme.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH Ttk_CreateTheme 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Ttk_CreateTheme, Ttk_GetTheme, Ttk_GetDefaultTheme, Ttk_GetCurrentTheme \- create and use Tk themes.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-Ttk_Theme Ttk_CreateTheme(\fIinterp\fR, \fIname\fR, \fIparentTheme\fR);
-Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(\fIinterp\fR, \fIname\fR);
-Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(\fIinterp\fR);
-Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(\fIinterp\fR);
-.fi
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP "Tcl_Interp *" interp in
-The Tcl interpreter in which to register/query available themes.
-.AP "Ttk_Theme" parentTheme in
-Fallback or parent theme from which the new theme will
-inherit elements and layouts.
-.AP "const char *" name in
-The name of the theme.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" TODO - Document these functions better!
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Ttk_RegisterLayout, Ttk_BuildLayout
-.\" .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_button.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_button.n
deleted file mode 100644
index b84ca48..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_button.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::button n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::button \- Widget that issues a command when pressed
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image,
-and evaluates a command when pressed.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-compound	\-cursor
-\-image	\-state	\-style
-\-takefocus	\-text	\-textvariable
-\-underline	\-width
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-A script to evaluate when the widget is invoked.
-.OP \-default default Default
-May be set to one of  \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR.
-In a dialog box, one button may be designated the
-.QW default
-button (meaning, roughly,
-.QW "the one that gets invoked when the user presses <Enter>" ).
-\fBactive\fR indicates that this is currently the default button;
-\fBnormal\fR means that it may become the default button, and
-\fBdisabled\fR means that it is not defaultable.
-The default is \fBnormal\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-Depending on the theme, the default button may be displayed
-with an extra highlight ring, or with a different border color.
-.RE
-.OP \-width width Width
-If greater than zero, specifies how much space, in character widths,
-to allocate for the text label.
-If less than zero, specifies a minimum width.
-If zero or unspecified, the natural width of the text label is used.
-Note that some themes may specify a non-zero \fB\-width\fR
-in the style.
-.\" Not documented -- may go away
-.\" .OP \-padding padding Padding
-.\" .OP \-foreground foreground Foreground
-.\" .OP \-font font Font
-.\" .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
-.\" .OP \-relief relief Relief
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-In addition to the standard
-\fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR
-commands, buttons support the following additional widget commands:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR
-Invokes the command associated with the button.
-.SH "STANDARD STYLES"
-.PP
-\fBTtk::button\fR widgets support the \fBToolbutton\fR style in all standard
-themes, which is useful for creating widgets for toolbars.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY OPTIONS"
-.OP \-state state State
-May be set to \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR to control the
-\fBdisabled\fR state bit. This is a
-.QW write-only
-option: setting it changes the widget state, but the \fBstate\fR
-widget command does not affect the state option.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), button(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, button, default, command
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_checkbutton.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_checkbutton.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ed79f5a..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_checkbutton.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::checkbutton n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::checkbutton \- On/off widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::checkbutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-A \fBttk::checkbutton\fR widget is used to show or change a setting.
-It has two states, selected and deselected.
-The state of the checkbutton may be linked to a Tcl variable.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-compound	\-cursor
-\-image	\-state	\-style
-\-takefocus	\-text	\-textvariable
-\-underline	\-width
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-A Tcl script to execute whenever the widget is invoked.
-.OP \-offvalue offValue OffValue
-The value to store in the associated \fB\-variable\fR
-when the widget is deselected.  Defaults to \fB0\fR.
-.OP \-onvalue onValue OnValue
-The value to store in the associated \fB\-variable\fR
-when the widget is selected.  Defaults to \fB1\fR.
-.OP \-variable variable Variable
-The name of a global variable whose value is linked to the widget.
-Defaults to the widget pathname if not specified.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-In addition to the standard
-\fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR
-commands, checkbuttons support the following additional
-widget commands:
-.TP
-\fIpathname\fB invoke\fR
-Toggles between the selected and deselected states
-and evaluates the associated \fB\-command\fR.
-If the widget is currently selected, sets the \fB\-variable\fR
-to the \fB\-offvalue\fR and deselects the widget;
-otherwise, sets the \fB\-variable\fR to the \fB\-onvalue\fR
-Returns the result of the \fB\-command\fR.
-.\" Missing: select, deselect, toggle
-.\" Are these useful?  They don't invoke the -command
-.\" Missing: flash.  This is definitely not useful.
-.SH "WIDGET STATES"
-.PP
-The widget does not respond to user input if the \fBdisabled\fR state is set.
-The widget sets the \fBselected\fR state whenever
-the linked \fB\-variable\fR is set to the widget's \fB\-onvalue\fR,
-and clears it otherwise.
-The widget sets the \fBalternate\fR state whenever the
-linked \fB\-variable\fR is unset.
-(The \fBalternate\fR state may be used to indicate a
-.QW tri-state
-or
-.QW indeterminate
-selection.)
-.SH "STANDARD STYLES"
-.PP
-\fBTtk::checkbutton\fR widgets support the \fBToolbutton\fR style in all
-standard themes, which is useful for creating widgets for toolbars.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::radiobutton(n), checkbutton(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, button, toggle, check, option
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_combobox.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_combobox.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e5b3fc..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_combobox.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::combobox n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::combobox \- text field with popdown selection list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::combobox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::combobox\fR combines a text field with a pop-down list of values;
-the user may select the value of the text field from among the
-values in the list.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-takefocus
-\-style
-.SE
-.\" ALSO: Other entry widget options
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection
-Boolean value.
-If set, the widget selection is linked to the X selection.
-.OP \-justify justify Justify
-Specifies how the text is aligned within the widget.
-Must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies the height of the pop-down listbox, in rows.
-.OP \-postcommand postCommand PostCommand
-A Tcl script to evaluate immediately before displaying the listbox.
-The \fB\-postcommand\fR script may specify the \fB\-values\fR to display.
-.OP \-state state State
-One of \fBnormal\fR, \fBreadonly\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR.
-In the \fBreadonly\fR state,
-the value may not be edited directly, and
-the user can only select one of the \fB\-values\fR from the
-dropdown list.
-In the \fBnormal\fR state,
-the text field is directly editable.
-In the \fBdisabled\fR state, no interaction is possible.
-.OP \-textvariable textVariable TextVariable
-Specifies the name of a global variable whose value is linked
-to the widget value.
-Whenever the variable changes value the widget value is updated,
-and vice versa.
-.OP \-values values Values
-Specifies the list of values to display in the drop-down listbox.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window,
-in average-size characters of the widget's font.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The following subcommands are possible for combobox widgets:
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-'\"Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-'\"Modify or query widget options.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcurrent\fR ?\fInewIndex\fR?
-If \fInewIndex\fR is supplied, sets the combobox value
-to the element at position \fInewIndex\fR in the list of \fB\-values\fR.
-Otherwise, returns the index of the current value in the list of
-\fB\-values\fR or \fB\-1\fR if the current value does not appear in the list.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR
-Returns the current value of the combobox.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-'\"Returns the name of the element at position \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstateSpec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-'\"Test the widget state.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset\fR \fIvalue\fR
-Sets the value of the combobox to \fIvalue\fR.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
-'\"Modify or query the widget state.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.PP
-The combobox widget also supports the following \fBttk::entry\fR
-widget subcommands (see \fIttk::entry(n)\fR for details):
-.DS
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-\fBbbox\fR	\fBdelete\fR	\fBicursor\fR
-\fBindex\fR	\fBinsert\fR	\fBselection\fR
-\fBxview\fR
-.DE
-The combobox widget also supports the following generic \fBttk::widget\fR
-widget subcommands (see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details):
-.DS
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-\fBcget\fR	\fBconfigure\fR	\fBidentify\fR
-\fBinstate\fR	\fBstate\fR
-.DE
-.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-.PP
-The combobox widget generates a \fB<<ComboboxSelected>>\fR virtual event
-when the user selects an element from the list of values.
-If the selection action unposts the listbox,
-this event is delivered after the listbox is unposted.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::entry(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-choice, entry, list box, text box, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_entry.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_entry.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 984e957..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_entry.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,470 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::entry n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::entry \- Editable text field widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::entry\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-An \fBttk::entry\fR widget displays a one-line text string and
-allows that string to be edited by the user.
-The value of the string may be linked to a Tcl variable
-with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option.
-Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the
-standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-style
-\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection
-A boolean value specifying whether or not
-a selection in the widget should be linked to the X selection.
-If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects
-the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any
-widget selection, and the widget will respond to selection retrieval
-requests when it has a selection.
-.\" MAYBE: .OP \-font font Font
-.\" MAYBE: .OP \-foreground foreground Foreground
-.\" MAYBE: .OP \-insertbackground insertBackground Foreground
-.\" MAYBE: .OP \-insertwidth insertWidth InsertWidth
-.OP \-invalidcommand invalidCommand InvalidCommand
-A script template to evaluate whenever the \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns 0.
-See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more information.
-.OP \-justify justify Justify
-Specifies how the text is aligned within the entry widget.
-One of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR.
-.\" MAYBE: .OP \-selectbackground selectBackground Foreground
-.\" MAYBE: .OP \-selectborderwidth selectBorderWidth BorderWidth
-.\" MAYBE: .OP \-selectforeground selectForeground Background
-.OP \-show show Show
-If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry
-are not displayed in the window.
-Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as
-the first character in the value of this option, such as
-.QW *
-or a bullet.
-This is useful, for example, if the entry is to be used to enter
-a password.
-If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the
-information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents
-of the entry.
-.OP \-state state State
-Compatibility option; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details.
-Specifies one of three states for the entry,
-\fBnormal\fR, \fBdisabled\fR, or \fBreadonly\fR.
-See \fBWIDGET STATES\fR, below.
-.OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable whose value is linked
-to the entry widget's contents.
-Whenever the variable changes value, the widget's contents are updated,
-and vice versa.
-.OP \-validate validate Validate
-Specifies the mode in which validation should operate:
-\fBnone\fR, \fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR.
-Default is \fBnone\fR, meaning that validation is disabled.
-See \fBVALIDATION\fR below.
-.OP \-validatecommand validateCommand ValidateCommand
-A script template to evaluate whenever validation is triggered.
-If set to the empty string (the default), validation is disabled.
-The script must return a boolean value.
-See \fBVALIDATION\fR below.
-.OP \-width width Width
-Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window,
-in average-size characters of the widget's font.
-.\" Not in ttk: If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks a
-.\" Not in ttk: size just large enough to hold its current text.
-.SH NOTES
-.PP
-A portion of the entry may be selected as described below.
-If an entry is exporting its selection (see the \fB\-exportselection\fR
-option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols for handling the
-selection;  entry selections are available as type \fBSTRING\fR.
-Entries also observe the standard Tk rules for dealing with the
-input focus.  When an entry has the input focus it displays an
-\fIinsert cursor\fR to indicate where new characters will be
-inserted.
-.PP
-Entries are capable of displaying strings that are too long to
-fit entirely within the widget's window.  In this case, only a
-portion of the string will be displayed;  commands described below
-may be used to change the view in the window.  Entries use
-the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR mechanism for interacting with
-scrollbars (see the description of the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option
-for details).
-.SH "INDICES"
-.PP
-Many of the \fBentry\fR widget commands take one or more indices as
-arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the entry's
-string, in any of the following ways:
-.IP \fInumber\fR
-Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
-to the first character in the string.
-.IP \fB@\fInumber\fR
-In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the
-entry's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
-For example,
-.QW \fB@0\fR
-indicates the left-most character in the window.
-.IP \fBend\fR
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string.
-This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
-of the entry's string.
-.IP \fBinsert\fR
-Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
-insert cursor.
-.IP \fBsel.first\fR
-Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
-use this form if the selection is not in the entry window.
-.IP \fBsel.last\fR
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
-It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the
-entry window.
-.LP
-Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g.\|
-.QW \fBe\fR
-or
-.QW \fBsel.l\fR .
-In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the
-nearest legal value.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The following subcommands are possible for entry widgets:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
-character given by \fIindex\fR.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
-the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
-(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
-the width and height of the character, in pixels.
-The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
-of the window.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR
-'\"Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-'\"Modify or query widget options.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR?
-Delete one or more elements of the entry.
-\fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and
-\fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last
-one to delete.
-If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1,
-i.e. a single character is deleted.
-This command returns the empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR
-Returns the entry's string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR
-Arrange for the insert cursor to be displayed just before the character
-given by \fIindex\fR.  Returns the empty string.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-'\"Returns the name of the element at position \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR,
-'\"or the empty string if the coordinates are outside the window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR
-Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR
-Insert \fIstring\fR just before the character
-indicated by \fIindex\fR.  Returns the empty string.
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-'\"Test the widget state.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR
-This command is used to adjust the selection within an entry.  It
-has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR
-Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.
-If the selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect.
-Returns the empty string.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection present\fR
-Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry,
-0 if nothing is selected.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart\fR \fIend\fR
-Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
-the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just
-before \fIend\fR.
-If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an
-earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared.
-.RE
-'\".TP
-'\"\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
-'\"Modify or query the widget state.
-'\"See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR
-Force revalidation, independent of the conditions specified
-by the \fB\-validate\fR option.
-Returns 0 if validation fails, 1 if it succeeds.
-Sets or clears the \fBinvalid\fR state accordingly.
-See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more details.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR
-option.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR
-is displayed at the left edge of the window.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the
-way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
-\fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-\fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR.
-\fINumber\fR must be an integer.
-\fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR.
-'\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that.
-If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by
-\fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display;  if it is
-\fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls.
-If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-.RE
-.PP
-The entry widget also supports the following generic \fBttk::widget\fR
-widget subcommands (see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details):
-.DS
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-\fBcget\fR	\fBconfigure\fR	\fBidentify\fR
-\fBinstate\fR	\fBstate\fR
-.DE
-.SH VALIDATION
-.PP
-The \fB\-validate\fR, \fB\-validatecommand\fR, and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR
-options are used to enable entry widget validation.
-.SS "VALIDATION MODES"
-.PP
-There are two main validation modes: \fIprevalidation\fR,
-in which the \fB\-validatecommand\fR is evaluated prior to each edit
-and the return value is used to determine whether to accept
-or reject the change;
-and \fIrevalidation\fR, in which the \fB\-validatecommand\fR is
-evaluated to determine whether the current value is valid.
-.PP
-The \fB\-validate\fR option determines when validation occurs;
-it may be set to any of the following values:
-.RS
-.IP \fBnone\fR
-Default.  This means validation will only occur when
-specifically requested by the \fBvalidate\fR widget command.
-.IP \fBkey\fR
-The entry will be prevalidated prior to each edit
-(specifically, whenever the \fBinsert\fR or \fBdelete\fR
-widget commands are called).
-If prevalidation fails, the edit is rejected.
-.IP \fBfocus\fR
-The entry is revalidated when the entry receives or loses focus.
-.IP \fBfocusin\fR
-The entry is revalidated when the entry receives focus.
-.IP \fBfocusout\fR
-The entry is revalidated when the entry loses focus.
-.IP \fBall\fR
-Validation is performed for all above conditions.
-.RE
-.PP
-The \fB\-invalidcommand\fR is evaluated whenever
-the \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns a false value.
-.PP
-The \fB\-validatecommand\fR and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR
-may modify the entry widget's value
-via the widget \fBinsert\fR or \fBdelete\fR commands,
-or by setting the linked \fB\-textvariable\fR.
-If either does so during prevalidation,
-then the edit is rejected
-regardless of the value returned by the \fB\-validatecommand\fR.
-.PP
-If \fB\-validatecommand\fR is empty (the default),
-validation always succeeds.
-.SS "VALIDATION SCRIPT SUBSTITUTIONS"
-.PP
-It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the
-\fB\-validatecommand\fR and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR,
-just as in a \fBbind\fR script.
-The following substitutions are recognized:
-.RS
-.IP \fB%d\fR
-Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR prevalidation,
-0 for \fBdelete\fR prevalidation,
-or \-1 for revalidation.
-.IP \fB%i\fR
-Index of character string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1.
-.IP \fB%P\fR
-In prevalidation, the new value of the entry if the edit is accepted.
-In revalidation, the current value of the entry.
-.IP \fB%s\fR
-The current value of entry prior to editing.
-.IP \fB%S\fR
-The text string being inserted/deleted, if any, {} otherwise.
-.IP \fB%v\fR
-The current value of the \fB\-validate\fR option.
-.IP \fB%V\fR
-The validation condition that triggered the callback
-(\fBkey\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, or \fBforced\fR).
-.IP \fB%W\fR
-The name of the entry widget.
-.RE
-.SS "DIFFERENCES FROM TK ENTRY WIDGET VALIDATION"
-.PP
-The standard Tk entry widget automatically disables validation
-(by setting \fB\-validate\fR to \fBnone\fR)
-if the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR modifies
-the entry's value.
-The Tk themed entry widget only disables validation if one
-of the validation scripts raises an error, or if \fB\-validatecommand\fR
-does not return a valid boolean value.
-(Thus, it is not necessary to re-enable validation after
-modifying the entry value in a validation script).
-.PP
-In addition, the standard entry widget invokes validation whenever the linked
-\fB\-textvariable\fR is modified; the Tk themed entry widget does not.
-.SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS"
-.PP
-The entry widget's default bindings enable the following behavior.
-In the descriptions below,
-.QW word
-refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or
-.QW _
-characters, or any single character other than these.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insert cursor
-just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the
-input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget.
-Dragging with mouse button 1 down strokes out a selection between
-the insert cursor and the character under the mouse.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse
-and positions the insert cursor at the end of the word.
-Dragging after a double click strokes out a selection consisting
-of whole words.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects all of the text in the
-entry and positions the insert cursor at the end of the line.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse
-button 1 while the Shift key is down.
-If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection
-will be adjusted in units of whole words.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will position the
-insert cursor in the entry without affecting the selection.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-If any normal printing characters are typed in an entry, they are
-inserted at the point of the insert cursor.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The view in the entry can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2.
-If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection
-is copied into the entry at the position of the mouse cursor.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-If the mouse is dragged out of the entry on the left or right sides
-while button 1 is pressed, the entry will automatically scroll to
-make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side
-where the mouse left the window).
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The Left and Right keys move the insert cursor one character to the
-left or right;  they also clear any selection in the entry.
-If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion
-cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-Left and Control-Right move the insert cursor by words, and
-Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insert cursor
-by words and also extend the selection.
-Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The Home key and Control-a move the insert cursor to the
-beginning of the entry and clear any selection in the entry.
-Shift-Home moves the insert cursor to the beginning of the entry
-and extends the selection to that point.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The End key and Control-e move the insert cursor to the
-end of the entry and clear any selection in the entry.
-Shift-End moves the cursor to the end and extends the selection
-to that point.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Control-/ selects all the text in the entry.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Control-\e clears any selection in the entry.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The standard Tk <<Cut>>, <<Copy>>, <<Paste>>, and <<Clear>>
-virtual events operate on the selection in the expected manner.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the entry.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of
-the insert cursor.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-The BackSpace key and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one
-in the entry.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the left of
-the insert cursor.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insert cursor.
-.IP \0\(bu 4
-Control-k deletes all the characters to the right of the insertion
-cursor.
-.SH "WIDGET STATES"
-.PP
-In the \fBdisabled\fR state,
-the entry cannot be edited and the text cannot be selected.
-In the \fBreadonly\fR state,
-no insert cursor is displayed and
-the entry cannot be edited
-(specifically: the \fBinsert\fR and \fBdelete\fR commands have no effect).
-The \fBdisabled\fR state is the same as \fBreadonly\fR,
-and in addition text cannot be selected.
-.PP
-Note that changes to the linked \fB\-textvariable\fR will
-still be reflected in the entry, even if it is disabled or readonly.
-.PP
-Typically, the text is
-.QW grayed-out
-in the \fBdisabled\fR state,
-and a different background is used in the \fBreadonly\fR state.
-.PP
-The entry widget sets the \fBinvalid\fR state if revalidation fails,
-and clears it whenever validation succeeds.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), entry(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-entry, widget, text field
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_frame.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_frame.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d2bd745..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_frame.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2005 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::frame n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::frame \- Simple container widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::frame\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::frame\fR widget is a container, used to group other widgets
-together.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-padding	\-style
-\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-borderwidth borderWidth BorderWidth
-The desired width of the widget border.  Defaults to 0.
-.OP \-relief relief Relief
-One of the standard Tk border styles:
-\fBflat\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBridge\fR,
-\fBsolid\fR, or \fBsunken\fR.
-Defaults to \fBflat\fR.
-.OP \-width width Width
-If specified, the widget's requested width in pixels.
-.OP \-height height Height
-If specified, the widget's requested height in pixels.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-Supports the standard widget commands
-\fBconfigure\fR, \fBcget\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR;
-see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Note that if the \fBpack\fR, \fBgrid\fR, or other geometry managers
-are used to manage the children of the \fBframe\fR,
-by the GM's requested size will normally take precedence
-over the \fBframe\fR widget's \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR options.
-\fBpack propagate\fR and \fBgrid propagate\fR can be used
-to change this.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::labelframe(n), frame(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, frame, container
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_image.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_image.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bc1dd3f..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_image.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk_image n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk_image \- Define an element based on an image
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::style element create \fIname\fR \fBimage\fR \fIimageSpec\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fIimage\fR element factory creates a new element
-in the current theme whose visual appearance is determined
-by Tk images.
-\fIimageSpec\fP is a list of one or more elements.
-The first element is the default image name.
-The rest of the list is a sequence of \fIstatespec / value\fR
-pairs specifying other images to use when the element is
-in a particular state or combination of states.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.PP
-Valid \fIoptions\fR are:
-.TP
-\fB\-border\fR \fIpadding\fR
-\fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers, specifying
-the left, top, right, and bottom borders, respectively.
-If fewer than four elements are specified,
-\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
-\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
-\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
-In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right border;
-a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical border;
-a single number specifies the same border all the way around the element.
-See \fBIMAGE STRETCHING\fR, below.
-.TP
-\fB\-height \fIheight\fR
-Specifies a minimum height for the element.
-If less than zero, the base image's height is used as a default.
-.TP
-\fB\-padding\fR \fIpadding\fR
-Specifies the element's interior padding.
-The padding is a list of up to four length specifications
-\fIleft top right bottom\fR.
-If fewer than four elements are specified,
-\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
-\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
-\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
-In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding;
-a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding;
-a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget.
-Defaults to \fB\-border\fR if not specified.
-.TP
-\fB\-sticky\fR \fIspec\fR
-Specifies how the image is placed within the final parcel.
-\fIspec\fR contains zero or more characters
-.QW n ,
-.QW s ,
-.QW w ,
-or
-.QW e .
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIwidth\fR
-Specifies a minimum width for the element.
-If less than zero, the base image's width is used as a default.
-.SH "IMAGE STRETCHING"
-.PP
-If the element's allocated parcel is larger than the image,
-the image will be placed in the parcel based on the \fB\-sticky\fR option.
-If the image needs to stretch horizontally (i.e., \fB\-sticky ew\fR)
-or vertically (\fB\-sticky ns\fR),
-subregions of the image are replicated to fill the parcel
-based on the \fB\-border\fR option.
-The \fB\-border\fR divides the image into 9 regions:
-four fixed corners, top and left edges (which may be tiled horizontally),
-left and right edges (which may be tiled vertically),
-and the central area (which may be tiled in both directions).
-.SH "EXAMPLE"
-.PP
-.CS
-set img1 [image create photo \-file button.png]
-set img2 [image create photo \-file button-pressed.png]
-set img3 [image create photo \-file button-active.png]
-style element create Button.button image \e
-    [list $img1  pressed $img2  active $img3] \e
-    \-border {2 4} \-sticky we
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::intro(n), ttk::style(n), ttk_vsapi(n), image(n), photo(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-style, theme, appearance, pixmap theme, image
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_intro.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_intro.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bc3cd69..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_intro.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,177 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::intro n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::intro \- Introduction to the Tk theme engine
-.BE
-.SH "OVERVIEW"
-.PP
-The Tk themed widget set is based on a revised and enhanced version
-of TIP #48 (http://tip.tcl.tk/48) specified style engine.
-The main concepts are described below.
-The basic idea is to separate, to the extent possible,
-the code implementing a widget's behavior from
-the code implementing its appearance.
-Widget class bindings are primarily responsible for
-maintaining the widget state and invoking callbacks;
-all aspects of the widget's appearance are controlled by the style of
-the widget (i.e. the style of the elements of the widget).
-.SH "THEMES"
-.PP
-A \fItheme\fR is a collection of elements and styles
-that determine the look and feel of the widget set.
-Themes can be used to:
-.IP \(bu
-isolate platform differences (X11 vs. classic Windows vs. XP vs. Aqua ...)
-.IP \(bu
-adapt to display limitations (low-color, grayscale, monochrome, tiny screens)
-.IP \(bu
-accessibility (high contrast, large type)
-.IP \(bu
-application suite branding
-.IP \(bu
-blend in with the rest of the desktop (Gnome, KDE, Java)
-.IP \(bu
-and, of course: eye candy.
-.SH "ELEMENTS"
-.PP
-An \fIelement\fR displays an individual part of a widget.
-For example, a vertical scrollbar widget contains \fBuparrow\fR,
-\fBdownarrow\fR, \fBtrough\fR and \fBslider\fR elements.
-.PP
-Element names use a recursive dotted notation.
-For example, \fBuparrow\fR identifies a generic arrow element,
-and \fBScrollbar.uparrow\fR and \fBCombobox.uparrow\fR identify
-widget-specific elements.
-When looking for an element, the style engine looks for
-the specific name first, and if an element of that name is
-not found it looks for generic elements by stripping off
-successive leading components of the element name.
-.PP
-Like widgets, elements have \fIoptions\fR which
-specify what to display and how to display it.
-For example, the \fBtext\fR element
-(which displays a text string) has
-\fB\-text\fR, \fB\-font\fR, \fB\-foreground\fR, \fB\-background\fR,
-\fB\-underline\fR, and \fB\-width\fR options.
-The value of an element option is taken from:
-.IP \(bu
-an option of the same name and type in the widget containing the element;
-.IP \(bu
-a dynamic setting specified by \fBstyle map\fR and the current state;
-.IP \(bu
-the default setting specified by \fBstyle configure\fR; or
-.IP \(bu
-the element's built-in default value for the option.
-.SH "LAYOUTS"
-.PP
-A \fIlayout\fR specifies which elements make up a widget
-and how they are arranged.
-The layout engine uses a simplified version of the \fBpack\fR
-algorithm: starting with an initial cavity equal to the size
-of the widget, elements are allocated a parcel within the cavity along
-the side specified by the \fB\-side\fR option,
-and placed within the parcel according to the \fB\-sticky\fR
-option.
-For example, the layout for a horizontal scrollbar is:
-.PP
-.CS
-ttk::\fBstyle layout\fR Horizontal.TScrollbar {
-    Scrollbar.trough \-children {
-	Scrollbar.leftarrow \-side left \-sticky w
-	Scrollbar.rightarrow \-side right \-sticky e
-	Scrollbar.thumb \-side left \-expand true \-sticky ew
-    }
-}
-.CE
-.PP
-By default, the layout for a widget is the same as its class name.
-Some widgets may override this (for example, the \fBttk::scrollbar\fR
-widget chooses different layouts based on the \fB\-orient\fR option).
-.SH "STATES"
-.PP
-In standard Tk, many widgets have a \fB\-state\fR option
-which (in most cases) is either \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR.
-Some widgets support additional states, such
-as the \fBentry\fR widget which has a \fBreadonly\fR state
-and the various flavors of buttons which have \fBactive\fR state.
-.PP
-The themed Tk widgets generalizes this idea:
-every widget has a bitmap of independent state flags.
-Widget state flags include \fBactive\fR, \fBdisabled\fR,
-\fBpressed\fR, \fBfocus\fR, etc.,
-(see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for the full list of state flags).
-.PP
-Instead of a \fB\-state\fR option, every widget now has
-a \fBstate\fR widget command which is used to set or query
-the state.
-A \fIstate specification\fR is a list of symbolic state names
-indicating which bits are set, each optionally prefixed with an
-exclamation point indicating that the bit is cleared instead.
-.PP
-For example, the class bindings for the \fBttk::button\fR
-widget are:
-.PP
-.CS
-bind TButton <Enter>		{ %W state active }
-bind TButton <Leave>		{ %W state !active }
-bind TButton <ButtonPress-1>	{ %W state pressed }
-bind TButton <Button1-Leave>	{ %W state !pressed }
-bind TButton <Button1-Enter>	{ %W state pressed }
-bind TButton <ButtonRelease-1>	\e
-    { %W instate {pressed} { %W state !pressed ; %W invoke } }
-.CE
-.PP
-This specifies that the widget becomes \fBactive\fR when
-the pointer enters the widget, and inactive when it leaves.
-Similarly it becomes \fBpressed\fR when the mouse button is pressed,
-and \fB!pressed\fR on the ButtonRelease event.
-In addition, the button unpresses if
-pointer is dragged outside the widget while Button-1 is held down,
-and represses if it's dragged back in.
-Finally, when the mouse button is released, the widget's
-\fB\-command\fR is invoked, but only if the button is currently
-in the \fBpressed\fR state.
-(The actual bindings are a little more complicated than the above,
-but not by much).
-'\" Note to self: rewrite that paragraph.  It's horrible.
-.SH "STYLES"
-.PP
-Each widget is associated with a \fIstyle\fR,
-which specifies values for element options.
-Style names use a recursive dotted notation like layouts and elements;
-by default, widgets use the class name to look up a style in the current theme.
-For example:
-.PP
-.CS
-ttk::\fBstyle configure\fR TButton \e
-	\-background #d9d9d9 \e
-	\-foreground black \e
-	\-relief raised \e
-	;
-.CE
-.PP
-Many elements are displayed differently depending on the widget state.
-For example, buttons have a different background when they are active,
-a different foreground when disabled, and a different relief when pressed.
-The \fBstyle map\fR command specifies dynamic option settings
-for a particular style:
-.PP
-.CS
-ttk::\fBstyle map\fR TButton \e
-	\-background [list disabled #d9d9d9  active #ececec] \e
-	\-foreground [list disabled #a3a3a3] \e
-	\-relief [list {pressed !disabled} sunken] \e
-	;
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::style(n)
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_label.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_label.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c28d7c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_label.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::label n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::label \- Display a text string and/or image
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::label\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::label\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image.
-The label may be linked to a Tcl variable
-to automatically change the displayed text.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-compound	\-cursor
-\-image	\-padding	\-style	\-takefocus
-\-text	\-textvariable	\-underline
-\-width
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
-Specifies how the information in the widget is positioned
-relative to the inner margins.  Legal values are
-\fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
-\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, and \fBcenter\fR.
-See also \fB\-justify\fR.
-.OP \-background frameColor FrameColor
-The widget's background color.
-If unspecified, the theme default is used.
-.OP \-font font Font
-Font to use for label text.
-.OP \-foreground textColor TextColor
-The widget's foreground color.
-If unspecified, the theme default is used.
-.OP \-justify justify Justify
-If there are multiple lines of text, specifies how
-the lines are laid out relative to one another.
-One of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR.
-See also \fB\-anchor\fR.
-.OP \-relief relief Relief
-.\" Rewrite this:
-Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget border.
-Valid values are
-\fBflat\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR,
-and \fBsunken\fR.
-.OP \-text text Text
-Specifies a text string to be displayed inside the widget
-(unless overridden by \fB\-textvariable\fR).
-.OP \-wraplength wrapLength WrapLength
-Specifies the maximum line length (in pixels).
-If this option is less than or equal to zero,
-then automatic wrapping is not performed; otherwise
-the text is split into lines such that no line is longer
-than the specified value.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-Supports the standard widget commands
-\fBconfigure\fR, \fBcget\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR;
-see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), label(n)
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_labelframe.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_labelframe.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c2c8d5..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_labelframe.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2005 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::labelframe n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::labelframe \- Container widget with optional label
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::labelframe\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget is a container used to group other widgets
-together.  It has an optional label, which may be a plain text string or
-another widget.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-padding	\-style
-\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.\" XXX: Currently included, but may go away:
-.\" XXX: .OP -borderwidth borderWidth BorderWidth
-.\" XXX: The desired width of the widget border.  Default is theme-dependent.
-.\" XXX: .OP -relief relief Relief
-.\" XXX: One of the standard Tk border styles:
-.\" XXX: \fBflat\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBridge\fR,
-.\" XXX: \fBsolid\fR, or \fBsunken\fR.
-.\" XXX: Default is theme-dependent.
-.OP \-labelanchor labelAnchor LabelAnchor
-Specifies where to place the label.
-Allowed values are (clockwise from the top upper left corner):
-\fBnw\fR, \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBen\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBes\fR,
-\fBse\fR, \fBs\fR,\fBsw\fR, \fBws\fR, \fBw\fR and \fBwn\fR.
-The default value is theme-dependent.
-.\" Alternate explanation: The first character must be one of n, s, e, or w
-.\" and specifies which side the label should be placed on;
-.\" the remaining characters specify how the label is aligned on that side.
-.\" NOTE: Now allows other values as well; leave this undocumented for now
-.OP \-text text Text
-Specifies the text of the label.
-.OP \-underline underline Underline
-If set, specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to
-underline in the text string.
-The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation.
-Mnemonic activation for a \fBttk::labelframe\fR
-sets the keyboard focus to the first child of the \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget.
-.OP \-labelwidget labelWidget LabelWidget
-The name of a widget to use for the label.
-If set, overrides the \fB\-text\fR option.
-The \fB\-labelwidget\fR must be a child of the \fBlabelframe\fR widget
-or one of the \fBlabelframe\fR's ancestors, and must belong to the
-same top-level widget as the \fBlabelframe\fR.
-.OP \-width width Width
-If specified, the widget's requested width in pixels.
-.OP \-height height Height
-If specified, the widget's requested height in pixels.
-(See \fIttk::frame(n)\fR for further notes on \fB\-width\fR and
-\fB\-height\fR).
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-Supports the standard widget commands
-\fBconfigure\fR, \fBcget\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR;
-see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::frame(n), labelframe(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, frame, container, label, groupbox
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_menubutton.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_menubutton.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 698bd0c..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_menubutton.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::menubutton n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::menubutton \- Widget that pops down a menu when pressed
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::menubutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::menubutton\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image,
-and displays a menu when pressed.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-compound	\-cursor
-\-image	\-state	\-style
-\-takefocus	\-text	\-textvariable
-\-underline	\-width
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-direction direction Direction
-Specifies where the menu is to be popped up relative
-to the menubutton.
-One of: \fBabove\fR, \fBbelow\fR, \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR,
-or \fBflush\fR.  The default is \fBbelow\fR.
-\fBflush\fR pops the menu up directly over the menubutton.
-.OP \-menu menu Menu
-Specifies the path name of the menu associated with the menubutton.
-To be on the safe side, the menu ought to be a direct child of the
-menubutton.
-.\" not documented: may go away:
-.\" .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor
-.\" .OP \-padding padding Pad
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-Menubutton widgets support the standard
-\fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR
-methods.  No other widget methods are used.
-.SH "STANDARD STYLES"
-.PP
-\fBTtk::menubutton\fR widgets support the \fBToolbutton\fR style in all
-standard themes, which is useful for creating widgets for toolbars.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), menu(n), menubutton(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, button, menu
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_notebook.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_notebook.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e2ae137..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_notebook.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,217 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::notebook n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::notebook \- Multi-paned container widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBttk::notebook\fR \fIpathname \fR?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.br
-\fIpathname \fBadd\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-\fIpathname \fBinsert\fR \fIindex\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-A \fBttk::notebook\fR widget manages a collection of windows
-and displays a single one at a time.
-Each slave window is associated with a \fItab\fR,
-which the user may select to change the currently-displayed window.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-takefocus
-\-style
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-height height Height
-If present and greater than zero,
-specifies the desired height of the pane area
-(not including internal padding or tabs).
-Otherwise, the maximum height of all panes is used.
-.OP \-padding padding Padding
-Specifies the amount of extra space to add around the outside
-of the notebook.
-The padding is a list of up to four length specifications
-\fIleft top right bottom\fR.
-If fewer than four elements are specified,
-\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
-\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
-\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
-In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding;
-a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding;
-a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget.
-.OP \-width width Width
-If present and greater than zero,
-specifies the desired width of the pane area
-(not including internal padding).
-Otherwise, the maximum width of all panes is used.
-.SH "TAB OPTIONS"
-The following options may be specified for individual notebook panes:
-.OP \-state state State
-Either \fBnormal\fR, \fBdisabled\fR or \fBhidden\fR.
-If \fBdisabled\fR, then the tab is not selectable.
-If \fBhidden\fR, then the tab is not shown.
-.OP \-sticky sticky Sticky
-Specifies how the slave window is positioned within the pane area.
-Value is a string containing zero or more of the characters
-\fBn, s, e,\fR or \fBw\fR.
-Each letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west)
-that the slave window will
-.QW stick
-to, as per the \fBgrid\fR geometry manager.
-.OP \-padding padding Padding
-Specifies the amount of extra space to add between the notebook and this pane.
-Syntax is the same as for the widget \fB\-padding\fR option.
-.OP \-text text Text
-Specifies a string to be displayed in the tab.
-.OP \-image image Image
-Specifies an image to display in the tab.
-See \fIttk_widget(n)\fR for details.
-.OP \-compound compound Compound
-Specifies how to display the image relative to the text,
-in the case both \fB\-text\fR and \fB\-image\fR are present.
-See \fIlabel(n)\fR for legal values.
-.OP \-underline underline Underline
-Specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline
-in the text string.
-The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation
-if \fBttk::notebook::enableTraversal\fR is called.
-.SH "TAB IDENTIFIERS"
-The \fItabid\fR argument to the following commands may take
-any of the following forms:
-.IP \(bu
-An integer between zero and the number of tabs;
-.IP \(bu
-The name of a slave window;
-.IP \(bu
-A positional specification of the form
-.QW @\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR ,
-which identifies the tab
-.IP \(bu
-The literal string
-.QW \fBcurrent\fR ,
-which identifies the currently-selected tab; or:
-.IP \(bu
-The literal string
-.QW \fBend\fR ,
-which returns the number of tabs
-(only valid for
-.QW "\fIpathname \fBindex\fR" ).
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBadd \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-Adds a new tab to the notebook.
-See \fBTAB OPTIONS\fR for the list of available \fIoptions\fR.
-If \fIwindow\fR is currently managed by the notebook but hidden,
-it is restored to its previous position.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
-See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBforget \fItabid\fR
-Removes the tab specified by \fItabid\fR,
-unmaps and unmanages the associated window.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBhide \fItabid\fR
-Hides the tab specified by \fItabid\fR.
-The tab will not be displayed, but the associated window
-remains managed by the notebook and its configuration remembered.
-Hidden tabs may be restored with the \fBadd\fR command.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify\fI component x y\fR
-Returns the name of the element under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR,
-or the empty string if no component is present at that location.
-The following subcommands are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify element\fR \fIx y\fR
-Returns the name of the element at the specified location.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify tab\fR \fIx y\fR
-Returns the index of the tab at the specified location.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBindex \fItabid\fR
-Returns the numeric index of the tab specified by \fItabid\fR,
-or the total number of tabs if \fItabid\fR is the string
-.QW \fBend\fR .
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBinsert \fIpos subwindow options...\fR
-Inserts a pane at the specified position.
-\fIpos\fR is either the string \fBend\fR, an integer index,
-or the name of a managed subwindow.
-If \fIsubwindow\fR is already managed by the notebook,
-moves it to the specified position.
-See \fBTAB OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBinstate \fIstatespec \fR?\fIscript...\fR?
-See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBselect\fR ?\fItabid\fR?
-Selects the specified tab.
-The associated slave window will be displayed,
-and the previously-selected window (if different) is unmapped.
-If \fItabid\fR is omitted, returns the widget name of the
-currently selected pane.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstatespec\fR?
-See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBtab \fItabid\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue ...\fR
-Query or modify the options of the specific tab.
-If no \fI\-option\fR is specified,
-returns a dictionary of the tab option values.
-If one \fI\-option\fR is specified,
-returns the value of that \fIoption\fR.
-Otherwise, sets the \fI\-option\fRs to the corresponding \fIvalue\fRs.
-See \fBTAB OPTIONS\fR for the available options.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBtabs\fR
-Returns the list of windows managed by the notebook, in the index order of
-their associated tabs.
-.SH "KEYBOARD TRAVERSAL"
-To enable keyboard traversal for a toplevel window
-containing a notebook widget \fI$nb\fR, call:
-.CS
-ttk::notebook::enableTraversal $nb
-.CE
-.PP
-This will extend the bindings for the toplevel window
-containing the notebook as follows:
-.IP \(bu
-\fBControl-Tab\fR selects the tab following the currently selected one.
-.IP \(bu
-\fBControl-Shift-Tab\fR selects the tab preceding the currently selected one.
-.IP \(bu
-\fBAlt-\fIK\fR, where \fIK\fR is the mnemonic (underlined) character
-of any tab, will select that tab.
-.PP
-Multiple notebooks in a single toplevel may be enabled for traversal,
-including nested notebooks.
-However, notebook traversal only works properly if all panes
-are direct children of the notebook.
-.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-The notebook widget generates a \fB<<NotebookTabChanged>>\fR
-virtual event after a new tab is selected.
-.SH "EXAMPLE"
-.CS
-pack [\fBttk::notebook\fR .nb]
-\&.nb add [frame .nb.f1] \-text "First tab"
-\&.nb add [frame .nb.f2] \-text "Second tab"
-\&.nb select .nb.f2
-ttk::notebook::enableTraversal .nb
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), grid(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-pane, tab
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_panedwindow.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_panedwindow.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ba42bc..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_panedwindow.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2005 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::panedwindow n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::panedwindow \- Multi-pane container window
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBttk::panedwindow\fR \fIpathname \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.br
-\fIpathname \fBadd\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-\fIpathname \fBinsert\fR \fIindex\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-A \fBttk::panedwindow\fR widget displays a number of subwindows,
-stacked either vertically or horizontally.
-The user may adjust the relative sizes of the subwindows
-by dragging the sash between panes.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-takefocus
-\-style
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-orient orient Orient
-Specifies the orientation of the window.
-If \fBvertical\fR, subpanes are stacked top-to-bottom;
-if \fBhorizontal\fR, subpanes are stacked left-to-right.
-.OP \-width width Width
-If present and greater than zero,
-specifies the desired width of the widget in pixels.
-Otherwise, the requested width is determined by the width
-of the managed windows.
-.OP \-height height Height
-If present and greater than zero,
-specifies the desired height of the widget in pixels.
-Otherwise, the requested height is determined by the height
-of the managed windows.
-.SH "PANE OPTIONS"
-The following options may be specified for each pane:
-.OP \-weight weight Weight
-An integer specifying the relative stretchability of the pane.
-When the paned window is resized, the extra space is added
-or subtracted to each pane proportionally to its \fB\-weight\fR.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-Supports the standard \fBconfigure\fR, \fBcget\fR, \fBstate\fR,
-and \fBinstate\fR commands; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details.
-Additional commands:
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBadd \fIsubwindow options...\fR
-Adds a new pane to the window.
-See \fBPANE OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBforget \fIpane\fR
-Removes the specified subpane from the widget.
-\fIpane\fR is either an integer index or the name of a managed subwindow.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify \fIcomponent x y\fR
-Returns the name of the element under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR,
-or the empty string if no component is present at that location.
-If \fIcomponent\fR is omitted, it defaults to \fBsash\fR.
-The following subcommands are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify element \fIx y\fR
-Returns the name of the element at the specified location.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify sash \fIx y\fR
-Returns the index of the sash at the specified location.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBinsert \fIpos subwindow options...\fR
-Inserts a pane at the specified position.
-\fIpos\fR is either the string \fBend\fR, an integer index,
-or the name of a managed subwindow.
-If \fIsubwindow\fR is already managed by the paned window,
-moves it to the specified position.
-See \fBPANE OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBpane \fIpane \-option \fR?\fIvalue \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR
-Query or modify the options of the specified \fIpane\fR,
-where \fIpane\fR is either an integer index or the name of a managed subwindow.
-If no \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns a dictionary of the pane
-option values.
-If one \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns the value of that \fIoption\fR.
-Otherwise, sets the \fI\-option\fRs to the corresponding \fIvalue\fRs.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBpanes\fR
-Returns the list of all windows managed by the widget, in the index order of
-their associated panes.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBsashpos \fIindex\fR ?\fInewpos\fR?
-If \fInewpos\fR is specified, sets the position
-of sash number \fIindex\fR.
-May adjust the positions of adjacent sashes
-to ensure that positions are monotonically increasing.
-Sash positions are further constrained to be between 0
-and the total size of the widget.
-.\" Full story: "total size" is either the -height (resp -width),
-.\" or the actual window height (resp actual window width),
-.\" depending on which changed most recently.
-Returns the new position of sash number \fIindex\fR.
-.\" Full story: new position may be different than the requested position.
-.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-.PP
-The panedwindow widget generates an \fB<<EnteredChild>>\fR virtual event on
-LeaveNotify/NotifyInferior events, because Tk does not execute binding scripts
-for <Leave> events when the pointer crosses from a parent to a child. The
-panedwindow widget needs to know when that happens.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::notebook(n), panedwindow(n)
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_progressbar.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_progressbar.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 1945f70..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_progressbar.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2005 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::progressbar n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::progressbar \- Provide progress feedback
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::progressbar\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::progressbar\fR widget shows the status of a long-running
-operation.  They can operate in two modes: \fIdeterminate\fR mode shows the
-amount completed relative to the total amount of work to be done, and
-\fIindeterminate\fR mode provides an animated display to let the user know
-that something is happening.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-takefocus
-\-style
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-orient orient Orient
-One of \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR.
-Specifies the orientation of the progress bar.
-.OP \-length length Length
-Specifies the length of the long axis of the progress bar
-(width if horizontal, height if vertical).
-.OP \-mode mode Mode
-One of \fBdeterminate\fR or \fBindeterminate\fR.
-.OP \-maximum maximum Maximum
-A floating point number specifying the maximum \fB\-value\fR.
-Defaults to 100.
-.OP \-value value Value
-The current value of the progress bar.
-In \fIdeterminate\fR mode, this represents the amount of work completed.
-In \fIindeterminate\fR mode, it is interpreted modulo \fB\-maximum\fR;
-that is, the progress bar completes one
-.QW cycle
-when the \fB\-value\fR increases by \fB\-maximum\fR.
-.OP \-variable variable Variable
-The name of a global Tcl variable which is linked to the \fB\-value\fR.
-If specified, the \fB\-value\fR of the progress bar is
-automatically set to the value of the variable whenever
-the latter is modified.
-.OP \-phase phase Phase
-Read-only option.
-The widget periodically increments the value of this option
-whenever the \fB\-value\fR is greater than 0 and,
-in \fIdeterminate\fR mode, less than \fB\-maximum\fR.
-This option may be used by the current theme
-to provide additional animation effects.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Modify or query widget options; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-Returns the name of the element at position \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR.
-See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-Test the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBstart\fR ?\fIinterval\fR?
-Begin autoincrement mode:
-schedules a recurring timer event that calls \fBstep\fR
-every \fIinterval\fR milliseconds.
-If omitted, \fIinterval\fR defaults to 50 milliseconds (20 steps/second).
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
-Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBstep\fR ?\fIamount\fR?
-Increments the \fB\-value\fR by \fIamount\fR.
-\fIamount\fR defaults to 1.0 if omitted.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBstop\fR
-Stop autoincrement mode:
-cancels any recurring timer event initiated by \fIpathName \fBstart\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n)
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_radiobutton.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_radiobutton.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b4dcce..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_radiobutton.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::radiobutton n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::radiobutton \- Mutually exclusive option widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::radiobutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBttk::radiobutton\fR widgets are used in groups to show or change
-a set of mutually-exclusive options.
-Radiobuttons are linked to a Tcl variable,
-and have an associated value; when a radiobutton is clicked,
-it sets the variable to its associated value.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-compound	\-cursor
-\-image	\-state	\-style
-\-takefocus	\-text	\-textvariable
-\-underline	\-width
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-A Tcl script to evaluate whenever the widget is invoked.
-.OP \-value Value Value
-The value to store in the associated \fB\-variable\fR
-when the widget is selected.
-.OP \-variable variable Variable
-The name of a global variable whose value is linked to the widget.
-Default value is \fB::selectedButton\fR.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-In addition to the standard
-\fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR
-commands, radiobuttons support the following additional
-widget commands:
-.TP
-\fIpathname\fB invoke\fR
-Sets the \fB\-variable\fR to the \fB\-value\fR, selects the widget,
-and evaluates the associated \fB\-command\fR.
-Returns the result of the \fB\-command\fR, or the empty
-string if no \fB\-command\fR is specified.
-.\" Missing: select, deselect.  Useful?
-.\" Missing: flash.  This is definitely not useful.
-.SH "WIDGET STATES"
-.PP
-The widget does not respond to user input if the \fBdisabled\fR state is set.
-The widget sets the \fBselected\fR state whenever
-the linked \fB\-variable\fR is set to the widget's \fB\-value\fR,
-and clears it otherwise.
-The widget sets the \fBalternate\fR state whenever the
-linked \fB\-variable\fR is unset.
-(The \fBalternate\fR state may be used to indicate a
-.QW tri-state
-or
-.QW indeterminate
-selection.)
-.SH "STANDARD STYLES"
-.PP
-\fBTtk::radiobutton\fR widgets support the \fBToolbutton\fR style in all
-standard themes, which is useful for creating widgets for toolbars.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::checkbutton(n), radiobutton(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, button, option
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_scale.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_scale.n
deleted file mode 100644
index b52f9ac..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_scale.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 2008 Donal Fellows
-.\"
-.\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-.\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-.\"
-.TH ttk::scale n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::scale \- Create and manipulate a scale widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::scale \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::scale\fR widget is typically used to control the numeric value of a
-linked variable that varies uniformly over some range. A scale displays a
-\fIslider\fR that can be moved along over a \fItrough\fR, with the relative
-position of the slider over the trough indicating the value of the variable.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-style
-\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies the prefix of a Tcl command to invoke whenever the scale's value is
-changed via a widget command. The actual command consists of this option
-followed by a space and a real number indicating the new value of the scale.
-.OP \-from from From
-A real value corresponding to the left or top end of the scale.
-.OP \-length length Length
-Specifies the desired long dimension of the scale in screen units (i.e. any of
-the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR). For vertical scales this is the
-scale's height; for horizontal scales it is the scale's width.
-.OP \-orient orient Orient
-Specifies which orientation whether the widget should be laid out horizontally
-or vertically. Must be either \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR or an
-abbreviation of one of these.
-.OP \-to to To
-Specifies a real value corresponding to the right or bottom end of the scale.
-This value may be either less than or greater than the \fB\-from\fR option.
-.OP \-value value Value
-Specifies the current floating-point value of the variable.
-.OP \-variable variable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale. Whenever the
-value of the variable changes, the scale will update to reflect this value.
-Whenever the scale is manipulated interactively, the variable will be modified
-to reflect the scale's new value.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR; see
-\fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Modify or query widget options; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget \fR?\fIx y\fR?
-.
-Get the current value of the \fB\-value\fR option, or the value corresponding
-to the coordinates \fIx,y\fR if they are specified. \fIX\fR and \fIy\fR are
-pixel coordinates relative to the scale widget origin.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-Returns the name of the element at position \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR.
-See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-.
-Test the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset \fIvalue\fR
-.
-Set the value of the widget (i.e. the \fB\-value\fR option) to \fIvalue\fR.
-The value will be clipped to the range given by the \fB\-from\fR and
-\fB\-to\fR options. Note that setting the linked variable (i.e. the variable
-named in the \fB\-variable\fR option) does not cause such clipping.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
-.
-Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.SH "INTERNAL COMMANDS"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcoords \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
-.
-Get the coordinates corresponding to \fIvalue\fR, or the coordinates
-corresponding to the current value of the \fB\-value\fR option if \fIvalue\fR
-is omitted.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), scale(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-scale, slider, trough, widget
-.\" Local Variables:
-.\" mode: nroff
-.\" fill-column: 78
-.\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_scrollbar.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_scrollbar.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 03d09f2..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_scrollbar.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::scrollbar n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::scrollbar \- Control the viewport of a scrollable widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::scrollbar\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBttk::scrollbar\fR widgets are typically linked to an associated window
-that displays a document of some sort, such as a file being edited or a
-drawing.
-A scrollbar displays a \fIthumb\fR in the middle portion of the scrollbar,
-whose position and size provides information about the portion of the
-document visible in the associated window.
-The thumb may be dragged by the user to control the visible region.
-Depending on the theme, two or more arrow buttons may also be present;
-these are used to scroll the visible region in discrete units.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-style
-\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-command command Command
-A Tcl script prefix to evaluate
-to change the view in the widget associated with the scrollbar.
-Additional arguments are appended to the value of this option,
-as described in \fBSCROLLING COMMANDS\fR below,
-whenever the user requests a view change by manipulating the scrollbar.
-.RS
-.PP
-This option typically consists of a two-element list,
-containing the name of a scrollable widget followed by
-either \fBxview\fR (for horizontal scrollbars)
-or \fByview\fR (for vertical scrollbars).
-.RE
-.OP \-orient orient Orient
-One of \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR.
-Specifies the orientation of the scrollbar.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Modify or query widget options; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR
-Returns the scrollbar settings in the form of a list whose
-elements are the arguments to the most recent \fBset\fR widget command.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR
-Returns the name of the element at position \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR.
-See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-Test the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset \fIfirst last\fR
-This command is normally invoked by the scrollbar's associated widget
-from an \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR or \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR callback.
-Specifies the visible range to be displayed.
-\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are real fractions between 0 and 1.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
-Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.SH "INTERNAL COMMANDS"
-.PP
-The following widget commands are used internally
-by the TScrollbar widget class bindings.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBdelta \fIdeltaX deltaY\fR
-Returns a real number indicating the fractional change in
-the scrollbar setting that corresponds to a given change
-in thumb position.  For example, if the scrollbar is horizontal,
-the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change
-to move the thumb \fIdeltaX\fR pixels to the right (\fIdeltaY\fR is
-ignored in this case).
-If the scrollbar is vertical, the result indicates how much the
-scrollbar setting must change to move the thumb \fIdeltaY\fR pixels
-down.  The arguments and the result may be zero or negative.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBfraction \fIx y\fR
-Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating where the point
-given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lies in the trough area of the scrollbar,
-where 0.0 corresponds to the top or left of the trough
-and 1.0 corresponds to the bottom or right.
-\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR are pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
-widget.
-If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR refer to a point outside the trough, the closest
-point in the trough is used.
-.SH "SCROLLING COMMANDS"
-.PP
-When the user interacts with the scrollbar, for example by dragging
-the thumb, the scrollbar notifies the associated widget that it
-must change its view.
-The scrollbar makes the notification by evaluating a Tcl command
-generated from the scrollbar's \fB\-command\fR option.
-The command may take any of the following forms.
-In each case, \fIprefix\fR is the contents of the
-\fB\-command\fR option, which usually has a form like \fB.t yview\fR
-.TP
-\fIprefix \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR
-\fIFraction\fR is a real number between 0 and 1.
-The widget should adjust its view so that the point given
-by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget.
-If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the
-document.  1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333
-refers to a point one-third of the way through the document,
-and so on.
-.TP
-\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR
-The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units.
-The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget,
-such as characters or lines in a text widget.
-\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off
-the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit
-should scroll off the bottom or right of the window.
-.TP
-\fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR
-The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages.
-It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page;  typically
-it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there
-is a slight overlap between the old and new views.
-\fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should
-become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should
-become visible.
-.SH "WIDGET STATES"
-.PP
-The scrollbar automatically sets the \fBdisabled\fR state bit.
-when the entire range is visible (range is 0.0 to 1.0),
-and clears it otherwise.
-It also sets the \fBactive\fR and \fBpressed\fR state flags
-of individual elements, based on the position and state of the mouse pointer.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-.CS
-set f [frame .f]
-ttk::scrollbar $f.hsb \-orient horizontal \-command [list $f.t xview]
-ttk::scrollbar $f.vsb \-orient vertical \-command [list $f.t yview]
-text $f.t \-xscrollcommand [list $f.hsb set] \-yscrollcommand [list $f.vsb set]
-grid $f.t \-row 0 \-column 0 \-sticky nsew
-grid $f.vsb \-row 0 \-column 1 \-sticky nsew
-grid $f.hsb \-row 1 \-column 0 \-sticky nsew
-grid columnconfigure $f 0 \-weight 1
-grid rowconfigure $f 0 \-weight 1
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), scrollbar(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-scrollbar, widget
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_separator.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_separator.n
deleted file mode 100644
index fea2701..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_separator.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::separator n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::separator \- Separator bar
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::separator\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::separator\fR widget displays a horizontal or vertical separator
-bar.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-state
-\-style	\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-orient orient Orient
-One of \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR.
-Specifies the orientation of the separator.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-Separator widgets support the standard
-\fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR
-methods.  No other widget methods are used.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, separator
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_sizegrip.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_sizegrip.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b3429e..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_sizegrip.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2006 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH ttk::sizegrip n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::sizegrip \- Bottom-right corner resize widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::sizegrip\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::sizegrip\fR widget (also known as a \fIgrow box\fR)
-allows the user to resize the containing toplevel window
-by pressing and dragging the grip.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-state
-\-style	\-takefocus
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-Sizegrip widgets support the standard
-\fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR
-methods.  No other widget methods are used.
-.SH "PLATFORM-SPECIFIC NOTES"
-.PP
-On Mac OSX, toplevel windows automatically include a built-in
-size grip by default.
-Adding a \fBttk::sizegrip\fR there is harmless, since
-the built-in grip will just mask the widget.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-Using pack:
-.CS
-pack [ttk::frame $top.statusbar] \-side bottom \-fill x
-pack [\fBttk::sizegrip\fR $top.statusbar.grip] \-side right \-anchor se
-.CE
-.PP
-Using grid:
-.CS
-grid [\fBttk::sizegrip\fR $top.statusbar.grip] \e
-    \-row $lastRow \-column $lastColumn \-sticky se
-# ... optional: add vertical scrollbar in $lastColumn,
-# ... optional: add horizontal scrollbar in $lastRow
-.CE
-.SH "BUGS"
-.PP
-If the containing toplevel's position was specified
-relative to the right or bottom of the screen
-(e.g.,
-.QW "\fBwm geometry ... \fIw\fBx\fIh\fB\-\fIx\fB\-\fIy\fR"
-instead of
-.QW "\fBwm geometry ... \fIw\fBx\fIh\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR" ),
-the sizegrip widget will not resize the window.
-.PP
-\fBttk::sizegrip\fR widgets only support
-.QW southeast
-resizing.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-widget, sizegrip, grow box
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_spinbox.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_spinbox.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ae586f..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_spinbox.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Pat Thoyts
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::spinbox n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::spinbox \- Selecting text field widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::spinbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fBttk::spinbox\fR widget is a \fBttk::entry\fR widget with built-in
-up and down buttons that are used to either modify a numeric value or
-to select among a set of values. The widget implements all the features
-of the \fBttk::entry\fR widget including support of the
-\fB\-textvariable\fR option to link the value displayed by the widget
-to a Tcl variable.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-style
-\-takefocus	\-xscrollcommand
-.SE
-.SO ttk_entry
-\-validate	\-validatecommand
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-from from From
-A floating\-point value specifying the lowest value for the spinbox. This is
-used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR to set a numerical
-range.
-.OP \-to to To
-A floating\-point value specifying the highest permissible value for the
-widget. See also \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR.
-range.
-.OP \-increment increment Increment
-A floating\-point value specifying the change in value to be applied each
-time one of the widget spin buttons is pressed. The up button applies a
-positive increment, the down button applies a negative increment.
-.OP \-values values Values
-This must be a Tcl list of values. If this option is set then this will
-override any range set using the \fB\-from\fR, \fB\-to\fR and
-\fB\-increment\fR options. The widget will instead use the values
-specified beginning with the first value.
-.OP \-wrap wrap Wrap
-Must be a proper boolean value.  If on, the spinbox will wrap around the
-values of data in the widget.
-.OP \-format format Format
-Specifies an alternate format to use when setting the string value
-when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range.
-This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR,
-as it will format a floating-point number.
-.OP \-command command Command
-Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked whenever a spinbutton is invoked.
-.SH "INDICES"
-.PP
-See the \fBttk::entry\fR manual for information about indexing characters.
-.SH "VALIDATION"
-.PP
-See the \fBttk::entry\fR manual for information about using the
-\fB\-validate\fR and \fB\-validatecommand\fR options.
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-The following subcommands are possible for spinbox widgets in addition to
-the commands described for the \fBttk::entry\fR widget:
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcurrent \fIindex\fR
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBget\fR
-Returns the spinbox's current value.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBset \fIvalue\fR
-Set the spinbox string to \fIvalue\fR. If a \fB\-format\fR option has
-been configured then this format will be applied. If formatting fails
-or is not set or the \fB\-values\fR option has been used then the value
-is set directly.
-.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-.PP
-The spinbox widget generates a \fB<<Increment>>\fR virtual event when
-the user presses <Up>, and a \fB<<Decrement>>\fR virtual event when the
-user presses <Down>.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), ttk::entry(n), spinbox(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-entry, spinbox, widget, text field
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_style.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_style.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 985e3cd..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_style.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::style n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::style \- Manipulate style database
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::style\fR \fIoption\fR ?\fIargs\fR?
-.BE
-.SH NOTES
-.PP
-See also the Tcl'2004 conference presentation,
-available at http://tktable.sourceforge.net/tile/tile-tcl2004.pdf
-.SH DEFINITIONS
-.PP
-Each widget is assigned a \fIstyle\fR,
-which specifies the set of elements making up the widget
-and how they are arranged, along with dynamic and default
-settings for element options.
-By default, the style name is the same as the widget's class;
-this may be overridden by the \fB\-style\fR option.
-.PP
-A \fItheme\fR is a collection of elements and styles
-which controls the overall look and feel of an application.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBttk::style\fR command takes the following arguments:
-.TP
-\fBttk::style configure \fIstyle\fR ?\fI\-option\fR ?\fIvalue option value...\fR? ?
-Sets the default value of the specified option(s) in \fIstyle\fR.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style map \fIstyle\fR ?\fI\-option\fB { \fIstatespec value...\fB }\fR?
-Sets dynamic values of the specified option(s) in \fIstyle\fR.
-Each \fIstatespec / value\fR pair is examined in order;
-the value corresponding to the first matching \fIstatespec\fR
-is used.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style lookup \fIstyle\fR \fI\-option \fR?\fIstate \fR?\fIdefault\fR??
-Returns the value specified for \fI\-option\fR in style \fIstyle\fR
-in state \fIstate\fR, using the standard lookup rules for element options.
-\fIstate\fR is a list of state names; if omitted,
-it defaults to all bits off (the
-.QW normal
-state).
-If the \fIdefault\fR argument is present, it is used as a fallback
-value in case no specification for \fI\-option\fR is found.
-.\" Otherwise -- signal error? return empty string? Leave unspecified for now.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style layout \fIstyle\fR ?\fIlayoutSpec\fR?
-Define the widget layout for style \fIstyle\fR.
-See \fBLAYOUTS\fR below for the format of \fIlayoutSpec\fR.
-If \fIlayoutSpec\fR is omitted, return the layout specification
-for style \fIstyle\fR.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style element create\fR \fIelementName\fR \fItype\fR ?\fIargs...\fR?
-Creates a new element in the current theme of type \fItype\fR.
-The only cross-platform built-in element type is \fIimage\fR
-(see \fBttk_image\fR(n)) but themes may define other element types
-(see \fBTtk_RegisterElementFactory\fR). On suitable versions of Windows
-an element factory is registered to create Windows theme elements
-(see \fBttk_vsapi\fR(n)).
-.TP
-\fBttk::style element names\fR
-Returns the list of elements defined in the current theme.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style element options \fIelement\fR
-Returns the list of \fIelement\fR's options.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style theme create\fR \fIthemeName\fR ?\fB\-parent \fIbasedon\fR? ?\fB\-settings \fIscript...\fR ?
-Creates a new theme.  It is an error if \fIthemeName\fR already exists.
-If \fB\-parent\fR is specified, the new theme will inherit
-styles, elements, and layouts from the parent theme \fIbasedon\fR.
-If \fB\-settings\fR is present, \fIscript\fR is evaluated in the
-context of the new theme as per \fBttk::style theme settings\fR.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style theme settings \fIthemeName\fR \fIscript\fR
-Temporarily sets the current theme to \fIthemeName\fR,
-evaluate \fIscript\fR, then restore the previous theme.
-Typically \fIscript\fR simply defines styles and elements,
-though arbitrary Tcl code may appear.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style theme names\fR
-Returns a list of all known themes.
-.TP
-\fBttk::style theme use\fR ?\fIthemeName\fR?
-Without an argument the result is the name of the current theme.
-Otherwise this command sets the current theme to \fIthemeName\fR,
-and refreshes all widgets.
-.SH LAYOUTS
-.PP
-A \fIlayout\fR specifies a list of elements, each followed
-by one or more options specifying how to arrange the element.
-The layout mechanism uses a simplified version of the \fBpack\fR
-geometry manager: given an initial cavity,
-each element is allocated a parcel.
-Valid options are:
-.TP
-\fB\-side \fIside\fR
-Specifies which side of the cavity to place the element;
-one of \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, \fBtop\fR, or \fBbottom\fR.
-If omitted, the element occupies the entire cavity.
-.TP
-\fB\-sticky\fR \fB[\fInswe\fB]\fR
-Specifies where the element is placed inside its allocated parcel.
-.TP
-\fB\-children { \fIsublayout... \fB}\fR
-Specifies a list of elements to place inside the element.
-.\" Also: -border, -unit, -expand: may go away.
-.PP
-For example:
-.CS
-ttk::style layout Horizontal.TScrollbar {
-    Scrollbar.trough \-children {
-        Scrollbar.leftarrow \-side left
-        Scrollbar.rightarrow \-side right
-        Horizontal.Scrollbar.thumb \-side left \-sticky ew
-    }
-}
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::intro(n), ttk::widget(n), photo(n), ttk_image(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-style, theme, appearance
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_treeview.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_treeview.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8399a09..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_treeview.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,481 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::treeview n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::treeview \- hierarchical multicolumn data display widget
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::treeview \fIpathname \fR?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBttk::treeview\fR widget displays a hierarchical collection of items.
-Each item has a textual label, an optional image,
-and an optional list of data values.
-The data values are displayed in successive columns after
-the tree label.
-.PP
-The order in which data values are displayed may be controlled
-by setting the \fB\-displaycolumns\fR widget option.
-The tree widget can also display column headings.
-Columns may be accessed by number or by symbolic names
-listed in the \fB\-columns\fR widget option;
-see \fBCOLUMN IDENTIFIERS\fR.
-.PP
-Each item is identified by a unique name.
-The widget will generate item IDs if they are not supplied by the caller.
-There is a distinguished root item, named \fB{}\fR.
-The root item itself is not displayed;
-its children appear at the top level of the hierarchy.
-.PP
-Each item also has a list of \fItags\fR,
-which can be used to associate event bindings with individual items
-and control the appearance of the item.
-.\" .PP
-.\" @@@HERE: describe selection, focus item
-.PP
-Treeview widgets support horizontal and vertical scrolling with the
-standard \fB\-\fR[\fBxy\fR]\fBscrollcommand\fR options
-and [\fBxy\fR]\fBview\fR widget commands.
-.SO ttk_widget
-\-class	\-cursor	\-takefocus
-\-style	\-xscrollcommand	\-yscrollcommand
-\-padding
-.SE
-.SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS"
-.OP \-columns columns Columns
-A list of column identifiers,
-specifying the number of columns and their names.
-.\"X: This is a read-only option; it may only be set when the widget is created.
-.OP \-displaycolumns displayColumns DisplayColumns
-A list of column identifiers
-(either symbolic names or integer indices)
-specifying which data columns are displayed
-and the order in which they appear,
-or the string \fB#all\fP.
-If set to \fB#all\fP (the default),
-all columns are shown in the order given.
-.OP \-height height Height
-Specifies the number of rows which should be visible.
-Note:
-the requested width is determined from the sum of the column widths.
-.OP \-selectmode selectMode SelectMode
-Controls how the built-in class bindings manage the selection.
-One of \fBextended\fR, \fBbrowse\fR, or \fBnone\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-If set to \fBextended\fR (the default), multiple items may be selected.
-If \fBbrowse\fR, only a single item will be selected at a time.
-If \fBnone\fR, the selection will not be changed.
-.PP
-Note that application code and tag bindings can set the selection
-however they wish, regardless of the value of \fB\-selectmode\fR.
-.RE
-.OP \-show show Show
-A list containing zero or more of the following values, specifying
-which elements of the tree to display.
-.RS
-.IP \fBtree\fR
-Display tree labels in column #0.
-.IP \fBheadings\fR
-Display the heading row.
-.PP
-The default is \fBtree headings\fR, i.e., show all elements.
-.PP
-\fBNOTE:\fR Column #0 always refers to the tree column,
-even if \fB\-show tree\fR is not specified.
-.RE
-.SH "WIDGET COMMAND"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBbbox \fIitem\fR ?\fIcolumn\fR?
-Returns the bounding box (relative to the treeview widget's window)
-of the specified \fIitem\fR
-in the form \fIx y width height\fR.
-If \fIcolumn\fR is specified, returns the bounding box of that cell.
-If the \fIitem\fR is not visible
-(i.e., if it is a descendant of a closed item or is scrolled offscreen),
-returns the empty list.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBchildren \fIitem\fR ?\fInewchildren\fR?
-If \fInewchildren\fR is not specified,
-returns the list of children belonging to \fIitem\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-If \fInewchildren\fR is specified, replaces \fIitem\fR's child list
-with \fInewchildren\fR.
-Items in the old child list not present in the new child list
-are detached from the tree.
-None of the items in \fInewchildren\fR may be an ancestor
-of \fIitem\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBcolumn \fIcolumn\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue \-option value...\fR?
-Query or modify the options for the specified \fIcolumn\fR.
-If no \fI\-option\fR is specified,
-returns a dictionary of option/value pairs.
-If a single \fI\-option\fR is specified,
-returns the value of that option.
-Otherwise, the options are updated with the specified values.
-The following options may be set on each column:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-id \fIname\fR
-The column name.  This is a read-only option.
-For example, [\fI$pathname \fBcolumn #\fIn \fB\-id\fR]
-returns the data column associated with display column #\fIn\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-anchor\fR
-Specifies how the text in this column should be aligned
-with respect to the cell. One of
-\fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR,
-\fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-minwidth\fR
-The minimum width of the column in pixels.
-The treeview widget will not make the column any smaller than
-\fB\-minwidth\fR when the widget is resized or the user drags a
-column separator.
-.TP
-\fB\-stretch\fR
-Specifies whether or not the column's width should be adjusted
-when the widget is resized.
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIw\fR
-The width of the column in pixels.  Default is something reasonable,
-probably 200 or so.
-.PP
-Use \fIpathname column #0\fR to configure the tree column.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-Modify or query widget options; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBdelete \fIitemList\fR
-Deletes each of the items in \fIitemList\fR and all of their descendants.
-The root item may not be deleted.
-See also: \fBdetach\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBdetach \fIitemList\fR
-Unlinks all of the specified items in \fIitemList\fR from the tree.
-The items and all of their descendants are still present
-and may be reinserted at another point in the tree
-with the \fBmove\fR operation,
-but will not be displayed until that is done.
-The root item may not be detached.
-See also: \fBdelete\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBexists \fIitem\fR
-Returns 1 if the specified \fIitem\fR is present in the tree,
-0 otherwise.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBfocus \fR?\fIitem\fR?
-If \fIitem\fR is specified, sets the focus item to \fIitem\fR.
-Otherwise, returns the current focus item, or \fB{}\fR if there is none.
-.\" Need: way to clear the focus item.  {} works for this...
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBheading \fIcolumn\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue \-option value...\fR?
-Query or modify the heading options for the specified \fIcolumn\fR.
-Valid options are:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-text \fItext\fR
-The text to display in the column heading.
-.TP
-\fB\-image \fIimageName\fR
-Specifies an image to display to the right of the column heading.
-.TP
-\fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR
-Specifies how the heading text should be aligned.
-One of the standard Tk anchor values.
-.TP
-\fB\-command \fIscript\fR
-A script to evaluate when the heading label is pressed.
-.PP
-Use \fIpathname heading #0\fR to configure the tree column heading.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify \fIcomponent x y\fR
-Returns a description of the specified \fIcomponent\fR
-under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR,
-or the empty string if no such \fIcomponent\fR is present at that position.
-The following subcommands are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify region \fIx y\fR
-.RS
-Returns one of:
-.IP heading
-Tree heading area;
-use [\fBpathname identify column \fIx y\fR]
-to determine the heading number.
-.IP separator
-Space between two column headings;
-[\fBpathname identify column \fIx y\fR]
-will return the display column identifier
-of the heading to left of the separator.
-.IP tree
-The tree area.
-.IP cell
-A data cell.
-.RE
-\fIpathname \fBidentify item \fIx y\fR
-Returns the item ID of the item at position \fIy\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify column \fIx y\fR
-Returns the data column identifier of the cell at position \fIx\fR.
-The tree column has ID \fB#0\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify element \fIx y\fR
-The element at position \fIx,y\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBidentify row \fIx y\fR
-Obsolescent synonym for \fIpathname \fBidentify item\fR.
-.PP
-See \fBCOLUMN IDENTIFIERS\fR for a discussion of display columns
-and data columns.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBindex \fIitem\fR
-Returns the integer index of \fIitem\fR within its parent's list of children.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBinsert \fIparent index\fR ?\fB\-id \fIid\fR? \fIoptions...\fR
-Creates a new item.
-\fIparent\fR is the item ID of the parent item,
-or the empty string \fB{}\fR
-to create a new top-level item.
-\fIindex\fR is an integer, or the value \fBend\fR, specifying where in the
-list of \fIparent\fR's children to insert the new item.
-If \fIindex\fR is less than or equal to zero,
-the new node is inserted at the beginning;
-if \fIindex\fR is greater than or equal to the current number of children,
-it is inserted at the end.
-If \fB\-id\fR is specified, it is used as the item identifier;
-\fIid\fR must not already exist in the tree.
-Otherwise, a new unique identifier is generated.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIpathname \fBinsert\fR returns the item identifier of the
-newly created item.
-See \fBITEM OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-Test the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBitem \fIitem\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue \-option value...\fR?
-Query or modify the options for the specified \fIitem\fR.
-If no \fI\-option\fR is specified,
-returns a dictionary of option/value pairs.
-If a single \fI\-option\fR is specified,
-returns the value of that option.
-Otherwise, the item's options are updated with the specified values.
-See \fBITEM OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBmove \fIitem parent index\fR
-Moves \fIitem\fR to position \fIindex\fR in \fIparent\fR's list of children.
-It is illegal to move an item under one of its descendants.
-.RS
-.PP
-If \fIindex\fR is less than or equal to zero, \fIitem\fR is moved
-to the beginning; if greater than or equal to the number of children,
-it is moved to the end.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBnext \fIitem\fR
-Returns the identifier of \fIitem\fR's next sibling,
-or \fB{}\fR if \fIitem\fR is the last child of its parent.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBparent \fIitem\fR
-Returns the ID of the parent of \fIitem\fR,
-or \fB{}\fR if \fIitem\fR is at the top level of the hierarchy.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBprev \fIitem\fR
-Returns the identifier of \fIitem\fR's previous sibling,
-or \fB{}\fR if \fIitem\fR is the first child of its parent.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBsee \fIitem\fR
-Ensure that \fIitem\fR is visible:
-sets all of \fIitem\fR's ancestors to \fB\-open true\fR,
-and scrolls the widget if necessary so that \fIitem\fR is
-within the visible portion of the tree.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBselection\fR ?\fIselop itemList\fR?
-If \fIselop\fR is not specified, returns the list of selected items.
-Otherwise, \fIselop\fR is one of the following:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBselection set \fIitemList\fR
-\fIitemList\fR becomes the new selection.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBselection add \fIitemList\fR
-Add \fIitemList\fR to the selection
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBselection remove \fIitemList\fR
-Remove \fIitemList\fR from the selection
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBselection toggle \fIitemList\fR
-Toggle the selection state of each item in \fIitemList\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBset \fIitem\fR ?\fIcolumn\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR?
-With one argument, returns a dictionary of column/value pairs
-for the specified \fIitem\fR.
-With two arguments, returns the current value of the specified \fIcolumn\fR.
-With three arguments, sets the value of column \fIcolumn\fR
-in item \fIitem\fR to the specified \fIvalue\fR.
-See also \fBCOLUMN IDENTIFIERS\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
-Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag \fIargs...\fR
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag bind \fItagName \fR?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIscript\fR?
-Add a Tk binding script for the event sequence \fIsequence\fR
-to the tag \fItagName\fR.  When an X event is delivered to an item,
-binding scripts for each of the item's \fB\-tags\fR are evaluated
-in order as per \fIbindtags(n)\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB<KeyPress>\fR, \fB<KeyRelease>\fR, and virtual events
-are sent to the focus item.
-\fB<ButtonPress>\fR, \fB<ButtonRelease>\fR, and \fB<Motion>\fR events
-are sent to the item under the mouse pointer.
-No other event types are supported.
-.PP
-The binding \fIscript\fR undergoes \fB%\fR-substitutions before
-evaluation; see \fBbind(n)\fR for details.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag configure \fItagName\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value...\fR?
-Query or modify the options for the specified \fItagName\fR.
-If one or more \fIoption/value\fR pairs are specified,
-sets the value of those options for the specified tag.
-If a single \fIoption\fR is specified,
-returns the value of that option
-(or the empty string if the option has not been specified for \fItagName\fR).
-With no additional arguments,
-returns a dictionary of the option settings for \fItagName\fR.
-See \fBTAG OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag has \fItagName\fR ?\fIitem\fR?
-If \fIitem\fR is specified, returns 1 or 0
-depending on whether the specified item has the named tag.
-Otherwise, returns a list of all items which have
-the specified tag.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag names\fR
-Returns a list of all tags used by the widget.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag add \fItag items\fR
-Adds the specified \fItag\fR to each of the listed \fIitems\fR.
-If \fItag\fR is already present for a particular item,
-then the \fB\-tags\fR for that item are unchanged.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBtag remove \fItag\fR ?\fIitems\fR?
-Removes the specified \fItag\fR from each of the listed \fIitems\fR.
-If \fIitems\fR is omitted, removes \fItag\fR from each item in the tree.
-If \fItag\fR is not present for a particular item,
-then the \fB\-tags\fR for that item are unchanged.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR
-Standard command for horizontal scrolling; see \fIwidget(n)\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fByview \fIargs\fR
-Standard command for vertical scrolling; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR.
-.SH "ITEM OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The following item options may be specified for items
-in the \fBinsert\fR and \fBitem\fR widget commands.
-.OP \-text text Text
-The textual label to display for the item.
-.OP \-image image Image
-A Tk image, displayed to the left of the label.
-.OP \-values values Values
-The list of values associated with the item.
-.RS
-.PP
-Each item should have the same number of values as
-the \fB\-columns\fR widget option.
-If there are fewer values than columns,
-the remaining values are assumed empty.
-If there are more values than columns,
-the extra values are ignored.
-.RE
-.OP \-open open Open
-A boolean value indicating whether the item's children
-should be displayed (\fB\-open true\fR) or hidden (\fB\-open false\fR).
-.OP \-tags tags Tags
-A list of tags associated with this item.
-.SH "TAG OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The following options may be specified on tags:
-.IP \fB\-foreground\fR
-Specifies the text foreground color.
-.IP \fB\-background\fR
-Specifies the cell or item background color.
-.IP \fB\-font\fR
-Specifies the font to use when drawing text.
-.\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-anchor
-.\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-padding
-.\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-text
-.IP \fB\-image\fR
-Specifies the item image, in case the item's \fB\-image\fR option is empty.
-.\" .PP
-.\" \fI(@@@ TODO: sort out order of precedence for options)\fR
-.SH "COLUMN IDENTIFIERS"
-.PP
-Column identifiers take any of the following forms:
-.IP \(bu
-A symbolic name from the list of \fB\-columns\fR.
-.IP \(bu
-An integer \fIn\fR, specifying the \fIn\fRth data column.
-.IP \(bu
-A string of the form \fB#\fIn\fR, where \fIn\fR is an integer,
-specifying the \fIn\fRth display column.
-.PP
-\fBNOTE:\fR
-Item \fB\-values\fR may be displayed in a different order than
-the order in which they are stored.
-.PP
-\fBNOTE:\fR Column #0 always refers to the tree column,
-even if \fB\-show tree\fR is not specified.
-.PP
-A \fIdata column number\fR is an index into an item's \fB\-values\fR list;
-a \fIdisplay column number\fR is the column number in the tree
-where the values are displayed.
-Tree labels are displayed in column #0.
-If \fB\-displaycolumns\fR is not set,
-then data column \fIn\fR is displayed in display column \fB#\fIn+1\fR.
-Again, \fBcolumn #0 always refers to the tree column\fR.
-.SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS"
-.PP
-The treeview widget generates the following virtual events.
-.IP <<TreeviewSelect>>
-Generated whenever the selection changes.
-.IP <<TreeviewOpen>>
-Generated just before setting the focus item to \fB\-open true\fR.
-.IP <<TreeviewClose>>
-Generated just after setting the focus item to \fB\-open false\fR.
-.PP
-The \fBfocus\fR and \fBselection\fR widget commands can be used
-to determine the affected item or items.
-'\" Not yet:
-'\" In Tk 8.5, the affected item is also passed as the \fB\-detail\fR field
-'\" of the virtual event.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::widget(n), listbox(n), image(n), bind(n)
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_vsapi.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_vsapi.n
deleted file mode 100644
index af63c39..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_vsapi.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2008 Pat Thoyts
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk_vsapi n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk_vsapi \- Define a Microsoft Visual Styles element
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBttk::style element create \fIname\fR \fBvsapi\fR \fIclassName\fR \fIpartId\fR ?\fIstateMap\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBvsapi\fR element factory creates a new element
-in the current theme whose visual appearance is drawn using the
-Microsoft Visual Styles API which is responsible for the themed styles
-on Windows XP and Vista. This factory permits any of the Visual
-Styles parts to be declared as Ttk elements that can then be
-included in a style layout to modify the appearance of Ttk widgets.
-.PP
-\fIclassName\fR and \fIpartId\fR are required parameters and specify
-the Visual Styles class and part as given in the Microsoft
-documentation. The \fIstateMap\fR may be provided to map Ttk states to
-Visual Styles API states (see \fBSTATE MAP\fR).
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-Valid \fIoptions\fR are:
-.TP
-\fB\-padding \fIpadding\fR
-.
-Specify the element's interior padding.
-\fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers specifying
-the left, top, right and bottom padding quantities respectively.
-If fewer than four elements are specified,
-\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
-\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
-\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
-In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding;
-a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding;
-a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget.
-This option may not be mixed with any other options.
-.TP
-\fB\-margins \fIpadding\fR
-.
-Specifies the elements exterior padding.
-\fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers specifying
-the left, top, right and bottom padding quantities respectively.
-This option may not be mixed with any other options.
-.TP
-\fB\-width \fIwidth\fR
-.
-Specifies the height for the element. If this option is set then
-the Visual Styles API will not be queried for the recommended
-size or the part. If this option is set then \fB\-height\fR should
-also be set. The \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR options cannot
-be mixed with the \fB\-padding\fR or \fB\-margins\fR options.
-.TP
-\fB\-height \fIheight\fR
-.
-Specifies the height of the element. See the comments for \fB\-width\fR.
-.SH "STATE MAP"
-.PP
-The \fIstateMap\fR parameter is a list of ttk states and the
-corresponding Visual Styles API state value.
-This permits the element appearance to respond to changes in the
-widget state such as becoming active or being pressed. The list should
-be as described for the \fBttk::style map\fR command but note that the
-last pair in the list should be the default state and is typically an
-empty list and 1. Unfortunately all the Visual Styles parts have
-different state values and these must be looked up either in the
-Microsoft documentation or more likely in the header files. The
-original header to use was \fItmschema.h\fR, but in more recent
-versions of the Windows Development Kit this is \fIvssym32.h\fR.
-.PP
-If no \fIstateMap\fR parameter is given there is an implicit default
-map of {{} 1}
-.SH "EXAMPLE"
-.PP
-Create a correctly themed close button by changing the layout of
-a \fBttk::button\fR(n). This uses the WINDOW part WP_SMALLCLOSEBUTTON
-and as documented the states CBS_DISABLED, CBS_HOT, CBS_NORMAL and
-CBS_PUSHED are mapped from ttk states.
-.CS
-ttk::style element create smallclose \fBvsapi\fR WINDOW 19 \\
-    {disabled 4 pressed 3 active 2 {} 1}
-ttk::style layout CloseButton {CloseButton.smallclose -sticky news}
-pack [ttk::button .close -style CloseButton]
-.CE
-.PP
-Change the appearance of a \fBttk::checkbutton\fR(n) to use the
-Explorer pin part EBP_HEADERPIN.
-.CS
-ttk::style element create pin \fBvsapi\fR EXPLORERBAR 3 {
-    {pressed !selected} 3
-    {active !selected} 2
-    {pressed selected} 6
-    {active selected} 5
-    {selected} 4
-    {} 1
-}
-ttk::style layout Explorer.Pin {Explorer.Pin.pin -sticky news}
-pack [ttk::checkbutton .pin -style Explorer.Pin]
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::intro(n), ttk::widget(n), ttk::style(n), ttk_image(n)
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-style, theme, appearance, windows
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_widget.n b/tk8.6/doc/ttk_widget.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d362bba..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/ttk_widget.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH ttk::widget n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ttk::widget \- Standard options and commands supported by Tk themed widgets
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual describes common widget options and commands.
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-The following options are supported by all Tk themed widgets:
-.OP \-class undefined undefined
-Specifies the window class.
-The class is used when querying the option database
-for the window's other options, to determine the default
-bindtags for the window, and to select the widget's default
-layout and style.
-This is a read-only option:
-it may only be specified when the window is created,
-and may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command.
-.OP \-cursor cursor Cursor
-Specifies the mouse cursor to be used for the widget.
-See \fBTk_GetCursor\fR and \fIcursors(n)\fR in the Tk reference manual
-for the legal values.
-If set to the empty string (the default),
-the cursor is inherited from the parent widget.
-.OP \-takefocus takeFocus TakeFocus
-Determines whether the window accepts the focus during keyboard traversal.
-Either \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, a command prefix (to which the widget path
-is appended, and which should return \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR),
-or the empty string.
-See \fIoptions(n)\fR in the Tk reference manual for the full description.
-.OP \-style style Style
-May be used to specify a custom widget style.
-.SH "SCROLLABLE WIDGET OPTIONS"
-The following options are supported by widgets that
-are controllable by a scrollbar.
-See \fIscrollbar(n)\fR for more information
-.OP \-xscrollcommand xScrollCommand ScrollCommand
-A command prefix, used to communicate with horizontal scrollbars.
-.RS
-When the view in the widget's window changes, the widget will
-generate a Tcl command by concatenating the scroll command and
-two numbers.
-Each of the numbers is a fraction between 0 and 1 indicating
-a position in the document; 0 indicates the beginning,
-and 1 indicates the end.
-The first fraction indicates the first information in the widget
-that is visible in the window, and the second fraction indicates
-the information just after the last portion that is visible.
-.PP
-Typically the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option consists of the path name
-of a \fBscrollbar\fR widget followed by
-.QW set ,
-e.g.
-.QW ".x.scrollbar set" .
-This will cause the scrollbar to be updated whenever the view in the
-window changes.
-.PP
-If this option is set to the empty string (the default),
-then no command will be executed.
-.RE
-.OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand
-A command prefix, used to communicate with vertical scrollbars.
-See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR above for details.
-.SH "LABEL OPTIONS"
-The following options are supported by labels, buttons,
-and other button-like widgets:
-.OP \-compound compound Compound
-Specifies how to display the image relative to the text,
-in the case both \fB\-text\fR and \fB\-image\fR are present.
-Valid values are:
-.RS
-.IP text
-Display text only.
-.IP image
-Display image only.
-.IP center
-Display text centered on top of image.
-.IP top
-.IP bottom
-.IP left
-.IP right
-Display image above, below, left of, or right of the text, respectively.
-.IP none
-The default; display the image if present, otherwise the text.
-.RE
-.OP \-image image Image
-Specifies an image to display.
-This is a list of 1 or more elements.
-The first element is the default image name.
-The rest of the list is a sequence of \fIstatespec / value\fR pairs
-as per \fBstyle map\fR, specifying different images to use when
-the widget is in a particular state or combination of states.
-All images in the list should have the same size.
-.OP \-padding padding Padding
-Specifies the internal padding for the widget.
-The padding is a list of up to four length specifications
-\fIleft top right bottom\fR.
-If fewer than four elements are specified,
-\fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR,
-\fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and
-\fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR.
-In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding;
-a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding;
-a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget.
-.OP \-text text Text
-Specifies a text string to be displayed inside the widget
-(unless overridden by \fB\-textvariable\fR).
-.OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable
-Specifies the name of a global variable whose value will be used
-in place of the \fB\-text\fR resource.
-.OP \-underline underline Underline
-If set, specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline
-in the text string.
-The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation.
-.OP \-width width Width
-If greater than zero, specifies how much space, in character widths,
-to allocate for the text label.
-If less than zero, specifies a minimum width.
-If zero or unspecified, the natural width of the text label is used.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY OPTIONS"
-.OP \-state state State
-May be set to \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR
-to control the \fBdisabled\fR state bit.
-This is a write-only option:
-setting it changes the widget state,
-but the \fBstate\fR widget command
-does not affect the \fB\-state\fR option.
-.SH COMMANDS
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR
-.
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by \fIoption\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR?
-.
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified,
-then the command modifies the given widget option(s)
-to have the given value(s);
-in this case the command returns an empty string.
-If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR,
-then the command returns a list describing the named option:
-the elements of the list are the
-option name, database name, database class, default value,
-and current value.
-.\" Note: Ttk widgets don't use TK_OPTION_SYNONYM.
-If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for \fIpathName\fR.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBidentify element \fIx y\fR
-.
-Returns the name of the element under the point given
-by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, or an empty string if the point does
-not lie within any element.
-\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are pixel coordinates relative to the widget.
-Some widgets accept other \fBidentify\fR subcommands.
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-.
-Test the widget's state.
-If \fIscript\fR is not specified, returns 1 if
-the widget state matches \fIstatespec\fR and 0 otherwise.
-If \fIscript\fR is specified, equivalent to
-.CS
-if {[\fIpathName\fR instate \fIstateSpec\fR]} \fIscript\fR
-.CE
-.TP
-\fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR?
-.
-Modify or inquire widget state.
-If \fIstateSpec\fR is present, sets the widget state:
-for each flag in \fIstateSpec\fR, sets the corresponding flag
-or clears it if prefixed by an exclamation point.
-.RS
-Returns a new state spec indicating which flags were changed:
-.CS
-set changes [\fIpathName \fRstate \fIspec\fR]
-\fIpathName \fRstate $changes
-.CE
-will restore \fIpathName\fR to the original state.
-If \fIstateSpec\fR is not specified,
-returns a list of the currently-enabled state flags.
-.RE
-.SH "WIDGET STATES"
-The widget state is a bitmap of independent state flags.
-Widget state flags include:
-.TP
-\fBactive\fR
-.
-The mouse cursor is over the widget
-and pressing a mouse button will cause some action to occur. (aka
-.QW prelight
-(Gnome),
-.QW hot
-(Windows),
-.QW hover ).
-.TP
-\fBdisabled\fR
-.
-Widget is disabled under program control (aka
-.QW unavailable ,
-.QW inactive ).
-.TP
-\fBfocus\fR
-.
-Widget has keyboard focus.
-.TP
-\fBpressed\fR
-.
-Widget is being pressed (aka
-.QW armed
-in Motif).
-.TP
-\fBselected\fR
-.
-.QW On ,
-.QW true ,
-or
-.QW current
-for things like checkbuttons and radiobuttons.
-.TP
-\fBbackground\fR
-.
-Windows and the Mac have a notion of an
-.QW active
-or foreground window.
-The \fBbackground\fR state is set for widgets in a background window,
-and cleared for those in the foreground window.
-.TP
-\fBreadonly\fR
-.
-Widget should not allow user modification.
-.TP
-\fBalternate\fR
-.
-A widget-specific alternate display format.
-For example, used for checkbuttons and radiobuttons in the
-.QW tristate
-or
-.QW mixed
-state, and for buttons with \fB\-default active\fR.
-.TP
-\fBinvalid\fR
-.
-The widget's value is invalid.
-(Potential uses: scale widget value out of bounds,
-entry widget value failed validation.)
-.TP
-\fBhover\fR
-.
-The mouse cursor is within the widget.
-This is similar to the \fBactive\fP state;
-it is used in some themes for widgets that
-provide distinct visual feedback for
-the active widget in addition to the active element
-within the widget.
-.PP
-A \fIstate specification\fR or \fIstateSpec\fR is a list
-of state names, optionally prefixed with an exclamation point (!)
-indicating that the bit is off.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.CS
-set b [ttk::button .b]
-
-# Disable the widget:
-$b \fBstate\fR disabled
-
-# Invoke the widget only if it is currently pressed and enabled:
-$b \fBinstate\fR {pressed !disabled} { .b invoke }
-
-# Reenable widget:
-$b \fBstate\fR !disabled
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ttk::intro(n), ttk::style(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-state, configure, option
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/winfo.n b/tk8.6/doc/winfo.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5008448..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/winfo.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,354 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-winfo \- Return window-related information
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBwinfo\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBwinfo\fR command is used to retrieve information about windows
-managed by Tk.  It can take any of a number of different forms,
-depending on the \fIoption\fR argument.  The legal forms are:
-.TP
-\fBwinfo atom \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIname\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the integer identifier for the
-atom whose name is \fIname\fR.  If no atom exists with the name
-\fIname\fR then a new one is created.
-If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the atom is looked
-up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
-the display of the application's main window.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo atomname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR
-Returns the textual name for the atom whose integer identifier is
-\fIid\fR.
-If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked
-up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
-the display of the application's main window.
-This command is the inverse of the \fBwinfo atom\fR command.
-It generates an error if no such atom exists.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo cells \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the
-color map for \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo children \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a list containing the path names of all the children
-of \fIwindow\fR. Top-level windows are returned as children
-of their logical parents. The list is in stacking order, with
-the lowest window first, except for Top-level windows which
-are not returned in stacking order. Use the \fBwm stackorder\fR
-command to query the stacking order of Top-level windows.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo class \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the class name for \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo colormapfull \fIwindow\fR
-Returns 1 if the colormap for \fIwindow\fR is known to be full, 0
-otherwise.  The colormap for a window is
-.QW known
-to be full if the last
-attempt to allocate a new color on that window failed and this
-application has not freed any colors in the colormap since the
-failed allocation.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo containing \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIrootX rootY\fR
-Returns the path name for the window containing the point given
-by \fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR.
-\fIRootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR are specified in screen units (i.e.
-any form acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) in the coordinate
-system of the root window (if a virtual-root window manager is in
-use then the coordinate system of the virtual root window is used).
-If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the coordinates refer
-to the screen containing \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise they refer to the
-screen of the application's main window.
-If no window in this application contains the point then an empty
-string is returned.
-In selecting the containing window, children are given higher priority
-than parents and among siblings the highest one in the stacking order is
-chosen.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo depth \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the depth of \fIwindow\fR (number
-of bits per pixel).
-.TP
-\fBwinfo exists \fIwindow\fR
-Returns 1 if there exists a window named \fIwindow\fR, 0 if no such
-window exists.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo fpixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR
-Returns a floating-point value giving the number of pixels
-in \fIwindow\fR corresponding to the distance given by \fInumber\fR.
-\fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
-to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR, such as
-.QW 2.0c
-or
-.QW 1i .
-The return value may be fractional;  for an integer value, use
-\fBwinfo pixels\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo geometry \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the geometry for \fIwindow\fR, in the form
-\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR.  All dimensions are
-in pixels.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo height \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's height in pixels.
-When a window is first created its height will be 1 pixel;  the
-height will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil
-the window's needs.
-If you need the true height immediately after creating a widget,
-invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
-or use \fBwinfo reqheight\fR to get the window's requested height
-instead of its actual height.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo id \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a hexadecimal string giving a low-level platform-specific
-identifier for \fIwindow\fR.  On Unix platforms, this is the X
-window identifier.  Under Windows, this is the Windows
-HWND.  On the Macintosh the value has no meaning outside Tk.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo interps \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR?
-Returns a list whose members are the names of all Tcl interpreters
-(e.g. all Tk-based applications) currently registered for a particular display.
-If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the return value refers
-to the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it refers to
-the display of the application's main window.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo ismapped \fIwindow\fR
-Returns \fB1\fR if \fIwindow\fR is currently mapped, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo manager \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the name of the geometry manager currently
-responsible for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR
-is not managed by any geometry manager.
-The name is usually the name of the Tcl command for the geometry
-manager, such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR.
-If the geometry manager is a widget, such as canvases or text, the
-name is the widget's class command, such as \fBcanvas\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo name \fIwindow\fR
-Returns \fIwindow\fR's name (i.e. its name within its parent, as opposed
-to its full path name).
-The command \fBwinfo name .\fR will return the name of the application.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo parent \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's parent, or an empty string
-if \fIwindow\fR is the main window of the application.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo pathname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR
-Returns the path name of the window whose X identifier is \fIid\fR.
-\fIId\fR must be a decimal, hexadecimal, or octal integer and must
-correspond to a window in the invoking application.
-If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked
-up on the display of \fIwindow\fR;  otherwise it is looked up on
-the display of the application's main window.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo pixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR
-Returns the number of pixels in \fIwindow\fR corresponding
-to the distance given by \fInumber\fR.
-\fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
-to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as
-.QW 2.0c
-or
-.QW 1i .
-The result is rounded to the nearest integer value;  for a
-fractional result, use \fBwinfo fpixels\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo pointerx \fIwindow\fR
-If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the
-pointer's x coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
-If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is
-measured in the virtual root.
-If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
--1 is returned.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo pointerxy \fIwindow\fR
-If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns a list
-with two elements, which are the pointer's x and y coordinates measured
-in pixels in the screen's root window.
-If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
-is computed in the virtual root.
-If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
-both of the returned coordinates are \-1.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo pointery \fIwindow\fR
-If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the
-pointer's y coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
-If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
-is computed in the virtual root.
-If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then
--1 is returned.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo reqheight \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested height,
-in pixels.  This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry
-manager to compute its geometry.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo reqwidth \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested width,
-in pixels.  This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry
-manager to compute its geometry.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo rgb \fIwindow color\fR
-Returns a list containing three decimal values in the range 0 to
-65535, which are the
-red, green, and blue intensities that correspond to \fIcolor\fR in
-the window given by \fIwindow\fR.  \fIColor\fR
-may be specified in any of the forms acceptable for a color
-option.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo rootx \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in the root
-window of the screen, of the
-upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
-has no border).
-.TP
-\fBwinfo rooty \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in the root
-window of the screen, of the
-upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
-has no border).
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screen \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the name of the screen associated with \fIwindow\fR, in
-the form \fIdisplayName\fR.\fIscreenIndex\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screencells \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the default
-color map for \fIwindow\fR's screen.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screendepth \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the depth of the root window
-of \fIwindow\fR's screen (number of bits per pixel).
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screenheight \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
-in pixels.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screenmmheight \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
-in millimeters.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screenmmwidth \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
-in millimeters.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screenvisual \fIwindow\fR
-Returns one of the following strings to indicate the default visual
-class for \fIwindow\fR's screen: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR,
-\fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or
-\fBtruecolor\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo screenwidth \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen,
-in pixels.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo server \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a string containing information about the server for
-\fIwindow\fR's display.  The exact format of this string may vary
-from platform to platform.  For X servers the string
-has the form
-.QW "\fBX\fImajor\fBR\fIminor vendor vendorVersion\fR"
-where \fImajor\fR and \fIminor\fR are the version and revision
-numbers provided by the server (e.g., \fBX11R5\fR), \fIvendor\fR
-is the name of the vendor for the server, and \fIvendorRelease\fR
-is an integer release number provided by the server.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo toplevel \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the path name of the top-of-hierarchy window containing \fIwindow\fR.
-In standard Tk this will always be a \fBtoplevel\fR widget, but extensions may
-create other kinds of top-of-hierarchy widgets.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo viewable \fIwindow\fR
-Returns 1 if \fIwindow\fR and all of its ancestors up through the
-nearest toplevel window are mapped.  Returns 0 if any of these
-windows are not mapped.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo visual \fIwindow\fR
-Returns one of the following strings to indicate the visual
-class for \fIwindow\fR: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR,
-\fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or
-\fBtruecolor\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo visualid \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the X identifier for the visual for \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo visualsavailable \fIwindow\fR ?\fBincludeids\fR?
-Returns a list whose elements describe the visuals available for
-\fIwindow\fR's screen.
-Each element consists of a visual class followed by an integer depth.
-The class has the same form as returned by \fBwinfo visual\fR.
-The depth gives the number of bits per pixel in the visual.
-In addition, if the \fBincludeids\fR argument is provided, then the
-depth is followed by the X identifier for the visual.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo vrootheight \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the height of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR
-if there is one;  otherwise returns the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo vrootwidth \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the width of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR
-if there is one;  otherwise returns the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo vrootx \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the x-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR,
-relative to the root window of its screen.
-This is normally either zero or negative.
-Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo vrooty \fIwindow\fR
-Returns the y-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR,
-relative to the root window of its screen.
-This is normally either zero or negative.
-Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo width \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's width in pixels.
-When a window is first created its width will be 1 pixel;  the
-width will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfil
-the window's needs.
-If you need the true width immediately after creating a widget,
-invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
-or use \fBwinfo reqwidth\fR to get the window's requested width
-instead of its actual width.
-.TP
-\fBwinfo x \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's
-parent, of the
-upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
-has no border).
-.TP
-\fBwinfo y \fIwindow\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's
-parent, of the
-upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it
-has no border).
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-Print where the mouse pointer is and what window it is currently over:
-.CS
-lassign [\fBwinfo pointerxy\fR .] x y
-puts \-nonewline "Mouse pointer at ($x,$y) which is "
-set win [\fBwinfo containing\fR $x $y]
-if {$win eq ""} {
-    puts "over no window"
-} else {
-    puts "over $win"
-}
-.CE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-atom, children, class, geometry, height, identifier, information, interpreters,
-mapped, parent, path name, screen, virtual root, width, window
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/wish.1 b/tk8.6/doc/wish.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 93ade0d..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/wish.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,218 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-wish \- Simple windowing shell
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR?
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20
-Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR.
-This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument.
-.IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20
-Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of
-using the default colormap for the screen.
-.IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20
-Display (and screen) on which to display window.
-.IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20
-Initial geometry to use for window.  If this option is specified, its
-value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's
-Tcl interpreter.
-.IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20
-Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and
-as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands.
-.IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20
-Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors
-are reported immediately.  This will result in much slower
-execution, but it is useful for debugging.
-.IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20
-Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in
-the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an
-independent toplevel window.  \fIId\fR must be specified in the same
-way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e.
-it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command).
-.RS
-Note that on some platforms this will only work correctly if \fIid\fR
-refers to a Tk \fBframe\fR or \fBtoplevel\fR that has its
-\fB\-container\fR option enabled.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20
-Specifies the visual to use for the window.
-\fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
-procedure.
-.IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20
-Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR
-variable without interpreting them.
-This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR
-to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them.
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBWish\fR is a simple program consisting of the Tcl command
-language, the Tk toolkit, and a main program that reads commands
-from standard input or from a file.
-It creates a main window and then processes Tcl commands.
-If \fBwish\fR is invoked with arguments, then the first few
-arguments, ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName\fR?, specify the
-name of a script file, and, optionally, the
-encoding of the text data stored in that script file.  A value
-for \fIfileName\fR is recognized if the appropriate argument
-does not start with
-.QW \- .
-.PP
-If there are no arguments, or the arguments do not specify a \fIfileName\fR,
-then wish reads Tcl commands interactively from standard input.
-It will continue processing commands until all windows have been
-deleted or until end-of-file is reached on standard input.
-If there exists a file
-.QW \fB.wishrc\fR
-in the home directory of the user, \fBwish\fR evaluates the file as a
-Tcl script just before reading the first command from standard input.
-.PP
-If arguments to \fBwish\fR do specify a \fIfileName\fR, then 
-\fIfileName\fR is treated as the name of a script file.
-\fBWish\fR will evaluate the script in \fIfileName\fR (which
-presumably creates a user interface), then it will respond to events
-until all windows have been deleted.
-Commands will not be read from standard input.
-There is no automatic evaluation of
-.QW \fB.wishrc\fR
-when the name of a script file is presented on the \fBwish\fR command line,
-but the script file can always \fBsource\fR it if desired.
-.PP
-Note that on Windows, the \fBwish\fIversion\fB.exe\fR program varies
-from the \fBtclsh\fIversion\fB.exe\fR program in an additional
-important way: it does not connect to a standard Windows console and
-is instead a windowed program. Because of this, it additionally
-provides access to its own \fBconsole\fR command.
-.SH "OPTION PROCESSING"
-.PP
-\fBWish\fR automatically processes all of the command-line options
-described in the \fBOPTIONS\fR summary above.
-Any other command-line arguments besides these are passed through
-to the application using the \fBargc\fR and \fBargv\fR variables
-described later.
-.SH "APPLICATION NAME AND CLASS"
-.PP
-The name of the application, which is used for purposes such as
-\fBsend\fR commands, is taken from the \fB\-name\fR option,
-if it is specified;  otherwise it is taken from \fIfileName\fR,
-if it is specified, or from the command name by which
-\fBwish\fR was invoked.  In the last two cases, if the name contains a
-.QW /
-character, then only the characters after the last slash are used
-as the application name.
-.PP
-The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as
-specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults
-file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is
-capitalized.
-.SH "VARIABLES"
-.PP
-\fBWish\fR sets the following Tcl variables:
-.TP 15
-\fBargc\fR
-Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none),
-not including the options described above.
-.TP 15
-\fBargv\fR
-Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments
-that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or do not match any of the
-options described in \fBOPTIONS\fR above, in order, or an empty string
-if there are no such arguments.
-.TP 15
-\fBargv0\fR
-Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified.
-Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked.
-.TP 15
-\fBgeometry\fR
-If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its
-value into this variable.  If the variable still exists after
-\fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of
-the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main
-window's geometry.
-.TP 15
-\fBtcl_interactive\fR
-Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR
-was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like
-device), 0 otherwise.
-.SH "SCRIPT FILES"
-.PP
-If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is
-.CS
-\fB#!/usr/local/bin/wish\fR
-.CE
-then you can invoke the script file directly from your shell if
-you mark it as executable.
-This assumes that \fBwish\fR has been installed in the default
-location in /usr/local/bin;  if it is installed somewhere else
-then you will have to modify the above line to match.
-Many UNIX systems do not allow the \fB#!\fR line to exceed about
-30 characters in length, so be sure that the \fBwish\fR executable
-can be accessed with a short file name.
-.PP
-An even better approach is to start your script files with the
-following three lines:
-.CS
-\fB#!/bin/sh
-# the next line restarts using wish \e
-exec wish "$0" ${1+"$@"}\fR
-.CE
-This approach has three advantages over the approach in the previous
-paragraph.  First, the location of the \fBwish\fR binary does not have
-to be hard-wired into the script:  it can be anywhere in your shell
-search path.  Second, it gets around the 30-character file name limit
-in the previous approach.
-Third, this approach will work even if \fBwish\fR is
-itself a shell script (this is done on some systems in order to
-handle multiple architectures or operating systems:  the \fBwish\fR
-script selects one of several binaries to run).  The three lines
-cause both \fBsh\fR and \fBwish\fR to process the script, but the
-\fBexec\fR is only executed by \fBsh\fR.
-\fBsh\fR processes the script first;  it treats the second
-line as a comment and executes the third line.
-The \fBexec\fR statement cause the shell to stop processing and
-instead to start up \fBwish\fR to reprocess the entire script.
-When \fBwish\fR starts up, it treats all three lines as comments,
-since the backslash at the end of the second line causes the third
-line to be treated as part of the comment on the second line.
-.PP
-The end of a script file may be marked either by the physical end of
-the medium, or by the character,
-.QW \e032
-.PQ \eu001a ", control-Z" .
-If this character is present in the file, the \fBwish\fR application
-will read text up to but not including the character.  An application
-that requires this character in the file may encode it as
-.QW \e032 ,
-.QW \ex1a ,
-or
-.QW \eu001a ;
-or may generate it by use of commands such as \fBformat\fR or \fBbinary\fR.
-.SH PROMPTS
-.PP
-When \fBwish\fR is invoked interactively it normally prompts for each
-command with
-.QW "\fB% \fR" .
-You can change the prompt by setting the
-variables \fBtcl_prompt1\fR and \fBtcl_prompt2\fR.  If variable
-\fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script
-to output a prompt;  instead of outputting a prompt \fBwish\fR
-will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR.
-The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when
-a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete;
-if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for
-incomplete commands.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-tclsh(1), toplevel(n), Tk_Main(3), Tk_MainLoop(3), Tk_MainWindow(3)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, argument, interpreter, prompt, script file, shell,
-toolkit, toplevel
diff --git a/tk8.6/doc/wm.n b/tk8.6/doc/wm.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e7aedf7..0000000
--- a/tk8.6/doc/wm.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,859 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-.TH wm n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.so man.macros
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-wm \- Communicate with window manager
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBwm\fR \fIoption window \fR?\fIargs\fR?
-.BE
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBwm\fR command is used to interact with window managers in
-order to control such things as the title for a window, its geometry,
-or the increments in terms of which it may be resized.  The \fBwm\fR
-command can take any of a number of different forms, depending on
-the \fIoption\fR argument.  All of the forms expect at least one
-additional argument, \fIwindow\fR, which must be the path name of a
-top-level window.
-.PP
-The legal forms for the \fBwm\fR command are:
-.TP
-\fBwm aspect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIminNumer minDenom maxNumer maxDenom\fR?
-.
-If \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
-are all specified, then they will be passed to the window manager
-and the window manager should use them to enforce a range of
-acceptable aspect ratios for \fIwindow\fR.  The aspect ratio of
-\fIwindow\fR (width/length) will be constrained to lie
-between \fIminNumer\fR/\fIminDenom\fR and \fImaxNumer\fR/\fImaxDenom\fR.
-If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are all specified as empty strings, then
-any existing aspect ratio restrictions are removed.
-If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are specified, then the command returns an
-empty string.  Otherwise, it returns
-a Tcl list containing four elements, which are the current values
-of \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR
-(if no aspect restrictions are in effect, then an empty string is
-returned).
-.TP
-\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR
-.TP
-\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption\fR?
-.TP
-\fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption value option value...\fR?
-.
-This subcommand returns or sets platform specific attributes associated
-with a window. The first form returns a list of the platform specific
-flags and their values. The second form returns the value for the
-specific option. The third form sets one or more of the values. The
-values are as follows:
-.RS
-.PP
-All platforms support the following attributes (though X11 users
-should see the notes below):
-.TP
-\fB\-alpha\fR
-.
-Specifies the alpha transparency level of the toplevel. It accepts a value
-from \fB0.0\fR (fully transparent) to \fB1.0\fR (opaque).  Values outside that
-range will be constrained.  Where not supported, the \fB\-alpha\fR value
-remains at \fB1.0\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-fullscreen\fR
-.
-Places the window in a mode that takes up the entire screen, has no
-borders, and covers the general use area (i.e. Start menu and taskbar on
-Windows, dock and menubar on OSX, general window decorations on X11).
-.TP
-\fB\-topmost\fR
-.
-Specifies whether this is a topmost window (displays above all other windows).
-.PP
-On Windows, the following attributes may be set.
-.TP
-\fB\-disabled\fR
-.
-Specifies whether the window is in a disabled state.
-.TP
-\fB\-toolwindow\fR
-.
-Specifies a toolwindow style window (as defined in the MSDN).
-.TP
-\fB\-transparentcolor\fR
-.
-Specifies the transparent color index of the toplevel.  It takes any color
-value accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR.  If the empty string is specified
-(default), no transparent color is used.  This is supported on Windows
-2000/XP+.  Where not supported, the \fB\-transparentcolor\fR value remains
-at \fB{}\fR.
-.PP
-On Mac OS X, the following attributes may be set.
-.TP
-\fB\-modified\fR
-.
-Specifies the modification state of the window (determines whether the
-window close widget contains the modification indicator and whether the
-proxy icon is draggable).
-.TP
-\fB\-notify\fR
-.
-Specifies process notification state (bouncing of the application dock icon).
-.TP
-\fB\-titlepath\fR
-.
-Specifies the path of the file referenced as the window proxy icon (which
-can be dragged and dropped in lieu of the file's finder icon).
-.TP
-\fB\-transparent\fR
-.
-Makes the window content area transparent and turns off the window shadow. For
-the transparency to be effective, the toplevel background needs to be set to a
-color with some alpha, e.g.
-.QW systemTransparent .
-.PP
-On X11, the following attributes may be set. These are not supported by all
-window managers, and will have no effect under older WMs.
-.\" See http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec
-.TP
-\fB\-type\fR
-.VS 8.6
-Requests that the window should be interpreted by the window manager as being
-of the specified type(s). This may cause the window to be decorated in a
-different way or otherwise managed differently, though exactly what happens is
-entirely up to the window manager. A list of types may be used, in order of
-preference. The following values are mapped to constants defined in the EWMH
-specification (using others is possible, but not advised):
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBdesktop\fR
-.
-indicates a desktop feature,
-.TP
-\fBdock\fR
-.
-indicates a dock/panel feature,
-.TP
-\fBtoolbar\fR
-.
-indicates a toolbar window that should be acting on behalf of another window,
-as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
-.TP
-\fBmenu\fR
-.
-indicates a torn-off menu that should be acting on behalf of another window,
-as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
-.TP
-\fButility\fR
-.
-indicates a utility window (e.g., palette or toolbox) that should be acting on
-behalf of another window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
-.TP
-\fBsplash\fR
-.
-indicates a splash screen, displayed during application start up,
-.TP
-\fBdialog\fR
-.
-indicates a general dialog window, that should be acting on behalf of another
-window, as indicated with \fBwm transient\fR,
-.TP
-\fBdropdown_menu\fR
-.
-indicates a menu summoned from a menu bar, which should usually also be set to
-be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
-.TP
-\fBpopup_menu\fR
-.
-indicates a popup menu, which should usually also be set to be
-override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
-.TP
-\fBtooltip\fR
-.
-indicates a tooltip window, which should usually also be set to be
-override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
-.TP
-\fBnotification\fR
-.
-indicates a window that provides a background notification of some event,
-which should usually also be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm
-overrideredirect\fR),
-.TP
-\fBcombo\fR
-.
-indicates the drop-down list of a combobox widget, which should usually also
-be set to be override-redirected (with \fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
-.TP
-\fBdnd\fR
-.
-indicates a window that represents something being dragged, which should
-usually also be set to be override-redirected (with
-\fBwm overrideredirect\fR),
-.TP
-\fBnormal\fR
-.
-indicates a window that has no special interpretation.
-.RE
-.VE 8.6
-.TP
-\fB\-zoomed\fR
-.
-Requests that the window should be maximized. This is the same as \fBwm state
-zoomed\fR on Windows and Mac OS X.
-.PP
-On X11, changes to window attributes are performed asynchronously. Querying
-the value of an attribute returns the current state, which will not be the
-same as the value most recently set if the window manager has not yet
-processed the request or if it does not support the attribute.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm client \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR?
-.
-If \fIname\fR is specified, this command stores \fIname\fR (which
-should be the name of
-the host on which the application is executing) in \fIwindow\fR's
-\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property for use by the window manager or
-session manager.
-The command returns an empty string in this case.
-If \fIname\fR is not specified, the command returns the last name
-set in a \fBwm client\fR command for \fIwindow\fR.
-If \fIname\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the
-\fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property from \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwm colormapwindows \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindowList\fR?
-.
-This command is used to manipulate the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR
-property, which provides information to the window managers about
-windows that have private colormaps.
-.RS
-.PP
-If \fIwindowList\fR is not specified, the command returns a list
-whose elements are the names of the windows in the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR
-property.
-If \fIwindowList\fR is specified, it consists of a list of window
-path names;  the command overwrites the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR
-property with the given windows and returns an empty string.
-The \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property should normally contain a
-list of the internal windows within \fIwindow\fR whose colormaps differ
-from their parents.
-.PP
-The order of the windows in the property indicates a priority order:
-the window manager will attempt to install as many colormaps as possible
-from the head of this list when \fIwindow\fR gets the colormap focus.
-If \fIwindow\fR is not included among the windows in \fIwindowList\fR,
-Tk implicitly adds it at the end of the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR
-property, so that its colormap is lowest in priority.
-If \fBwm colormapwindows\fR is not invoked, Tk will automatically set
-the property for each top-level window to all the internal windows
-whose colormaps differ from their parents, followed by the top-level
-itself;  the order of the internal windows is undefined.
-See the ICCCM documentation for more information on the
-\fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm command \fIwindow\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?
-.
-If \fIvalue\fR is specified, this command stores \fIvalue\fR in \fIwindow\fR's
-\fBWM_COMMAND\fR property for use by the window manager or
-session manager and returns an empty string.
-\fIValue\fR must have proper list structure;  the elements should
-contain the words of the command used to invoke the application.
-If \fIvalue\fR is not specified then the command returns the last value
-set in a \fBwm command\fR command for \fIwindow\fR.
-If \fIvalue\fR is specified as an empty string, the command
-deletes the \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property from \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwm deiconify \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be displayed in normal (non-iconified) form.
-This is done by mapping the window.  If the window has never been
-mapped then this command will not map the window, but it will ensure
-that when the window is first mapped it will be displayed
-in de-iconified form.  On Windows, a deiconified window will also be
-raised and be given the focus (made the active window).
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBwm focusmodel \fIwindow\fR ?\fBactive\fR|\fBpassive\fR?
-.
-If \fBactive\fR or \fBpassive\fR is supplied as an optional argument
-to the command, then it specifies the focus model for \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the command returns an empty string.  If no additional
-argument is supplied, then the command returns the current focus
-model for \fIwindow\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-An \fBactive\fR focus model means that \fIwindow\fR will claim the
-input focus for itself or its descendants, even at times when
-the focus is currently in some other application.  \fBPassive\fR means that
-\fIwindow\fR will never claim the focus for itself:  the window manager
-should give the focus to \fIwindow\fR at appropriate times.  However,
-once the focus has been given to \fIwindow\fR or one of its descendants,
-the application may re-assign the focus among \fIwindow\fR's descendants.
-The focus model defaults to \fBpassive\fR, and Tk's \fBfocus\fR command
-assumes a passive model of focusing.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm forget \fIwindow\fR
-.
-The \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped from the screen and will no longer
-be managed by \fBwm\fR.  Windows created with the \fBtoplevel\fR
-command will be treated like \fBframe\fR windows once they are no
-longer managed by \fBwm\fR, however, the \fB\-menu\fR configuration will be
-remembered and the menus will return once the widget is managed again.
-.TP
-\fBwm frame \fIwindow\fR
-.
-If \fIwindow\fR has been reparented by the window manager into a
-decorative frame, the command returns the platform specific window
-identifier for the outermost frame that contains \fIwindow\fR (the
-window whose parent is the root or virtual root).  If \fIwindow\fR
-has not been reparented by the window manager then the command returns
-the platform specific window identifier for \fIwindow\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwm geometry \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewGeometry\fR?
-.
-If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified, then the geometry of \fIwindow\fR
-is changed and an empty string is returned.  Otherwise the current
-geometry for \fIwindow\fR is returned (this is the most recent
-geometry specified either by manual resizing or
-in a \fBwm geometry\fR command).  \fINewGeometry\fR has
-the form \fB=\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB\(+-\fIx\fB\(+-\fIy\fR, where
-any of \fB=\fR, \fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fR, or \fB\(+-\fIx\fB\(+-\fIy\fR
-may be omitted.  \fIWidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are positive integers
-specifying the desired dimensions of \fIwindow\fR.  If \fIwindow\fR
-is gridded (see \fBGRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR below) then the dimensions
-are specified in grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel
-units.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIX\fR and \fIy\fR specify the desired location of
-\fIwindow\fR on the screen, in pixels.
-If \fIx\fR is preceded by \fB+\fR, it specifies
-the number of pixels between the left edge of the screen and the left
-edge of \fIwindow\fR's border;  if preceded by \fB\-\fR then
-\fIx\fR specifies the number of pixels
-between the right edge of the screen and the right edge of \fIwindow\fR's
-border.  If \fIy\fR is preceded by \fB+\fR then it specifies the
-number of pixels between the top of the screen and the top
-of \fIwindow\fR's border;  if \fIy\fR is preceded by \fB\-\fR then
-it specifies the number of pixels between the bottom of \fIwindow\fR's
-border and the bottom of the screen.
-.PP
-If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified as an empty string then any
-existing user-specified geometry for \fIwindow\fR is cancelled, and
-the window will revert to the size requested internally by its
-widgets.
-.PP
-Note that this is related to \fBwinfo geometry\fR, but not the same. That can
-only query the geometry, and always reflects Tk's current understanding of the
-actual size and location of \fIwindow\fR, whereas \fBwm geometry\fR allows
-both setting and querying of the \fIwindow manager\fR's understanding of the
-size and location of the window. This can vary significantly, for example to
-reflect the addition of decorative elements to \fIwindow\fR such as title
-bars, and window managers are not required to precisely follow the requests
-made through this command.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm grid \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbaseWidth baseHeight widthInc heightInc\fR?
-.
-This command indicates that \fIwindow\fR is to be managed as a
-gridded window.
-It also specifies the relationship between grid units and pixel units.
-\fIBaseWidth\fR and \fIbaseHeight\fR specify the number of grid
-units corresponding to the pixel dimensions requested internally
-by \fIwindow\fR using \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR.  \fIWidthInc\fR
-and \fIheightInc\fR specify the number of pixels in each horizontal
-and vertical grid unit.
-These four values determine a range of acceptable sizes for
-\fIwindow\fR, corresponding to grid-based widths and heights
-that are non-negative integers.
-Tk will pass this information to the window manager;  during
-manual resizing, the window manager will restrict the window's size
-to one of these acceptable sizes.
-.RS
-.PP
-Furthermore, during manual resizing the window manager will display
-the window's current size in terms of grid units rather than pixels.
-If \fIbaseWidth\fR etc. are all specified as empty strings, then
-\fIwindow\fR will no longer be managed as a gridded window.  If
-\fIbaseWidth\fR etc. are specified then the return value is an
-empty string.
-.PP
-Otherwise the return value is a Tcl list containing
-four elements corresponding to the current \fIbaseWidth\fR,
-\fIbaseHeight\fR, \fIwidthInc\fR, and \fIheightInc\fR;  if
-\fIwindow\fR is not currently gridded, then an empty string
-is returned.
-.PP
-Note: this command should not be needed very often, since the
-\fBTk_SetGrid\fR library procedure and the \fBsetGrid\fR option
-provide easier access to the same functionality.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm group \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR?
-.
-If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it gives the path name for the leader of
-a group of related windows.  The window manager may use this information,
-for example, to unmap all of the windows in a group when the group's
-leader is iconified.  \fIPathName\fR may be specified as an empty string to
-remove \fIwindow\fR from any group association.  If \fIpathName\fR is
-specified then the command returns an empty string;  otherwise it
-returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current group leader, or an empty
-string if \fIwindow\fR is not part of any group.
-.TP
-\fBwm iconbitmap \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR?
-.
-If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
-forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details).
-This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be displayed in
-\fIwindow\fR's icon, and the command returns an empty string.  If
-an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR, then any current icon
-bitmap is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR.
-If \fIbitmap\fR is specified then the command returns an empty string.
-Otherwise it returns the name of
-the current icon bitmap associated with \fIwindow\fR, or an empty
-string if \fIwindow\fR has no icon bitmap.  On the Windows operating
-system, an additional flag is supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBwm iconbitmap \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? ?\fIimage\fR?
-.
-If the \fB\-default\fR
-flag is given, the icon is applied to all toplevel windows (existing
-and future) to which no other specific icon has yet been applied.
-In addition to bitmap image types, a full path specification to
-any file which contains a valid
-Windows icon is also accepted (usually .ico or .icr files), or any
-file for which the shell has assigned an icon.  Tcl will
-first test if the file contains an icon, then if it has an assigned
-icon, and finally, if that fails, test for
-a bitmap.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm iconify \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be iconified.  It \fIwindow\fR has not
-yet been mapped for the first time, this command will arrange for
-it to appear in the iconified state when it is eventually mapped.
-.TP
-\fBwm iconmask \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR?
-.
-If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
-forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details).
-This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be used as a mask
-in conjunction with the \fBiconbitmap\fR option:  where the mask
-has zeroes no icon will be displayed;  where it has ones, the bits
-from the icon bitmap will be displayed.  If
-an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR then any current icon
-mask is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR (this is equivalent to specifying
-a bitmap of all ones).  If \fIbitmap\fR is specified
-then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise it
-returns the name of the current icon mask associated with
-\fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no mask is in effect.
-.TP
-\fBwm iconname \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewName\fR?
-.
-If \fInewName\fR is specified, then it is passed to the window
-manager;  the window manager should display \fInewName\fR inside
-the icon associated with \fIwindow\fR.  In this case an empty
-string is returned as result.  If \fInewName\fR is not specified
-then the command returns the current icon name for \fIwindow\fR,
-or an empty string if no icon name has been specified (in this
-case the window manager will normally display the window's title,
-as specified with the \fBwm title\fR command).
-.TP
-\fBwm iconphoto \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? \fIimage1\fR ?\fIimage2 ...\fR?
-.
-Sets the titlebar icon for \fIwindow\fR based on the named photo images.
-If \fB\-default\fR is specified, this is applied to all future created
-toplevels as well.  The data in the images is taken as a snapshot at the
-time of invocation.  If the images are later changed, this is not
-reflected to the titlebar icons.  Multiple images are accepted to allow
-different images sizes (e.g., 16x16 and 32x32) to be provided. The window
-manager may scale provided icons to an appropriate size.
-.RS
-.PP
-On Windows, the images are packed into a Windows icon structure.
-This will override an ico specified to \fBwm iconbitmap\fR, and
-vice versa.
-.PP
-On X, the images are arranged into the _NET_WM_ICON X property, which
-most modern window managers support.  A \fBwm iconbitmap\fR may exist
-simultaneously.  It is recommended to use not more than 2 icons, placing
-the larger icon first.
-.PP
-On Macintosh, the first image called is loaded into an OSX-native icon
-format, and becomes the application icon in dialogs, the Dock, and
-other contexts. At the
-script level the command will accept only the first image passed in the
-parameters as support for multiple sizes/resolutions on macOS is outside Tk's
-scope. Developers should use the largest icon they can support
-(preferably 512 pixels) to ensure smooth rendering on the Mac. 
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm iconposition \fIwindow\fR ?\fIx y\fR?
-.
-If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they are passed to the window
-manager as a hint about where to position the icon for \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case an empty string is returned.  If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are
-specified as empty strings then any existing icon position hint is cancelled.
-If neither \fIx\fR nor \fIy\fR is specified, then the command returns
-a Tcl list containing two values, which are the current icon position
-hints (if no hints are in effect then an empty string is returned).
-.TP
-\fBwm iconwindow \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR?
-.
-If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it is the path name for a window to
-use as icon for \fIwindow\fR: when \fIwindow\fR is iconified then
-\fIpathName\fR will be mapped to serve as icon, and when \fIwindow\fR
-is de-iconified then \fIpathName\fR will be unmapped again.  If
-\fIpathName\fR is specified as an empty string then any existing
-icon window association for \fIwindow\fR will be cancelled.  If
-the \fIpathName\fR argument is specified then an empty string is
-returned.  Otherwise the command returns the path name of the
-current icon window for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if there
-is no icon window currently specified for \fIwindow\fR.
-Button press events are disabled for \fIwindow\fR as long as it is
-an icon window;  this is needed in order to allow window managers to
-.QW own
-those events.
-Note: not all window managers support the notion of an icon window.
-.TP
-\fBwm manage \fIwidget\fR
-.
-The \fIwidget\fR specified will become a stand alone top-level window.  The
-window will be decorated with the window managers title bar, etc. Only
-\fIframe\fR, \fIlabelframe\fR and \fItoplevel\fR widgets can be used
-with this command. Attempting to pass any other widget type will raise
-an error. Attempting to manage a \fItoplevel\fR widget is benign and
-achieves nothing. See also \fBGEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwm maxsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
-.
-If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give
-the maximum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR.
-For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
-grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
-The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
-less than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR.
-If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
-specified, then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise
-it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the
-maximum width and height currently in effect.
-The maximum size defaults to the size of the screen.
-See the sections on geometry management below for more information.
-.TP
-\fBwm minsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
-.
-If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give the
-minimum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR.
-For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
-grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
-The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
-greater than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR.
-If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
-specified, then the command returns an empty string.  Otherwise
-it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the
-minimum width and height currently in effect.
-The minimum size defaults to one pixel in each dimension.
-See the sections on geometry management below for more information.
-.TP
-\fBwm overrideredirect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR?
-.
-If \fIboolean\fR is specified, it must have a proper boolean form and
-the override-redirect flag for \fIwindow\fR is set to that value.
-If \fIboolean\fR is not specified then \fB1\fR or \fB0\fR is
-returned to indicate whether or not the override-redirect flag
-is currently set for \fIwindow\fR.
-Setting the override-redirect flag for a window causes
-it to be ignored by the window manager;  among other things, this means
-that the window will not be reparented from the root window into a
-decorative frame and the user will not be able to manipulate the
-window using the normal window manager mechanisms.
-.RS
-.PP
-Note that the override-redirect flag is only guaranteed to be taken notice of
-when the window is first mapped or when mapped after the state is changed from
-withdrawn to normal. Some, but not all, platforms will take notice at
-additional times.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm positionfrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR?
-.
-If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or
-\fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
-whether \fIwindow\fR's current position was requested by the
-program or by the user.  Many window managers ignore program-requested
-initial positions and ask the user to manually position the window;  if
-\fBuser\fR is specified then the window manager should position the
-window at the given place without asking the user for assistance.
-If \fIwho\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current position
-source is cancelled.
-If \fIwho\fR is specified, then the command returns an empty string.
-Otherwise it returns \fBuser\fR or \fBprogram\fR to indicate the
-source of the window's current position, or an empty string if
-no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
-.QW "no source"
-as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR.
-Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR
-when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has
-been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR?
-.
-This command is used to manage window manager protocols such as
-\fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR.
-\fIName\fR is the name of an atom corresponding to a window manager
-protocol, such as \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR or \fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR
-or \fBWM_TAKE_FOCUS\fR.
-If both \fIname\fR and \fIcommand\fR are specified, then \fIcommand\fR
-is associated with the protocol specified by \fIname\fR.
-\fIName\fR will be added to \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR
-property to tell the window manager that the application has a
-protocol handler for \fIname\fR, and \fIcommand\fR will
-be invoked in the future whenever the window manager sends a
-message to the client for that protocol.
-In this case the command returns an empty string.
-If \fIname\fR is specified but \fIcommand\fR is not, then the current
-command for \fIname\fR is returned, or an empty string if there
-is no handler defined for \fIname\fR.
-If \fIcommand\fR is specified as an empty string then the current
-handler for \fIname\fR is deleted and it is removed from the
-\fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property on \fIwindow\fR;  an empty string is
-returned.
-Lastly, if neither \fIname\fR nor \fIcommand\fR is specified, the
-command returns a list of all the protocols for which handlers
-are currently defined for \fIwindow\fR.
-.RS
-.PP
-Tk always defines a protocol handler for \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR, even if
-you have not asked for one with \fBwm protocol\fR.
-If a \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR message arrives when you have not defined
-a handler, then Tk handles the message by destroying the window for
-which it was received.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwm resizable \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR?
-.
-This command controls whether or not the user may interactively
-resize a top-level window.  If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are
-specified, they are boolean values that determine whether the
-width and height of \fIwindow\fR may be modified by the user.
-In this case the command returns an empty string.
-If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are omitted then the command
-returns a list with two 0/1 elements that indicate whether the
-width and height of \fIwindow\fR are currently resizable.
-By default, windows are resizable in both dimensions.
-If resizing is disabled, then the window's size will be the size
-from the most recent interactive resize or \fBwm geometry\fR
-command.  If there has been no such operation then
-the window's natural size will be used.
-.TP
-\fBwm sizefrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR?
-.
-If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or
-\fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
-whether \fIwindow\fR's current size was requested by the
-program or by the user.  Some window managers ignore program-requested
-sizes and ask the user to manually size the window;  if
-\fBuser\fR is specified then the window manager should give the
-window its specified size without asking the user for assistance.
-If \fIwho\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current size
-source is cancelled.
-If \fIwho\fR is specified, then the command returns an empty string.
-Otherwise it returns \fBuser\fR or \fBwindow\fR to indicate the
-source of the window's current size, or an empty string if
-no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
-.QW "no source"
-as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwm stackorder \fIwindow\fR ?\fBisabove\fR|\fBisbelow \fIwindow\fR?
-.
-The \fBstackorder\fR command returns a list of toplevel windows
-in stacking order, from lowest to highest. When a single toplevel
-window is passed, the returned list recursively includes all of the
-window's children that are toplevels. Only those toplevels
-that are currently mapped to the screen are returned.
-The \fBstackorder\fR command can also be used to determine if one
-toplevel is positioned above or below a second toplevel.
-When two window arguments separated by either \fBisabove\fR or
-\fBisbelow\fR are passed, a boolean result indicates whether
-or not the first window is currently above or below the second
-window in the stacking order.
-.TP
-\fBwm state \fIwindow\fR ?newstate?
-.
-If \fInewstate\fR is specified, the window will be set to the new state,
-otherwise it returns the current state of \fIwindow\fR: either
-\fBnormal\fR, \fBiconic\fR, \fBwithdrawn\fR, \fBicon\fR, or (Windows and Mac
-OS X only) \fBzoomed\fR.
-The difference between \fBiconic\fR and \fBicon\fR is that
-\fBiconic\fR refers to a window that has been iconified (e.g., with the
-\fBwm iconify\fR command) while \fBicon\fR refers to a window whose only
-purpose is to serve as the icon for some other window (via the \fBwm
-iconwindow\fR command).  The \fBicon\fR state cannot be set.
-.TP
-\fBwm title \fIwindow\fR ?\fIstring\fR?
-.
-If \fIstring\fR is specified, then it will be passed to the window
-manager for use as the title for \fIwindow\fR (the window manager
-should display this string in \fIwindow\fR's title bar).  In this
-case the command returns an empty string.  If \fIstring\fR is not
-specified then the command returns the current title for the
-\fIwindow\fR.  The title for a window defaults to its name.
-.TP
-\fBwm transient \fIwindow\fR ?\fImaster\fR?
-.
-If \fImaster\fR is specified, then the window manager is informed
-that \fIwindow\fR is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working
-on behalf of \fImaster\fR (where \fImaster\fR is the
-path name for a top-level window).  If \fImaster\fR
-is specified as an empty string then \fIwindow\fR is marked as not
-being a transient window any more.  Otherwise the command
-returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current master, or an
-empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not currently a transient window.
-A transient window will mirror state changes in the master and
-inherit the state of the master when initially mapped. It is an
-error to attempt to make a window a transient of itself.
-The window manager may also decorate a transient window differently, removing
-some features normally present (e.g., minimize and maximize buttons) though
-this is entirely at the discretion of the window manager.
-.TP
-\fBwm withdraw \fIwindow\fR
-.
-Arranges for \fIwindow\fR to be withdrawn from the screen.  This
-causes the window to be unmapped and forgotten about by the window
-manager.  If the window
-has never been mapped, then this command
-causes the window to be mapped in the withdrawn state.  Not all
-window managers appear to know how to handle windows that are
-mapped in the withdrawn state.
-Note: it sometimes seems to be necessary to withdraw a
-window and then re-map it (e.g. with \fBwm deiconify\fR) to get some
-window managers to pay attention to changes in window attributes
-such as group.
-.SH "GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT"
-.PP
-By default a top-level window appears on the screen in its
-\fInatural size\fR, which is the one determined internally by its
-widgets and geometry managers.
-If the natural size of a top-level window changes, then the window's size
-changes to match.
-A top-level window can be given a size other than its natural size in two ways.
-First, the user can resize the window manually using the facilities
-of the window manager, such as resize handles.
-Second, the application can request a particular size for a
-top-level window using the \fBwm geometry\fR command.
-These two cases are handled identically by Tk;  in either case,
-the requested size overrides the natural size.
-You can return the window to its natural by invoking \fBwm geometry\fR
-with an empty \fIgeometry\fR string.
-.PP
-Normally a top-level window can have any size from one pixel in each
-dimension up to the size of its screen.
-However, you can use the \fBwm minsize\fR and \fBwm maxsize\fR commands
-to limit the range of allowable sizes.
-The range set by \fBwm minsize\fR and \fBwm maxsize\fR applies to
-all forms of resizing, including the window's natural size as
-well as manual resizes and the \fBwm geometry\fR command.
-You can also use the command \fBwm resizable\fR to completely
-disable interactive resizing in one or both dimensions.
-.PP
-The \fBwm manage\fR and \fBwm forget\fR commands may be used to
-perform undocking and docking of windows.  After a widget is managed
-by \fBwm manage\fR command, all other \fBwm\fR subcommands may be used
-with the widget.  Only widgets created using the toplevel command may
-have an attached menu via the \fB\-menu\fR configure option.  A toplevel
-widget may be used as a frame and managed with any of the other
-geometry managers after using the \fBwm forget\fR command.  Any menu
-associated with a toplevel widget will be hidden when managed by
-another geometry managers.  The menus will reappear once the window is
-managed by \fBwm\fR.  All custom bindtags for widgets in a subtree
-that have their top-level widget changed via a \fBwm manage\fR or
-\fBwm forget\fR command, must be redone to adjust any top-level widget
-path in the bindtags. Bindtags that have not been customized do not
-have to be redone.
-.SH "GRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT"
-.PP
-Gridded geometry management occurs when one of the widgets of an
-application supports a range of useful sizes.
-This occurs, for example, in a text editor where the scrollbars,
-menus, and other adornments are fixed in size but the edit widget
-can support any number of lines of text or characters per line.
-In this case, it is usually desirable to let the user specify the
-number of lines or characters-per-line, either with the
-\fBwm geometry\fR command or by interactively resizing the window.
-In the case of text, and in other interesting cases also, only
-discrete sizes of the window make sense, such as integral numbers
-of lines and characters-per-line;  arbitrary pixel sizes are not useful.
-.PP
-Gridded geometry management provides support for this kind of
-application.
-Tk (and the window manager) assume that there is a grid of some
-sort within the application and that the application should be
-resized in terms of \fIgrid units\fR rather than pixels.
-Gridded geometry management is typically invoked by turning on
-the \fBsetGrid\fR option for a widget;  it can also be invoked
-with the \fBwm grid\fR command or by calling \fBTk_SetGrid\fR.
-In each of these approaches the particular widget (or sometimes
-code in the application as a whole) specifies the relationship between
-integral grid sizes for the window and pixel sizes.
-To return to non-gridded geometry management, invoke
-\fBwm grid\fR with empty argument strings.
-.PP
-When gridded geometry management is enabled then all the dimensions specified
-in \fBwm minsize\fR, \fBwm maxsize\fR, and \fBwm geometry\fR commands
-are treated as grid units rather than pixel units.
-Interactive resizing is also carried out in even numbers of grid units
-rather than pixels.
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-Most existing window managers appear to have bugs that affect the
-operation of the \fBwm\fR command.  For example, some changes will not
-take effect if the window is already active:  the window will have
-to be withdrawn and de-iconified in order to make the change happen.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-A fixed-size window that says that it is fixed-size too:
-.CS
-toplevel .fixed
-\fBwm title\fR     .fixed "Fixed-size Window"
-\fBwm resizable\fR .fixed 0 0
-.CE
-.PP
-A simple dialog-like window, centred on the screen:
-.CS
-# Create and arrange the dialog contents.
-toplevel .msg
-label  .msg.l  \-text "This is a very simple dialog demo."
-button .msg.ok \-text OK \-default active \-command {destroy .msg}
-pack .msg.ok \-side bottom \-fill x
-pack .msg.l  \-expand 1    \-fill both
-
-# Now set the widget up as a centred dialog.
-
-# But first, we need the geometry managers to finish setting
-# up the interior of the dialog, for which we need to run the
-# event loop with the widget hidden completely...
-\fBwm withdraw\fR .msg
-update
-set x [expr {([winfo screenwidth .]\-[winfo width .msg])/2}]
-set y [expr {([winfo screenheight .]\-[winfo height .msg])/2}]
-\fBwm geometry\fR  .msg +$x+$y
-\fBwm transient\fR .msg .
-\fBwm title\fR     .msg "Dialog demo"
-\fBwm deiconify\fR .msg
-.CE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-toplevel(n), winfo(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-aspect ratio, deiconify, focus model, geometry, grid, group, icon, iconify, increments, position, size, title, top-level window, units, window manager
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End: